A bibliography of national parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River

A Bibliography

OF

National Parks and Monuments

WEST OF THE MISSISSIPPI RIVER

y X ft

VOL I

V \JL>. A

Compiled at the Western Museum Laboratories

of the National Park Service with assistance

provided by the Work Projects Administration

and the Civilian Conservation Corps.

United States

Department of the Interior

National Park Service

1941

0 REWORD

In a work of this magnitude, errors are to be expected.
The problem of maintaining uniformity has presented a major
difficulty because, since the beginning of the compilation in
1936, three different individuals have supervised the work.
Much credit is due Mrs. Hazel Hunt Voth for originally laying
out the program and directing it until her resignation in
April, 1939. Mr. Harold Gill then took charge and supervised
the project until he resigned in May, 1940. Since that time
Mr. John Benton has overseen the general operations of the
work.

It will be noted that each section has its own foreword.
This is due to the fact that a limited number of sections were
issued as separates and, since individual circumstances sur
rounded the compilation of the material in each section, these
forewords have been retained in the complete bibliography.

Dorr G. Yeager, Assistant Chief
Museum Division

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I NORTHWEST INLAND STATES

1. Bighole Battlefield National Monument

2. Craters of the Moon National Monument

3. Devils Tower National Monument

4. Glacier National Park

5. Grand Teton National Park

6. Shoshone Cavern National Monument

II PACIFIC STATES

1. Cabrillo National Monument

2. Channel Islands National Monument

3. Crater Lake National Park

4. Death Valley National Monument

5. Devil postpile National Monument

6. Joshua Tree National Monument

7. Lass en Volcanic National Park

8. Lava Beds National Monument

9. Mount Rainier National Park

10. Muir Woods National Monument

11. Olympic National Park

12. Oregon Caves National Monument

13. Pinnacles National Monument

14. Sequoia National Park

III YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK
IV YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

FOREWORD

The following references to the literature of the national
parks and monuments of the Northwest Inland area (Montana, Idaho,
and Wyoming) excluding Yellowstone National Park were gathered
by workers on a research project sponsored by the National Park
Service in collaboration with the Work Projects Administration.
These pages are to form part of a larger volume which will em
brace all national parks and monuments west of the Mississippi.

The references, in general, include material published through
1936, although there are items of more recent date. Fiction, poe
try, and maps have been excluded. Some items which were not avail
able for examination and verification of data, but which seemed val
uable, have been included. These have been marked by an asterisk,

The National Park Service is indebted to the Berkeley Public
Library and to the various libraries of the University of Califor
nia at Berkeley for cooperation in preparing thi" bibliography.

iii

NORTHWEST INLAND STATES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. BIGHOLE BATTLEFIELD NATIONAL MONUMENT

II. CRATERS OF THE MOON NATIONAL MONUMENT

III. DEVILS TOWER NATIONAL MONUMENT

IV. GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

V. GRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK

VI. SHOSHONE CAVERN NATIONAL MONUMENT

BIG HOLE BATTLEFIELD NATIONAL MONUMENT

Anonymous

1925 Big Hole Battlefield National Monument. Am. Scenic and

Hist. Preservn. Soc., 30th aim. rept., 1925:152.

Brief description of the site of the battle between Nez
Perce Indians and government troops in 1877.

Arnold, R. Ross.

1932 Nez Perce War. In his: Indian wars of Idaho, pp. 105-

65, illus. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton.

History of the revolt of the Nez Perce against the govern
ment in 1877, and an account of the battle at Big Hole where the
Indians under Chief Joseph were defeated by troops under General
Gibbon.

Chittenden, Hiram M.

1895 Indian campaign through the Yellowstone Park. In his:

Yellowstone National Park, pp. 110-26.

The story of General Gibbon's desperate battle with the
Nez Perce and succeeding campaigns in 1877.

Dunn, J. P.

1886 (The Battle of the Big Hole]. In his: Massacres of the
mountains, p. 652. New York, Harper.

Gibbon, John.

1877 N0.3-A. Report of Colonel Gibbon. Rept. of Sec'y. of

War, 1877-78, 1:68-71. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Colonel Gibbon, commanding the troops at the Big Hole,
gives a detailed account of the battle against Nez Perce.

Judson, Katherine B.

1912 Battle of the Big Hole. In her: Montana, the land of

shining mountains, pp. 140-45. Chicago, HcClurg.

Between Nez Perce and government troops, 1877.

Leeson, Michael A., ed.

1885 Beginning of the Big Hole troubles. In: History of Montana,

1739-1885, pp. 141-43. Chicago, Vferner , Beers and co .

Casualties suffered and aid rendered by the Montana volun
teers in the battle with the Nez Perce tribe at Big Hole in 1877.

United States. National Park Service.

1917 Big Hole Battlefield National Monument. In; General in
formation regarding national monuments set aside under Act
of Congress approved June 8, 1908, pp. 69-70. U.S. Dept.
Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Votii, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 Big Hole Battlefield National Monument. In: Guide to

national parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River,
p. 55. Berkeley, Calif., U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.
Specifies location, area, and date of establishment. Lists

and describes principal features; gives historical, data.

CRATERS OF THE MOON NATIONAL MONUMENT

Anonymous

1924 Among the "Craters of the Moon" — in Idaho. Lit. Dig.,

81:40-42, 44 (Ap.12) , illus. , map.

General description of the volcanic craters, cinder cones,
and other geological features of the region.

1924 "Craters of the Moon". Sci . , n.s., 59, Supp. :XII(June 13).
Note on the establishment of the monument and its features.

1925 Craters of the Moon National Monument. Am. Scenic and
Hist. Preservn. Soc. ,30th Ann. rept., 1925:149-50.

1928 "Craters of the Moon" enlarged. Am. forests and forest
Life, 34:562 (Sept.) .

1939 [Craters of the Moon National Monument.]. In: A preliminary
report on the parks, parkways and recreational areas of
Idaho, pp. 19-21, illus. Berkeley, Calif., U.S. Dept.Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. (for the Idaho State Forestry Dept.).
General description and geological features of monument.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 "Craters of the Moon." In their: Oh, Ranger!, p. 166.
Stanford Univ. (Calif.), press.

Asmus , Edna I.

1937 Craters of the Moon National Monument. Travel, 69: [40]-

42,49-50 (July) , illus.

Description of volcanic craters and other features.

Fenneman, Neviri M.

1931 Snake River Plain. In his: Physiography of western United

States, pp. 238-44, illus. New York, McGraw-Hill.

Discusses the physiography of the area around monument.

Jones, E.W.

1888 Some wonders of Idaho. Hist. Soc . So. Calif. Pubs. ,1:23-29.

Limber t, R. W.

1924 Among the "Craters of the Moon." Natl. geog. mag., 45:303-

28 (Mar.), illus., map.

Descriptive account of first expedition to the area.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Merriam, C. Hart, and Stejneger, Leonhard

1891 Results of a biological reconnaissance of south-central

Idaho. U.S. Dept. Agric., Bur. Biol. Surv. , No. Am. fauna,
5, 127 pp., illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Annotated list of mammals , birds, reptiles, and batrachians

in the general vicinity of the present monument.

Muttkowski , R. M.

1926 Valley of the Moon. In: Naturalist's guide to the Americas

(Victor E. Shelford, ed.). p. 253. Baltimore, Williams

and Wilkins.

Russell, Israel C.

1902 Geology and water resources of the Snake River plains of

Idaho. 57th U.S. Cong., 1st sess., House doc. 697, 192 pp.,
illus. (ser. no. 4369). Washington, Govt. print, off.
Includes descriptions of cinder cones, and other volcanic

phenomena around present craters of the Moon National Monument .

Stearns, Harold T.

1924 Craters of the Moon National Monument. Geog. rev., 14:

362-72 (July), illus., map.

Cinder crags, craters, natural bridges, and other geological
features, notes on geological history.

1928 The "Craters of the Moon" in Idaho. Geog. jour., 71:{_43]-
49- (Jan.), illus., map.
Its geological formations, topography, and tree molds.

1928a Craters of the Moon National Monument, Idaho Bur. Mines and

Geol., Bui. 13, 57 pp., illus.

Discusses types of lava and cones, bombs, tree molds, caves,
fauna and flora; Indian history and early explorations.

Stearns, Norah D.

1928 Exploring the Craters of the Moon, Idaho. Geog. Soc . Phi la. ,

Bui., 26:[278]-90 (Oct.), illus.

Geological history and description.

Tolson, Hillory A. , cornp.

1933 [Legislation relating to Craters of the Moon National Monu
ment.]. In: Laws relating to the National Paries Service, the
national parks and monuments , pp. 317-18. U.S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Includes both fedorol and state legislation. A supplement

covers legislation up to July 1, 1936.

CRATERS OF THE MOON NATIONAL MONUMENT

United States. National Park Service.

£1930] Crater of the Moon National Monument. In: Glimpses of our

National monuments, pp. 16-18. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl .

Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 Craters of the Moon National Monument. In: Guide to nat
ional parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p,
52. Berkeley, Calif., U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park. Serv.

Yard, Robert S.

1931 Craters of the Moon National Monument. In: National Parks
portfolio, p. 268, Sixth ed. , illus . U. S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

DEVILS TOlffiR NATIONAL MONUM3NT

Anonymous

1896 Devil's Tower in the Black Hills. Stone, 12:585-6 {May).

W.B. Rogers ascent, 1893, (from Spear fish, S.D. Mail).
* ^

1919 The Devil's Tower. Am. boy, 20:5 (Ap.).

1924 A natural sky-scraper. St. Nicholas, 52:206 (Dec.), illus.
Description of Devils Tower ; Indian legend of its origin.

1925 Devil's Tower National Monument. Aia. Scenic and Hist.
Preservn. Soc. , 30th Ann. rept., 1925:172-73.

1937 Man climbs Devils Tower without scaling ladders. Sci. .
news letter, 32:104 (Aug. 14).

Notes on ascent of Devils Tower by Alpine Club members.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 The Devils Tower. In their: Oh, Ranger!, pp. 164-65.
Stanford Univ. (Calif.), press.

*Bartlett, IchabodS., ed.
1918 History of Wyoming. Chicago, S.J. Clark pub. co. , 3 vs.

Brady, F. H.

1930 Minnelusa formation near Beulah, Wyoming. Bui, geol. soc.
of Am. ,v.41-no.l (Mar.) pp. 175-6.

Buel, Janes W.

1894 [Devil's Tower, Wyoming.]. In: Africa's wonderlands , pp.
302-06, illus. Vancouver, B.C., J.M. McGregor.

Butterworth, Harrison

1938 Second ascent of Devilfs Tower. Appalachia, n.s., 4:202-
06 (Dec.) , illus.

Carpenter, Franklin R.

1888 [TJevils Tower; geological notes.], Dakota School of Mines,

Preliminary report upon the geology, resources and mills

of the Black Hills of Dakota, p. 50.

Coveney, Lawrence G.

1937 Ascent of Devil's Tower, [By Coveney, Wiessner, and House,
June 20,1937], Appalachia, n.s., 3:477-85 (Dec*).

NORTHWEST INLAND

Cross , Whitman

1898 Phonolite (from Black Hills, South Dakota). U.S. Geol.

Surv., Bui. 150:191-94, Washington, Govt. print, off.

Includes a brief reference to Devils Tower.

Darton, Nelson H. , and O'Hara, C.C.

1907 Devils Tower folio. U.S. Geol. Surv., Geol. atlas of the

U. S. , 150, 9 p. , map.

Study of Devils Tower quadrangle; 4 geological maps.

Darton, Nelson H.

1909 Devil's Tower. U. S. Geol. Surv., Prof. pap. 65:68-69,
illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.

D' Emery, Charles

1927 The Devil's Tower.- Mentor 15:60-61 (July), illus.

Dutton, C. E., and Schwartz , G. M.

1936 Notes on the jointing of the Devil's Tower, Wyoming. Jour.

of geol., 44:717-28 (Aug. -Sept .), illus.

The peripheral, radial, and up-curving jointing system.

Effinger, William L.

1934 A report on the geology of Devil's Tower National Monument.

Berkeley, (Calif.), U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.,14pp.

illus., map, bibliog.

Eramons , Earl H.

1921 The sneezeless land of Dacotah. Am. forestry, 27:503-09

(Aug.) , illus.

Includes description of Devil's Tower.

Ewers , John C .

1938 Teton Dakota ethnology and history. U.S. Dept. Int.,

Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, (Calif.), 29 pp.

The tribe once ranged Devils Tower region.

Faris, John T.

1930 [Devils Tower National Monument.]. In his: Roaming the
Rockies, pp. 308-10. New York, Farrar and Rine hart.

Fenneman, Nevin M.

1931 [Devils Tower.] In his: Physiography of western United
States, p. 84. New York, McGraw-Hill.

Jaggar, Thomas A., jr.

1901 Mato Tepee [Devils Tower]. U. S. Geol. Surv., 21st Ann.

rept., pt. 111:258-66, illus. Washington, Govt. print, off,

DEVILS TOWER NATIONAL MONUMENT

Johnson, Clifton

1922 [Devils Tower]. In his: What to see in America, p. 366.
New York, Macmillan.

Joyner, Newell F.

1934 Devils Tower. Appalachia, 20:216-18 (Dec.), illus.

Description; account of Ripley and Roger's ascent, 1893.

[Moran, Thomas]

1894 A journey to the Devils Tower in Wyoming. Century mag.,
47:450-55 (Jan.), illus.

Newton, Henry

1880 The Near Lodge (Mato Teepee). Report on the geology and
resources of the Black Hills of Dakota. U.S. Dept . Int.,
U. S. geog. and geol. surv. of the Rocky Mountain region,
pp. 200-02. Washington, Govt. print, off.

O'Harra, C.C., joint author. See: Darton, Nelson H. , 1907.

Pirsson, Louis V.

1894 On some phonolitic rocks from the Black Hills. Am. jour,

sci., 3d ser., 47:341-46 (May).

Contains description of the igneous rocks of Devils Tower.

1898 Asymetric laccoliths. In: Igneous Rocks [Black Hills of
South Dakota]. In-: Eighteenth annual report of the U.S.
Geol. Survey to the Sec. of the Int., 1896-7. Part III,
Economic Geology, pp. 581-2. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Reference to Devil's Tower, whose vertical walls were made
by the columnar structure of a mass which formerly was of much
greater lateral extension and possibly of laccolithic form.

Quinn, Vernon

1923 [Devils Tower, Wyoming.]. In his: Beautiful America, pp.46,
288, New York, F. A. Stokes.

Richardson, G.B.

1903 Upper red beds of the Black Hills. Chicago Univ. press,
jour, of geol., v.2, (Sept. -Oct.) pp. 365-93, illus., map.

Russell, Israel C.

1896 Igneous intrusions in the neighborhood of the Black Hills

of Dakota. Jour, of geol., 4:23-43 (Jan. -Feb.), illus.

Includes geological description of Devils Tower.

Schwartz, G. M. , joint author. See: Dutton, C. E. , 1936.

NORTHWEST INLAND

[Scott, John W.]

1926 National monuments in Wyoming. In: Naturalist »s guides to

the Americas. (Victor E. Shelford, ed.), pp. 533-4,

Baltimore, Williams and Wilkins.

Includes a description of Devils Tower.

Taylor, Frank J. , joint author. See: Albright, Horace M., 1928.

United States. National Park Service

1917 Devils Tower National Monument. In; General information
regarding the national monuments set aside under the Act
of Congress, approved June 8, 1908, pp. 13-15, map. U. S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washir^ton, Govt. print, off.

[1930] Devils Tower National Monument. In; Glimpses of our nation
al monuments, pp. 18-20. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others

1938 Devils Tower National Monument. In: Guide to national parks

and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 94. Berkele;

(Calif.), U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.

Location, area, date of establishment, features, «tc.

*Warren, G. K.
1875 Explorations in Nebraska and Dakota in 1855,1856, and 1857.

U.S. War Dept., Ann. rept., 1858, v. 2.
*

Yard, Robert S.

1919 Devils Tower National Monument. In his: The book of the
national parks, pp. 411-12, illus. New York, Scribner's.

1920 Natural and historic national monuments. Art. and archeol.
10:55-63 (July-Aug. ), illus.

Includes brief description of Devils Tower.

1931 Devils Tower National Monument. In his: The national parks
portfolio, p. 257, Sixth ed. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park
Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

A BIBLIOGRAPHY"

of
GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,

Description, Administration,

and Maintenance) -------------- 3

FAUNA - - - 21

FLORA - - - -25

GEOLOGY --27

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

GENERAL

Description, History, Travel, etc,

Anonymous
*n.d. Glacier National Park, walking tours. Great Northern R.R.

*n.d. With the "Mountaineers" in Glacier National Park. Great
Northern Railway.

n.d. Glacier National Park. [n.p., Great Northern Railway, 29
pp. ,] illus.
Excellent photographic views of Glacier Park.

n.d. Glacier National park. 48 pp., illus.

Forty-eight photographs of park scenery; explanatory notes.

1896 Mountain climbing in Montana. Pop. sci. mo., 48:861 (Ap.).
Mountaineering expedition in the park.

1910 Glacier National Park. World today, 19:1051-54 (Oct.) , ill us,
Descriptive note and photographic views.

1910 The Glacier National Park of Montana. Independent, 68:
[1212]-13 (June 2), illus.

1910 The proposed Glacier National Park. Outlook, 94:826(Ap.l6) .
General description of the area.

*[1912] Journal of the annual summer excursion... [to the park].
Geographic Soc. of Chicago.

1912 Glacier National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn. Soc.,
17th ann. rept . , 1912:258-59, illus.

*1912 Glacier National Park. Metropolitan nag., ( June) :41-44.

1914 Glacier National Park. Independent, 78:375-76 (June) , illus.
Itinerary for trip from New York; information on expenses.

1914 Naming of Lake Ellen Wilson. . . . [in honor of President Wil
son's wife]. Am. forestry, 20:510,(Ap.) .

Anonymous ( Cont . ) .
*1915 A week in Glacier National Park. Hotel mo. ,23:42-61(Aug. ) .

1916 The Glacier National Park. Special characteristics: un
surpassed Alpine scenery; 250 lakes of particular beauty.
Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn. Soc., 21st ann. rept., 1916:
679-82.

*1917 Glacier National Park. Northwestern motorist, 2:22-24(May)

*1917 Alpine scenery surpassed in the Glacier National Park.
Albatross, 6:9-10 (May).

1917 Glacier National Park. Pan Am. Union, Bui. ,44:499-507
(Ap.) , illus.

1917 Indian summer days. Northwestern Motorist , 2:9(0ct.).
*

1917 The park of alpine majesty. Ladies'home jour . ,34: 22-5 (May)

*1917

* _____
1918

*1918

* _____

1919

1919

*1919

1923
1925

1929

1929

Glacier National Park of inspirations. Railway and marine
news , 15 :( June ) .

Amid western crags, Motor travel, 10: 35 (July),

In Glacier National Park. Outers' book — recreation,
58:25 (July).

Glacier National Park. Pacific travel, 1:9 (Sept.).

Geyser to glaciers motor trail. Outing, 74:302 (Aug.).
The 300-mile scenic highway connecting with Yellowstone.

Glacier National Park. Pacific Travel,!: 9 (Sept.).
Glacier National Park. Country life,44:124(Sept . ) , illus.

Glacier National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn.
Soc,, 30th ann. rept., 1925:152.

Nature magazine arranges a tour to Glacier Park.... Nat.
mag., 13:238-39 (Ap.), illus.
Prospectus of a tour of the park.

On to Glacier Park. Nature mag., 14:36 (July), illus.
Brief descriptions of the attractions of the park.

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
General

Anonymous

1929 Place names of Glacier National Park and vicinity. Gla-

1935 cier nat. notes (Glacial drift), 2:13 ( June) ; 23 (July) ;
33(Aug.); 40(Sept.); 51(0ct . ) ;3:57( June) ; 5:9( Jan. -Feb. ) ;
21(Mar.-Ap.): 29(May) ; 67 (Nov. -Dec. ) ; 7:20-21(Ap. )' ; 8:8
(Jan.) ;24 (Ap.).

1931 Museum glacier. Nature mag., 18:202 (Oct.).
Notes discovery of small glacier on Mount Clements.

1932 The conception of the educational service. Glacial drift
5:18 (Mar.-Ap.), illus .

Notes inception of educational work in national parks.

1936 Museums at Glacier. Nature mag., 28:383 (Dec.).
Notes on projected museums.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 Glacier National Park. In their: Oh, Ranger I pp. 31,34,

44,47,53,54,57,61,86,122,147, Stanford Univ. (Calif.)

press .

*Allen, Edward F.
1913 Greatness of Glacier National Park. Travel, 20:8-13(Ap.) .

Allen, Edward F. , cocip. and ed.

1915 Glacier National Park. In his: A guide to the national

parks of America, pp. 80-121, illus., map. New York, Mc-

Bride, Nast and co.

General description and information for toxirists.

Ayres, H. B.

1900 Lewis and Clark Forest reserve, Montana. U.S. Geol. Surv. ,

21st ann. rept. , 1900:35-80. Washington, Govt. print, off.

This reserve borders Glacier National Park on the south.

Bailey, H. E.

1934 The Many Glacier exhibit. Glacial drift, 7:27-28 (June).
Geology, flora, fauna, etc., of the tent museum.

Beals, Ralph L.

1935 History of Glacier National Park with particular emphasis
on the northern developments. Berkeley, Calif., U.S. Dept.
Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 27 pp., bibliog.

A succinct account of the activities of the northern fur
trade and those phases of Canadian history touching upon this area.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Bedell , Mary C .

1924 [Glacier National Park.] In her: Modern gypsies, pp. 197-
205, illus. New York, Brentano's.

*Blakeslee, F. G.
c!927 A tourist in the Rockies.

Includes material on Glacier National Park of interest to
tourists: accommodations, transportation, special scenic features.

Blanchard, C. J.

1918 Man-made playgrounds. Ani. forestry, 24:5-12 (Jan.), illus.

Recommends using lakes of the park as reservoirs without
impairing their scenic value.

*Bonner, James
1917 To Lake Angus McDonald. Northwestern motorist ,2:16-8 (Aug.]

*Breitenstern, A. J.
1917 The park-to-park highway. New West, 8:17-20 (May).

*Bushnell, Byron
1917 Where America's backbone is highest. Minnesotan, (Jan),

Campbell, Marius R.

1914 The Glacier National Park; a popular guide to its geology

and scenery. U.S. Geol. Surv. , Bui. 600, 54pp., illus.,

maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Contains many excellent photographs of park scenery.

1914 Origin of the scenic features of the Glacier National Park.
U.S. Dept . Int. ,42 pp., illus., map. Washington, Govt.
print, off.
Geological history and topography fully discussed.

[Carter , William A. ]

1910 The new Glacier National Park. Sierra Club, Bui. 7:225-28

( JuneJ illus .

Senator Carter's speech in Congress favoring establishment
of the park; general description of the region.

*Chalmers, (Mrs.) A.F.

1917 Thru Glacier National Park for $1.39 a day. Ladies home
jour. 34:65-66 (May).

*Chapman, W. 0.
n.d. Diary of an amateur explorer in Glacier National Parkfl91l],

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
General

^Christy, BogardH.]

1916 The roof -tree of the continent. St. Nicholas, 43:744-
49 (June) , ill us.

Contains a general description of the park.

Clyde, Norman

1951 An ascont of Mt. Cleveland. Glacial drift, 4:2-3(Jan.).

1924 First ascent of Mount Wilbur [in Glacier National Park.]
Sierra Club, Bui. ,12: [4]-6, illus.

1925 Ascent of Mount Merritt . Sierra Club, Bui., 12:[165]-67.

1929 Wanderings afoot in Glacier Park, Montana. Glacier nat,

1930 notes, 2:45-47 (Oct.); 54-56 (Nov.); 62-66 (Dec.); 3:6-7
(Jan.); 17-18 (Feb.).

1932 Mt. Gould. Glacial drift, 5:62-63 (Nov. -Dec.), illus.

Cromwell, Frederick A.

1917 A knapsack and a pair of legs [in the park.] Outing, 69:
708-15, (Mar.), illus.

*Curry, John A.

1917 Yellowstone -Glacier bee-line highway. Northwestern motor
ist, 2:16-17 (Sept.).

Daniels , Mark

1916 Glacier National Park. Am. forestry, 22:397-404 (July).
General description and historical notes.

Dean, William H.

1916 Advertising America. Outing, 68:461-69 (Aug.), illus.
Brief description of the park.

Df Evelyn, M. 1..

1933 The Going-to-the-Sun Highway. Glacial drift, 6:22-24 (Aug.)
Description of the highway and the region it traverses.

1934 Over Rod Eagle Pass. Glacial drift, 7:17-19 (Ap.).
Account of an arduous trip over this historic Indian pass

that leads from Flathead Lake to upper St. Mary by way of Nyack Val
ley. Led by Hamilton, the party was seeking a railroad route, 1858.

1934 Self -guiding trails. Glacial drift, 7:26 (June).

NORTHWEST INLAND

D'Evelyn, M. N. (continued)

1935 The Miche-l'febun country. Glacial drift, 4:43-44 (Oct.).
A little -known valley in the northern part of the park.

Elrod, Morton J.

1924 Elrod' s guide and book of information on Glacier National
Park. Missoula, Mont., the author, 208 pp., illus., maps.

[Elrod, Morton J.]

1926 Glacier National Park. In: Naturalist's guide to the Amer
icas. (Victor E. Shelford, ed.) pp. 539-40, Baltimore, Wilr
liatn.3 and Wilkins.

Elrod, Morton J.

1931 Mountain climbing in Glacier. Glacial drift, 4:12-15(Feb-
Mar.); 22-24(Ap.-May) ; 33-34( June) ; 62-63(Sept . ) ; 72-73
(Oct.), illus. (Reprinted from Sunday Missoulian, Jan. 27, 1929

*Evans , A.

1919 Fable and fact[in the park]. Field and stream, 23 :688-9( Jan. )

Evans , Perry

1925 Comparing Glacier National Park with the high Sierra.
Sierra Club, bul., 12:[lll]-20, illus.

Evarts, Hal G.

1923 Timberline trails [in Glacier National Park], Sat. eve.
post, 195:17, 78, 81-82 (Jan. 20), illus.

1923a The mountain wilderness [of Glacier National Park]. Sat.
eve. post, 195:16-17, 76, 78, 81, 84 (Jan. 27), illus.

Far is , John T.

1920 [Glacier National Park.] In his: Seeing the Far West,
pp. 174-p75], Philadelphia, J. 3. Lippincott .

1930 [Glacier National Park.] In his: Roaming the Rockies,
pp. 47-80, illus., New York, Farrar and Rinehart.

Fast , August

1923 Hiking through Glacier National Park. Trail and timber-
line, 55:2-5 (Ap.), illus.

Fenton, Carroll L.

1934 Seeing nature in Glacier National Park. Recreation, 28:
138-40, 164-65 (June), illus.

8

Ferguson, Melville F.

1925 On Glacier National Park's dizzy trails. In his: Motor
camping on western trails, pp. 87-100, New York, Century.

Frothinghan , Robert.

1932 Glacier National Park. In his: Trails through the golden
west, pp. 206-16, New York, McBride.

Fullerton, Aubrey.

1919 Anglo-American playgrounds. Bellman, 26: 263-5 (Mar. 8 ) ,illus.

Glacier, and Waterton Lakes Park, Canada; administration notes.

Gage, Earle W.

1922 Where are you going on your vacation? One suggestion is Gla
cier.... Illus. world, 37: 552-54, 618, 620, 638 ( June ), ill us.

Gibson, Willis.

1914 A little history of Glacier National Park. Mountaineer, 7: 9-15.
Indian and pioneer exploration and occupation.

1917 Glacier National Park in wartime. Western mag. ,10:176-8(Dec.) .

Graham, Stephen.

1922 Tramping with a poet* in the Rockies. New York, Appleton,
279 pp., illus.

Grant, Madison.

1919 Early history of Glacier National Park, Montana. U. S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 12 pp., bibliog. ,' Washington,

Govt. print, off.

1925 The beginnings of Glacier National Park. In: Hunting and
conservation (George B. Grinnell and Charles Sheldon, eds. ),
pp. 446-70', --ill-us. , bibliog., New Haven, Yale Univ. press.

Greeley, Alfred W.

1908 The crown of the continent; a new national park in Montana
which sends its waters into three oceans; its thirteen gla
ciers and many peaks. World's work, 16:10248-53(May) , illus .

Grinnell, George B.

1885-6 To the walled in lakes. Forest and stream, (Fifteen short

installments appearing weekly frou Deceuber 10 to March 18) .

Hunting, fishing, exploring, in the region of present park.

1898 Northern Rocky Mountain glaciers. Sci., n. s., 8:711-12,
(Nov. 18).

NORTHWEST INLAND

Grinnell, George B.

1899 The glaciers in Montana. Sci. Am. supp. ,48:19854 (Sept. 23).

1901 Crown of the continent. Century mag. ,62: 660-72 (Sept .) ,illus.
Through Glacier Park country with a pack train.

1929 The king of mountains and how it beckoned explorers to the
country that is now Glacier National Park. Am. forests,
35:487-93 (Aug.), illus.
Description, history, and establishment; Chief Mountain.

Hanson, L. C.

1932 Bench Lake. Glacial drift, 5:34 (June), illus.

Geology, vegetation, and fauna of this hard-to-reach lake.

Harvey, George H. , jr.

1925 Our first Sierra Club outing. Sierra Club, Bui. ,12:158-62.

Hilger, David.

1929 Who's who in Glacier National Park history. Glacier nat.

notes, 2:32 (Aug.) .

Senator Thomas H. Carter ^ 1854-1 911) worked to create the parl

Holtz, Mathilde E., and Bemis, Katharine I.

1917 Glacier National Park; its trails and treasures. New York,

Doran , 263 pp . , map .

Full description of the park and its tourist accomodations .
Separate chapter on lakes , glaciers, flower fields; three on Indians.

Holzinger, John M.

1910 Lake McDonald and vicinity. Am. Bur. of Geog., Bui,, Ij
280-95 (Sept.) , illus.

Hornaday, William T.

1910 America's next great playground: Glacier Park in northwest
ern Montana. Recreation, 31:211-16 (May).

1914 Glacier National Park. Mentor, 2:2-11 (June), illus.
Descriptive, with six photographs.

Huber, Walter L.

1924 A short trip in Glacier National Park. Sierra Club, Bui.,
12:34-36, illus.

James, George Wharton.

1915 On the roof of the continent— the Glacier National Park....
In:0ur American wonderlands , pp. 214-20, illus. .Chicago .McClurg.

10

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
*

General

Jeffers, LeRoy.

1922 Rambles in Glacier National Park. In his: The call of the
mountains, pp. 35-39, illus., New York, Dodd, Mead.

Johnson, Clifton.

1922 (Glacier National Park.) In his: What to see in America,
pp. 343-51, illus, New York, Macmillan.

King , Everett .

1919 Glacier National Park. Overland mo.,2d s. ,73:l-8( Jan. ) ,illus .

*Klussman, Henry

1922 A trip to the northwest by automobile; touring Yellowstone
and Glacier parks, 61 pp., Toledo, Toledo Typesetting Co.

i
Laut , Agnes C .

1914 Switzerlands in America. Am. forestry, 20 : 839-57 ( Dec. ), illus.

1926 Wonderland of the great Northwest (Glacier), Travel, (five
articles, January through May; description, hi story, Indians.

1926a Enchanted trails of Glacier National Park. New York, Mc-
Bride, 251 pp. , illus.

1926b [The visit of the Upper Missouri Historical Expedition to
the park in 1925.] In hfcr: The blazed trail of the old

frontier, pp. 209-210, New York, McBride.
*

1928 Enchanted trails of Glacier Park. World rev. ,6: 278-9 (June 4).

Lawrence, E. I.

1927 A vacation trip through Glacier National Park. Sierra Club,
Bui., 12:115-20, illus.

Lincoln, Robert P.

1913 The kingdom of eternal hills [Glacier National Park], Forest
and stream, 80:361-63 (Mar. 22); 393-95(Mar .29) , illus.

Lytle, Horace J.

1915 Camping out in Glacier National Park. Travel, 25:9-12,67,
69, 71, 73 (May), illus.

Manner ing, Mitchell.

1912 The new Glacier National Park. National mag. ,37:68-76,
(Oct.) , illus.

11

NORTHWEST INLAND

Marshall, L.

1916 (Glacier National Park.). In his: Seeing America, pp. 193-20
Philadelphia.

Mather, Stephen.

1920 The story of Glacier National Park. Mid-Pacific mag., 20:
146-49 (Aug.) , illus,

Matteson, Sumner W.

1904 A mountain-climbing vacation. Country life, 6:47-50, 60-

61 (May), illus.

A hiking trip to Sperry Glacier in Glacier National Park.

*Mayvier, John.

1912 To Switzerland by way of Montana. See America First, 1:15-
17 (May- June).

Mazza, John T.

1925 The Sierra Club ascent of Mount Cleveland. Sierra Club,
Bui., 12:156-57, illus.

McClintock, Walter.

1910 The old North Trail, or, Life, legends and religions of the

Blackfeet Indians. London, Macmillan, 539 pp. , illus. , map.

Contains 200 photos, 8 paintings illustrative of the tribe.

Mills, Enos A.

1912 The Rocky Mountain region. Country life ,22: 25-30, 46 (Aug. ) .

1917 Glacier National Park. In his: Your national parks, pp.
148-160, illus., New York, Houghton Mifflin.

Mitchell, Guy E.

1910 A new playground for the nation. Ain. rev. of rev., 41:710-
17 (June), illus., map.

1910a Land gift to wild animals (Glacier National Park). Tech.
world mag., 14:287-94 (Nov.), illus.

1910b New national park. Natl. geog. mag., 21:215-23(Mar .) , illus.

Educational and recreational values; description of new park
*

1918 Unknown wonders of Glacier National Park. Travel, 31: 5-9 (May)

Mooney Thomas .

1932 International Peace Park. Glacial drift, 5:32-33 (June).

Establishment and dedication of this park — Waterton Glacier.

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
General

Muir, John.

1898 The wild parks and forest reservations of the west. Atlan
tic mo., 81:15-28 (Jan.).
Includes descriptions of Lake McDonald and Avalanche Lake.

Murphy, Thomas D.

1925 Glacier National Park; the land of shining mountains. In his

Seven Wonderlands of the American West, pp. 251-94, illus.,

Boston, Page.

Nettleton, Lulie.

1915 Climbing the Rockies of Glacier National Park. Mazarna, 4:

34-37 (Dec.) , illus.

A ten-day excursion of the Mountaineer Club.

Olyphant , Murray.

1923 Tramping through mountain wonderlands. Independent, 110:
376 (June 9) , illus.

Pack, Arthur N.

1929 A question of taste; the double lure of mineral water.
Nature mag., 12:147-51 (Mar.), illus.

Notes on a camera hunt in the park and in Canada, 1928.

Pack, Arthur N. and Pack, Eleanor B.

1928 Camera hunting on the continental divide. Nature mag., 11:

9-15 (Jan.); 80-94 (Feb.); 149-52 (Mar.); 12:21-25 (July),

illus.

The Pack-Finley camera expedition in the park and in Canada.

Paige, George N.

1930 The fire protection organization. Glacier National Park
nat. notes, 3:72-73 (Sept.).

Outlines the methods used; gives statistics on fires.

Parsons, Marion R.

1924 The Glacier. . .outing. Mountaineer, 7:17-41, illus., map.

*Paulson, B.
1918 Y-G bee-line— now a motor trail. Moror, 30:78 (May).

Pat &r son, Laura H.

1917 With t/ie Prairie Club in Glacier Park. Manama, 5:154-58
(Dec.) , illus .

13

NORTHWEST INLAND

*Pilley, Dorothy E.

1931 Among the crevasses in Glacier National Park. Teacher, 48:
442-43 (Feb.).

Purapelly, Raphael.

1918 Northern transcontinental survey... [in and near the park].
In his: My reminiscences, pp. 624-46, map, New York, Holt.

Quinn, Vernon.

1923 Glacier National Park. In his: Beautiful .Aiaerica, pp. 229-
237, New York, Stokes.

Reed, George W.

1951 Ptarmigan Wall Trail construction. Glacial drift ,4: 61, (Sept.
Construction of the 183-foot tunnel through the famous wall.

1932 A tunnel for saddle horses. Sci. Am., 146 : 358 ( June ) ,illus.
Reports cutting of tunnel through the rock of Ptarmigan Wall

Rinehart, Mary Roberts.

1916 Through Glacier National Park with Howard Eaton. Colliers,
57:11-13, 34-36 (Ap.22) ; 20-21, 26-28 (Ap.29), illus.

A horseback tour of the park with the famous guide, Eaton.
(Issued 1928 as book, "Through Glacier Park; seeing America first

with Howard Eaton."
*

1916a On the trail in wonderland. Wide-world mag. ,( Oct. to Dec.)

Three -part article on the park.
*

1917 Tenting tonight. Cosmopolitan, May, June.

1918 Tenting tonight. New York, Houghton Mif flirt., 188 pp., illus.
Karat ive of adventures in Glacier and in the Cascades.

1934 The call of the mountains. In: Picturesque America (J. F.
Kane, ed.), pp. 161-63, illus., New York, Union lib. arsn.

*Robinson, L. F.
1915 Touring in Glacier Park. Countryside mag., 20: -356 (June).

Rolfe, Mary A.

1928 Glacier National Park. In her: Our national parks, book

2:197-242, Chicago, Saiiborn.

For juvenile readers.

Ruhle, G. C.

1933 Logan Pass Indian ceremony. Glacial drift , 6; 24-5, 29(Aug.).
Elaborate three-tribe peace pact; Salish,Kootenai,Blackfeet .

14

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
General

St. George, Hilda C.

1914 A stagecoach trip through Glacier National Park. Overland
mo.} 63:599-603 (June), illus.

Sanders, Helen F.

1909 The Glacier Park. Overland mo.,2d s. ,53: 495-501, (June) , illus.

1910 [Glacier National Park. ] In her: Trails through western
woods, pp. 229-311, London, Everett and co.

Sargent , R. II.

1911 Through Glacier... Park. Travel, 17 : 342-6, 351 (May ), illus.
Three summers mapping the park region for the U. S. G. S.

Saunders, Charles F.

1937 The Great Northern route. In his: Finding the worthwhile
in California, pp. 20-21, 2d ed. , New York, McBride.

Savage, H. K.

1914 Glacier. ..Park highway Reclamation rec. , 172-3 (May), map.

Saylor, Henry N.

1925 Timbei-line trails. Country life, 48:45-7 (Aug.), illus.
Personal experiences on a camping trip in the park.

Schmeckebier , L. F.

1912 Our national parks. Natl. geog. mag., 23:531-79( June ) , illus.

Schultz, James W.

1897 The glaciers of Montana. Alpine jour., 18:354 (Feb.).

1901 Winter hunting of goat and sheep in the Rockies. Outing,
37:413-18 (Jan.), illus.

Scoyen, Eivind T.

1935 Twenty-five years of [park] history. Glacial drift ,14: 18(Ap. ).
Legislative and other steps toward establishment ;management .

Smith, George 0.

1909 The nationfs playgrounds. Am. rev. of rev., 40:44-48
(July) , illus. , map.

Smith, Katherine L.

1908 An ice playground for tourists. Harper's weekly, 52 :26( Dec. ).

1909 For a national park. Technical world, 11: 642-4 ( Aug. ), illus .
Plea for preserving the Glacier region as a national park.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Smith, Katherine L.

1913 Glacier Park and its wonders. Harper's weekly, 57 :15(Ap. 26} .

1914 Glacier National Park. Outlook, 108 : 478 -83 (Oct. 28 ), illus.

Sperry, Lyman B.

1896 Avalanche Basin, Montana Rockies. Appalachia, 8:57-69

(Jan. ) , illus .

Tells of two trips to area in 1895; historical notes.

*Steele, David M.

1917 Glacier National Park. In his: Going abroad overland,
pp. 92-101, New York, Putnam.

Steele , Ruf us .

1915 The son who showed his father. Sunset ,34: 473-85 (Mar .), illus.

Stephens, Isaac I.

1855 Narrative and final report of explorations for a route for
a Pacific railroad. . .from St. Paul to Puget Sound. U. S.
War Dept . , Reports of explorations and surveys, 12, bk. 1,
358 pp., illus. Washington, Thomas H. Ford.

*Stirnsou, Henry L.
1895 The ascent of Chief Mountain. In: Hunting in many lands

(Theodore Roosevelt and George B. Grinnell, eds.) ,pp. 220-37.

Story, Isabelle F.

1932 The significance of the international pesace projects. Am.
civic ann. , 4:43-46 (1932), illus.

Reflections on the establishment of the Water ton-Glacier
International Peace Park and the International Peace Garden in
North Dakota and Manitoba.

Strahorn, Carrie A.

1911 Camping out — Lake McDonald fin Glacier]. In her: Fifteen
thousand miles by stage, pp. 605-17 , illus. , New York, Putnam.

Thomas, W. Stephen.

1933 Empty spades. Glacial drift, 6:31-32 (Sept.).
Reminiscences of early attempts at mining in the park area.

*Thompson, Margaret W.

1913 Packing over the old Blackfoot trails. Outdoor world and
recreation, 48:394-96 (June).

1936 High trails of Glacier National Park. Caldwell, Idaho,
Caxton printers, 167 pp., illus., maps.
History; management; wildlife; Indians; natural features.
Profusely illustrated with color plates and photographs.

GIACIER NATIONAL PARK
General

Tolson, Hillory A. , comp.

1933 [Laws relating to Glacier National Park.] In: Laws relat
ing to the National Park Service, the national parks and
monuments, pp. 137-51. U.S. Dept . Int., Natl. Park Serv.,
Washington, Govt. print, off.
Both federal and state laws; supplement of laws to July, 1936.

Trager, Mart el le W.

1939 Glacier National Park. In her: National parks of the North
west, pp. 77-111, illus., map. New York, Dodd, Mead.

Trembly, Clifford.

1915 What is a National Park? Overland mo. , 2d ser. , 66:14-22
(July), illus.

Twining, W. J.

1878 Chief Mountain [St. Mary] Lake. In: Reports upon the sur
vey of the boundary between the territory of the United
States and the possessions of Great Britain from the Lake
of the Woods to the summit of the Rocky Mountains ; appendix
A to Rept. of Chief Astronomer, pp. 312-16. U. S. State
Dept. , Washington, Govt. print, off.

Accourt of an expedition to establish an astronomical sta
tion, with a description of St. Mary Lake.

United States Department of Interior.

1910- [Administrative reports on Glacier National Park.] U.S. Dept.

1938 Int. aim. repts., 1910-32. Washington, Govt. print, off.

U. S. National Park Service.

1938 Glacier... Park. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. ,36 pp., illus.,
maps.

United States Railroad Administration.

*n.d. Glacier National Park. Chicago, Bur. of Serv., Natl. Parks
and .Monuments.

Veach, William, sr.

1935 An early trip into Glacier Park. Glacial drift,8:ll-3(Ap. ) .
Recollections of prospecting for gold in park region, 1878.

Vinal, William G.

1931 A tree biography. Glacial drift, 4:41-43, illus.

Educational exhibit installed in a fallen Douglas fir tree.

17

NORTHWEST INLAND

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 A general index to "Glacial drift" (Nature Notes), 1927-36.

Berkeley, Calif., U. S. Dept. Int., Nr.tl. Park Serv. , 37 pp.

Also bound in volume containing indices to the Nature Note
publications of other parks, entitled "A general index to Nature
Notes published in various national parks, 1920-36."

1938a Glacier National Park. In: Guide to national parks and

monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 54-55. U. S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv., Berkeley, California.
Location, area, establishment, natural features, other data.

Waterman, W, G.

1936 Glacier Park as an outdoor laboratory. Outlook, 144:19-21
(Sept.), ill us.

Wayne, Flynn.

1917 The national parks of America. Natl. mag., 46:674-91 (Aug.),
illus .

Wilbur, Ray Lyman.

1929 The 1929 Half Moon fire. Nature notes, Glacier National

Park, 2:35-36 (Sept.).

The great Half Moon forest fire, and damage caused in park.

Willis, Bailey.

1906 Along the northwest boundary. World's work, 4:2330-36
(July), illus.

Wood, Ruth E.

1916 Glacier National Park. In her: The tourist's northwest,
pp. 266-87, illus., map. New York, Dodd, Mead.

Wynn, Frances B.

1919 Mountain climbing in Glacier Park. Mazama , 5:343-46(Dec. ) .
Mount Jackson and Sun Mountain ascended; notes on Indians.

Yard, Robert S.

1917 The education of Rocky Mountain goat, jr. In his: The top

of the continent, pp. 87-114, illus., New York, Scribner's.
*

1917a Yellowstone and Glacier. Northwestern motorist ,2: 13~22(May) •

1919 Glaciered peaks and painted shales. In his: The book of
the national parks, pp. 251-83, New York, Scribner's.

1919a Glacier revealed. Scri bner's, 65: 385-403 ( Ap. ), illus ., map.

18

1922 Glacier the unspoiled. A park that offers mountains, gla
ciers, lonely trails, and uncrowded valleys. Outing, 80:
99-103 ( June) , illus .

1951 Glacier National Park. In his: The national parks portfolio,
pp. 147-70, illus., 6th ed., U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park
Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1934 Glacier National Park. In: Picturesque America(J.F. Kane,
ed.), pp. 146-59, illus. , rev. ed. , New York, Union lib. assn.

1936 The Glacier National Park, Montana. In his: Glimpses of
our national parks (Isabelle IP. Story, ed. ) , pp. 42-46,
illus., rev. ed., U.S. Dept. Int., National Park Service.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

19

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
FAUNA

*Anonymous
1919 Animals of Glacier National Park. C ondor, 21: 131-2 (May- June ).

1930 Hungarian partridges [in park]. Glacier nat. notes, 3:94(Dec. ).
Fifteen of these hardy birds reported in the park in November.

1930a Lagniappe. Glacier nat. notes, 3:51 (June).

Peculiar song of Cassin vireo, conmon around Belt on in May.

1931 Rabbits increasing. Nature mag., 17:257 (Ap.).
Indicates a general increase of wildlife in the park.

1935 Glacier Park beaver. Glacial drift, 8:1 (Jan.).

Bailey, Vernon.

19J25 Recent observations [on animal life] in Glacier National
Park. Washington Acad. Sci. jour., 15:59-60 (Feb. 4).

1931 The mountain goat that is not a goat. Nature mag., 18: 153-
57 (Sept.) , illus.
Detailed account of rare chamois -like animal found in park.

1931a Bighorns of the plains and peaks. Nature mag., 18:279-82,
325-27 (Nov.), illus., map.

Bailey, Vernon, and Bailey, Florence M.

1918 The wild animals of Glacier National Park. U.S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park SerV. , 210 pp., illus., map.

Braun, Annette.

1922 Two weeks collecting in Glacier National Park. Acad. Nat.

Sci. of Phila., Proc. , 73:1-23 (1921).

Experiences in collecting; descriptions of specimens taken.

Buckmaster, W. C.

1929 The Glacier Park fish hatchery. Glacier nat. notes, 2:25,

(Aug.) , illus.

How it supplies millions of fish annually to park waters.

Carter, Forrest L. , and Ruhle, G. C.

1929 Glacial drift [notes on big game]. Glacier nat. notes,
2:29 (July).

21

NORTHWEST INLAND
Fauna

Chapman, Lucie, and Chapman, Wendell.

1935 With wild animals in the Rockies. Nat. seog. mag., 68:231-

49 (Aug.) , illus.

Account of camera-hunting; excellent photos of many animals.

D'Evelyn, M. N.

1934 Wolves in Glacier Park. Glacial drift , 7:24-5 (June).
Discusses recurring reports of wolves seen in the park.

Eakin, J. Ross.

1930 The 1930 game count. Nature notes from Glacier natl. park.
Census on various species of big game, fur bearers, and birds

Eaton, Walter P.

1916 Hunting the American chamois without a gun [in the park],
Mazama, 5:76-80 (Dec.).

1917 A Rocky Mountain game trail [in Glacier National Park],
Harper Ts mag., 136:111-123 (Dec,), illus.

Elrod, Morton J.

1912 Some lakes of Glacier National Park. II. S. Dept. Int.,

29 pp., illus., map. Washington, Govt . print, off.

A study to determine their adaptability to fish culture.

Fauley, Clyde C.

1929 Lake Isabel trout (.their habits, numbers, and food supply].
Nature notes from Glacier natl. park, 2:15 (July).

1934 Coyote control [in the park]. Glacial drift , 7:8 (Jan.).

1935 Red foxes. Glacial drift, 8:4 (Jan.).

*Glover, P. H.

1918 Fish tales of an engineer. Outers' book — recreation, 58 :68( Jan,

Higgins, Elmer.

1933 Surveys in national parks.... In: Progress in biological in
quiries, 1932, pp. 138-40, U. S. Bur. Fisheries. Washington,
Govt. print, off.

Leach , Glen C .

1928 [Propagation and distribution of food and game fishes].

Bur. Fisheries, Doc-. 1033:715. Washington , Govt .print .off .

22

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
Fauna

Mills, Enos A.

1919 The Rocky Mountain goat. Sat. eve. post, 191:117-18 (Feb.)*

1922 [Observations of animals in Glacier]. In his: Watched by
wild animals, pp. 3-4, 13-14. New York, Doubleday, Page.

Pack, Arthur N.

1929 Shooting wildlife with a movie camera [in Glacier National
Park]. Sci. Am., 141:140-43 (Aug.), illus.

Ruhle, G. C.

1929 Crossbills. Glacier nat. notes, 2:37-38 (Sept.), illus.
Detailed description of a small bird of the sparrow family.

19£9a Cross foxes. Glacier nat. notes, 2:57-59 (Nov.), illus.

1930 The osprey. Glacier nat. notes, 2:30-32 (Ap.), illus.

1930a The feathered stranger within thy gates. Glacier nat.
notes, 3:15-16 (Feb.), illus.
Notes on several bird species which winter in the park.

1931 The belted kingfisher. Glacial drift, 4:21 (Ap.-May).
1931a Notes on migratory birds. Glacial drift , 4:32 (June),
1931b The Montana grayling. Glacial drift, 4:40-41 (July).
1931c Goats at low elevations. Glacial drift, 4:60 (Sept.).
1931d The park bird. Glacial drift, 4:78-79 (Kov.), illus.

1932 Reported mountain lions. Glacial drift, 5:50 (Sept.-Oct .) .
1932a Snow fleas. Glacial drift , 5:15 (Mar.-Ap.), illus.

Sanborn, Edwin H.

1916 Above the frontier in Montana. Out ing, 69: 5-19 (Oct.) , illus.

1917 Fishing around Glacier Park. Outing, 70:5;20(Ap.) , illus.

Sanborn, F. S.

1913 The roof of the continent [Glacier National Park]. Over
land mo. , 2d ser. , 62:17-22 (July), illus.

Saylor, L. W.

1936 Some insects of the perk. Glacial drift ,9:16-8 (July) , illus.

23

NORTHWEST INLAND

Silloway, Perley M.

1901 Summer birds at Flathead Lake. Univ. Mont ., Bui. l(Biol.
ser. l). 83 pp., illus.

1903 Additional notes t ©"Summer birds of Flat head Lake" with

special reference to Swan Lake. Univ. Mont. , Bul.l8(Biol.
ser. 6):289-328, illus., map.

[Smith, Hugh M.]

1921 [Fish hatchery in Glacier National Park.] U.S. Commissioner

of Fisheries, ann. rept., 1920:40-41. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

*Tague, E. A.
1912 New trout streams to conquer. Outdoor lif e, 29: 509-11 ( June) .

Tanner, J.

1934 Brewer's sparrows. Glacial drift, 7:31 (July).

Thaxter, B. A.

1936 Beaver at Lake McDonald. Glacial drift ,9:29-30(Oct . ) , illus .

Vinal, William G.

1931 The Richardson pine squirrel. Glacial drift ,4:58-59(Sept. ) .

Walters, Joe C.

1933 Wolverine recorded in Two Medicine district ffirst appear
ance in the park in a decade]. Glacial drift, 6:9 (June).

Weydemeyer, Winton.

1931 A day with the birds of Glacier National Park. Bird lore,

33:169-75, ( May- June ), illus.

Birds noted on a one-day trip, ajnong which were four spe
cies not listed among the birds of Glacier National Park.

Wright, G. M.

1934 Topics on game management in Glacier Park. Glacial drift,
7:6-7 (Jan.).

Discussion of problems of game management with particular
reference to the balance between deer, mountain sheep, and coyotes.

Wright, George M. , and Thompson, Ben H.

1935 [Fauna of Glacier National Park}. In their: Fauna of the
national parks of the United States; wildlife management in
the national parks, pp. 5, 16, 21, 55, 60-64, 67, 70-71, 73,
124, 128. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , Contrib. of
wildlife div., Fauna ser. 2. Washington, Govt. print, off.

24

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
FLORA

Anonymous

1929 A park flower. Glacier nat. notes, 2:24 (Aug.).

A description of bear grass, a flower conmon to the park.

1930 Bear grass this year. Nature mag., 16:128 (Aug.).

1930a Red snow. Nature mag., 16:6 (July).

Caused by brilliantly colored one-celled algae that multiply
rapidly on glaciers and drifts.

Arnold, J. L.

1932 Two Medicine trails and flowers. Glacial drift, 5:42-43
( July-Aug. ) , illus .

Bailey, Harold E.

1938 The abundance of park trees. Glacial drift, 11:7-8.

Results of a survey of the vegetative cover of the park.

1932 How trees came to Glacier Park. Glacial drift ,5:41 (July-Aug. ).
1938a Western red cedar in the park. Glacial drift, 11:5.

Bailey, Yfinona.

1914 Glacier Park flowers in August. Mountaineer, 7: 53-56, illus.

Eaton, Walter P.

1917 Wild flowers of Glacier Park. Country lif e, 32: 36-9 ( July) , illus.

1917a Glacier Park wild flowers. In his: Green trails and up
land pastures, pp. 84-96. New York, Doubleday, Page.

Evans, H. Frank.

1938 Ladyslipper. Glacial drift, 11:10 (1938), illus.
Verifies the presence of this flower in the park.

Holtz, Mathilde E. , and Bemis, Katharine I.

1917 The flower fields of Glacier National Park. In their:

Glacier National Park; its trails and treasures, pp. 112-38,

illus., New York, Doran.

Horsfall, Clara E.

1928 Flowers of Glacier Park. Nature mag. , 12:9-10( July) , illus.

Description of species; six color pictures by R. B. Horsfall.

25

NORTHWEST INLAND

Maxon, William R.

1920 [Selaginella standleyi, or resurrected plant of Glacier
National Park.] Sinithsn. misc. colls., 72 (no.5):10.

Mclaughlin, W. T.

1934 Plant migration. Glacial drift, 7:32-33 (July).

Discusses the mystifying presence in the park of the Devil's
club, a plant native to Japan; found also around Lake Superior.

1930 Slime molds. Glacier nat. notes, 3:65 (Aug.), illus.

Describes variously-colored fungi growths found in the perk.

1936 Wildflowers of Glacier Park in the garden. Glacial drift,
9:27-28 (Oct.), illus.

Ruhle, G. C.

1930 Red snow. Glacier nat. notes, 2:32 (Ap.).

Effect on snow of brilliantly-colored one-celled algae.

1930a The forest four hundred. Glacier nat. notes, 3:50-51
(June) , illus.
Notes on some of the largest trees in the park.

1930b Beard moss. Glacier nat. notes, 3:81 (Oct.).

Standley, Paul C.

1920 Botanical exploration in Glacier National Park, Montana.
Sinithsn. misc. colls. 72 (no. 1): 36-41, illus.

1921 Flora of Glacier National Park. .. .U.S. Nat I.Her barium, C on-
tribs. , 22, pt. 7:235-438, illus. Wash ingt on, Govt. print. off.

1922 Botanical exploration of Glacier National Park. Smithsn.
Instn. , ann. rept., 1920:24-25. Wash i ngt on, Go vt. print. off .

1926 Plants of Glacier National Park. U.S. Dept. Int., 110
pp . , illus . Wash ingt on , Govt . print . of f .

Vinal, William G.

1933 Wild flower study in Glacier National Park. Glacial drift,
6:4-5 (Ap.); ll-12(June); 18-19(July), illus.

26

GLACIER NATIONAL PARK

GEOLOGY
And Related Sciences

Alden, William C.

1912 Pre -Wisconsin glacial drift in the region of Glacier Nation
al Park, Montana. Geol.Soc.Am. , Bui. 23: 687 -708 (Nov. ) ,illus.

1914 Glaciers of Glacier National Park. U.S. Dept. Int . , 48 pp.,
illus., maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Results of studies for the U.S. Geological Survey, 1911-13.

1923 Rate of movement in glaciers of Glacier National Park. Sci. ,
n. s. , 57:268 (liar. 2).

1925 Pre-Wisconsin glaciation of northern Rocky Mountains. Pan-
Am, geol., 43:371-72 (June).

Sevan, Arthur.

1929 Rocky Mountain front in Montana. Geol. Soc. Am., Bui., 40:

427-56 (June 30), illus., map.

Includes discussion of the geology of Glacier National Park.

Bowman, Isaiah.

1911 [Glacin.1 action in the Glacier National Pork region]. In

his: Forest physiography, pp. 312-15. New York, Wiley.

Refers particularly to Little Chief, Almost -a-Dog, Going-
to-the-Sun, and Appekunny peaks.

Burling, Lancaster D.

1916 Ellipsoidal lavas in the Glacier National Park, Montana.
Jour, of geol., 24:235-37 (Ap.-May).

Calhoun, Fred H. H.

1906 The Montana lobe of the Keewatin ice sheet. U.S. Geol.
Surv., Prof. pap. 50, 62 pp., illus,, maps, index. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.
Technical study of geology, glaciation, and lakes of park.

Campbell, Marius R.

1914 The Glacier National Park; a popular guide to its geology

and scenery. U.S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 600, 54 pp., illus.,

maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Contains many excellent photographs of park scenery.

NORTHWEST MIAND

1914a Origin of the scenic features of the Glacier National Park.

U.S . Dept . Int . ,42 pp. , illus . ,inap . Washington ,Govt .print . off .

Chamberlin , Rollin T.

1919 A peculiar belt of oblique faulting. Jour, of geol., 27:

602-13 (Nov. -Dec.), illus., map.

Includes description of the Lewis overthrust in the park.

Chaney, Lucian W. , jr.

1895 A glacier in the Montana Rockies. Sci. ,n.s. ,2:792-6(Dec.l3) .

1896 Glaciers in the hont ana Rockies. Sci . ,n.s. ,4:761-62(Nov.20) .

1905 Glacial exploration in the Montana Rockies. Internatl.Geog.
Cong. Sthrept., 1904:493-96. (58th U.S. Cong., 3d sess.,
House doc. 460). Washington, Govt. print, off.

Culver, G. E.

1892 Notes on a little known region in northwestern Montana. Wis
consin Acad. Sci. Arts and Letters , Trans. ,8:187-205, map.

Dyson, James L.

1935 A few summer geological findings [in Many Glacier Valley].
Glacial drift, 8:41-42 (Oct.).

1936 Features of Blackfeet Glacier. Glacial drift, 9:19 (July),
illus.

Elrod, Morton J.

1908 Pictured rocks, Indian writings on the rock cliffs of Flat-
head Lake, Montana. Univ. Mont., Bui. 4$, (Biol. ser. 14),
10 pp. , illus. , map.

Fennernan, Nevin M.

1931 Ranges in Glacier National Park. In his: Physiography of

western United States , pp. 205-8, illus. ,New York, McGraw-Hill.

Fenton, Carroll L.

1934 Trails of lost shores. Nature mag. ,23: 285-87 (June ), illus .
Refers to fossil worms found in Glacier National Park.

1934a Algae of antiquity. Nature mag., 24:15-16 (July), illus.
Prospecting on Grinnell Glacier for fossil algae.

28

Fenton, Carroll L.

1934b Ancient seas of Glacier National Park. Nature mag. , 23:

121-E5 (Mar.) , illus.

Geological history of Glacier National Park region.

1935 The mountains of Glacier Park. Nat. hist., 35:213-20
(Mar.) , illus.

1939 Sea floors of Glacier National Park. Sci. mo., 49:215-26
(Sept.) , illus.
Geological studies indicate park was once under sea water.

Fenton, Carroll L. , and Fenton, Mildred A.

1930 Algal beds in belt strata of Glacier National Park. Pan-
Am. geol., 53:159-60 (Mar.). Abstract.

Fuller, Margaret B.

1924 An occurrence of wltherite in the Altyn limestone, Many

Glacier, Montana. Am. mineralogist, 9:154 (July).

Technical description of a formation found below Swiftcur-
rent Falls in Glacier National Park.

Knowlton, Frank H.

1900 Flora o£ the Montana formation. U.S. Geol. Surv. , Bui.

163, 118 pp., illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Includes description of fossil flora of Belly River area.

Lee, Willis T.

1926 Glacier National Park. In his: Stories in stone, pp. 140-
41, 49, illus. New York, Van Nostrand.

Mart in , Lawr e nc e .

1915 Glacier National Park. Jour. geog. , 11:324-26 (June), illus.,
bibliog.

Matthes, Francois E.

1904 The Alps of Montana. Appalachia, 10: 255-76(Ap. ), illus ., map.
Structure, topography, drainage, glaciers, glacial effects

in the valleys, mountain peaks, lalces, and scenery are noted.

1905 The Lewis Range of northern Montana and its glaciers. Inter-
natl. Geog. Cong., 8th rept. , 1904:478-79. 58th U.S. Cong.,

3d sess., House doc. 460( ser.no. 4890 ). Washington. Govt. print .of f.
Abstract of paper describing a range now in Glacier Park.

-29

NORTHWEST INLAND

Ruble, G. C.

1930 Clements Glacier. Glacier nat. notes, 3 : 74-76 ( Sept. ) ,illus.

1930a Land of moving mountains. Glacier nat. notes, 3:79-80 (Oct.)

Russell, Israel C.

1885 [Glaciers of the Grand Teton and present Glacier National
Park regions]. U. S. Geol. Surv. 5th Ann. Rept., 1883-84:
344-47, illus. Washington, Govt . print, off.

Salisbury, Rollin D.

1901 Glacia.l work in the western mountains in 1901. Jour, of

Geol . , 9 : 718-31 (iiov . -Dec . ) .

One of the four areas studied was the region of the park.

Stebinger, Eugene

1917 Anticlines in the Blackfeet Indian Reservation, Montana.

U.S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 641. pt. II: pp. 281-305, illus. , maps.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Includes material on a part of the eastern side of the park.

Vinal, William G.

1932 The stone alphabet of the Rockies. Glacial drift, 5:57-

61 (Nov. -Dec.).

Geological history read in the rocks of Glacier Park.

Willis, Bailey.

1901 Oil of the northern Rocky Mountains. Engineer and min.
jour., 72:782-84 (Dec. 14), illus., map.

1902 Stratigraphy and structure, Lewis and Livingston ranges,
Montana. Geol. Soc. Am., Bui. 13:303-52 (Nov. 15), illus.,
maps.

These ranges extend through Glacier National Park.

30

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
GRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including Description, Travel,
History etc.---------

FLORA AND FAUNA ---- ..... --------- H

GEOLOGY AND RELATED SCIENCES ------ ...... 15

GRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK

GENERAL

Description, Travel, History, Etc.

Anonymous

1918 The Jackson Hole Country of Wyoming. Sci. Am., 118:272
(Mar.), illus.

1926 New boundaries for Yellowstone. Sat. eve. post ,198:32(Feb.6) .
Discusses proposed extension to include area of Tetons.

1929 Grand Teton National Park, Wyoming. Nature mag. ,13: 359 (June) .

1933 Threatened dangers to the Yellowstone and Teton National
parks may be blessings in disguise. Civic Comment, 43:
13-16 (Ap.-June).

Proposed reservoir in Bechler Basin to aid Idaho farmers.

1933a The Jackson Hole hearings. Civic Comment ,44: 5-7 (July-Sept .).

Senate hearings on Rockefeller f s proposal to buy private
lands and give them to U.S. for addition to Grand Teton Park.

1934 The Jackson Hole controversy. Am. Civic aim. , 5:47-49.
Proposed draining of Jackson Lake menaces Grand Teton Park.

1934a Senate committee commends John D. Rockefeller, jr. Bird
Lore , 36 : 216 (May- June ) .
Note on Rockefeller's purchase of lands to enlarge the park.

1934b Adequate protection for the Grand Teton National Park.
Civic Comment, 48:10-11 (Sept.-Oct . ) .

1936 Nameless lakes. Nature mag., 27:378 (June).

A resurvey of the northern part of the park by the Geolog
ical Survey revealed about 100 lakes hitherto unmapped.

1937 In the Ye Hows tone -Grand Teton country. Standard Oil co.
of Calif., bul., 25:2-6,16 (July), illus.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 [Grand Teton National Park]. In their: Oh, Ranger I, p. 22.
Stanford Univ. (Calif.) press.

Ayers , Fred D.

1936 Placing the bench mark on the surnmit of the Grand Teton,

August 21, 1934. Grand Teton nat. notes, 2: 29-31 (Summer).

Account of an ascent by the difficult East Rid^e route.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Baillie-Grahman, William A.

1902 Indian camps and winter camps. In: Camps in the Rockies,
pp. 205-32. New York, Scribner's.

Bechdolt, Frederick R.

1930 John Colter. In his: Giants of the Old West, pp. 3-24,
New York, Century.

Blaurock, Carl.

1925 A trip in the Wind River and Teton ranges. Trail and tim-
berline, 83:1-8 (Aug.), illus.

Browning, D. M.

1896 Disturbances in Jackson's Hole country, Wyoming. Rept. of

Sec'y. of Int., 1894-5, 2:60-80. Washington,Govt .print .off .

Account of the Bannock Indian outbreak near the present park.

Burt , Struthers .

1929 Our newest park - the Grand Tetons. Am. Civic aim., 1:117-20

Chittenden, Hiram M.

1895 [Jackson Hole and the Tetons]. In his: The Yellowstone

National Park, pp. 11-12, 24, 152-53, 222-23, 309-10,331,

Cincinnati, Clarke.

1902 ^Historical descriptive notes on the Grand Teton and Jack
son Hole areas]. In his: The history of the American fin-
trade of the Far West, 1:261, 289; 2:657-77, 731-34, 737.
New York, Harper.

Chittenden, Hiram M. , and Sic liar ds on, Alfred T. , eds.

1905 [Visit to Flathead Indian camp in the Tetons, July, 1840].
In: Life, letters, and travels of Fatter Pierre-Jean de
Smet , S. J., 1801-73, 1:222-29. New York, Harper.

Cluerg, George.

1924 The unknown Tetons. Jour. geog. , 23 : 200-03 (May) , illus. , map.

Clyde, Norman.

1927 Mountaineering in the Rockies. Sierra Club, bul. , 12:

365-68, illus.

Ascending Mount Moran in Grand Teton National Park.

*Coffman, J. D. , and McCarther, Kenneth C.

1931 Report on landscape features and forestry values for the
area between Grand Teton and Yellowstone National Parks.
Ms., 10 pp., illus., maps. Off. of Dir. of Natl. Park Serv.

GRAND T3TCN NATIONAL PA2IC
General

Gout ant, C. G.

1899 [Historical notes on the Grand Teton region]. In: The

history of Wyoming, pp. 710-18. Laramie, Wyo., Chaplin,

Spafford, and Mathison.

Dale, Harrison C., ed.

1918 [Experiences in the Tetons] In his: The Ashley-Smith

explorations and the discovery of a central route to the
Pacific, 1822-29, pp. 28-29, 96-100, 104-5, 284.
Cleveland, Clark.

Darlington, E. B.

1928 Mindoka Project, Idaho. Lake Walcott and Jackson Lake res
ervoirs. In; Federal irrigation reservoirs as pleasure
resorts, pp. 12-17, illus. U.S. Dept. Int., Washington,
Govt. print, off.

Recreational attractions; notes on Mount Moran and Tetons.

Dawson, Ernest, and Wilson, Neill C.

1927 Climbing the Grand Teton. Sierra Club,bul., 12: 356-64, illus.
Narrative of an ascent; reviews history of previous climbs.

Dulog, H. G.

1892 A trip to Wyoming. Forest and stream, 29:398 (Nov. 10).

Eccles, James.

1879 The Rocky Mountain region of Wyoming and Idaho. Alpine

jour., 9:242-53 (Aug.).

The Tetons as seen, by one of the Hayden survey party, 1878.

Faris, John T.

1920 [Grand Teton National Park]. In his: Seeing the Far West,
p. 182, Philadelphia, Lippincott.

1930 [Grand Teton National Park]. In his: Roaming the Rockies,
pp. 39-41, 316-17, illus. New York, Farrar and Rine hart.

Fast, Alger J. , and others.

1932 Among the glaciers of the Tetons. In their: Scout natur
alists in the Rocky Mountains , pp. 173-84, illus. New York,
Brewer, Warren, and Putnam.

"Fryxell, Fritiof M.

1929 The Grand Tetons, our national park of Matterhorns. Am.
forests, 35:453-56 (Aug.), illus.

1929a The story of Deadinanfs Bar. Annals of Wyoming, 5:129-
48 (June) , illus.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Fryxell, Fritiof M.

1930 Placing the Grand Teton memorial tablet. Annals of Wyo
ming, 6:249-61 (Jan.), illus.
Commemorates first ascent of Mt. Owen, 1898.

1930a The ascent of Mount Owen. Am. Alpine jour., pp. 320-26.

Gale, Bennett T.

1929 Trails in Grand Teton National Park. Grand Teton nat .
notes, 5:1-7 (Spring).

Gray, Prentiss N.

1930 The Grand Teton, Wyoming. Geog. jour . ,83: 218-24(Mar. ), illus.
General description; geology of Tetons; history of area.

Greenburg, D. IV.

1930 The Grand Teton Park dedication an historic epic. Annals
of 1'Jyoining, 6:270-73 (Jan.).

Henderson, Kenneth A.

1930 The Grand Teton. Am. Alpine jour., pp. 138-39.

Irving, Washington.

1849 [.The battle at Pierre's Hole], In his: The adventures

of Captain Bonneville, pp. 72-82, 94-96. New York, Putnam.

Jackson, W. H. , and Wood, Stanley.

1894 The Rocky Mountains. Denver, H. H. Tammen , 38 pp., illus.

Large scenic photographs of the Teton region and other areas.

Jackson, William H.

1929 Address regarding first photographing of the Tetons. Annals

of Wyoming, 6:189-91 (July-Oct.).

The author recounts his many visits to the Tetons and his
photographic work, beginning with a government survey party in 1872.

Jackson, Williaiu H. , and Drigss, Howard R.

1929 Photographing the Grand Teton. In their: The pioneer photo
grapher, pp. 123-41, illus. Yonkers, N.Y. , World Book co.
Jackson was official photographer with the U.S.G.S., 1872.

Jeff ers , Le Roy.

1920 A night on an unsealed mountain peak. Country life, 38:
53-55 (May) , illus.

1920a From the mountains of Montana to the Tetons of Wyoming.
Sci. Am., 122-364, 375-76 (Ap. 3), illus., map.

1920b The ascent of Mount Moran in the Tetons. Canadian Alpine
jour., 11:49-55.

GRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK
General

1921 Ascent of Mount Moran, giant of the Tetons. Sierra Club
bul., 11:161-66 (Jan.), illus.
Reprinted in author's "The call of the mountains'1, 1922.

1923 Little journeys off tne beaten track. Country life, 44:
35-41 (June) , illus.
Includes a brief description of Grand Teton National Park.

Jones , Otto M.

1917 A big game camp in the snow cloud peaks. Field and stream,
22:670 (Dec.).

1918 Photographing the Saw-Tooths. Field and stream, 23 :302-4( Aug. ).

Jones, William A.

1875 [Reconnaissance of the Teton region]. In: Peport upon the
reconnaissance of northwestern UyoiEing, including Yellow
stone National Park, made in the summer of 1873 by William
A. Jones, Captain of Engineers. U.S.A.. pp, 42-42,53. U.S.
Army Sngr. Dept., Washington, Govt. print, off.

Langford, Nathaniel P.

1873 The ascent of Mount Hayden. Scribner's mo., 6:129-57( June) ,
illus.

Leigh, Richard (Beaver Duck).

1899 Letter re: ascent of Grand Teton. Forest and stream, (Feb. ).

Love joy, Fred.

1926 First ascent of the Grand Teton. Outdoor life, 58:443-
85 (June).

McCain, C. A.

1921 The lofty Teton peaks. Am. forestry, 27:385-8( June) , illus.
Attractions of the Teton region as a summer resort.

Moran, Thomas.

1937 An early trip to the Tetons; the diary of Thomas Moran,

1879. Grand Teton nat . notes, 3:17-22( Thomas Moran no.).

Owen, William 0.

1898 [Letter or article on Grand Teton], Forest and stream, (Nov. 5)

1901 The ascent of the Grand Teton. Outi ng, 38: 302-7 ( June) , illus.
Detailed description of routes to suamit; first ascent is
told.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Owen, William 0.

1927 The Grand Teton. Privately published.

A symposium to the mountaineers of America.

1927- The naming of Mount Owen. Annals of Wyoming, 5:72-78

1928 (Oct. 1927-Jan. 1928), illus.

How it was named in honor of the author for his first ascent

Parker , Samuel .

1842 [Jackson Hole, the Three Tetons, and the battle at Pierre's
Hole], In his: Journal of an exploring tour beyond the
Rocky Mountains in the years 1835, 1836, and 1837, pp. 90-94.
3d ed. , Ithica, N.Y. , Mack, Andrus, and Woodruff.

Rear don, J. D.

1915 Up Grand Teton. Outing, 67:267-78 (Dec.), illus.

Stagner, Howard R.

1936 Trailmakers — John Colter. Grand Teton nat. notes, 2:7-9.
(Winter), illus.

1936a Trailmakers — part 2 — Rediscovery of Jackson's Hole. Grand

Teton nat. notes, 2:21-22.

Notes on the crossing of Jackson Hole in 1811 by the trap
pers Hoback, Rezner, and Robinson.

1936b Herbarium. Grand Teton nat. notes, 2:22 (Spring).

1937 Jackson Lake shoreline. Grand Teton nat. notes, 3:32-33.

Stagner, Sylvia.

1936 Winter in Grand Teton National Park. Grand Teton nat.
notes , 2 : 3-4 ( Wirit er ) .

Stephens, Isaac I.

1855 Narrative and final report of explorations for a route for

a Pacific railroad near the forty-seventh and forty-ninth

parallels of north latitude, from St. Paul to Puget Sound.

U.S. War Dept., Repts. of explorations and surveys, 12,

Bk. I, 358 pp. , illus.

Tate, Arthur C.

1917 A hike through Yellowstone Park to the Tetons. Recreation,
57:19-20 (July).

Tolson, Hillary A. , comp.

1933 [Laws relating to Grand Teton National Pork]. In: Laws re
lating to the National Park Service, the national porks and
monuments, pp. 264-67. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl, Park Serv.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

8

GRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK
General

Trager, Martelle W.

1939 Grand Teton National Park. In lier: National parks of the
Northwest, pp. 54-76, illus., map. New York, Dodd, Mead.

Underbill, Robert L. M.

1930 The Grand Teton by the east ridge. Alpine jour., 42:267-
77 (Nov.), illus.

1931 Two new routes up the Grand Teton. Canadian Alpine jour.,
20:72-86, illus.

United States, Congress.

1898 Region south of and adjoining Yellowstone National Park.
55th U.S. Cong., 3d sess., Senate doc. 39, 92 pp., maps,
(ser. no. 3728). Washington, Govt. print, off.

United States. Department of Interior.

1929- [Administrative reports on Grand Teton National Park],
1938 U.S. Dept. Int., ann. repts. Washington, Govt. print, off.
No reports for 1931, 1932, 1936, and 1937.

United States. National Park Service.

1938 Grand Teton National Park, Wyoming. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl.
Park Serv. , 30 pp., illus., maps, bibliog.

Victor, Frances F.

1870 [The Reverend Samuel Parker at Jackson Hole; sermons to
Indians and trappers]. In her: The river of the West,
pp. 181-88. Hartford, Conn., Columbian Book co .

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 Grand Teton National Park. In; Guide to national parks

and monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 95-96.

Berkeley, Calif., U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Se»v.

Warren, Herbert 0.

1935 Snow sports in California [and the Northwest]. Country
life, 69:25-26, illus.

Foreign experts approve skiing, sledding, and skating in
Grand Teton and other national parks of the West.

Watson, Walcott.

1936 Trailmakers, part 3 — Wilson Price Hunt and the Astorians.
Grand Teton nat. notes, 2:33-34 (Summer).

Account of a trapping expedition which traversed the Jack
son Hole and Teton country.

1937 Trailmakers, part 4 — Robert Stuart; the return from Astoria.

9

NORTHWEST INLAND

Watson, Walcott, continued.

Grand Teton nat. notes, 3:9-10 (Winter).

Cross-country journey which passed through the Teton region
in 1812 en route from Astoria to St. Louis.

Wilson, Neill C. See: Dawson, Ernest, 1927.
Wood, Stanley. See: Jackson, W. H. , 1894.

Yard, Robert S.

1928 Grand Teton National Park. In his: The book of the nat
ional parks, pp. 227-28. New York, Scribner's.

1931 Grand Tat on National Park. In his: The national parks

portfolio, pp. 239-41, illus. 6th ed., U.S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1936 Grand Teton National Park, Wyoming. In his: Glimpses of
our national parks (Isabelle F. Story, ed.), pp. 80-82,
illus. Rev. ed., U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.

10

GRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK

FLORA AND FAUNA

Anonymous

1916 Elks in the breadline. Everybody's mag., 35:143-44( Jan. ) .
Congressional appropriations to feed elk in Jackson Hole.

1927 The great elk herd. Sci., n.s., 65, supp. x.xii (Mar. 11).
Iv'otes efforts made by federal, state, and private agencies
to solve the feed problem of increasing elk herd of Jackson Hole.

Brandegee , T. S.

1899 Tet on Forest Reserve. U.S. Geol. Surv. , 19th ami. rept.,

1897-98, pt. 5:191-212, illus. Washing-tor , Govt. print. off.

Mainly a description of forest conditions in the area west
of the Teton Range; notes on the topography, geology, and climate,

Cameron, Allan D.

1937 Lepidoptera collection. Grand Teton nat. notes, 3: 27 (Summer) .
Museum acquires a butterfly collect ion; specimens are listed.

1939 An insect pest of our forest trees. Grand Teton nat. notes,
5:12-16, illus. (Fall).

Gary, Merritt.

1917 Life zone investigations in Wyoming. U.S. Dept. Agric.,

Bur. Biol. Serv. , No. Am. fauna, 42, 95 pp., illus., map.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Includes much information on Grand Teton-Jackson Hole area.

Fryxell, Fritiof M.

1928 The former range of the bison in the Rocky Mountains. Jour.

of Mammalogy, 9:129-39 (May).

Bison formerly ranged through the region of Grand Teton Park.

Higgins, Elmer.

1933 Surveys in national parks and national forests. In; Prog
ress in biological inquiries, 1932, pp. 138-40. U.S. Bur.
Fisheries. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Report on studies of fish conditions in Grand Teton, elsewhere.

Irland, Frederick.

1903 The Wyoming game stronghold. Scribner's nag. ,34: 259 -7 6 (Sept .)
Experience photographing elk, other game, in Jackson Hole.

Leek, S. N.

1917 Salt-licks and alkali springs for elk [in Jackson Hole],
Sci. Am. Supp., 84:219 (Oct. 6).

11

NORTHWEST INLAND

McKean, William T.

1939 A new thrush record. Grand Teton nat. notes, 5:16-17 (Fall),

illus.

First appearance in park of olive -backed thrush; description.

Murie, Olaus J.

1929 Care of the great elk herd. Sci., n.s«, 70,supp. :xii(Dec.20) .

1935 The elk of Jackson Hole. Nat. hist . ,35: 237 -47(Har. ), illus.
Problems occasioned by elk herds increasing on limited range.

Preble, Edward A.

1911 Report on dondition of elk in Jackson Hole, Wyoming. U.S.

Biol, Surv., bul. 40, 23 pp., illus., map. Washington,

Govt. print, off.

Vegetation and topography; number and distribution of elk;
appearances; food sources; seasonal habits; causes of mortality.

Sheldon, Charles.

1927 The conservation of elk in Jackson Hole, Wyoming. Natl.
Conf . Outdoor Recreation.

Smith, Willis.

1938 Something new under the sun. Grand Teton nat. notes , 4:5(Fall) .
Discovery of unnamed species of Pedicularis in Cascade Canyon.

1937 Plant successions in the Grand Teton Nat ional Park. Grand
Teton nat. notes, 5:30-32, illus. ,( Summer ).

1937a Trees of the Grand Teton National Park. Grand Teton nat.
notes, 3:25-29, illus., (Summer).

Sprunt, Alexander, jr.

1936 Birds of the Grand Teton National Park. Grand Teton nat.
notes, 2:13-15 (Spring).

Stagner, Howard R.

1936 Spring flowers. Grand Teton nat. notes, 2:16-17, illus.,

(Spring).

1938 Crows arid jays. Gr;..nd Teton nat. notes, 4 : 6-9 (Fall) , illus.

Stagner, Sylvia.

1937 Winter bird guests. Grand Teton nat. notes, 3 :11-12( Winter ).

Walcott, Charles D.

1918 The United States forest reserves. Pop.Sci.mo. ,52: 456-8 (Feb.) .

Wallace, Dillon.

1911 The tragedy of the elk. Outing, 58 : 187 -201, illus. , (May) .

12

CRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK
Flora and Fauna

Williams , Louis .

1935 Are the trees of the Grand Teton National Park advancing?

Grand Teton nat. notes, 1:12-13 (Aug.).

Forest cover advancing over areas denuded by glaciati.on.

Wright, George M. , and others.

1933 Fauna of Grand Teton National Park. In their: Fauna of

the national parks of the United States: A preliminary

survey of faunal relations in the national parks. Natl.

Park Serv., Fauna ser. , I. Washington, Govt. print, off.

The co-authors are: Joseph S. Dixon and Ben H. Thompson.

Wright, George M. , and Thompson, Ben H.

1935 [Grand Teton National Park.]. In their: Fauna of the nat
ional parks of the United States; wildlife management in
the national parks, pp. 65, 67, 73. U.S. Dept . Int., Natl,
Park Serv., Contrib. of Wildlife div., Fauna ser. 2. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.

13

GRAND TETON NATIONAL PARK

GEOLOGY AND RELATED SCIENCES

Blackwelder, Eliot.

1915 Post-Cretaceous history of the mountains of central western
Wyoming. Jour, of geol., 23: 97-117 (Feb. -Mar. ) , 193-217
(Ap.-May), 307 -340 (May- June ), illus., maps.
Includes discussion of the Teton Range and Jackson Hole.

1918 New geological formations in western Wyoming. Washington
Acad. Sci. jour., 8:417-26 (July 19).
Includes discussion of some formations in the Teton Range.

1926 Earthquake in Jackson Hole. Seisrnol. Soc. Am. Bui. 16:
196 (Sept.).

Bradley, Frank H.

1873 Report of Frank H. Bradley, geologist of the Snake River

division. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the territories, 6th ann.

rept. 1872:89-271, illus., maps. Wash i ngt on, Govt . print. off .

Fenneman, Nevin M.

1931 Teton Range. In his: Physiography of western United States,
pp. 168-70, illus. New York, McGraw-Hill.

Geological descriptions of Mount Hayden and the Grand Teton.

Fryxell, Fritiof M.

1930 Glacial features of Jackson Hole, Wyoming. Augustana Lib.
Pubs., 13, 129 pp., illus., maps, bibliog.

1932 The Teton peaks and their ascents. Grand Teton Natl. Park,
Wyoming. , Crandall Studios, 106 pp., map.

1933 The formation of glacial tables, Grand Teton National Park,
Wyoming. Jour, of geol., 41:642-46 ( Aug . -Sept . ) , illus.

1933a Earthquake shocks in Jackson Hole, Wyoming. Seismol. Soc.
Am. Bui., 23:167-68 (Oct.), bibliog.

1935 Glaciers of the Grand Teton National Park of YJyoming. Jour,
of geol., 43:381-97 (May-June), illus., map.

1938 The diabase dikes. Grand Teton Nat . notes ,4 : 2-4(Fall ), illus.

Remarkable black bands on sides of Mt. Moran, Grand Teton,
and middle Teton.

15

NCRTE-.JSST INLAM)

Hayden, Ferdinand V.

1869 [Topography and geology of the Tetons and adjacent country.],
In: Geological report of the exploration of the Yellowstone
and Missouri rivers, 1859-60, pp. 88-89. IT. S. Army, Engr.
Dept., Washington, Govt. print, off.

Horberg, Leland.

1938 The structural geology and physiography of the .Teton Pass

area, Wyoming. Rock Island, 111., Augustana Book Concern,

85 pp., illus., bibliog.

Iddings, Joseph?., and Weed, Walter H«

1899 Descriptive geology of the northern end of the Teton Range.

U.S. Geol. Surv. , monogs. 32:149-164, map. Washington,

Govt. print, off.

Miller, B. Maxwell.

1936 Cambrian stratigraphy of northwestern Wyoming. Jour, of
geol., 44:113-44 { Feb. -Liar. ), illus., maps, bibliog.

Resser, Charles E.

1928- Cambrian geology of the Rocky Mountains. Smithsn. Instn. ,
1930 Explorations and field work, 1927:17-20; 1928:21-26; 1929:
23-30 (Pubs. 2957, 3011, and 3060), illus.

Russell, Israel C.

1885 {.Glaciers of the Grand Teton and present Glacier National
Park regions.] U.S. Geol. Surv. 5th ann. rept., 1883-84:
344-47, illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.

St. John, Orestes.

1879 Report of the gsologiCfuL fieldwork of the Teton division.
U.S. Geol. and Geo}.. Surv. of the Terrs., llth ann. rept.,
1877:323-508, illus., nap. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Schultz, Alfred R.

1918 A geologic reconnaissance for phosphate and coal in south
eastern Idaho and western Wyoming. U.S. Geol. Surv., Bui.
680, 84pp., illus., maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Includes considerable material on the Teton Mountains and

the Teton Basin.

Stagner, Howard R.

1936 Activity at the Lewistone Wall. Grand Teton nat. notes,

2:44-46 (Autumn), illus.

Discussion of the causes for the recurrence of avalanches
and cracking in the massive wall encircling head of Avalanche Canyon.

1936a The geological history of the Teton Range, a suranary.
Grand Teton nat. notes, 2:40-43 (Autumn), illus.

16

SHOSHONE CAVERN NATIONAL MONUME??!

Anonymous

1925 Shoshone Cavern National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist.

Preservn. Soc., 30th ann. rept., 1925:173-74.

G-eneral description of the cavern and the extent of the
monument .

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 Shoshone Cavern. In their: Oh, Ranger I, p. 165. Stan
ford Univ. (Calif.), press.

Dake, C. L.

1918 The Hart Mountain overthrust and associated structures in

Park County, Wyoming. Jour, of geol., 26:45-55 (Jan. -Feb.),

map.

Includes description of a fault in the monument.

Dumbell, K. E. M.

1920 (Shoshone Cavern National Monument]. In her: Seeing the
West, p. 43. Garden City, N. Y. , Doubleday, Page.

Faris, John T.

1930 [Shoshone Cavern National Monurent], In Ids: Roaming
the Rockies, pp. 7-8. New York, Farrar and Rinehart.

Q,uinn, Vernon.

1923 [Shoshone Cavern]. In his: Beautiful America, pp. 287-88.
New York, Stokes.

Taylor, Frank J. See: Albright, Horace M. 1928.

United States National Park Service.

1917 Shoshone Cavern National Monument . In: General inform
ation regarding the national monuments set aside under the
Act of Congress approved June 8, 1908, pp. 47-48, map. U.S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1930 Shoshone Cavern National Monument. In: Glimpses of our
national monuments, pp. 58-60, illus. U.S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 Shoshone Cavern National Monument. In: Guide to national

parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 97.

Berkeley, Calif., U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists
and describes principal features; gives historical data.

NORTHWEST INLAND

Yard, Robert S.

1919 Shoshone Cavern National Monument. In his: The book of
the national parks , pp. 413-14. New York, Scribner's.

1931 Shoshone Cavern National Monunent. In his: The national
parks portfolio, pp. 260, 6th ed. , U.S. Dept. Int., Natl
Park Serv. Wasliington, Crovt. print, off.

FOREWORD

The following references to the literature of the national
parks and monuments of the Pacific States , excluding Yosemite Na
tional Park, were gathered by workers on a research project spon
sored by the National Park Service in collaboration with the Work
Projects Administration. These pages are to form part of a larger
volume embracing all national parks and monuments west of the
Mississippi.

The references include material published through 1936, al
though there are items of more recent date. Fiction, poetry, and
maps have been excluded.

References to the former General Grant National Park and the
newly-established Kings Canyon National Park were few, and often
indistinguishable from Sequoia material. Such references will be
found under (Sequoia National Park).

The National Park Service is indebted to the Berkeley Public
Library and to the various libraries of the University of Califor
nia at Berkeley for cooperation in preparing this bibliography.

iii

THE PACIFIC STATES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. CABRILLO NATIONAL MONUMENT

II. CHANNEL ISLANDS NATIONAL MONUMENT

III. CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK

IV. DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONir^NT

V. DEVIL POSTPILE NATIONAL MONUMENT

VI. JOSHUA TREE NATIONAL MONUMENT

VII. IASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK

VIII. LAVA BEDS NATIONAL MONUISNT

IX. MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK

X. MQIR WOODS NATIONAL MONUMENT

XI. OLYMPIC NATIONAL PARK

XII. OREGON CAVES NATIONAL MONUMENT

XIII. PINNACLES NATIONAL MONUMENT

XIV. SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK

CABRILLO NATIONAL MONUMENT

Anonymous

1892 The voyage of Cabrillo. Californian illus. mag., 1:100-8

(Jan.), 215-20 (Feb.), illus.

Excerpts from Cabrillo1 s diary, kept by his pilot, Jerrel,
during his trip along the California Coast.

1917 Cabrillo National Monument. In: General information re
garding the national monuments set aside under the Act of
Congress approved June 8, 1908, p. 70. IT. S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1925 Cabrillo National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn.
Soc., aim. rept., 1925, p. 138.
General information and description.

1938 Cabrillo National Monument, 4 pp. Natl. Park Serv. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.

Bryant , Harold C .

1928 Parks of the Golden State. Nature mag., 12:236-9, 273-4

(Oct.), illus.

Includes a description of Cabrillo National Monument.

Gale , Hoyt S .

1932 Geology of Southern California. Internatl. Geol. Cong.,

16th sess., guidebook 15, pp. 1-68, maps, illus.

The region studied extends from Cabrillo National Monument
to the area near the proposed Channel Islands National Monument.

Lummis, Charles Fletcher

1913 In memory of Juan Rodriguez Cabrillo, who gave the world

California, 1542. 16 pp., illus. Chula Vista, Calif.,

Denrich.

Rensch, Hero E. , and Ethel G.

1932 San Diego County. In their: Historic spots of California,

pp. 164-206, bibliog. Palo Alto, Calif. Stanford Univ.

press.

Contains information about Point Loma, and Cabrillo National
Monument .

Saunders , Charles F .

1937 Cabrillo National Monument. In his: Finding the worth
while in California, p. 62. New York , McBride.

TEE PACIFIC STATES

Schooler af t , Henry R.

1860 Physical data respecting that part of Southern California
lying on the line of boundary between St. Diego and the
mouth of the river Gila; with incidental description of the
Diegueno and Yuiaa Indian tribes. In his: Archives of abo
riginal knowledge, 2:99-121. Philadelphia, Lippincott.
A diary in which is recorded topographical features and gen
eral physical geography of an area, including Cabrillo National
Monument, surveyed in 1849.

Stanton, Timothy W.

1896 San Diego and other localities in southern California.

U. S. Geol. Surv., 17th ann. rept . , pp. 1027-8. Washington,

Govt. print, off.

Description of exposures of Chico and Tejon rocks at the
west base of Point Lama, near Cabrillo National Monument.

Schaller, Waldemar T.

1902 Spodumene from San Diego County, California. Dept . Geol.,

bul., Univ. Calif, pubs., 3:265-75.

A complete description and analysis of this gem, found near
Cabrillo National Monument .

Van Dyke, T. S.

1888 Around San Diego Bay. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 11:113-22

(Feb.), illus.

Contains information about Point Loma, and Cabrillo National
Monument .

Voth , Hazel H. , and others

1938 Cabrillo National Monument. In: Guide to national parks

and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 24. U. S.

Dept. Int. , Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, California.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists
and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical data.

Yard, Robert S.

1920 Natural and historic national monuments. Art and archeol.,

10:55-63 (July-Aug.), illus.

Includes a description of Cabrillo National Monument.

CHANNEL ISLANDS NATIONAL MONUMENT

Anonymous

1903 Prehistoric fauna of California. So. Calif, Acad. Sci.,

bul., 2;87-9 (Oct.), illus.

A short list of Pliocene fossils found on San Miguel Island,
collected by C. D. Voy and classified by Dr. Cooper.

1918 The American Pacific Ocean. Sci. Am., 119:441-5 (Nov. 30),

illus.

The results of a survey by the University of California.
Information concerning the climate, oceanology, flora and fauna of
the Channel Islands.

Abbott, C. C., and Carr, Lucien

1879 Archeology of the Channel Islands. In: U. S. geol. and
geog. surv. west of the 100th meridian, v. 7, archeol,
This volume contains many articles, numbering some 200 pages,

and gives detailed information on a great variety of artifacts and

human remains of the former inhabitants of the Channel Islands.

Alliot, Hector

1916 Burial methods of the Southern California islanders. So.

Calif. Acad. Sci., bul., pt. 1, 15:11-5 (Jan.).

An expedition conducted by the Southwest Museum discovered
a new form of burial on San Nicolas Island. The burial customs
here are correlated with those of the neighboring islands and main
land, and two distinct methods of burial are confirmed.

Booth, Hemley C.

1895 Deep sea fishing off Santa Barbara. Outing, 26:355-8 (Aug.),

illus.

Describes the impressive appearance of the Channel Islands
and the seals and fish in surrounding waters.

Brandegee, T. S.

1888 Flora of Santa Barbara Islands. Calif. Acad. Sci., proc.,
2d ser., pt. 2, 1:201-26 (Ap.).

Carpenter, Philip P.

1872 The rnollusks of western north America. Smithsonian misc.

coll*, v. 10, 446 pp., index. Wash., Smithsn. Instn.

This is a group of reprinted papers, published by Philip
Carpenter, at various times on the mollusks of Western North America.
They were printed in different publications in Europe. The Channel
Islands and San Diego are referred to in most of the articles.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Cronise, Titus F.

1868 Geography and topography. In: Natural wealth of California,
pp. 77-91. San Francisco, Bancroft.

The islands off the coast of California are described in geo
graphical and topographical detail.

Ball, W. H.

1895 Diagnoses of new species of mollusks from the west coast of

America. U. S. Natl. Mus., proc. , 18:7-20.

Report on the finding of a new species of mollusk (Callios-
tum turbinum) among the Santa Barbara Islands by members of the U. S.
Fish Commission.

Drury, Aubrey

1935 The Channel Islands. In: California, an intimate guide, pp.

149-58. New York, Harper's.

Contains a discussion of all the Channel Islands, including
Anacopa and Santa Barbara Island.

Far is, John T.

1920 The Channel Islands. In his: Seeing the Far West, p. 227.
Philadelphia, J. B. Lippincott.

Gabb, William M.

1869 Cretaceous and Tertiary fossils. Geol. Surv. Calif., 2:75,
77-8, 80, 84-6. Philadelphia, Sherman.

Published by authority of the legislature of California. A
list of fossils found in California. Many listed were found on the
Channel Islands.

Harrington, J. P.

1929 Studying the Mission Indians of California and the Taos of

New Mexico. Explorations and fieldwork of the Smithsn.

Instn. , pub. 3011, pp. 169-78, illus . , maps.

Includes a description of the Chumashan Indians found around
the Santa Barbara Channel.

Hasse, H. E.

1903 Contributions to the lichen flora of the California Coast

islands. So. Calif. Acad. Sci., bul., 2:23-6 (Feb.), 33-5

(kar.).

A long list of species is given, with place of discovery—
usually Catalina, San Miguel, or Santa Barbara Islands.

Hittell, Theodore H.

Channel Islands. In his: History of California, 1:139-42,

729, 741. San Francisco, N. J. Stone.

Brief historical and general observations about Indians of
the Channel Islands.

CHANNEL ISLANDS NATIONAL MONUMENT

Hoffman, Ralph

1932 Notes on the flora of the Channel Islands off Santa Barbara,

California. Calif. Acad. Sci . , bul., 31:46-60 (May-Aug.),

101-20 (Sept. -Dec.).

A list of the species added to the flora of the islands since
Brandegee's list in Zoe, vol. 1, no. 5, July, 1890.

Holder, Charles F.

1910 The Channel Islands of California. Chicago, McClurg, 376

pp., illus . , map, index.

A general and popular account.

Holmes , William H.

1902 Anthropological studies in California. Smithsn. Instn. , ann.

report, 1900 pp. 155-87, illus.

Includes research in the Channel Islands.

James , George W.

1914 Channel Islands. In his: California, romantic and beautiful,
pp. 145-62. Boston, Page.

Historical, geographical, and geological observations.

1915 The Channel Islands of California. In: Our American wonder
lands, pp. 259-64, illus. Chicago, McClurg.

Kroeber, A. L.

1907 Santa Barbara Islands. In his: Shoshonean dialects of Cali
fornia, 4:152-3. Pubs. Am. Archeol. and Ethnol. Berkeley,
Univ. of Calif.

LeConte, Joseph

1887 The flora of the coast islands of California in relation to
recent changes of physical geography. An. jour, sci., 3d
ser. , 34:457-60 (Dec.).

Reprinted in: Am. geologist, 1:76-81, Feb., 1888.

1891 Coast islands of California. In: Elements of geol, pp. 599-

600, 3d ed. New York, Appleton.

Describes the flora, and gives the theory of the formation of

these islands.

Lindley, Walter, and Widney, J. P.

1888 The Channel Islands. In: California of the south, pp. 59-61.
New York, Appleton.

Mattei, A. C.

1917 Two Santa Barbara Channel earthquakes. Seisinological Soc.
Am., bul., 2:61-6, map.

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,

Description, etc. ------------- 3

FAUNA 13

FLORA 15

GEOLOGY -19

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK

GENERAL

History, Travel, Description, Etc.

Anonymous

1897 History, Description, and geology of Crater Lake. Mazaraa,
1:139-170, 230-238, illus.

1916 Sierra crest and canyon. San Francisco, Southern Pacific,
32 pp.
Includes description and photos of Crater Lake.

1918 Crater Lake. Pan^Amer. Union, bul. , 46:369-77 (Mar.).

1931 Sinnott Memorial in the Crater Lake National Park. Science,
n.s., 73:384 (Ap.).

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 [Crater Lake National Park], In his: Oh, Ranger I Stan
ford Univ. (Calif.) press, pp. 75-76, 95, 102, 150-151.
Information on various features of Crater Lake.

Allen, A. Cooper.

1926 The guardian of Crater Lake. Sunset, 56:51-52 (May).
William Gladstone Steel, who literally put Crater Lake on

the map as a national park.

Atwood, V/illiam W.

1932 Mystery of Crater Lake. Home geog. mo., 2:43-48 (Sept.).

1935 Crater Lake, Oregon. Sinithsn. Instn. ann. rept . pp. 303-320,

1957 Crater Lake and Yosemite through the ages. Nat. geog. mag.,
71:326-43 (Mar.).

Batchelor, Nora.

1903 Crater Lake National Park. Overland mo., n.s. ,41:334-38

(May), illus.

General description of the majestic beauty of Crater Lake
and a few remarks about its history.

Bell, Beatrice B.

1927 With a camera at Crater Lake. Photo-Era, 59:66-69 (Aug. 27),
illus.

Clarke, S. A.

1873 Kleuaath Land. Overland ao., 2:548-54.

Description of a journey in the region of Crater Lake.

Daniels, Mark.

1916 Description of Grater Lake. Am. forests, 22:586-92(Oct. ) ,illus.

Diller. Joseph S.

1897 Crater Lake , Oregon. Natl. geog. nag,, 8:33-48 (Feb.).

1897a Crater Lake, Oregon. Smithsn. Instn. , arm. rept. , pp. 369-79.

Drury, Aubrey.

1917 Crater Lake National Park. Sunset, 33:92 (Ap.).

Eaton, W. P.

1922 Garden of the Pliant om Ship. Country life, 42:43-45 (Jan.).

Evans, Sarnie 1 M.

1911 i'orfcy gallons of gasoline to forty miles of water. Sunset,
27:393-399 (Oct.), illus .

Auto tour in Crater Lake National Park.

Forbin, V.

1920 Crater Lake National Park, U.S.A. Un Cratere dans un park.
La Nature, pp. 81-85, (Aug. 7).

Gilson, R. L.

1917 Trip to Crater Lake on skis. Mazam, 5:158-62 (Dec.).

Gorman, M. W.

1897 The discovery and early history of Crater Lake. Mazama ,
1:150-161 (Oct.) , illus.

Hall, Wilbur.

1917 A free car and the open road, auto-vacationing in three

states a Ion.-* the Pacific. Sunset, 30:22-26, 36-37 (July),

illus .

Contains a description of Crater Lat:o.

Harnden, E. W.

1909 Th3 lure of the West. Mountaineer, 2:25-29 (Nov.).
Contains a description of Crater Lake.

Hicks , Harry H.

1912 Crater Lake in mid-winter. Sunset, 28:299-304 (Mar.).

Hittell, John S.

1885 [Orator Lake]. In his: Hittell1 s handbook of pacific

4

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
General

Coast travel, pp. 190. San Francisco, A. L. Bancroft.
Description, under name of Mystic Lake.

Hodgson, Caspar W.

1902 Crater Lake by night and day. Sunset ,9; 68-75( May) ,illus.
Describes all features of Crater Lake.

Homuth, Earl U.

1929 An Indian legend [of Crater Lake], Crater Lake nat . notes,
2:1 (Sept.) , illus.

Homuth, Sari U. See: Steel, William G. , 1929.

Homuth, Earl U.

1930 According to Indian legend. Crater Lake nat. notes ,3:11-
13 (Aug.) , illus.

Explains the existence of Wizard Island.

1931 Another important relic. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:4-6
(Aug. 1 , illus.

Sounding device used in first survey (1886) found; its con
struction ana. use explained.

1931a The location of Crater Lake National Park. Crater Lake

nat. notes, 4:7 (July), illus.

William G. Steel's successful efforts toward establish
ment of the park.

James , George W.

1915 Crater Lake, Oregon. In: Our American wonderlands, pp.
227-33, illus. Chicago, McClurg.

Jeffers, Le Roy.

1923 Little journeys off the beaten track. Country life, 44:

35-41 (June) , illus.

Includes description of Crater Lake National Park.

Johnson, Clifton.

1913 [Crater Lake], In: Highways and byways of the Pacific
Coast, p. 242, new ed. New York, Macmillan.

1919 Crater Lake, Oregon. In: What to see in America, pp. 516-
18, illus. New York, Macmillan.

Kelley, Donald G. , and others.

1931 Three scout naturalists in the national parks, 237 pp.,

illus. New York, Harcourt.

Includes description of Crater Lake.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Kenn, Martin A. ......

1891 Off beaten paths. Overland mo., 18:19-26 (July).
Many aspects of Crater Lake region discussed.

Kerr, Mark B,

1891 Wimawita [a legend of Crater Lake], Pacific mo., 6:190-91.

1893 Crater Lake, Oregon, and the origin of Wizard Island.
Sierra Club bul., 1:31-39 (Jan.), illus.
Information upon many aspects of Crater Lake.

Laing, Hamilton M.

1918 Barking Betsy and the chilled volcano. Sunset, 41:24-25,
(Aug.) , illus.

Descriptive account of a visit to Crater Lake.

Lane , Franklin K.

1919 Crater Lake National Park. U.S. Dept. Int., rept., 1918,
1:122.

A project to enlarge the park by acquiring Diamond Lake,
Mount Thielson, and other scenic features. Road, trail, and camp
construction reported.

Lapham, Stanton C.

1931 Enchanted Lake; Mount Mazama and Crater Lake in story,

history, and legend, pp. 7-138, illus. Portland, Ore.,

J. K. Gill co.

Libbey, D. S.

1931 Wizard Island exploration. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:1
(Aug.).

1932 The Community house. Crater Lake nat. nctes, 5:2-4 (Sept.),
illus.

This narrative gives a detailed account of an itinerary
through Crater Lake National Park.

Long, A. B.

1933 A fading cloud. Crater Lake nat. notes, 6 : 7-8 ( Sept. ), illus.
A description from the sunmit of Watchman peak of the

moving cloud masses below and how the air currents effect their
movements, evaporation, and disappearance.

M, , H. R.

1898 Crater Lake, Oregon. Nature, 57:375-76 (Feb. 17), illus.

History and description of Crater Lake and adjacent areas.

Mather, Stephen T.

1919 Crater Lake National Park. U.S. Dept. Int. , rept. ,1918, 1:

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
General

864-67, illus., map.

A chronicle of the year's events.

1924 Volume of water in Crater Lake estimate. Natl. Park Serv.,
bul., 23. U.S. Dept . Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington,
Govt. print, off.
A mathematical estimate of the total volume of water.

McArthur, Lewis A.

1928 Oregon geographic names. 450 pp., illus., map. Eugene,
Ore., Koke -Chapman co.

Merriam, John C.

1933 Crater Lake. Am. mag. of art, 26:375-61 (Aug.), illus.

A study in appreciation of nature, in relation to intellect
ual, spiritual, and esthetic values.

Miller, Joaquin.

1904 The sea of silence. Sunset, 13:395-404 (Sept.), illus.
An account of the beauties of Crater Lake.

Mills, Enos A.

1917 Crater Lake. In: Your national parks, pp. 137-40, 470-
74, illus. New York, Houghton Mifflin.

Moll, Ernest G.

1934 The poetry of Wizard Island. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:
9-11 (July).

Murphy, Thomas D.

1917 The marvels of Crater Lake. In his: Oregon, the pictur
es q.ue, pp. 81-109, illus. Boston, Page.

c!925 Crater Lake: The jewel of the Cascades. In: Seven won
derlands of the American West, pp. 297-324, illus. Bos
ton, Page.
Account of the author's trip to Crater Lake.

Neighbor, R. W.

1912 The Klaroath and Crater lakes. Overland mo., 2d ser.,
60:393-98 (Oct.), illus.

Ocletree, G. B.

1904 In the Klamath country. Sunset, 13:14-25 (May), 1904.

Contains a descriptive account of a climb to Crater Lake.

Parker, Jamieson.

1921 "The twenty-eighth annual Mazama outing; Crescent Lake to

THE PACIFIC STATES

Parker, Jamieson, continued.

Crater Lake." Mazama 6:3-16, illus.

Account of an outing from Crescent Lake to Crater Lake
National Park.

Powell, E. Alexander.

1914 [Crater Lake], In: End of the trail, pp. 285-86. New
York, Scribner's.

Quinn, Vernon.

1923 [Crater Lake], In his: Beautiful America, pp. 24-45,
illus., map, index. New York, Stokes.

Reik, Henry Ottridge.

1920 Crater Lake National Park. In: A tour of America's nat
ional parks, pp. 103-17, illus. New York, Button.

Sanders, F. C. S.

1916. [Crater Lake], In his: California as a health resort,
pp. 195. San Francisco, Bolte and Braden.

Schmeckebier , L. F.

1912 Our national parks. Natl.geog. mag., 23:531-79( June) , illus .
Includes a description of Crater Lake National Park.

Sholes, C. H.

1923 Thirty years of Mazama outings. Mazama, 6:45-54(Dec. ) , illus.
Crater Lake National Park was among the areas visited.

Simson, C. H.

1932 Crater Lake in winter [snowfall data]. Crater Lake nat.
notes, 5:5-6 (July), illus.

Smith, Warren D.

1935 The canyons of Crater Lake National Park. Crater Lake nat.

notes, 8:1-4 (Aug.), illus.

Godfrey's Glen in Annie Creek, the Pinnacles in Sand Creek,
Iiloafs Hallway in Whitehorse Creek, and Rogue River Canyon, are
described.

Sparrow, Alexander.

1922 Crater Lake National Park. Am. forestry, 28:411-12 (July),
illus .

Steel, William G.

1890 Crater Lake. In his: The mountains of Oregon, pp. 12-33,
illus. Portland, Ore., David Steel.

1915 [Crater Lake National Park]. In: Natl. Park Conf., proc.,

8

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
General

1915, pp. 163-64.

Contains information about the creation of the park; feat
ures, etc.

1916 Report of the superintendent of Crater Lake National Park.
U. S. Dept. Int., rept. 1915, 1:989-1004, maps.

Much information upon many aspects of the park.

1917 Excerpts from reports of supervisors of national parks.
Crater Lake National Park. U.S. Dept. Int., rept., 1:806-
09, map.

General statement supplemented by items of specific inform
ation on various subjects.

Steel, William G. , and Homuth, Earl U.

19S9 The Cleetwood rudder. Crater Lake nat. notes, 2:4-6 (Aug.),

illus.

Account of the first soundings of Crater Lake, 1886.

Story, Isabelle F. , ed.

1936 The Crater Lake National Park. In: Glimpses of our nat
ional parks, pp. 31-33, illus. U. S. Dept. Int., rev. ed.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

Stovall, Dennis H.

1901 Oregon's majestic Crater Lake. Pacific mo., 6:187-89(0ct.) .

Strahorn, Carrie A.

1911 [Crater Lake], In: Fifteen thousand miles by stage, pp.
368-69, illus. New York, Putnam.

Taylor, Frank J. See: Albright, Horace M. , 1928.

Thomson, C. G.

1926 The land of Crater Lake. Oregon business, 4:3, 14, illus.

Tolson, Hillory A. , cornp.

1933 Laws relating to the National Park Service, the national

parks and monuments. 318 pp. U.S. Dept. Int., Nat 1. Park

Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Includes both federal and state legislation.

Trager, Martelle W.

1939 Crater Lake National Park. In her: National parks of

the Northwest , pp. 158-75, illus., map. New York, Dodd, Mead.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Victor, F. F.

1883 Mountaineering in Oregon. Overland mo., 2d ser., 1:295-

301 (Mar.).

Contains references to Crater Lake.

1891 Crater Lake. In: Atlantic arisen, pp. 179-83.

Vinal, William G.

1933 The bearfs ice house. Crater Lake nat. notes,6:10(Sept.) .
How hibernating bears pack ice in chips and sawdust.

Vinton, George M.

1926 Crater Lake — the eighth wonder of the world. Sunset, 6:

26, 67 (June) , illus.

All aspects and features of the lake are discussed.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 Crater Lake National Park. In: Guide to national parks

and monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 72-73.

U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv., Berkeley, Calif.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment. Lists
and describes briefly the principal features. Gives historical
data.

Watson, Winifred.

1896 The Mazamas at Crater Lake. Traveler, (Hov.).

Wayne, Flynn.

1917 The national parks of APBrica. Natl. mag., 46:174-91

(Aug.) , illus.

Includes descriptive notes on Crater Lake National Park.

Wells, Harry L.

1896 Crater Lake. Mazartte, 1:292.

White, T. Brook.

1897 Historian's report for 1896. Mazaina, 1:271-75, illus.
Account of a pilgrimage to Crater Lake and the naming of

Mt . Mazama .

Wilbur, Earl Morse.

1897 Description of Crater Lake. Mazaina , 1:139-50, illus., map.

Williams, Ira A.

1926 Scenes among the high Cascades in central Oregon. Natl.

geog. mag., 23:579-92, (June) illus.

Reference to the Crater Lake region.

10

CRATER IAKE NATIONAL PARK
General

Wilson, Kathryne.

1917 Over the top. What it means to qualify as a mountain goat.

Sunset, 39:38-40, 73-74 (Sept.), illus .

Adventuring in the Crater Lake region and elsewhere.

Wilson, Owen.

1908 A playground on a crater's edge. World1 s work, 16:10250-

10261, illus., maps.

General description; arrival of first launch.

Wood, Ruth K.

1916 Through the Willamette and Rogue river valleys to Crater

Lake. In: The toxrrist's Northwest, pp. 127-59, illus.

New York, Dodd, Mead.

The forces which combine to make Crater Lake unique are
described.

Yard, Robert S.

1916 Crater Lake National Park. In: Glimpses of our national
parks, pp. 27-30, illus. U. S. Dept . Int., Natl. Park
Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Origin of the lake, Indian legend, general description.

1917 What happened to Mount Mazama? In his: The top of the
continent, pp. 140-60, illus. New York, Scribner's.
Account of a visit to Crater Lake and a description of

its features.

1919 [Crater Lake National Park], In his: The book of nat
ional parks, pp. 184-201, illus., maps. New York , Scrib-
ner ' s .

1931 Crater Lake. In: The national parks portfolio, pp. 10-12,
illus., U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington,
Govt. print, off.
Revised by Isabelle F. Story. This book is revised and

reprinted from time to time, contains many fine photographs.

1934 The Crater Lake National Park, Oregon. In: Glimpses

of our national parks, pp. 32-34, illus., rev. ed. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.

1934a Crater Lake. In: Picturesque America, pp. 26-30, illus.,
map. New York, Union Lib, assn.

1936 The Crater Lake National Park, Oregon. In his: Glimpses

of our national paries (Isabelle F. Story, ed.), pp. 31-33,
illus., rev. ed. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. VJ. ,GPO.

11

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
FAUNA

Anonymous

1929 Elk. Crater Lake nat . notes, 2:10 (Aug.), illus.
Twelve elk introduced to the Crater Lake region now num
ber over 200.

1930 Concerning the control and eradication of the mountain
pine beetle. Crater Lake nat. notes, 3:7-11 ( July) , illus.

1932 Birds at Crater Lake National Park. Bird lore, 34:132
(Mar.-Ap.) .
Identification of species of birds in the park.

1935 Winter birds. Crater Lake nat. notes, 6:7 (Ap.).

Bi dwell, Edmund

1921 Bird life of the 1921 annual outing. Mazama, 6:27-28

(Dec. ) , illus.

Crater Lake and adjacent region.

Brode, J. S.

1935 Food habits of Crater Lake fish. Crater Lake nat. notes,

8:11-13 (Aug.) , illus.

Determined by the examination of the stomachs of 40 silver-
sides and rainbow trout.

Constance, Lincoln.

1931 A butterfly pilgrimage. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:3-4
(Aug. ) , illus.

Observations on butterflies at Crater Lake.

Coopey, Ray.

1935 The squirrel and his relatives. Crater Lake nat. notes,

8:3-5 (Sept.) , illus.

The rodents of Crater Lake and their habits.

Evermann, Barton Warren.

1897 U.S. Fish Commission investigates at Crater Lake. Mazama,

1:230-38 (Oct.) , illus.

A study of the waters of the lake preliminary to stocking;
trout were recommended.

Fisher, Don C.

1931 Birds. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:2-3 (July).
Discusses some of the 76 species found in park.

13

THE PACIFIC STATES

Homuth, Earl U.

1930 Bugs. Crater Lake nat. notes, 3:3-7 (July); 5-9 (Aug.),

3 ( Sept . ) .

Eradication, of the bark beetle by the solar method, and
other problems of pest control discussed.

1931 More about bugs. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:9-10 (July).

Libbey, D. S.

1931 Beavers in the park. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:4-5(July).

Colonies of beavers in the park and their method of flooding
large tracts of land for their own use.

Merriam, Clinton H.

1897 The mammals of Mount Mazama, Oregon. Mazama 1:2-4-230

(Oct.) , illus.

A catalog of species prepared by the leader of the U. S.
Biological Survey of 1896 in the Cascade range. Of the 450 speci
mens collected, 61 were obtained in the Crater Lake region*

Quaint ance , Charles W.

1936 Clarkfs nutcrackers banded for study. Crater Lake nat.

notes, 9:1-2 (July), illus.

Bird studies, banding records, 80 species identified in
park.

Scheffer, Theo. H.

1929 Mountain beavers in the Pacific Northwest. Their habits,
economic status, and control. U.S. Dept. Agric., Farm
er's bul., 1598, 18 pp., illus., map.

Solinsky, Frank.

1931 Protection for the coyotes. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:11

(July) , illus.

Coyotes deserve protection; vices offset by virtues.

Wright, George M. , and others.

1933 [Crater Lake National Park]. In their: Fauna of the

national parks of the United States, pp. 45, 49, 120, 121-
123. U.S. Natl. Park Serv. , contrib. of Wild Life Survey,
Fauna, ser. , 1. Washington, G-ovt. print, off.

Wynd, F. Lyle.

1929 Eagles. Crater Lake nat. notes, v. 2 (Sept.).
Description of the golden and bald eagles around Crater Lake.

1930 Wolves. Crater Lake nat. notes, 3:4 (Aug.).

The first authoritatively recorded observation of a wolf in
the pack.

14

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
FLORA

Anonymous

1916 Forests of Crater Lake National Park. 39 pp.

1929 Castle crest garden. Crater Lake nat. notes, 2:1-2 (Aug.),
illus .
Account of the flower fields of the park.

1931 Another page from the past discovered. Crater Lake nat.

notes, 4:1-2 (Aug.) .

Account of the discovery and removal of a carbonized sec
tion of sugar pine found under 55 feet of colvanic ash and pumice.

Applegate, Elmer I.

1934 Applegate Ts paint-brush on Applegate peak. Crater Lake
nat. notes, 7:10 (Sept.).

How this plant, Castilleja applegatei , was named.

1934a The flora of Wizard Island. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:
7-8 (July).

1935 Latest flowering plants in Crater Lake National Park. Cra
ter Lake nat. notes, 8:9-10 (Aug.), illus.

1935a Monkey-flowers of Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes,

8:9-10 (July).

The various species of the monkey-flower are here described
together with their habitat.

1935b S'ome fruits of Crater Lake plants. Crater Lake nat. notes,

8:6-9 (Sept.) , illus.

This article discussed the 21 genera. with 35 species of
fleshy or berry-like fruit found in the Crater Lake area.

1936 Some plants common to Crater Lake National Park and the
Lava Beds National Monument. Crater Lake nat. notes,
9:3-4 (July).

Campbell, Berry.

1934 The ecology of Garfield Peak Trail. Crater Lake nat. notes,

7:10-11 (Aug.).

The plant cover on Garfield peak, and how this originally
bare region came to be clothed with vegetation.

Clark, E. L.

1933 Red snow. Crater Lake nat. notes, 6:4 (July).

15

THE PACIFIC STATES

Constance, Linooln.

1931 Ghost plants. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:6-7 (Aug.), illus.
Information upon these plants, most of which belong to the

heath family.

1932 Monkey flowers. Crater Lake nat. notes, 5:7-9(Aug.), illus.
1932a Notes on flowers. Crater Lake net. notes, 5: 7-8 ( July) , illus.

Coville, Frederick V.

1897 The August vegetation of Mount Mazama, Oregon. Mazama 1:

170-203 (Oct.) , illus.

Enumeration of the species with identification.

Gilbert, Clyde E.

1931 Snow pressure bend. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:7 (Sept.),

illus.

How trees on the rim of Crater Lake are bent and flattened
by the weight of snow.

Libbey, D. S.

1931 Carbonized wood — an idea from the past. Crater Lake

nat. notes, 4:3-4 (July).

Large logs found deeply buried under volcanic tuff.

Morse, Elizabeth E.

1931 The spined puffball. Nature mag., 17:382-83 (June), illus.

Per not, J. F.

1916 Forests of Crater Lake National Park. 40 pp., illus. ,W. ,GPO.
Contains description of the forest cover and of the principal
species.

Smrth, Warren D.

1934 A buried log in Rogue River tuffs and agglomerates. Crater

Lake nat. notes, 7:11 (Sept.), illus.

The author describes a newly discovered buried log-site at
the crossing of Diamond Lake road and Rogue River near the park.

Solinsky, Frank,

1931 A challenge. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:6 (July), illus.

A gigantic white pine, 1000 years old, over 23 feet in
height, is described.

Wynd, F. Lyle.

1928 Hemlocks and firs of Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes, v.l: (Aug

This article briefly describes several species of hemlocks that

occur in the park.

16

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
Flora

1929 PoisonI Crater Lake nat. notes, 2:8 (Aug.)» illus.

An account of the hellebore plant and how its poison oper
ates.

1929a More poisonl Crater Lake nat. notes, v.2, 2 pp. (Sept.),

illus .

Describes the poisonous Aconitum coluinbipnum, and refutes
common belief that animals will not eat poisonous plants.

1929b The early flowers. Crater Lake nat. notes, v.2 (July),
illus.

1929c Some late flowers. Crater Lake nat. notes, v.2 (Sept.).

Description of some of the perennials in bloom in September

1937 The floral wealth of Crater Lake. Nat. hist., 40:419-27

(June) , illus.

Extensive and detailed information on park flowers, of
which 426 species are present.

17

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK

GEOLOGY

Anonymous

1916 The Crater Lake National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist.

Preservn. Soc., 21st aim. rept., pp. 687-89.

An account of the formation of the crater and lake; sev
eral Indian legends recounted.

1928 Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes, v. I, 4 pp. (Aug.),
illus .

Discussion of the several theories concerning the dis
position of the original mountain now displaced by Crater Lake.

1928a Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes, v.I, 2 pp. (Sept.),

illus .

Gives facts about the lake proper; its water supply, qual
ity, depth, and area; effect of the weather relative to temperature
of the water; water level changes throughout the year; evaporation
and seepage.

1928b Look out below. Crater Lake nat. notes, 1:5-6 (Sept. 1)

How small rocks dislodged from the crater's rim may create
a sizable rock-slide at the lakeTs surface.

1929 Mineral springs. Crater Lake nat. notes, v. II, (Sept.).
Recent discovery of several minQral springs in Annie Creek

Canyon,

1930 A glaciated surface. Crater Lake nat. notes, 3:10 (Aug.).
Explains why glacial striae and polish are not commonly

seen in the park,

1933 "Graupel — the soft hail of meteorologists." Crater Lake
nat. notes, 6:13 (Ap.).
Cause of the soft hail, or snow pellets, that fall at

Crater Lake.

i

1933a How fast is the rim retreating? Crater Lake nat. notes,
6:2, (July).
Estimates that rim has receded 10 feet since 1907.

Allen, John Eliot.

1935 Some waterfalls in Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes,

8:6-8 (July) , illus.

Explains the geologic origin of Crater Lake waterfalls,
with tabulated data on them,

19

THE PACIFIC STATES

Anderson, Tempest.

1903 Crater Lake, Oregon, U.S.A. In: Volcanic studies in many

lands, pp. 160-63, illus. London, John Murray.

Argues that the crater was formed by explosion, not sub
sidence.

Atwood, W. R.

1931 Glaciation of Mount Mazama. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:

3-5 (Sept. ) , illus.

Alternate glacial and volcanic deposits found inside the
crater rim.

Atwood, Wallace W. , jr.

1935 Crater Lake National Park. Jour. geol. 43:142-68 (Feb.-
Mar.) , illus. , map.

1935a The glacial history of an extinct volcano, Crater Lake Nat
ional Park. Smithsn. Instn., ann. rept., pp. 303-320, illus.
A remarkable descriptive article, emphasizing glaciology,

and vulcanology.

Beckit, H. 0.

1913 The United States national parks. Geog. jour. 42:333-42

(Oct.), illus., maps.

A geological and geographical description of Yellowstone
and Crater Lake national parks.

Bonney, T. G.

1912 Crater-Lakes. In: Volcanoes, pp. 154-59. London, John

Murray,

Erode, J. S.

1933 The pools of Wizard Island. Crater Lake nat. notes, 6:5-6
(Sept.) , illus.

A geological and biological description of the pools is given,

1934 The waters of Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:4-5
(Sept.) , illus.

Writer explains his method in estimating that it took 730
years to fill the crater with the lake.

Brogan, Phil R.

1930 Rock tells the story. Mid-Pacific mag., 40:31-34 (July),

illus .

A description of the formation of the Cascade Range, with
special reference to the Crater Lake region.

Chamberlain, J.3P.

1914 Crater Lake. Jour, geol., 13:9-12 (Sept.).

20

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Clark, E. L.

1932 Columnar structure in our lavas. Crater Lake nat. notes,
5:6 (Aug.) , illus.

Explains the elongated columns of rock found in the park.

1933 Three successive records of glaciation. Crater Lake nat.
notes, 6:6-7, (Aug.), illus.

Study of the glaciations along the inner rim slope near
Glacier Point.

Davis , William M.

1902 [Crater Lake], In his: Elemental physical geography, pp.
222-223. Boston, Ginn & co.

Diller, Joseph S.

1897 The geology of Crater Lake. Mazaroa, 1:161-70 (Oct.), illus
A non-technical account by the leader of the first geolog
ical expedition to the lake.

1901 Oregon's Crater Lake. In: Descriptive geography from
original sources. North America, pp. 166-67. London,
Adain and Charles Black.

Diller, Joseph S., and Patton, Horace B.

1902 The geology and petrography of Crater Lake National Park.
167 pp., illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Two scientific papers. The first treats of the geology
of Mount Mazama and its collapse; the second deals with, the petro
graphy, and gives a special description of the various rocks oc
curring in the park.

Diller, Joseph S.

1912 Geological history of Crater Lake. U.S. Dept . Int.,
31 pp., illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1923 Did Crater Lake, Oregon, originate by a volcanic subsid
ence or an explosive eruption? Jour, geol., 31:226-27
(Ap.-May) , illus.
Argues that Mt. Mazama was not blown up, but engulfed.

Dutton, Carl E.

1935 Unusual ridges of rock fragments. Crater Lake nat. notes,
8:10-11 (July).

Explains the sorting and accumulation of loose material
into shore ridges below the Watchman and HillLian Peak.

1936 Hillman Peak [A geological explanation]. Crater Lake nat.
notes, 9:5-6 (July), illus.

21

THE PACIFIC STATES

Evans, D. L.

1932 Forgotten crater. Crater Lake nat . notes, 5:8-9 (Sept.),

illus .

A geological explanation of Red Cone.

1932a The receding rim of Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes,

5:7 (Aug.).

The author describes the wearing down of the west rim by
sliding snow, the prying force of ice, the sandblast of wind, and
the rolling boulders loosened by ground squirrels and chipmunks.

Frost, W. T.

1937 Snowfall-^precipitation and lake levels. Crater Lake nat.

notes, 10:3-7 (June), illus.

Through a careful analysis of precipitation data over a
number of years in relationship to data on the seasonal variations
in the lake level, the writer kopes to account for the water supply
of Crater Lake.

Gilbert, Clyde E.

1930 Volcanic bombs of Mt. Mazama. Crater Lake nat. notes, 3:

9-10 (Aug.).

Discusses the nature of these volcanic bombs.

Gow, R. M.

1928 Oregon the beautiful. Country life, 54:50-52 ( June ), illus .
Includes an account of the lava formation of Crater Lake.

Hornuth, Earl U.

1928 "Sulphur" on Crater Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes, v.I(July).
Explains presence of sulphur upon the water.

Lee, Willis T.

1926 [Crater Lake], In his: Stories in stone, pp. 36,162,176.

New York, Van Nostrand.

Discusses the origin of the mountain and the causes that
resulted in the subsequent crater.

Leiberg, John B.

1900 Cascade Range and Ashland forest reserves and adjacent re
gions. U.S. geol. surv. , 21st ann. rept., 1899-1900, pp.
219-498, illus., maps, index.

This extensive report includes a study of the region sur
rounding Crater Lake.

Leslie, Dale.

1929 Fantastic carvings by erosive agents [on the rim of Crater
Lake]. Crater Lake nat. notes, 2:3 (Aug.).

22

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
G-eology

1929a Pumice and scoria [found around the crater rim]. Crater
Lake nat. notes, v.2, (Sept.).

Libbey, D. S.

1931 My kingdom for a horse. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:2-3
(Aug. ) , illus .

Includes a discussion of the paleobotany of the Crater
Lake region.

1931a The Pinnacles. Crater Lake nat. notes, 4:1-2 (Sept.).

How these rock pillars were formed as a result of volcanic
action, glaciation, and erosion.

1932 Cave. Crater Lake nat. notes, 5:4-5 (Sept.), illus.
Explains the chemical action resulting in a 200-foot -long

cavern between Mount Scott and the lake.

1933 Carbonized tree found within the rim. Crater Lake nat.
notes, 6:3-6 (Aug.), illus.

1933a Rare crystal form of specular hematite found at Crater Lake.
Crater Lake nat. notes, 6:18 (July).

Long, Albert E.

1932 The rejected loaf. Crater Lake nat. not^s, 5 :9( Sept. ), illus
Description of a volcanic bomb 9 feet in diameter and

11 feet long, resembling a cracked loaf of bread.

Louderback, George Davis.

1905 The Mesozoic of southwestern Oregon. Jour. geol. , 13:

514-55 (July-Aug.).

Study of the Mesozoic horizon near Crater Lake National
Park.

Moll, E. G.

1934 The Lake. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:6-7 (Sept.).

The writer finds a fundamental agreement between the scien
tific and the legendary account of the origin of Crater Lake.

1935 The crumbling rim. Crater Lake nat. notes, 8:11 (July).
Mass of rock split off half-way between Palisade Point and

the Palisades.

Moody, Warren G.

1933 Llao's hallway. Crater Lake nat. notes, 6:5-6 (July) , illus.
Describes and explains the V-shaped gorge, caused by the

rushing waters of White Horse Creek.

23

THE PACIFIC STATES

Moore, Bernard N.

1934 Deposits of possible nuee ardente origin in the Crater Lake

region, Oregon. Jour. geol. , 42:358-75 (June).

Recent pumice deposits, which had their origin in a crater
of old Mount Mazama, are described and their origin discussed.

Fatten, Horace B. See: Diller, Joseph S., 1902.
Renner, George T. See: White, Charles L., 1936.

Russell, Israel C.

1895 Lakes of North America. 125 pp., illus . , maps. Boston,

Ginn and co.

A discussion of modifications of topography due to glacial
and volcanic agencies and to movements of elevation and depression
in the earth's crust which cause the formation of lakes. Specific
mention is made of Crater Lake.

1910 Crater Lake , Oregon. In his: Volcanoes of North America,
pp. 235-36. New York, Macmillan.

Sims on, Charles H.

1933 Crater Lake in winter. Crater Lake nat. notes, 6:5-4(Ap.).
Reports of snow depths for the season 1932-1933 and winter

of 1934.

1933a Tule fog of the Klamath basin. Crater Lake nat. notes,
6:13 (Ap.).

Smith, J. S.

1929 Color in glacial lakes. Yosemite riat. notes, 8:89 (Sept.).

Explains the phenomenon of light refraction causing the
blue appearance of the water. Reference to Crater Lake.

Smith, Warren D.

1934 The story of Mount Mazama. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:1-3
(Sept. ) , illus.

Composition, distribution, and texture of materials; the
importance of geological line of pattern and the relative ages of
materials and happenings, are discussed.

1935 Discovery of the fumaroles at the pinnacles, Wheeler Canyon.
Crater Lake nat. notes, 8:1-2 (Sept.), illus.

A study of the pinnacles discovered near the east entrance
to park points out their similarity to the fumaroles in the hot
sand flow of Katmai in Alaska.

Smith, Warren D. See: Swartzlow, Carl R. , 1936.

24

CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Stanton, W. Layton.

1931 Pacific belt of volcanic activity. Crater Lake nat. notes,

4:12 (July).

Describes the zone curves in the belt of volcanic activity
that circles the Pacific Ocean and passes through the Crater Lake
region.

Swartzlow, Carl R.

1934 The geology of the Garfield trail. Crater Lake nat. notes,

7:3-6 (Aug.), illus.

The rock formations and mineral quartz seen along the Gar-
field trail; erupted materials, erosion, and color changes are ex
plained.

1934 Speculation on specularite. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:8
(Sept.) .

Swartzlow, Carl R. , and Smith, Warren D.

1936 Mount Mazama; explosion versus collapse. Geol. Soc. Am.,

bul., 47:47-55 (Dec.), illus.

Argues that the crater was caused by explosion, not subsid
ence.

Waesche, Hugh H.

1934 The geology of Wizard Island. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:
2-5 (July).

1934a The Phantom Ship loses a sail. Crater Lake nat. notes, 7:9

(Sept.).

Describes Phantom Ship as a remnant of a projecting promon
tory on the lake rim' sculptured by natural erosional forces.

White, Charles L., and Renner, George T.

1936 Crater Lake. In: Geography, an introduction to human eco
logy , p. 210. New York, Applet on, Century.

Williams, Howell.

1933 Mount Thielson, a dissected Cascade volcano. Univ. Calif.,

Dept. Geol., bul., 23:195-813, illus., map.

Structure, growth, petrography, and chemical composition of
a mountain 12 miles north of the park.

Wood, R. 1C.

1916 Willamette Valley to the south. In: Tourists' Northwest.

Contains information on the geologic formation of Crater Lake;
many Indian legends concerning the lake are cited.

25

THE PACIFIC STATES

Wynd, F. Lyle.

1930 [The Devil's Backbone], Crater Lake nat. notes, 3:2(Aug.)

The striated and polished rock surface where the glacier
passed between Llao Rock and Hlllaan Peak.

26

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,

Description, Mining, etc.) -------- 5

GEOLOGY AND RELATED SCIENCES 15

FLORA WD FAUNA 23

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT

GENERAL
History, Travel, Description, Mining, etc.

Anonymous

1875 The California desert basin. Overland mo. , 15:17-23 (July)

Description of the basin embracing the Colorado Desert,
Mojave Desert, and Death Valley.

1890 Death Valley. Mining and scientific press, 61:395.

1895 In Death Valley. Pacific rural press, 49: £41, illus.

Brief comment on the regions where water can be had, and
where the soil has less of the pernicious salt.

1907 Scenes in Death Valley. Pacific rural press, 72:129

(Mar. 2), illus.

Brief description of the region, and comments on its tragic
history.

1907a Lowest point in the United States. Natl. geog. mag. , 18:
824-25 (Dec.).
Brief description of Death Valley. *

1927 See Death Valley and (don't) die. Lit. dig., 94:23
(Sept. 3), illus.

1933 Death Valley becomes a national monument. Am. forests,
39:178 (Ap.).

1933a Death Valley, a national monument. Rev. of rev., 87:43
(May).

1934 Death Valley beckons. Standard Oil bul. , 21:2-6 (Jan.),
illus.

1935 Guide for motorists in Death Valley National Monument,

31 pp. Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1938 Death Valley National Monument. Dept. Int., Natl. Park
Serv., 29 pp., illus., map, bibliog. Washington, Govt.
print off.

Compendium of information for the general public. One of
the descriptive pamphlets on individual parks and monuments pub
lished from 1916 to 1919 as a General Information Series; from
1920 to 1927 as a Rules and Regulations Series; from 1928 to 1933
as a Circulars Series, and from 1934 to date without series title.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Allred, J.

1926 Driving the last mule team across Death Valley. Pop. mech. ,
45:610-14 (Ap.).

Arthur, Charlotte

1932 Castle in the desert. Country life, 62:35-38, 76-78 (June-
July) , illus.
Brief remarks about Scotty and his partner Johnson, and

detailed description of their castle in Death Valley.

Austin, Mary

1903 [Death Valley.] In: The land of little rain, pp. 3-21,

illus. New York, Houghton, Mifflin.

Flora and fauna, general description, anecdotes, and person
al impressions.

Barlett, W. P.

1927 Happenings. Los Angeles Times -Mirror press, 267 pp.
Contains a number of short stories and anecdotes, having

Death Valley as a setting.

Bechdolt, Frederick R.

1919 How Death Valley was named. Sat. eve. post, 192:30-34, 66

(July 19), illus.

An account of the first emigrant party (1849), and its suf
fering and loss of life* in the valley.

1922 How Death Valley wcxs named. In his: Vftien the west was
young, pp. 3-24. New York, Century.

Bell, Horace

1930 Peg-leg Smith, the Death Valley party, and John Goller's

mine. In his: On the old west coast, pp. 136-50. New

York, Win. Morrow & cc.

Detailed account of the artistic old liar, Peg-leg Smith,
and heroic John Goller and his mine.

Brier, John W.

1903 The Death Valley party of 1849. Out west, 18:326-55 (Mar.),
illus .

The adventures and hardships of the Death Valley party
known as Jayhawkers .

1911 The argonauts of Death V-illey. The Grizzly Bear, v.9, no.
2 (June). Los Angeles, Calif.

Burdick, Arthur J.

1904 Death Valley. In his: The mystic mid-region, pp. 5,6,68,

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT
General

103,142,146,149,150,172-185, illus. New York, Knicker
bocker press.
Historical, geographical, and scientific observations.

Burns , Celette W.

1930 Plan now to visit Death Valley. Sunset, 65:15-17 (Nov.),

illus.

Information for prospective visitors to Death Valley.

Carr, Harry

1932 Death Valley. In: The west is still wild, pp. 235-44,
illus. New York, Houghton, Mifflin.

Carter, Oscar S. C.

1902 Death Valley, California. Franklin Inst. jour., 154:193-99
(Sept.).

A general description of Death Valley, the animals, vegeta
tion, geology, etc.

Chalfant, W. A.

1922 The story of Inyo. 333 pp. Chicago, W. S. Conkey.

Physical features of the Death Valley and Owens Lake region,
the association of the valley with the Piute Indians, and the later
occupation and development of this territory by white pioneers.

1930 Death Valley, the facts. Palo Alto, Stanford Univ. press,
147 pp., illus., index.
History, climatology, geography, geology, flora and fauna.

Chase, Joseph S.

1919 California desert trails. 401 pp., illus., index. Boston,

Houghton, Mifflin.

The regions described in this work are contiguous on the
north to the Mojave Desert and to Death Valley National Monument.

Clyde, Norman

1930 High- low. Touring topics, 22:30-31 (Nov.).

Account of a tramp from the summit of Mt. Whitney to Death
Valley in slightly more than seven hours.

Collins, Holdridge 0.

1919 The great deserts of Nevada and California. Southern Calif.

Acad. Sci., bul. , pt.l, 18:29-36 (Jan.), illus.

The barren wastes of southeastern California and southwest
ern Nevada, including Death Valley National Monument, are described.

E PACIFIC STATES

Cone , Mary

1876 Two years in California. 238 pp., illus., map. Chicago,

S. C. Griggs.

Contains extensive notes on Death Valley.

Coolidge, Dane

1932 Death Valley' Scotty. In: Fighting men of the west, pp. 303-

36, illus. New York, E. P. Button.

A biographical sketch of Walter Scott (Death Valley Scotty) ,
believed to have found a v-°ry rich gold-bearing vein somewhere in
Death Valley.

1937 Death Valley prospectors. 177 pp., illus. New York, Button,

Cooper , Lloyd

1926 Some lucky camera-shots in Death Valley. Photo-era mag. ,
57:79-81, illus.

C ovi lie , Fr eder i ck V .

1892 The Panamint Indiruis of California. Am., anthropologist, 5:

351-361.

General observations about Panamint Indians, and detailed
discussion of their food problem.

Dart on, Nelson H.

1910 The Southwest; its splendid natural resources, agricultural

wealth, and scenic beauty. Natl. geog. mag., 21:631-665,

map, illus.

Contains information on Death Valley.

Davis, Alfred

1907 Death Valley. Overland mo. , 2d ser. , 50:81-83 (July).

De Groot , Henry

1886 Crossing the California Sahara. Overland mo., 8:52-57 (July).

Historical observations, geography, flora and fauna of Death
Valley.

Dix, R. S.

1891 Death Valley.

C liaut auquan , 13:689-633 ( Aug . ) , map .

History, geography, minerals, climate, and geology are dis
cussed.

.

Drury, Aubrey

1935 The Mojave Desert and Death Valley. In: California; an
intimate guide, pv. 138-148, New York, Harper.

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT
General

Fairbanks, E. E.

1932 Forty-niners starved in the midst of plenty. Sci. Am. ,

146:348-9 (June), illus.

Death Valley need not have been a cemetery for many forty-
niners had they known of the food values in many of its trees,
shrubs, reptiles, and insects.

Foshag, William F.

1924 World's biggest borax deposits. Engineering and mining

jour., 118:421, illus.

Borax deposits actively being worked in Death Valley are
discussed.

Fountain, Paul

1906 California. In: The eleven eaglets of the West, pp» 1-

40. New York, Dutton.

Contains some information on Death Valley.

Froth inghani, Robert

1932 [Death Valley.]. In his: Trails through the golden West,

pp. 135-67. New York, McBride. Historical and descrip
tive material.

Gannett , Henry

189S Death Valley. In his: North America: The United States,

2:84-86, illus. London, Stanford.

Description of Death Valley.

Glass, H. L.

1930 Borax ore preparation in Death Valley. Chemical and metal
lurgical engineering, 37:296-98 (May), illus.
Refining process is explained.

Graves , Jackson A.

1930 Death Valley, complete desolation and yet attractive. In

his: California memories, pp. 303-19, illus.

An account of an automobile trip in Death Valley.

Grey, Zane

1928 [Death Valley.] In his: Tales of lonely trails, pp. 373-95.

New York, Harper's.

An account of a pack trip through Death Valley.

Har court , Carmen

1898 Death Valley and the Mojave Desert. Overland mo., 2d ser. ,
31:488-495 (June), illus.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Hart , Edward

1903 Death Valley, Calif., and its borax industry. Am. Ceramic

Soc . Trans . , 5 : 64-73 .

A speech describing a journey through the Valley and dis
cussing the borax industry.

Hawkes, Ellison

c!935 California. In: New guide to the Pacific Coast, Santa Fe

route, pp. 158-261, illus. Chicago, Rand McNally.

Contains description of Death Valley.

Hogner , Dorothy C .

1938 Death Valley. In her: Westward, high, low, and dry, pp.
271-75. New York, Dutton.

Huff or d, David Andrew

1902 Death Valley; Swamper Ike's traditional lore; why, where,
hoiv? 43 pp., illus. Los Angeles, Hufford.

Johnson, Clifton

1922 ("Death Valley.] In his: What to see in America, p. 485.
New York, Macmillan.

Johnston, Philip

1934 Death Valley Canyons. West ways (formerly Touring topics),

26:10 (Mar.), illus. Los Angeles, Automobile Club of

Southern California.

Origin of place-names, and general description.

1937 Along the eastern rim of Death Valley. Westways, vol. 29,
no. 1, (Jan.), map, illus. Los Angeles, Automobile Club
of Southern California.

Koch, Ired W.

1893 Through Death Valley. A brief account of a trip from Dag-
gett to Furnace Creek. Sierra Club bul., 1:40-53 (June).

Eroeber, A. L.

1925 [Death Valley Indians.] In his: Handbook of the Indians
of California, pp. 590, illus. Smithsn. Instn. , Bur. of
Amer. Eth. , bul. 73. Washington, Govt. Print. Off.
The Koso (Coso or Panaraint) tribe formerly lived on Cotton-
wood Creek in Death Vallejr, and numbered 100 to 150.

Lee , Bourke

1929 Death Valley. Sat. eve. post, 202: 3-5, 98, 102, (Aug. 10),
illus .

8

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT
General

1930 Death Valley. 210pp., bibliog. , illus. New York, Mac-
mi 11 an.

Geographic description, flora and fauna, geology, and some
thing of the human history of the valley, including a chapter on
Paiute lore.

1932 Death Valley men. 319 pp. New York, Macmillan.

Lowden, S. W.

1936 State completes extensive surfacing project on Death Valley
highways. State Dept. of Pub. Works (Feb.), illus. Sac
ramento, Calif.

1936 Death Valley roads restored after summer cloudbursts.

State Dept. of Pub. Works (Oct.), illus. Sacramento, Calif.

Lummis, Charles L.

1925 Death Valley. In his : Mesa, canyon and pueblo, pp. 63-79,
illus. New York, Century.

Manly, William L.

1927 Death Valley in '49. 307 pp., map, index, illus. The

Lakeside classics. Chicago, R. R. Donnelley & sons. Also

published in 1894, New York, Wallace Hebberd.

The author, one of a party of emigrants seeking a short

route to the coast, relates hardships encountered in the trek across

the uncharted desert.

1936 First through the valley of death. Westways, 28:22-24

(Sept.). Los Angeles, Automobile Club of Southern Cali
fornia.

Martin, Al H.

1911 The land of the burning silence out West, pp. 99-100.
A legend of Death Valley Indians.

McGee, W. J.

1898 Thirst in the desert. Atlantic mo. , 81:483-488 (Ap.).

A vivid account of the hardships of travel in Death Valley
and other desert regions.

Means , T. H.

1932 Death Valley. Sierra Club bul. , 17:67-76 (Feb.), illus.

Its attractions as a winter resort, and its climate, flora
and fauna, water supply, geology, scenery, history, arid explorations
are described.

THE P AC ID1 1C STATES

Merriam, C. H.

1891 Death Valley. Forest and stream, 38:83 (Aug. 20).

Milham, C. G.

1928 The paradise of Death Valley. Country life, 53:64-65
(Jan. ) , illus .

Miller , George

1919 A trip to Death Valley. Hist. Soc. Southern Calif., arm.

pub. , part 2, pp. 56-64.

A trip in search of the Gunsight mine, which was originally
prospected for silver by W. H. Rhodes , one of the survivors of an
emigrant band that crossed Death Valley in 1849.

Nye, William

1886 A winter among the Piutes. Overland ino., 2d ser. , 7:293-298

(Mar.).

Descriptive account of the valley and the nearby Indians.

The writer was one of a prospecting expedition in 1865.

Overholt , Alma

1929 Death Valley from the air. Sunset, 62:34-36 (Jan.), illus.

1930 Death Valley's road to nowhere. World's work, 59:48-51
(July), illus.

How H. W. Eichbaum. built a road into Death Valley and estab
lished a resort at Stove Pipe Wells.

1930 Motoring through Death Valley. Travel, 55:36-38 (Oct.),
illus.

1931 Famous desert of the cinema. World today, pp. 32-43 (July).

Pack, Arthur N.

1928 Into the valley of death. Nature mag., 12:228-30, 267-68

(Oct.) , illus.

Description of the region, its roads and resorts.

Paine, Ralph D.

1907 The men of the untamed desert. In his: The greater America,
pp. 298-320, illus. New York, Outing.

Palmer , Andrew H.

1922 Death Valley - the hottest known region. Mo. weather rev.,

49:10-13 (Jan.), maps, bibliog. , illus.

Description and information on many features of the region.

10

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT
General

Perkins, Edna B.

1922 The white heart of Mojave, 229 pp., illus . New York, Boni

and Liver ight .

An account of a trip to Death Valley and the adjacent coun
try, made by two women and a guide.

Powell, E. Alexander
1914 [Death Valley. ]

In his: The end of the trail, pp. 172-78. New York, Scrib-

ner ' s .

Rensch, Hero E. and Ethel G.

1932 Inyo County. In their: Historic spots in California; the

southern counties, pp. 18-34. Stanford Univ., Stanford

Univ. press.

An account of the Manly and Jayhawker parties in fceath Val
ley, and also how the valley obtained its name.

Rinehart , Robert E.

1909 Death Valley borax beds. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 54:356-

62 (Oct.) , illus.

A description of the borax industry in Death Valley.

Sanders, F. C. S.

1916 [Death Valley.] In his: California as a health resort,
p. 24. San Francisco, Bolte and Braden.

Saunders , Charles E.

1919 Lowest, dryest , hottest spot in America. Travel, 34:25-28

(Dec. ) , illus.

A description of Death Valley.

Shepstone , Harold J.

1928 Amazing Death Valley. Contemp. rev., 134:633-39.

A description of Death Valley and its points of interest.

Spears , John Randolph

1892 Illustrated sketches of Death Valley and other borax des
erts of the Pacific Coast. 226 pp., map, illus. Chicago
and New York, Rand, McNally.

Stewart , Robert

1928 Making a resort of Death Valley. Mentor, 16:41-48 (Aug.),
illus .

11

THE PACIFIC STATES

Strahorn, Carrie A.

1911 [Death Valley.] In her: Fifteen thousand miles by stage,

pp. 395-397. New York, Putnam's.

Descriptive notes.

Taylor, Frank J.

1930 Death Valley. Motorland, 27:9-12, 14 (Nov.), illus.

Taylor, Mace

1939 Death Valley. Desert plant life, 11:105-6 (June-July).
Death Valley as seen by a motorist.

Toll, Roger W.

1931 Dsath Valley [a popular description]. Am. civic assn. ,
3:35-40.

Tolman, C. F.

1924 Valley of death and prosperity. Mentor, 12:55 (July),

illus .

Article tells b.ow Death Valley earned its name.

Tolson, Hillory A.

1933 [Legislation relating to Death Valley National Monument.]

In: Laws relating to the National Park Service, the national

parks and monuments, p. 318. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park

Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Includes both federal and state legislation. A supplement
covers legislation up to July 1, 1936.

Van Dyke , Dix

1930 Dauth Valley. Desert, 1:106-7 (Jan.), illus.

Von Blom, J. L.

1926 A "Garden of Allah" in Death Valley. Sci . Am., 134:242-3

Up.).

An article on the future promise of Death Valley.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others

1938 Death Valley National Monument. In: Guide to national

parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 25-26.

U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. (Berkeley, Calif.).

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment. Lists
and describes briefly the principal features. Gives historical data.

Wackman, Howard

1920 The Argonauts of Death Valley. Grizzly bear, 27:4,9 (May),

illus.

An account of an ill-fated emigrant party crossing Death Val
ley, led by Captain Hunt.

12

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT
General

West on, Edward

1937 Seeing California with Edward West on: Death Valley. West-
ways, vol. 29, no. 11 (Nov.), illus. Beverly Hills , Calif.,
Automobile Club of So. Calif.

Wi Hainan, G-lenn D.

1929 Impressions of Death Valley trails. Calif, real estate mag.,
9:48-9 (Feb.); 57-8, 76 (Har.); 52-3, 76 (Ap.), illus.

Wilson, Neill C.'

1928 Telescope peak from Death Valley. Sierra Club bul. , 13:36-9

(Feb.) , illus.

Description of Telescope Peak and the adjacent Panamint Moun
tains.

1937 Silver stampede; the career of Death Valley's hell camp, old
Panamint. 319 pp., illus. New York, Macmillan.
An account of the early days of Panamint , a silver-mining

town.

Wolff, John E.

1931 Route of the Manly party of 1849-50 in leaving Death Valley

for the Coast. 29 pp., map, illus. Santa Barbara, Calif.,

Pacific Coast pub. co.

Worth, Pauline W.

1909 Death Valley Slim and other stories. 43 pp., illus. Los

Angeles, Segnogram press.

(Partly reprinted from Out west magazine and The western
world.)

Yeager, Dorr G.

1937 Bob Flame in Death Valley. New York, Dodd, Mead. 238 pp.,

map, illus.

This third volume on the adventures of a national park ranger
supplies much information about the history, geography, and inhabi
tants of this region.

13

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT

GEOLOGY AND RELATED SCIENCES

Anonymous

c!916 Mines and mineral resources of Alpine, Inyo, and Mono coun
ties, Calif. State Mineralogist's rept., 1915-6 State
Mining Bureau. Sacramento, Calif.

1926 Year book no. 25. Washington, Carnegie Inst., 435 pp.,
index.

A report on the Death Valley and Panamint Valley faults.

1927 Pictures of American climate. Sci. Am., 136:109 (Feb.),
illus.

Contains a short discussion of the climate of Death Valley.

Ball, S. H.

1907 A geologic reconnaissance in southwestern Nevada and east
ern California. U. S. House doc. no. 61, 59th Congress,
2d sess., ser. 5161, vol. 58, 218 pp., illus., map, index.

Bentz, G.

1913 Prospecting for potash in Death Valley. Calif, mining
world, 38:855-6.

Blackwelder, Eliot

1930 Geology of Death Valley. Geol. Soc. of Am., bul., 41:150

(Mar.), p. 150.

Abstract of a paper read before the Geological Society of
America.

1933 Lake Manly, an extinct lake in Death Valley. Geog. rev. ,
23:464-71 (July).
A geological description of Lake Manly.

Boyd, Julian

1929 The saline deposits of Death Valley. Mining jour., 13:7-9,

14-16 (Oct. 30)', illus.

Location and depth of salt beds, and an account of the discov
ery of borax.

Campbell, Marius R.

1902 Reconnaissance of the borax deposits of Death Valley and the

Mohave Desert. U. S. Geol. Surv. , bul. 200, 22 pp., map,

index. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Geological, topographical, and mineralogical information.

15

THE PACIFIC STATES

Campbell, Marius R.

1903 Basin-range structure in the Death Valley region of south
eastern California. Am. geol., 31:311-2 (May).
Although minor folding was observed in the Death Valley

region. The mountains are generally composed of huge blocks of strate

that have been strongly tilted and then eroded into their present

forms .

1903 Borax deposits of eastern California. U. S. Geol. Surv. ,
bul. 213 (Contributions to economic geology for 1902) pp.
401-5.
Description of the original method of obtaining borax in

California.

Chapman, Robert H.

1906 The deserts of Nevada and Death Valley. Natl. geog. mag.,

17:482-497 (Sept.).

An address to the National Geographic Society.

Davis, W. M.

1931 The Santa Catalina Mountain, Arizona. Am. jour, sci., 222:

289-317 (Oct.), illus., bibliog.

Reference is ma^e to the geological structure of Death Val
ley and the surrounding mountains.

Drake, Noah Fields

1897 The topography of California. Jour, geol., 5:563-78

(Sept .-Oct.) , map.

Death Valley is included in the study.

Eakle, Arthur S. , V/aring, Clarence A., and Hugenin, Emile
1919 Mines and mineral resources of Inyo and Mono counties.

Calif. State Mining Bur., State Mineralogist's rept., 1915-

16, pp. 5-175, illus., bibliog.

Includes a brief description of mining in the summit region,
with a small geological map.

Eklund, E. E.

1933 Some additional facts about the climate of Death Valley

Calif. Mo. weather rev., 61:33-5 (Feb.), bibliog.

Data on temperature, rainfall, wind, etc.

Fairbanks, Harold W.

1894 Preliminary report on the mineral deposits of Inyo, Mono,

and Alpine counties. Calif. State Mining Bureau, 12th

bien, rept., pp. 472-8.

16

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MDNUIvENT
Geology

Foshag, William

1921 The origin of the colemanite deposits of California. Econ.

geol., 16:199-214 (Ap.-May) .

These deposits are found in workable beds in southeastern
California, principally in Death Valley.

1924 Famous mineral localities: Furnace Creek, Death Valley. Am.

mineralogist , 9 : 8-10 .

Composition and location of various borax deposits are tech
nically described.

1924 Priceite from Furnace Creek, Inyo County, California. Am.

mineralogist, 9:11-13 (Jan.).

Gives descriptive analysis of Priceite, its formation and
general characteristics.

1950 Collecting boron minerals in Death Valley. Explorations
and field-work of the Smithsn. Instn. in 1929. Smithsn.
Instn. , pub. 3060, pp. 39-46, illus .

Gale, H. S.

1913 The origin of colemanite deposits. U. S. Geol. Surv., prof,
paper no. 85A, pp. 3-9. Washington, Govt. print, off.

A study of the boric acid present in volcanic emanations,
and its action on beds of limestone, forming calcium borate.

1914 Notes on the Quaternary lakes of the Great Basin, with spe
cial reference to the deposition of potash and other salines.
U. S. Geol. Surv., bul. 540, pt. 1, pp. 399-406. Washington,
Govt. print off.

A study of the history of the lakes of the desert basins con
tributing to the waters of Death Valley.

1914 Prospecting for potash in Death Valley, California. U. S.

Geol. Surv., bul. 540, pp. 407-415, map. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

A study of salt deposits and brines of Death Valley, with
tabulated results of chemical analyses, logs of wells bored by the
U. S. Geological Survey, and a map showing deposits of the region.

Harrington, M. W.

1892 Notes on the climate and meteorology of Death Valley, Cali
fornia. Washington, U. S. Dept . Agric., bul. no. 1, 50
pp., illus.

17

THE PACIFIC STATES

Henry, Alfred J.

1907 Selton Sea and the rainfall of the Southwest. Natl* geog.

mag., 17:24.4-48 (Ap.).

Refei's to meteorological conditions in Death Valley.

Hewett, D. F.

1928 Late Tertiary thrust faults in the Mojave Desert, California.

Natl. Acad. Sci., proc., 14:7-12 (Jan.), illus.

Report of observations on thrust falts in the Mojave Desert ,
Louderback takes the fact of the limiting of Death Valley by faults
as evidence of a late Pliocene or post-Pliocene time for the begin
ning of the faulting.

Hugenin, Emile. See Eakle , Arthur S. 1919.

Huntington, Ellsworth

1915 The Death Valley series. Carnegie Inst. of Wash., year bk. ,

p. 97.

Geology of Death Valley.

1915 The stages of development of playas. Carnegie Inst. of
Wash., year bk. , 1915, pp. 95-6.

Almost every stage of development of temporary lakes, known
as playas, is represented in the Death Valley drainage area.

1916 Death Valley and our future climate. Harpers, 132:919-28
(May) , illus .

The importance of solar activity in the creation of deserts
and in causing permanent changes in climate.

James, G-. D.

1905 Notes on Death Valley and Panamint. Engineering and min.
jour. , 80:914-18.

Keyes, C. R.

1922 Death Valley section of boraciferous terranes. Pan-Am, geol
ogist, 37:410-11.

Knopf, Adolph

1914 Mineral resources of the Inyo and White Mountains, California,
U. S. Geol. Surv., bul. 540, pp. 81-120, map.

Knopf, Adolph, and Kirk, Edwin

1918 A geologic reconnaissance of the Inyo Range, etc. U. S.
Geol. Surv., prof, paper 110.

Lee, Bourke

1930 Geologically speaking. In his: Death Valley, pp. 185-206,
illus. New York, Macmillan.

18

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MCNUMSNT
Geology

Louderback , G-eo. D.

1923 Basin Range structure in the Great Basin. Univ. of Calif,
pub., geol. sciences, vol. 14, no. 10.

1926 Morphologic features of Basin Range displacements in the
Great Basin. Geol. sciences, vol. 16, no. 1.

Mendenhall, W. C.

1909 Some desert watering places in southeastern California and

southwestern Nevada. U. S. Geol.Surv. , Water-supply paper

£24, 98 pp., illus., map, index.

The desert region: its physical features, mineral resources,
climate, water supply, routes of travel, and springs. The sources
and behavior of water supplies in Death Valley Basin and Salton
Sink are noted, and the geologic formations affecting these waters
are analyzed.

Murphy, F. M.

1929 Ore deposits of Panamint Range. Pan-Am, geologist, 51:370-
71.

Noble, L. F.

1922 South Death Valley. U. S. Geol. Surv. , bul. 724, pp. 22-31,

Washington, Govt. print, off.

A geologic description of the southern end of Death Valley.

1926 The Death Valley fault and the Panamint Valley fault. Car
negie Inst. of Wash., year book 25, pp. 425-28.
A geologic description of two faults: one between Furnace
Creek and Mormon Point - the Death Valley fault; and one between
Wildrose Canyon and Wingate Pass - the Panamint Valley fault.

1934 Rock formations of Death Valley, California. Sci. n. s.,

80:173-78 (Aug. 24).

A study of the age, character, and distribution of the rock
formations in the Death Valley region, based upon investigations
conducted by the writer for the U. S. Geological Survey. The area
was found to contain rocks of all the great geological time divi
sions, Archean, Algonkian, Paleozoic, Mesozoic, Tertiary, and Qua
ternary. The origin, fossil deposits, and succession of the rock
formations in these time periods are discussed, a. d comparison is
made with like formations in the Grand Canyon.

Phalen, W. C.

1919 Salt resources of the United States: Death Valley. U. S.
Geol. Surv., bul. 669, 277 pp., illus., maps, index.

19

THE PACIFIC STATES

Phalen, W. C., continued.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Discusses salt deposits from the neighboring Avawatz moun
tains conveyed into the Amargosa drainage area and thence into Death
Valley; the presence of saline material also on and beneath the floor
of the valley; and alternating areas of rough and smooth salt, as
well as the absence of extensive deposits of potash salts.

Price, T.

1883 Analysis of colemanite from Death Valley, Calif. Calif. Stat<
Bur. of Mines, State Mineralogist's ami. rept., 3:311-12.

Rogers, Austin F.

1919 Colemanite pseudomorphous after inyoite from Death Valley,

California. Am. mineralogist, 4:135-39 (Nov.), illus .

Description and analysis of two specimens of colemanite from
the Biddy McCarty Mine in Death Valley. "The formation of coleman
ite at the expense of inyoite involves merely dehydration."

Sampson, R. J.

1932 Mineral resources of a part of the Panamint Range. Mining

in California. Calif. Dept. of Natural Resources, Div. of

Mines, 28:357-76 ( July-Do t . ) , maps.

Steward, Julian H.

1929 Petroglyphs of California and adjoining states. Univ. of

Calif, pubs, in Am. archeol. and ethnol. , 24:47-238, illus.,

maps, bibliog.

Discusses petroglyphs found in Death Valley National Monument
on pp. 78, 82.

Stock, C.

1936 When titans roamed prehistoric Death Valley. Wewtways , 28:
SB-29 (Mar.).

Thompson, David Grosh

1929 The Mohave desert region, Calif., a geographic, geologic, and

hydrologic reconnaissance. U. S. Geol. Surv. Water supply

paper 578, 759 pp., illus., maps. Washington, Govt. print.

off.

Contains valuable notes on the physical features, geology,
water locations, water analyses, climate, and nitrates of Death Val
ley. Also story of the Manly and Jayhawker journeys across the val
ley in 1849 and description of trail routes.

Von Engeln, 0. D.

1932 The Ubehebe craters and explosion breccias in Death Valley,

California. Jour, geol., 40:726-38 (Nov. -Dec.), illus., map.

20

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT
Geology

Von Engeln, 0. D., continued.

A study of two little -known explosion craters on the west
side of Death Valley. The larger crater is approximately 2000 feet
wide at the top and 500 feet deep. The smaller one is estimated to
be 500 feet wide at the top and 150 feet deep. Deposits of lapilli
of vesicular basaltic lava, and pebbles and fragments of quartzite
are found around the rim to a depth of about 50 feet.

Waring, Clarence A. See: Eakle, Arthur S. 1919.

Wheeler, George M.

1889 [Death Valley.] In: Report upon U. S. Geol. Surv. west of

the one-hundredth meridian, in charge of Captain Geo. M.

Wheeler, pp. 36-7, 44, 278, 282. U. S. Army Engineering

Dept . Washington, Govt. print, off.

Descriptive and geologic notes.

Whitney, J. D.

1868 On the depression of Death Valley, California. Acad. Natl.

Sci., proc., 3:129, 376.

A paper read by the author gives the methods of determina
tion, and the results of measurements by barometer of the depression
of Death Valley, made in 1860 by the California and United States
Boundary Commission.

21

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MONUMENT

FLORA AND FAUNA

Anonymous

1893 The Death Valley expedition; a biological survey of parts of
California, Nevada, Arizona, and Utah. U. S. Dept. Agric.,
Div. of Ornithology and Mammalogy, North Am. fauna, no. 7,
pt. 2, 393 pp., maps, illus.

Includes the following reports on the expedition:
Report on birds, A. K. Fisher, pp. 7-158
Report on reptiles and batrachians, Leonhard Stejneger,

pp. 158-228

Report on fishes, Charles H. Gilbert, pp. 229-34
Report on insects, C. V. Riley, S. W. Williston, P. R.

Uhler, Lawrence Bruner, pp. 235-68
Report on mollusks , R. E. C. Stearns, pp. 269-83
Report on desert trees and shrubs, C. Hart Merriam, pp.

285-343

Report on desert cactuses and yucca, C. Hart Merriam,
pp. 345-59

1924 Year book no. 22, 369 pp., index. Washington, Carnegie

Inst .

Contains a report on the original vegetation of Death Valley.
States that the floor of the valley proper, consisting of the period
ically dry plain of the Amargosa River, is so saline that the only
grasses found were Sporobolus wrighti and Distichlis spicata.

Abrams , Leroy

1915 Deserts and desert flora of the West. In his: Nature and

science on the Pacific Coast, pp. 168-88. San Francisco,

Paul Elder.

A description of flora found in Death Valley.

Bruner, Lawrence. See: Riley, C. V. 1893.

Clements, F. E.

1924 The original vegetation of Death Valley. Carnegie Inst.

year book, no. 22, p. 317. Washington, Carnegie Inst.

Names and locations of the original plants found in the valley,

Coville, Frederick V.

1892 Descriptions of new plants from southern California, Nevada,

Utah, and Arizona. Biol. Soc. Washington, proc., 7:65-80

(May 18).

Some of the specimens were collected in the Death Valley area.

23

THE PACIFIC STATES

Coville , Frederick Vernon

1892 Sketch of the flora of Death Valley, California. Science,
342-5 (Dec. 16).

Report on the general botanical features of Death Valley,
from data collected on an expedition sent out by the U. S. Department
of Agriculture in January, 1891. Brief facts are given on the rela
tionship of biological and geological factors to the flora of the
region.

1893 Botany of the Death Valley expedition. A report on the bot
any of the expedition sent out in 1891 by the U. S. Depart
ment of Agriculture to make a biological survey of the region
of Death Valley, California. Contributions from the U. S.
Natl. Herbarium, vol. 4, issued November 29, 1893. U. S.
Dept. of Agric., Div. of Botany. Washington, Govt. print,
off. 363 pp., illus., map.

Contains 21 plates, and a map of parts of California, Nevada,
Arizona, and Utah, traversed in 1891 by the Death Valley expedition,
compiled under the direction of A. H. Thompson, geographer, U. S.
Geological Survey, by C. K. Fitch, topographer, 1892.

Fisher, A. K.

1893 Report on ornithology of Death Valley.... In: The Death

Valley expedition; a biological survey of parts of Califor
nia, Nevada, Arizona, and Utah. U. S. Dept. Agric., Div.
of Ornithology and Mammalogy, North Am. fauna, no. 7, pt . 2,
pp. 7-158, map.

Gilbert, Charles II.

1893 Report on fishes. In: The Death Valley expedition; a bio
logical survey of parts of California, Nevada, Arizona, and
Utah. U. S. Dept. Agric., Div. of Ornithology and Mammal
ogy, North Am. fauna, no. 7, pt . 2, pp. 229-34.

Gil man, M. F.

1935 Notes on birds in Death Valley. Condor, 37:237-42 (Sept.-

Oct . ) .

A list and description of birds found in Death Valley.

Grinnell, Joseph

1918 Six new mammals from the Mohave desert and Inyo regions of

California. Univ. of Calif., pub. in zoology, 17:423-30,

bibliog.

Field work under the auspices of the California Museum of
Vertebrate Zoology in the Death Valley region brought to light facts
regarding the general distribution and speciation of endemic verte
brates, i. e., the type, diagnosis, measurements, distribution, and
remarks on the Mono mole, White Mountain pocket gopher, Mohave River
pocket gopher, Mohave kangaroo rat, and White Mountain cony.

24

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL MDMJMMT
Flora and Fauna

1923 Observations upon the bird life of Death Valley. Calif.

Acad. of Sciences, proc. , ser. 4, 13:43-109, illus.

Contributions of the Museum of Vertebrate Zoology of the
University of California made during two excursions in the valley,
in 1917 and 1920. 124 species of birds were listed and annotated,

1934 Further observations upon the bird life of Death Valley.
The condor 36 : 67-72 (Mar . ) .

Hogg, F. E.

1932 Hot water fishes of the desert. Nature mag., 20:29-33

(July), illus.

Discussion of hot water fishes in Death Valley and else
where .

Lee , Bourke

1930 Plants and animals. In: Death Valley, pp. 161-181, illus.
New York, Macmillan.

Merriam, C. Kart

1893 Report on desert trees and shrubs. In: The Death Valley
expedition; a biological survey of parts of California,
Nevada, Arizona, and Utah. U. S. Dept . Agric. , Div. of
Ornithology and Mammalogy, North Am. fauna, no. 7, pt. 2,
pp. 285-343.

1893 Report on desert cactuses and yucca. In: The Death Val
ley expedition; a biological survey of parts of California.
Nevada, Arizona, and Utah. U. S. Dept. Agric., Div. of
Ornithology and Mammalogy, North Am. fauna, no. 7, pt . 2,
pp. 345-59.

Ober, E. H.

1931 The mountain sheep of California. Calif, fish and game,
17:27-39 (Jan.), illus., bibliog.

Includes information on the physical characteristics, pos
sible origin, manner of feeding, and care and training of young.

Oberholser, Harry C.

1921 Glimpses of desert bird life in the Great Basin. Smithsn.

Instn. , aim. rept. (1919), pp. 355-67. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

Includes information about birds found in Death Valley.

25

THE PACIFIC STAJPES

Riley, C. V. , and others

1893 Report on insects. In: The Death Valley expedition; a bio
logical survey of parts of California, Nevada, Arizona, and
Utah. U. S. Dept. Agric., Div. of Ornithology and Mamma 1-
°gy» Worth Am. fauna, no. 7, pt . 2, pp. 355-68.

Stearns, R. E. C.

1893 Report on mollusks. In: The Death Valley expedition; a

biological survey of parts of California, Nevada, Arizona,
and Utah. U. S. Dept. Agric., Div. of Ornithology and
Kanrnalogy, North Am. fauna, no. 7, pt . 2, pp. 269-83.

Stejneger. Leonhard

1893 Report on reptiles and batrachians. In: The Death Valley
expedition; a Mo?.o:?ical survey of parts of California,
Nevada, Arizona, and Utah. U. S. Dept. Agric., Div. of
Ornithology and Mai.nalogy, North Am. fauna, no. 7, pt. 2,
pp. 159-223.

Thompson, Ben H. See: Wright, George M. 1935*
Uhler, P. R. See: Riley, C. V. 1893.

Vorhies, Charles T.

1917 Poisonous animals of the desert. Univ. Ariz. Agric. Exper,

Sta., bul. 83, pp. 358-92, illus.

Some of the animals described were found in Death Valley.

Ward, W. V.

1936 The desert fish of Death Valley. Nat. hist., 38:135-42

(Sept.) , illus.

Explains the presence of fish in Saratoga Springs.

Will 1st on, S. W. See: Riley, C. V. 1893.

Wright, George M. , and Thompson, Ben H.

1935 [Death Valley National Monument.] In their: Fauna of the

national parks of the United States; wildlife management in

the national parks, pp. 6, 72-3. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl.

Park Serv., contribution of Wildlife Division, Fauna, ser.

2. Washington, Gcvt. print, off.

Wright, W. G.

1884 A naturalist in the desert. Overland mo., 2d ser., 4:279-

84 (Sept.) .

Description of Death Valley: geography, flora and fauna.

26

DEVIL POSTPILE NATIONAL MONUMENT

Anonymous

1915 Devil Postpile National Monument, Calif. U. S. Dept. Int.,

rept., 7:927-8, map. Washington, Govt. print, off.

A description of the formation of the monument, with map giv
ing its location according to section, township, and range.

1917 Devil's Postpile National Monument. In: General information
regarding the national monuments set aside under the Act of
Congress approved June 8, 1908, pp. 52-3, map. U. S. Dept.
Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1925 Devil's Postpile National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist.

Preservn. Soc. , 50th aim. rept., pp. 139-40.

This monument is situated in the northeastern part of Madera
County, California. Its most interesting feature consists of
basaltic rocks in the form of an immense pile of posts, and while
there are similar formations in different parts of the country, this
one is especially prominent, ranking with Giant's Causeway in the
north of Ireland.

1928 Beside the Devil's Postpile men are but moving dots. Nature

mag. , 12:234 (Oct.) .

Devil Postpile National Monument is reproduced in an excel
lent camera study.

Beatty, M. E.

1935 The Devil Postpile National Monument. Yosemite rat. notes,

14:45-7 (June) , illus.

General description, special characteristics, history, and
features of the surrounding region.

Bryant , H . C .

1926 Devils Postpile National Monument. In: Naturalist's guide
to the Americas, p. 197. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins.

1928 Parks of the Golden State, California's contribution to the
national playgrounds. Nature mag., 12:236-9, 273-4 (Oct.),
illus .
Contains a brief description of Devil Postpile.

Gleason, Herbert W.

1925 The devil's postpile. Mentor, 13:50-1 (Aug.), illus.

This national monument comprises a small rectangular area
abounding in evidences of geologically recent volcanic activity.
The postpile itself consists of a steep cliff 50 feet high and 140
feet long, presenting a stupendous aggregation of many-sided columns.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Holder, C. F.

1901 Famous basaltic columns. Sci. An., 84:68 (Feb. 2), illus.
A geological description of the Devil Postpile.

LeConte, J. N.

1912 The Devil's Postpile. Sierra club bul. , 8:170-3 ( Jan.) , illus.
This cliff of columnar basalt, forming perfect prisms, nearly
vertical and fitted like the cells of a honeycomb, is situated in the
region of the middle fork of the San Joaquin River. Surrounding it
are the finest groups of mountain peaks, residual glaciers, and the
best evidences of recent volcanic activity to be found in the Sierra
Nevada Range.

Quinn, Vernon

1923 [Devil Postpile.] In his: Beautiful America, p. 285. New
York, Stokes,

Richardson, W. L.

1897 The Devil's Post-pile. Land of sunshine, 8:15-6 (Dec.), illus,
Description of the unusual formation of basaltic columns in the
Devil Postpile.

Rider, Fremont

1925 Devils Postpile National Monument. In his: Rider's Califor
nia, pp. 376-8. New York, McMillan.

Schmeckebier, L. F.

1912 Our national parks. Natl. geog. mag., 23:568-71 (June),

illus .

Contains a brief description of the Devil Postpile, with four
photographs.

Taft , William H.

1912 Devil Postpile National Monument, California. Sierra Club

bul., 8:226-7 (Jan.), map.

Text of the proclamation of President Taft, making the Devil
Postpile a national monument.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others

1938 Devil Postpr.le National Monument. In: Guide to national

parks and rom<inents west of the Mississippi River, p. 27.

U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, Calif.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists
and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical data.

Yard, Roberts S.

1919 [Devil Postpile National Monument.] In his: The book of na
tional parks, pp. 408-11, illus. New York, Scribner's.

JOSHUA TR3E NATIONAL MONILIENT

Anonymous

1898 A natural conservatory. Sunset, 1:63 (Aug.).

A description of Palm Valley, adjoining Joshua Tree National
Monument .

Butler, Lowell

1937 In and about the Joshua Tree National Monument. Westways ,

vol. 29, p 5. 1 (Feb.), illus . Automobile Club of So. Calif.

Beverly Hills , Calif.

Camp, Charles

1916 Notes on the local distribution and habits of the amphibians

and reptiles of southeastern California. Univ. Calif, pubs.

in zoology, 12:503-44, map, bibliog. , illus.

An account of a survey of the region in the vicinity of the
Joshua Tree National Monument.

Chase, J. Sraeaton

1919 A desert ride: "San Felipe City to Imperial Valley. In:

California desert trails, pp. 272-93, illus. New York,

Houghton, Mifflin.

Two years of continuous traveling and camping in the Colo
rado Desert of Southeastern California in the region of the Joshua
Tree National Monument provided material for these notes on the
Indians, desert trails, oases, peculiar flora; Joshua tree, saguaro
cactus, century plant; and scenery of the region. An appendix
gives suggestions for desert traveling, and supplies a list of
plants, shrubs, and flowers common in the Colorado Desert. Thirty-
five excellent photographs of desert scenes illustrate the text.

Foote, Robert 0.

1936 Joshua Tree Forest. Am. forestry, 42:498-9, 530-1 (Nov.),

illus .

An article announcing the creation of a new national monu
ment, the "Joshua Tree Forest," embracing 8000,000 acres of the Colo
rado Desert in Southern California. The need for desert conservation
was recognized by Mrs. Sherman Hoyt of Pasadena, who, through per
sonal interviews, so interested President Roosevelt that he had this
desert area set aside as a national monument. Here grow the fan-leaf
palm, the juniper, the smoke-tree, and the cactus, as well as the
Joshua tree for which it is named. The area is destined to become
a refuge for many kinds of desert flora and fauna.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Ford, Walter

1938 Hidden valley of the Joshua Tree National Monument. Nat.

mag., 31:486-8 (Oct.), illus.

Description of 825,340 acres of California desert land estab
lished as a national monuinent, with fine photographs.

Fulty, Francis M.

1919 The lilies of the field. Sci. Am. supp., no. 2275, 88:96

(Aug. 9) , illus.

"The Joshua tree is a desert plant attaining its largest
growth in the Mohave desert ... Extra large individuals may reach two
feet in thickness and 50 i'eet in height." In March and April they
bloom, but the odor of the flowers is exceedingly disagreeable. The
origin of the name Joshua tree is unknown, but dates to the earliest
immigrant party that crossed the desert.

Griffin, H. E.

1930 Preserving California desert scenery. Desert, 1:118 (Feb.).
Contains a description of the Joshua tree.

Grinnell, Joseph

1908 The biota of the San Bernardino Mountains. Univ. Calif.

pubs, in zoology, 5:1-170, illus., maps, index.

Four life zones of the region, the upper and lower Sonoran
zones and two divisions of the boreal zone, are represented in the
area studied, which is in the region of the Joshua Tree National Mon
ument. In the list of plants, birds, mammals, and reptiles observed,
only the most conspicuous plants are included, as paints are the best
zone indicators. The habitat of species are designated by zones.

Jaeger , Edmund C .

1938 [Joshua Tree National Monument.] In his: The California
deserts, pp. 190-1, 193-7. Palo Alto, Stanford Univ. press.
Description of the tree, with information about the monument.

Mclaughlin, Bertha E.

1925 Yucca trees of the Mojave desert. Am. forests and forest

life, 31:107-8 (Feb.), illus.

Description of the Yucca whipplei, or Spanish bayonet, called
by the Spanish, "the candlestick of the Lord". It is found growing
on the Mojave desert south of Death Valley National Monument, and
northwest of Joshua Tree National Monument. The life story and the
many uses of the yucca are given.

Miller, Roy

1939 Cacti at Crystal Springs. Desert plant life, 2:69-71 (Ap.),
illus .

The Joshua tree is among the plants described.

JOSHUA TREE NATIONAL MONUMENT

Parish, S. B.

1903 Concerning certain trees. So. Calif. Acad. Sci., bul. 2:

155-6.

The Abies magnifica, Pinus tuberculata, Quercus wislizeni,
and Quercus engelmanni , all found in the vicinity of Joshua Tree Na
tional Monument, are described in this article.

Perkins , Edna

c!922 The white heart of Mohave ..., 229 pp., illus. New York,

Boni and Liveright.

Contains references to the Joshua tree and the Joshua Tree
National Monument region.

Saunders , C . F .

1929 Why Joshua tree? Desert, 1:80 (Nov.).

Diverse opinions are cited on the origin of the name Joshua
tree, but all agree the Mormons named it.

Tall, Roger W.

1932 The finest cactus gardens of the United States. In: Am.

civ. ann. , 4:33-7, illus.

The Superintendent of Yellowstone pleads for a national
monument to preserve the organ pipe cactus and the Joshua tree.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others

1938 Joshua Tree National Monument. In: Guide to national parks

and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 29. U. S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, Calif.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists
and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical data.

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,

Description, Flora and Fauna > • •.----- 3

11

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK

GENERAL

Including History, Travel, Description,
Flora and Fauna

Anonymous

1359 Peter Lassen. Hutching's Calif, mag., 3:350-52 (Feb.),

port.

A bibliographical sketch of the pionear for whom the park

was named.

1914 Lassen Volcanic National Park. U.S. House rept. 1021,

63d Cong., 2d sess., ser. 6560, v.3, 13 pp.

Report of the coiranittee on public lands with bill (H.R.52)
recommended for passage to establish the Lassen Volcanic National
Park.

1916 Uncle 3amfs latest playground. Lassen Volcanic National
Park. Over land mo., 68:553-56 (Dec.).

1916a Lassen Peak* s name. Mo. weather rev., 44:570-71 (Oct.),

illus .

The name "Lassen Peak" according to the United States geo
logical survey is the only authorized form found on maps, in reports,
and in gazetteers, from the time of the Whitney geological survey
of California in 1865, to the publication of the geoniorphic map of
California and Nevada by the Earthquake Investigation Commission
and on the latest ioap issued by the Forest Service. The mountain
is named in honor of Peter Lassen, pioneer settler. Other names
for it have been St. Joseph's Mountain, Mount Lasflen, and Lassen1 s
Butte.

1916b The Lassen Volcanic National Park. Am. forestry, 22:678
(Nov . ) »

1916c The correct name of Lassen Peak. Geog. rev., 2:464-65(Dec. ) .
Argues the correct name is Lassen Peak, not Mount Lassen.

1917 The local name of Lassen Peak. Geog. rev., 3:148 (Feb.).
Comment on the local usage of the name of Mount Lassen in

preference to Lassen Peak.

1917a Lassen Volcanic National Park. An1-. Scenic and Hist. Pre-

servn. Soc. , ann. rept., pp. 368-69.

Information on the history, establishment, and natural
features of the park.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Anonymous

1929 Lassen Volcanic National Park (and 40 acres of additional
land]. Am. forests 35:528 (Aug.).

1932 Lassen Volcanic National Park. Pacific service, v.!8(Jan.).,
San Francisco, Calif.

1934 Lassen Volcanic National Park. In: General information
on the national parks, 27 pp., illus . , map. U.S. Dept .
Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1936 Mordant scorpion. Lassen nat. notes, 2:4 (Oct.).

The Mordant scorpion, common in northern California, is
reported for the first time in Lassen National Park.

1938 Check list of birds of Lassen National Park. 18 pp. , U.S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1938a Lassen Volcanic National Park. 34 pp., illus., map, bibliog.

U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. IV shington, Govt. print.

off.

Compendium of information for the general public. One of
the descriptive pamphlets on individual parks and monuments pub
lished from 1916-19 as a General Information series, from 1920-27
as a Rules and Regulations series, from 1928-33 as a Circular ser
ies, and from 1934 without a series title.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 Lassen Volcanic National Park. In their: Oh, Ranger!,

pp. 44, 76, 95, 102, 153. Palo Alto, Calif., Stanford

Univ. press.

Bade, W. F., and others.

1926 Natural areas. Middle eastern California. In: Natural
ist's guide to the Americas, pp. 197-98. Baltimore, Will
iams and Wilkins.
Brief notes on the size, elevation, natural features,

flora, and fauna of a number of national park regions, including

Lassen.

,

Brewer, William H.

1930 The northern mines and Lassen Peak, In: Up and down
California in 1860-64, pp. 451-88, illus. New Haven, Yale
Univ. press.

Bryant, H. C.

1928 Parks of the Golden State, California's contribution to the

national playgrounds. Nature mag. ,12:236-39, 273-74, ( Oct .),

illus .

Includes information on Lassen.

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK
General

1929 Lassen Volcanic National Park. In his: Outdoor heritage,
pp. 331-34. San Francisco, Powell pub. co.
Historic and general description.

Burgess, Joseph.

1937 The trees of Lassen Volcanic National Park. Lassen nat.

notes, 4:4-6 (Aug.), illus.

A list of the 14 different species of trees in the park.

Gammer er, Arno B.

1936 Lassen Volcanic National Park. Natl. Park Serv. , 34 pp.,

illus., roap, bibliog.

A pamphlet of information on all features of interest. Re
vised and reissued from time to time.

Carter, C. F.

1918 Our new national parks. Rev. of rev., 57:638-42 ( June) , illus.

Church, J. E. jr.

1898 From Mt. Rose to Mt. Shasta and Lassen Buttes, Sierra Club

bul., 2:205-15 (June), illus.

Descriptive account of a 31-day trip by horseback.

Colburn, Mrs. Frederick H.

1922 The kingship of Mount Lassen. 69 pp., illus., map. San

Francisco, Nemo pub.

A description of the wonders of Lassen, chiefly taken from
the records of recognized experts.

Dele on, Donald.

1935 Forest insects of the California national parks. Pt. I:

Insects affecting sugar and psnderosa pine. 91 pp., illus.

Natl. Park Serv. Field Div. of Forestry. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

Semi -technical manual for rangers and foremen. Includes
information on the insects of Lassen Park.

Dixon, Joseph S. See: Wright, George M. 1933.
Dixon, Roland B. See; Sapir, Edward. 1910.

Drury, Aubrey.

1935 Mount Lassen and beyond. In: California, an intimate guide,
pp. 510-20. New York, HarperTs.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Dumbell, K. E. M.

1920 Lassen Volcanic National Park. In her: Seeing the West,
pp. 97-99, Garden City, N. Y.

Fairfield, Asa M.

1916 Fairfield's pioneer history of Lassen County, California.

506 pp., map. San Francisco, Crocker.

Faris, John T.

1920 [Lassen Volcanic National Park]. In his: Seeing the Far
West, pp. 235, 242. Philadelphia, J. B. Lippincott co.

1934 Are you thinking of national parks? In his: Roaming Amer
ican playgrounds, pp. 206-223, illus. New York, Farrar
and Rinehart .

Fariss and Smith.

1882 Illustrated history of Plumas , Lassen, and Sierra counties,

507 pp., illus., map. San Francisco, Fariss, Smith.
Early references to the Lassen region. A copy is in the

Bancroft Library, University of California.

Foote, Robert 0.

1936 The wilderness way. Am. forests, 42:395-99 (Sept .) , illus. ,

map.

Contains description of the Lassen region.

Garezynski , R. E.

1872 Northern California. In: Picturesque America, or the land

we live in. William C. Bryant, ed. 1:412-431, illus. New

York, Applet on.

Description of points of interest in northern California
including Lassenfs Buttes, since named Mount Lassen. Illustrations,
some full-page, by R. Swain Gifford.

Godfrey, G. K.

1860 Lassen's Peak. Hutchings1 Calif, mag., 4:299-302 (Jan.),

illus .

A description of the peak and the surrounding territory as
seen in 1851 by a party of gold miners.

Grinnell, Joseph, and others.

1930 Wildlife in California. Science n.s., 72:520-21 (Nov. 21).
A report was published "in an effort to preserve accurate
records of the distribution of wildlife in the Lassen park area of
California". This report covers two years of observations in the
field by twelve .members of the staff of the University of California
museum of vertebrate zoology and is a scientific record of the
wildlife of the area.

Hittell, John S.

1885 [Mount Lass en]. In his: Hitt ell's handbook of Pacific

Coast travel, pp. 183-86, maps. San Francisco, Bancroft.

Jeffers, Leroy.

1923 Little journeys off the beaten track. Country life, 44:

35-41 (June), illus.

Description of Lassen Volcanic National Park.

Johnson, Clifton.

1922 [Lassen Volcanic National Park]. In his: What to see in

America, p. 468. New York, Macmillan.

Brief description of Lassen National Park.

Johnston, Robert.

1937 The Hat Creek Indians. Lassen nat. notes, 4:1-7 (Oct.).
Their way of living, customs, beliefs, etc.

LeConte, John.

1880 Mountain lakes of the Sierra Nevada. Pacific rural press,

20:154 (Sept. 4).

Includes description of lakes in the Lassen region.

Mitchell, Guy

1917 New national parks. Am. rev. of rev., 55:635-40 ( June) »

illus.

Includes reference to Lassen National Park.

Muir, John.

1917 The forests. In: The mountains of California, pp. 139-

225, illus. New York, Century.

Contains special references to Sequoia, Lassen Volcanic, and
Yosemite national parks.

Palmer, Andrew H.

1917 The local name of Lassen Peak. Geog. rev., 3:148 (Feb.).

Discussion of the disputed name - Mount Lassen or Lassen Peak.

Pope, Saxton.

c!923 The story of the last Yana Indian. In: Hunting with the

bow and arrow, pp. 1-12, illus. San Francisco, James M.

Barry co.

The region around Mount Lassen was the habitat of the Yana
Indians , also called Yahi , or Deer Creek Indians , before their
virtual extermination by white settlers (c!872). Ishi was the last
of the race.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Pratt, Harry Noyes.

1924 A woman pioneer on Lassen's Peak. Ovorland mo., 2d ser.,
v,82, pp. 488, 524, 528 (Nov.), port.

A letter of 1864, recounting the ascent of Lassen Peak by
Aurelius and Helen Brodt.

Quinn, Vernon.

1923 [Lassen]. In his: Beautiful America, pp. 245-46, illus.,
map, index. New York, Stokes.

Rensch, Hero E», and others.

1933 Shasta County. Lassen Volcanic National Park. In: Historic

spots in California; valley and Sierra counties, pp. 365-66.

Palo Alto, Calif. Stanford Univ. press.

Rider, Fremont.

1925 Lassen Peak and vicinity. In: Rider's California, pp.
226-230, 253, 376, maps. New York, Macmillan.

Russell, Carl P.

1933 About national parks in California. Calif. School Lib.

Assn. (Northern sec.), bul. 2, 5:1-4, bibliog.

An historical account of Sequoia, General Grant, Lassen,
and Yosemite national parks, with a bibliography.

Sapir, Edward, and Dixon, Roland B.

1910 Yana texts together with Yana myths. Univ. Calif, pubs, in

Am. Archeol. and ethnol., 9:1-235 (Feb. 19).

Two sets of Yana myths, representing two clearly distinct
dialects, the northern (gari i) , spoken in the region of Montgomery
creek, northwest of Lassen Volcanic National Park, and the central
(gat a i), spoken near Redding, west of the park.

Schulz, Ernest.

1937 Local altitude record for the Sierra Nevada pocket gopher.

Lassen nat. notes, 4:8 (Oct.).

An immature aniinal of this species was found at the very
summit of Lassen Peak.

1937a New mammal recorded for Lassen Volcanic National Park.

Lassen nat. notes, 4:8 (Oct.).

A California gray squirrel was found on the Loop highway at
an elevation of 6100 feet.

Shinn, Charles H.

1891 The California lakes. Overland mo., 2d ser., 18:15-19
(July) , illus.

8

LASSEN VOLCANIC RATIONAL PARK
General

Sholes , G-ertrude M.

1920 The Mount Baker outing of the Mazamas in 1909. Mazama,
6:26-32 (Dec.), illus.

Simpich, Frederick.

1936 Northern California at work. Nat. geog. mag., 69:309-90

(Mar.), illus., map.

Notes on the scenery and history in general, including
the Mount Lassen district.

Stearns, F. A.

1912 Trip to Mount Lassen forest, California. Overland mo.,

2d ser. , 60:488-93 (Nov.), illus.

Account of a visit when the mountain showed the lowest
snow mark in thirty years.

Strahorn, Robert E.

1900 Volcanic scenery of the Northwest. Rev. of rev., 22:

202-08, (Aug.) , illus.

Reference to the Lassen volcanic area.

Swartzlow, Carl R.

1936 The American egret. Lassen nat. notes, 3:1-4 (Oct.).

A pair of American egrets seen for the first time nest
ing in Lassen Park.

Swartzlow, Ruby Johnson.

1937 More than a volcano. Nature mag., 30:23-26, illus.
General description of the volcanic region.

Taylor, Frank J. See: Albright, Horace M. 1928.
Thompson, Ben K. See: Wright, George M. 1933.

Vogt, Julian.

1937 The deer of Lassen Volcanic National Park. Lassen nat.
notes, 4:1-3, illus.

1937a Mountain quail. Lassen nat. notes, 4:10 (Aug.).

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 A general index to Lassen Nature Notes, 1932-1936, and
Hawaii Nature Notes, 1931-1933. 10 pp. U.S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv., Berkeley, Calif.

This index also bound in the volume: Index to "Nature
Notes" of national parks, 1920-1936.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Voth, Hazel PI., and others.

1938 (.Lassen Volcanic National Park], In: Guide to national

parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 30-
31. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv., Berkeley, Calif.

Warren, Herbert 0.

1935 Snow sports in California. Country life, 69:25-26, 66-67,
illus.

Skating and sledding in Lassen are described.

Wright, George M. , Dixon, Joseph S., and Thompson, Ben H.

1933 [Fauna of Lassen Volcanic National Park], In their: Fauna

of the national parks of the United States, pp. 45, 120, 121,
123-26, 131. U. S. Natl. Park Serv., Contribs. of wildlife
surv., Fauna ser. 1. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Yard, Robert S.

1919 f Lassen Volcanic National Park], In his: The book of the
national parks, pp. 151-54, illus. New York, Scribner's.

1928 Lassen Volcanic National Park. In his: The national parks

portfolio, pp. 231-32, illus. ITashin^ton, Govt . print, off.
Revised and reissued from time to time.

1934 Lassen Volcanic National Park. In: Picturesque America,
John F. Kane, ed. , pp. 72-73, illus. N.Y. , Union Lib. Assn.

1936 The Lassen Volcanic National Park, California. In his:
Glimpses of our national parks, pp. 56-59, illus. Isabelle
F. Story, ed. Washington, Govt. print, off.

vS volume is revised and reissued from time to time.

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK

GEOLOGY

and Related Sciences.

Anonymous

1887 Prehistoric remains in Lassen County. Mining and sci.

press, 54:19 (Jan.)*

Relates the finding of the remains of fishes and sea shells ,
in petrified condition.

1914 Mount Lassen as active volcano in California. Sci. Am.,
pp. 111-13 (July 4).

1914a Lassen eruption. Science, n.s., 40:49-51 (July 10).

1914b The Lassen Peak eruptions. Sci. Am. supp. , 78:91-93(Aug.8) ,
illus.

1915 Lassen Peak up to date. Rev. of rev., 51:487-88 (Ap.).

1915a Record of eruptions of Mount Lassen from May 30 up to Oct.

7, 1914. Sierra Club bul. , 9:301-04 (Jan.).

A tabulated list giving date, time, character, duration, and
crater size.

1915b Volcanoes. New international year book (1914). pp. 750-51.

New York, Dodd.

The extent and nature of the volcanic activities of Lassen
Peak, which had been considered extinct.

1916 Volcanoes. New international year book (1915), pp. 696-97.
A note on the 1915 eruption of Lassen Peak, emphasizing

the fact that no lava was ejected.

1916a Lassen Peak, Cal., again in eruption. Am. Scenic and Hist.

Preservn. Soc., 21st ann. rept., pp. 393-94.

Description of the effects of 1914 and 1915, especially the
violent outbursts of May 20 and 22, 1915.

1923 Lassen Peak again in eruption. Am. Scenic and Hist. Pre
servn. Soc., 23rd ann. rept., p. 180.
An account of the latest eruption (1923) with the dates of

former eruptions.

1925 Lassen Volcanic National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn,
Soc., ann rept., p. 140.

11

THE PACIFIC STATES

Anonymous

1928 Mount Lassen. Sci. n.s. , 67:12 in sapp. (Mar. 2).

The spectacular and striking effect i f blowing clouds mix
ing with steam from the crater is discussed. Other instances of
subterranean activity in the park area are mentioned.

1936 Earthquake activity. Lassen nat. notes, 3:7 (Oct.).
Mentions one strong shock in September and a few tremors

recorded recently.

1937 Boiling Springs Lake. Lassen nat. notes, 4:6 (June).
Iron-stained clay from a hot spring is turning a portion

of the lake red.

1937a Seismic activity at the Loomis museum station. Lassen nat.
not as , 4 : 5 ( June ) .

1937b Summary of weather statistics at Manzanite Lake, December
19, 1936 to June 18, 1927. Lassen nat. notes, 4:6 (June).

Adams , Leeson H.

1924 A physical source of heat in springs. Jour, of geol. ,
32:191-94 (Ap.-May).

Heat produced by and accompanying the r-loese of pressure
is explained and discussed as a possible source of high temperatures
in hot springs. The studies were made in Lassen Park.

Allen, E. T. See: Day, Arthur L. 1924.

Allen, E. T. and Day, Arthur L.

1925 The volcanic activities and hot springs of Lassen Peak,
California. Pub. 360, 190 pp. Washington, Carnegie Inst.

Allen, E. T.

1927 The work of the geophysical laboratory on hot springs.

Natl. Research Council, bul. , 61:255-59 (July).

Results of investigations in Lassen Volcanic and Yellowstone
national parks.

Allen, Victor T.

1929 The lone formation of California. Univ. of Calif, pub.
bul., geol. sci., 18:347-48 (Dec.). Abstract Geol. Soc.
Am., bul., 40:175-76 (Mar. 30] I.

Contains a discussion of this fortiation found along the Sierra
foothills, and also in the Lassen region.

Anderson, C. A. See: Finch R. H. 1930.

12

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Averill, Charles Volney.

1929 Redding field division; Lassen and Modoc counties. Calif.

Dept . Natl. Research, Div. of Mines and Mining, rept.,

25:2-19 (Jan. 1929).

Averill, Charles Volney, and Erwin, Homer D.

1936 Mineral resources of Lassen County. San Francisco, State

Division of Mines, Cal. jour, of mines, and geol. quart.

Chief of State Mineralogists rept., v.32, no. 4 (Oct.),

illus . , roaps .

Bishop, S. E.

1901 Brevity of tuff -cone eruptions. Am. geol., 27:1-5 (Jan.),

illus .

A study of volcanic tuff -cones.

Boerker, Richard S.

1915 The Mt. Lassen eruption. Am. forestry, 21:51-55( Jan. ), illus .

1915a The Mount Lassen eruption. Pan-Am, union, bul. 60, pp. 223-32
(Feb.) , illus.

Brewer, W. H.

1866 Whitney's geology of California. Am. jour, of Sci. and

arts, 2d ser. , 41:231-46, 351-69.

This survey includes data on Mount Lassen.

Clarke, F. W.

1910 Lassen Peak region. [Analyses of rocks and minerals from

the laboratory of the United States geological survey, 1880-
1908]. U.S. Geol. Surv. , bul., 419:138-144.
The chief chemist submits tabulated results of chemical anal
yses of J. S. Diller's collection of rhyolites, dacites, andesites,
and basalts from the Lassen Peak region. The pet- ographic data
included were supplied by Mr. Diller.

Day, Arthur L.

1922 Possible causes of the volcanic activity of Lassen Peak.

Seismological Soc. Am., bul., 12:35-46 (June -Sept. ), illus .

An address delivered before the Coromonwealth Club of San
Francisco, giving a scientific description of the volcanic activity
at Lassen Peak. The author discusses his search for earthquake
causes of the 1914 volcanic activity.

Day, Arthur L. , and Allen, E. T.

1924 The source of the heat and the source of the water in the

hot springs of the Lassen National Park. Jour .geol. ,32:178-94

(Ap.-May) .

13

Day, Arthur L.t and Allen, E. T.

1924 The source of the heat and the source of the water in the
hot springs of the Lassen National Park. Jour, geol.,
32:178-94 (Ap.-May).

1925 The volcanic activity and hot springs of Lassen Peak. 175
pp., illus., index. Washington, Carnegie Inst.

This work gives the results of geological studies of the
Lassen volcano and of the physical and chemical phenomena of the
region surrounding it.

Diller, Josiah S.

1884 Geological work in northern California. Science, 3:366

(Mar. 21).

Information about the lava beds in Le.ssen.

1886 Notes on the geology of northern California. U.S. Geol.
Surv. , bul., 33:373-87. Washington, Govt. print, off.

A geological description of the Mt. Lassen region.

1887 The latest volcanic eruption in northern California and its
peculiar lava. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser., 33:45-50 (Jan.).
Account of the eruption at Cinder Cone in the Lassen area,

with analysis of material ejected.

1889 Geology of the Lassen Peak district. U.S. Geol. Surv.,
1886-87, 8th ann. rept., pp. 395-432, illus., maps, index.

1890 Notes on the cretaceous rocks of northern California. Am.
jour, sci,, 40:476-78.

1891 A late volcanic eruption in northern California and its
peculiar lava. U.S. Geol. Surv., bul. 79, pp. 33, illus.,
maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1892 Geology of the Taylorville region of California. Geol. sci.
of Am., bul., 3:369-94 (July 15), illus.

The location is in Plumas County, near the park.

1894 Was the lava from Lassen Peak viscous at the time of its
eruption? Wash. Acad. Sci. Jour., 7:82-83 (Jan.).
Five reasons given to indicate the lava was viscous.

1894a Tertiary revolution in the topography of the Pacific Coast.

U.S. Geol. Surv., 14th ann. rept., 1892-93, pp. 397-434,

illus . , map .

The area in which the study was made includes Lassen Volcanic
National Park.

14

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK
Geology

1897 Hornblende -basalt in northern California. Am. geol.,
19:253-55 (Ape).

Report of the finding of a well-worn boul er of eruptive
origin northwest of Lassen Volcanic National Park.

1898 Descriptions of specimens: Dacite from Lassen Peak, Calif
ornia. U.S. Geol. Surv., bul. 150 pp. 217-19, bibliog.

1899 Latest volcanic eruptions of the Pacific Coast. Sci., n.s.,
9:639-40 (May 5).

1914 The eruptions of Lassen Peak, California. Seisinological
Soc. Am., bul., 4:103-07 (Sept.), illus.

1914a The eruptions of Lassen Peak, California. Mazama, 4:54-59
(Dec.).

1916 The volcanic history of Lassen Peak, Sci., n.s. 43:727-33
(May 26), illus., map.

1916a Lassen Peak — our most active volcano, Seismological Soc.

Am., bul., 6:1-7, illus. Palo Alto, Calif. Stanford Univ.

press.

An article describing the activities and the alterations
in the 1914-1915 eruption of Mt. Lassen, classifying the flow of
lava and rocks.

1917 Was the new lava from Lassen Peak viscous at the time of
its eruption? Wash. Acad. of Sci. jour., 7:82 (Feb. 4).
Comparison with lava in other parts of the United States

has led the author to believe the lava of Lassen Peak was viscous.

1918 The volcanic history of Lassen Peak. U.S. Geol. Surv. 14 pp.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

1923 The reported eruption of Lassen Peak. Sci., n.s., 67:586
(May 13).
An examination revealed no evidence of an eruption.

Diller, Jos i ah S. and Hillebrand, W. J.

1896 The Lassen Peak region. U.S. Geol. Surv., bul. 148 pp. 191-93,
Geological notes on the Lassen Volcanic National Park region,
with tabulated analyses of minerals, petrographic data, and lists
of rhyolites, dacites, and andesites.

15

THE PACIFIC STATES

Diller, Josiah S. and Holway, R. S.

1915 The Lassen Peak eruptions of May 20-22. Geol. soc. Am.,
bul., 26:397.

Emmons , S . F .

1877 Volcanoes of the United States Pacific Coast. Am. Geol.
Soc., bul., 9:31-61 (Feb.).

Erwin, Homer D. See: Averill, Charles V. 1922 and 1936.

Fairbanks, H. W.

1912 The volcanic plateau region. In: The geography of Calif
ornia, pp. 154-59. San Francisco, Vilhitaker and Ray-Wiggin co.
Includes discussion of the geology of the Lassen Park region.

Farmer, Russell.

1934 The origin of Crescent Cliff and associated features. Lass-
en nat. notes, 1:5 (June-July).

1936 Lassen volcano. Lassen nat. notes, 3:6-7 (Nov.).

Inspection of the fumaroles indicates no unusual activity
is about to begin.

Finch, R. H.

1928 An observatory for the study of Laseen Peak. Seismological

Soc. Am. , bul., 18:5-8. Palo Alto, Calif. Stanford Univ.

press.

An account of the new observatory at Mineral, California,
at an elevation of 4,935 feet on the southwest slope of Mt. Lassen
for continuous study of volcanic disturbances of that peak.

Finch, R. H. and Anderson, C. A.

1930 The quartz basalt eruptions of Cinder Cone, Lassen Volcanic

National Park, California. Univ. Calif., Dept. Geol. Soc.,

bul., 19:245-73 (May 27), illus .

Data regarding the sequence and history of the eruptions and
the petrography and origin of the quartz basalt.

1930a Quartz-basalt eruptions of Cincer Cone and vicinity, Calif
ornia. Geol. Soc. of Am. , bul., 41:157 (}£ar.).
Abstract of the above, which was read before the Geolog
ical Society of America.

Finch, R. H.

1933 Black lava. Jour. geol. , 41:769-70 (Oct. -Nov. ), illus.
Classification of lava in Lassen National Park.

1935 On the mechanics of nuees ardentes. Jour, geol., 18:545-
50 (July-Aug.), illus., map.

16

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK
Geology

A study of this volcanic phenomena in the Lassen Peak region.

1937 A tree-ring calendar for dating volcanic events, Cinder Cone,
Lassen National Park, California. Am. jour, of sci., 33:140-
146, illus., maps, table.
Two major eruptions are dated at 1567 and 1666, by means of

a series of extraordinary narrow rings (presumably due to ash fall)

beginning at these dates, in a 450 year pine rooted in the old soil

beneath two ash deposits.

Friedlander, Immanuel.

1931 The present condition and the future of volcanology. Natl.

Research Council, bul. 77 pp. 34-48.

Includes studies made in Lassen Park.

Glass ford, W. A.

1891 Climate of California and Nevada, with particular reference
to the rainfall and temperature and their influence upon
the irrigation problems of the two states. 51st Cong.,
2d Sess., Ex. doc., 287, pp. 333-56 (appendix 67), maps.
Contains information on the Lassen region.

Grinnell, Joseph, ed.

1915 Nature and science on the Pacific Coast. In: A guide book for

scientific travelers in the west, 302 pp., illus., maps,

ind. , bibliog. San Francisco, Paul Elder.

Grinnell, Joseph, and others.

1930 Vertebrate natural history of a section of northern Calif
ornia through the Lassen Peak region. Univ. Calif. Pub.
in Zoology, 35:594, illus., maps, bibliog.
A report on the species and subspecies of land vertebrates
present in the Lassen Peak region; the frequency and relative
abundance of these species; the local distribution of each kind;
the factors that determine the presence and habitat distribution
of each kind; the annual cycle of activity of each kind in this
section, and the manner of analyzing vertebrate communities and
successions. A map of the life zones of the Mount Lassen section
is appended; also descriptions of species.

Hague, Arnold, and Iddings , Joseph P.

1883 Notes on the volcanoes of northern California, Oregon, and

Washington territory. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser. , 26:222-35

(Sept.).

Hanna, Phil T.

1928 Where Vulcan works in California. Touring topics, 30: 22-23
(July).

17

THE PACIFIC STATES

Hanna> Phil T., Continued.

General description of Lassen Peak and surrounding region.

Hawsted, Drew.

1936 Volcanic Lassen, placid Almanor for new tours. Motorland,
v.39 (Aug.), illus. SanMateo, Calif. Calif. State Auto
mobile Assn.

Hillebrand, W. F. See: Diller, Josiah S. 1896.
Hillebrand, W. F. See: Riggs, R, B. 1890.

Hinds, Norman E. A.

1934 The Jurassic age of the last granitoid instrusives in the

Klaiaath Mountains and Sierra Nevada, California. Am. jour.

sci., 27:182-92 (Mar.), map.

This geologic study includes a part of Lassen Park.

Hodge, William C.

1914 The lookout on Mount Lassen. Am. forestry, 20 : 568-71 ( Aug. ),
illus.

An account of the destruction of the forest fire outlook
house on Mount Lassen by volcanic eruption, June 12, 1914.

1915 The lookout on Mount Lassen. Sierra Club bul., 9:300-04,
illus.

An account of its construction. It vras destroyed by an
eruption.

Holmes, Arthur.

1933 When will Lassen Peak again erupt? Sci. mo., 40:21-32( Jan. ) ,
illus.

Holway, Ruliff S.

1914 Preliminary report on the recent volcanic activity of Lassen
Peak. Univ. of Calif., pubs, in geog. , 1:307-331 (Aug. 7),
illus.

A complete history of the present series of eruptions.

1915 The volcanic activity of Lassen Peak, California. Popular
sci., 86:290-305 (Mar.), illus.

An authentic outline of the history of the Lassen volcanic
area up to the present time (1915) with bibliographical references.

1915a When Lassen wakes, the rejuvenation of a California volcano.

Sunset mag., v.35, (Aug.), illus.

The author, an associate professor of physical geography of
the University of California, describes the explosive eruption of
Lassen Peak, May 22, 1915.

18

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK
Geology

1916 Lassen's second year of rejuvenation. Sierra Club bul., 10:

92-95 (Jan.) , illus.

Description of various eruptions of Mount Lassen during 1915,
as reported by an eye witness.

Holway, Ruliff S. See: Diller, Josiah S. 1915.

Hull, Edward.

1904 Volcanoes: Past and present. 270 pp,, illus., index.

New York, Scribner's.

A presentation of the volcanic and seismic phenomena of the
world with a reference to the Lassen region.

Iddings, Joseph P.

1890 The occurrence of primary quartz grains in basalts. U.S.

Geol. Surv., bul. 66, pp. 20-32.

A scientific study of samples of quartz -bear ing basalt from
Cinder Cone, ten miles northeast of Lassen Peak, and elsewhere.

1913 [Lassen Peak]. In his: Igneous rocks, pp. 442-45. New

York, John Wiley and sons.

Notes on the rocks of Lassen Peak with tabulated analysis
of specimens.

Iddings, Joseph P. See: Hague, Arnold. 1883.

Jagger, T. A.

1925 Progress of volcanology during 1924. Wash. Acad. Sci.,

jour., 15:424-25 (Nov. 4).

Contains a reference to studies made in the Lassen area.

Jones, Austin E.

1928 Magnetism of Cinder Cone lava flows, Lassen Volcanic Na
tional Park. Hawaiian Volcano Observatory, bul., 16:61-63
(Sept.) .
Record of a scientific expedition into the Cinder Cone lava

beds with the object of applying Chevallier's magnetic method to

determine their age.

Kemmitzer, William.

1921 The Eagle Lake earthquake of July 21, 1921. Seismological

Soc. Am., bul., 11:192-94 ( Sept. -Dec. ), map.

In Lassen County a series of earthquake shocks occurred
which were commonly attributed to Lassen Peak, but the Berkeley
seismograph located the epicenter of these shocks at the middle of
Eagle Lake.

19

THE PACIFIC STATES

Lassen, May C.

1914 Mount Lassen and its volcano. Over land mo., 2d ser. ,
64:482-86 (Eov.), illus.

Lind, Henry C.

1934 One comes into the devastated area. Lassen nat. notes

1:4 (July), illus.

The author describes the forest devastation resulting from
the eruption of Lassen Peak.

Loomis, B. F.

1934 Comments on the Chaos Crags and the Manzanita Lake area.
Lassen nat. notes, 1:2-3 (June-July).

Mitchell, Guy E.

1914 A slumbering giant awakens. Technical world mag. ,22:23-31

(Sept. ) , illus.

Contains information on the volcanic action of Lassen.

Palmer, Andrew H.

1916 An eruption of Lassen Peak. Mo. weather rev., 44:571-73
( Oct . ) .

1917 An eruption of Lassen Peak. Meteorological and seismo-
logical considerations. Sci. Am., supp. 83:216-17 (Ap.7),
illus .

A detailed description of Lassen Peak in 1914 and 1915. The
cause of the eruption and the material ejected are discussed.

Peale , A. C.

1886 Mineral springs of the United States. U.S. Geol. Surv., bul.

5:9-220, index.

Contains information on springs in the Lassen region.

Powers , H. A.

1930 The eruption of Cinder Cone, Lassen Volcanic National Park,
California. The Volcano letter, no. 292, pp. 1-3.

Richthofen, Ferdinand,

1868 The natural system of volcanic rocks. Calif. Acad. of Sci.,

memoirs , 1 : 43-94 .

This memoir is offered as a contribution toward the estab
lishment of the foundation of a uniform nomenclature and the prin
ciples of comparative petrology, based upon the discovery rather
than the invention of divisions. The ejected rocks of Lassen volcano
are analyzed and classified.

Riggs , R. B. , and Hillebrand, W. F.

1980 Analyses of lava from near Lassen Peak, California. In: U.S.
Geol. Surv., bul., 60, pp. 155-57.

20

LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Russell, Israel C.

1910 [Mount Lassen]. In his: Volcanoes of North America, pp.

28-33. New York, Macmillan.

Describes a cinder cone near the peak, and the results of
recent eruptions of the volcano.

Russell, Richard D.

1931 The Lassen Peak quadrangle. In his: The Tehama formation

of northern California, Doctorate thesis, typed, pp. 80-82.

Certain geologic formations on and near Mt. Lassen are
described.

Snider, Orville L.

1928 [Mount Lassen]. Country life, 55:30 (Nov.), illus.

Storms, William H.

1914 The eruption of Mount Lassen. Mining and scientific
press, 109:143-44 (July), illus.

Swart zlow, Carl R.

1937 Recent seismic disturbances in Lassen Volcanic National Park.

Seismological Soc. Am., bul., 27:35-39 (Jan.), illus., map.

Seismographic observations of a number of earthquakes of
low intensity which occurred in Lassen Volcanic National Park in
May, June, and July, 1936. The shocks were in Warner valley, four
miles west of Mount Harkness. A few originated in the Butte Lake
area. These two areas are near zones of faulting, but no actual
movement along the fault traces has been detected.

Tillman, S. E.

1879 [Geology and topography of the Lassen Perk region]. U.S.

Geol. Surv., west of the 100th meridian, ann. rept.,1879,

pp. 209-14.

A geological description of the Lassen Peak region.

Turner, H. W.

1895 The age and succession of the igneous rocks of the Sierra
Nevada. Jour, geol., 3:385-414, illus.

Includes the area of Lassen National Park.

1896 Further contributions to the geology of the Sierra Nevada.
U.S. Geol. Surv., 17th ann. rept., pt.l, pp. 529-662, illus.,
map.

A geological description of areas which include Mount Lassen.

1915 Eruption of Mt. Lassen and Tertiary eruptions of the Sierra
Nevada. Mining and scientific press, 110:955-56 (Oct.).

21

THE PACIFIC STATES

Tyrell, G. W.

1931 Decadent volcanoes; Katmai and Lassen Peak. In his: Vol
canoes, pp. 154-82, map. London, Butterworth.
Detailed descriptions oi% these volcanoes.

Wheeler, William M.

1930 The distribution and structure of the Sierra worm-lion. In
his: Demons of the dust, pp. 167-207, illus. New York,
Norton.

This structure has been found in the Lassen Park region.

Williams, Howe 11.

1920 A recent volcanic eruption near Lassen Peak, California.

Univ. of Calif, pubs., dept. of geol. sciences, bul. 17:

241-63, illus., map.

A description of the character and mode of emplacement of a
type of volcanic flow called Chaos Crags situated near Lassen Peak.

1931 The dacites of Lassen Peak and vicinity, California, and
their basic inclusions. Am. jour, sci., 5th ser. , 22:385-
403 (Nov.), illus.

The site of Lassen Peak was formerly occupied by a vent that
extruded a series of glassy dacites, among which the content of basic
inclusions increased from the base upwards. Domes were protruded,
including Lassen Peak itself, characterized by basic inclusions. On
eruption, the fluid magma disrupted the almost solid crust and car
ried fragments to the surface.

1932 The history and characters of volcanic domes. Univ. of Calif.

Dept. geol. sciences, bul., 21:51-146, illus.

A comprehensive article dealing with the general nomenclature
of domes of different continents and locally of Mount Lassen and
Marysville buttes in California.

Woon, Basil.

1935 America's pet volcano, Mount Lassen. In his: San Fran
cisco and the Golden Empire, pp. 290-95. New York, Smith
and Hass.
Description of Mount Lassen and the surrounding country.

Wright, George F.

1905 Recent date of lava flows in California. Records of the

past, 4:195-98 (July), illus.

Description of eruptions in Lassen Park with date of erup
tions which caused Cinder Cone.

Wright, W. H.

1914 A journey to Lassen Peak. Engr. Mining jour., 98:97-100
(July 18) , illus.

22

BEDS NATIONAL MONUMENT

Anonymous

1857 Indian affairs, committee report. Jour, of 8th sess . of

the Assembly of the State of Calif., pp. 645-7.

Resolutions passed seeking to prevent extermination of the
Indians, including the Modoc of the Lava Beds region.

1929 Tule Lake. Nature mag., 13:58 (Jan.).

Information about conditions at the newly-created Tule Lake
Migratory Game Refuge, adjoining Lava Beds National Monument.

Bunker, W. M.

1880 In the lava beds. California, 1:161-6 (Feb.).

The location, extent, boundaries, and general description
of the Modoc lava beds; discussion of their probable origin.

Curt in, Jeremiah

1912 Itlyths of the Modocs. Boston, Little, Brown, 389 pp.

These myths of the Lava Beds area were told to the author
by the oldest woman of the Klamath-Modoc tribe.

Diller, J. S. See: Stokes, H. N., 1896.

Dixon, Joseph S., and Bond, Richard M.

1937 Raptorial birds in the cliff areas of Lava Beds National
Monument. Condor, 39:97-102 (May- June ).

Dunn, J. F.

1886 The tragedy of the lava beds. In his: Massacres of the

mountains, pp. 543-83, illus., map. New York, Harper's.

An account of the war between Captain Jack of the Modocs
and the U. S. troops.

Fountain, Paul

1906 [Lava Beds National Monument.] In his: Eleven eaglets of

the West, p. 39. New York, Button.

A brief description of the Lava Beds.

Froth ingham, Robert

1932 [Lava Beds National Monument.] In his: Trails through the
Golden West, pp. 196-7. New York, McBride.

Gloster, Dorothy V.

1925 Monument for historic spot. Grizzly bear, 36:4 (Mar.).

Recommends the preservation of the Lava Beds area for its
historic and scientific interest.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Eebard, Grace R.

1932 The Modocs. In: The pathbreakers from river to ocean, pp.
250-4. Chicago, Lakeside press.

An account of the uprising of the Modocs in 1872, and the
battle fought over the area of the Lava Beds National Monument.

Hittell, Theodore H.

1898 Modoc War. In his: History of California, 3:937-81. San
Francisco, Stone.

James, George 17.

1914 [Lava Beds National Monuuient . ] In his: California, romantic
and beautiful, ^p. 16-8. Boston, Page.

Kroeber, A. L.
1/1920 California culture provinces. Univ. Calif, pubs, in Am.

archeol. and etlinol., 17:151-69, maps, bibliog. Berkeley,

Univ. Calif, press.

Includes a discussion of the culture area of the Modocs of
the Lava Beds region.

1925 The Modoc. In his: handbook of the Indians of California,
* pp. 318-35, illus. Smithsn. Instn. , Bur. Am. Ethnol. , bul.

78. Washington, Gtovt . print, off.

Detailed study of the Modocs who inhabited the lava beds area,

Miles, Nelson A.

1896 [Lava Beds National Monuuent.] In his: Personal recollec
tions and observations of General Nelson A. Miles, pp. 152-5.
Chi cago , Werner .

Miller , Joaquin

1873 Life amongst the Modocs: unwritten history, 400 pp. London,
Beritley and son.

Peet , Stephen D.

1889 Geographical distribution of monuments. ADI. antiquarian,
11:267-92 (Sept.), illus.

Powers , Stephen

1877 The Modolc. In his: Tribes of California, 3:252-66, illus.
. U. S. Geog. and .Tool. Survey of the Rocky Mountain region.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

A discussion of the life, habits, and customs of the Modocs.

Rensch, Hero E. , and S. G.

1933 Modoc County. The Tule Lake petroglyphs. In his: Historic
spots in California, valley and Sierra counties, pp. 200-1.
Palo Alto, Stanford Univ. press.

LAVA BEDS NATIONAL MONUMENT

A brief description of a chain of petroglyphs deeply chis
eled by early Indian tribes into a high bluff of smooth sandstone
projecting into the dry bed of Tule Lake at its southeast corner,
within the Lava Beds National Monument.

Kibble, Jeff C.

^1914 The Indian history of the Modoc War, and the causes that ledp
to it, illus., maps. San Francisco, Marnell.

Smith, Wallace

1928 Captain Jack's last stand and the inadequate legs on which

it was made. In his: Oregon sketches, pp. 183-97. New

York, Putnam's.

An account of the campaign against the Modocs in 1873.

Stearns, Harold T.

1928 Lava Beds National Monument, California. Geog. Soc. of
Phila., bul., 26:238-53 (Oct.), illus., map.

A report on many aspects of the lava beds region: history,
archeology, Indians, and geology.

Steward, Julian H.

1929 Petroglyphs of California and adjoining states. Univ. of
Calif, pubs, in Am. archeol. andethnol., 24:47-238, illus.,
maps, bibliog.

Discusses petroglyphs found in the lava beds, pp. 58, 62.

Stokes, H. N., and Diller, J. S.

1896 Mount Shasta. U. S. Geol. Surv. , bul. 148, p. 190. Wash-

ingt on , Govt . pr int . of f .

Geological notes on the district containing Lava Beds Na
tional Monument and Lass en Volcanic National Park, with tabulated
analyses of minerals.

Swart zlow, Carl R.

1935 Ice caves in northern California. Jour, geol., 43:440-2

(May- June) .

An explanation of the ice caves in northern Modoc and Sis-
kiyou counties, in and near the Lava Beds National Monument. An ac
tive wind circulates in them in winter.

Swartzlow, Carl R., and Keller, W. D.

1937 Coralloidal opal. Jour, geol., 45:101-8 (Jan. -Feb.), illus.
The term is used to designate an epigenetic formation, dom-
inantly opal in composition, found in the lava tubes and caves of
the Lava Bods National Monument. The opal is precipitated by cap
illary waters on the tips of basalt spines and globules, causing
the deposit to look like some forms of organic coral.

TEE PACIFIC STATES

Voth Hazel H. , and others

1938 Lava Beds National Monument. In: Guide to national parks

and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 32. U. S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, Calif.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists
and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical data.

Wellman, Paul I.

1935 [Lava Beds National Monument.] In his: Death on the desert;

the fifty years' war for the great Southwest, pp. 106-24,

illus. New York, Macmillan.

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,

Description, Administration, etc.- ----- 3

FLORA. 21

FAUNA e9

GEOLOGY AND RELATED SUBJECTS 35

INDIANS - - 41

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK

GENERA
History, Travel, Description, Administration, Etc.

Anonymous

n. d. Bibliography of Mount Rainier National Park. Natl. Park

Serv., Mount Rainier Natl. Park, 25 pp. Longmire, Washington.

1894 Memorial from the Geological Society of America favoring

the establishment of a national part in the state of Wash
ington. U.S. Senate doc. no. 247, 53d Congress, 2d sess.,
ser. 3171, -map.'
General description, economic resources , accessibility, etc.

1906 First attempt to ascend Mount Rainier. V.asH. hist, quart.,

1:77-81 (Oct.).

Notes from the 1833 diary of Dr. W. F. Tolmie recording a
botanical expedition of noteworthy success.

1909 Bibliography of Mount Rainier. Mountaineer, 2:65-70(Nov. ) .

1916 The Mount Rainier National Park; Am. Scenic and Hist.
Preservatn. Soc., 21st ann. rept., pp. 683-85.

: I

1917 Mount Rainier National Park. Pan-Am. Un. ,44: 79-98 (June) .

1917a "Katydid, Katydidn't." Outlook, 116:643-44 (Aug. 29).
Ridicules Tacomans who call Mount Rainier Mount Tacoma.

1917b The Mountain. Tacoma, Justice to the Mountain Committee,

77 pp. , bibliog.

Brief submitted to the U.S. Geographic Board urging that
the name of Mount Rainier be changed to Mount Tacoma. Full dis
cussion of all aspects of the contention.

1918 "Mount Rainier" or "Mount Tacoma". Am. Scenic Hist, Pre
servatn. Soc., 23d ann. rept., pp. 409-431.

The famous controversy over the name of -the mountain.

1919 General information regarding Mount Rainier National Park.
Washington, GOvt. print, off., 41 pp., illus.

1920 Mount Rainier National Park. Natl. Park Serv., 50 pp.,
illus., maps. Washington, Govt. print, oi'f. ''

1921 Memorial seat at Sluiskin Falls. Mountaineer, 14:51-55.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Anonymous

(Nov.), illus.

CoMnemorates first ascent of Mount Rainier by Colonel Hazard
Stevens and party, 1870.

1921a Rules and regulations Mount Rainier National Park. Natl.
Park Serv. , 50 pp., illus., maps, bibliog. Washington,
G-ovt . print, off.

1922 First winter ascent of Mount Rainier. Mountaineer, 14:5-6
(May).
A climb to the summit by Swiss Alpine climbers, Feb. 13.

1922a Proposed restoration of name of Mount Tacoma. Am. Scenic
and Hist. Preservatn. Soc., 27th ann. rept., pp. 155-54.

1924 Climatic changes recorded in tree growth. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 2:2.

1924a The great myth — "Mount Tacoraa and the facts of history".
Olympia Chamber of Commerce and the Thurston County Pioneer
and Historical Society. Olympia, Wash.

1925 Mount Rainier National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preser
vatn. Soc., 30th ann. rept., pp. 171-72.

1925a The history of the Mount Rainier region. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 2:3 (July 8).

1927 The wildlife "ceiling;" Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:2-3
(Aug. 29).

Animal life near the summit of the mountain is observed.

1928 Rainier fs wilderness areas assured. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 6:4 (Sept. 15), illus.

1929 The Cradle of Mount Rainier National Park. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 7:7 (June), illus.

Historical notes on origin of the park.

1929a Round the mountain. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:2-4 (Oct.).
Notes on a trip around Mount Rainier National Park.

1930 Historical notes - Dr. William Frazer Tolmie. Mount Rain
ier nat. notes, C:5 (Jan.), illus.

1930s Historical notes - Lieut. A. V. Kautz. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 8:2 (Feb.), illus.
Kautz was first to ascend Mount Rainier, July, 1857.

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
General

Anonymous

1930b James Longmire. Mount Rainier nat . notes, 3:24 (Ap.), illus.
Brief biography of a pioneer of the park area.

1930c Stevens and Van Trump. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 8:18(Mar.).
First ascent of Mount Rainier, Stevens and Van Trump, 1870.

1931 On the trail. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:2-3 (Sept.).
Observations on a six-day pack trip.

1931a Type map of Mount Rainier National Park competed. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 8:2 (Mar.).

1932 Longmire homestead cabin. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:2
(Aug. ) , illus.

1932a Old man winter. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:6-7 (Mar.),

illus .

Tabulates total snowfall recorded at Longmire and Paradise
Valley since 1915.

1933 Milestones in the historical development of Mount Rainier
National Park. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 11:7-9 (Aug. ) , illus,
History of the first voyages along the Pacific coast.

1934 Historical highlights of Mount Rainier National Park.
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:7-8 (Jan.).

1934a Historical highlights of Mount Rainier National Park.

Hount Rainier nat. notes, 12:6-7 (Feb.).

Captain Gray discovers Columbia; Vancouver discovers Mount
Rainier.

1934b Noted ascents of Mount Rainier. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
12:82 (Sept.).

1934c Mount Rainier, Washington. In: General information on the
national parks, 40 pp., illus., map. U.S. Dept . Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1936 Mount Rainier National Park. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park
Serv., 40pp., illus.
General information. Occasionally revised and reissued.

Albright, H. M.

1918 Yfinter sports in summer. U. S. Dept. Int., rept. 1917,
1:831-32. Washington, Govt. print, off.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 Mount Rainier National Park. In their: Oh, Ranger!,

pp. 7, 18, 47, 54, 75, 100/182, 139, 148, illus. Stan
ford Univ. (Calif.) Press.
/

Allen, Edward F.

1913 Trails in Mount Rainier National Park. Travel, 21:8-12,
62-64 (May), illus.

Allen, Edward F., camp, and ed.

1915 Mount Rainier National Park. In his: A guide to the

national parks of America, pp. 150-174, illus., map.

New York, McBride, Nast.

Anderson, Ada W.

1901 To the summit of Mount Rainier. Outing, ^8: 386-92 (July),

illus .

An account of attempted ascents from 1857 to 1897.

Bailey, George.

1886 Ascent of Mount Tacoma. Overland rao. , 8 (sec. ser.):266-

78 (Sept.) , map.

Account of a climb to the crest, Aug. 17, 1884.

Barnes, A. H.

1912 The great white monarch of the Pacific northwest [Mount

Rainier.]. Natl. geog. mag., 23:593-826 (June), illus.,

map, bibliog.

Contains 30 full and half -page photographs.

Brockman, C. Frank.

1929 How high is up? Solved: Am. forests, 35:464-66, 542

(Aug. ) , illus.

An ascent to Mount Rainier by author and three companions.

1932 On winter trails. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:23 (Feb.),
illus .

1932a Down the east boundary. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:7-8
(Nov.) , illus.
Scenic descriptions of unfrequented trails.

1933 Dr. Wbu Frazer Tolmio. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 11:2-3
(Aug.) , illus.

1933a Across the east side. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 11:78
(Oct.) , map.
Account of a foot tour.

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
General

1934 Historical highlights of Mount Rainier. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 12:26-27 (Mar.); 30-31 (Ap.); 40-41 (May);
51-52 (June); 61-62 (July); 72-73 .(Aug.), illus.
From first explorations to the present.

1934a More about the weather. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:45-
46 (May); 55-56 (June), illus .L
Meteorological information about Mount Rainier.

1934b Yakima Park when winter comes. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
12:22 (Mar.) , illus.

1936 The wonders of Mount Rainier. Fat . Hist. ,37: 253-65 (Mar.) ,il.

Brooks , William A.

1905 Camping in Paradise. Mazama, 2:267-68 (Dec.). Reprinted
from the Boston Transcript, Aug. 23, 1905.

Description of Paradise Park in Mount Rainier National Park.

1906 With Sierrans and Mazamas — July, 1905. Appalachia,ll:114-
125 (May), illus.

Joint meeting and camping expeditions of members of the
Sierra Club, Mazamas, and Appalachian Mountain Club to Paradise Park.

.Brown, Allison L.

1920 Ascent of Mount Rainier by the Ingrahan Glacier. Mountain
eer,. 13:49-50 (Nov.).
Recollections of an ascant made by the writer as a boy, 1885.

Brown, Belton Coit.

1898 A day with Mount Tacoma. Sierra Club Bui., 2:227-37 (June).
A lone attempt to scale Mount Rainier.

Brown, Harry H.

1905 From surf to summit. Overland mo. , sec. ser., 46:447-55

(Nov.) , illus.

Account of an ascent of Mount Rainier.

Browne, Belmore.

1918 Mount Rainier National Park. Mentor, 6: (ser. 159) 1-11

(July) , illus.

Detailed description of the park.

Bruce, Herbert L. , and McAllister, H. N.

1916 McClure's achievement and tragic death. In: Mount Rainier,

a record of exploration, (edited by: Edmond S. Me any) , pp.

183-193. New York, Macmillan.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Bry c e , Jame s (Vis count ) .

1923 Scenery of North America. In his: Memories of North America,

pp. 236-53. New York, Macmillan.

Includes brief descriptions of Mount Rainier National Park.

Cammerer, Arno B.

1922 Mount Rainier National Park, Wash. In: Report of the di
rector of the National Park Service to the Secretary of the
Interior for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1922, and the
travel season, 192F;, pp. 53-56, illus. Washington, Govt .
print, off.

Cameron, John H.

1905 Shall American climbers adopt European UBthods? Mazann ,

2:216-19 (Dec.) , illus.

Recommends the use of increased safety facilities for
climbers on Mount Rainier, after European practice.

Chappell, Walter M.

1934 Climatic basis for some of Mount Rainier* s natural features.
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:2-4 (Jan.).

Colby, William E.

1905 The Sierra Club on Mount Rainier. Mazama, 2:212-15 (Dec.).
A descriptive account of a climb to the summit.

Collins, Josiah.

1893 Tacoma vs. Rainier. Nation, 56:329-330 (May 4).
Argues for retention of name, Mount Rainier.

Conover, C. T., and others.

1917 In the matter of the proposal to change the name of Mount

Rainier. Seattle, Lowman and Hanford, 76 pp.

Statements and evidence presented to the Geographic Board
of the United States in an effort to keep the name "Rainier."

Conover, C. T.

1919 Mount Rainier or Mount Tacoma? Natl. mag., 48:223-24,

237-38 (June) , illus.

Summary of essential facts in the controversy.

Conway, Elisabeth W.

1930 In the shadow of the mountain. Mountaineer, 23:9-21 (Dec.),

illus.

General description of the park.

Crane, Marion.

1927 The power of the Glacier. Mid-Pacific mag., 33:343-46
(Ap.) , illus.

8

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
General

An account of how five glaciers on the western slope of
Mount Rainier are, after supplying the Puyallup River, converted
into electrical power for Seattle and other communities of the
Puget Sound region.

Curtis, Asahel.

1911 The future of the Rainier National Park. Mountaineer,

4:42-43, illus.

Stresses need for improving and extending roads.

Cutter, Charles E.

1908 A trip to the wonderland of the Cascades. Country life
in America, 14:107-72 (June), illus.

Daniels, Mark.

1916 Mount Rainier National Park. Am. forestry, 22:529-36
(Sept.) , illus.

Banner, Earl.

1931 A hike to Van Trump Park. Mount Rainier nat, notes, 9:2

(June) , illus.

General description.

Davidson, George.

1907 The name "Mount Rainier." Sierra Club Bui., 6:89-99 (Jan.).
Writer favors retention of name "Rainier.".

Davis, John M.

1926 A night on a peak [Eagle Peak.] Mount Rainier nat. notes,

6:3-4 (Sept.).

Account of a hike from Longmire Springs to the peak at night

Denman, H. H.

1924 The name of Mount Tacoma. 93 pp., bibliog. Tacoma, Wash.

Rotary Club, Kiwanis Club, Gyro Club.

Many arguments for changing name from Rainier to Tacoma.

Dillaway, N. L.

1933 A climb up Mount Rainier. !£Ld-Pacific mag., 45:541-45

( June ) , illus .

Advice to the prospective climber.

Dumbell, K. E. M.

1920 Mount Rainier National Park. In her: Seeing the West,
pp. 72-79. Garden City, N. Y. , Doubleday, Page.

Eells, Edwin.

1890 Mount Rainier. In; The mountains of Oregon (edited by:
W. G. Steel), pp. 53-57. Portland, Ore., David Steel.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Eels, Edwin, continued.

Reprint of a letter written by Mr. Eells , Indian agent at
Tacoma, dated Dec. 8, 1886. "Tacoioa" not authentic Indian rame.

Enmons, S. F., and Willis, i3ailey.

1895 Report of the Mount Rainier Forest Reserve Committee. G-eol.

Soc. of Am. , Bui., 6:13-15.

Proposal to Congress for establishment of national park.

Enoch, C. Reginald.

1910 [Mount Rainier.] In his: The great Pacific Coast, pp. 200-201.

Evans, Elwood.

1890 Thoughts on the name "Tacoma." In: The mountains of Oregon,

(edited by: W. G. Steel), pp. 59-65.

The writer concludes the name is of modern origin, without
an authentic Indian source.

Far is, John T.

1920 [Mount Rainier.]. In his: See the Far West, pp. 269.
Philadelphia, J. B. Lippincott .

1934 Are you thinking of national parks? In his: Roaming

American playgrounds, pp. 206-23, illus. New York, Farrar

and Rinehart.

Includes notes on Mount Rainier National Park.

Fay, Charles E.

1905 Through Appalachian eyes. Mazama, 2:208-11 (Dec.), illus.
Description of the park.

Ferguson, Melville F.

1925 [Mount Rainier.]. In his: Motor camping on western trails,
pp. 125-28. New York, Century.

Finck, Henry T.

1890 Oregon and Washington snow peaks. In his: Pacific Coast
scenic tour, pp. .203-16, New York, Scribner's.

Fisher, Lawrence C.

1918 Snowfall on Mount Rainier. Mo. weather rev., 46: 327 -30, illus.
Methods and results of earliest measurements of snowfall.

Fogg, P. M.

1925 Rainier's pioneer botanist. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,3:l(Sept.!
W. F. Tolmie, who visited Rainier in 1933.

Fountain, Paul.

1906 [Mount Rainier.]. In his: Eleven eaglets of the West, pp.
106, 110-112. London, John Murray.

10

i

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PJSRK
General

Gage, Earl W.

1922 The mountain of the great snow. Illustrated world, 38:99-
101, 40-41 (Sept.), illus.

Gilclirist , Charles A.

1917 With camera in the Cascades. Geog. Soc. of Phila., Bui.,

15:161-66 (Jan. -Oct.), illus.

Compares Rainier with other peaks of the Northwest.

Giles, Harry F.

1916 Mount Rainier National Park. In his: The beauties of the

state of Washington, pp. 49-53, illus. Bur. of Statistics

and Immigration, Olympia, Wash.

Gl as cock, Raglan.

1905 How we climbed Rainier. Sunset, 16:49-55 (Nov.), illus.
First ascent by southwestern slope.

Gore, Charles H.

1890 Night on the summit of Mount Rainier. In: The mountains

of Oregon, pp. 43-51, illus. Portland, Ore., David Steel.

Gross , Carl W.

1927 Our mountain. Overland mo., sec. ser. ,85:169( June) , illus.

Guie , Heister D.

1930 A new place to play. Am. forests, 36:558-62 (Sept. ), illus.

Hack, E. M.

1912 The ascent of Mount Rainier. Mountaineer, 5: 28-36, illus.

Harden, Edward W.

1911 A western mountaineering summer. Appalac^ia, 12:213-26

(July) , illus.

Contains description of Mount Rainier.

1915 Climbing Mount Rainier. Mid-Pacific mag. , 9:380-383 (Ap.),
illus .
Ascent of the mountain* s northeast face, by Mountaineers.

Harvey, Benjamin L.

1915 Correspondence relative to the Indian name of the great

mountain. Wash. State Hist. Soc. Pubs., 2:440-64.

Letters relative to the Rainier-Tacoma controversy.

11

THE PACIFIC STATES

Hazard, Joseph T.

1924 The completion of the Kautz climb. Mountaineer, 17:57-59

(Dec. ) , illus .

To the summit over Kautz' route of 1857.

1931 How to climb the six najor peaks of Washington. Mountain
eer, 24:45-50 (Bee.).

Four routes up Rainier outlined and discussed.

1932 Mount Rainier. In his: Snow sentinels of the Pacific
Northwest, pp. 133-79, illus. Seattle, Wash., Lowinan, Han ford.
Description of peak, mountain climbing, history, etc.

Henry, Alexander.

1897 [Mount Rainier.]. In hist New light on the early history
of the great Northwest, vol. 2, pp. 795-96. N.Y. , Harper.

Heywood, Herbert.

1893 In the Sound Country. California illus., mag., 2:280-91

(July) , illus.

Contains information on Mount Rainier.

Hitchcock, J. R.

1885 The Mount Blanc of our Switzerland. Outing, 5: 323-32 (Feb.).
General description and discussion of Rainier Ts glaciers.

Hopper , James .

1924 The fight over the mountain. Shall it be Rainier or Tacoma?

Collier's, 74:8-9,40 (Dec. 27), illus.

Name dispute discussed, Congress to decide.

Hough, Emerson.

1915 Made in America. Sat. eve. post, 188:19-20, 40-42(Nov.6) ,
illus .

Contains description of the park and recent improvements.

Huber, Walter L.

1931 A friendly visit in the Northwest. Sierra Club Bui., 16:

63-66 (Feb.) , illus.

Describes clinb by five Sierra Club members.

Hunt , Herbert .

1916 [First ascent of Mount Tacoma by Stevens and Van Trump.]. In;
Tacoma, its history and its builders, vol. I, pp. 144-64
illus., Chicago, Clfrk.

1916a Lieutenant Kautz attempts ascent of Mount Tacoma. In:

Tacoma, its history and its builders, vol. I, pp. 66-68,
illus., Chicago, Clark.

12

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
General

Inkers ley, Arthur.

1901 To the top of Mount Rainier with the Mazamas. Good words,
pp. 101-107, illus.

James , Ge orge ^har t on .

1915 Rairl-ar National Park. In: Our American wonderland, pp..
221-Jib, illus., Chicago, McClurg.

Jeffers, Le Roy.

1922 Mount Rainier. In his: The call of the mountains, pp.
46-54, 263, illus. New York, Dodd, Mead.

Climbing on the northern slope of Rainier.

1923 Little journeys off the beaten track. Country life, 44:35-
41 (June) , illus .

Contains information on Mount Rainier National Park.

Jones, S. B.

1927 Stevens Ridge notes. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5 :3( Aug. 29) .

Kautz, A. V.

1875 Ascent of Mount Rainier . Overland mo ., 14:393-403 (May).
Kautz rs account of his attempted ascent in 1857.

Kelley, Donald G. , and others.

1931 Gardens and glaciers of Mount Rainier. In: Three scout

naturalists in the national parks, pp. 179-93, illus.

New York , Brewer , Warren , and Putnam.

Kendall, Carpenter.

1913 Motoring on Mount Rainier. Sunset, 31:304-09 (Aug.), illus,

Laing, Hamilton M.

1916 On 3?.rking Betsy to the mountain. Sunset, 37:21-23,72,74-
76 (Sept.) , illus.

A motorcycle tour through Rainier.

Landes, Charles.

1924 The Kautz creek trail to Indian Henry* s. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 2:3 (Aug.).

Lilly, Elizabeth Sander.

1920 The impressions of a tenderfoot. Mountaineer, 12:50-60

(Nov. ) , illus.

Impressions of the park at various seasons.

Lindsey, Alton.

1933 An "old-timer" recalls some interesting happenings of the
past. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 11:4-6 (Aug.), illus.

13

THE PACIFIC STATES

Lyman, W. D.

1883 The Switzerland of the Northwest. Overland mo. 2:(2d
ser.) 300-312 (Sept.).

M cAdi e , Al e xand er .

1906 Mt. Rainier, Mt. Shasta, and Mt. Whitney as sites for

meteorological observations. Sierra Club Bui., 6:7-14( Jan. ) ,il.

McCully, A. W.

1928 Vacationing with a hobby. Am. forests, 34:407-09, 430
(July), illus.

A camera excursion through the park.

Martin, T, H.

1915 Mount Rainier National Park and its problems. Natl. Park
Conference, Proc. , pp. 158-161.

Condition of roa^s in and near the park, and need for their
extension is chiefly discussed.

Mather, Stephen T.

1920 Mount Rainier National Park. Mid-Pacific mag. , 20:26-29
(July) , illus.

Matthes, F. E.

1910 Mapping Mount Rainier National Park. Mountaineer, 3:53-54(Nov.)

Accounts of methods used and hardships encountered by the U.S.

G-eological Survey in napping the park.

Meany, Edmond S.

1916 Mount Rainier. A record of exploration. 325 pp. New
York, Macmillan.

1921 The memorial seat at Sluiskin Falls. Mazama, 6:50-59 (Dec.).

Met calf e, Gertrude.

1905 The Rainier climb. Mazama, 2:224-234 (Dec.), illus.

Mills, Enos A.

1917 Mount Rainier National Park. In her: Your national parks,
pp. 116-136. New York, Houghton, Mifflin.

History; detailed description of glaciers and flora.

Monroe, Anne S.

1905 Climbing Mount Tacoma. World today, 9 -.1047 -53 ( Oct. ), illus.
Mass ascent of Rainier by several mountain clubs.

Montgomery, J. Peak.

1898 The Mazamas' outing at Mount Rainier. Overland mo., (2d.

ser.) 32: 114-23 (Aug.), illus.

Ascent of Rainier by 51 Mazama mountaineers, 1897.

14

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
General

Mount Rainier National Park.

1904 [Administrative reports.]* Issued for the periods: 1904;
1906-14; 1916-1920; 1922-1926; 1929-1930, as annual re
ports of the superintendent of Mount Rainier National
Park. The reports are also found in the Department of .
Interior annual reports, viz: 1904-1930 inclusive, and
also in the Report of the Director of the National Park
Service, viz: 1916-1930 inclusive. No reports seem to have
been published for 1905, 1921, 1927, 1928, and after 1930.

Muir , John .

1888 [Mount Rainier.]. In: Picturesque California, the Rocky

Mountains, and the Pacific Slope, 2:285-288, illus.

Graphic account of a trip to Mount Rainier.

1918 An ascent [by the south slope] of Mount Rainier. In his:
Steep trails, pp. 261-70, illus.

Myers , Harry M.

1920 Schedule of the ascent of Mount Rainier. Mountaineer, 13:

48-49 (Nov.).

Relative data on 21 ascents from 1833 to 1919.

Parsons, Edward T.

1900 Rainier. Mazama, 2:25-34 (Oct.), illus., map.

Annual outing of the Mazamas, July 19, 1897, to the summit.

Parsons, Marion Randall.

1920 Mount Rainier in winter. Sierra Club Bui., ll:94-95( Jan.) .

Paschall, Mary.

1912 The Mountaineers' outing on the north side of Mount Rainier.
Mountaineer, 5:14-23, illus.

Prosser, William T.

1910 To Mount Rainier 's lofty summit. Overland mo.,(2d. ser.)

56:143-49 (Aug.), illus.

An account of the Mountaineers' Association ascent in July.

Prouty, H. H.

1914 [Mount Rainier National Park.]. Mazama, 4:10-13 (Dec.), illus
Mountaineering facts, figures, and precautions.

Quinn, Vernon.

1923 [Mount Rainier National Park.]. In his: Beautiful America,
pp. 237-41, illus. New York, Stokes.

15

THE PAG IF 1C STATES

Randall, Marion.

1906 The making of the Sierra Club camp. Out West, 24:396-404
(May), illun.

1906a The skyline of the Tatoosh range. Mount Rainier National
Park. Sierra Club Bui., 6:15-21 (Jan.), illus.
A peak visited and ; aiaed "Unicorn" by club members may be

higher than Pinnacle Peak, heretofore recognized as highest in the

Tatoosh range.

Rat cliff, Evelyn Marianne.

1906 The Sierra Club's ascent of Mount Rainier. Sierra Club

Bui., 6:1-5 (Jan.), illus.

Scientists accompanied party to measure height of the
mountain.

Reaburn, D. L,

1916 Report of supervisor of Mount Rainier National Park. U.S.

Dept. Int., Kept., 1915, 1:959-976, map. Washington, Grovt.

print, off.

History, location, administration, roads and trails, game,
mineral springs, and general description.

Reik, Henry Ottridge.

c!920 Mount Rainier National Park. In: A tour of America's
national parks, pp. 119-136, illus. New York, Button.

Rensch, H. E.

1935 Mount Rainier; its human history associations. 46 pp.,

bibliog. Berkeley, U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.

Traces sea and land explorations from earliest times. To
be used as an outline in preparing museum displays.

Riddell, George X.

1914 Mazaraa ascents of Mount Rainier, 1914. Mazama, 4:14-23
(Dec.) , illus.

Roberts, Milnor.

1909 A wonderland of glaciers and snow. Natl. geog. mag., 20:

530-37 (June) , illus.

A description of Mount Rainier National Park.

Rodman , Willoughby .

1906 The Sierra Club in the Northwest. Out West, 24:364-95

(May) , illus.

Description of an accent of Mount Rainier.

Rogers, Philip F.

1915 Around Mount Rainier with the Mountaineers, 1915. Mountain-

16

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
General

eer, 8:9-26 (Dec.), illus.

A descriptive account and itinerary.

Rolfe, Mary A.

1936 Mount Rainier National Park. In her: Our national parks,

book 2, pp. 118-156, illus. New York, Sanborn.

Descriptive narrative for elementary schools.

Rush, C. E.

1924 The gathering of the mountain clans. In his: Tales of a

western mountaineer, pp. 136-51, illus. Boston, Houghton,

Mifflin.

Climbing Mount Rainier, 1905, with members of Mazam Club.

Schmoe, Floyd W.

1924 Narada Falls. Mount Rainier nat . notes, 2:3-4 (Aug. 13).

1924a The wonderful trail. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2; 1-6

(Oct. ) , map, illus.

Describes a 10-day tour of the park; approximate census of
the park's wildlife.

1925 Our greatest mountain. 366 pp., illus., map, index.
Complete, detailed information on the park region.

1926 Ice caverns of Paradise. Nature mag., 7:347-48( June) , illus.

1927 Life is hard in the wilderness. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
5:2 (July 18).

A naturalist discusses famine seasons in the wilderness.

1931 The Great Stone Bear. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:2
(Oct.) , illus.
Name perfectly descriptive of this 6076-foot peak.

Sense nig, Wayne.

1909 A knapsack trip into Spray Park. Mountaineer, 2:56-59
(Nov.) , illus.

Smalley, Eugene V.

1885 From Puget Sound to the upper Columbia. Century mag.,

29:832-42 (Ap.), illus.

Contains detailed description of Mount Rainier.

Snyder, Carl.

1894 Our new national wonderland. Review of reviews, 9:163-71
(Feb.), illus.

17

THE PACIFIC STATES

Sperlin, Q. B.

1919 Forty-eighth, anniversary ascent of the mountain. Mountain
eer, 12:52-64 (Dec.), illus.
A party of five scales Rainier despite storms and mishaps.

Stephens, Isaac I.

1855 Narrative and final report of explorations for a route near
the forty-seventh and forty-ninth parallels of north lati
tude, from St. Paul to Puget Sound. U.S. War Dept., Repts.
of explorations and surveys, 12, Bk. I, 358 pp., illus.
Washington, Thomas H. Ford.

Stevens, Hazard.

1905 The Rainier outing of 1905. Mazama, 2:201-02 (Dec.).

Writer notes changes on Rainier since his ascent of 1870.

Stevens, Hazard, and Emmons , S. F.

1876 The ascent of Mount Rainier. Nation, 23:312-13 (Nov. ), map.
Controversy "between writers regarding priority of ascent.

Tilden, Freeman.

1923 When I broke away from the city. Country life, 44:35-41,
illus .

Contains narrative description of Rainier region.

Toll, Roger W.

1919 Our national park. Mountaineer, 12:24-34 (Dec.), illus.
Superintendent discusses needs and plans for improveuB nt s .

Tolson, Hillory A. , comp.

1933 Mount Rainier National Park. In: Laws relating to the

Natl. Park Serv., the national parks and monuments, pp.

101-110. Washington, Govt . print, off.

Federal and state legislation relating to Mount Rainier.

Toinlinson, Owen A.

1924 Development of our national park. Mountaineer, 17:40-45
(Dec.) , illus.

Urges improved accommodations to attract tourists.

Trager, Martelle W.

1939 Mount Rainier National Park. In her: National parks of

the Northwest, pp. 140-158, illus., map. New York, Dodd,Mead,
Descriptive account of personal experiences.

Tro sper , Wendell .

1933 An attempt at Ptarmigan Ridge on Mount Rainier. Mountaineer,
26:14-15 (Dec.).

'

•

18

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
General

Vancouver, George.

1798 [Discovery and naming of Mount Rainier.]. In his: A voyage
of discovery to the North Pacific Ocean and round the world,
3 vols., 1437 pp. London, G. G. and 3*. Robinson.

1916 The mountain discovered and naraed, 1792. In: Mount Rainier,
a record of explorations, pp. 1-5, port., edited by Edmond
S. He any.

The mountain described and named.

Van Trump.

1894 Mount Tacoma. Sierra Club Bui., 4:109-32, illus. , diagram.
The ascent described occurred in August, 1892.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 A general index to Mount Rainier Nature Notes, 1923-1936.
45 pp. Berkeley, Calif. U.S. Dept. Int., Nat 1. Park Serv.

1938a [Mount Rainier National Park.]. In: Guide to national parks
and monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 92-93.
Berkeley, Calif. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.
Specifies location, area, and date of establishment. Lists

and describes briefly the principal features. Gives historical data,

Walker, A. Martha.

1915 The ascent of Mount Rainier. Overland mo., 2d ser., 65:
393-98 (May), illus.

Wall, S. W.

1918 Justice to the mountain. Outlook, 118:676-78 (Ap. 24).
An argument favoring use of the name "TacoriB."

Walkinshaw, Robert.

1929 The mountain. In: On Puget Sound, pp. 95-127, illus.,

New York, Putnam.

A description of Mount Rainier.

Walsh, Mrs. Stuart P.

1928 Skiing and the ski hut [on Mount Rainier.], Mountaineer,
21:45-58 (Dec.), illus.

Waterman, T. T.

1922 The geographical names used by the Indians of the Pacific
Coast. Geog. rev., 12:175-94 (Ap.), illus., map.

Wayne, Flynn.

1917 The national parks of America. Natl. mag., 46:674-91
(AUC.) , illus.

Includes descriptive notes on Mount Rainier National Park.

19

TEE PACIFIC STATES

Wickers ham, James.

1893 Is it "Mt. Tacoroa" or "Rainier"? What do history and tra
dition say? 16 pp. Proc. of the Tacoma Acad. of Sci.(Feb.6)
Favors "Tacoraa."

Wilbur , Earl Morse .

1898 The Mazamas' trip to Mt. Rainier. Sierra Club Bui., 2:
192-93 (Jan.).

Willey, Day Allen.

1907 The lure of the mountains. Putnam's mo., 2:447-56 (July),

illus.

A description of mounts Adams and Rainier.

Willis, Bailey.

1899 The Mount Rainier National Park. Forester, 5:97-103
(May), illus.

Winthrop, Theodore.

1913 Tacoioa. In his: The canoe and the saddle, or Klalan and

Klickatat, pp. 99-122, illus. Tacoma, Wash., John H.

Williams. (Revised edition, edited by John H. Williams).

This book was first published about 1862.

Wood, Ruth K.

1916 Rainier National Park. In her: The tourist's Northwest,
pp. 217-27, illus. New York, Dodd, Mead.

Yard, Robert S.

1916 Director of the nation's playgrounds. Sunset, 37:27
( Sept , ) , port .

Contains account of Stephen T. Mather's services to park.

1917 The frozen octopus. In his: The top of the continent,
pp. 115-39, illus. New York, Scribnerfs.
Description; glaciers, and other features of Rainier.

1919 Mount Rainier, ice octopus. In his: The book of the
national parks, pp. 159-815, illus. New York, Scribner's.

1920 The Mount Rainier National Park. In his: Glimpses of
our national parks, pp. 28-33, illus., Natl. Park Serv.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

1931 Mount Rainier. In: The national parks portfolio, pp. 77-

100, illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.

General description of all features of the park. This book
is often revised and reissued.

20

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
FLORA

Anonymous

1912 The wonderful alpine flowers of Mount Rainier. Country
life, 31:38-41 (Ap.), illus.

1924 Avalanche lilies. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:1 (July),
1924a Indian paint brush. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2: £( July) .
1924b The silver forest. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,2: 1( July 9).
1924c Squaw grass. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:2 (July 9).

1924d Tiinberline trees [alpine fir, mountain hemlock]. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 2:1-2 (July 23).

1924e Seed pod of the western anemone. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
2:3 (July 23).

1924f Big trees. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:1-2 (July 30).

1924g Fire weed. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:4 (July 30).

1924h Western red cedar. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:l(Sept .10) .

1924i Fungi. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:1-2 (Nov. 1).

1924J The month's flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:3.

1924k Natural rotation of flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2: 3.

1925 Wild flowers [lady slipper]. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,3:1
(July 1).

1925a Red berries. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:1-2 (Oct.. l) .

1926 The Noble fir. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:1 (Feb. l).

1926a Various ways of solving the winter food supply problem.
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2 (Ap.).

1926b Orchids bloom. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2 (May 1).

1927 Why the branches of alpine trees droop. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 4:2-3 (Jan. 1) .

21

THE PACIFIC STATES

1927a Snow queens [avalanche lilies]. Mount Rainier nat . notes,
5:1 (July 13).

1927b Albino plants. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:2-3 (Aug. 8).

1927 c A bumper crop [alpine fir, mountain hemlock]. Mount Rain

ier nat. notes, 5:1-2 (Sept. 6).

1927d A flower new to us [related to bladderwort]. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 5:1 (Sept. 6), illus .

1927e Outpost trees. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:3 (Sept. 12).

1928 An albino niiaulus. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 6:3 (Sept.l).

1928a The blue gentian, "most beautiful of our late-blooming wild
flowers." Mount Rainier nat. notes, 6:3 (Sept.l), illus.

1928b Our famous avalanche lily .Mount Rainier nat. notes, 6:3 (Sept. 1)

1928c Along an autumn trail. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 6:2
(Sept. 15) , illus.

1928d Trees of Mount Rair/.ar National Park; the Alaska cedar

(Qhameooyparis ncutkatensis) . Mount Rainier nat. notes,
6:3 (Sept. 15) , illus.

1928e Trees of Mount Rair.ier National Park. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 6:2 (Get. l) , illus.

1928f The Noble fir. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 6:5 (Dec. ), illus.

1928g Oregon grape — Mount Rainier "holly." Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 6:3 (Dec.), illus.

1929 Lodgepole pine. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:3 (Jan.), illus.
1929a Do you know the yew? Mount Rainier nat. notes ,7: 2(Mar. ), illus.

1929b The flowers that bloon in the spring. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 7:2 (June), illus.

1929c August flower meadow. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,7:2-3, Aug. , illus.
1929d The albino gentian. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:4 (Oct.).
1929e Evergreen plants. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:5-6 (Dec.).

22

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
Flora

1929f Western white pine. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:3 (Feb.).

1929g Trees of Mount Rainier. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:4-5
(May), illus.

1929h What is in a name? Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:2-3 (July).
Flora named for various botanists and explorers.

1929i Self -pruning. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:6(0ct.)» illus.
Lower branches discarded by trees in dense stands.

1930 On the heels of the colt's foot. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
8:2 (May) , illus,

1930a Spring flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 8:4-5 (June).

1930b Paging Summer I Mount Rainier nat. notes, 8:2-3 (July),
illus.
Describes early summer flowers.

1931 No rolling stone gathered this moss. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 9:2 (Mar. ) .

Steam vent near summit of Rainier enables moss to grow.

1931a Flowers of the season. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:4-5
(June) , illus .

1931b Mushrooms. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:2 (June), illus.

1932 The family tree of our common plants. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 10:3 (July), illus.

1933 Spring fungi. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 11:2 ( June) , illus.

1933a Spring comes again to the mountain. Mount Rainier nat.
not es , 11 : 4 ( June ) , illus .

1933b Flowers for July in Mount Rainier National Park. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 11:2-3 (July), illus.

1933c Your "Christmas tree" is probably one of these. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 11:2 (Dec.), illus.
Five specimens of fir, hemlock, and spruce foliage described.

1934 Life history of a fern. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:3 (Ap.).

Brockman, C. Frank.

1930 August flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 8:58-59 (Aug.l).

23

THE PACIFIC STATES

Brockman, C. Frank.

1930 Flowers as summer fades. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,8:71-72
( Sept . ) , ill us .

1931 Mid-summer's flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:4-5
( Ap . 1 ) , illus .

1931a Why leaves fall. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:3-4 (Oct.).

1931b How your "Christmas tree" grew. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
9:2-3 (Dec.) , illus.
Growth of trees from seeds to maturity.

1932 Green plants in winter. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:2-3
(Jan.) , illus.

1932a Tree flowers that bloom in the spring. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 10:3-4 (Ap.), illus.

1932b Flowers of the season. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:3-4
(June) , illus.

1932c Look for these flowers on the mountain at this time. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 10:4 (July), illus.

1932d Cones of our evergreens. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:3-4
(Oct.), illus.

1932e The fruits of some common plants. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
1:2-3 (Nov.) , illus.

1933 Do you know your trees in winter? Mount Rainier nat. notes,
10:2-3 (Dec*) , illus.

1933a Tree flowers we see in the spring. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 11:6-8 (Ap.), illus.

1933b Flowers of midsummer. Mount Rainier nat. notes, ll:6(Aug.).

1933c The forests of Mount Rainier. Nat. hist. 33:523-532 (Sept.-
Oct . ) , illus .

1933d By their fruits ye shall know them. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 11:5-6 (Oct.), illus.
Describes flowering plants bearing seeds or fruits.

1934 Early arrivals among our flowers. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 12:53-54 (June), illus.

24

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
Flora

1934a An interesting plant f sundew plant]. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 12:66 (July), illus.

1934b Midsummer flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:65(July).

1934c August's flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:74-75
(Aug. ) , illus.

1934d Deer fern. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:71(Aug.}, illus.
1934e Maidenhair fern. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:84 (Sept.).
1934f Oak fern. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:108 (Nov.), illus.

1936 Ferns of Mount Rainier. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 14:73-
78 (Mar.) , illus.

Coulter, J. M., and Rose, J. N.

1899 Hesperogenia, new genus of umbelliferae from Mount Rainier.

Contrib. natl. herb., 5: 203 (Oct. 31), illus.

Technical description of new species of plant on Rainier.

Dodge, Natt , and Johnson, LeRoy.

1935 Albino flowers on Mount Rainier. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
13:22-24 (June), illus.

Flett, John B.

1916 Features of the flora of Mount Rainier National Park. U.S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 48 pp., illus. Washington,

G-ovt. print, off.

Fogg, P. M.

1924 The blue gentian. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:2 (Aug. 13).

1924a Mount Rainier 's medical plants. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
2:1-2 (Aug. 13).

1924b Grass of Parnassus. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:5 (Aug. 27).

1924c Life that thrives in glaciers. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
2:2-5 (Sept. 3).

1924d We still have flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,2: 2( Sept .3) .

1925 Blueberries are ripe. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,3:l(Aug .18) .

25

THE PACIFIC STATES

Fogg, P. M.

1925a Bluebells are blooming. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,3: 1( Sept .1).

1925b Mount Rainier's carpet. Am. forests, 31: 526-28(Sept. ) , illus .

Hickok, C. W.

19£7 Herinitomes congestuin — Oh my! Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:2
Aug. 15).

1927a Single beauty. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:2 (Aug. 15).
Single beauty is a member of the wintergreen family.

Homuth, Earl.

1933 The names of two popular flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
13:22 (Sept. ) , illus.

Generic names and meanings of avalanche lily and queen's cup.

Hopkins, L. S.

1917 A new species of fern fPolystichura jenningsi]. Carnegie
mus . , Annals , 11 : 362-63 , illus .

Hover son, Julius.

1935 Plant pioneers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 13 : 60-61(Dec. ), illus.

1936 Huckleberries. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 14:82-86( June) , illus,

Landes, Charles.

1924 The march of the flowers up the mountain. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 2:1-2 (Aug. 27),

1925 The twin flower. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2 (July 8).

1925a Dwarf dogwood or bunch-berry fCornus canadensis]. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 3:2 (July 15).

1925b Flower communities. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2-3(Aug. 11). ,

1928 Cliff dwelling plants. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 6:6-8
(Aug. 15), illus.

1929 An interesting plant family. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:5-6
(Aug. ) , illus .

1932 Plant cliff dwellers [lichens, mosses, ferns]. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 10:7-8 (Sept.); 5-6 (Oct.), illus.

1934 The flora of Rainier fs north and south flanks. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 12:92-95 (Oct.), illus.

26

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
Flora

1935 Distribution of plants on Mount Rainier. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 13:41-45 (Sept.), illus.

Lindsey, Alton A.

1936 The bursting of buds and the growth of trees. Mount Rain
ier nat. notes, 14:68-71 (Mar.), illus.

McCully, Anderson W.

1910 The Rainier forest reserve. Overland mo., 55:(2d ser.),
552-60 (June), illus.

1930 Mountain flowers. Country life, 57:41-45 (Jan.), illus.

Morse, Elizabeth Eaton.

1931 Feature of our fungi. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:4-5
(Sept.) , illus.

Pennell, Francis W.

1935 A note on the distribution of (Synthyris schizantha) . Acad.
natl. sci. of Phi la. , Proc. 86:515-16.

Peters, Vf. H.

1922 Mount Rainier National Park. Am. forestry, 28:412-13
(July) , illus.

Piper, Charles V.

1901 The flora of Mount Rainier. Mazama, 2:92-117 (Ap.).

1905 Additions and corrections to the list of Mount Rainier
plants. Mazama, 2:270-71 (Dec.).

1906 Flora of the state of Yfashington. Contributions from the
U.S. National Herbarium. 11:637, illus., bibliog. , U.S.
National Museum. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Plummer, Fred G.

1900 Mount Rainier Forest Reserve, Washington. U.S. Geol. Surv. ,
21st ann. rept., 21:5, pp. 87-143, illus., maps. Washing
ton , Govt . print . off .
A report on the boundaries, climate, arable lands and soil

formations, minerals and mineral springs, tree species, etc.

Rose, J. N. See: Coulter, J. M. 1899.

Schmoe, F. W.

1924 Alaska yellow cedar. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:l-2(Sept .3) .

27

THE PACIFIC STATES

Schmoe, F. W.

1925 Grass of Parnassus. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2 (Aug. 18).

1925a Sub-alpine trees. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:3 (Aug. 18).

1926 How nature rotates her tree crops. Am. forests, 32:472-73
(Aug. ) , illus.

1928 The month of red berries. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 6:3
(Aug. 15) , illus .

Smith, Ernest C.

1894 A trip to Mount Rainier. Appalachia, 7: 185- 205 (Mar.) , illus,

Taylor, Frank.

1929 "The flowers are wi.jaing." Sunset, 62:26-27(Feb. ) , illus.

Tolmie, William F.

1916 First approach to tj.e mountain. In: Mount Rainier, a re
cord of explorations, (edited by Edmond S. Meariy) , pp. 6-12,
illus. New York, Macmillan.

Dr. Tolmie' a diary of 1833.

Ulke, Titus.

1917 • Life on glaciers and snow fields. Sci. Am. Supp., 83:316-

17 (May 19), illus.

Warren, Fred.

1926 Alpine flowers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 4:2-3(July 13).

1926a Red berries. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 4:l-2(Aug.l8) , illus.

Willis, Bailey.

1887 Our grandest mountain and deepest forest. School of mines
quart., 8:152-64 (Jan.).

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
FAUNA

Anonymous

1910 Mount Rainier National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist.
Preserv. Soc., 15th ann. rept., pp. 122-23.

1924 White Rocky Mountain goat. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:
3-4 (July 16).

1924a The hoary marmot . Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:3-4(July 23).

1924b The "rock rabbit" or cony. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:
4-5 (July 23).

1924c li/hite-t ailed ptarmigan. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:3-4
(July 30).

1924d Varied thrush. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:2 (Sept.).

1924e List of birds occurring in Mount Rainier National Park,

Washington, as compiled by U.S. Biological Survey. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 2:2-3 (Sept. 10).

1924f List of mammals occurring in Mount Rainier National Park,
Washington, as compiled by the U.S. Biological Survey,
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:3 (Sept. 10).

1924g Camp robber — Oregon jay. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:1-2
(Sept. 10).

1924h Animal life. Mount Rainier nat.notes,2:l(0ct. ) ,illus. ,map.

1924i Animal trails. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:5 (Oct.).

1924 j Beaver houses. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:3.

1924k Game census. Mount Rainier nat. notes, f-:5 (Oct.).

1925 Strange upward migration of birds. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 3:3-4.

1925a Chestnut backed chickadee. Mount Rainier nat .notes, 2: 1( Feb. 1),

1925b The varying hare or snowshoe rabbit. [Lepus americanus var.J,
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:1-2 (Mar. 1), illus.

29

THE PACIFIC STATES

Anonymous

1925c Western winter wren. Mount Rainier riat. notes, 2:2-3
(Mar. 1), illus.

1925d Bear dons. Mount Rainier nat . notes, 2:2-4 (May 1).
The hibernation of "bears is fully explained.

1925e Beaver city discovered. Mount Rainier nat .notes,2:l(May 1).

1925f The Harlequin duck j^Histronicus histronicus]. Mount Rain
ier nat. notes, 2:1 (June).

1925g Local bird list. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:1 (June l).
19251i Fishes of the park. Mount Rainier nat. notes,3:2;-3( July 1).

19251 Wild ducks nest in park. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2
(July 1) , illus.

1925 j Wild animal life of the park. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:2-3 (July 21).

1925k The Pipit. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:1 (Oct. 1).

1925L Ptarmigan moulting. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,3:5 (Oct.l).

1925m The range of the white mountain goat. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 3:2-3 (Dec. 1), illus.

1925n Rodents. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:1 (Dec. 1).

1926 Columbia black -tailed deer. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:3
(Jan. 1) , illus.

1926a The cougar or mountain lion. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:1-3 (Uar. 1) .

1926b The northern ravon. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:l-2(Hay 1) .

1926c The home of the water ouzel. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:2-3 (June 1).

1927 Big-eared desert bat. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:1 (Aug. 22).

1927a Western solitary sandpiper. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:1
(Aug. 29).

1928 Our friendly enemy — the camp robber. Mount Rainier nat .
notes, 6:1 (Oct. 1), illus.

30

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
Fauna

1929 Cougar, or mountain lion. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:3
(Mar.), illus.

1929a Band-tailed pigeons. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:3 (Nov.)*

1938 Check list of birds of Mount Rainier National Park. 21 pp.,
Washington, Govt. print, off.

Brockman, C. Frank.

1935 Ptarmigan on Mount Rainier. Am. forests, 41:68-70 (Feb.),
illus.

Banner, Earl.

1936 Porcupine in Mount Rainier National Park. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 14:105-06 (Sept.).

Dodge, Natt N.

1932 Ground squirrels. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10: 2 (Sept.),
illus.

1934 Examples of bird intelligence. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
12:42-3 (May), illus.

Durst an, Wayne.

1936 Insect migrants [beetles and butterflies]. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 14:66 (Mar.).

1936a The natural agents of cross pollination. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 14:87 (June), illus.

Finley, William L.

1919 With the birds and animals of Rainier. Mazama, 5:319-26
(Dec.) , illus.

Flett, J. B.

1926 Three little known characteristics of the mountain goat.
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 4:2-3 (Aug. 18).

Fogg, P. M.

1924 The Clark nutcracker. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2: 5( Aug. 27) .

1925 Insect activity in the park. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:1-2 (Aug. 11).

1925a Snakes. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2 (Aug. 18).

Homuth, Earl.

1934 Notes on mountain goat. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 13: 76-7 ( Aug. )

31

THE PACIFIC STATES

Johnson, Clifton.

1922 [Mount Rainier]. In his: Tftiat to see in .America, pp. 531-
35, illus. New York, Macmillan.

Jones, S. B.

1927 Whistling marniots. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:1 (Aug. 15).

Kitchin, E. A.

1935 Barrow's golden-eye at Rainier. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
13:25-26 (June), illus.

1936 A new "bird recorded fhooded merganser]. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 14:72 (Mar.) .

Landes , Charles .

1924 The Douglas squlrrrel. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:l(Aug.).

1924a Beaver daius on Tacona Creek. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:
4-5 (Aug. 27).

1924b Black fcx on Cushman Crest. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:
3-4 (Aug. 27).

1925 Animal habits. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:1-2.

1925a A bird mountaineer [rosy finch]. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:2-3 (July 28).

1925b The mountain beaver [applodontia]. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:1-2 (July 15).

1925c The varied thrush. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:2 (Aug. 4).
1927 Band-tailed pigeons. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:4 (July 18).

Lindsey, A. A.

1935 About bird beaks. Ilount Rainier nat. notes, 13:50-51
(Dec.) , illus.

Macy, Preston P,

1931 Beavers moving in on Longmire. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
9:3 (Feb.).

Me lander, A. L.

1922 Collecting innect-s on Mount Rainier. Smithsonian Instn.

aim. rept., pp. 415-22, illus. Washington, G-ovt. print, off.

Pickwell, Gayle.

1930 Some forest sprites; varieties of western chipmunks mean
much to the outdoors. Nature mag., 15:359-62, illus.

32

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PJ&K
Fauna

Richards, L. G.

1930 About owlo. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 8:7-8(Oct.), illus.

Sampson, Alden.

1906 Wild animals of the Mount Rainier National Park. Sierra
Club Bui., 6:32-56 (Jan.).

Scheffer, Victor.

1932 The diet of the bear. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10 :4( Sept .)•

1932a Fish food. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:3-4(Sept. ) , illus.
1934 The spittle bug. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:80-81(Sept . ) .

1934a The cottonwood leaf beetle (l). Plant pests of Mount Rainier,
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 12:106-07 (Nov.)., illus.

Schmoc, F. T7.

1924 Sooty grouse. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:2-3 (Aug. 13).

1924a Funny cony. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:3-4 (Sept. 3).

1924b Rare visitor [great blue heron] in Paradise. Mount Rain
ier nat. notes, 2:1 (Sept. 3).

1925 Frogs and salamanders fnew species in park region]. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 3:1-2 (Aug. 25).

1925a Bears welcome huckleberry time. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:2-3 (Sept. 1).

1925b Goats great climbers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:3 (Sept.).

1926 Big horn or mountain sheep. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 4:1
(July 13).

1927 Trout hatching. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5 :2~3( July 25).

1927a A bug dairy [ants keep aphides to ffmilkw]. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 5:2-5 (Aug. 22).

1927b American pipit. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:3 (Aug. 29).

Shaw, William T.

1925 The marmots of Hannegan Pass. Nat. Hist., 25:169-77
(Mar.-Ap.) , illus.

33

THE PACIFIC STATES

Slater, James R. , and BrociLian, C. Frank.

1936 Amphibians of Mount Rainier National Park. Mount Rainier

nat. notes, 14:113-38 (Dec.), illus., bibliog.

A comprehensive study of the twelve species of amphibians.

Taylor, Walter P.

1918 Revision of the rodent genus Aplodontia. Univ. Calif,
pubs, in zoology, 17:435-504, illus., bibliog.

1920 Rodent mammalogy. Journal of maumalogy, 1:93-94 (Feb.).

1921

1922

Soiae birds and maironals of Mount Rainier. Mountaineer,
14:27-35 (Nov.) , illus.

WA distributional and ecological study of Mount Rainier,
Washingt on . " EC ology , 3 : 214-236 ( July) , illus . , bibli og .
A study, 1919, by Biological Survey, State College of Wash.,
National Park Serv.

1927 Mammals and birds of Mount Rainier National Park. Natl.
Park Serv., 249 pp., illus., map, bibliog. Washington,
Govt. print, off.

Trolson, Roy.

1926 Animals in the northern section of the park. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 4:4 (Aug. 18).

Ulke, Titus.

1917 Life on glaciers and snow fields f snow flea, snow worm, red
snow algae], Sci . Am. supp., 83:316-17 (May 19), illus.

Van Denburgh, John.

1906 Description of a now species of the genus Plethodon [Pleth-

odou Vandyke i] fro;*- Mount Rainier, Washington. Calif, a cad.

sci. proc., 4: (3d SXL-.) 61-63 (Mar. 14).

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK

GEOLOGY AND RELATED SUBJECTS

Anonymous

1902 Mount Rainier. Sci. Am. supp., 53:21882 (liar. 1).

Geological and geographical description of Mount Rainier.

1924 Geology of Mount Rainier. Mount Rainier :iat. notes, 2:1-2.
1924a Movement of glaciers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:2.

1924b Mineral springs at Longmire. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:3,
(July 1).

1924c Glacial sidelights. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:4-5(July).

1924d Ice caves [at terminus of Paradise Glacier]. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 2:5 (July 30).

1924e Record of earthquake. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 2:4(Aug.).

,,m - -a

1925 Recession of the Nisqually glacier [averages 53 feet annual
ly]. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:4 (Oct. 1), illus.

1925a Mount Rainier — finest example of how earth was built. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 2:1-2 (Nov. 1).

1927 Glacial polish [on the rocks at snout of Paradise-Stevens
glacier]. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 5:2-3 (Sept. 12).

1928 Nisqually glacier recedes eighty-nine feet. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 6:4 (Dec.).

929 Geological story of ffThe Mountain." Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 7:1-2 (May), illus.

1929a Mount Rainier's glaciers. Mount Rainier uat. notes,7:2(May) .

1929b Glacial recession. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:2 (Nov.).

1931 Glacial recession. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:6*

1932 Glaciers. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:6-7( July) , illus.

1932a The reason why. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10 : 4-6 ( Nov. ), illus.

Explains the breaking off of the snout of the Nisqually
glacier.

35

THE PACIFIC STATES

Anonymous

1933 Annual recession Lie a GUT erne nts of the glaciers of Mount Rain
ier. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 11:2-5 (Nov.), illus.

Birdseye, Claude PL

1915 Surveying our greatest volcano; ascertaining the exact
height of Mount Rainier, the second highest peak in the
United States. Travel, 25:20-23, 58-60 (May), illus.

Bravinder, Kenneth.

1932 The why of a volcano. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:5-7
(Dec.) , illus.

Brockman, C. Frank

1930 Concerning the Nisqually. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:4
(Nov.).

1932 The movements of the Nisqually glacier. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 10:7-8 (Aug.), illus.

1932a Glacial recession. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 10:2 (Oct.).
1934 Receding glaciers. Am. forests, 40 : 512-15, 550(Nov. ), illus.

1934a Recession data on the glaciers of Mount Rainier. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 12:102-05 (Nov.), illus.

1935 Glacial recession in Mount Rainier National Park. Mount
Rainier nat. notes, 13:55-58 (Dec.), illus.

Chappsll, Walter M.

1932 Roches mount onnees f sheep rocks in Box Canyon], Mount Rain
ier nat. notes, 10:5 (Sept.), illus.

1933 Mount Rainier and the ice age. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
11:2-4 (Ap.), illus.

C oombs , Howard .

1930 Hanging valleys. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 8:1( July) , illus.

1931 Springs. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 9:5 (Oct.), illus.
Explanation of probable sources of hot and mineral springs.

1931a The Williwakas slide. Mount Rainier nat. notes ,9 :1( June 1)
Area of smooth polished rock on wall of Williwakas glacier.

1936 The geology of Mount Rainier National Park. Univ. of Wash,
pub. in gaol., vol. 3, pp. 131-212 (July).

36

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Delo, David M. See: Wentworth , Chester K. 1931.

Ef finger , William L.

1929 A bit of geology [mountain peaks of Washington and Oregon],
Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:6 (Aug.).

Fogg, P. M.

1925 The ice caves. Mount Rainier nat. notes,3:l-2(Aug. 18).

1925a The mountain's minerals. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 3:1
(Sept. 1).

Flett, J. B.

1912 The thermal caves. Mountaineer, 5:58-61, illus.

Hague, Arnold, and Iddings, Joseph P.

1883 Notes on the volcanoes of northern California, Oregon, and

Washington territory. Am. jour. sci.,26:(3d ser. ) 222-235.

Includes a study of the lavas of Mount Rainier.

Homuth, Earl U.

1934 Glacial signatures on Sourdough Range. Mount Rainier nat.
notes,' 12:85-87 (Sept.), illus.

Glacial marks still being inscribed on Mount Rainier.

1935 Sky riding glaciers frock mass dividing Tahoma from South
Tahoma Glacier], Mount Rainier nat. notes, 13 :52-54( Dec. ) ,il.

1936 Glacial lakes. Mount Rainier nat. notes, 14: 102-03 (Sept.),
illus.

Iddings, Joseph P. See: Hague, Arnold. 1883.

Kimball, James P.

1897 Physiographic geology of the Puget Sound Basin. Am. geol.,
19:225-37 (Ap.)» 304-22 (May), illus,, map.

King, Clarence.

1871 Active glaciers within the United States. Atlantic mo.,
29:371-77 (Mar.).

1871a On the discovery of actual glaciers on the mountains of the
Pacific Slope. Am. jour. sci. and arts, 101:157-67 (Mar.).

Landes, Charles.

1925 The color of glacial streams. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
3:3 (Aug. 23).

37

THE PACIFIC STATES

Landes, Henry.

1905 Field notes on Mount Rainier. Mazama, 2 : 220-23 ( Dec. ), illus.

Le Conte, Joseph N.

1907 The motion of the Nisqually glacier, Mount Rainier. Sierra

Club bul«, 6:108-114 (Jan.), illus.

A scientific commentary.

Lyman, W. D.

1907 The mountains of Washington. Mountaineer, 1:5-11 (Mar.),
illus.

McK'ee, R. H.

1915 The glaciers of Mount Rainier [compared with others].
Mountaineer, 8:73-74 (Dec.), illus.

Matthes , Francois E.

1913 The glaciers of Mount Rainier. Appalachia, 12 : 24-37 (May) .

1914 The glaciers of Mount Rainier. Am. forestry ,20: 646-67
(Sept.), illus.

1922 Mount Rainier and its glaciers. Natl. Park Serv. , 48 pp.,
illus., map. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Newberry, J. S.

1885 Notes on the geology and botany of the country bordering on

Northern Pacific Railroad. New York Acad. Sci. annals, 3:

242-70 (Feb. 4).

Includes forests, glaciers, and geology in and near Rainier.

Roberts, Milnor.

1918 Mines and minerals of Washington. Mo\jnt aineer, 11: 33-39 ( Dec. ).

Russell, Israel C.

1885 [Glaciers of Mount Rainier]. U.S. geol. surv., 5th ann.

rept. ,1883-84, pp. S34-39, illus. Washington, Govt. print. off.

1897 Glaciers of Mount Rainier. U.S. geol. surv. ,18th ann. rept.,
pp. 349-415, illus., map.

1897a [Glaciers on Mount Rainier]. In his: Glimpses of North
America, pp. 62-67. Boston, Ginn.

1909 The glaciers of Mount Rainier . Mountaineer, 2:16-25(Nov. ), illus.

1910 Volcanoes of North America. 346 pp., illus., map. New York,
Macmillan.
Includes a discussion of Mount Rainier.

38

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Saunders, Edwin J.

1915 The geological story of Mount Rainier. Mountaineer, 8: 67 -7 2
(Dec. ) , illus.

Schmoe , F. W.

1924 Steps in the building of the mountain. Mount Rainier nat.
notes, 2:2-3 (Aug. 20), illus.

Smith, George Otis.

1897 The rocks of Mount Rainier. U.S. geol. surv. , 18th ann.

rept., pp. 416-23.

Petrographic study of material from the mountain.

1900 The geology of Mount Rainier. Mazaraa, 2:18-24 (Oct.)*
Geologic origin and development.

Tr olson, Roy F.

1926 Recession of Emaons glacier. Mount Rainier nat. notes,
4:3 (July 28).

Warren, Herbert 0.

1928 Up snow-clad peaks. Sci. Am., 139:342-43 (Oct.), illus.
Brief geological description of Mount Rainier.

Wentworth, Chester K. , and Delo, David M.

1931 Dinwoody glaciers, T/ind River Mountains, Wyoming; with a

brief survey of existing glaciers in the United States.

Geol. Soc. Am. bul., 42:605-20 (Sept. 30), illus., map.

Includes a description of glaciers on Mount Rainier.

Willis, Bailey.

1884 Mount Tacoma in Washington Territory. Newport Nat. Hist.

Soc. proc. doc. 2, pp. 13-21.

A geological description of Rainier.

1916 Explorations on the northern slopes, 1881-83. In: Mount
Rainier, a record of explorations; pp. 142-49, port. New
York, Maciaillan. (Edited by Edmond S. Meany) .

The original title of this reprinted article was "Canyons
and glaciers. A journey to the ice fields of Mount Rainier."
It appears in the Northwest, vol. 1, April 1883.

Winser, Henry J.

1883 The glaciers of Mount Tacoma. In his: The great North
west, pp. 267-71, illus. New York, Putnam.

Yard, Robert S.

1934 Mount Rainier National Park. In: Picturesque America,
pp. 11-25, illus., maps. New York, Union Lib. Assn.

39

MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK

INDIANS

Anonymous

1915 Correspondence relative to the Indian names of the great
mountain conducted by Mr. Benjaioin L. Harvey of Tacoma, in
1908. Wash, state hist. soc. Pub., 2:440-64.

1926 Indians never lived permanently in park. Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 3:2 (Feb. l) .

1929 "Squilchow and Enumclaw." Mount Rainier nat. notes, 7:3,
illus.

Indian legend of the origin of thunder and lightning.

1931 An Indian legend concerning "the mountain." Mount Rainier
nat. notes, 9:2 (Mar.).
Why there are no snakes on Mount Rainier.

Buchanan, Charles M.

1916 The origin of mounts Baker and Rainier. The Indian legend.
Mountaineer , 9 : 32-38 ( Dec . ) .

Butterworth, Hezekiah.

1890 [Legends of Mount Rainier], In his: Zigzag journeys in

the great Northwest, pp. 42-50, illus.

Five legends of Mount Rainier.

Hylebos, P. F.

1915 Indian superstitions. Wash, state hist, soc. Pub., 2:434-

439.

Myths regarding origin of Mount Rainier.

Judson, Katherine B.

1910 [Legends of Mount Rainier]. In her: Myths and legends of

the Pacific Northwest, pp. 74-78, 79-80, illus. Chicago,

McClurg.

Two legends of the Cowlitz Indians: On the miser of Ta
coma; why there are no snakes.

Lyman, W. D.

1905 Rainier Indian legends. Mazama, 2:203-07 (Dec.).

1909 Indian legends of Mount Rainier. Mountaineer, 2:51-55
(Nov. ) , illus.

Meany, Edmond S.

1930 Mount Rainier in Indian legends. Mountaineer ,23: 22-25( Dec.) .

41

THE PACIFIC STATES

Si cade, Henry.

19}B Aboriginal nomenclature. Mazama, 5:251-54 (Dec.)*
Indian legend about the naming of Mount Rainier.

Skinner, Charles M.

1896 Tamanous of Tacoma. In his: Myths and legends of our
land, 2:242-45. Philadelphia, Lippincott.

Smith, Wallace.

1925 Saga of the original elk and some talk of the Mount Rain-

ier-Tacoma feud. In his: Oregon sketches, pp. 168-82,

illus. New York, Putnam.

Streetor, Gertrude Inez,

1924 Neighbors in the Ararat floral colony. Mountaineer, 17:

31-34 (Dec.), illus.

Indian legends about flowers on Mount Rainier.

Williams, John H.

1910 The mountain that was wGod.M 111 pp., illus., map.

Tacoma. John H. Williams.

Contains several Indian legends regarding Mount Rainier.

Winthrop, Theodore.

1916 Tacoma and the Indian legend Hamitchou. In: Mount Rain
ier, a record of explorations, pp. 34-72, illus. (Edited
by Edmond S. Meany) . New York, Macmillan.

42

MULi WOO

Anonymous

1908 Redwood Canyon deeded to U. S. Forestry a .d Irrigation, 14:

97-8.

This canyon, now named John Muir National Monument, was
deeded to the United States by William Kent.

1910 John Muir National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preserv.
Soc., 15th ann. rept., pp. 127-8.

An account of the establishment, acreage, and locality of
John Muir National Monument, now named Muir Woods National Monument.

1911 Mt. Tamalpais and Muir Woods. In: Central California,
pleasure land of the tourist. San Jose, Melvin, pp. 17-18,
illus .

1913 Muir Woods on Mt. Tamalpais, Mar in County, California. Pio
neer western lumberman, 60:19 (Oct. 15), illus.
Describes Muir Woods and its extensive growth of redwoods,

and tells of its presentation to the U. S. Government Jan. 9, 1908

by' proclamation of President Theodore Roosevelt.

1917 Muir Woods National Monument. In: General information

regarding the national monuments set aside under the Act of
Congress approved June 8, 1908, pp. 27-28, map. U. S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1919 The California redwood park. Motor land, 5:58 (Sept.).
General information about Muir Woods.

1925 Muir Woods National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist. Pre
serv. Soc. , 30th ann. rept., pp. 140-1.

1928 Honorable William Kent died at Kent field, Mar in County,
March 13, 1928. Sierra Club bul., 13:107-8 (Apr.).
His services in the interest of the national parks and his

donation of Muir Woods are noted.

1930 Muir Woods National Monument. In: Glimpses of our national
monuments, pp. 37-41. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.
Washington, Govt. print, off.
Facts and descriptive notes on Muir Woods National Monument.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 Muir Woods. In their: Oh, ranger'., pp. 155-7. Palo Alto,
Calif., Stanford Univ. press.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Barrus , Clara

1910 With John o1 Birds and John of Mountains in the Southwest.

Century Eiag. , 80:521-8 (Aug.), ill us.

Contains notes on trips in Yoseraite and Muir Woods with John
Burroughs and John Muir.

Bryant , Harold C .

1928 Parks of the Golden State, California's contribution to the

national playgrounds. Nature mag., 12:236-9, 273-4 (Oct.),

illus.

Contains a brief description of Muir Woods.

Cook, 0. F., and Looinis, H. F.

1928 Millipeds of the order colobognatha, with descriptions of

six new genera and type species, from Arizona and California.
U. S. Nat. Mus., proc. , v. 72, art. 18, 26 pp., illus. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.
Some of the millipeds described were found in Muir Woods.

Far is , John T.

1920 [Muir Woods National Monument.] In his: Seeing the Far West,

pp. 233-4. Philadelphia, Lippincott .

Extract from Congressman Kent's letter to President Theodore
Roosevelt answering the question why the place should be called Muir
Woods rather than bear tlie name of the donor, William Kent.

Grant , Madison

1919 Redwoods of the Coast. Zoological Soc., bul., 22:94-7,

illus .

Contains reference to the redwoods of Muir Woods.

Graves, Henry S.

1926 Our most urgent public park. Am. forests and forest life,

vol. 32, no. 386, 32:75-8, 106 (Feb.), illus., map.

Recommends the acquisition of the redwood f orest north of
Muir Woods National Monument as a national park, and gives a descrip
tion of the region.

Hastings, Cristel

1926 Trail ends. Overland mo., 84:69-70, 89-93 (Mar.), illus.
Contains information aboivb Muir Woods.

James , George W.

1915 [Muir Woods.] In his: Our American wonderlands, pp. 245-6.
Chicago, McClurg.

Jennings, 0. E.

1916 Coloring in redwood cones. Am. forestry, 22:37 (Jan.).

MUIR WOODS NATIONAL MONUMENT

Description of the Carnegie Museum1 s chemical test of the
coloring matter found in the cones in Muir Woods.

Loomis , H. F. See: Cook, 0. F., 1928.

Olms tod, Frederick E.

1914 Fire prevention on Tamalpais. Sierra Club bul., 9:185-8

(Jan. ) , illus.

Description of a fire on Mt. Tamalpais, and plans for con
trolling or preventing future ones.

1916 Preventing fires on Tamalpais. Sierra Club bul., 10:115-

17 (Jan.).

A brief account of what has been done since 1913 and what
is planned for the future in the way of fire prevention on Tamalpais

Parsons, F. T.

1908 William Kent »s gift. Sierra Club bul. , 6:285 (June),

illus .

A brief description of Muir Woods.

Peixotto, Ernest C.

1910 jtoiir Woods and Mt. Tamalpais.] In his: Romantic Califor
nia, pp. 144-9, illus. New York, Scribner's.

Quinn, Vernon

1923 [Muir Woods.] In his: Beautiful America, p. 285. New
York, Stokes.

Rhodes, George H.

1923 Perpetuating the redwoods. Am. forestry, 29:147-52 (Mar.),

illus.

Muir Woods is referred to.

Robbins, F. S.

c!915 Facts and fancies of the tour to Mount Tamalpais and Muir

Woods, Marin County, California.

Description of Muir Woods and environs.

Robinson, Charles M.

1908 Muir Woods - a national park. Charities, 29:181-3 (May 2).

A short description of how the United States acquired Muir
Woods, and an exchange of letters between President Theodore Roose
velt and William Kent .

Saunders, Charles F.

1937 [Muir Woods National Monument.] In his: Finding the worth
while in California, pp. 145-6. New York, McBride.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Shinn, Charles H.

1890 Famous trees and forests of California. Vick's mo. mag.,

13:171-7 (June), illus.

Includes a description of Muir Woods.

1924 The giver of Muir Woods. Am. forests, 30:147-8 (Jan.),

illus .

An account of William Kent's refusing to sell his land to a
water company and deeding it to the U. S. Government, which in 1907
proclaimed it Muir Woods National Monument.

1924 The giant of Muir Woods. Am. forests and forest life, 30:
147-8 (Mar.), illus.

Shirley, James

1936 [Muir Woods.] In: The redwoods of Coast and Sierra, pp.
23-4. Berkeley, Univ. of Calif.

Shoup, Paul

1899 The sequoias of California forest. Sunset, 3:}82-8 (Oct.),

illus .

This general discussion of the California sequoias includes
information on the Sequoia senpervirens of Muir Woods.

Stillman, J.D.B.

1868 Meteorology from Tamalpais. Overland mo., 1:165-9 (Aug.).

Observations were conducted on Mt. Tamalpais to determine
the effect of the Coast Range on the force and direction of fog-
laden winds in the San Francisco area.

Taylor, Frank J. See: Albright, Horace M. , 1928.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others

1938 [Muir Woods National Monument.] In Guide to national

parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 33.

U. S. Dept. Int., Katl. Park Serv. Berkeley, Calif.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists
and describes briefly tLa principal features; gives historical data.

Whitney, J. D.

1865 [Mount Tamalpais.] Geol. Surv. Calif., 1:81-2. Philadel
phia, Sherman .

Published by authority of the legislature of California.
A geological discussion of Mt. Tamalpais and its vicinity.

Yard, Robert S.

1919 [Muir Woods National Monument.] In his: The book of nation
al parks, pp. 405-8, illus., map.

MUER WOODS NATIONAL MONUMENT

1920

1928

1931

Natural and historic national monuments.
10:55-63 ( July-Aug . ) , illus.
Contains a description of Muir Woods.

Arts and archeol.,

Muir Woods. In: The national parks portfolio, pp. 250rl,
illus . Washingt on , G-ovt . pr int . off .

The national monuments in the forest primeval. In: The na
tional parks portfolio, pp. 251-2, illus. Sixth ed. Wash
ingt on , Govt . pr int . o ff .

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
OLYMPIC NATIONAL PARK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,

Description, Flora and Fauna)

OLYMPIC NATIONAL PARK

Anonymous

1907 The ascent of Mt. Olympus. Mountaineer, 1:20-24 (Mar. ) »

illus.

Announcement of an outing which will include the ascent' of
Mt . Olympus .

1909 New Olympic National Park. Colliers, 43:12 (Ap.10), illus.
A brief description of the Mt. Olympus area.

1910 Mount Olympus National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist. Pre-
servn. Soc. 15th aim. rept. , p. 129.

1915 Mount Olympus National Monument, Wash. U.S. Dept. Int.,
Rept. 1915, 1:925-927, map.

Report gives date of creation, size in 1909 when created,
and items of scientific interest occurring within its borders.

1916 Mount Olympus National Monument. U.S. Dept. Int., Rept.
1915, 1:1103-1105, map.

This monument was created for the purpose of preserving gla
ciers and other objects of scientific interest, and as a range for
the rapidly decreasing Olympic elk.

1917 Mt. Olympus National Monument. In: General information
regarding the national monuments set aside under the Act of
Congress approved June 8, 1900, pp. 58-61, map. U.S. Dept.
Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1921 Climbing above the clouds. Country life, 39:52-56 (Jan.),
illus.
A description of an ascent of Mt. Olympus, Mt. Rainier, etc.

1925 Mount Olympus National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist. Pre-
servn. Soc. Ann. rept., p. 171.

1926 The Olympic outing. Mountaineer, 18;3-13 (Ap. ), illus.
The article includes a reading list of books, pamphlets,

and magazine articles on the Olympic region.

1934 The proposed Olympic National Park. New York, [Emergency
Conservation Committee, 16 pp., illus., map.
This pamphlet advocates increasing the Olympic National Monu
ment to its original size and making it a national park.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Anonymous

1938 Mount Olympus Park. Time, 32:11-12 (July 11).

In 1909 Theodore Roosevelt had Mt. Olympus (8,150 ft.) and
some 800, 000 acres around it set aside as a national monument. In
July, 1933, President Roosevelt signed the bill that brought the new
national park ( 898 s 292 acres) into being.

1939 Conservation of scenic areas in national parks and forests.
Planning and civic comment, 5: 5-6 (Jan. -Mar. ).

A plea that since the Olympic i-iatiou^l Park is established,
the projected highway across the Quinau.lt sn*.!.ll not be built.

Bailey, Winona

1913 A few flowers of the higher Olympics. Mountaineer, 6:59-64,

illus.

Flett's violet, senecio, Piper's harebell, white aster, and
many other flowers described.

1920 Third Olympic outing. Mountaineer, 13:9-25 (Nov.), illus.
The ascent of Mt. Anderson in Mt. Olympus National Monument.

Banks, Mary

1907 Mountaineers in the Olympics. Mountaineer, 1:75-79 (Sept.).

Browne , Belmore

1910 The first ascent of Mt. Olympus. Am. Geog. Soc. bul. , 42:
881:87 (Dec.) , illus.

Curtis, Asahel

1907 Storm bound on Mount Olympus. Mountaineer, 1:69-72 (Sept.),
illus.

An account of an attempted ascent of Mt. Olympus.

1908 The first ascent of Mount Olympus. Wc.rld's work, 16:10261-
10262 (May).

Christie, J. H.

1926 From the leader of the press expedition. Mountaineer, 19:

37-39 (Dec.).

An exploration into the Olympic Mountains, undertaken to
set at rest the published rumor of a tribe of cannibals supposedly
living there.

Daiber, George C.

1933 Skiing in the Olympics. Mountaineer, 26:15 (Dec.).

A preliminary survey was made to determine skiing possibil
ities in Mt. Olympus National Monument.

4

OLYMPIC NATIONAL PARK

Durabell, K. E. M.

1920 fMount Olympus.] In her: Seeing the West, p. 60. Garden
City, N. Y. , Doubleday, Page.

Elliot, Daniel Giraud

1899 Catalogue of mammals from the Olympic Mountains. Field

Columbia mus . , pub. 32, Zoological ser. , 1:241-276, illus.

Chicago, Field Museum.

Flett, J. B.

1907 Observations on the Olympics. Mountaineer, 1:43-44 (June).
Discusses the geology, flora, and fauna of the region.

Fountain, Paul

1906 [M°uirt Olympus.] In his: Eleven eaglets of the West, pp.
113-114. New York, Dutton.

Description, with notes on the flora and fauna.

Frye, T. C.

1908 Thallophytes and bryophytes from the Olympic Mountains.
Mountaineer, 1;117-138 (Nov.), illus.

A list of algae, fungi, lichens, liverworts, and mosses col
lected during a 16-day trip. Of the 173 species listed, 114 had
never before been reported from the mountains.

Geithman, Harriett and Pollock, David

1930 Patrolling national forests by plane. Mountaineer, 23:31-
32 (Dec.) , illus.

An account of building an airport and runway at Low Divide
in the heart of the Olympic Mountains for the use of the aerial
fire patrol of the Forestry Service.

Hanna, Ina M.

1907 Expeditions into the Olympic Mountains. Mountaineer, 1:29-
34 (June) , illus.

Hazard, Joseph T.

1931 How to climb the six major peaks of Washington. Mountain
eer, 24:45-50 (Dec.).

Mount Olympus is in the group.

1932 Mount Olympus. In his: Snow sentinels of the Pacific North
west, pp. 35-63, illus. Seattle, Lowman, Hanford.

History of discovery and early exploration.

Huelsdonk, Doris

1926 Kidnaping in the Olympic wilds. Mountaineer, 19:34-37 (Dec.),
illus .

THE PACIFIC STAKES

The Roosevelt elk are so numerous in the Olympic region that
the younger elk must be "kidnaped" and transported elsewhere to save
them from starvation in winter.

Humes, G. W.

1907 Journey to Mount Olympus. Mountaineer, 1:41-42 (June).

A preliminary survey of the upper Elwha Basin and Elwha Gla
cier to determine the best approach for an ascent of the peak.

Humphrey, W. E.

1909 Olympic National Monument. Mountaineer, 2:41-42 (Nov.),

illus.

The writer tells of his efforts as a congressman to have the
Olympic Mountains set aside as a national monument.

James, Harlean

1939 Olympic National Park. In: Romance of the national parks,

pp. 112-122, illus.

History, description, general information.

Kneen, Beryl D. , and Kneen, 0. H.

1926 Motoring through the land of glaciers. Sunset, 56:14-15,

58-60 (Mar.), illus.

The, scenic charms and attractions of the Olympic Peninsula.

Lamb, Frank H.

1926 Making the Olympics accessible. Mountaineer, 19:27-29 (Dec.

illus.

Advocates trails, chalets, and scheduled pack trips in the
remote area.

Lee, John A.

1913 The mountaineer's outing in the Olympics. Mazaaia, 4:70-75
(Dec.), illus.

Lewis, T. C.

1926 Some unexplored sections of the Olympics. Mountaineer, 19:

25-26 (Dec. ).

The Mt. Olympus National Monument areas drained by Cat and
Long creeks, and the Duckabush valley are described.

McKee, Redick H.

1922 Climbing the new Olympus. Outing, 79:195-99 (Feb.), illus.

Meany, Edmond S.

1911 The Olympic National Monument. Mountaineer, 4:54-59, illus.
Provisions of an act passed by the Fifty-ninth Congress (1905-
1907), establishing this monument.

Meany, Edmond S. (continued)

1913 The Olympics in history and legend. Mountaineer, 6:51-55
(Nov.), illus.

1926 1926 summer outing in the Olympics. Mountaineer, 19:7-17

(Dec.), illus.

Includes the successful scaling of the middle peak of Mt-.
Olympus .

Merriain, C. Hart

1899 Descriptions of three new rodents from the Olympic Mountains,

Washington. Acad. Nat. Sci. , proc, 1898, pt. 1, pp. 552-53

(Jan. -Mar. ).

Mills, Enos A.

1917 The Olympic National Monument. In his: Your national parks,
pp. 230-36, illus. New York, Houghton Mifflin.

Nelson, L. A.

1907 The ascent of Mount Olympus. Mountaineer, 1:65-68 (Sept.),

illus.

Account of the conquest of West and Middle peaks.

1920 Mount Meany. Mountaineer, 13:31-34 (Nov.), illus.

Notes on the six ascents of Mount Meany, the first of which
las made by the author and two companions on August 8, 1907.

O'Neill, J. P.

1895 Exploration of the Olympic mountains, Washington from June

to October, 1890. U. S. Senate doc. no. 59, 54th Congress,

1st sess., ser. 3349, vol. 3, 20 pp.

Palmer, Theodore S.

1934 Mount Olympus National Monument. Am. civic assn. (Civic
comment), 47:9-11 (May-July).

1936 History of Mount Olympus. Am. planning and civic ann. , pp.

87-93.

A sketch of the many legislative endeavors relative to the
attempted and final creation of the Mt. Olympus area as a national
monument .

Parsons, Marion R.

1913 The ascent of Mount Olympus. Mountaineer, 6:33-41 (Nov.),
illus.

1914 Through the. Olympics with the mountaineers. Sierra Club
bul. , 9:148-58, illus., map.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Pollock, David. See: Geithman, Harriett. 1930.

Putnam, George P.

1915 [Olympic National Park.] In his: In the Oregon country, pp.
116-129, illus. New York, Putnam.

Quinn, Vernon

1923 (Olympic National Park.] In his: Beautiful America, pp. 40,
286, illus., map, index. New York, Stokes.

Remey, M. P.

1925 Ridge-running north of Mount Olympus. Mountaineer, 18:53-
55 (Dec.) , illus.

A 10-day holiday in the high mountain ridges north of Mt.
Olympus .

Rixon, Theodore F. See: Dodwell, Arthur. 1900.

Roloff , Clifford E.

1934 The Mount Olympus National Monument. Wash. hist, quart., 25:

214-28 (July).

A geological and botanical description.

Ruddiman, Ronald R.

1926 Short hikes in the Olympics. 'Mountaineer, 19:21-24 (Dec.),
illus.

Specific directions for reaching principal points of interest
in the Olympic area.

Schulz, William G.

1937 Olympic wonderland. Christian Science monitor, Dec. 22, pp.
8-9, illus.

Historical remarks concerning the creation of the national
park and many interesting observations about the Olympic Peninsula.

Streator, Gertrude L.

1920 Triple-peaked Olympus has three records. Mountaineer, 13:

29-30 (Nov.).

Lists the various ascents of the three peaks of Mt. Olympus.

Thompson, Ben H.

1938 Why the Olympic National Park? Planning and civic comment ,
4:3-6 (July-Sept.).

Arguments in favor of creating the Olympic National Park.

Trager , Martelle W.

1939 Olympic National Park. In: National parks of the Northwest,
pp. 112-139, illus. New York, Dodd, Mead.

OLYMPIC NATIONAL PARK

Upham, Warren

1904 Glacial and modified drift in and near Seattle, Tacoma, and

Olyiapia. Am. geol., 34:303-214 (Oct.).

Mt. Olympus is in the region described.

Voth, Hazel E. , and others

1938 Mount Olympus National Monument. In: Guide to national'

parks and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 91.

U. S. Dept., Int., Natl.. Park Serv. (Berkeley, Calif.).

Specific location, area, and date of establishioent . Lists
and describes briefly the principal features. Gives historical data.

Wagner, Fred, and Morris , Moe.

1911 Protecting protected elk. Four-footed hunters that are deci
mating the elk and deer herds of the, Olympic Mountains. The
Outing mag. , 59:65-72 (Oct.), illus.

Walkinshaw, R. H.

1922 Climbing the new Olympus . Outing, 79:194-95 (Feb.).
Description of an ascent of Mt. Olympus.

Weaver, Charles E.

1907 Notes on the bed rock geology of the Olympic Peninsula.

Mountaineer, l:5Q-64 (Sept.), illus.

A petrologic and stratigraphic study, and an analysis of the
marine fossils found in the sedimentary beds.

Webster, Edward B.

1920 The king of the Olympics, the Roosevelt elk, and other mam
mals of the Olympic Mountains, 227 pp., illus. Port Ange
les, Washington.

A description of the elk and other mammals found on and near
Mt . Olympus .

Yard, Robert S.

1919 [Mount Olyrapus National Monument.] In his: The book of
national parks. New York, Scribner's, pp. 416-17, illus.,

maps.

1920 Natural and historic national monuments. Art and archeol. ,
10:55-63 (July-Aug.), illus.

Includes a description of the Mt. Olympus National Monument.

OREGON CAVES NATIONAL MDNUMENT

Anonymous

1909 Proclamation establishing the Oregon Caves National Monument.

U. S. stat. at Ig. , vol. 36, pt. 2, p. 2497, map.

Declaring that "certain caves , known as Oregon Caves , which
are situated upon unsurveyed land within the Siskiyou National Forest
in the State of Oregon, are of unusual scientific interest and impor
tance, and it appears that the public interests will be promoted by
reserving these caves ... as a national monument," President Taft on
July 12, 1909, set aside for that purpose and subject to prior claim,
the area shown on a diagram forming a part of his proclamation.

1912 Oregon Caves National Monument, Oregon. In: U. S. Dept.

Int., rept. (1911), 1:725-8, map. Washington, Govt. print.

off.

Oregon Caves are located in the Siskiyou National Forest
about 30 miles south of Grant's Pass, in the Grayback Range. Cave
Mountain, the peak which contains these caves, has an elevation of
6000 feet and is of limestone formation. The main openings around
which the national monument has been created lie at 4000 feet, but
the entire mountainside shows caverns of various sizes. These
caves are more like a series of galleries than of roomy caverns,
though many fine chambers have been discovered. The lime deposits
take many beautiful forms — massive pillars, delicate stalactites,
and broad sheets resembling drapery. A map gives the exact loca
tion of the national monument and the .entrance to the caves.

This report, containing substantially the same information,
is published annually.

1917 Oregon Caves National Monument. In: General information

regarding the national monuments set aside under the Act of
Congress approved June 8, 1908, pp. 63-4, map. U. S. Dept.
Int., Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off,

1925 Oregon Caves National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist. Pre-
servn. Soc., ann. rept., p. 161.

1938 Oregon Caves National Monument. In: Crater Lake National
Park, pp. 29-30, illus. Dept. bul., Natl. Park Serv.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

Dumbell, K. E. M.

1920 Oregon Caves. In her: Seeing the West, p. 92. Garden
City, N. Y. , Doubleday.

He nt home , Mary

1913 The Oregon caves. Mazama, 4:57-60 (Dec.).

Popular description of the scenic features of these caves.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Hough , Emerson

1915 Made in America. Sat. eve. post., Nov. 6, pp. 19-20, 40-2,

illus .

Description of Oregon Caves.

Laing, Hamilton M.

1917 By motor and mule to the marble halls. Sunset, 39:74-80

(Nov.), illus.

Includes detailed description of the caves.

Lee, Willis T.

1926 Features of the ice cave. In his: Stories in stone, pp. 151-

62, illus. New York, Van No strand.

A technical description of Oregon Caves.

Quinn, Vernon

1923 [Oregon Caves.] In his: Beautiful America, p. 286. New
York, Stokes.

Miller, Joaquin

1909 Oregon's marble halls. Sunset, 23:227-35 (Sept.), illus.
A full and popular description of Oregon Caves.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others

1938 Oregon Caves National Monument. In: Guide to national parks

and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 74. U. S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, Calif.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists
and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical data.

Williams , Ira A.

1920 The Oregon Caves. Nat. hist., 20:397-405 (Sept .-Oct. }, illus.
Detailed description of all the features; good illustrations.

Wood, R. K.

1916 Oregon Caves. In his: Tourists' Northwest. New York, Dodd,

Mead.

A description of the limestone formations.

Wo on, Basil

1935 North to the Oregon Caves. In: San Francisco and the golden

empire, pp. 273-8. New York, Smith and Haas.

Includes description and information on the caves.

Yard, Robert Sterling

1919 Oregon Caves National Monunent . In: The book of the national
parks, pp. 415-6, New York, Scribner's.

PINNACLES NATIONAL MONUMENT

Anonymous

1908 Pinnacles made a national monument. Am. forestry, 14:69

(Feb.).

A brief report of the establishment of the monument and a
description of it.

1915 Pinnacles National Monument. U. S. Dept. Int., rept., 1914,
1:918-9, map. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Report giving location and description of the landmarks, and

a map giving its location according to township and section.

1917 Pinnacles National Monument. In: General information regard
ing the national monument set aside under the Act of Congress
approved June 8, 1908, pp. 42-3, map. U. S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1925 Pinnacles National Monument. Am. Scenic and Hist. Pre-

servn. Soc., arm. rept., p. 142.

The name Pinnacles is derived from the spire-like rocks ris
ing 600 to 1000 feet from the floors of several canyons situated on
the southwestern border of San Benito County, California. Aside
from its geological and scenic interest, this region is important as
one of the last breeding places of the California condor, the larg
est bird in the world.

1929 Pinnacles National Monument. In: Glimpses of our national
monuments. Pp. 50-4, illus . Washington, Govt. print, off.

1933 Pinnacles National Monument . Sci., n.s., 78:232 (Sept. 15).
This monument has been enlarged to more than twice its former
size by proclamation of President Roosevelt in 1933. It is in San
Benito and Monterey counties, and is distinguished for its spires,
domes, caves, and subterranean passages.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 Pinnacles. In their: Oh, ranger!, p. 157. Palo Alto, Calif.,

Stanford Univ. press.

A brief description of the monument.

Andrews, Philip

1936 Geology of the Pinnacles National Monument. Univ. Calif,
pubs., Dept. Geol. Sci., bul. 24:1-38, illus.

THE PACIFIC STATES

Becker, George F.

1889 G-eology of the quicksilver deposits of the Pacific Slope.

U. S, Geol. Surv. , 8th ami. rept. (1886-7), pt. 2, pp. 961-

85, maps.

Contains information on the New Idria deposits in the region
of Pinnacles National Monument.

Blackwelder, Eliot

1926 Natural areas, Y/est-central California. In: Naturalist's

guide to the Americas, pp. 198-9. Baltimore, Williams &

Wilkins .

A brief description of the Pinnacles.

Canfield, W. W.

1915 The Pinnacles and their wonders. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 65:
498-506 ( June ) , illus .

Carson, James

1905 The awe-inspiring Pinnacles . Overland mo., 45:389-92 (May).
An excerpt from Captain George Vancouver's diary, dated Nov
ember 16, 1794, giving an account of the discovery of the Pinnacles.

Paris, John T.

1920 [Pinnacles National Monument.] In his: Seeing the Far West,
pp. 230-1. Philadelphia, Lippincott.

Johnson, Clifton

1922 ("Pinnacles National Monument.] In his: What to see in America
p. 474. New York, Macmillan.

Linnger, Nanna C.

1920 The San Benito Pinnacles trails. Calif. Alpine Club., 1:56-
8, illus.

Quinn, Vernon

1923 [Pinnacles.] In his: Beautiful America, p. 284. New York,
Stokes.

Reid, John A.

1902 The igneous rocks near Pajaro. Univ. Calif, pubs., Dept.

Geol., bul. , 3:173-90.

These rocks are exposed at a point in the Coast Ranges of Call
fornia near the Pinnacles National Monument.

Rider, Fremont

1925 Pinnacles National Monument. In his: Rider's California, pp.
253-4. New York, Macmillan.

PINNACLES NATIONAL MONUMENT

Saunders , Charles F.

1937 [Pinnacles National Monument.] In his: Finding the worth
while in California, pp. 104-7. New York, McBride.

Scott, Carroll D.

1936 Who killed the condors? Nature mag., £8:368-70 (Dec.).,

illus.

A plea for the protection of the few remaining condors,
whose last stronghold is the Pinnacles National Monument.

Taylor, Frank J. See: Albright, Horace M. , 1928.

Yoth, Hazel H. , and others

1938 Pinnacles National Monument. In: Guide to national parks
and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 34. U. S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, Calif.
Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists

and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical facts

Willis , Robin

1925 Physiography of the California Coast Ranges. Geol. Soc.

Am., bul., 36:641-78 (Dec. 30), illus.

Includes the physiographic history of the Pinnacles.

Yard, Robert S.

1919 [Pinnacles National Monument.] In his: The book of national
parks, pp. 412-3, illus.

1920 Natural and historic national monuments. Art and archeol. ,
10:55-63 (July-Aug.), illus.

Includes mention of the Pinnacles.

1931 Pinnacles National Monument. In: The national parks port
folio, 6th ed. , p. 264, illus. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl.
Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,

Description, Administration, etc.------ 3

FAUNA 25

FLORA 29

GEOLOGY 35

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK

GENERAL

Travel, Description, Administration, Etc.

Anonymous

n.d. The Sequoia National Park. 21 pp., illus., map. New York,

Scribner Ts.

Photographic and descriptive survey of the Sequoia giganteas.

1890 The Sequoia forests of the Sierra Nevada. Garden and for
est , 3: 57072 (Nov. 26), illus. , map.

1892 California's famous big trees. Sci. Am., 66:103-04 (Feb. 13),
illus .
Deplores cutting the Fresno Flats' Sequoia gigantea.

1898 Testimony taken by the Select Committee of the United

States Senate... to investigate. ..reservation of lands in
California. U.S. Senate, doc. 48, 55th Cong., 2d sess.,
ser. 3592, 24 pp.
Settlers of Sequoia and Yosemite are heard in regard to

their rights.

1900 A short account of the Big trees of California. U.S. Dept.
Agri., (Div. of Forestry), bul. 28, 30 pp., illus., map.
Includes descriptions of the Big tree, groves of Sequoia Park.

1908 Sequoias and redwoods. Pacific rural press, 75: 108-09 ( Feb. ).

1916 The Sequoia National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn.
Soc., 21st arm. rept., pp. 693-96.

Discussion of the Big trees of Sequoia and Grant parks.

1916a Sierra crest and canyon. San Francisco, Southern Pacific

co. , 32 pp.

Includes description and photographs of Sequoia and Crater
Lake National Parks.

1917 Our Big trees saved. Natl. geog. mag., 31:1011( Jan. ) , illus.

,000, appropriated to save Big trees from lumbermen.

1919 General information regarding Sequoia and General Grant
National Parks. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 40 pp.,
illus . , maps.

1920 Greater Sequoia National Park proposed. Am. Scenic and Hist.

TEE PACIFIC STATES

Anonymous , cont i nued .

Preservn. Soc., 85th ann. rept., pp. 342-43.
Discusses proposal to enlarge and rename Sequoia Park.

1920a Important work accomplished. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park
Serv., rept., 1:90-92.
Includes report on construction of Marble Fork Bridge.

1920b Sequoia National Park. General Grant National Park. U.S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv., rept. 1:113-17, maps.

The Roosevelt Park bill; boundary revision; conservation
of big trees; status of General Grant Park.

1921 The National Geographic Society completes its gifts of big
trees. Natl. geog. mag., 40:85-86 (July).

Privately owned Big trees bought for $70., 000, given to park.

1921a The National Geographic Society's gifts of big trees. Sci.
mo., 13:285-86 (Sept.).

1921b Rules and regulations, Sequoia and General Grant National
Parks. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv., 46 pp., illus.,
maps.

1922 A new national park. The 1922 Roosevelt memorial possible
in the proposed Roosevelt National Park. Am. Civic Assn.
(Civic Comment), pp. 6-7 (Jan. 14).

Outstanding features of the bill calling for an extension
of the Sequoia National Park are explained.

1925 Sequoia National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn. Soc.,
20th ann. rept. , pp. 142-43.
Information on the Big trees of the park.

1934 Sequoia National Park, California. In: General information
on the national parks, 42 pp., illus., map. U.S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1938 Sequoia National Park, California. 27 pp., illus., map,
bibliog. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.

1938a We have four national parks; do we need a fifth? Calif
ornia, 28:7-9; 24-26, illus.
Contains description of Sequoia National Park.

Abbott, C. G.

1910 A shelter for observers on Mount Tfaitney. Smithsn. misc.
colls,, 52:499-506, illus.

4

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
General

Installation and uses of astronomical instruments on
Mount Whitney.

1922 Studying the sun's heat on mountain peaks in desert lands.
Smithsn. Instn. aim. rept. , 1920, pp. 145-63, illus. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.
Includes references to observations made on Mt. Whitney.

Agnew, J. B.

1922 Through Roaring River gorge. Sierra Club bul., 11:314-15,

illus.

Trail survey from Giant Forest to Kings River Canyon.

Albright, H. M.

1918 A great animal sanctuary. U.S. Dept . Int., ami. rept.,

1917, 1:854.

Suggests Congress authorize the use of Sequoia Park as a
wildlife sanctuary.

1921 Sequoia National Park. In his: Oh, Ranger!, pp. 149-50.
Stanford Univ. (Calif.) press.

Allen, Edward F., comp. and ed.

1915 Sequoia and General Grant national parks. In his: A guide
to the national parks of America, pp. 175-84. New York,

McBride, Nast.

Baker, Martha Louise.

1927 The Greater Sequoia Park. Overland no., 2d ser. , 85:15-

16 (Jan.) , illus.

Passage by Congress (July, 1926) of the Greater Sequoia
Park bill.

Benedict , M. A.

1918 Report of work done in Muir Trail, 1917. Sierra Club bul.,
10 : 343-45 ( Jan. ) , illus .

Bradley, Cornelius Beach.

1899 Exploration of the East Creek amphitheater [in Sequoia].
Sierra Club, bul,, 2:270-77 (Jan.), illus., maps..

Brewer, William H.

1930 [The country around Sequoia Park and the giant sequoias].
In: Up and down California in 1860-64, (Francis P. Far-
quhar, ed.), pp. 505-50, illus. New Haven, Yale Univ. press.

Brewster, Edwin T.

1909 [First ascent of Mount Tyndall]. In his: Life and letters

THE PACIFIC STATES

Brewster, Edwin T., continued.

of Josiah Dwight Whitney, pp. 237-38. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin.

Brown, Bolt on Coit.

1897 Wanderings in the high Sierra between Mt. King and Mt. Will
iamson. Sierra Club bul., E:90-98, illus., map.

Bryant , Harold C .

1928 Parks of the golden state, California's contributions to
the national playgrounds. Nature mag., 12:236-39, 273-
74 (Oct.) , illus.

1929 Sequoia National Park. In his: Outdoor heritage, pp.
327-31, .'llus. San Francisco, Powell pub. co.

Bryce , Jame s ( Vis c ount ) .

1923 Survey of North America. In his: Memories of North Am
erica, pp, 226-53. New York, Macmillan.
Brief description of Sequoia National Park.

Carolan, Herbert.

1936 Sequoia National Park. In his: Motor tales and trav
els in and out of California, pp. 231-35. New York , Put nomfs.

Carroll, A. W. de la Cour.

1896 The ascent of Mt. Le Conte. Sierra Club bul. 1:325-26
(May), illus.

Church, J. E.

1909 Up from "the land of little rain" to the land of snows.

Sierra Club bul., 7:105-18 (June), illus.

Experiences on a sledging trip up Mount Vlhitney.

Clayton, J. E.

1873 Earthquakes on Kern River in the central portion of the
Sierra Nevada. Calif. Acad. of Sci., proc., 4:38-40.

Clyde, Norman.

1928 Climbing the Sierra Nevada from Owens Valley. Sierra
Club bul., 13:31-35 (Feb.), illus.

1930 High-low. Touring topics, 22:30-31 (Nov.).

A 7-hour hike from Whitney's top to Death Valley.

Colby, Josephine.

1904 Kern River Canyon. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 43:14-19 (Jan.).

illus.

Sierra Club's expedition into the Canyon, July, 1903.

PARK
General

Colby, William. E.

1912 Knapsacking across the Kings-Kern divide. Sierra Club bul.,
8: 163-69 (Jan.) , illus.

1913 Milestone mountain and a new Kings-Kern Pass. Sierra
Club bul., 9:1-6 (Jan.), illus.

1917 The John Muir Trail [work report.]. Sierra Club bul., 10:
o: ... 313-14, 221-25 (Jan.) , illus.

Work done; $30,000 recommended for completion.

1918 Notes and correspondence. Sierra Club bul., 10:332-61
(Jan. ) , illus.

Contains references to Sequoia region.

1924 The proposed enlargement of Sequoia National Park. Sierra
Club bul., 12:76-77.
Plea for adding six Yosemite-like valleys to park.

Condon, Maurice L.

1931 Trees in court, evaluating forest beauties at the bar of

justice. Hature mag., 18:301-05 (Nov.), illus.
• - Discusses the General Sherman tree in the park.

-,•;'•• ' ' • . ;-:.! 5 • • "- •
Daniels, Mark.' "ii'S/."'
1915 The national parks of California. California's mag., 1:

97-106 (July), illus.

Landscape engineer comments on scenic value of Sequoia,
General Grant , and Yosemite national parks.

1916 The Sequoia National Park. Am. forestry, 22:12-21 (Jan.),

illus.

Notes superior scenic grandeur of the park.

Demaray, A. E.

1923 Nature guiding in our national parks. Natl. Municipal rev.,

12:56-58 (Feb.).

Refers to nature guiding in Sequoia.

Douglass, A. E.

1922. Some topographical and climatic characters in the annular

rings of the yellow pines and sequoias of the Southwest.
. Am. Phil. Soc. , proc., 61:117-22.

Trees studied in the General Grant National Park region.

Drury, Aubrey.

1935 California: An intimate guide'. 289- pp., illus., maps, in-

THE PACIFIC STATES

Drury, Aubrey, continued.

de:v. New York, Harper.

Contains reference to Sequoia region.

Drury, Wells, and Aubrey.

1913 Kings and ICern river canyons. In their: California tour
ist guide and handbook, pp. 32-36, map. Berkeley, Western
Guidebook,

Dudley, William R.

1904 Data regarding the Sequoia gigantea. U.S. Sen. doc. 156,

58th Cong., 2d sess., ser. 4590, 3 pp.

Determination of age by study of annular rings.

Dumbell, K. E. M.

1920 Seeing the West. Garden City, N.Y. , Doubleday, Page.

Sequoia National Park, pp. 113-14; Kings River Canyon,

116-23.

Dyer, Robert.

1893 The Mt. I'i/hitney trail. Sierra Club bul., 1:1-8 (Jan.),
illus. , map.

Elliott, Simon B.

1912 The sequoias. In his: The important timber trees of the

United States, pp. 226-30, illus. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
Description of the Sequoia Washingtoniana, Sequoia seiaper-

virens , and Sequoia gigantea.

Elliott, W. W. and co.

1883 A guide to the grand and sublime scenery of the Sierra

Nevada in the region about Mount T'/hitney. San Francisco,
W. 17. Elliott co., lithographers and engravers, 421 Mont
gomery St . , 60 pp . , illus . , map .
Illustrated from sketches by Wales and Eisen, and from

photographs by Dusy.

Ellis, Don Carlos.

1917 A tenderfoot in the Sierras. Outing, 69:582-88 (Feb.),
Training a forest ranger in and near Sequoia Park.

Ellsworth, Rodney S.

1924 The giant sequoias. 167 pp., illus., bibliog. Oakland,

Calif., Berger.

History and characteristics of the Big trees.

Enock, C. Reginald.

1910 [Kings River Canyon], In his: The great Pacific Coast,
pp. 137-42, illus. New York, Scribner's.

8

SEQUOIA. NATIONAL PARK
General

Fairbanks , Harold W.

1899 The highest peak in the United States. Land of sunshine,
10:310-17, illus.

Ascent of Mb. Whitney, description of the region. Article
appears also in: Yosemite and the high Sierra, TO!. 5.

Far is, John T.

1920 [Sequoia National Park and General Grant National Park.].
In his: Seeing the Far West , pp. 221-22, Phi la, t Lippincott.

Farquhar , Francis P.

1922 Features of the proposed Roosevelt -Sequoia National Park.

Nat. hist., 22:161-68 (Mar.-Ap.), illus.

All features of the Sequoia region discussed.

1923- Place names of the high Sierras. Sierra Club bul., 11:
1924 47-64, 126-47, illus., map.

1926 Place names of the high Sierras. San Francisco , Sierra
Club, (pub. no. 62), 128 pp.

1927 Vagaries of the big trees. Am. forests and forest life,
33:259-63, 296-97 (May), illus.

Historical, statistical data on big trees in Sequoia.

1931 In inemoriam. George W. Stewart [founder of Sequoia Nat
ional Park]. Calif. Hist. Soc. quart., 10:309-10 (Sept.).

1932 Colonel George W. Stewart, founder of Sequoia National Park.
Sierra Club bul., 17:49-52 (Feb.), illus.

Fisher, R. T.

1900 The Bigtrees of California. Forester, 6:79-82 (Ap.).
Account of sequoia groves and attempts to conserve them.

Foote, Robert 0.

1936 The wilderness way. Am. forests, 42 : 395-99 ( Sept. ), illus.
The John Muir trail is a part of it .

Frothingham, Robert.

1932 [Sequoia National Park]. In his: Trails through the Gol
den West. pp. 182-85. New York, McBride.
Discusses the age of certain Big trees.

Fry, Walter.

1916 Report of the superintendent of the Sequoia and General
Grant national parks. U.S. Dept. Int., arm. rept., 1915,

THS PACIFIC STATES

F ry , 17al t er , co nt inue d .
1:941-49, map.

Description, conservation, wildlife, boundary extension,
and rules and regulations are discussed.

1917 Excerpts from reports of supervisors of national parks. Se
quoia and General Grant national parks. U. S. Dept. Int.,
ann. rept., 1916, 1:795-800, map.

Fry, Walter, and ™hite, John R.

1930 Big trees. 114 pp., illus., map. Stanford Univ. (Calif.)

press.

Includes information about Big trees in Sequoia, General
Grant parks.

Gallagher, Frank M.

1896 Forest conditions in the southern Sierras. Garden and for
est, 9:502-04 (Dec. 16).
Refers to conditions around Mt. Whitney and elsewhere.

Gibson, Hugh S.

1902 The Sierra Club in Kings River Canyon. Out west, 17:565-

72 (Nov.), illus.

Led by John Muir, and Charles B. Keeler of Berkeley.

Gilbert, Menard.

1915 California: Playground of the world. California's mag,,

1:82-92 (July), illus.

Contains description of Sequoia National Park.

Gillett , Frederick H.

1917 The problem of the greater Sequoia. Natl. Park Conference,

proc. , pp. 337-39.

Detailed descriptions of areas to be added to Sequoia.

Glisan, R. L.

1912 Knapsacking in the high Sierras [Sequoia region]. Mount
aineer, 5:70-77, illus.

Goodyear, W. A.

1873 Notes on the High Sierra south of Mount Whitney. Calif.
Acad, of Sci., proc., 5:180-83.

1873 On the height of Mount Whitney. Calif. Acad. of Sci.,
proc., 5:173-75.
Barometric computations give Whitney's height at 14,898.5 ft.

Grant, Madison.

1925 Saving the redwoods. In: Huntirg and conservation, New

10

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
General

Haven, Yale Univ. press, pp. 182-200, illus.
Urges importance of conserving the redwood groves.

Grosvenor , Gilbert H.

1916 The land of the best. Natl. geog. mag., 29:327-430 (Ap.),
illus.

Refers to points of interest in Sequoia Park.

Hackett, C. Nelson.

1917 Via Deer Creek. Sierra Club bul. ,10:^.79-83 (Jan. ), illus.
A hiking trip in Sequoia National Park.

Hall, Ansel F.

1921 Guide to Giant Forest, Sequoia National Park. Yosemite,
Calif., 127 pp., map.

1922 The forests of the Roosevelt-Sequoia National Park. Nat.
hist., 22:169-74 (Mar.-Ap.), illus.

1930 A guide to Sequoia and General Grant national parks. Berk
eley, Natl. Parks pub. house, 151 pp., illus., maps, index.
"Guide and trail companion" to the MBig Tree national
parks". Numerous pen and ink drawings by Donald Kelley.

Hallock, William.

1903 Mount Whitney, California. Appalachia, 10:135-42 (May) , illus,
Description of the peak and surrounding features.

Hamilton, George F.

1904 Report of the acting superintendent of the Sequoia and
General Grant national parks in California to the Secretary
of the Interior. 15 pp., map. Washington, Govt. print,
off.

Many aspects of the parks discussed by Capt. Hamilton.

Haskell, Burnette G.

1902 Kawea.h; how and why the colony died. Out West, 17:300-23

(Sept . ) , illus.

Lawsuits and depressions dissolved the colony near Mt.

Whitney.

Hastings, Cristel.

1928 Naming the sequoia. Am. forests and forest life, 34:202-

205 (Ap.) , illus.

Refers to controversy over origin of name "sequoia".

11

THE PACIFIC STATES

Heinly, Burt A.

1910 A camping vacation in the Sierra. Country life in Amer
ica, 18:190-92 (May), illus.
Route led through much of Sequoia region.

Henderson, Victor.

1903 Up Mount T,Vhitney with the Sierra Club. Sunset mag., 11:

505-15 (Oct.), illus.

Descriptive account of an ascent.

Huber, Walter D.

1921 First ascent of Mount Haeckel [near Sequoia Park], Sierra
Club bul., 11:144-46 (Jan. ), illus.

Hughes , James B.

1912 Report of the acting superintendent of the Sequoia and

General Grant national parks. U.S. Dept. Int., rept.

1911, 1:603-19, map.

Hutchinson, James S.

1921 Colby pass and the Black Kaweah. Sierra Club bul., 11:

118-35 (Jan.), illus., 'map.

By pack train through Colby pass to the Kaweah peaks in
Sequoia.

1924 Goddard and Disappearing creeks - The enchanted gorge.
Sierra Club bul., 12:7-20, illus., map.

A description of the country between Mt. Goddard and
Simpson Meadow.

Hutchinson, Wallace.

1925 Long live King Sequoia. Nature mag., 6:174-78 (Sept.),
illus.

Origin, age and present condition of sequoias.

Jeffers, Le Roy.

1919 Mountaineering in the Sierra Nevada, the Kings, and Kern

river regions. Scribner's, 65:645-55 (June), illus.

Experiences in and near the park.

1922 The Kings and Kern river regions. In his: The call of
the mountains, pp. 155*73, illus. New York, Dodd, Mead.

1923 Little journeys off the beaten track. Country life, 99:
35-41 (June) , illus.

Includes description of General Grant and Sequoia nat
ional parks.

12

Jepson, Willis L.

1903 Mt. Whitney, Whitney Creek, and the Poison Meadow Trail.

Sierra Club bul., 4:207-15 (Feb.), illus.

Description of the country along the Hockett Trail.

1915 [Sequoia National Park]. In: Nature and science on the
Pacific Coast (edited by Joseph Grinnell) , pp. 162-63.
San Francisco, Paul Elder.
Refers to the Big trees of Sequoia Park.

Johnstone, Frederic B. , and Johnstone, Elsie.

1913 The Kern River outing of 1912. Sierra Club bul., 9:16-
24 (Jan.) , illus.

Jordan, David S.

1900 The Kings River Canyon and the Alps of the Great Divide.
Sunset, 4:221-26 (Ap.), illus.

Jordan, A. L.

1918 Knapsacking in the Kings — San Joanquin region. Sierra

Club bul., 10:292-97 (Jan.), illus.

A pack trip in and near Sequoia Park.

Kehrlein, Oliver.

1937 Climbing the American Alps. Natl. parks bul., 13:6-9

(Dec. ) , illus.

Includes references to mountain climbing in Sequoia.

i

Kellogg, Vernon L.
1899 A Stanford party in the Kings River Canyon. Sunset, 4:

17-18 (Nov.) , illus.

A description of the Kings River Canyon.

Kreider, Claude M.

1930 Take a pack train to Paradise. Sunset, 65:6-10( July) , illus.
Information on pack trips in Sequoia and Kings River Canyon.

Kunz, George F.

,1910 Sequoia National Park. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preservn.
Soc. , 15th ann. rept., pp. 119-21.

1918 Greater Sequoia Park proposed. Am. Scenic and Hist. Pre-
servatn. Soc., 23d aim. rept., pp. 387-88.

Lane, Franklin K.

1919 General Grant National Park. U.S. Dept. Int., ann. rept.,
1918, 1:122. Washington, Govt. print, off.

13

THE PACIFIC STATES

Lane, Franklin 1C.

1919 Sequoia National Park. U.S. Dept. Int., ann. rept.,

1:121-28. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Discovery of limestone cave; desirability of enlarging park.

Langley, S. P.

1884 Research on solar heat and its absorption by the earth* s

atmosphere. U.S. Signal Service, prof, paper 15, 239 pp.,

illus., index.

Report of the Mount Whitney expedition.

Le Conte, Helen G.

1903 The Sierra Club in the Kings River Canyon. Sunset, 11:
250-62 (July), illus.

Le Conte, Joseph N.

1899 Kings River Canyon. Sunset , 3:2,17-20 (May), illus.
Description of the High Sierra frora Yoseraite to Sequoia.

1900 My trip to Kings River Canyon. Sunset, 5:275-85 (Oct.),
illus .

1902 My trip to Kings River Canyon. Sierra Club bul., 4:88-
99 (June) , illus.
An account of a six week's camping trip in the canyon.

1909 The high mountain route between Yosenite and the Kings
River Canyon. Sierra Club bul., 7:l-22( Jan. ) , illus., map.
Account of 26-da:r exploration describing the 228 miles of

mountain country traversed.

1922 Identification of the great peaks of the southern Sierra.
Sierra Club bul., 11:244-54, illus.
Includes peaks in Sequoia Park.

Lee, Charles H,

1910 Winter in the high Sierra. Sierra Club bul., 7:237-42
(June) , illus.

Mountain climbing and camping in and near Sequoia.

Lockwood, John A. ^

1899 Uncle Sam's troopers in the national parks of California.

Overland mo., 2d ser., 33:356-68 (Ap.), illus., map.

Includes experiences of four troopers in Sequoia.

Longley, Howard.

1895 Frori Fresno to Mt. Vfliitney by way of Roaring (or Cloudy)
river. Sierra Club bul., 1:187-98 (May), illus.

14

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
General

Marshall, R. B.

1917 Proposed new parks. Enlarged Sequoia National Park.

U. S. Dept. Int., ann. rept., 1916, 1:753.

Bill in Congress to enlarge park to include the Kings .
and Kern river canyons.

McAdie, Alexander G.

1906 Mt. Rainier, Mt. Shasta, and Mt. Whitney as sites for

Meteorological observations. Sierra Club bul., 6:7-14

( Jan . ) .

1910 The observatory on Mount Whitney. Sierra Club bul.,

7:141-48 (Jan.), illus.

Building the observatory; temperature and vapor pres
sure studied.

Mather, Stephen T.

1919 General Grant National Park. U.S. Dept. Int., ann. rept.
1:989-91, maps, bibliog.

1919a Sequoia National Park. U.S. Dept. Int., ann. rept. 1:

985-89, illus., maps, bibliog.

Discusses proposed enlargement of the park to include the
Kings and Kern gorges, Mt. TJhitney, and other areas. (See: U.S.
Dept. of the Interior, National Park Service).

Mills, Enos.

1917 Perhaps our greatest national park. Natl. Park Conf . ,

proc . , pp . 346-49 .

An address urging enlargement of the park.

1917a The Sequoia and General Grant national parks. In his:
Your national parks, pp. 99-115, 455-59, illus). New
York, Houghton Mifflin.

Moore, Barrington.

1923 The proposed Roosevelt -Sequoia National Park and the

Barbour bill, Sci., n.s., 57:82-84 (Jan. 19).

Argues against those opposed to enlarging and conserving
the park.

Moore, J. R.

1898 Touring over the old northwest trail. Outing, (Oct.).
Detailed description of region north of Mt. Y'Jhitney.

1898a Trouting over the old Hockett Itail. Outing, 33:33-40
(Oct.).

15

S PACIFIC STATES

Morgan, T/illiam C.

1909 From Kern Canyon to Giant Forest. Sierra Club bul. , 7:
99-104 (June), illus.

A knapsack trip into Sequoia Park.

1910 A high Sierra circuit, on headwaters of Kings River. Sierra
Club bul., 7:180-87 (Jan.), illus.

Sequoia National Park is in this region.

Muir, John.

1891 A rival of the Yoseinite. Century, 143:77-97 (Nov.), illus.,

maps .

A description of the Kings River Canyon near Sequoia Park.

1901 Hunting big redwoods. Atlantic mo. t 88:304-20 (Sept.).
Sorae of the groves described are in Sequoia and General
Grant parks , and in Kings River Canyon.

1901a The Sequoia and General Grant national parks. In: Our
national parks, pp. 268-300, illus. New York, Ho ugh ton
Mifflin.

1917 The forests. In: The mountains of California, pp. 139-225.
illus. New York, Century.
Contains material on Sequoia National Park.

Mulford, Walter.

1917 The war-zone forest of the Kern. Sierra Club bul., 10:155-

53 (Jan. ) , illus.

A trip through the Chagoopa forest and. the Moraine lake
district in Sequoia National Park.

Osborn, Henry F.

1919 Sequoia-the Auld Lang Syne of trees. Nat. hist., 19:599-

613 (Dec.) , illus.

Advocates the conservation of the sequoia.

Parsons, E. T.

1904 The notable mountaineering of the Sierra Club in 1903. Sierra

Club bul., 5:44-49 (Jan.), illus.

An ascent of Mt. Williamson in Sequoia National Park.

Parsons, Marion R.

1909 With the Sierra Club in the Kern Canyon. Sierra Club bul.,
7:23-32 (Jan.) , illus.

1910 The Sierra Club outing to the Kings River Canyon. Mountain
eer, 3:46-52 (Nov.), illus., bibliog.

16

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
General

1911 The Kings River Canyon. Overland mo., 2d ser., 57:138-
44 (Feb.), illus.

1921 The 1980 outing. Headwaters of the San Joaquin and the
Kings. Sierra Club bul., 11:136-43 (Jan.), illus.
A trip over Muir trail joining Sequoia and Yosemite.

Perkins, G. D.

1900 Report on the big trees of California. U.S. Senate doc.

no. 393, 56th Cong., 1st sess., ser. 3877, vol. 35, 30 pp.,

illus . , maps .

Includes information on groves in Sequoia Park.

Pinchot, Gifford.

1900 A short account of the Big trees of California. U.S. Dept.

of Agric., Div. of For., bul., 28, 30 pp., illus.

Published also as Sen. doc. 393, 56th Cong., 1st sess.

Putnam, George P.

1909 Down the Kern-Kaweah. Sierra Club bul., 7; 33-38 (Jan.).

1915 [Sequoia National Park], In his: In the Oregon country,
pp. 163-69, illus. New York, Putnam's.

Quinn, Vernon.

1923 [Sequoia and General Grant national parks]. In his:
Beautiful America, pp. 251-53. New York, Stokes.

Rankin, Howard.

1916 Giant trees of Sequoia. Overland mo., 2d ser., 67:75-80
(Jan.), illus.

Redington, Lena M.

1914 The 1913 outing to the Kings River Canyon. Sierra Club bul.,
9:159-64 (Jan.), illus.

Redington, Paul G.

1913 "tiount Goddard and the head of Evolution Creek". Sierra

Club bul . , 9 : 52-53 ( Jan. ) .

Description of area proposed for addition to Sequoia.

1915 "Grouse Valley trail improvement". Sierra Club bul., 9:306-
07 (Jan.) , illus.

Reik, Henry Ottridge.

1920 Sequoia National Park. In: A tour of America* s national
parks, pp. 55-68, illus. New York, Button.

17

TOE PACIFIC STATES

Romer, Margaret.

1926 Giant Forest. Touring topics, 18:14-15 (Jan.).

Russell, Carl P,

1933 About national parks in California. Calif. School Lib.
Assn. > (Northern sec,), 5:1-4 (Nov. 2), bibliog.
Historical account of Sequoia, General Grant, and other

parks .

Saunders, Charles F.

1917 In the heart of the Giant Forest. Sunset, 39:41-43,71-72
(Sept.) , illus.

1937 [Sequoia and General Grant national parks]. In his: Findr
ing the worthwhile in California, pp. 165-75, 2d ed. New
York, McBride.

Schmeckebier , L. F.

1912 Our national parks. Natl. geog. mag., 23:531-79( June) , illus

Includes a description of Sequoia and General Grant nat
ional parks.

Shinn, Charles H.

1918 Indian life in Sierra forests. Overland mo. , 2d ser.,
72:387-80 (Nov.), illus.

The Mono Indians, soue of whom lived at the base of Mt.
Vifhitney.

Shirley, James C.

1937 The redwoods of coast and Sierra. Berkeley Univ. Calif.

press, 84 pp., illus.

A general account of the sequoias and their history.

Shoup, Paul.

1899 The Sequoias of California forests. Sunset, 3:183-88(0ct.) ,

illus .

Contains description of General Grant and Sequoia trees.

Smith, Kenneth.

1934 At a Civilian Conservation Corps camp. Recreation, 28:
248, 261-62 (Aug.), illus.

Camp Wolverton, Sequoia National Park.

Smith, Philip 3.

1922 Mountain climbing notes. Another ascent of the Black Kaweah
(13,752 feet). Sierra Club bul., 11:311-12.

Solomons, Theodore S.

1895 A search for a high mountain route fron the Yosemite to the
Kings River Canyon. Sierra Club bul. ,1:221-37 (May).

18

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
General

189? Explorations in the Sierra Nevada during the season of 1896.

Appalachia, 8:240-43 (July), illus.

The area drained by the south fork of the Kings River is
described.

Starr, Walter A., jr.

1934 Sequoia National Park region. In: Guide to the John Muir
Trail and high Sierra region, pp. 112-34, San Francisco,
Taylor and Taylor.

Steward, Julian H.

1922 "Temple Crag [ascent], 13,016 feet". Sierra Club bul., 2:

312-15.

The peak is in the proposed extension of Sequoia Park.

1935 Indian tribes of Sequoia National Park region. U. S. Dept.
of Int., Natl. Park Serv. , Field Div. of Educ. , bul., 21 pp.,
maps, bibliog. Berkeley, Calif.

Outline of the ethnography of the four important tribes of
the region; the Tubatulabal, Western Mono, Yokuts, and Owens Valley
Paiute. Compiled to assist preparation of museum exhibits.

Stewart , George W.

1901 Recent work on trails in the mountains of Tulare and Fresno

counties. Sierra Club bul., 3:255-57 (Feb.).

Work on trail in the region of Mount Whitney.

1906 A Yokuts creation myth. Jour. Am, Folklore, 19:322.

1908 Two Yokuts traditions. Jour. Am. Folklore, 21:237-39.

1927 "The Yokut Indians of the Kaweah region". Sierra Club bul.,
12:385-400, illus., map.

1930 Big trees of the Giant Forest. 105 pp., illus. San Fran
cisco, A. M. Robertson.

Story, Isabelle F., ed.

1936 The Sequoia and General Grant national parks. In: Glimpses
of our national parks, pp. 24-27, illus., rev. ed. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.

Strother, Frank.

1909 Saving the big trees. World's work, 18 : 11696-11706 ( June) , illus.
Includes discussion of groves in Sequoia and General Grant

national parks.

19

THE P.ACIFIC STATES

Sudworth, George B.

1908 The big tree. In his: Forest trees of the Pacific Slope,

pp. 139-45, illus. U.S. Dept. Agric., Washington, print.

off.

Contains a description and classification of the Big tree.

1915 John Muir. Am. forestry, 2:184-85 (Mar.), illus.
Refers to his work in saving the sequoias.

Thelen, Paul.

1923 The South Fork of the Kings River. Trails. California
Alpine Club, 2:57-59.

Thomson, C. G.

1936 Kings River Nation?..! Park — a good business project. Am.

planning and civic arm. , pp. 85-87.

Discusses opposition by commercial interests to establish
ment of the park.

Tolson, Hillory A. , comp.

1933 Sequoia and General Grant national parks. In: Laws relat
ing to the national Park Service, the national parks and
monuments, pp. 48-62. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. ,
Washington, Govt. print, off.

Treat, Jessie.

1917 The Kern River outing of 1916. Sierra Club bul., 10:170-78
(Jan. ) , illus .

Underbill, Robert L. M.

1932 Mount Whitney by the east face. Sierra Club bul., 17:51-58

(Feb.).

Ascent of the hitherto unclimbed face of llhitney.

U. S. DepartuBnt of the Interior, National Park Service.

Administrative reports for this and other parks, published
annually at Washington, Govt. print, off.

Van Name, Willard G.

1926 Redwood mountain sequoia grove. Nature mag., 8:107-08(Aug. ) ,

illus,

This grove of vigorous sequoias could be included in Sequoia
National Park by a two-mile extension of the northwest boundary
which would connect Sequoia and Grand parks.

1929 Vanishing forest reserves, pp. ?, illus. Boston, Badger.

Contains much in^orJLHt ion of various kinds pertinent to the
Sequoia and General Grant park regions.

20

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
General

Vernon, Paul E. .

1930 [Sequoia National Park], In his: Coast to coast by motor,

pp. 60-64. New York, W. E. Budge.

A description of Sequoia and the big trees found there.

Versteeg, Chester.

1923 The peaks and passes of the upper basin, south fork of the
Kings River. Sierra Club bul., 11:421-26, illus .

1936 Tulainyo - highest lake in North America [between the park
and Kings River Canyon, 12,865 feet]. Travel, 67:33-35,55
(Oct. ) , illus .

Voth, Hazel H. , and others.

1938 A general index to the Sequoia nature guide service bulletins,

June, 1922-November, 1937. U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. ,

Berkeley, Calif. 20 pp.

1938a General Grant National Park. In: Guide to national parks
and monuments west of the Mississippi River, p. 28. U.S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. Berkeley, Calif.
Specifies location, area, and date of establishment , lists

and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical data.

1938b Sequoia National Park. In: Guide to national parks and

monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 35-36. U. S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Pork Serv. Berkeley, Calif.

Specifies location, area, and date of establishment; lists

and describes briefly the principal features; gives historical data.

Warren, Herbert 0.

1935 Snow sports in California. Country life, 69:25-26,66-67

(Dec.) , illus.

Swiss experts approve the skiing, sledding, and skating
found in Sequoia and other western parks.

Wayne, Flynn.

1917 The national parks of America. Natl. mag., 46 : 674-91 ( Aug. ).

illus.

Includes descriptive notes on Sequoia National Park.

White, John R.

1922 The Sequoia National Park. Am. forestry, 28:410-11( July) , illus,

1923 The Roosevelt -Sequoia National Park. Trails. California
Alpine Club, 2:54-56, illus.

1929 Foot, horse, motor, or air. Contrasts in Sequoia National

21

THE PACIFIC STATES

White, JolinR,, continued.

Park travel. Nature mag. , 14:29-33 (Jan.), illus., map.

1930 The Kings River Canyon. Am. Civic Assn., 2:39-43, illus.
Describes the region and argues for its conservation as a
national park.

White, John R. See: Fry, Walter, 1930.

White, Stewart E.

1904 The Giant Forest. In his: The mountains, pp. 227-31, illus.
Hew York, McClure, Phillips.

Whitehead, Jessie M.

1928 With the Sierra Club in 1927. Sierra Club bul. , 13:12-16

(Feb.), illus.

An account of an outing in Kern River Canyon.

Whitney, J. D.

1865 Notice of the explorations of the geographical survey of

California, in the Sierra Nevada, during the summer of 1864.

Am. jo\ir. sci.and arts, 2d ser. , 39:10-13 (Jan.).

Brief sketch of the explorations made about the headwaters
of the Kings and Kern rivers and among high peaks of the region.

Wilson, Herbert E.

1928 The lore and the lure of Sequoia. 132 pp., illus. Los

Angeles, Wolfer print, co.

The Big trees, animals, Indians, early settlers, history, etc.

Winohell, Ernestine.

1911 Tehipite by the old trail. Out West, 33:297-304 (Ap.), illus,

Describes and relates the history of Tehipite Valley and the
trail to it built by pioneers.

Wood, Ruth K.

1914 En route to Kings River Canyon. In her: The tourist's Calif
ornia, pp. 223-28. New York, Dodd, Mead.
A description of a stagecoach trip through Kings River Canyon,

1914a Sequoia National Park. In her: The tourist's California,
pp. 223-34. New York, Dodd, Mead.
A description of Sequoia National Park,

Wyckhoff , William C.

1883 Sunlight mysteries. Harper's mo., 67:81-94 (June), illus.

A description of experiments made with the sun's rays at

the Mt. Whitney observatory in 1883.

22

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
General

Wynne, S. W.

1917 Estimate of cost of new work to complete a trail from

Giant Forest to Moraine Lake. Sierra Club bul., 10:

226-27 (Jan.).

Yard, Robert S.

1917 A long life and a happy one. In his: The top of the con
tinent, pp. 188-212, illus. New York, Scribner's.
Account of a visit to Sequoia National Park and a descrip
tion of the giant sequoias and other features.

1917a The Tehiplte and Kings River Canyon. Natl. Park Conf . ,

proc., 1917, pp. 357-61.

Description and comparison with Yosemite of region between
Yosemite and Sequoia national parks.

1918 "Perhaps our greatest national park". Am. fores try, 24: 145-
50 (Mar.) , illus.

Description of the region east and north of Sequoia National
Park, including Kings River Canyon.

1919 [Proposed Roosevelt National Park], In his: The book of
the national parks, pp. 69-92, illus. New York, Scribrer's.
Includes notes on proposed Roosevelt National Park. Gives^

a detailed account of topography, scenery, Big trees, and outstand
ing natural wonders.

1931 Sequoia and General Grant national parks. In: The national
parks portfolio, pp. 53-76, illus. Sixth ed. Washington,
Govt. print, off.
Other editions; revised f rom t irae to time.

1934 [Sequoia and General Grant national parks]. In: Pictur
esque ADBrica, (J. F. Kane, ed.), pp. 56-65, illus., map.
Rev, ed. New York, Union Lib. Assn.

.936 The Sequoia and General Grant national parks, California.

In his: Glimpses of our national parks. (Isabelle F. Story,
ed.), pp. 24-26, illus. Rev. ed. , U.S. Dept. Int., Natl.
Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Revised and reprinted from t ice to time; first edition, 1916.

23

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK

FAUNA

Anonymous

1924 State lion hunter receives six lions in January. Calif.

Fish and Game Com. 10:75-76 (Ap.), illus.

Six lions killed in and around Sequoia.

1987 Wood-boring beetles. Sci., n.s. 65: 12 supp. (Mar. 18).

An account of insects found hermetically sealed in a giant
sequoia for 1200 years.

Burtch, Lewis D.

1934 The Kern County elk refuge. Calif. Fish and Game Comm., 20:
140-47 (Ap.), illus.

Driving elk into temporary corrals in Sequoia National Park.

DeLeon, Donald.

1935 Forest insects of the California national parks. Pt. 1:
Insects affecting sugar and ponderosa pine. Natl. Park
Serv. (Field div. of Forestry), 91 pp., illus.

Semi -technical manual for rangers and forecen.

Dugmore, A. Radclyffe.

1906 Fishing for the golden trout. Country life in Am., 10:162-

66 (June).

Contains description of a part of Sequoia, and of the rare
golden trout.

Fry, Walter.

1915 [Birds and mammals of Sequoia and General Grant national
parks]. U. S. Dept. of Int., ann. rept., 1:945.

1923 The Wolverine. Calif. Fish and Game Comm. ,9:129-34 (Oct.).
Wolverines are making their last stand near Mount Whitney.

1924 The Sierra vftiite-tailed jackrabbit. Calif. Fish and Game
Comm., 10:172-75 (Oct.).

Also called the Sierra hare; found around Hockett Meadow
in Sequoia, and elsewhere.

1926 The California ring-tailed cat. Calif. Fish and Game Comm.,
12:77-78 (Ap.).
Description of an animal which faces extinction in the park.

Grinnell, Joseph.

1912 A new cony [Ochotona albatus] from the vicinity of Mount
Whitney. Univ. of Calif . pub. in zool. ,10:125-29( Jan. 31) .

25

Grinnell , Joseph.

1927 Geography and evolution in the pocket gophers of California,

Smithsn. Inst. , ann. rept. ,(1926) , pp. 343-55, illus. , map.

Contains notes on the pocket gophers of the Mount Whitney
region of Sequoia National Park.

1935 Why we need wild birds and mammals. Sci. mo. ,41: 553-56 (Dec,

Value of birds and mammals in seed dispersal observed in
Sequoia.

Jordan, David Starr.

1893 A description of the golden trout of Kern river, California,
Saliao rnykiss aquabonita. U.S. Natl. Mus. proc., 15:481-83,
Description of golden trout taken near Mount Whitney.

Krieder, Claude M.

1931 Golden fins of the Sequoias. Hidden streams of the Sierra

yield rare, gamey trout. Am. forests, 37:343-45,364 (June'

illus.

Leach, Glen C.

1930 Golden trout. In: Propagation and distribution of food
fishes, pp. 815-819, illus. U.S. Bur. Fisheries, doc. 1070.
This trout originates in small streams on western slope

of Mount Whitney.

Merriam, C. Hart.

1921 A California elk drive. Sci. mo., 13:465-75 (Nov.), illus.
Removal of an elk herd to Sequoia Park.

Moore, J. R.

1898 Trouting over the old Hockett Trail, (California). Outing,

33:33-40 (Oct.) , illus.

Seven species of trout to be found between Yosemite and
Sequoia national parks are described.

Morse, Elizabeth Eaton.

1931 The Spine d puff ball. Nature mag. , 17:382-83( June) , illus.
Largest recorded specimen of Calvatia sculpt a found in

General Grant National Park.

1933 Its ancient enemy discovered. The incense cedar reveals the
secret of its destruction. Am, forests, 39:502-03 (Nov.).
The discovery in General Grant National Park of a large
fruiting body, Polypdrus amarus , established the fact that this fung
us was the enemy attacking the valuable incense cedar tree of the
Pacific Coast.

Muir , John .

1874 The wild sheep of California.

26

Overland mo. , 12: 358-63 (Ap<

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
Fauna

Muir, John, continued.

Some of these sheep are found on peak of Kings River Canyon,

Powell, W. N.

1935 Some stream improvements in Sequoia National Park. Calif.

Fish and Garae Comm. , 81:132-35 (Ap.), illus.

Log dams constructed to aid trout propagation.

Swarth, Harry S.

1919 Some Sierran chipmunks. Sierra Club bul. ,10:40-43 (Jan.),

illus.

The Tahoe chipmunk found in numbers in and around Sequoia
and General Grant national parks.

Thompson, Ben. H. See: Wright, George M. , 1935.

Wright , George M.

1935 Big game of our national parks. Sci. mo., 41 : 141-47 ( Aug. ),

illus .

Includes discussion of big game and its protection in Se
quoia National Park,

Wright, George M. , and Thompson, Ben. H.

1935 [Sequoia National Park]. In their: Fauna of the national
parks of the United States; wildlife management in the
national parks, pp. 5,53,57-58,67,70. U.S. Dept . Int * ,
Natl. Park Serv. , Contrib. of wildlife div. , Fauna, ser.2,
Washington, Govt. print, off.

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
FLORA

Anonymous

1927 WQod-ooring beetles. Sci., n.s. 65:12 supp, (Mar. 18).

An account of insects found hermetically sealed in a giant
sequoia for 1200 years.

Bell, J. Franklin.

1897 Some of California's big trees and their guardians. Harp

er's weekly, 41:495 (May 15), illus .

The Big trees of Sequoia and other parks, and their cavalry
protectors.

Berry, Edward D.

1920 The ancestors of the sequoias, trees which have a history of
ten million years.... Sci. Am., 2: 207-08(Nov. ), illus. , maps.

Bradley, C. B.

1896 A new study of some problems relating to the giant trees.

Overland mo. , 7 : 305-16 (Mar. ) .

The possibility of prolonging the existence of the race of
sequoias.

Canby, Henry Seidel.

1915 The last stand of the redwoods. Harper's mag. ,131:46-58

(June) , illus.

A plea for the preservation of Big trees in Sequoia and
elsewhere.

Clark, Galen.

1907 The big trees of California; their history and character
istics. Yosemite Valley, Calif., the author, 104 pp.,

Crampton, Henry E. See: Sherwood, George H. , 1915.

DeLeon, Donald.

1935 Forest insects of the California national parks. Pt. 1:
Insects affecting sugar and ponderosa pine. Natl. Park
Serv. (Field div. of Forestry), 91 pp., illus.
Semi -technical manual for rangers and foremen.

Douglass, A. E.

1925 Tree rings and climate. Sol. mo., 21:95-99 (July).

How the rings record past climates, including references to
the sequoias of General Grant Park.

29

THE PACIFIC STATES

Douglass, A. E.

1928 Climate and trees. Nature nag., 12:51-53 ( July) ,illus.

Tree rings as recorders of past climate, and possibly pre
dictors of future climate. Reference to Big trees.

Dudley, Ernest G-.

1917 The "big trees" as the forester sees them. Calif .> forestry,

1:25-26 (Aug.), illus.

Problems of protection discussed.

Dudley, William Russell.

1896 Forest reservations; with a report on the Sierra reservation,

California. Sierra Club bul., 1:254-67 (Jan.).

Includes discussion of Sequoia and General Grant parks.

1902 Trees along the Tulare trails. Sierra Club bul. ,4:153-56

(June) .

Account of ttye trees to be found in General Grant and Se
quoia parks and in the region to the north, later proposed as ad-»
ditional territory for Sequoia Park.

Dudley, William Russell, and others.

1900 A short account of the big tree's of California. U.S. Dept.
Agric., Div. of Forestry, bul. 28, 30 pp., illus.

Eastwood, Alice.

1902 A flora of the south fork of Kings River, from Millwood

to* the headwaters of Bubbs Creek, Sierra Club pub. 27,

96 pp. illus.

Eisen, Gustav.

1893 Native habits of Sequoia gigantea. Zoe, 4:141-44 (July).

Ferguson, Elizabeth Van E.

1921 Field notes of the 1920 outing. Sierra Club bul. ,11:47-50

(Jan. ) , illus.

Notes on the Sarcodes sanguinea, a brilliant blood-red
snow-plant.

Fisher, Richard T.

1902 The big trees of California. World's work, 3: 1714-23(Feb. ),

illus.
, Historical, botanical, and descriptive notes.

Flintham, S. J.

1905, Transplanting of big tree seedlings. Forestry and irri
gation, 11:428-30 (Sept.).

30

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
Flora

Gray, Asa.

1872 [Address to the association]. Am. Assn% Adv. Sci., proc.,

21:1-31 (Aug.).

Observations upon the characteristics, distribution, and
geneology of the Sequoia gigantea.

1872 The Sequoia and its history. Amer. nat., 6 : 577-96 ( Oct. ),
illus .

Grinnell, Joseph.

1935 Wiy we need wild birds and mammals. Sci . mo., 41:553-56

(Dec.) .

Value of birds and manmals in seed dispersal observed in
Sequoia.

Hans en, George.

1896 Flora of the Sequoia gigantea region. In: Pamphlets on

Calif, botany, 1:16.

The scientific and coriaon name of each genus, with inform
ation adequate for identification.

Hill, C. L.

n.d. Forests of Yosemite, Sequoia, and General Grant national

parks. U.S. Dept. Int., 39 pp., illus. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

Huntington, Ellsworth.

1912 The secret of the big trees. Harper's mo., 125:292-302
(July) , illus.

Measurements and studies of trees and stumps near General
Grant Park.

1913 The secret of the big trees: Yosemite, Sequoia, and Gener
al Grant national parks. 24 pp., illus. Washington, Govt.
print, off.

Jepson, W. L.

1923 The sequoias of California, their life-history, and geo
graphic distribution. Pan-Pacific Sci. Congress, proc.,
Pt. 4, 1:307-312.

1921 The long lost Carpenteria. Sierra Club bul., 11:151-53 (Jan,).,
illus .
The rare shrub, Carpenteria Californica, discovered in 1846

Kinney, Abbot.

1892 The forests of California. California illus. mag., 1:115-

31

THE PACIFIC STATES

Kinney, Abbot, continued.

128 (Feb.) , illus.

Contains full discussion of the Big tree and the causes for
its failure to reproduce.

Lezomon, J. 0.

1903 Kings River outing, 1902; botanical notes, including an.

important discovery. Sierra Club bul., 4:292-300.

Newly discovered lily (Lilium Kelleyanum) is described.

Lucas, F. A. See: Sherwood, George H. , 1915.

Lukons, J. F.

1911 The sequoias. Jour, geol., 9:268-70 (June).

Information about tiie Sequoia gigantea and Sequoia semper-
virens .

Morse, Elizabeth E.

1933 Its ancient enemy discovered. The incense cedar reveals

the secret of its destruction. Am. forests, 39: 502-03 (Nov.).

The discovery in General Grant National Park of a large
fruiting body, Polyporus amarus , established the fact that this
fungus was the enemy attacking the valuable incense cedar tree of
the Pacific Coast.

Muir, John.

1878 The new sequoia forests of California. Harper's mo., 57:
813-27 (Nov.), illus., map.

Description of the 200 mile belt of Big trees which extends
from Calaveras Groves south to Deer Creek. This includes General
Grant, Sequoia, and Kings River.

1879 The glacier meadows of the Sierra [north of Sequoia],
Scribner's mo., 17:473-83 (Feb.), illus.

1909 The sequoia. In his : American fields and forests, pp. 213-

267. New York, Houghton Mifflin.

Describes the sequoias and compares them with other trees
of the Pacific Coast.

1920 The Big trees. In his: The Yosemite, pp. 127-47. New

York, Century.

Contains inf ormation on the Big trees of General Grant and
Sequoia national parks.

Palache , Charles .

1893 The forest trees of the Sierra Nevada. Overland mo., 2d.
ser., 21:337-47 (Ap.), illus.

32

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
Flora

Rogers, Julia E.

1917 The Big tree. In: Trees worth knowing, pp. 263-66. New

York, Double day, Page.

Description of the Big trees in Sequoia in detail.

Saunders, Charles F.

1919 The Sequoia and its adventures in search of a name. In:

With the flowers and trees in California, pp. 153-167, illus.

New York, McBride.

Sherwood, George H.

1902 The Sequoia, a historical review of biological science.

Am. mus. of nat. hist., guide leaflet No. 8, 28 pp., illus.,

map.

Sherwood, George H. , Crampton, Henry E. , and Lucas, F.A.

1915 The big tree and its story. Am. mus. nat. hist., guide

leaflet 42, 23 pp. , illus., map.

Contains account of some trees in Sequoia and General Grant
national parks.

Shinn, Charles H.

1889 The great Sequoia. Garden and forest, 2 : 614-15 (Dec. 25 ).

^N.

Stewart , George W.

1930 Big trees of the Giant Forest. 104 pp., illus. San Fran
cisco, Robertson.

Life history of the sequoias of Sequoia National Park. Dis
cusses "youth and maturity", "youthful old age", "oldest living
things", and the various dangers which menace the life of a "big tree"
during its centuries of growth.

Stewart , Lucy E .

1922 The Alpine flora of Mt. Whitney. 91 pp., bibliog. Thesis
for degree of M.A. in botany, Univ. Calif.

Warren, Henry W.

1901 How the sequoias grow. Chautauquan, 33:362-66( July) , illus .

Description and notes on the growth of the giant sequoias
in the 240-mile belt of groves which passes through Yosemite, Se
quoia, and General Grant national parks.

fells, A. J.

.906 Helping the Sierra sequoias. Sunset ,16:280-83 (Jan.).

A plea for the preservation and extension of the Big trees
)f California; protection is not enough; a program of reforestation
is urged, especially in areas adjacent to General Grant and Sequoia
lational parks.

33

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK

GEOLOGY

Bailey, Gilbert E.

1906 Sierra sky-line guardian. Sunset mag., 17:227-29 (Sept.).

Contains a list of liighest Sierra peaks and their altitudes,
including Mt. Tyndall and Mt. Whitney in Sequoia National Park.

Blackwelder, Eliot.

1931 Pleistocene glaciations in the Sierra Nevada and basin ranges.

Geog. Soc. Am,, bul. , 42:865-922 (Dec.), illus., maps, bibliog.

Sequoia National Park is in the area described.

Carlin, Foster M.

1893 Among the California glaciers. California illus. mag., 3:

520-26 (Mar.), illus.

Descriptions of glaciers on mounts Lyell, Dana, Conness,
Hitter, McClure, Whitney, and Shasta; with observations on the
beauty of the ice pinnacles wrought by the floor of ice-streams.

Davis, Ellsworth E.

1927 California Alps. Overland mo. , 85:104-05, 112, 126-127(Ap. ) ,

illus.

Mt. vftiitney and Sequoia region described in this account of
the Sierra range.

Dudley, William Russell.

1898 The Kaweah group. Sierra Club bul., 2:185-91 (Jan.), map.

Results of the first thorough exploration and mapping of the
Kaweah Mountains, now in Sequoia Park.

Fairbanks, Harold W.

1898 The great Sierra Nevada fault scarp. Pop. sci. mo., 52:609-

21 (Mar.), illus.

Geological history and phenomena of the eastern slope.

Farquhar , Francis P.

1934 The Sierra Nevada of California. Alpine jour., 46:88-102

(Mar), illus., bibliog.

General description of the geology of the Yosemite and Se
quoia national parks region. Reprinted with same pagination, by
Spottiswoode, Ballantyne and co., 1934.

Gianella, Vincent P.

1933 Earthquake or landslide? Seismological Soc. Am., bul., 23:

91-94 (July) , illus.

A fissure near Sequoia Park indicates faulting.

35

THE PACIFIC STATES

Glassford, Vf. A.

1891 Climate of California and Nevada with particular references
to the rainfall and temperature and their influence upon
the irrigation problems of the two states. 51st Cong., 2d
sess., Ex. doc. 287, ser. 2868, pp. 333-55, appendix 67, maps,
Contains discussion of the topography and climatology of the

Sierra Nevada, Sequoia, and General Grant regions.

Hague, James D.

1873 Mount Whitney. Overland mo,, 11:460-64 (Nov.).

An article presenting the history of the geological sur
veys of Mount Whitney.

Hills , Thomas M.

1928 Glaciation of the upper Kern CaJJbn and its tributaries.
Sierra Club bul. , 13:17-19 (Feb.).

Jordan, David Starr.

1900 The Alps of the Kings-Kern divide. Land of sunshine, 12:

206-12 (Mar.) , illus.

The characteristic features of the region with special
mention of Mt. Whitney.

King, Clarence.

1871 [Mt. Tyndall and Mt. Whitney], In his: Mountaineering in

the Sierra Nevada, pp. 69-111, 274-306, illus. New York,

James R. Osgood.

Vivid account of mountain climbing in the sixties.

1935 Mountaineering in the Sierra Nevada. 320 pp., illus.,

bibliog. New York, W. W. Norton.

A late reprint of this classic of Sierran pioneering and
exploration in the sixties. Many previous editions, among them;
James R. Osgood, Boston, 1872; Ticknor, Boston, 1886; Scribner's,
New York, 1926. As State Geologist , the primary purpose of his
explorations was scientific. Mounts Tyndall and Whitney were
ascended and described, and other features of the Sequoia region
noted.

Knopf, A., and The leu, P.

1905 Sketch of the geology of Mineral King, California. Univ.

Calif, pub. in geol. , 4:227-62, illus.

Mineralising (so written on modern maps) is on the East
Fork of the Kaweah River, close to park boundaries.

Knopf, Adolph,

1918 A geologic reconnaissance of the Inyo Range and the east
ern slope of the southern Sierra Nevada, California. U.S.
geol. surv. , prof, papers 110, 125 pp., illus.

36

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Contains a geological description of Whitney and neighbor
ing peaks as seen from the east , and the Kern River Canyon.

Lawson, An drew C.

1903 The geomorphogeny of the Upper Kern Basin. Univ. of Calif.

pubs, in geol. 3:291-76 (Dec.), illus., map.

Geological and topographic description.

Le Conte, Joseph N.

1906 In the highest Sierra. Sunset, 17:215-26 (Sept.), illus.,
map.

A description of routes, scenery, and topography of the
country from Yosemite to Kings River Canyon.

1907 The high Sierra of California. Alpine JUiericana, no. 1,
16 pp. , illus.

Publication of the American Alpine Club. Contains geolo
gical descriptions, elevations of the peaks, and origins of their
names. Particular reference to the Yosemite and Sequoia national
park regions.

McAdie, Alexander G.

1906 Mt. Rainier, Mt. Shasta, and Mt. Whitney, as sites for

meteorological observations! Sierra Club bul. 6:7-14

(Jan. ) , illus.

Matthes, Francois E.

1926 Kings River Canon and Yosemite Valley. Sierra Club bul.,

12:224-36, illus.

A geological description of Kings River Canyon and Yosemite
Valley. The writer also compares the Canyon with the valley.

1933 Geography and geology of the Sierra Nevada. Internatl.

Geol. Cong., Guidebook 16, pp. 26-39, illus., bibliog.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Detailed description including material on the Sequoia
National Park region. Also material on life zones, flora, and
fauna.

1937 The geologic history of Mount IWiitney. Sierra Club bul.,
22:1-18 (Feb.), illus.

Muir, John,

1875 Studies in the Siorra. Overland mo., 14:64-73 ( Jan.) , illus.

Describes the origin and formation of mountains in the
Sierra Nevada, including Whitney and other mountains of the Sequoia
region.

37

THE PACIFIC STATES

Muir, John.

1877 On the post-glacial history of Sequoia gigantea. Am. assn.

for the advancement sci., proc. 1876, pp. 242-53.

Muir concludes Big trees not nearing extinction.

Olmsted, Frank H.

1901 Physical characteristics of Kern River, California. U.S.
Geol. surv., water-supply and irrigation papers, no. 46:
1-38, illus. , map. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Pabst, Adolf.

1928 Observations on inclusions in the granite rocks of the

Sierra Nevada. Univ. Calif, pub. in geol. sci., bul. 17:

325-86, illus. , map.

Solomons, Theodore S.

1896 Unexplored regions of the high Sierra, (the sources of the

SanJoaquin). Overland mo. , 27:477-87 (Ap.), ill us., map.

Includes geologic and general description of areas in and
near Sequoia National Park.

1896a Unexplored regions of the high Sierra, (the sources of the
Kings River). Overland mo., 2d ser., 27:636-43( June) , illus.

1896b Unexplored regions of the high Sierra. Overland mo., 2d ser.,
28:509-17 (Bov.) , illus.
Contains description of Kings River Canyon.

Thelen, P. See: Knopf, A., 1905.

Trask, John B.

1853 Report of the geology of the Sierra Nevada, or California
Range. In: Journal of the fourth session of the legis
lature of the State of California, doc. 59, 30 pp. San
Francisco, George Kerr, state printer.
The first official report of the State (?) Geologist.

Turner, Henry W.

1895 The age and succession of the igneous rocks of the Sierra

Nevada. Jour. geol. 3:385-414 ( May- June ), illus., map.

Sequoia and General Grant are in the area described.

1899 The granitic rocks of the Sierra Nevada. Jour, geol., 7:
141-62 (Feb. -Mar.), illus.

Soiiie of the rocks described are in Sequoia National Park.

1900 The Pleistocene geology of the south central Sierra Nevada
with especial reference to the origin of Yoseraite Valley.
Calif. Acad. Sci., proc. 3d ser., 1:261-321 , illus. , imp.

38

SEQUOIA NATIONAL PARK
Geology

Waterman, Thomas T.

1906 Kings River Canyon. Out West, 25:159-45 (Aug.), illus.'
Formation, topography, and scenery of this region.

Wheeler, George M.

1889 [Mount Whitney], In: Report upon U.S. Geographical Surv.

west of the 100th meridian, pp. 97-100. U.S. Army, Engr.

Dept, Washington, Govt. print, off.

Whitney, Josiah D.

1865 The geology of the Sierra Nevada. In: Geol. surv. of

California, vol. 1 (Report of progress and synopses of the
field-work from 1860 to 1864), pt. 2, pp. 365-403, illus.
Philadelphia, Sherman. Pubd. by authority of the Legisla
ture of California.
Describes geological features of the Sequoia region.

39

A BIBLIOGRAPHY

of
YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

FOREWORD

The following references to the literature of Yellowstone Nat
ional Park include, in general, material published through 1936, al
though there are many items of more recent date. They represent a
selection gathered by workers on a research project sponsored by
the National Park Service in collaboration with the Work Projects
Administration.

As a basis, the previous work of 1933, by Dr. Carl P. Russell,
entitled "A Concise History of Scientists and Scientific Investiga
tions in Yellowstone National Park", was used. This original list
of 1600 titles has been considerably augmented, although certain
types of material have not been used. Poetry and maps have been ex
cluded, and only a few fiction items, of unusual interest, have
been included. Reprints , abstracts and book reviews have been cited
only when the originals were not available.

Certain references which were not available to the research
project for examination and verification of date, but which seemed
valuable, have been included. Many of them, however, appeared in
the original 1600 items and were examined by Dr. Russell. All items
not examined by the research project are marked by asterisks.

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL (Including History, Travel,.
Description; Administration
and Maintenance; Roads, Trails
and Buildings) --------

INDIANS-

EDUCATION AND MUSEUMS -

GEOLOGY AND OTHER EARTH SCIENCES

FLORA-

FAUNA

Birds, Amphibians, and Reptiles
Fish and Fishing --------

Insects and other Invertebrates-

Mammals— -— — --------i

83

91

95

131

141
155
161
167

HISTORY, TRAVEL. AND DESCRIPTION;
ADMINISTRATION 'OF THE PARK; RO>J)S AND BUILDINGS

Anonymous

1827 From the west. Niles register, 3d ser. , 9:90-91 (Oct. 6).

Reprint from Philadelphia Gazette of what is supposed to "be
the first printed description of parts of the Yellowstone region.
Original by a trapper. Included also in Chittenden's "Yellowstone
National Park" (Cincinnati, 1895).

* 1868 Great Shoshone Falls, with a note on Yellowstone Falls.

Frontier index (Green River City, Dak. Terr.}, Aug. 21, p.l.

* 1870., The long lost found (T. C. Everts). Helena (Mont.) daily

herald, Oct. 21, 1870.

* 1870 The Yellowstone banquet in honor of T. C. Everts. Helena

(Mont.) daily herald, Nov. 14, 1870.

* 1870 The Yellowstone expedition. New York times, Oct. 14, 1870,

p. 4.

\1870 Yellowstone Expedition; a sketch of their explorations.
Ro c ivy Mt.. weekly 'ga z. (Helena, Mont.') , Oct. 3, 1870, p. 2.

K 1871 T The mineral springs of the Yellowstone (Mammoth Hot Springs).
Rocky Mt. weekly gaz. (Helena, Mont.), July 24, 1871, p.l.

1872. A gigantic "pleasuring ground:" the Yellowstone National
Park of the United States. Nature [London], 6:397-401
(Sept, 12); 437-39 (Sept. 26), illus.
General notes on establishment of Yellowstone Park and

descriptive material drawn, frojn the Hayden U. S. Geological Survey

reports.

1875 The Yellowstone National Park. Scribner's mo., 4:120-21

(May) .

Announcement of the establishment of Yellowstone Park
(1872), and brief description of the region.

1873 American exploring expeditions in the great West. Nature

[London], 8:331-32 (Aug. 21). *

Contains notes' on the U. S. Geological Survey explorations
of the Yellowstone region under F. V. Hayden, 1872.

1873 The greatest park in the world. Forest and stream, 1:72
(Sept. 11).

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

1873 The Yellowstone region. Aldine, 6:74-75 (Ap.), illus.
Description of the scenic features and comment upon the act

reserving the area for public use.

1874 Wonders of the Yellowstone region. Chambers jour., no.541:
315-17 (May 9).

Account of some early explorations, particularly that of
Colonel Barlow (1871), and notes on the scenery and geology.

1879 Far western scenery. Aldine, 9:329-34 (Oct.?), illus.

Contains descriptive material on Yellowstone and Yosemite,
illustrated by woodcuts.

1882-83 [Attempt to transfer land of Yellowstone National Park to
private interests.] Forest and stream, 9:401 (Dec. 21);
441 (Jan. 4); 461-63 (Jan. 11); 481 (Jan. 18) ; 501 (Jan. 25).
Series of editorial comments on Congressional action on the

proposal.

* 1883 Congress proposes to check the Yellowstone National Park

grab. Am. field, 19:41 (Jan. 20).

1883 Expenses in the National Park. Forest and stream, 21:[l]

(Aug. 2).

Indicating cost of all expenses necessary during a visit
to Yellowstone.

* 1883 History and description of the Yellowstone National Park.

Am. field, 19:61 (Jan. 27).

1883 Mr. Vest's victory. Forest and stream, 20:[lOl] (Mar.).

Account of efforts by Senator George G-. Vest of Missouri to
obtain passage of a bill to protect and improve Yellowstone National
Park.

1883 The park leases. Forest and stream, 20:121 (Mar. 15) .

Notice of seven leases granted to the Yellowstone Park Im
provement Company.

1883 Seeing the Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 20:[50l]-

02 (July 26).

Notes on opening of the Yellowstone region by completion of
the railroad to Bozeman, Montana, and the projected study of park
needs by Gen. P. H. Sheridan.

1883 Senatorial opinions on the park. Forest and stream, 20:

107 (Mar. 8).

Excerpts from arguments for (by Senator Vest) and against
(by Senator Ingalls) appropriation of funds to preserve Yellowstone
scenery and wildlife*

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

1883 The Yellowstone National Park of North America. Illus.
London news, 83:467-68 (Nov. 10) , illus .

*1883 The Yellowstone Park. Am. field, 19:354 (May 5).

*1883 The Yellowstone region. Cheyenne (Wyo.) weekly leader,
Sept. 27, 1883.
An account of a trip by Professor Bailey and party.

1883 The Yellowstone region. Forest and stream, 20:42-43
(Feb. 15).

.884 Another version of the lost cabin story; the burial of
Crandall and Flint in 1871. Livingston (Mont.) daily
enterprise, Jan. 19, 1884.

.884a The geysers in winter. Livingston (Mont.) daily enter
prise, Dec. 6, 1884.
Account of a trip to the Firehole Basin in November,

signed "Liberty Cap."

.884b The name and naming of Gallatin County; a biography of
Albert Gallatin. Livingston (Mont.) daily enterprise,
Ap.9, 1884.

.884c Notes on a visit to Mammoth Hot Springs; the guiding of
G. L. Henderson. Livingston (Mont.) daily enterprise,
Aug. 5, 6, 1884.

|:1884d Our national park made famous in England; an account of
the 1884 visit of the water color artist, Arthur Brown.
Livingston (Mont.) daily enterprise, Ap. 26, 1884.

*1884e Trouble in the park. Livingston '(Mont.) daily enter
prise, June 6, 1884.

Eviction of squatters at Soda Butte by Superintendent
Carpenter.

1884 Yellowstone Park matters. Forest and stream, 22:[12l]
(Mar. 13).

Criticism of the Yellowstone Park Improvement Company.

1885 Another syndicate. Forest and stream, 25:301 (Nov. 12).
Notes on concessions granted in Yellowstone Park by the

Department of Interior.

1885a [Mismanagement of Yellowstone National Park is charged
and proven.] Forest and stream, 24:121 (Mar. 12); 201
(Ap.9); 245 (Ap.23) ; 285 (May 7); 305 (May 14); 347 (May
28) ; 365 (June 4),
A series of editorials.

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

1885b Topography of the Yellowstone Park* Forest and stream,
24:22-23 (Feb. 5), map.

1885 The Wonderland route. Northern Pac. R.R. , 64 pp., illus.
One of numerous early railroad blurbs.

1885 The Yellowstone National Park. Forest and stream, 25:
421 (Dec. 24).

Extracts from report of the Secretary of Interior, recom
mending measures to improve and facilitate administration of the
park.

1886 Alice's adventures in the new Wonderland. Chicago, illus.
Descriptive matter printed on verso of a large folding

map of Yellowstone Park.

1887 Winter conditions in the park.. Forest and stream, 28:46
(Feb. 10).

1888 [Extension of the boundaries of Yellowstone Park.] Garden
and forest, 1:15 (Ap.ll).

1888 The Yellowstone National Park. Sci., 2:[255]-56 (June 1) ,
map.

Notes on history of the park, and data relating to damage
by forest fires and vandalism. Map of the park based on U.S. Geo
logical explorations of 1884-85.

1889 A case for prompt action. Forest and stream, 32:233-34
(Ap.ll).

Editorial on dangerous hunting tactics of Shoshone and
Bannock Indians: deliberate firing of timber to drive out game.

1889a Notes on the Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 32:275

(Ap.25).

Very general observations made on a snowshoe trip on the
east side of Yellowstone Canyon.

1892 The boundaries of Yelloivstone Park. Garden and forest,
5:241 (May 25).

1892 A standing menace; Cooke City vs. the national park.
Forest and stream, 39:485-87 (Dec. 8), map.

Protest against the proposed segregation of a part of the
park and the granting of a right of way for a railroad through it,
for which bills were at this date before Congress.

1893 Lenz's world tour awheel; Yellowstone Park. Outing, 21:
378-83 (Feb.), illus.

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

*1893 Rufus Hatch's park scheme. Livingston (Mont.) daily
enterprise, Mar.-?, 1893.
History of the Yellowstone Park Improvement Company.

*1897 Camps for tourists (Wylie camps). New York tribune,
June 20, 1897.

1903 Bridge work in the Yellowstone Park. Railway and
engineering rev. , 43:655-56 (Sept. 5) , ill us .
Describing three bridge projects, completed or in process.

.903 Chief Executive ("Theodore Roosevelt] participates in lay
ing corner stone of arch at park entrance. Anaconda
(Mont.) standard, Ap.25, 1903.

.903 Montana* s welcome to the President. Montana daily re
cord, April 9, 1903.

.903 The Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 60:361 (May 9).
Notes on discovery of the Yellowstone region and establish-
lent of the national park.

*1904 American explorers. New York, Allerton book co.

1904 Unique passenger station on the Northern Pacific. Rail
road gaz., 36:316-17 (Ap.29), illus . , map.

Describes the railroad station at G-ardiner, Montana, the
northern entrance to Yellowstone Park, which Hiram M. Chittenden
designed and built. Also contains descriptions of some buildings
and bridges in the park.

*[1907/] Illustrated history of the Yellowstone Valley. Spokane,
[Western Hist. Pub. co.], 669 pp.

*1907 "Old Faithful" Inn log cabin. Indoors and out, 4:73-76
(May) .

1911 Father of the Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 77:

634 (Nov.).

Obituary notice of Nathaniel P. Langford, explorer of the
Yellowstone, crusader for its establishment as a national park,
and first superintendent, 1872-77.

*1912 Nathaniel Pitt Langford: in memoriam. Grand Lodge of
Mont., Proc., 1912:79-82.

*1912 Seeing Yellowstone Park through Gardiner Gateway. St.
Paul., Minn., 114 pp.

1915 Autos in the Yellowstone. Am. forestry, 21:880 (Aug.).

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

* 1915 Into Yellowstone August first next. .An. motorist, 7:339-

43 ( June ) .

* 1915a Yellowstone Park opened to automobiles. Am. motorist, 7:

305 (May).

1916 The Gallatin way to Yellowstone Park,
torist, -2:15-23, 27 (Dec.).

Northwestern mo-

1916 The national parks of the United States. Pan-Am. Union,

Bui., 43:f372J"86 (Sept .), illus.

First article [YellcwqtoneJ of a series on ths national
parks. Translated from the Spanish edition of the Bulletin.

1916

1916
1916
1916

* 1916
1917

1917
1918

1918

Official route book of the Yellowstone iiighvray Association
in Wyoming and Colorado. Chicago, "Wallace, 145 pp., il
lus . , maps ,

Protecting the tourist in the national parks. [Holdups
in the Yellowstone.] Outlook, 113:450-51 (June 28).

Tover Falls of the Yellowstone-.- Aai. forestry, 22:91 (Feb.),
illus.

The Yellowstone National Park.' ., Am. Scunic and .Hist.
Preservn. 3oc., 21st Ann. rept., 1916; 673-78.

The Yellowstone National Park. New west , 7:23-29 (Oct.).

Road improvement in Yellowstone National Park. Am* city,
16:574-75 (June).

Scenic highways in. Yellowstone National Park. Good roads,
n.s. , 13:307-09 (I/fey 26).

The Jackson Hole country of Wyoming; what the proposed
addition to the Yellowstone is like. Sci. Am.,' 118 ::'??.
(Mar, 30), illus.

The -sportsman's greatest year. Sat. eve. post., 193:109-

10, 113, 115, II17 (Sept. 14).

It was proposed to extend the boundaries of Yellowstone
Park to include the Jackson Hole region, the. winter range of the
southern elk herd. r,

1919 Forging the park chain. Outing, 74:302 (Aug.), map.

Description of the 300-mile "Geysers to Glaciers" motor
trail between Yellowstone and Glacier national parks.

8

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

1919 U. S. Railroad Administration. Yellowstone National Park,
Wyoming, Montana, Idaho. Chicago, Rand, McNally and co . ,
31 pp.

.920 The fight for the Yellowstone waters. Lit. dig., 67:88-

91 (Oct. 23).

Reprinted newspaper and periodical material on the con- •
;roversy over the proposed dams in Fall River Basin.

.920a Speak up quickly for the Yellowstone. Lit. dig., 65:90,
92-93 (June 5).

Bill before Congress was menacing part of Yellowstone Park
.th commercial exploitation. Portions of a public letter by
i-eorge Bird Grinnell are quoted.

.922 First school established in Yellowstone National Park.
Park Serv. bul., 17:12 (Mar.). (Mimeographed.)

.922 Nature photographer extraordinary. Nat. mag., 51:308,
338, illus.

Notes on the life of F. Jay Haynes and his photographic
>rk in Yellowstone Park.

.922 Southwestern Yellowstone Park scheme.- Am. Scenic and
Hist. Preservn. Soc., Ann. rept., 1922:146-47.
Notes on the plan to create a storage reservoir in Fall
ver Basin. Description of the area.

.923 Hands off the national parks. Outlook, 134:162-63 (June 13).
Editorial condemning attempts to commercialize the national
irks, particularly proposed construction of a storage reservoir in
rellowstone.

.923 Truthful lies of Yellowstone Park. n.p., 60 pp.

.924 Neighbors for a night in Yellowstone Park. Lit. dig., 82:
44-46 (Aug. 30).

.924 A trip around Lake Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes,

1:1-4 (Sept. 20) , illus.

Description of natural features and animal life observed
luring a five-day shoreline cruise on the lake.

.925 Yellowstone National Park. Am. Scenic end Hist. Preservn.

Soc., Ann. rept., 1925:174-76.

Notes on location, extent, and scenic and scientific at
tractions of the park.

.926 New boundaries for Yellowstone, Sat. eve. post, 198:32
(Feb. 6).

Y^LLOT'YSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Note on the proposal to extend Yellowstone Park to include
the Teton Mountains .

1926 "To the looters of Yellowstone Park, hands off I" Outlook,
144:333-34 (Nov. 10) .

On the question of exploitation of water resources.

1926a The Yellowstone grab; a lesson in geography. Outlook,

144:393-94 (Nov. 24).

Protests proposed grant of part of Yellowstone Park to
Idaho commercial interests.

1926b The Yellowstone grab; a letter to our readers. Outlook,

144:553-54 (Dec. 29) .

Editorial urging public protests against a bill to grant
reservoir rights in Bechler Meadows.

1926c The Yellowstone grab; beauty and the beet. Outlook, 144:

300-01 (Nov. 3) , illus.

Editorial denouncing proposed exploitation of Bechler
Meadows by Idaho beet growers.

1927 Charles W. Cook is called by death. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 4:1 (Feb. ) .

Obituary notice on a member of the Cuok-Folsom and Was fa-
burn -Doane Yellowstone expeditions.

1927 The- real issue of Bechler Basin. Am. forests and forest
life, 33:29-30 (Jan.).

Discusses the proposed development of Bechler River
Meadows as an irrigation reservoir.

1928 Water sheds of Yellowstone National Park and vicinity.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:5-7 (Mar.l) , illus.

1928 [Yellowstone Park.] 70th U.S. Cong., 1st sess., Sen.
doc. 133, pp. 91-95, 103-04 (ser. no. 8866). Washington,
Gk>vt. print, off.

Excerpts from report of National Conference on Outdoor
Recreation, recommending addition to the park of 12,000 acres of
range land for elk.

1929 Yellowstone commission named. Am. forests and forest
life, 35:303 (May) .

Areas involved in proposed boundary adjustments to be in
spected by the cconission.

10

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

* 1930 Greater Yellowstone country. Sketch book, 7:20-23 (Aug.).

1930 The Yellowstone Park boundary. Nature mag., 15:213 (Ap. ) .
Notes on the eleven-year-old Yellowstone boundary controversy.

1930a The Yellowstone Park boundary; an editorial. Nature mag.,
15:213 (Ap.).

* 1931 Addition to Yellowstone Park of national forest tract urged.

Louisiana conserv. rev., 1:20.

1931 Boundary commission reports. Nature mag., 18:5 (July).
Recommendations of the commission for enlargement of the

park.

15 1931 Jim Bridger's yarns of the Yellowstone. St. Paul, Minn.,
Northern Pac. R.R. , 12 pp.

1931 The Yellowstone Park Boundary Commission makes its report.

Bird-lore, 33:223-24 (May- June).

A commission appointed by President Hoover recommended in
clusion in Yellowstone Park of 52,480 acres then in the Teton Na
tional Forest.

1931 Yellowstone Park Boundary Commission reports. . Am. forests,
37:378-79 (June).

The commission recommended that the Bridger Lake region be
added to the park.

1932 An unusual sight. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:6-7 (June-
July).

Optical phenomena at Mammoth.

1933 Noted scientist dies. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:17-18
(May -June) .

Obituary for Dr. W. H. Holmes, artist and geologist .-for
the Hay den geological surveys of the Yellowstone region.

1935 Dr. Ferdinand V. Hayden. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:[l]
(Jan. -Feb.), illus.

Biographical notes on the leader of the Yellowstone geo
logical survey expeditions of 1871, 1872 and 1878. Several of
his assistants are mentioned.

1936 John W, Meldrum. Yellowstone nat. notes, 13:14 (Jan,-
Feb.).

Obituary notice for Judge John Meldrum, who served 41
years as U. S. commissioner for Yellowstone.

11

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

1936a Roger W. Toll. Yellowstone nat. notes, 13:13-14 (Jan.-

Feb.).

Notice of the death of the former superintendent of Yellow
stone, Rainier, and Rocky Mountain national parks.

1937 In the Yellowstone-Grand Teton country. Standard Oil Co.

of Calif., Bui.. 25:2-6, 16 (July), illus.

Brief historical and descriptive notes on the Yellowstone
and Grand Teton national parks areas,

* Abbot, N.C.

1931 Montana in the making. Billings, Mont., Gazette, 520 pp.,
illus.

Acker, W.B. , comp.
1908 Laws and regulations relating to Yellowstone National Park,
U.S. Dept, Int., 22 pp. Washington, Govt. print, off.

* Adams , Robert

1874 The Yellowstone [a lecture], Philadelphia daily evening
telegram, Friday, Ap. 3d, 1874,

Albert son, Henna G. See: Baggley, Henna Albert son.

* Ackerman

1876 Yellowstone National Park. Sitz. Isis Dresden, pp. 49-64.

[Albright, Horace M.] .

1918 Yellowstone railroad routes. U.S. Dept, Int., Ann. rept.,
1916/17:822-24, map.

Albright, Horace M.
1920 Wonderful Yellowstone. Mid-Pac. mag., 19:539-41 (June)
illus .

1922 Yellowstone National Park. Am. forestry, 28:402-04
(July), illus.

1925 Preserving wilderness beauty along forest roads. Am.
forests, 31:36-37 (Jan.), illus.

/

1926 The trails of the Yellowstone. Sierra Club, Bui., 12:268-
76, illus.

The then-superintendent outlines the trail system.

Albright, Horace M. , and Taylor, Frank J..

1928 Oh, Ranger 1 A book about the national parks. Palo Alto,

Calif., Stanford Univ. press, 178 pp., illus.

Contains abundant material on Yellowstone scenery, fishing,
geology, flora and fauna, and accommodations.

12

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Albright , Horace M. , and others

1928a Place names of Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone

ranger nat. man., pp. 137-48, illus. Yellowstone Natl.

Park . ( Mineo graph e d . )

A list compiled after research of old maps and books and
personal study of the places named.

Allen, Edward F.

1918 [Yellowstone.] In his: A guide to the national parks of
America, pp. 1-74, illus. New York, McBride.

Allen, Eugene T.

1930 Early Yellowstone incidents. Yellowstone nat. notes,

7:13-19 (Ap.); 25 (May).

Recounts experiences of early visitors and members of
Government exploring parties.

Allen, Eugene T. , joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed. ,
1932

[Allen, Margaret A.]

1885 A family camp in Yellowstone Park. Outing, 7:157-59
(Nov.).

Alter, J. Cecil

1917 The Indian's pathway to Yellowstone (Cody Gateway).
Motor, 27:82-85, 140 (Oct.).

1925 James Bridger. Salt Lake City, Shepard, 546 pp., I

Biography of the trapper who was among the first to re
port the wonders of the Yellowstone- region.

* Alter, J. Cecil

1927 "Through the heart of the scenic west. Salt Lake City,
220 pp. , illus.

Anderson, A. A.

1927 The Yellowstone forest reserve; its foundation and de
velopment. Annals of Wyo., 4:378-88 (Ap.).

[Anderson, George S. , and others]

1892 Letter [and correspondence] in response to a Senate
resolution of January 15, 1891, relative to certain
settlers within the Yellowstone National Park. 52d
U.S. Cong., 1st sess., Sen. ex. doc. 47, 13 pp. (ser.
no. 2900). Washington, Govt. print, off.
Contains detailed information concerning claims for re

muneration made by settlers in the park, supplied -by Acting

Superintendent Anderson. The Secretary of interior's letter

13

YELLOISTONE NATIONAL PARK

to the Senate explains that lack of authority has prevented settle
ment.

Anderson, George S.

1892 The Yellowstone National Park. Forest and stream, 39:314-

16 (Oct. 13) , illus.

Comments on general progress for the year, with recommenda
tions; from the superintendent's annual report.

[Anderson, George S. , and others]

1896 Response of acting superintendent to resolution as to

poaching in park. 54th U.S. Cong., 1st sess., Sen. doc.

170, 7 pp. (ser. no. 3353, vol.7). Washington, Govt.

print, off.

Senate requests Secretary of Interior Smith to inform it
regarding poaching in Yellowstone. In response, the Secretary
transmits the letter of Superintendent Anderson, reporting that
existing game protection laws are adequate, but insufficient funds
prevent strict enforcement.

Anderson, W.F. , cartographer. See: Gibbes , Charles S., and
Anderson, W.F. , 1880.

Andree, Karl

1875 Die geyserregion am obern Yellowstone. Globus , 27:f289]-

94, 305-09, illus.

Two-part article in German, describing the geological
features of the park. Illustrated by excellent line drawings of
the geysers, Yellowstone Falls, and Yellowstone Canyon.

Andrews, M.E.

1903 Yellowstone Park. Out west, 18:545-46 (Ap.)j 19: [455]-

72 (Nov.) , iP us.

General description of location, scenery, natural features,
and wildlife.

Arnold, Marguerite L.

1927 Additional note on snow depths. Yellowstone nat. notes,

4:9 (Mar.).

Record of the snow depths throughout the park and a table
of comparative figures for 1925-1927.

1929 The first picture of Yellowstone Lake. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 6;4 (July 1), illus.

1932 Lost in the Yellowstone wilderness . Yellowstone nat .

notes, 9:22-23 (Ap.-May).

Experiences of Truman C. Everts while lost for 37 days in
the wilderness south of Yellowstone Lake in 1870.

14

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

* Arthur, Chester A.

1883 President Arthur's Yellowstone party; journey through the

Yellowstone National Park and northwestern Wyoming.

Photographs and Assoc. Press dispatches. Washington,

Govt. print, off.

Evidently refers to the President's trip with Philip
Sheridan, Robert Lincoln, and others in 1883, from Fort Washakie
to Yellowstone and return. Compare George F. Howe's "Chester A.
Arthur; a quarter century of machine politics," pp. 247-48 (New w
York, Dodd, Mead and Co., 1934)— Ed.)

* Atchison, William E.

1864 Diary of a trip made from Polo, 111., to Virginia City,

M.T., in 1864.

Ms. in possession of Charles H. Rainsdell, Metropolitan
Life Bldg., Minneapolis, Minn. Copy in Yellowstone Museum. The
route crossed the northeast corner of the park.

* At wood, John H.

1918 Yellowstone Park in 1898. Kansas City, Mo., Smith-
Grieves, 26 pp.

Ayer, I. Winslow

1880 [Yellowstone.] In his: Wonders of the west , pp. 310-23.
Grand Rapids, Mich., Central pub, co.

Baggley, George F.

1930 The protection department. Yellowstone nat.' notes, 7:
87-88 (Dec.).

Qualifications and duties of Yellowstone rangers.

Baggley, Herma Albertson

1931 Changing scenes. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:79-80 (Nov.-
Dec. ) .

Notes on scenery and animals of Yellowstone Park in autumn.

1931 A unique rock garden. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:77 (Oct.).

1932 Early photography. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:19-20 (Ap.-
May) .

Brief outline of early photographic work in Yellowstone,
with particular reference to W. H. Jackson, photographer for the
Hayden surveys.

Baker, F.S.

1925 Heirs of Columbus: Jim Bridger, et al. Am. forests and

forest life, 31:[45l]-54 (Aug.), illus.

Notes on explorations into little known sections of Yellow
stone.

15

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Baker, Ray S.

1903 A place of marvels: Yellowstone National Park as it now

is. Century mag. , 66:481-91 (Aug.), illus.

General description.

Baldwin, G-. Clyde, and others.

1915 [Yellowstone National Park; administration matters.]

Natl. Parks Conf. (3d), Proc., 1915:34-35, 42-47, 161-63.

Discussions of the four stations to gauge water levels in
the park, the newly constructed trails, and the necessity to im
prove roads for automobile traffic.

Ballou, Maturin M.

1892 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: The new Eldorado,
pp. 15-56. New York, Houghton Mifflin.

1901 [Scenery of the Yellowstone.] In his: Footprints of
travel, pp. 361-73, illus. Boston, Ginn.

Bancroft , Hubert H.

1890 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: History of Nevada,

Colorado, and Wyoming (Bancroft's Works, vol.25), pp. 769-

72, map. San Francisco, The History co .

Contains references in text and footnotes to early explo
rations and development of the park.

1890a [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: History of Washing
ton, Idaho and Montana (Bancroft's Works, vol. 31), pp. 593-
95, 710-11, map. San Francisco, The History co.
Contains notes on various early expeditions into the Yel
lowstone region and brief outline of the volcanic origin of Yel
lowstone Basin.

Barlow, J.W. , and Heap, D.P.

1872 Reconnaissance of the Yellowstone River in 1871. 42d U.S.

Cong., 2d sess., Sen. ex. doc. 66, 43 pp., map. (U.S. Army,

Engr. dept . , Rept . ) .

Bartram, J.G. , joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed.

Batchelder, James

1892 A trip to Yellowstone National Park. In his: Notes from

the life and travels of James Batchelder, pp. 160-84, San

Francisco, Pacific press.

A description of a trip from Oakland, Calif., through the
Yellowstone.

Bauer, C. Max

1932 The early history of the area included in Yellowstone Pa,rk.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:35 (Aug. -Sept. ), map.

16

HISTORY", TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

1934 An historical outline of important dates in Yellowstone
National Park. Yellowstone nat. notes, ll:[lO]-13 (Mar.-
Ap.), illus.

1934a Overgrazing of the winter range. Yellowstone nat. notes,

11 :[ 42-43] (Nov. -Dec.).

Effects of overgrazing, drought, and erosion. Plans for
disposition of surplus elk.

1935 Outline of Yellowstone history [1803-1932]. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 12:31-33 (May- June).

1935a The story of a winter excursion through Yellowstone Park
and Jackson Hole in 1876-77. Yellowstone nat. notes,
12:45-51 (Sept. -Oct.).
Abstract of unpublished manuscript by Capt. G-. C. Doane.

1936 Yellowstone Lake. Yellowstone nat. notes, 13:59-66 ^bv.-
Dec.), illus., map.

Geological development, history, and topography.

1937 The Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 14:13-16 (Mar.-Ap.).

Description of the unusual coloration and grandeur of the
canyon, with a summarization of the several geologic stages in its
development .

* Beach, Harry D.
1926 A trip through Yellowstone Park. n.p. , the author, 29pp.

Seaman, J.W.

1872 Meteorology, etc. U.S. Geol. Surv. of Montana and por
tions of adjacent territories, 5th Ann. rept. 1871;
[499 ]-524.

Contains tabulated records of meteorological observations
and measurements of elevations and distances made in the Yellow
stone region during the Hayden explorations of 1871.

Beckwourth, James P.

1856 The life and adventures of James P. Beckwourth, mountain
eer, scout, and pioneer, and chief of the Crow nation of
Indians. ...Written from his own dictation by T.D. Bonner.
New York, Harper, 537 pp., illus.

1923 Jim Beckwourth1 s narrative. In: The pioneer West (Joseph
L. French, ed. ) , pp. 15-36. Boston, Little, Brown.
Experiences of an early pioneer in the Yellowstone region.

Reprinted from "The autobiography of James P. Beckwourth. " (i.e.,

17

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

"The life and adventures of James P. Beckwourth. . . , written from
his own dictation, by T. D. Bonner" ? 1856.)

Bedell, Mary C.

[ cl924J [Yellowstone Park.] In her: Modern gypsies, pp. 216-36,
illus. New York, Brent ano's.

Belden, Charles J.

1918 The motor in Yellowstone. Scribner's mag., 63:673-87
(June), illus., map.

Account of the scenery viewed during a motor trip in
Yellowstone Park.

[Benson, E.G., and others]

1910 Roads in Yellowstone National Park. 61st U.S. Cong., 2d
sess. , House doc. 772, 2 pp. (ser. no. 5836). Washington,
Grovt. print, off.

Correspondence between Speaker of the House of Representa
tives and Secretary of War. The Secretary* s letter contains a
report of Maj. H. C. Benson, superintendent of the park, recom
mending the appropriation of $>20,COO for roads.

Bent , Allen H.

1919 The unexplored mountains of North America. Geog. rev.,
7:403-12 (May).

Includes notes on Granite Peak in Yellowstone Park.

Berwick, Frank

1911 The use and misuse of national parks. Mid-Pac. mag., 1:
145-50 (Feb.), illus.

Protests high rates charged by monopolies which serve
American parks, particularly Yellowstone; compares them with lower
cost of visiting Canadian and other national reserves.

Sevan, A., joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed.

Blackburn, C.F,

1879 The wilderness at the head of the Missouri, Columbia and

Colorado rivers. Sci. Am. supp. , 7:2903-04 (July 5).

Contains topographical description of Yellowstone Park and
notes on many of the natural features.

Blackwelder, Eliot, joint author. See: Field, Richard

ed.

Blaine, John E.

1872 Report of the surveyor general of Montana. U.S. Dept.

Int., Ann. rept., 1871/72:143-44.

Notes on a survey of land in and around Yellowstone Park.

18

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Bond, F.G.

1925 Flatboating on the Yellowstone, 1877. New York Lib., Bui.,
28:851-59 (Nov. -Dec.).

Bonner, T.D., ed. See: Beckwourth, James P., 1856.

Bornstein, Sam

1926 Hiking through the wonders of the world. Chicago, 32 pp.,
illus.

Bourke, John G.

1891 [Campaigns in the Department of the Platte.] In his: On

the border with Crook, pp.f24l]-432, [486] -91, illus. New

York, Charles Scribner's Sons.

Describes General Crook* 3 campaigns in Wyoming. Contains
only one direct reference to the park and its natural features
(p. 429).

* Brackenridge, Henry M,

1814 Views of Louisiana; together with a journal of a voyage up
the Missouri River, in 1811. Pittsburgh, Cramer, Spear
and Eichbaum, 304 pp.

Bradley, Frank H. , and Hayden, Ferdinand V.

1873 Map of the sources of the Snake River. U.S. Geol. Surv.

of Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, and Utah, 6th Ann. NJrept., 1872:

255.

Bradley, Frank H.

1873 [Explorations in the Yellowstone district.] Calif. Acad.

Sci., Proc. (1868-72), 4:292-94.

Note on the. Hayden survey of the Yellowstone region in 1872.

Brandegee, T.S.

1899 Teton Forest Reserve. U.S. Geol. Surv., 19th Ann. rept.,

1897-98, pt.V:191-212, illus.

Geological and topographical description of this reserve,
bounded on the north by Yellowstone National Park and completely
surrounding Grand Teton National Park.

Breed, Noel J.

[1927] The early development of the Wyoming country, 1743-1852.

Typescript of Ph.D, thesis in Univ. of Calif. Library,

315 pp., map, bibliog.

Contains considerable material on the history of the Yel
lowstone region. Special reference to John Colter's visit to the
region of 'the present park.

19

YELLOWSTONE N/iTICNAL PARK

*Breitenstein, A.J.
1917 The park-to -park highway. New west, 8: 17-20 (May).

Brick, C. L. , ed.

1883 Der Yellow-Stone Park. In: California-Album; eine Erin-

nerung VOID. Strande des stillen lieeres , pp. 62-69. San

Francisco, Rosenthal and Roesch.

Brininstool, Earl A., joint author. See: Hebard, Grace, 1922.

Brininstool, Earl A.

1926 Jim Bridger, greatest of plainsnen. In his: Fighting

Red Cloud's warriors, pp. 159-77. Columbus, 0., Hunter,

Trader, Trapper co.

Account of Bridger's visits to the Yellowstone region,
and of how his storias of the natural wonders were ridiculed.

Brockett, L.P.

[1881] The Yellowstone National Park. In his: Our western

empire, pp. 1227-65, illus. Philadelphia, Bradley, Gar
ret son and co.

*Brown, Robert

Wonderland of America. In: Countries of the world, vol. 4
London, Paris, and New York.

Brown, W.C., joint cartographer. See: King, Charles.

Bruffey, George A.

1925 Eighty-one years in the west. Butte, Mont., Butte
Miner Print, press., 152 pp., illus.

The author's story of his life in and around the Yel
lowstone .

Bryant, Thomas J.

1926 Harry J. Yount. Annals of Wyo. , 3:164-75 (Jan.).
Biographical notes on a pioneer of the Yellowstone region.

Br y c e , Jame s ( V i s co unt )

1922 The scenery of North America. Natl. geog. mag., 41:

[339] -89 (Ap.) , illus.

Contains a description of the Yellowstone Park region.

Bucher, W.H. , joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed.

Buel, J.W.

1894 Across the mountains to Yellowstone Park. In his: Ameri
ca ' s wonderlands , pp . 235-86 , illus .
Good description of the Yellowstone region, with much *•

20

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

factual material on the natural features. Numerous excellent,
large photographic views.

Buker, Horace E.

1922 You mustn't molest the bears. And at that there is still

a lot for the motorist to see and do in the Yellowstone.

Outing, 79:171-76 (Jan.), illus., map.

Bull, Charles Livingston, illus. See: Evarts , Hal G. , 1921.

*Bullock, Seth

1906 Diary of a. trip to the Yellowstone in 1872 from Helena,
M.T., Aug. 23, 1872— Sept. 20, 1872. Typescript sent
to Historical Society of Montana, 14 pp., maps.

Bunce, O.B.

1872 Our great national park, the valley of the Yellowstone.

In: Picturesque America; or, The land we live in (William

Cullen Bryant, ed.), 1:[292]-316, illus., map. New

York, D. Applet on.

Excellent descriptive material, with notes on the history
of the region. Illustrated with 17 fine engravings of Yellow
stone scenery and geological features by Harry Fenn.

Burroughs , John

1907 Camping and tramping with Roosevelt. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 111 pp., illus.

Account of the author's journey v/ith Roosevelt in Yel
lowstone Park in tho spring of 1903.

Burt , Strut hers

1926 The battle of Jackson's Hole. Nation, 122:225-27 (Mar. 3)
Controversy over the proposed extension of the boundaries
of Yellowstone Park to the Jackson Hole country.

Burton, G-.W.

1909 The Yellowstone Park. In his: Burton's book on Cali
fornia and its sunlit skies of glory, pp. 12-19, illus.
Los Angeles, Times Mirror pub. co.

[Butler, James D.]

1884 John Colter. Mag. of Am. hist., 12:83-86 (July).

Discusses Colter's claim to the discovery of Yellowstone
in August, 1806.

Cadell, H.M.

1901 The Yellowstone Park. In: Descriptive geography from

original sources (F.D. and A.J. Herbertson, eds.), pp.

171-30, illus. London, Black.

21

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Cameron, Jenks

1922 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: The National Park
Service; its history, activities and organization. Serv.
moncgs,, of U.S. Govt., 11:1-6, 14, 19, 21-22, 25-27, 31-
33, 63, 93-98. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins press.

Notes on explorations, establishment of the park, adminis
tration, boundaries, and laws.

Camp, Charles L. , ed.

1923 The chronicles of George C. Yount , California pioneer of
1826. Calif. Hist. Soc., Q,uart., 2:3-68 (Ap.).
Contains detailed reminiscences of experiences in the

Yellowstone region, as told by Yount to the Rev. Orange Clark.

Campbell, Marius R.

1915 Guidebook of the western United States. Pt . A: The

Northern Pacific route, vrith a side trip to Yellowstone
Park. U.S. Geol. Surv. , Bui. 611, 212 pp., illus., maps.
Contains 27 maps, 27 plates, and 38 figures.

Campbell, Reau

1923 New revised complete guide and descriptive book of the

Yellowstone Park. 4th ed. , Chicago, the author, 176 pp.,

illus.

Previous editions in 1909, 1913, 1914.

Caparn, Harold A.

1927 Preserving the unity of Yellowstone Park scenery. Land
scape arch., 17:77-82 (Jan.), illus.
The writer disapproves of the proposal' to separate Bech-

ler Meadows from the park to provide a reservoir site.

Carpenter, Frank D.

1935 Adventures in geyserland. Caldwell, Ida., Caxton, 318

pp., illus., maps.

General description, illustrated with rare photographs.
Enlarged from the pamphlet, "The wonders of geyserland," 1878.
Contains account of capture by Nez Perce Indians.

Gather, Katherine, joint author. See: Jordan, David Starr, 1925.

* Chamberlain, Allen

1920 Yellowstone rediscovered. Boston eve. transcript, Nov.
20, 1920.

Chamberlin, R.T. , joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed.

* Chaney, Jack

[c!929] Foolish questions, Yellowstone National Park. St. Paul,
Minn., Haynes Picture Shops, 94 pp., illus.

22

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Chapman, Arthur

1906 Jim Bridger, master trapper and trail maker. Outing, 47:
431-35 (Jan.).

Chapman, H.H.

1925 Recreation as a federal land use. Am. forests and forest

life, 31:349-51, 378-80 (June), illus.

Conflicts between national parks and national forests,
caused by restrictions on timber cutting and stock raising, with
special reference to Yellowstone and Yosemite national parks.

Chapman, Wendell, and Chapman, Lucie

1935 Winter in Yellowstone. Nat. hist., 35:107-20 (Feb.),

illus.

Description of the approach of winter in Yellowstone;
notes on inability of some Yellowstone animals to adapt themselves
to cold weather.

1936 Never a dull moment. Scribner's mag., 100:45-48 (Oct.),

illus.

Account of photographing wild animals in the Rockies,
particularly around Yellowstone National Park.

K Chappie, Joe M.

1922 A'top o' the world. (Wonders of the Yellowstone dream
land.) Boston, Chappie, 109 pp., illus.

1922 Devil's golf course at Yellowstone. Natl. mag., 51:209-

10 (Oct.), illus., map.

Description of the park in golf vernacular, likening it
to a gigantic links.

Charton, Edward, ed. See: Hayden, Ferdinand V., and others, 1874.

K Chittenden, Hiram M.

1895 The Yellowstone National Park, historical and descriptive.
Cincinnati, 409 pp., illus., bibliog.

1896 John Colter. Nation, 62:415 (May 28).

Letter about John Colter, trapper, Indian fighter, and
discoverer of the Yellowstone.

1901 The Government road system of the Yellowstone National
Park. U.S. Dept. Agric., Internal Good Roads Cong.,
Bui. 21:72-78 (Sept .16-21) .

1903 [The Yellowstone country.] In his: History of early

steamboat navigation on the Missouri River, 1:22, 32, 75,
112, 136, 138; 2:266, 382, 436. New York, Harper.
Description of Yellowstone Park and the surrounding country.

23

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Chittenden, Hiram M. , continued

1933 Yellowstone National Park. New ed., Palo Alto, Calif.,
Stanford Univ. press, 286 pp., illus., append.
Contains abundant descriptive and historical material.
Also has sections on administrations, climate, place names, and
boundaries. Revised from previous editions of 1895, 1905, 1915,
1920, and 1927 by Eleanor Chittenden Cress and Isabelle F. Story.

1935 [Yellowstone expeditions, 1819-20, 1825.] In his: The
American fur trade of the far west, 2:560-83; 602-11.
New York, Pioneers.

Account of two unsuccessful attempts to reach the Yel
lowstone (1819-20), and a successful one (1825), in which trea
ties were negoitiated with the Sioux, Cheyennes, Ogallalahs , and
other tribes.

Clampitt, John W.

1888 The wonders of the Yellowstone* In his: Echoes from the

Rocky Mountains, pp. 554-73, illus. Chicago, Natl. book

concern.

Contains a full account of the discovery of the Yellow
stone region.

* Claret ie, Leo

1894 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Feuilles de route
aux Etats-Unis, pp. 79-175. Paris.

Clark, F.L.

1917 Wonders of the Yellowstone trail. Road-maker, 11:7-9
(May) .

Clark, Ralph E.

1908 Wyoming summer fishing and the Yellowstone Park,
52:508-11 (July).

Outing,

* 1909 Over the old Cooke City Trail. Recreation, 30:76-77, 95

(Aug.).

* Clawson, C.C.

1871 Notes on the way to Wonderland, or a ride to the infernal
regions. Deer Lodge, Mont., New north-west, p. 2 (Sept.
9); p. 2 (Sept. 16); p. 3 (Sept, 23); p. 3 (Sept. 30); p. 2 (Oct.
14); p. 3 (Nov. 4); p. 3 (Nov. 11); p. 3 (Nov. 25) ; p. 3 (Dec. 16).

* 1872 The region of the wonderful lake — Yellowstone. (Deer

Lodge, Mont,), New north-west, p.l (Jan. 13) ; p.l (Feb. 10);
p. 2 (Feb. 24); p. 2 (May 18).

24

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

* Cleland, A.M.

1910 Through Wonderland. St. Paul, Minn., 69 pp., illus., map.
A description of Yellowstone Park.

Coffman, J.D., and McCarter, Kenneth C.

1931 Report on landscape features and forestry values for the .

area between Grand Teton and Yellowstone national parks.

Ms. in office of director of Natl. Park Serv. , 10 pp.,

illus. , maps.

Colborn, Edward F.

1910 Vi/here gush the geysers. Union Pac. R.R. , 40 pp., illus.,

map.

Photographs by F. J. Haynes.

Cole, Cyrenus

1908 The two great canyons [Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone

and Grand Canyon of the Colorado], Cedar Rapids, la.,

Torch press, 41 pp.

General description.

* Comstock, Theodore B.
1874 The Yellowstone Park* Washington, Govt. print, off.

Paper read before Kirtland Society, Oct. 20, 1874, de
scribing trips to Yellowstone Park.

1874a The Yellowstone National Park; its improvement. Am.
naturalist, 8:155-66 (Mar.).

1874b The Yellowstone National Park; its scientific value.
Am. naturalist, 8:65-79 (Feb.).

1888 Engineering relations of the Yellowstone Park. -Am. Ihst.

Min. Eng. , Trans., 16:46-49.

Notes on points of interest in Yellowstone, with par
ticular reference to geological features.

Conard, Henry S.

1927 [Addresses to newcomers at Camp Roosevelt.] Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 159-64. Yellowstone Natl.
Park. (Mimeo graphed. )
Transcripts of two lectures outlining the attractions of

the Camp Roosevelt area. Remarks on the geology, flora and fauna,

and suggestions for excursions.

Cook, C.W. , and Folsom, David E.

1870 The valley of the Upper Yellowstone, Western mo., 4:

60-67 (July) , bibliog.

Notes on the early history of the region. Reprinted at

25

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Cook, C.W. , and Folwom, David E. , continued

St. Paul by N. P. Langford, 1894, under the title "The Folsom-
Cook exploration of the Upper Yellowstone. ..1869." All copies
of this number of the Western Monthly were destroyed by fire in
1870, but the original manuscript was presented to the Montana
Historical Society.

* Cook, C.W.

1924 America in 60 's scoffed when pioneer told of Yellowstone.

Great Falls (Mont.) tribune, Aug. 21, 1924.

Press interview with Mr. Cook, a pioneer explorer of the
Yellowstone region.

* Cooper, Walter

1908 History of Gallatin Comity. Coast, 15:403-11 (June).

Cope, E.D.

1885 The present condition of Yellowstone National Park. Am.
naturalist, 19:1037-40 (Nov.).

Cope, Henry F.

1905 A nation's playground. World to-day, 8:631-39 (June),

illus.

General description of the Rocky Mountain region, with
particular reference to the Yellowstone country.

Corthell, Mrs. U.E.

1905 A family trek to the Yellowstone. Independent, 58:1460-
67 (June 29) , illus.

Coutant, C.G.

1899 [Historical notes on the Yellowstone region.] In his*.

The history of Wyoming from the earliest 'known discoveries,
pp. 68-73, 119, 286, 295. . Laramie, Wyo., Chaplin, Spaf-
ford and Mat hi son.

Cowan, Mrs. George F.

1903 Reminiscences of pioneer life. Hist. Soc. Mont., Contribs.,

4:156-87, illus.

Description of Yellowstone Park, particularly Mammoth Hot
Springs.

Coyner, David H.

1859 [Hunting and trapping on the Yellowstone River.] In his:

The lost trappers, pp. 82-100. Cincinnati, Anderson,

Gates and Wright.

26

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

* Craighead, Barclay

19£8 Montana, resources and opportunities. Helena, Mont.,
328 pp. , illus.

Cramton, Louis C.

1932 Early history of Yellowstone National Park and its relation

to national park policies. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park

Serv. , 148 pp., bibliog.

Well documented account of the development of a national
parks policy, traced in a study of the history of exploration in
the Yellowstone region and Federal legislation related to the
park.

Cress, Eleanor Ohittenden, joint ed.- See: Chittenden, Hiram M. ,
1933.

Crosley, John S.

1884 Report of the Governor of Montana, Oct. 5, 1884. U.S.
Dept. Int., Ann. rept., 1884, 2:557-65.

Notes on Yellowstone Park in a year for which there was
no superintendent's report.

Cross, Roselle T.

1921 [Yellowstone National Park.] In her: My mountains, pp.
181-92. Boston, Stratford,

Crowe, George C.

1934 Found: an old poacher's cabin. Yellowstone nat. notes,
11:17 (Mar.-Ap.), illus.

1934 The U. S. Army in Yellowstone Park. Yellowstone nat,
notes, 11:13-14 (Mar.-Ap.).

A brief account of- the Army's administration of the park,
1886 to 1916.

1935 A veteran of 1877. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:42 (July-
Aug . ) .

Biographical sketch of Judge Samuel Swanner, scout for
reneral Howard during his pursuit of Nez Perce tribe through
Tellowstone (1877).

Curry, John A.

1917 . Yellowstone-Glacier bee line highway. Northwestern
motorist, 2:17, 34 (Sept.).

Custer, Elizabeth B.

1885 [The Yellowstone expeditions of 1873 and 1876.] In her:
"Boots and saddles;" or Life in Dakota with General
Custer, pp. 270-312. New York, Harper and Bros.

27

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Ouster, Elizabeth B. , continued

Appendix to the biography of General Ouster by his wife,
giving accounts of the Army expeditions to the Yellowstone and Big
Horn River regions derived from letters from Ouster to Mrs. Ouster.

Dale, Harrison 0.

1918 [The Yellowstone expedition.] In his: The Ashley-Smith
exploration and the discovery of a central route to the
Pacific, 1822-1829, pp. 161-62, 278-79* Cleveland, Arthur
H. Clark.

Dana, Edward S., joint author. See: Ludlow, William, and others,
1876.

Dana, John 0., and others

1906 [The Yellowstone.] In their: The far north-west..., pp. 23-

26, 39-40, illus. Newark, N.J., Pubd. for The Travelers.

A souvenir record of a trip through Yellowstone Park made
by some members of the American Library Association in 1905. Co
authors were Theresa Hitchler and Mary "W. Plummer.

Daniels, Mark

1915 [Yellowstone National Park.] U.S. Dept. Int., Ann. rept.,
1914/15:55-56. Washington Govt. print, off.
Recommendations of the General Superintendent and Land
scape Engineer of National Parks for improvement of the buildings,
the buffalo farm, and the fire protection facilities.

1916 Yellowstone National Park. Am. forestry, 22:458-63 (Aug»)i
illus.

Author is a former national park superintendent.

* Davis, J.C.

1884 Early explorations. A Kentucky granger tells of the

earliest visit to the national park. Livingston (Mont.)
daily enterprise, Ap.21, 1884.

De Lacy, Walter W.

1870 Map of the territory of Montana, with portions of adjacent
territories. New York, G-.W. and C.B. Colton and co.

1876 A trip up the South Snake River in 1863. ' Hist. Soc. of

Mont., Cont ribs., 1:113-43.

Contains descriptions of Yellowstone Lake, the hot springs,
and Jackson Hole.

Dellenbaugh, Frederick S.

1905 [Historical notes, Yellowstone Park.] In his: Breaking the

28

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

wilderness, pp.8y 139, 164, 196. New York, Putnam.
Brief mention of Colter, Verendrye, and Ashley.

Demmink, G.

1926 Some impressions of ranger life in winter. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 3:3 (Jan. 2) , illus.

* "De Vallibus"

1884 The wonders of the Yellowstone. The Contributor, 5:5-9,
47-49, 86-88 (Oct.).

De Vere, Schele, ed.

1898 Waterfalls and cascades: Upper falls of the Yellowstone.

In: Wonders of science, pp. 108-14, illus. New York,

Scri"bnerr s.

" Dixon, Joseph S. , and others

1931 The wild-life problem of the national park system. Sci.,
74:540.

Doane, Gustavus C.

1871 Yellowstone expedition of 1870. 41st U.S. Cong., 3d

sess., Sen, ex. doc. 51, 40 pp. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Report of Lieutenant Doane, U. S. Army, to Senate Com
mittee on Territories.

Dodge, Grenville M.

1924 Biographical sketch of James Bridger. State of Wyo.,

Hist. Dept., Quart, bul., l:[l]-[lO] (Jan. 15).

Contains account of Bridger fs first view of the Yellow
stone region (1830), his discovery of Two-Ocean Pass, and his as
sociation with the U. S. Army Yellowstone expedition under Capt.
W. F. Raynolds.

Dolliver, Robert H.

1927 The discovery of the Yellowstone. Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 11-16. Yellowstone Nat 1. Park. (Mimeographed. )
Text of a lecture given at Old Faithful by the author

during the 1926 season. Discusses Indians of the region, early
visits by trappers, and the first exploring expeditions.

Dorf, Erling, joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed,, 1932.

Dorrance, E. , and Dorrance, J.

1920 Motoring in the Yellowstone. Munsey's, 70:267-69 (July).

Dory, William

Kodaking in the Shoshone. Am. forestry, 29:73-83 (Feb.),
illus.

29

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Dory, William, continued

Description of scenery, trees, and animals of a national
forest reserve adjoining Yellowstone Park.

Driggs, Howard R. , joint author. See: Jackson, William H. , 1929.

Drips, W.S.

19£9 Setting a park record. Wallace's farmer, 54:1119-21

(Aug. 16).

Describes a tour of Yellowstone Park by 198 persons in a
party sponsored by "Wallace's Farmer." This was the largest single
party to tour the park up to that time.

Driscoll, Charles F.

1883 The Yellowstone National Park. Am. architect, 13:130-31

(Mar. 17).

Arguments against private ownership and railroads within
the park.

* Dubois, T,

1925 Little-known trail of the Yellowstone National Park.
Travel, 45:33, 46 (Sept.).

Dumbell, K.E.M.

1914 The Yellowstone National Park. In his: California and the

west, pp.|.83]-90. New York, J. Pott and co.

General description and information for tourists. Contains
a quoted descriptive passage by John Muir.

1920 The Yellowstone National Park. In his: Seeing the west,
pp. 44-55. New York, Doubleday, Page and co.
General description, with quotations from John Muir.

Dumond, F.L.

1927 The wonders of the Yellowstone National Park. Normal

instr. and prim, plans, 36:29, 77-79 (Jan.), illus.

General description, with historical notes.

* Dunlevy, James

1867 The Upper Yellowstone. Montana post (Virginia City,
Mont.), Aug. 24, 1867, p.l.
Account of a trip to Yellowstone Lake in 1867.

Dunning, Lloyd W.

1926 Photographing the Yellowstone. Photo-era mag., 57:70-75
(Aug.); 123-26 (Sept.); 184-88 (Oct.); 239-43 (Nov. ) , illus.
Account of photographing geysers, with general descrip
tion of other physical features of the park.

30

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Dunraven, Windham T.W.-Q,. , 4th earl of

1922 The Yellowstone National Park. In his: Past times and

pastimes, 1:88-139. London, Hodder.

Account of a hunting trip with "Texas Jack."

1925 Hunting in the Yellowstone. New York, Macmillan, 333 pp. .
Originally published (1876) under title, "The great divide:

travels in the upper Yellowstone in summer of 1874." Contains
description of the park in early days and notes on Indians.

Durland, V.

1908 Yellowstone National Park; the wonderland of America.
Travel, 13:454-56 (July).

Eccles, James

1879 The Rocky Mountain region of Wyoming and Idaho. Alpine

jour., 9:241-53 (Aug.)..

Account of an exploration trip to the geyser basins of
Yellowstone National Park, and the river basins, lakes, and mountain
regions in and around Grand Teton National Park.

Edwards, Ira

1926 A trip through Yellowstone National Park. Milwaukee Pub.
Mus., Yr. bk., 6:78-107, illus.

Excellent descriptive material with brief historical notes.

Eldridge, Maurice 0.

1910 Touring Yellowstone Park on Government highways. World

today, 19:1263-72 (Nov.), illus.

Description of Ye Hows tone's fine scenic highways and
trails, with r.otos on early exploration, natural features, and
geology.

* Elliott, L. Louise

1913 Six weeks on horseback through Yellowstone Park. Rapid
City, S.D. , the author, 195 pp.

* Ellison, R.S.

1925 William II. Jackson, pioneer of the Yellowstone. Casper,
Wyo.

Ellsworth, Fred W.

1912 Through Yellowstone Park with the American Institute of
Banking. Moody' s mag., 14:|_368]-75 (Nov.), illus.

Ellsworth, Spencer

1883 A pilgrimage to geyser land; or Montana on mule back.
Lacou, 111.

31

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Elmendorf, Dwight L.

1915 Yellowstone National Park. Mentor, 3:{.l]-ll (May 13),

illus. , bibliog.

General description of scenery, geysers, and animals. Six
full-page illustrations.

Enock, C. Reginald

1910 [Yellowstone Canyon and geysers.] In his: Farthest west,
pp.66, 96, 100, illus. New York, Applet on.

Evarts, Hal G.

1921 Old timer. Sat. eve. post, 193:3-5, 40, 42, 44 (Feb. 19);

18-19, 94, 97-98, 101-02, 105 (Feb. 26) ; 18-19, 125-26, 192

(Mar. 5); 18-19, 48, 50, 53 (Mar. 12) ; 18-19, 83, 87, 89

(Mar. 19), illus.

Story of the life of Mart '»«oodson, a pioneer of the Yellow
stone region before it became a national park. Contains descrip
tions of scenery and fauna. Published also as a book under the
title, "The passing of the old west" (Boston, Little, Brown, 1921).

1921 The passing of the old West. Boston, Little, Brown, 234

pp., illus.

Illustrated by Charles Livingston Bull, and published
serially as "The Old timer." (See preceding item.)

1923 The last stronghold. Sat. eve. post, 195:26-27, 150, 163,

165 (May 12) , illus.

Explains conversion of the neighboring population from an
hostile attitude toward Yellowstone National Park to an apprecia
tion of the commercial benefits the region derives from it.

Everts, Truman C,

1871 Thirty-seven days of peril. Scribner's mo., 3:[l]-17

(Nov. ) , illus.

Account of Everts' experiences while lost in the Yellow
stone region.

Faris, John T.

1920 The summit of the world. In his: Seeing the far west,

176-1.80], illus. Philadelphia, Lippincott.

General description of Yellowstone.

Faris, John T., and Albright, Horace M.

1930 In the midst of Yellowstone's glories. In their: Roaming

the Rockies; through national parks and national forests

of the Rocky Mountain wonderland, pp. 3- 20. New York,

Farrar and Rinehart.

General description.

32

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Fenn, Harry, illus. See: Bunce, O.3., 1872.

Fennel, James C.

1892 In the Yellowstone Park. Californian illus. mag., 2:340-
65 (Aug.) , illus.

Fenneman, K.M.

1913 The Yellowstone National Park. Jour, of geog., 11:314-20

( June ) .

General description.

Fenneman, N.M. See Field, Richard M. , ed., 1932.

Ferguson, Melville F.

1925 lYel.lowstone.] In his: Motor camping on western trails,

pp. 58-86, illus. New York, Century.

Travel and camping.

K Ferris, Warrc-.u A.

1843- Life in the Rockies, 1830-35. West. lit. messenger, vols.
1844 2-3.

The Yellowstone material in these articles appeared also
in The Wasp. (Nauvoo, 111.), 1: (Aug. 13), 1842.

Field, Henry M.

1902 [Yellowstone.] In his: Our western archipelago, 212-50,
illus., map. New York, Scribner's Sons.

Field, Richard M. , ed.

1932 Yellowstone-Beartooth-Big Horn region. Internatl. Geol.

Cong., 16th sess., 1933, U.S. Guidebook 24, Excursion C-2,

64 pp., illus., maps, bibliog. , append. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

Geological description of south-central Montana and north
western Wyoming. Excellent maps and airplane photographs. Par
ticular reference to Yellowstone Park. Co-authors: W, T. Thorn,
J. G. Bartram, R. T. Chamberlin, W. H. Bucher, A. Bevan, Eliot
Blackwelder, N. M. Fenneman, E. T. Allen, W. J. Sinclair, G. L.
Jepsen, Erling Dorf.

Finck, Henry T.

1887 A week in Yellowstone Park. Nation, 45:166-69 (Sept.).
Notes on wildlife and physiographic features.

1897 Yellowstone Park in 1897. Nation, 65:276-77 (Oct. 7).

Notes on tourist traffic and inadequate accommodations in
Yellowstone, and a plea for protection of wildlife.

1900 Yellowstone Park as a summer resort. Nation, 71:248-50
(Sept. 27).

33

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Finck, Henry T. , continued

1907 Through Yellowstone Park. In his: The Pacific coast scenic
tours, pp. 279-93, illus. New York, ScribnerTs Sons.

Finger, Charles J.

1932 Yellowstone Park. In his: Foot-loose in the west, pp. 268-
72. New York, William Morrow.

Fisher, Walter S., and others

1911 I Yellowstone National Park. Administration matters.]

Natl. Parks Conf., Proc., 1911:8, 21-48, 53-54, 154-55.

Discussions of road building and maintenance, transporta
tion, concessions, and U. S. Army activities in the park.

Fitzgerald, La Verne H.

1929 Nursing in the Yellowstone Park. Pub. health nurse, 21:

410-12 (Aug.), illus.

The development of medical service in the park.

* fogarty, Kate H,

1916 The story of Montana. New York, Barnes, 302 pp., illus.,
maps.

Folsom, David E. , joint author. See: Cook, C.W., 1870.

* Folsom, David E.

1894 The Folsom-Cook exploration of the Upper Yellowstone in
the year 1869. With a preface by Nathaniel P. Langford.
St. Paul, Minn. [H.L. Collins co.], 22 pp.

[Forbes, Stephen A.]

1926 Aerial music in Yellowstone Park. Sci . , n.s., 64:119-20

(July 30).

Describes unexplained aerial sounds which the author first
heard with Edwin Linton in 1891.

1926 Mysterious music in Yellowstone Park. Lit. dig., 90:26

(Sept. 18) .

Account of trip with Prof. Edwin Linton in 1890 for U. S.
Fish Commission.

Fordyce, C.P.

1911 A walking trip through Yellowstone Park. Recreation, 34:
262-63 (Dec.).

,1922 [Photographing animals in Yellowstone Park.] In his: Trail
craft, pp. 17 6 -82. Cincinnati, Stewart Kidd co.
Notes on the opportunities for "camera hunters" in Yellow-

34

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

stone Park, with advice on local conditions affecting photography.

* Foster, Harriet D.

1910 "Sage brushing" in Yellowstone Park. Recreation, 32:53-
55 (July).

Fountain, Paul

1906 Yellowstone Park. In his: The eleven eaglets of the west,
pp. 173-95. New York, Dutton.

Francis, Francis

1882 The Yellowstone geysers. Nineteenth century, 11:369-77
(Mar.).

Experiences of an English party in Yellowstone. Reprinted
in Eclectic mag., n.s. , 3.5:598-604 (Ap.1882).

1883 -The Yellowstone Falls and Canyon. Illus. London news,

83:491-[92] (Nov. 17), illus.

Franc i s , Franc i s , Jr .

1887 The Yellowstone Park. In his: Saddle and moccasin, pp.l-

40. London, Chapman and Hall.

Description of the park region.

'Frankland, Edward

1885 A grfat winter sanitarium for the American continent. Pop.
sci. mo., 27:289-95 (July).

Yellowstone National Park as a sanitarium for pulmonary
diseases is compared with European spas.

Franklin, W.S.

1913 The Yellowstone. Sci., n.s., 37:446-47 (Mar. 21), illus.

Miscellaneous notes, including description of models of
geysers made by the author.

Frazer, Elizabeth

1920 The land of the whopper. Sat. eve. post, 192:40, 42, 44,

46, 49-50, 53-54, 57 (May 1), illus.

Description of a trip to Jackson Hole and Yellowstone Park.
Remarks on the exaggerated and fanciful descriptions of Yellowstone
wonders retailed to gullible tourists by local humorists.

1920 The last wilderness. Sat. eve. post, 192:14-15, 141,145,

149, 153, 156 (Jan. 24), illus.

Description of a visit to the Jackson Hole country south
of Yellowstone Park. Urges legislation to extend the park bounda
ries to include this region, the winter feeding ground of the
southern elk herd.

35

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Freeman, Lewis R.

1904 Ski -runners of the Yellowstone. Nat. mag., 19:611-14
(Feb.).

1922 Calamity Jane and Yankee Jim. Encounters with historic
characters of the old untamed days of the Yellowstone.
Sunset, 49:22-25, 52, 54 (July), illus.

1922 River adventures. Sunset, 49:17-20, 54, 56, 58-59

(Sept. ) , illus.

.Navigation of the lower Yellowstone River in a small
metal boat.

1922 Skiing through Yellowstone. Sunset, 48:12-15, 66-71

(June) , illus.

Account of attempted boat trip down the Yellowstone River
and an exploration of the valleys of the upper Yellowstone on
skis.

1922 The Yellowstone and a tin boat. River adventures on the
trail of Lewis and Clark through Montana. Sunset, 49:
30-32, 56-59 (Aug.), illus.
Travel on foot and afloat in the Yellowstone region.

1922 [The Yellowstone in winter, and present-day Yellowstone
Park.] In his: Down the Yellowstone, pp. 1-9, 97-119,
illus. New York, Dodd, Mead.

1923 Hunting' on skis with a camera. Travel, 40:31-35, 40
(Mar. ) , illus.

Notes on animals photographed on an early spring trip.

Fremont , John C ,

1923 The p'athfinder: In the high Rockies. In: The pioneer

West (Joseph L. French, ed.), pp. 37-55. Boston, Little,

Brown.

Reprinted from John C. Fremort's Journal of the first ex
pedition. Describes his crossing of the Rockies near Yellowstone.

French, Joseph L. , ed. See: preceding item; also, Beckwourth,
James P. , 1923.

Fries, Amos A.

1915 [Building roads in Yellowstone Park.] Natl. Parks Conf.,

Proc., 1915:73-75.

Notes on problems and technique by the engineer in charge.

Frost , Ned

1929 Going thru the park. Sat. eve. post, 201:35-37, 121, 124,

36

127 (Mar. 30), illus.

Facts and anecdotes regarding Yellowstone National Park,
related by one of the early tourist guides.

Fryxell, Fritiof M.

1929 The story of Deadman's Bar. Annals of Wyo. , 5:[l28]-48

( June ) .

Account of a triple murder committed by John Tonnar in
July, 1886, at Deadman's Bar on the Snake River, in the Jackson
Hole region.

* Gaffey, E.M.

1932 Around scenic Panhandle. Natl. repub., 19:18-19 (Feb.).

Gale, Roy S. , joint author. See: Lee, Willis T., 1915.

Gannett , Henry

1873 [Routes for roads from settlements to Yellowstone -Park.]

U.S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs., 6th Ann. rep1>-. , 1872:

802-07 .

Gannett, Henry, joint author. See'* Porter, R.P. , and others,
1882.

Gannett , Henry

1883 Geographical fieldwork of the Yellowstone Park division.

U.S. Geol. & Geog. Surv. of the terr. , 12th Ann. rept.,

1878, pt. II: 445- 90, illus., map.

History of explorations in the Yellowstone region; eleva
tions of various points; notes on the topography, climate, and
means of access to the area.

1898 [Yellowstone Park, Yellowstone Falls, and the geyser.

basins.] In his: North America, pp. 40-53, illus. London,
Edward Stanford, 2 vols.

* Garver, Frank H.

n.d. Marking historical sites. in Montana. Dillon, Mont., 36pp.

* Gauilleur, H.

1882 Souvonirs dTun voyage a cheval dans le desert Americain.
Lf exploration, revue des conquetes de la civilisation,
recueil geographique hebdomadaire. Paris, 2 semestre,
tome XIV. (Yellowstone National Park is nos.249 and 295.)

* Gfry, F.D.B.

1915 Salt Lake City to Yellowstone Park; roads logged July,

1915. Salt Lake City, R.D. Grow print, co., 20 pp., il
lus. , map.

37

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

G-eikie, Archibald

1881 The geysers of the Yellowstone. MacMillan's mag., 44:421-

35 (Oct.).

Description of the Yellowstone geysers, mud volcanoes, hot
springs, arid sinter-beds. Reprinted in Appleton's Jour, for Dec.,
1881, and Eclectic mag. for Jan., 1882.

* Gerrish, Theodore

1887 Life in the world's wonderland. Biddeford, Me., 421 pp.,
illus.

* Ghent, William J.

1924 John Goiter. Calif. Acad. Soc. Sci., Proc., 1923:48-57.

Gibbes, Charles D. , and Anderson, W.F.

1880 Map of southern Idaho and the adjacent regions , by Judge

W. F. Anderson of Bonanza City; with an accompaniment com
piled by Charles Drayton Gibbes, C.E., of San Francisco.
San Francisco, Holt, 55 pp., map.
General description of Yellowstone Park; notes on area,

elevations, names, geological features, and scenery.

Gibbon, John

1874 The wonders of the Yellowstone. Am. Geog. Soc., Jour., 5
112-37.

* Gibson, John

Great waterfalls, cataracts, and geysers. London, 288
pp., illus.

* Gillis, Charles J.

1893 The Yellowstone Park and Alaska. New York, printed for
private distribution, 76 pp.

Goodwin, Cardinal

1917 A larger view of the Yellowstone expedition, 1819-1020.

Miss. Valley hist. rev. , 4:299-313 (Dec.).

An account of the expedition which was made to establish
effective control over the Indians of the northwest.

Goodwin, J.M.

1898 The Snake River country. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 31:[3j-

13 (Jan.) , illus.

General description of district just within and beyond the
southern border of Yellowstor.e.

GOrdon-Cumming, Constance F.

1885 The world's wonderlands in Wyoming and New Zealand. Over
land mo . , 5 : 1-13 ( Jan . ) .

38

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

[Gould, Charles, III]

1935 A trip to Yellowstone arid the Oregon country in 1834.

Wash. Hist, quart., 26:28-29 (Jan.).

Brier notes on experiences of William M. Anderson with
Indians and trappers during a horseback journey with William Sub
let te from Kentucky to Oregon via the Yellowstone.

* Gourley, James

1929 The 1870 expedition into Cooke City region. Ms. in Yellow
stone Museum files.

Grant, Roland D.

1908 Changes in the Yellowstone Park. Am. Geog. Soc., Bui.,

40:277-32 (Jan.).

Alterations in some of the natural features, drying up of
some geysers, and fading of the rich rock coloringsr.

" Greenberg, D.W.

1927 Vast historic region of Wyoming (Sublette and Teton coun
ties). Midwest rev., 8:36-53, 106-10 (July-Aug.).

Greene, Mrs. Anne B.

1928 Attempting Yellowstone. In her: Lambs in March and other
essays, pp. 229-74. New York, Century.

An artist's account of a trip to Yellowstone Park.

Gregg, William C.

1920 Cornering cascades. Sat. eve. post., 193:11, 78, 83
(Nov. 20), illus.

Report of trip through little known scenic area in south
west Yellowstone which Idaho irrigation interests wish to flood.
The area has been represented to Congress as an "unsightly swamp."

1921 The cascade corner of Yellowstone Park. Outlook, 129:
469-76 (Nov. 23), illus.

Not en on scenic area in southwest corner of Yellowstone
which irrigation interests have unsuccessfully sought to obtain
for a reservoir site.

Grinnell, George B., joint author. See: Ludlow, William and
others, 1876.

Grinnell, George B. , ed.

1904 Big game refuges. In: American big game in its. haunts

(The book of the Boone and Crockett Club), pp. 442-54, il
lus. New York, forest and Stream pub. co.
Contains particular reference- to the benefits accruing to
adjacent states from rigid protection of big game in the Yellow
stone region.

39

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Grinnell, George B.

1911 [Colter's Hell — the first name given the Yellowstone geyser

basin*] In his: Trails of the pathfinders, p. £04. New

York, Charles Scribnor's Sons.

1913 [Yellowstone Park and the surrounding country.] In his:
Beyond the old frontier, pp.90, 281, 306-21, illus. New
York, Scribner's.

Brief notes on the park and account of a hunting and trap
ping trip on the Yellowstone River.

[Grinnell, Joseph, ed.]

1915 Nature and science on the Pacific coast; a guide-book for
scientific travelers in the west. San Francisco, Paul
Elder, 302 pp., illus., maps, bibliog.

Contains 31 chapters, each by a recognized scientific au
thority; includes several brief miscellaneous descriptive notes on
Yellowstone.

Grosvenor, Gilbert H.

1916 The land of the best. Natl. geog. mag., 29:327-430 (Ap.),
illus.

Brief descriptions, with photographs (some in color), of
Glacier, Rocky Mountain, Mesa Verde, Mt. Rainier, Yosemite, Se
quoia, and Yellowstone national parks. Lone Star and Giant Gey
sers, Yellowstone Falls, Eagle-nest Rock, and bison are among the
subjects included.

Gunnison. Almon

1884 [Yellowstone Park.] In his: Rambles overland, pp. 27-82.
Boston, Universalist pub« house.

Guptill, Albert B.

[c!890] Practical guide to Yellowstone National Park... St. Paul,

Minn., F.J. Haynes & bro. , 124 pp., illus., map.

There were numerous editions of this famous guidebook,
with slightly varying titles and pagination. It later became
known as the "Haynes guide book of the Yellowstone" that is "edited
and approved by the National Park Service." (See Haynes, below.)

1890 Yellowstone Park. Outing, 16:256-63 (July), illus.

Hafen, LeRoy R.

1934 Mountain men: William Craig. Colo, mag., 11:171-76 (Sept.),

illus.

Experiences of early trappers in the region of the Yellow-
and Bighorn Rivers.

40

HISTORY", TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

[Hague, Arnold]

1886 Mr. Hague on the Park. Forest and stream, 26:89 (Feb.25).

Letter to Senator Manderson, urging legislation to pre
serve the forests of the Yellowstone region; also, notes on the
game, and the need for strict enforcement of game laws.

Hague, Arnold, joint author. See: Holman, William S., 1886.

Hague, Arnold

1889 The needs of the Yellowstone National Park. U.S. Dept.

Agric., Div. of Forestry, Bui. 2: £06-11.

Reconmends extension of the park to include valuable timber
and watershed areas.

1893 Itinerary of the Yellowstone Park. Congres Geol. Inter-
natl., 5th sess. , Compte rendu, pp. 346-59, illus., map.
Description of scenery and geological features on the road
to, and at, Mammoth Hot Springs; the various geyser basins; Yellow
stone Lake; and Yellowstone Falls.

1904 The Yellowstone National Park. Scribner's, 35:513-27

(May) .

Description of natural features with notes on history and
geology.

1913 Yellowstone National Park. Am. forestry, 19:[300]-17

(May).

General description of the scenery and the topographical
and geological features, by an authority.

sent to the Senate. Cheyenne weekly leader, Feb. 15, 1883.

Hall, Ansel *'.

1927 The Folsom-Cook Expedition (1869). Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 22-23. Yellowstone Nat 1. Park. (Mimeographed.)

1927 Fragmentary evidence of the presence of early visitors to
the park region. Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 17-19.
Yellowstone Natl. Park. (Mimeographed.)

Recounts discovery of initials carved upon a tree, an earth-
roofed log cabin, and other evidences of early white visitants to
th$ Yellowstone region.

1927 History of Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone ranger

nat. man., pp. 8-10. Yellowstone Natl. Park.. (Mimeographed.)

41

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Hall, Ansel F. , and Roter, Harrietts H.

1927 Reynolds' Expedition, 1859-60. Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 20-21. Yellowstone Nat 1. Park. (Mimeographed. )

Hall, Ansel F,

1927 U.S. Geological Survey of Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, and Utah,
1871. Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 24-28. Yellow
stone Nat 1. Park. (Mimeographed.)

* Hallahan, D.F.

1914 [Yellowstone Park.] In: Tourists in the northwest, pp. 42-
86. Philadelphia.

* Hallock, C.

1882 Sketches of the Yellowstone country. Am, field, 17:73-74
(no. 5); 89-90 (no. 6); 105 (no. 7); 121 (no. 8); 137 (no. 9).

* Hamilton, J.M.

n.d. History of Fort Ellis, Montana Territory, Ms. in Yellow
stone Museum.
*

1931 P. W. Norris and the Yellowstone National Park. Ms. in
library of J. M. Hamilton, Bozeman, Montana.
P. W. Norris was one of the early superintendents of the

park.

Hamilton, William

1905 [in and around Yellowstone Park.] In his: Iftr sixty years

on the plains, pp. 51-69, 158-73. New York, Forest and

Stream pub. co.

Account of hunting and trapping experiences in the Yellow
stone region and fights with Blackfeet Indians.

Hanson, Joseph M.

1916 The conquest of the Missouri. Chicago, McClurg, 458 pp.,
illus., map, bibliog.

Lives of Captain Henry Marsh and other famous Indian
fighters, with particular reference to their exploits in the Yellow
stone region.

* Harader, J.A.

1917 Plow Gallatin Valley is becoming great summer playground.
Northwestern motorist , 2:26-27 (Aug.).

* Harriman-Browne , Alice

1909 Chaperoning Adrienne; a tale of the, Yellowstone National
Park. New York, 92 pp. , illus.

42

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Hastings, George T.

1935 A life-saving thistle. Nature mag., 26:152 (Sept.), Ulus.
The story of Truman C. Everts, who was lost for 37 days in
the Yellowstone region in 1870.

Hatfield, William F.

1902 • Geyserland and wonderland; a view and guide book of the

Yellowstone National Park. San Francisco, Hicks-Judd, 75

pp., illus.

Haupt , Herman, Jr.

1883 The Yellowstone National Park; a complete guide to and des
cription of the wondrous Yellowstone region of Wyoming and
Montana territories of the United States of America. New
York, J.M. Stoddart, 190 pp., illus., maps.

Hayden, Ferdinand V., joint author. See: Bradley, Frank H. , 1873.

Hayden, Ferdinand V.

1872 More about the Yellowstone. Scribner's, 3:388-96 (Feb.),

illus.

Narrative of an early exploration; description of the Grand
Canyon of the Yellowstone, Yellowstone Lake, and the principal geysers.

1872 On the Yellowstone Park. Am. jour, sci . and arts, 3d ser.,

3:294-97 (Ap.) , map.

Brief description of Yellowstone region and text of con
gressional bill creating the Yellowstone National Park.

1872 [Passage of lav: creating Yellowstone National Park.] U.S.
G-ecl. Surv. of Montana and portions of adjacent territories,
5th Ann. rept . , 1871:162-65.

Hayden , Ferdinand V. , and others .

1874 Le pare national des Etats-Unis. In: Le tour du monde

nouveau; journal des voyages (Edward Charton, ed.), pp. 289-

352, illus. Paris, Hachette.

Contains brief history of Yellowstone Park, descriptions
of scenery, topography, geology, and a discussion of the culture
and customs of the Indians. Profusely illustrated by drawings.

Hayden, Ferdinand V.

1876 Our great West, and the scenery of our natural parks. Am.

Geog. Soc., Jour., 6:[l96]-211.

An address delivered by Dr. Hayden before the American
Geographical Society, April 15, 1876. General description of the
Rocky Mount a-' n. regions, including Yellowstone, pp. 198-203.

43

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Hayden, Ferdinand V., and Moran, Thomas

1876 The Yellowstone National Park and mountain regions of
portions of Idaho, Nevada, Colorado, and Utah. Boston,
L. Prang and co., 48 pp., illus., maps.

Colored sketches by Mr. Moran, with descriptive notes by
Professor Hayden. Reprinted in Am. jour, of sci. and arts, 3d
ser., 13:229-30 (Mar., 1877).

1877 [Yellowstone.] In: The Pacific tourist; Williams' illus
trated trans -continental guide of travel from the Atlantic
to the Pacific Ocean. ... (Henry T. Williams, ed.), pp. 292-
309. New York, H. T. Williams pub. co.

1880 Recent explorations in the Yellowstone Park, "the wonder
land of America." In: The great west: its attractions and
resources, pp. 1-87, illns. Bloomington, 111., Charles R.
Brodix.

Hayes, James B.

1923 An amateur [photographer] in Yellowstone National Park.

Am. photography, 17:610-16 (Oct.), illus.

Account of a trip through the park, and advice to amateur
photographers on equipment needed and technique.

Haynes, F. Jay

1909 Haynes' souvenir album; Yellowstone Park. St. Paul, Minn.,
the author, 18 pp., illus., map.

Brief description and information for visitors, with a map
and photographs.

Haynes, Jack E.

1910 Haynes new guide; the complete handbook of Yellowstone
National Park. Yellowstone Tatl. Park and St. Paul, Minn.,
Haynes picture shops, inc., illus., maps.

Title varies: "Haynes official guide, Yellowstone National
Park..."; 1910 — : "Haynes guide; the complete handbook, Yellowstone
National Park..."; 1919 — : "Haynes new guide and motorist's com
plete road log of Yellowstone National Park..."; 1930 — : "Haynes
new guide; the complete handbook of Yellowstone National Park...";
Publishers: IT. J. Haynes, 19107—1919; Haynes, 1919—28; J. E.
Haynes, 1929 — ; Haynes picture shops, inc. (Information based on
Library of Congress catalogue cc,rd. ) This Guide is officially
approved by the National Park Service.

1925 Meeting the problem of informing tourists. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 2:1 (Oct. 24).

1928 Place names of Yellowstone National Park, Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 137-48. Yellowstone Natl. Park.
(Mimeographed. )

44

HISTORY", TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

1929 Yellowstone Park travel, 1872 to 1928, inclusive. Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 132-33, illus. Yellowstone
Natl. Park. (Mimeographed. )
Estimates of the yearly number of visitors to the park

from 1872 to 1893, and actual figures for the years from 1894 to

1928.

Hebard, Grace R. , and Brininstool, Earl A.

1922 [Descriptive notes on features of Yellowstone Park.] In
their: The Bozeman Trail, 1:32, 214, 227; 2:120, 212-15,
252. Cleveland, A, H. Clark co.

Hebard, Grace R.

1923 Yellowstone National Park. In her: The history and govern
ment of Wyoming, p. 223 6. San Francisco, Web or.

Brief outline of the history of Yellowstone Park.

* Hedges, Cornelius

1896 Art work of Montana. Chicago, 87 pp., illus.

1904 Journal of Judge Cornelius Hedges, a member of the Wash-
burn Expedition of 1870. Hist. Soc. of Mont., Contribs.,
5:370-94.

1932 [Descriptive notes.] In: Early history of Yellowstone

National Park and its relation to national park policies,
(Louis Cram-ton, comp,), pp. 97-107 (apps. G-J). U.S. Dept.
Int., Natl. Park Serv.
Reprinted from Helena (Montana) Daily Herald, Oct. 8, 15,

19, 24, 1870. Notes on Mt. Everts, the Great Falls, Hell-Broth

Springs, and Sulphur Mountain.

* Hedges, W.A.

1910 Cornelius Hedges. Hist. Soc. of Mont., Contribs., 7:181-96.

Henderson, C. Hanford

1899 Through the Yellowstone on foot. Outing, 34:[l6l]-67
(May).

* Henderson, G.L.

1886 1882 eruption of Excelsior Geyser. Livingston (Mont.)
daily enterprise, Nov. 20, 1886.

* 1887 Soaping geysers. Livingston (Mont.) daily enterprise,

Sept. 10, 1887.

* 1888 Hell's Half Acre (Excelsior Geyser) ' in active eruption.

Livingston (Mont.) daily enterprise, May 12, 1888.

45

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Henderson, G.L. , continued

* 1891 Yellowstone National Perk, past, present and future.

Washington, Gibson Bros., 16 pp.

* Henriksson, Fritz

1926 Med Sveriges Kronprinspar Genoma Amerika. P. A. Norstedt
and Soner.

Hering, R.

1873 Means of access to the Yellowstone National Park by rail
roads. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs. , 6th Ann. rept.,
1872 :"9 2-95.
Data on distances and elevations with regard to proposed

rail and wagon road systems into and over the park area.

* Hesse-Wart egg, Ernst von

1880 Nord-Amerika : Seine Stadte und Naturwunder, v.2. (In 3 vols.)

* Hill, Emma S.

1925 Wonders of the Yellowstone. Denver, Colo., 171 pp.

Hine, W.R.

1930 A plan for reorganizing the conservation work of the

Federal Government . Jour, of forestry, 28:1185-95 (Dec.).

Hirshberg, Julius

1888 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Von New York nach

San Francisco: Tagebuchb latter, pp. 74-111. Leipzig,

Verlag von Veit.

Extract from a diary kept by the author on a trip across
the continent. Describes natural wonders of the park.

[Hitchcock, Ethan A.]

1898 Region south of and adjoining Yellowstone National Park.

55th U.S. Cong., 3d sesa., Sen. doc. 39, 92 pp., illus.

maps (ser. no. 3728). Washington, Govt. print, off.

Detailed and comprehensive description of the region, sub
mitted upon request of the U. S. Senate by Secretary of Interior
Hitchcock, with specific recommendations concerning better pro
tection of game. Included are copies of recent reports by Lieu
tenant Lindsley and winter scouts.

Hitchler, Theresa, joint author. See: Dana, John C., and others,
1906.

* Hofer, Elwood

1887 Winter in Wonderland. Forest and stream, 38:no.l, pp. 222-
23; no. 2, pp. 246-47; no. 3, pp. 270-71; no. 4, pp. 244-95; no.
5, pp. 318-19, map.

46

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Hofer, Elwood

1888 Hunting with a camera [in Yellowstone]. Forest and stream,
30:370-71 (May 31).

1903 The President's park trip. Forest and stream, 60; 464

(June 13).

Notes on President Roosevelt's visit to Yellowstone in the
company of John Burroughs.

Holman, William S.

1886 [Yellowstone Park; report of investigation with a trans
cript of testimony taken.] 49th U.S. Cong., 1st sess.,
House rept. 1076, pp.xliii-lvii , 245-70. (ser. no. 2438).
Washington, Govt. print, off.

The House of Representatives committee investigated ex
penditures fo .- administration and roads, the condition of elk and
buffalo herds, and boundaries. The testimony includes a descrip
tion of the topography by Arnold Hague.

Holmes , Burton

1908 The Yellowstone National Park. In his: Travelogues, 6:5-
112, illus. New York, McClure.

* Holms, G-us

1916 Yellowstone Highway Association. Chicago, V/allace press.

' 1917 Cody, Wyoming, invites to the park's eastern gateway.
Northwestern motorist , 2:12-13 (Feb.).

Holtzheimer, Edward

1908 Down the Yellowstone forty years ago. Pac. mo., 19:72-

77 (Jan.).

Account of a voyage down the river, describing the country
traversed.

Hough, Emerson

1917 Greater Yellowstone. Sat. eve. post, 190:61, 63 (Dec.l).
Discusses a proposed extension of Yellowstone Park and the

effect of better roads upon tourist travel.

1918 Out-of-doors (greater Yellowstone) . Sat. eve. post, 191:
109-10, 113-14, 117 (Sept. 14).

Notes on recent legislation to protect game in the United
States. Contains particular reference to protection of elk in
Yellowstone I .rk.

1920 Maw's vacation. Sat. eve. post, 193:14-15, 63-66 (Oct.

16) , illus.

Description of Yellowstone. Also published in book form
by Haynes Picture Shops, St. Paul, Minn.

47

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Hough, Emerson, continued

1920a Pawning the heirlooms. Sat. eve. post, 193:12-13, 90, 95-

96, 98, 102 (Sept. 25), illus.

Brief notes on history of the Yellowstone Park and a plea

for its protection against commercial exploitation schemes.

[Hough, Emerson, and Rinehart , Mary Roberts]

1923 Yellowstone and Glacier Parks. Lit. dig., 77:77, 79 (June 2).

Quotes from Houghfs "Covered wagon" and Rinehart 's "Tenting
tonight." Notes on railroad service into Yellowstone. '

Howard, 0.0.

1877 Supplementary report ; non-treaty Nez Perce Campaign. Secy.

of War, Rept., 1877-78, 1:585-660, map.

Report of the general in command of Federal troops engaged
in the campaign against the Nez Perce tribe, 1877. Contains account
of the pursuit of the tribe through Yellowstone Park. Also the
reports of numerous subordinate officers.

1881 [Pursuing Chief Joseph and the Nez Perce tribe through Yel
lowstone Park.] In his: Nez Perce Joseph; a history of the
Nez Perce campaign of 1877, pp. 239-52. Boston, Lee and
Shepard.
Account of the famous retreat of the tribe while pursued by

Federal troops under the command of General Howard, the author.

* Hoyt, John W.

1879 Message of the Governor of Wyoming Territory. Cheyenne
(Wyo.), 6th Legislative Assembly, Nov. 4, 1879, 94 pp.

1881 Reconnaissance for a wagon road to the National Park. U.S.

Dept. Int., Ann. rept., 1881, 2:1074-77. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

Governor Hoyt stresses need for a new road to spare tourists
the long and expensive journey through Wyoming, Utah, Idaho, and
Montana now nec-essary to reach the park.

* Hubbard, Elbert, and Hubbard, Alice

1915 A little journey to the Yellowstone. East Aurora, N.Y. ,
theRoycrofters, 29 pp., illus.

* Hulme, Kathryn

1928 How's the road? San Francisco, privately printed, 111 pp.

Hyde, John, joint author. See: Schwatka, Frederick, 1886.

Irving, Washington

1836 Astoria; or anecdotes of an enterprise beyond the Rocky

48

Mountains. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea and Blanchard, 2

vols. , maps.

Contains accounts of early travels in the Yellowstone
region. Considerable material on the Crows, Nez Perce and other
tribes.

1849 [Relations with Indians of the Yellowstone region.] In '
his: Adventures of Captain Bonneville, 1:89-97, 116-27,
189-96. New York, Putnam.
Experiences of Captain Bonneville and his fur-trapping

company with the Nez Perce, Crow, Pend Oreille, and Flathead

Indians. Also contains historical material.

* Jackson, William H.

1871 Catalog of stereographic, 6x8, 8x10 photographs. Washing
ton, B.C., Cunningham and Mclntosh, 8 pp.

1873 Photographs of the Yellowstone National Park and views in
Montana and Wyoming Territories (U.S. Geol. Surv. of the
Terrs.) Washington, Govt. print, off., 75 pp., illua.
Contains 17 photographs of Yellowstone scenery, accompa
nied by descriptive and explanatory notes, Jackson was photogra
pher for the Hayden expeditions to Yellowstone.

Jackson, William H. , and Wood, Stanley

1894 The Rocky Mountains. Denver, H.H. Tammen, [38] pp., iliis.
Series of excellent, large-size scenic photographs by Mr.
Jackson, each with a descriptive note by Mr. Wood. Yellowstone,
Yosemite, Teton, Holy Cross, and Black Canyon of the G-unnison Na
tional Park Service areas are represented.

Jackson, William H. , and Driggs, Howard

1929 First photographing of the Yellowstone. In their: The

pioneer photographer, pp. 97 -122, illus. Yonkers-on-

Hudson, N.Y. , World Book co.

Account of the U. S. Geological Survey expedition to sur
vey the Yellowstone region in 1871, under Dr. F. V. Hayden. Wil
liam Jackson was official photographer of the party. Illustrated
by photographs made on the expedition.

James, George Wharton

1915 The Yellowstone National Park. In his: Our American won
derlands, pp. 203-13, illus. Chicago, McClurg.

Jepsen, G.L. , joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed. , 1932.

Jeffers, LeRoy

1922 Rambles in Yellowstone National Park. In his: The call

of the mountains, pp. 27-35, illus. New York, Dodd, Mead

and no.

49

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Joffe, Joseph

1929 Yellowstone boundary revision and new Grand Teton National
Park. Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 180-82. Yellow
stone Natl. Park. (Mimeographed.)

Notes on the provisions of two bills passed by the 70th U.
S. Congress.

1932 Presidential proclamation increases Yellowstone* s area.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:51 (Dec.).

1932a Stephen T. Mather plague dedicated, Yellowstone nat.
notes, 9:|_27]-28 (June- July) , illus.
A tribute to the founder of the National Park Service.

Johnson, Clifton

1910 May in the Yellowstone . In his: Highways and byways of
the Rocky Mountains, pp. 215-32, illus. New York, Mac-
mi llan.

1919 Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming. In his: What to see
in America, pp. 371-85, illus. New York, Macmillah.

* Joly, C.

1884 The Yellowstone National Park. (Translated from the

French.) Livingston (Hunt.) daily enterprise, May 22,1884.

Jones, E.N.

1930 The boauties of Yellowstone from Mount Washburn. Yellow
stone nat. notes, 7:64-65 (Sept.).

Jones, William A., and others

1875 Report upon the reconnaissance of northwestern Wyoming, in
cluding Yellowstone National Park, made in the summer of
1873. U.S. Army, Eiigr. dept., 331 pp., illus., maps, app.
Includes a general report of the reconnaissance, and sepa
rate geological, botanical, entomological, and astronomical reports
by members of the expedition (each entered under his own name in
this bibliography). Issued also, without appendix and with shorter
geological report, as House ex. doc. 285, 43d Cong., 1st soss. Fifty
maps.

Jordan, David Starr

1892 The story of a strange land. Pop. sci. mo., 40:447-58

(Feb. ) , illus.

Contains notes on early history of Yellowstone National
Park, the Hayden Expedition of 1870, and the Congressional Act
establishing the park.

1894 The Yellowstone Park. Around the world, 1:148-51 (Ju3y-Aug.)»

50

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

* Jordan, David Starr, and Gather, Katherine D.

1925 North America; high lights of geography, Yonkers-on-
Hudson, N.Y. , Vlo rid Book co., 358 pp., illus., maps.

Joyner, Newell F.

19£8 Notes from the Mammoth nature trail. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 5:3-4 (July), illus.

1929 History of some improvements in Yellowstone Park. Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 183-206, illus., maps. Yel
lowstone Nat 1. Park. (Mimeographed.)
Mainly concerned with buildings in the Park.

1929 More about the aerial sounds. Yellowstone nat. notes, 6:

6-7 (Dec.l).

Explanation of mysterious sounds heard at various times
around Yellowstone and Shoshone lakes.

Joyner, Newell F., and Haynes, J.E.

1929 Some memorable dates in Yellowstone history; [from 1803

to 1929], Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 139-61.

Yellowstone Nat 1. Park. (Mimeographed.)

Joyner, Newell F.

1931 His last autograph. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:51-53

(July).

Excerpts from the journal of a party in Yellowstone (1877)
relate the murder of a member of the party by Indians.

Judson, KatJierine B.

L912 [Notes on John Colter and J~im Bridger.] In her: Montana,
"the land of shining mountains," pp. 38-49, illus. Chi
cago, A.C. McClurg.

Colter and Bridger were among the first white men to see
id describe the Yellowstone region.

Kauffman, E.

1929 Great Yellowstone adventure* Am. forests, 35:457-61

(Aug.).

Relates experiences of early explorers, and events leading
to establishment of the Yellowstone National Park.

Keane, A.H. , ed.

1893 Yellowstone Park. In: The earth and its inhabitants, 3:
217-21, 353-59, illus. New York, Appleton.

Kelly, Luther S.

1926 "Yellowstone Kelly," the memoirs of Luther Kelly. New
Haven, Yale Univ. press, 268 pp., illus., map.

Author was a famous pioneer of the Yellowstone region.

51

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

* Kenny, R.D.

1926 From Geyserdom to Show-me-land ; a covered wagon excursion
in 1896. Clyde Park, 'Mont., 79 pp., illus.

King, Charles, and Brown, W.C.

1876 Map: Big Horn and Yellowstone Expedition, 1876. Denver,

Clason map co. (Office, Chief of Engrs. , U.S. Army).

War department map of the Missouri and Yellowstone Rivers,
showing inarch of expedition under Brig. (Jen. George Crook, Aug. 4-
Oct.24.

[King, Frank B.]

1897 Driving and fishing in Yellowstone Park. Overland mo.,
2d ser. , 29:594-603 (June), illus.

Kipling, Rudyard

1906 [Yellowstone Park.] In his: From sea to sea; letters of
travel, 2:136-89. New York, Charles Seribner's sons.
Descriptive material with comments on the personalities

and customs of the region.

1911 The Yellowstone. In: Wonders of nature as seen and de
scribed by famous writers (Esther Singleton, ed.), pp.[352]-
66. New York, P.F. Collier and son.

Account of a trip through Yellowstone in 1889.

* Kirchhoff , Theodore

1900 Ausflug nach den Yellowstone Park. Matter Erde, 3:12-14,
48-52, 70-72, 94-95, 126-29.

* Klussman, Henry

1922 A trip to the northwest by automobile: touring Yellowstone
Park and Glacier Park. Toledo, Toledo typesetting co.,
61 pp. , illus.

[Knight, O.K.], and others

1912 New roads in Yellowstone National Park. 62d U.S. Cong.,
2d sess., Sen. doc. 871, 27 pp. (ser. no. 6182). Washing
ton, Govt. print, off.

Information supplied by Captain C. H. Knight, U. S. Engi
neer Officer in charge of improvements in the park, in response
to a Senate resolution requesting an estimate of the cost of im
provement of park roads to permit automobile traffic.

Koch, F.J.

1915 Protecting national parks against poachers. Overland mo.,

2d ser., 65:117-22 (Feb.), illus.

Duties and activities of the soldiers formerly stationed
in Yellowstone during the winter season.

52

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Koch, P.

1884 Discovery of the Yellowstone National Park; a chapter of

early exploration in the Rocky Mountains. Mag. of Am.

hist., 11: [497] -512 (June).

Account of the discovery of the geyser basin by Joseph
Meek in 1830.

[Lamont, Daniel S.]

1895 Improving Yellowstone National Park. 53d U.S. Cong., 3d
sess. House ex. doc. 167, 2 pp. (ser. no. 3323). Washing
ton, (Jovt. print, off.

Estimate of appropriations needed to improve roads in Yel
lowstone Park, submitted by the Secretary of War.

Landsdowne , James D.

.927 Yellowstone National Park. Natl. Educ. Assn., Jour., 16:
145-47 (May) , illus.

Langdon, Palmer H.

1915 Through the Yellowstone in the saddle; a story of a delight
ful excursion in good company amid the magnificence of natu
ral scenic wonders. Forest and stream, 85:408-10 (July),
illus.

Langford, Nathaniel P.

1871 The wonders of the Yellowstone. ScribnerTs mo., 2:[l]-17

(May), [l!3]-28 (June), illus., maps.

Account of the exploration in 1870 of the upper valley of
the Yellowstone River, with descriptions of striking scenic fea
tures, and geological notes.

1873 Ascent of Mount Hayden. Scribner's mo., 6:129-57 (June).

1890 [Yellowstone Park.] In his: Vigilante days and ways, 2:
373-416. Boston, Cupples.
Account of a trip to the Park, with descriptive notes.

Langford, Nathaniel P. See: Folsom, David E. , 1894.

Langford, Nathaniel P.

1923 The discovery of Yellowstone Park, 1870. 2d ed. , St.

Paul, Haynes, 188 pp., illus., maps.

Revised from original edition of 1905, entitled, "Diary of
the Washburne Expedition to the Yellowstone and F:rehole rivers,
1870." The author was a member of the party.

LaNoue, Francis

1935 The ranger organization. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:1-2
(Mar.-Ap. ) .

53

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Larpenteur, Charles

1898 [A journey down the Green, Big Horn and Yellowstone Rivers
to the Missouri River.] In his: Forty years a fur trader
(Elliott Coues, ed.), pp. 52-50, map. New York, Francis P.
Harper.

* Laut , Agnes C .

1908 Conquest of the great northwest. New York, Outing pub. co,
2 v.'

1929 [Legends of South Pass, Yellowstone National Park.] In: The
overland trail, pp.H9-£6, 29. New York, Stokes.

* Leckler, H. Barnard

1884 A camping trip to the Yellowstone National Park. Am.
field, 2:41-42 (Jan.).

Lee, Willis T. , and others

1915 Guidebook of the western United States, Pt.B. The overland

route, with a side trip to Yellowstone Park. U.S. C-eol.

Surv., Bui. 612, 244 pp., illus. , maps.

Contains 25 maps, 49 plates, and 20 figures.

[Leeson, Michael A., ed.]

1885 [The Yellowstone region.] In: History of Montana, 1739-
1885, pp. 60-89, 113, 137, 339, 603-46, illus. Chicago,
Warner, Beers and co.

Accounts of early expeditions, Indian troubles, arid set
tlement in the region, with a section on the history, topography,
resources, and civil life of Gallatin County, Montana, which abuts
upon Yellowstone Park on the north.

Lenz, Frank G.

1893 Yellowstone Park. Outi ,g, "21:378-83 (Feb.), illus.

Lewis, Henry H.

1903 Managing a national park. Outlook, 74:^056-40 (Aug. 29).

History of the administration of Yellowstone. Notes on
rules and regulations.

Lindsley, Marguerite (Arnold). See Arnold, Marguerite L.

Lindsley, Marguerite

1928 Acoustic phenomena over Yellowstone Lake. Yellowstone

ranger nat. man., pp. 120-26. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

(Mimeographed. )

Contains several quoted accounts of mysterious "musical
noises" heard in the vicinity of the lake, which have not b&en
satisfactorily explained.

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

1928a List of distances from Yellowstone Park points. Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 134-36. Yellowstone Natl.
Park. (Mimeographed.)
Distances by automobile route between points in the park,

and from the park to population centers and other national parks

throughout the country.

1928b Water sheds of Yellowstone National Park and vicinity.
Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 115-19, illus. , maps.
Yellowstone Natl. Park. (Mimeographed.)
Description of the drainage system of the Yellowstone

National Park region.

* Lint on, Edwin

1892 Mount Sheridan and the Continental Divide. Acad. of Sci.
and Arts of Pittsburgh, Trans., 1892:1-27.

1893 Overhead sounds in the vicinity of Yellowstone Lake.
Sci., 22:244-46 (Nov. 3).

[Lin ton, Edwin]

1930 Overhead sounds of the Yellowstone Lake region. Sci.,
n.s., 71:97-99 (Jan. 24).

* Lockhart , Caroline

1923 The story of Jack Crandall, killed by Crow Indians on
creek which bears his name. Park County (Mont.) news,
Nov. 23, 1923.

Levering, T.S.

1929 The new world, or Cooke City mining district. U.S. G-eol.

Surv. , Bui. 811, 87 pp., illus., maps. Washington, Govt.

print, off.

Geological and topographical description of Park County,
Montana, and its mines.

Ludlow, William, and others

1876 Report of a reconnaissance from Carroll, Montana Terri
tory, on the upper Missouri, to the Yellowstone National
Park, and return, made in the summer of 1875. U.S.
Army, Engr. dept., 155 pp., illus., maps.
Contains a general report of the reconnaissance, embody
ing descriptive notes on Yellowstone Park, by William Ludlow, pp.
[9]-53; zoological report, containing a list of species observed
in the Yellowstone region, by George Bird Grinnell, pp.[63]-92;
geological report with Yellowstone material, by Edward S. Dana and
George Bird Grinnell, pp.[97]-137, illus.

55

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

* McFarland, A.J.

1923 Journeys here and there. Pop. educ., 40:280-81 (Jan.).

McFarland, J. Horace

1920 Exploiting the Yellowstone. Is it necessary — or merely
cheaper? Outlook, 126:255-57 (Oct. 6).

[McFarland, J. Horace]

1920 The Yellowstone Park question. Outlook, 125:578 (July 28).
Letter from the president of the American Civic Associa
tion, discussing the proposal to permit damming in Fall River Basin.

1921 National parks or irrigation reservoirs. Natl. munic.
rev., 10:77-78 (Feb.).

Proposed legislation would authorize flooding of parts of
Yellowstone Park by private commercial interests.

McGuire, J.A.

1911 Camping in the Yellowstone. Outdoor life, 27:479-86 (May).

* McLaury, H.F.

1929 Magic Yellowstone. Nab. repub. , 17:50 (June).

McRae, Thomas C.

1892 Report on investigation of administration of Yellowstone

National Park. 52d U.S. Cong., 1st sess., House rept.

1956, 318 pp. (July 20) (ser. no. 3051). Washington,

Govt. print, off.

The Secretary of the Interior was condemned for unjustly
rescinding leases which had been granted to S. W. Wakefield of the
Park Transportation Co. Report consists of a majority section
(295 pp.) and a minority (8 pp.), and gives also history of the
transportation and hotel companies up to 1892.

1893 Report on leases in Yellowstone National Park. 52d U.S.

Cong., 2d sess., House rept. 2380, 2 pp. (ser. no. 3141).

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Report on House bill 9597, to regulate granting and for
feiture of leases, and to punish crime in Yellowstone Park.

Marsh, Gerald E.

1928 Four aces and a queen. Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp.
92-98. Yellowstone Natl. Park. (Mimeographed.)
Transcript of a lecture on the varied scenic, geologic,

historical, and floral features of Yellowstone Park. (Prepared fbr

the use of ranger naturalists.)

Marshall, William I.

1881 An evening in wonderland. Natl. Educ. Assn., Proc., 1881:

56

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

132-43, map.

A general description of the topography and features of
Yellowstone Park, with historical notes on the pioneers, early ex
plorations, and establishment of the park.

* Mart ens on, Charles

1924 Auto capping through the west. Wallace's farmer, 49: '

1013-14 (July 25), illus.

Contains descriptive material on the features of Yellow
stone Park,

[Martonne, Emmanuel de]

1913 Le pare national du Yellowstone. Annales de geographic,

22:134-48, illus.

General description in French.

[Mather, Stephen T.]

1919 Connecting Yellowstone and Glacier. U.S. Dept. Int., Ann.
rept , , 1919, 1:974-75. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Included in Annual Report of the Director of the National

Park Service.

Mather, Stephen T.

1920 Camp P.oosevelt , Yellowstone Park. Park Serv. bul. no. 9,
4 pp. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.

General description and miscellaneous facts about the
camp.

1920 A crisis in national conservation. U.S, Dept. Int., Ann.

rept., 1920, 1:21-32. Washington Govt. print, off.

Discussion of the menace to Yellowstone Geyser Basin and
localities in other national parks menaced by various commercial
exploitation schema c.

1922 Some happenings in the parks: Yellowstone. Park Serv. bul.
no. 18, 4 pp. (June). U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park 3erv:»
Miscellaneous notes; climate, the mosquito problem, and

museum exhibits.

1924 An infrequent geyser. Park Serv. bul. no. 23:6 (Sept.),

Brief note on the ftonce-a-year" geyser of Yellowstone Park.

1926 Park wildlife protection. U.S. Dept. Int., Ann. rept.,
1925/26:13-15.' Washington, Govt. print, off.
Notes on methods and results of the program to preserve

game animals in Yellowstone National Park.

* Mathews, A.E.

1868 Pencil sketches of Montana. New York, the author.

57

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Matthews, Albert

1904 The word "park" in the United States. Colon. Soc. of

Mass., Trans., 8:373-99 (1902-04).

Contains considerable material on the early history of
Yellowstone Park.

Meiklejohn, G.D.

1900 Roads in the Yellowstone National Park. 56th U.S. Cong.,
1st sess. , Sen. doc. 226, 23 pp., illus., maps (ser.3858).

Mendelsohn, Isador W.

1925 Canyon Automobile Camp, Yellowstone National Park. Pub.

Health Serv. , Rept. 1019, 12 pp., illus. Washington,

Govt. print, off.

Reprinted pamphlet dealing with sanitation of the camp,

Mereness, A.G.

1930 Wonders of West enjoyed in Bureau tour. Bur. farmer

(Minn. Farm. Bur. sect.}, 5:13-15 (Aug.).

Account of a trip to Yellowstone Park.

Miles, Nelson A.

1896 [A trip to Yellowstone Park.] In his: Personal recollec
tions, pp. 294-95, 302-305, illus. Chicago and New York,
Werner*

Account of a visit in 1878 that was interrupted by an
Indian revolt, which General Miles and the troops under his com
mand suppressed.

Miller, George W.

1932 The ranger prepares for winter. Yellowstone nat. notes,

9:44-45 (Oct. -Nov.).

Contains notes on duties of Yellowstone rangers in the
winter season.

[Miller, Joaquin]

1888 Yellowstone Park. In: Picturesque California, the Rocky

Mountains, and the Pacific slope (John Muir, comp.), 2:

[421] -32, illus.

Account of a horseback ride through the park.

Mills, Enos A.

1912 The Rocky Mountain region. Country life in Am., 22:25-30,

46.

Contains descriptions or some features of Yellowstone and
Glacier national parks.

1917 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Your national parks,
pp.3-[64], 305, 315, 397-99,400, illus. New York,
Houghton, Mifflin.

58

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

* 1918 Yellowstone National Park. Pleasureland, 23:5-6 (Jan.).

Miner, Neil

1937 Yellowstone's mystery sounds. Yellowstone nat. notes,
14:24 (May- June).

Mitchell, S. Weir

1880 Through the Yellowstone Park to Fort Ouster. Lippin-

cottrs mag., 25:688-704 (June).

Description, and details of a trip in the company of 25
United States troopers.

Moran, Thomas, illus. See: Hayden, Ferdinand V. , 1876; also,
Murphy, Thomas D., 1912.

Morris, Mrs. James E.

1901 Yellowstone Park. In her: A Pacific Coast vacation, pp.
236-55, illus. New York, Abbey press.

Morris, L.S.

1929 Aerial sound over Grebe Lake. .Yellowstone nat. notes, 6:
2-4 (No v.l).

Morris, Robert C.

1897 [Bridger and Indian material.] Wyo. Hist. Soc., Colls.,
1, 352 pp. , illus*

Mueller, Oscar 0.

1924 Yellowstone map drawn in 1870, shows Cook and Folsom route
of 1869. Haynes bul. , Mar., 1924.

Muir, John

1885 The Yellowstone Park (Oct. 19). Saaf Francisco bulletin,
Oct. 27, 1885.

Muir, John, comp. See: [Miller, Joaquin] , 1888.

[Muir, John]

1898 The wild parks and forest reservations of the west.
Atlantic mo., 81:15-28 (Jan.).

Includes reference to Yellowstone National Park.

1898 The Yellowstone National Park. Atlantic mo., 81:509-22
Up.).

Muir, John

1901 The Yellowstone National Park. In his: Our national parks,
pp.[37]-75. New York, Houghton, Mifflin.

59

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Murphy, John

1879 Yellowstone Park. In his: Rambles in northwestern America,
pp. 209-22. London, Chapman and Hall.

Murphy, Thomas D.

1912 The Yellowstone. In his: Three wonderlands of the American
west; being the notes of a traveler, concerning the Yellow
stone Park, the Yosemite National Park, and the Grand Canyon
of the Colorado River, with a chapter on other wonders of
the great American west, pp. 1-58. Boston, Page, 180 pp.,
illus. , maps.

Several chapters are devoted to the fauna, flora, geology,
and topography. Sixteen reproductions in color from original paint
ings by Thomas Mb ran.

Nash, Arthur

1933 The artist paint pots. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:31
(July- Aug.) , illus.

A series of caldrons, springs, and pools with varied chemical
and vegetative coloration, in Gibbon Meadows.

National Park Service. See: United States. National Park Service.

Nealley, Edward B.

1872 A gold hunt on the Yellowstone. Lippincott's mag., 9:204-

12 (Feb.).

Record of fruitless search for gold in Yellowstone; notes
on Indians, animals, and the fur trade.

Neihardt , John G.

1927 On to the Yellowstone Land] Down from the Yellowstone. In

his: The riVer and I, pp. 137-99. New ad., New York, liac-

nillan.

Nelson, William H.

1934 Dame Nature's department store: Yellowstone National Park.
In his: Twelve wonders of the western world, pp. 7-11, illus.
San Francisco, Danner.

Norris, Philetus W.

1883 The Calumet of the Coteau, and other poetical legends of
the border. Also a glossary of Indian names, words, and
western provincialisms; together with a guide-book of the
Yellowstone National Park. Philadelphia, J.B. Lippincott
& co., 275 pp., illus., maps.
The author was superintendent of Yellowstone National Park

for five years.

60

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

North, Arthur W.

1911 Alone in the Yellowstone; riding in the path of pioneers,

before the season opens in the park. Sunset, 27:131-40

(Aug.), illus.

Norton, Harry

1874 Wonder-land, illustrated; or, Horseback rides through the

Yellowstone National Park. Virginia City, Mont., Norton,

132 pp., illus., map.

The first guide book of Yellowstone National Park.

Oberhansley, Frank

1936 An inspection trip to the Eagle Pass country. Yellowstone

nat. notes, 13:[l]-4 (Jan. -Feb.), illus.

An account of a ski trip to Eagle Pass, outside of the park
line; notes on the large and small animals of the region.

Ogston, Ted

1931 Ships that always go out. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:15

(Feb.).

Notes on the mirages peculiar to Lewis Lake, Yellowstone
Lake, Thumb Hot Springs, and Steamboat Point.

Olmsted, Frederick L.

1921 Fundamental objections to the Walsh Bill. Natl. munic.
rev., 10:270-71 (May).

The bill would have permitted private interests to dam
Yellowstone River three miles below Lake Yellowstone.

!

Osborne, Allan B,

1922 In the land of the canyon and geyser. Illus. world, 37;
719-21, 782 (July).

Owen, W.O.

1891 The first bicycle tour of the Yellowstone National Park.
Outing, 18:[l9l]-95 (June), illus.

Palliser, John

1853 [Hunting on the Yellowstone and the Missouri Rivers.] In

his: Solitary rambles and adventures of a hunter in the

prairies, pp. 217-63. London, Murray.

[Palmer, T.S.]

1925 Obituary of Harry Copeland Benson. Auk, 42:619-20 (Oct.).

Colonel Benson, an ornithologist, spent two years (1908-
10) in Yellowstone Park.

Parkinson, Edward S.

1894 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Wonderland; or twelve

61

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Parkinson, Edward S., continued

weeks in and out of the United States, pp. 223-55, illus.
Trenton, N.J., MacCrellish, Quigley.

Pastor, George B.

1915 Nature studies close by Yellowstone Park. Forest and
stream, 84:30-32 (Jan.), illus.

Patte, F.A.

1900 Our national playground. Land of sunshine, 13:201-10

(Aug.) , illus.

Establishment and development of Yellowstone National Park.

* Peabody, Henry G.

1928 The Yellowstone National Park. Pasadena, Calif.

* Peale, A.C.

1883 Bibliography of the Yellowstone National Park. U.S. Geol.
and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs, for the year 1878, pt.II:
427-32.

Pearson, T. Gilbert

1929 Riding the Yellowstone boundary. Bird lore, 31:373-76
( Sept. -Oct. }, illus.

Description of a trip made by the presidential commission
appointed to study the Yellowstone boundary question. Report of
public hearings held before the commission.

* Peck, J.K.

1885 The seven wonders of the new world. New York, Phillips,
Hunt, 320 pp. , illus.
Contains a section on the Yellowstone Park.

Peery, Trust en E.

1932 Some past and present conditions in Yellowstone Canyon.

Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:48-49 (Oct. -Nov.).

Information on past trail conditions drawn from U. S, Geo
logical Survey of the Territories, 1872 (Prof. F. H. Bradley 's
descent into the canyon, 1871).

Phillips, Charles

1927 [Norris Geyser Basin, Lower Geyser Basin, and Upper Geyser
Basin.] Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 123-47. Yellow
stone Natl. Park. (Mimeographed.)

Detailed descriptions of each of these basins on the fa
mous Loop Road of Yellowstone Park, and of their thermal phenomena.

1927 The Norris Road. Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 121-22.

62

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Yellowstone Natl. Park. (Mimeographed.)

Description of the now somewhat neglected road from Mammoth
Hot Springs to Old Faithful, which Philetus W. Norris, second super
intendent of the park, built between 1877-82.

[Phillips, W. Hallett]

1886 Letter from the acting Secretary of the Interior trans-"

mitt ing, in response to Senate resolution January 12, 1886,
report of W. H. Phillips on the Yellowstone Park. 49th
U.S. Cong., 1st. sess., Sen. ex. doc. 51, 29 pp. (ser. no.
2333). Washington, Govt. print, off.

Report of W. H. Phillips, who was appointed to examine in
to the condition of the park with reference to its protection,
reservation, and improvement, with special attention to leases,
concessions, and privileges granted.

Pickett, William D.

1908 The Yellowstone Park in early days. Forest and stream,

70:[168]-70 (Feb,l); 208-10 (Feb. 8).

Account of a visit to Yellowstone Park in 1878. Contains
descriptive material and notes on the Nez Perces* retreat through
the park in 1877.

Pierrepont, Edward

1884 Yellowstone Park. In his: Fifth avenue to Alaska, pp. 237-
311, map. New York, Putnam.

Plummer, Mary W. , joint author. See: Dana, John C. , and others,
1906.

Porter, R.P. , and others

1882 The Yellowstone National Park. In: The West, from the

census of 1880, pp. 425-29. Chicago.

Co-authors; H. Gannett and W. P. Jones.

Porter, T.C.

1899 [Yellowstone.] In his: Impressions of America, pp. 24-93.

London, C.A. Pearson, 'ltd.

Travel to Yellowstone, description of scenery, and notes on
animals and birds.

Powell, E.

1922 Spring drives into Yellowstone. Travel, 39:25-28, 38

(May).

Clearing the roads with rotary snow plows.

Quaife, M.M.

1926 Adventures on the Yellowstone. In his: Yellowstone Kelly,
pp. 84-97, illus. London, Humphrey Milford.

63

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

QpUaife, M.M. , continued

Account -of hunting, and experiences with Indians along the
Yellowstone River in 1870.

Quick, Herbert

1911 Yellowstone nights, Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill co., 345 pp.

Considerable descriptive and historical material is con
tained in a popularly written fiction account of travels in the
Yellowstone region by a party of tourists.

Q,uinn, Vernon

1923 [Yellowstone.] In his: Beautiful America, pp. 215-29. New
York, F.A. Stokes co.

Q,uivey, Add! son M.

1876 The Yellowstone Expedition of 1874. Hist. Soc. of Mont.,

Contrite, 1:268-84.

Account of an expedition, sponsored by citizens of Bozeinan,
Montana, to open a wagon routs to the head of navigation on the
Yellowstone Elver.

Raftery, John H,

1909 Historical and descriptive sketch of Yellowstone National

Pari:« 60th U.S. Cong., 2d sess., Sen. doc. 752, 23 pp.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

* [l91l] A miracle in hotel building; being a story of the build
ing of the new Canyon Hotel in Yellowstone Park. Yellow
stone Park hotel co., 15 pp.

Rainsford, W.S.

1887 Camping and hunting in the Shoshone. Scribner's, 11: [292]-
, 311 (Sept.) , illus.

Account of hunting and camping in and around Yellowstone
Park. Describes Yellowstone, Lewis, Shoshone, and Heart lakes, and
criticizes the Government. f s "cheese-paring" administration of the
park.

* Raymond, Rossiter W.

1872 Sketches of -western travel [Yellowstone Park], New north
west (Deer Ledge, Mont.), p. 4 (May 25); p. 4 (June 15).
Reprinced from Henry Ward Beecher's "Union."

1880 Wonders of the Yellowstone. In his: Camp and cabin, pp.
153-207. Ne-.7 York, Fords, Howard, andHulbert.

Reclus, Eli see

1898 The Yellowstone Park. In his: The earth and its inhabitants,

64

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

17:353-59, illus. New York, Appleton.
Geographical description.

Rees, John E.

1918 Idaho: chronology, nomenclature, bibliography. Chicago,

W.B. Conkey co. , 125 pp.

Contains some references to the Yellowstone region.

Reik, Henry 0.

[c!920] Yellowstone National Park. In his: A tour of America's
national parks, pp. 157-209, illus. New York, Dutton.

Remington, Frederic

1898 Policing the Yellowstone. In his: Pony tracks, pp. [ 174]-

92, illus. New York, Harper.

Describes duties of U. S. Army troopers in the early days.

* 1902 John Ermine of the Yellowstone. New York, Macmillan, 271
pp., illus.

Richardson, Alfred T,

1905 Something about the Yellowstone Park. Out west, 22:325-

31 (May).

Account of the expenditure of the $750,000, allotted by
Congress in 1901, for roads, bridges, hotels, and maintenance.

Richardson, James, ed.

1874 Wonders of the Yellowstone. New ed. , New York, Scribrier,

Armstrong and co. , 256 pp., illus., maps.

Chapters are drawn from official reports of Government
expeditions and magazine articles by F. V. Heyden, N. P. Langford,
and Truman Everts. Other editions in 1872, 1905, 1907.

Riley, William C.

1889 Grand tour guide to the Yellowstone National Park; a manual

for tourists. St. Paul, the authors, 135 pp., illus.,

maps.

Rinehart , Mary Roberts, joint author. See: Hough, Emerson, 1923.

Roberts, Edwards

1888 The American wonderland. Art. jour., 50:[l93]-98 (July);

[325]-28 (Nov.), illus.

General description of the park and its tourist accommoda
tions.

" Robertson, P.D.

1915 Vacationing in the land of geysers and friendly bears.
Countryside mag., 20:331-34 (June).

65

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK.

Rolfe, Mary A.

1928 [Yellowstone . ] In her: Our national parks, Bk. 2 pp., 243-

97. Chicago, New York, and Boston, Benjamin H. Sanborn

and co.

Rollins, Alice W.

1887 The three Tetons. Harper's new no. mag., 74:869-90 (May),

illus .

General description of familiar geologic and scenic features
of Yellowstone. (The party failed to reach the Tetons.)

[Roosevelt, Theodore]

1892 An elk-hunt at Two-Ocean Pass. Century illus. rao. mag.,
44:713-19 (Sept.).

Roosevelt , Theodore

1904 Wilderness reserves. Forestry and irrig, , 10:250-59

(June); 300-09 (July), illus.

Description of visits to Yellowstone, Yosemite, and the
Grand Canyon. Author* s idea of the purpose of national reserves.

Roter, Harriette H. , joint author. See: Hall, Ansel F., 1927.

Ruhle, George C.

1928 An ascent of Electric Peak. Yellowstone nat . notes, 5:6-

8 (Nov.l).

Describes the authorfs ascent, and contains quotations from
Dr. A. C. Peale's account of the first ascent made, 1872.

Russell, Carl P., camp.

[1933] A concise history of scientists and scientific investiga
tions in Yellowstone National Park, with a bibliography of
the results of research r.nd travel in the Park area. U.S.
Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 144 pp. (Mimeographed.)
The 20-page historical sketch by Dr. Russell, briefly out
lines the work of explorers, governmental agencies, and scientific
institutions from 1807 to 1931. The bibliography of Ye'llowstone
literature lists 1663 titles. Of these, 760 deal with history and
description, 425 with fauna, 218 with geology, 104 with Indians, 66
with management of wildlife, 47 ivith museums and educational work,
35 with flora, and 8 with subjects outside the main classifications.
The contents of this volume, with additions from many sources, were
revised and corrected to form the basis for the present bibliography.
—Editor.

Russell, Osborne

1921 [Yellowstone Park region.] In his: Journal of a trapper,

pp. [24]-34, 49-51, [99]-102. Boise, Idaho, Syms-York.

General description of the park and surrounding country.

66

HISTORY", TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Ryan, Thomas

1899 Letter from the Secretary of the Interior transmitting in
response to resolution of the Senate of December 6, 1898,
copy of a report from the Director of the Geological Sur
vey giving detailed information touching the region south
of and adjoining the Yellowstone National Park; and also
excerpts from the report of the Secretary of the Interior
for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1898, under the head
of the Yellowstone National Park relative to the region
in question, 55th U.S. Cong* , 3d sess.> Sen. doc. 39, 92
pp. (ser. no. 3728). Washington, Govt. print, off.

Sawyer, Edmund J.

1926 The Firehole River in winter. Yellowstone nat. notss,

3:6-7 (Mar*).

Descriptive notes on the geysers, flora, and fauna.

1926 The wonderland of today (Yellowstone National Park).

Montana, 1:309-12 (June) (Mont. Dept. Agric., Labor and

Induatry) .

Historical notes on John Colter, Jim Bridg^r, and other
pioneers, and description of scenic features and roads.

Schauffler, Robert H.

1913 Yellowstone Park, In: Romantic America, pp. 134-60, illus.
New York, Century.

Scherer, Norman W.

1932 Sixty years ago. Yellowstone nat, notes, 9:11-13 (Mar.).

Brief historical notes on the Washburn Expedition, crea
tion of th© national park, and a memorial to Stephen T. Mather.

[Schurz, Carl, and others]

1878 Letter from the Secretary of the Interior in regard to

the better protection of the National Park. 45th U.S.

Cong., 2d sess* , House ex. doc. 75 t 8 pp. (ser. no. 1809).

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Letter of Secretary Schurz, transmitting to the Committed
on Public Lands letters from P. W. Norris, superintendent of Yel
lowstone Park, and Dr. F, V. Hayden, and a resolution of the
American Association for the Advancement of Science, urging and
suggesting measures to preserve the beauties and resources of the
park.

Schwatka, Frederick, and Hyde, John

1886 Thro' wonderland with Lieut. Schwatka. [St. Paul, North
ern Pac. R.R.], 96 pp., illus*
Description of the many geological and scenic features of

Yellowstone Park, with notes on transportation facilities and

charges.

67

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Scott, E.H.

1925 Yellowstone. In his: t'saiarna, Yosemite, Yellowstone, pp.
77-107, illus. Chicago and New York, Scott , Fores-
man and co.

Scott, Hugh L.

1928 [A soldier in Yellowstone Park.] In his: Some memories of
a soldier, pp.28, 53-74, illus. New York,' Cei.tucry.

Scott, John W,

1926 The Yellowstone National Park. In: Naturalist's guide to
the Americas, pp. 532-33. Baltimore, Williams and WilkinS.

* Scott, T.E.

1916 Through the Yellowstone with Paul and Peggy. Published
in New York City.

* [Secor, Alson]

1931 Our Yellowstone tour. Successful farming, 29:40-41 (Oct.).
Brief account of a tour of the park.

Sedgwick, H.D. , Jr.

1903 On horseback through the Yellowstone. World* s work, 6:
[3569]-576 (June), illus.

Senn, Nicholas

1904 [Yellowstone.] In his: Our national recreation parks, pp.
17-92. Chicago, W.B. Conkey.

Descriptive matter, frith notes on fauna.

Sessions, Francis C.

1887 The Yellowstone Park. Mag. of west, hist., 6:433-45 (Sept.).

Shannon, William J. , and Shannon, Hannah M.

1936 Yellowstone Rational Park. In their: Camera trails through
the Southwest, pp. 7-14. Nutley, N.J., Moorfie.lderdShanrion.

Sheridan, Philip H. , and Sherman, William T.

1878 Reports of inspection made in the summer of 1877 by Generals
P. H. Sheridan and W. T. Sherman of country north Of the
Union Pacific R.R. Washington, G-ovt* print, off., 110 pp.
Describes the Yellowstone Valley, which was reconnoitred in

July, 1877.

* Sheridan, Philip H.

1882 Expedition through the Big Horn Mountains, Yellowstone

Park, etc., in 1881. Washington, G-ovt. print, off., 39pp.

68

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

* 1882a The national park and the northern Yellowstone region.

Am. field, 18:398 (Dec. 9).

* 1882b Report on exploration of parts of Wyoming, Idaho, and

Montana, in 1882. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Sherman, William T., joint author. See: Sheridan, Philip H., 1878,

Shields, G.O.

1883 [Hunting in and around the Yellowstone.] In his: Hunting
in the great West, pp. 50-65. Chicago, Donohue.

Shiras, George, III

1909 Silver-tip surprises. Forest and stream, 73:[48]-50

(July 10); [88]-91 (July 17), illus.

Experiences while camera-hunting on the Yellowstone River
just south of the park.

Sinclair, W.J., joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed.
Singleton, Esther, ed. See: Kipling, Rudyard, 1911.

Skinner, Curtis K.

1931 After fifty-four years. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:42-43

(June) .

New evidenc%e concerning General Howard's pursuit of the
Nez Perce.

* Smalley, Eugene V.

1883 History of the Northern Pacific Railroad. New York, G.P.
Putnam* s sons, 437 pp., illus.

Smith, Addison T., joint author. See: Van Dyke, Harry, 1927.

Smith, F. Dumont

1915 Yellowstone — the summit of America; a glimpse at the his
tory of America's famous national park, its surprising
natural phenomena, and their cause. Travel, 24:9-13
(Feb.), illus.

Smith, Hoke, and others

1896 [Yellowstone Park. Response to a resolution concerning

poaching in the park.] 54th U.S. Cong., 1st sess. , Sen.

doc. 170, vol.1, 7 pp. (ser.3353).

Senate communication to Secretary of the Interior re
garding poaching and inadequate policing of Yellowstone Park;
Secretary's reply, pointing out that a lack of funds prevents en
forcement of the laws in the park.

69

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Smith, Hugh M.

1926 tytysterious acoustic phenomena in Yellowstone National Park.
Sci., n.s., 63:586-87 (June 11).

Smith, Wallace

1924 On the trail in Yellowstone. New York City, Putnam, 105

pp., illus.

Eictionized account of travel in the Yellowstone region.
Contains notes on animals and fishing.

1924 Roughing it smoothly in the Yellowstone. Travel, 6:29-31
(June) .

Spears, R.S.

1916 On the Yellowstone trail. Outing, 68:425-35 (July), illus.
Observations of a motorcyclist on the Yellowstone trail be
tween Minneapolis and the park.

Spencer, R.R.

1930 An unusually mild recurring epidemic simulating food in
fection. Pub. health repts., 45, pt.IV:2867-77 (Nov. 21).
Discusses an epidemic resembling bacillary dysentery which

occurred in Yellowstone Park in July and August, 1929.

Stanfield, Robert N.

1926 Additions to the Absaroka and Gallatin national forests

and Yellowstone National Park. 69th U.S. Cong., 1st sess.,

Sen. rept.766, 3 pp. (ser. no. 8526). Washington, G-ovt.

print, off.

Report of Committee on Public Lands and Surveys, recommend
ing passage of a bill to extend the winter feeding grounds of elk
and other game animals of Yellowstone Park.

Stanley, D.S.

1917 The Yellowstone expedition of 1873. In his: Personal
memoirs of Major-general D.S. Stanley, U.S.A., pp. 238-71.
Cambridge, Mass., Harvard Univ. press.

Account of an Army expedition to survey the Yellowstone
region, and description of the topography.

Stanley, Edwin J.

1878 Rambles in wonderland: or, Up the Yellowstone and among the

geysers and other curiosities of the national park. New

York, Appleton, 179 pp., illus., map.

Contains also information on routes, distances, expenses,
and necessary equipment; intended for tourist use. Fourth edition
(1885, Nashville, Tenn., Southern Methodist pub. house, 218 pp.,
illus., map.) has subtitle: or, A trip through the great Yellow
stone National Park.

70

HISTORY, TRAVEL > AND DESCRIPTION

* Stennett, I.E.

1876 The north and west. Chicago, Chicago and North-Western
Ry. co., 20 pp., illus.

Contains a brief description of the Yellowstone geysers.

Stoddard, John L.

1911 Yellowstone National Park. In his: John L. Stoddard1 s
lectures, 10:[£07]-304. Chicago, Shuman, illus.

* Stone, Bess

1932 The first white woman to tour Yellowstone Park (1872);

brief account of the H.H. Stone party in the Park. Ms. ,
3 pp. , in Yellowstone museum.

Stone, Ralph W. , joint author. See: Lee, Willis T., 1915.

* Stonebrook, S.B.

1896 Off the beaten track; through the Big Bald, Big Horn,
Shoshone, arid the Rocky Mountains, to Yellowstone Na
tional Park. An accurate and concise description of the
entire trip from Ottumwa, Iowa, to Yellowstone National
Park and return. Burlington, Iowa, 61 pp.

Stork, Harvey E.

1928 The naturalist history of Yellowstone National Park.

Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone ranger nat. man.,
pp. 99-106, illus. Yellowstone Natl. Park. (Mimeographed^
Transcript of a ranger's lecture to tourists. Discusses

early exploration, and geological development of the region.

Story, H.L.

1882 Six weeks on the headwaters of the Yellowstone. Forest
and stream, 17:505 (Jan. 26).

Story, Isabelie F. , joint ed. See: Chittenden, Hiram M. , 1933.

* Stout, Tom, ed.

1921 Montana; its story and biography. A history of aboriginal
and territorial Montana and three decades of statehood,
under the editorial supervision of Tom Stout. Chicago
and Hew York, Am. Hist. Soc., 3v. , illus.

Strahorn, Carrie A.

1911 Early days in Yellowstone. In his: Fifteen thousand miles
by stage, pp. 254-86, illus. New York, Putnam.

Strahorn, Robert E.

1877 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: The handbook of Wy
oming, pp.[llO]-26, illus. Chicago, Knight and Leonard.

71

YELLOWSTONE RATIONAL PARK

Strahorn, Robert E., continued

1878 Yellowstone National Park. In his: To the Rockies and
beyond, pp. 133-41, illus. Omaha, Neb., Omaha Republican.

1879 The resources of Montana Territory and attractions of Yel
lowstone National Park. Helena, Mont., the Montana Legis
lature, 77 pp., illus.

* 1881 The enchanted land; or, An October ramble among the geysers,

hot springs, lakes, falls, and ca'nons of the Yellowstone
National Park. Omaha, Neb,

1881 Montana and Yellowstone Park. Kansas City, Ramsey, Millet
and Hudson, 191 pp., illus.

* Streator, M.L.

1888 "Nature's Wonderland." Montana register (Bozeman, Mont.),
June 2, 1880.

* Strong, W.E.

1876 The journal of General W.E. Strong: A trip to Yellowstone

National Park in July, August and September, 1875. Washing
ton, [Govt. print, off.?], 143 pp., illus.

Stuart , Granville

1925 Yellowstone expedition of 1864. In his: Forty years on the

frontier, 2:13-15, 99-144, illus. Cleveland, A.H. Clark co.

The expedition was made by the author's brother. These pages
contain also general description of the Yellowstone country.

Swan, K.D.

1922 Curious glaciers and craggy peaks. Am. forestry, 28:264-

65 (May) .

General description of district in Montana .near Yellowstone
Park. Reference to Grasshopper Glacier.

Sweet , Elnathan

1912 Horseback in Yellowstone Park. Country life, 22:88-90 (June 1

Tate, Arthur C.

1917 A hike through Yellowstone Park to the Tetons. Recreation,
57:19-20 (July).

72

HISTORY", TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Taylor, Charles M. , Jr.

[c!90l] [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Touring -Alaska and

the Yellowstone, pp. 283-388, illus. Philadelphia, George

W. Jacobs.

Taylor, Frank J. , joint author. See: Albright, Horace M. , 1928.

Taylor, Frank J.

1930 Speaking of vacations. Sunset mag., 64:9-12 (Ap.), illus.

[Teller, Henry M.]

1884 The U.S. Government defied. Forest and stream, 21:494

(Jan. 17).

Secretary of the Interior* s plea to Congress to enact
legislation tc curb commercial abuses in Yellowstone.

Thatcher, Moses

1884 Falls of the Yellowstone. The Contributor, 5:140-43 (Jan.).

Thayer, Wade W.

1898 Camp and cycle in Yellowstone Park. Outing, 32:17-24
(Ap.), illus.

Thayer, William M.

1888 Yellowstone National Park. In his: Marvels of the New
West, pp. 59-81, illus. Norwich, Conn., Henry Bill.

Thorn, W.T., joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , ed.

Thomas, T.H.

1888 Yellowstone Park, illustrated. Graphic, 38:157-61 (Aug.

11); 189-93, 204 (Aug. 18), illus.

General descriptions of Sepulchre Mt.. , Mt. Everts, Electric
Peak, Orange and Giant Geysers, Pulpit Terrace, Hell's Half Acre,
Liberty Cap, Periodical Lake, and Sulphur Mt., illustrated by the
author (R.C.A.) .

: Threasher, A.J.

1871 Route to the geysers. Helena (Mont.) daily herald, Dec.
7, 1671.

Thurman, Eleanor M.

1926 A coveted corner, the endangered meadows in Yellowstone

Park. Outlook, 144:433-35 (Dec.l), illus.

Report, by the extension secretary of the American Civic
Association, on the Bechler Meadows area which Idaho commercial
interests sought to obtain as a reservoir site.

: Tissandier, Albert
1896 Six mois aux fit at s Unis. 298 pp.

73

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Toll, Roger W.

1936 Wilderness and wildlife administration in Yellowstone.
Am. Planning and Civic Ann., 1936:65-72.

Tolson, Hillory A., comp.

1933 Laws relating to the National Park Service, the national

parks and monuments. Washington, U.S. Dept. Int., Natl.

Park Serv., 318 pp.

Includes Federal and state legislation affecting Yellow
stone National Park. A supplement covers legislation up to July
1, 1936.

Tomlinson, Everett T.

1906 Four boys in the Yellowstone. Boston, Lothrop, Lee, and

Shepard, 309 pp., illus.

Wonders of the Yellowstone; for juvenile readers.

Topping, E.S.

1883 Chronicles of the Yellowstone. St. Paul, Pioneer press,

245 pp., illus., map.

Comprehensive history of the country drained by the Yellow
stone River; material on explorers, trappers, traders, Indians, and
transcontinental trails.

* Trumbull, Walter

1870 Yellowstone papers (Washburn-Langford-Doane Expedition).
Rocky Mt.. , weekly gaz. (Helena, Mont.), Oct. 24, 1870, pp.
1-2; Oct. 31, 1870, pp. 1-2.

[Trumbull, W alter]

1871 The Washburn Yellowstone Expedition. Overland mo., 6:
431-37 (May); 489-96 (June).

Account of explorations from Helena, Montana, to Yellowstone,
in 1870, by a member of the party. Description of the geysers and
hot springs,

* Turrill, Gardner S.

1901 A tale of the Yeii0wstone; or, In a wagon through western
Wyoming and wonderland (1898). Jefferson, Iowa, 128 pp.,
illus.

Tschudy, Herbert B.

1920 National park — the Yellowstone. Brooklyn Mus. quart., 7:
105-15 (Oct. -Dec.), illus.

United States Congress

1892 Report of Committee on Public Lands on the administration
of the Yellowstone National Park. 52d U.S. Cong., 1st
sess., House rept.1956, 295 pp. (ser. no, 3051 ). Washing-

74

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

ton, G-ovt. print, off.

Report on the circumstances under which certain lands were
.eased in 1889 to the Yellowstone Park Association; general admin-
.stration of the park under the Secretary of the Interior.

United States. Congress

1899 Region south of and adjoining Yellowstone National Park.

55th U.S. Cong., 3d sess., Sen. doc. 39, 4:92, maps. (ser.

3728).

Brief descriptive notes from letters of Secretary of War
and Secretary of the Interior.

1931 Message from the President of the United States transmit
ting the final report of the Yellowstone Park Boundary
Commission on an inspection of areas involved in the pro
posed adjustment of the southeast, south, and southwest
boundaries of Yellowstone National Park, made pursuant to
Public Resolution no. 94, 70th Congress, 2d session. Ap
proved February 28, 1929. 70th U.S. Cong., 2d sess.,
House doc. 710, 184 pp., illus., maps. (ser. no. 9360).
Washington, G-ovt. print, off.

1937 Granting the consent of Congress to the states of Montana
and Wyoming to negotiate and enter into a compact or agree
ment for division of the waters of the Yellowstone River.
75th U.S. Cong., 1st sess., Sen. bill no. 534; publication
no. 237. (Approved by the President of the United States,
Aug. 2, 1937.) Washington, Govt. print, off.

United States. Department of the Interior

1907 Rules, regulations and instructions for the information
and guidance of officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army, and of the scouts doing duty in the Yellow
stone National Park. Compiled under the direction of the
Secretary of the interior. Washington, U.S. kept. Int.,
35 pp.

1916 The Yellowstone National Park. New York, Scribners, 24

pp. , illus. , map. .

A pamphlet reprinted from the Yellowstone section of the
National Parks Portfolio.

75

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

United States. Geographic Board

1930 Decisions: Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming. U.S. Dept.

Int., Geog. Bd., 26 pp. Washington Govt. print, off.

Authorized names of several hundred prominent features of
Yellowstone, with explanations of their historical significance.

United States. National Park Service

1930-31 Manual for railroad tourists. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park

Serv. (pagination varies. ). Washington, Govt. print, off.

Contains complete timetables, and other general informa
tion for tourists. Published yearly in folder form.

1921 Manual for motorists; Yellowstone National Park, season of
1921. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv., 12 pp., map.
Washington, Govt. print, off.
Contains, besides regulations governing automobile travel,

considerable information on accommodations, rules for camping,

fishing, and general conduct. There are later editions; e.g., that

of 1923, with 18 pages.

1930 Mammoth Springs to No rris Geyser Basin. Roadside notes,
no.l (Oct.). Washington, B.C. (for sale at Yellowstone
museums, 10. cents) .
A log for autoists covering points of interest between

Mammoth and Norris.

1933 Trailside notes 'for the motorist and hiker. No.l: Mammoth
to Old Faithful, Yellowstone National Park. U.S. Dept.
Int., Natl. Park Serv., 35 pp. Washington, Govt. print.
off.

1938 Yellowstone National Park, 'Wyoming. U.S. Dept. Int., Nat!

Park Serv., 37 pp., illus., map. bibliog. Washington,

Govt. print, off.

Compendium of information for the general public. One of
the descriptive pamphlets on individual parks and monuments pub
lished from 1916-19 as a "General Information" series; from 1920-
27, as a "Rules and Regulations" series; from 1928-33, as "Circu
lars;" and from 1934 to date, without a series title.

United States. War department — Army

1887 Annual reports upon construction and improvement of roads

and bridges in the Yellowstone National Park, and other

reports... U.S. War Dept., Chief of Engineers, Ann. repts,

Washington, Govt. print, off.

The Yellowstone reports are appendices to the report of the
Chief of Engineers, and were submitted by Capt. Hiram Chittenden
and others.

76

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

United States. War department — [Army?]

1914 Cemetery record [1888-1914], Fort Yellowstone, Wyoming.
Ms. in Yellowstone Museum.

Van Blarcom, W.D.

1897 The Yellowstone National Park. Natl. mag., 6:541-50
(Sept.).

Van Demark, Harry

1931 The pathfinder of the Yellowstone. Am. forests, 37:387-

89 (July), illus.

Biographical sketch of Colter, discoverer of the Yellow
stone in 1807, a record of other early visitors, and brief account
of the establishment of the park.

Van de Water, Frederic F.

1927 Nine month's rest. Sat. eve. post, 200:16-17, 80, 83,

85-86 (Nov. 12), illus.

Recounts duties of Yellowstone Park rangers in winter;
describes winter conditions and ski trips in the park.

1927 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: The family flivers
to Frisco, pp. 193-213. New York, Appleton.

Vandiveer, Clarence A.

1929 [John Colter and the Yellowstone region.] In his: The fur
trade and early western exploration, p. 157. Cleveland,
Arthur H. Clark co.

Van Dyke, Harry, and Smith, Addis on T.

1927 Yellowstone Park and the nation. Outlook, 145:77-80

(Jan. 19), illus.

Argur.ent in favor of the proposal to permit a reservoir in
Bechler Meadows, by Mr. Smith; argument against it, by Mr. Van Dyke.

Vaughn, Robert

1900 The Nez Perce War. In his: Then and now; or, Thirty-six
years in the Rockies, pp. 345-67. Minneapolis, Tribune,
Account of the war of 1877, during which the Nez Perce
tribe made its famous flight from Federal soldiers across Yellow
stone Park. Pages 422-46 contain a general description of the
park.

Vernon, Paul E.

1930 Yellowstone and Zion national parks and Bryce Canyon. In
his: Coast to coast by motor, pp. 11-31, illus. New York,
William Edwin Rudge.

77

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Vest, G.G.

1889 The Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 32:171 (Mar. 21).
Projected expenditure of a $50,000 congressional appropria
tion for roads.

Victor, Frances F.

1870 The river of the West. Hartford, Columbian book co., 602

pp. , illus.

Adventures of Joseph Meek; travels and adventures of trap
pers and explorers in the region of present Yellowstone and Grand
Teton national parks; Meek's discovery of the Yellowstone gej^sers
in 1830.

Villard, Oswald G.

1926 A park, a man, and the rest of us. Survey, 55:542-44

(Feb.) , map.

Disadvantages of military administration of Yellowstone
Park compared with civil management under Stephen T. Mather.

Vinton, Stallo

1926 John Colter, discoverer of Yellowstone Park. New York,

Eberstadt, 114 pp.

Account of Colter's exploration of Yellowstone in 1807 and
of his life as a hunter, trapper, and member of the Lewis and C]
Expedition.

Voth, Hazel H. , and others

1937 A general index to Yellowstone Nature Notes, 1920-1936.
Berkeley, Calif. U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 63 pp.
Also in "Index to 'Nature Notes' of national parks, 1920^

1936," Berkeley, Calif., U. S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv., 1937-
1938.

1938 Yellowstone National park: "in.: Guide to national, parks
and monuments west of the Mississippi River, pp. 98-100.
Berkeley, Calif., U.S. Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv.
Specifies location, area, and date of establishment. Lists

and describes briefly the principal features. Gives historical
data.

Wade, Otis

1929 Yancey's. Yellowstone nat. notes, 6:5-6 (Nov.l).

Log buildings near Tower Falls are reminiscent of pioneer
days when Yancey'.s Tavern flourished.

* Walker, Joseph C.

1905 T.C. Everts* marvelous escape after 37 days peril. Ms.,
3 pp.

78

HISTORY", TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Mostly concerned with story of how Baronett came to take
irt in search for Everts.

Walsh,. T.J.

1920 Are special interests trying to exploit the Yellowstone

Park? Outlook, 126:68 (Sept. 8).

Letter from Senator Walsh defending proposed use of Yellow
stone waters for irrigation.

Warren, Herbert 0.

1935 Snow sports in California [and the northwest]. Country

life, 67:25-26, 66-67, illus.

Foreign experts find excellent skiing, sledding, and skating,
in Yellowstone, Grand Teton, Lassen, Sequoia, and Yosemite parks.

* Warren, F.K. , ed.

1892 California illustrated, including a trip through Yellow
stone Park. Boston, De Wolfe, Fiske and co., 142 pp.,
illus.

['Washburne, H.D.]

1872 LThe Yellowstone expedition, 1870.] In: Statistics of

mines and mining in the states and territories west of the
Rocky Mountains (R.w. Raymond, comp.), pp. 215-16. Washing
ton, Govt. print, off.
Account of the expedition by one of its leaders. Good

description or the scenery and geological features. Reprinted

from the Helena Herald.

* Weaver, David B.

1910 Early days in Emigrant Gulch. Hist. Soc. of Mont., Centres.
7:73-96.

Weikert , Andrew J.

1900 The Nez Perce raid. Hist. 3oc. -Mont., Cont ribs., 3:153-74.

Journal of a tour of Yellowstone National Park in August
and September, 1877.

' Wendt , Edmund C .

1883 Random notes of a trip, including a few words about the
Yellowstone National Park. Medical record, Oct. 20, 27;
Nov. 3, 17; Dec. 8, 1883.

Reprinted as a booklet by Trows print, and book binding co.,
New York, 1883, 34 pp.

15 Wheeler, Olin D.

1893 Six thousand miles through Wonderland. Chicago, Northern
Pac. R.R. , 103 pp.

79

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Wheeler, Olin D., continued

* 1894 Indian land and Wonderland. Chicago, Northern Pac.R.R,,

108 pp. , illus.

* 1895- Sketches of Wonderland. Chicago, Northern Pac. R.R. ,
1906 Published annually.

* 1901 Yellowstone National Park. St. Paul, W.C. Riley, 103 pp.,

illus.

* 1915 Nathaniel Pitt Langford. Minn. Hist. Soc., Colls., 15:

631-68 (May) , illus.

1917 Where the sunsets of all yesterdays are found. St. Nicho
las, 44:866-74 (Aug.), illus.

* Wheeler, William F.

1896 Baiter Washington De Lacy; a brief biography. Hist. Soc.
Mont . , ContrJJos.,2 : 241-51 , port . .

Wiley, William H. , and Wiley, Sarah K.

1893 The Yosemite, Alaska, and the Yellowstone. London and

New York, John Wiley and Sons, 230 pp., illus.

Record of a pleasure trip. Reprinted with 157 illustra
tions from Engineering (London).

* Willius, Oscar

1927 Haynes of Yellowstone. Minn, alumni weekly, Mar. 5, 1927.

[Willson, Seelye A.]

1891 The Yellowstone expedition of '1863; a chapter of Montana

history. Mag. of west, hist ., 13:448-53 (Feb.); 574-79

(Mar.); 688-92 (Ap.).

Account of expedition to discover gold and locate town
sites. Relates story of encounter with armed Crow Indians.

Wilson, Neill G.

1927 The Yellowstone outing of 1926. Sierra Club, Bui. , 12:

349-55, illus.

Account of an annual trip by Sierra Club members.

Wingate, George W.

1886 Through the Yellowstone Park on- horseback. New York, 0.

Judd co., 250 pp., illus., map.

General description and information for use of travelers
in the park.

80

HISTORY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Winser, Henry J.

1883 The Yellowstone National Park; a manual for tourists....
New York, G.P. Putnam's Sons, 96 pp., illus., maps.

*Wittich Brothers

1889 [Yellowstone] National Park guide. Livingstone, Montana,
4 pp.

Wood, Stanley, joint author. See: Jackson, William H. , 1894.

Wood, Stanley

1908 The Yellowstone Park, Montana. In his: Over the range to
the Golden Gate, pp. 307-08. Chicago, Donnelley.

Woodring, Sam T.

1927 Skiing f rom Mammoth Hot Springs to Ashton, Idaho. Yellow
stone nat. notes, 4:2-3 (Feb.).

Worswick, F.H.

1899 The Yellowstone Park. Manchester (England) Geog. Soc.,

Jour., 15:38-55 (Jan. -Mar.), illus.

An English doctor's account of a visit to Yellowstone Park.
Description of the outstanding scenic and geological features, with
notes on flora, fauna, and history.

Yard, Robert S.

1917 [Yellowstone.] In his: The top of the continent, pp. 63-86,
illus. New York, Scribner's.

^1917 Yellowstone and Glacier. Northwestern motorist , 2:13-22
(May) .

1919 Yellowstone; a volcanic interlude. In his: The book of
national parks, 202-28, illus. New York, Scribner's.

1922 The people and the national parks. Survey, 48:[546]-53,

583 ( Aug . 1 ) ( "Graphi c" number ) , i 11 us .

Discusses Yellowstone Park as the model upon which later
national parks were established and developed. Comments on the
game preserve, educational work, and camping facilities in Yel
lowstone Park.

1922 What do you know about Yellowstone? Outing, 80:51-56
(May), illus.

1928 [Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Our federal lands,
p. 232. New York, Charles Scribner's sons.
General description.

81

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Yard, Robert S., continued

1931 Yellowstone National Park. In his: The national parks
portfolio* pp. 5-28, illus. 6th ed., U.S. Dept. Int.,
Natl. Park Serv. Washington, Govt. print, off.
General description illustrated by 35 photographs of
scenery, animals, and geological features. Revised and edited by
Isabella F. Story. These pages from the Portfolio were published
also in 1916 as a pamphlet entitled "Yellowstone National Park."

1934 Yellowstone National Park. In: Picturesque America (J.F.
Kane, ed.), pp. 131-41, illus,, map. Rev. ed. , New York,
Union lib, assn.
Good descriptive material.

1936 The Yellowstone National Park. In his: Glimpses of our
National parks, pp. 14-20, illus. Rev. ed,, Washington,
Govt. print, off.
This edition revised and edited tty Isabelle F, Story,

Previous editions appeared in 1920 and 1934.

Yeager, Dorr G.

1927 Four-mile nature-study hike at Mammoth Hot Springs.

Yellowstone ranger nat. man,, pp. 116-20. Yellowstone

Natl. Park. (Mimeographed. )

Transcript of a ranger1 s running comment and explanation
of natural features delivered while escorting a tourist party,

1929 The history of Cooke, Montana. Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 134-38, illus. Yellowstone Natl, Park. (Mimeo
graphed . )

Origin, growth, and decay of the mining town near the
northeast corner of the park.

1930 Again, those "mysterious sounds." Yellowstone nat. notes,
54-55 (Aug.).

Weird noises are heard around various lakes in the park.

1934 Bob Flame, ranger. New York, Sears, 295 pp., illus.

A narrative, based on a theoretical park ranger's duties
and experiences, for juvenile readers. The author was formerly
Park Naturalist of Yellowstone.

* * * *

* * *
*

82

INDIANS

Anonymous

1889 Indian marauders. Forest and stream, 32: [209] (Ap.4).

Destruction of big game and fire hazards created by Shoshones
and Bannocks within Yellowstone National Park.

1889a Indians and the National Park. Forest and stream, 32:296
(May 2).
A letter protesting destruction of game near the park.

1935 Note on Indian occupancy. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12: [21]

(May- June) .

Relics of Crow, Bannock, Blackf eet , Lamhis , and Shoshone
hunting parties in the Yellowstone region.

Allen, William A.

1903 Adventures with Indians and game. Chicago, A. W. Bowen,

302 pp. , illus.

Experiences in the Little Horn and the Big Horn Mountains
of Wyoming and Montana.

1913 The Sheep-eaters. New York, Shakespeare press, 78 pp., il
lus.

Account of the culture of a once prosperous tribe of Sho
shone stock, now extinct.

Arnold, R. Ross

1932 Joseph's retreat. In: Indian wars in Idaho, pp.[13l]-47, il
lus. , Cal dwell , Ida. The Caxton printers.
Brief reference to Yellowstone is made on pp. 133, 140.

Barrett, S.A.

1921 Collecting among the Blackf oot Indians. Milwaukee Pub. Mus.,

Yearbook, 1:22-28.

Information on the type of buffalo drives once common in the
Valley of the Yellowstone, just north of the park.

Big Man (Chief Max)

1932 The story of a certain buffalo hunt. Yellowstone nat. notes,
9:45-46, illus.

Brackett , William S.

1893 Indian remains on the Upper Yellowstone. Smithsn. Instn. ,
Ann. rept., 1892:574-81, illus.

83

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Brady, Cyrus T.

1909 The epic of the Nez Perces. In: Northwestern fights and

fighters, pp. 3-43, illus., map. New York, Double day, Page,
The pursuit of Chief Joseph and his tribe by troops under

command of General Howard in 1877, giving Captain Farrow's account

of the march across the Yellowstone country.

Brown, Barnum

193£ The buff alo drive. Nat. hist., 32:L?5]-82 (Jan. -Feb.), il
lus.
A study of a locality north of Yellowstone where Indian

buffalo drives were formerly held.

Buck, Henry

1922 The story of the Nez Perce Indian campaign during the summer

of 1877, as told by Henry Buck, a citizen who participated

in chase with General 0. 0. Howard. Typescript, 101 pp.,

illus .

An appendix (Oat. 25, 1925) tells of a trip through the Yel
lowstone Park in 1921, over the route followed in 1877.

*Butler, C. B.
1892 Red Cloud, the solitary Sioux. Boston, 327 pp., illus.

Catlin, George

1876 Mouth of Yellowstone, Up;-er Missouri. In his: North Ameri
can Indians, 1:14-65, illus. London, Chatto and Windus .
The 1841 edition of this ethnologic classic was titled:

"Illustrations of the manners, customs and condition of the North

American Indians." (New York) .

Chittenden, Hiram M.

1933 [Indians in the park.] In his: Yellowstone National Park,

pp. 6-12, 117-24, illus. New ed. , Stanford Univ. (Calif.)

press .

Revised from previous editions of 1895, 1905, 1915, 1920,
and 1927, by Eleanor Chittenden Cress and Isabelle F. Story.

Cress, Eleanor Chittenden, ed. See: Chittenden, Hi rain M. , 1933.

Crowe, G. C.

1935 A veteran of 1877. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:42 (July-
Aug.).

DeSmet, Pierre J.

1843 Indian tribes of the Rocky Mountains. Philadelphia,

Fithian, 252 pp., illus.

Habits and customs of these tribes, amongst whom Father De

84

INDIANS

smet spent raaii:r years. This material is reprinted in R. G.
Thwaite's "Early western travels", Vol. 27: [I3l]-411, illus.
(Cleveland, Clark).

Dunraven, Windhen T. W.-Q, 4th Earl of

1925 [Indians of Yellowstone region.] In his: Hunting in the

Yellowstone, pp. 80-129. New York, Macmillan.

Originally published (1876) under the title, "The Great
Divide: travels in the Upper Yellowstone in summer of 1874."

Fisher, Don C.

1931 The Nez Perce War. Univ. Idaho, typescript, 129 pp.

A dissertation presented, in partial fulfillment of the re
quirements for the Master's degree.

*Fitzgerald, La Verne H.

1933 Black Feather. Fables of the Sheepeater Indians. Caldwell,
Idaho. The Caxton printers, 196 pp.

Hodge, Frederick Webb

1907-10 Handbook of American Indians. Washington, Bur. of Am.

Ethnol., Bui. 30, 2vols.

A valuable feature of this classic is its list of variant
spellings of tribal names.

*Howard, Genera 1 0.0.

1881 Nez Perce Joseph. Boston, Lee and Shepard.
*

1907 My life and experiences among hostile Indians. Hartford,
Conn., 570 pp., illus.

Hoyt, E. A.

1877 The Nez Perce War. U. S. Dept . Int., Ann. rept., (Rapt, of

Commissioner of Indian Affairs ), 1876/77:405-09.

The war in which the tribe made its famous flight across
the Yellowstone Park.

Irving , Washington

1836 Astoria or anecdotes of an enterprise beyond the Rocky

Mountains. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea and Blanchard, 2v. ,

maps.

Considerable material on the Crow, Nez Perce, and other In
dian tribes of the Yellowstone region.

1849 [Relations with Indians of the Yellowstone region.] In his:
Adventures of Captain Bonnevllle , v. I: 89-97, 116-27, 189-96.
New York, Putman.
Experiences of Bonneville and his trappers with the Nez Perce,

85

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Crow, Fend Oreille, and Flathead Indians.

*Jackson, William Henry
1877 Descriptive catalog of photographs of North American Indians,

Washington, Govt. print, off., 124 pp.

Jackson's photographs, many of them made during his explora
tions with the old U. S. Geological Survey parties, are among the
most treasured of the pictorial records of the pioneer West.

Joseph, Chj.ef of the Nez Perce

1879 An Indian's view of Indian affairs. No. Am. rev., 128:412-

33 (Ap.).

The Nez Perce rebellion of 1877 and causes.

Kearns , William E.

1935 A Nez Perce chief [White Hawk] revisits Yellowstone. Yel
lowstone nat. notes, 12141 (July-Aug.).

1935a The Nez Perce War. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:24-30 (May-
June), illus., map, bibliog.

*Larocque , Francois A.

1910 Journal of Larocque from the Assiniboine to ihe Yellowstone,
1805. Ottawa, Canada, Govt. print, bur., 82 pp.

Laut, Agnes C.

1926 Chief Joseph. In: The blazed trail of the old frontier, pp.

125-55, illus. New York, McBride.

Account of the flight of the Nez Perce tribe after its re
volt in 1877.

Linderman, Frank B.

1930 American; the life story of a great Indian. New York, John

Day, 313 pp. , illus.

Biography of a Crow chief, Aleek-Chea-ahoosh (Plenty Coups),
who fought in the famous battle of the Little Big Horn.

Lowie, Robert H.

1911 The Crow Indians of Montana. Nat. hist., 11:179-81 (May),
illus .

Notes by a distinguished anthropologist on Indians of a re
gion north of Yellowstone.

1912 Social life of the Crow Indians. Am. Mus. of Nat. Hist.,
Anthrop. paps., vol. 9, pt.II, 247 pp.

Study of Indians of a region north of the park.

1915 The Crow Indian sun dance. Nat. hist., 15:23-25 (Jan.),
illus .

86

INDIANS

*

1917 Notes on the social organization and customs of the Mandan,

Hidatsa, and Crow Indians. Am. Mus. of Nat. Hist., Anthrop.

paps., vol. 21, pt.I, pp. '74-82.
*

1919 The Tobacco Society of the Crow Indians. Am. Mus. of Nat.

Hist., Anthrop. paps., vol.21, pt . II, pp. 101-200.
*

1922 Crow Indian art. Am. Mus. of Nat. Hist., Anthrop. paps.,

vol. 21, pt. IV, pp. 271-322, illus.
*

1922a The material culture .of the Crow Indians. Am. Mus. of Nat.
Hist., Anthrop. paps., vol. 21, pt. Ill, pp. 201-70, illus.

c!935 The Crow Indians. New York, Farrar and Rinehart , 334 pp.,
illus .
Their organization, customs, and morals.

McBeth, Kate C.

1908 The Nez Perces since Lewis and Clark. New York and Chicago,
F. E. Revell, 272 pp.

McLaughlin, James

1910 The masterly retreat of Joseph and his Nez Perces. In: My

friend the Indian, pp. 344-71. Boston and New York, Hough-
ton Mii'flin.

Manning , Samuel

(.1877?] American pictures drawn with pen and pencil. London, Re
ligious Tract Soc., 224 pp., illus.
Contains list of Indian names of mountains and waterfalls

in Yellowstone and Yosemite regions, with English translations.

Martindale, Phillip

1927 The old wickiups of the Gallatin. Yellowstone nat. notes,

4:8 (Feb.).

Description of some conical, thatched Indian shelters near
the G-allatin Ranger Station in the park.

Mills , Harlow B.

1935 The Bannocks in Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone nat.

notes, 12:22-23 ( May- June ), illus.

Evidence of the occupancy of the park by Bannocl: and Sheep-
eater Indians.

Norris , Philetus W.

1880 Aborigines of the park. In: Ann. rept. of the supt. of the
Yellowstone National Park to the Secy, of the Interior , and

87

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Norris, Phi let us W. (Cont.)

incorporated in his annual report for 1830, vol.11, pp.

605-06.

Indicating the low form of culture prevailing among the
band of about 400 "Sheepeaters" who once inhabited the area.

1884 The calumet of the Coteau, and other poetical legends of
the border. Also, a glossary of Indian names, words, and
western provincialisms . Together with a guidebook of the
Yellowstone National Park. Philadelphia, J. B. Lippin-
cott , illus., maps, 275 pp.
The author was superintendent of the park for five years.

*01den, Sarah E.
1923 Shoshone folk lore. Milwaukee, 97 pp.

Phillips, Charles

1925 Chief Joseph's gun. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2:[l]-2
(Sept. 18).

1927 Chief Joseph and the Nez Perce War. In: Yellowstone ranger
nat. man., pp. 39-47. Yellowstone Natl. Park, (Mimeo
graphed) .
Excellent account of the revolt and the tribe's retreat.

1927a The Indians of the Yellowstone country. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 32-39. Yellowstone Natl. Park*

(Mimeographed) .

Discusses in detail the several tribes whose history is
associated with that of the park.

*Remington, Frederic

1902 John Ermine of the Yellowstone. New York, (pub. unknown),
271 pp.

Romeyn, Henry

1896 The capture of Chief Joseph and the Nez Perce Indians.
Hist . Soc . of Mont . , Contrs . , 2 : 283-91 .

*Russell, Carl P.
1931 A summary of relationships of certain Indian tribes to

Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone Museum, typescript.
Indian exhibits and labels in the Mammoth Museum are based
on this paper.

Spinden, Herbert J.

1908 The Nez Perce Indians. Am. Anthrop. Assn., Memoirs, vol. 2,
pt. III.

88

INDIANS

Stanley, Edwin J.

1878 Rambles in Yfonderland; or, Up the Yellowstone, and among

the geysers and other curiosities of the national park.

New York, Appleton, 179 pp.

Contains information on the Crow and Nez Perce ; recounts
experiences of a party of white prisoners of Chief Joseph and his
tribe in 1877.

Story, Isabelle F., joint ed. See: Chittenden, Hiram M. , 1933.

*Stout, Tom, ed.

1921 Montana, its story and biography; a history of aboriginal
and territorial Montana and three decades of statehood.
Chicago and New York, Am. Hist. Soc., 3v. , illus.

Topping, E. S.

1883 Chronicles of the Yellowstone. St. Paul, Pioneer press,

245 pp. , illus. , map.

Comprehensive history of the country drained by the Yellow
stone River; accounts of explorers, trappers, traders, Indians, and
the trails of the transcontinental travelers.

Vaughn, Robert

1900 The Nez tree's War. In his: Then and now; or Thirty-six
years in the Rockies, pp. 345-67. Minneapolis Tribune.

*Wilson, Elijah N.

n.d. Among the Shoshones . Salt Lake City, Skelton pub. co. ,
222 pp. , illus.

89

EDUCATION AND MUSEUMS

Anonymous

1924 Lectures and guide service. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:3
( June 20 ) .

1925 Indian bows and arrows. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2:2 (Sept.
18).

Weapons acquired from Buffalo Bill Cody presented to museum.

1925a The museum at Mammoth Hot Springs. Yellowstone nat. notes,
2:1 (Sept. 18).

1926 The Yellowstone National Park as an open-air school.
School and soc., 24:132-33 (July 31).

1928 $118,000 for Yellowstone Museum. Am. forests and forest
life, 34:444 (July).

1930 A word about "Nature Notes." Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:14
(Mar.).

1935 Research procedure. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12 ;7 (Jan. -
Feb.).
Advice to students of natural history in Yellowstone.

Albright , Horace M.

1924 The museum. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:5 (July).

Recent additions to the Mammoth Hot Springs Museum.
*

1929 General plan of administration for the Educational division.
Natl. Park Serv. , 16 pp.

1933 Research in the national parks. Sci. mo., 36:483-501 (June),
illus.

The application of scientific methods to problems of preserva
tion of species and treatment of animal diseases, with particular re
ference to buffalo, elk, and swans in Yellowstone.

Bauer, C. Max

1934 The work of the Naturalist department. Yellowstone nat. notes,
11:19-20 (May-June).

1935 Recent research in life sciences in Yellowstone. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 12:5-6 (Jan. -Feb.).

91

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Bauer , C . Max ( Cont . )

1936 Staff of the Yellowstone Naturalist department. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 13:38-40 (July-Aug.).

1936a Summer activities of the Naturalist department. Yellowstone
nat . not es , 13 : 41-42 ( July-Aug . ) .

Bumpus , Herman C .

1930 Outdoor education; the part played by our national parks.
Hobbies, 10:319-27, 351, (June), illus.

Educational facilities in Yellowstone: publications, informa
tion bureaus, lectures, etc.

1930a Tr ai Is ide museums. Mus. jour. (London), 30:6-11 (July), il
lus.
Present museum work in Yellowstone, and future plans.

*Coleman, Laurence V.

1927 Museums. In: The. Nature almanac, pp. 73-83. Washington,
Am. Nat. Assn.

Crowe, George C.

1934 Yellowstone museums. Yellowstone nat. notes, 11:22-23 (May-
June) , illus*

1935 Our research facilities. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:6-7, 9
( Jan . -Feb . ) .

Arrangements for collection and research in the Mammoth Museum.

Farquhar, Francis P.

1926 Reading up on Yellowstone . Sierra Club, Bui., 12 :277-82(Mar.)

The most important of all the books, maps, magazine articles,
and Government reports. Also reprinted by Haynes Picture Shops, inc.,
Yellowstone and St. Paul, 1927(?).

Graves, C. Edward

1931 Libraries in our national parks. Lib. jour., 56:895-98
(Oct.l) , illus.

Library facilities at Yellowstone and recommendations for im
proving them cited from the park superintendent^ annual report.

Hamlin, Chauncey J.

1924 The educational value of museums in national parks. Play
ground, 18:243-44 (July).
Mentions museums in Yoseraite, Yellowstone, and Mesa Verde.

92

EDUCATION AND MUSEUMS

Joyner, Newell F.

1929 The history of educational activities in Yellowstone Park.
In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 162-79. Yellow
stone Natl. Park.

Sawyer, E. J.

1926 Models of geysers are exhibited. Yellowstone nat. notes,
3:2-3 (July 30).

1927 Modeled groups for the Yellowstone Museum. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 4:1-2 (Sept. 30), illus.

Thone , Frank and others

1924 The Yellowstone School of Natural History and biological

station. Sci., n.s., 59:548-49 (June 20).

Discusses proposed project to establish a center for geolog
ical and biological research and field study.

Wilbur, Ray Lyman

1929 Our national parks; what the national .parks mean to the

people of the United States. Am. plan, and civic ann. ,

1:5-8.

Comments on the $118,000 appropriation for construction of
a museum in Yellowstone National Park.

Yeager , Dorr G .

1928 More modeled groups completed. Yellowstone nat. notes,
5:1-2 (Ap.l) , illus.

1928a A Museum at Old Faithful. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:5-6
(Sept.l).

1929 The Old Faithful Museui.i. Yellowstone nat. notes, 6:1-2
(June 1) , illus.

1929a The Yellowstone biological laboratory. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 6:2-3 (Feb.), illus.
Announcing a new laboratory for the study of animal diseases

1930 The Educational department. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:75-
76 (Nov.).

1930a Museums. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:36-37 (July).

Functions of the museums at Old Faithful, at Norris Geyser
Basin, and at Madison Junction.

93

GEOLOGY AND OTHER EARTH SCIENCES

Anonymous

1872 Notes on geysers. Pac. rural press, 18:49, 57 (July 26).
Theory of origin and activity of geysers with references

to the Yellowstone geyser field.

1873 The geysers of Montana. Am. nat. 7:279-90 (May) , illus.

1879 Resurvey of Yellowstone Park. Pop. Sci. no., 14:836-7, (Ap. )
Reviews the aims and accomplishments of a survey expedition.

1881 Glacial action in the Yellowstone Valley. Pop. sci. mo. ,
19:278 (June).

*1888 Yellowstone National Park, with map. Sci., v.ll, no. 278.

1916 Geological explorations in the Rocky Mountains. Smithsn.

Instn. , Misc. colls., 66:1-27, illus.

Contains notes on the algae, line carbonate, and silica of
the Yellowstone spring and geyser waters.

1922 Glaced grasshoppers. Am. Forestry, 26:447 (July).
Myriads of grasshoppers of an extinct species imbedded in a

glacier northeast of the park.

1923 New Yellowstone geyser. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preserv. Soc. ,
23d Ann. rept . , p. 179.

1926 A new hot springs. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:5 (Mar. 50).
*1926a This forest will never burn. World rev., pp. 63-64 (Feb.).

1927 A geological page from the past. Yellowstone nat. notes,
4:3 (Sept. 30).

Fossil imprints of Chestnut trees in the park.

1927a Precise elevations, Yellowstone National Park. In: Yellow
stone ranger nat. man. , pp. 72-74. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

1928 Hardwoods in the Yellowstone. Am. forests and forest life,
34:316 (May).

Fossil imprints of raagnolia, chestnut, and sycamore leaves.

95

YELLOWSTONE RATIONAL PARK

Anonymous , ( Cont . )

1928a Huge geyser in Yellowstone. School sci. and math. , 28:894
(Nov.).

1928b New Yellowstone theory. Sci. news-letter, 14:37 (July 21).

Summary of the findings of the Princeton Summer School of
Geology in the Yellowstone National Park.

1928c The Yellowstone Canyon. Sci., n.s., 68, supp. :XII (July 20),
New Geological discoveries may change current concepts.

1930 Does the weather affect the geysers and hot springs? Yellow
stone nat. notes, 7:67-68 (Oct.).

1933 Petrification in the Yellowstone National Park. Sci., n.s.,
77, supp. :9 (Mar. 17) .

Adams , S . F .

1920 A replacement of wood by dolomite. Jour, of geol. , 28:356-

65 (May-June)', ill us.

Contains an analysis of petrified wood from Yellowstone.

Alden, William C.

1928 Glaciation of Yellowstone National Park and its environs.

In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 59-70, ill us. Yellow
stone Natl. Park.

Allen, Eugene T. , joint author. See: Day, Arthur L. , 1926: also
Fenner, Clarence N. , 1929.

Allen, Eugene T. , and Day, Arthur L.

1927 Table of surface temperatures of hot springs and geysers. In:
Yellowstone ranger nat. mam., pp. 68-69. Yellowstone Natl.
Park.

Allen, Eugene T.

1927a The work of Carnegie Geophysical Laboratory in Yellowstone

National Park. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:3-6 (June), illus.

1927b The work of the Geophysical Laboratory on hot springs. •
Natl. Res. Council, Bui. 61: 255-59 (July).
Results of studies in Yellowstone and Lassen parks.

1928 The classification of the hot areas in the Yellowstone Park
and the causes of their development. Wash. Acad. of Sci.,
Jour. , 18:511 (Nov. 19) .

96

GEOLOGY

Allen, Eugene T. (Cent.)

1929 Some Yellowstone geology questions answered. In: Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 9-13. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

1931 The discharge of hot springs in the Yellowstone Park. Sci.,
n.s., 73:505 (May 8) . (Abstract).

Allen, Eugene T. and Day, Arthur L.

1935 Hot Springs of the Yellowstone National Park. Carnegie

Inst. of Wash. Pub. 466, 525 pp., illus., zoaps.

A detailed study with over 200 photographs. Microscopic
examinations by H. E. Merwin.

Anderson, Tempest

1903 Yellowstone Park. U.S.A. In his: Volcanic studies in many

lands, pp. 184-90, illus. London, John Murray.

Notes on the geysers, with photographs of a sinter terrace,
the Paint Pots, Mammoth Hot Springs, and Lone Star Geyser.

*Andreae, A.
1893 Uber die Kunstliche Nachahniung des Geysir-phanomens .

Neues Jahrbuch fur Mineralogie, Geologie, und Palaeontol-

ogie, 1893, 11:1-18, illus.

Article on laboratory experiments to explain the mechanics
of geysers. Contains several references to those of Yellowstone.

Andree, Karl

1875 Die Geyserregion am obern Yellowstone. Globus , 27:289-94,
305-09, 321-25, 337-41.

Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley)

1926 Mammoth Hot Springs. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:6-7 (Nov. 30),
Reports a new spring at southern end of Jupiter Terrace.

1927 Guide lecture for Mammoth formations. In: Yellowstone ranger
nat. man., pp. 112-16. Yellowstone Natl. Park.
Transcript of a lecture given to tourists.

1928 Mammoth Hot Springs. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:2-3 (Jan.l).
Records show that these springs do not freeze over.

1928a Watersheds of Yollowstona National Park. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp» 115-19. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Austen, Peter T.

1873 Note on the siliceous pebbles from the geysers of Yellowstone
Canyon. Am. chemist , 3:288-90 (Feb.).

97

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Bailey, 17. S.

1893 The classification and nailing of igneous rocks. Sci., 21:

87-89 (Feb. 17) .

Notes Electric Peak and Sepulchre Mountain in the park.

Barbour, E. H.

1899 The rapid decline of geyfor activity in Yellowstone Park.

1885-99. Am. Assn. Adv. Sci., Proc. , 48:230; also, in Sci.,

n.s., 10:490-91, and Sci. Am., 82:60.

*Barlow, J. W.

1871 Reconnaissance of the Yellowstone River in 1871. 42d U. S.
Cong., 2d Sess. , ex. doc. no. 66.

*Bartlett, A. B.

1926 The mineral hot springs of Wyoming. [State?] Geologist's
Office, Bui. 16, 15 pp.

Bauer , C . Max

1933 The geology of Mammoth Hot Springs area.... Yellowstone
nat . not es , 10 : 26-27 ( July-Aug . ) , maps .

1933a A preliminary paper on the geology of the Yellowstone Park

region. Yellowstone Natl. Park, Yellowstone Museums, 15 pp.

1933b Professor Schlundt of Missouri determines the age of the
Mazflmoth Hot Springs formations. -Yellowstone nat. .notes,
10:28 (July-Aug.).

1933c Unusual deposits in Mammoth Geyser Basin. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 10:32 (July-Aug.), illus.

1934 The geology of the thrust fault near Gardiner, Montana.
Yellowstone nat. notes, ll:[l]-4 (Jan. -Feb.), illus.

C. YJ. Wilson's geological studies in and near the park.

1935 Geological research in Yellowstone National Park and adja
cent areas. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:2-4 (Jan. -Feb.).
Agencies and institutions so engaged, with bibliography.

Beam, William, and others

1883 Contributions to the geological chemistry of Yellowstone

National Park. Am. jour, of Sci., 3d ser., 25:351-52 (May).

Analyses of waters , deposits of hot springs, and rocks from
Yellowstone canyon and Junction Valley.

GEOLOGY

Berry, Edward W.

1927 Links with Asia before the mountains brought aridity to
the western United States. Sci. mo., 25:321-23 (July-
Dec. ) , illus. , map.

Sevan, Arthur

1923 Summary of the geology of the Beartooth Mountains, Montana.

Jour, of geol. , 31:441-65 (Sept .-Oct. ), illus., maps, bibliog.

Mountain range near northwest corner of Yellowstone.

1925 Rocky Mountain peneplains northeast of Yellowstone Park.

Jour, of geol., 33:563-87 (Aug. -Sept .), illus., map, bibliog.

Blunt, S. E.

1875 Astromical report. In: Report upon the reconnaissance of

northwestern Wyoming.. ., 1873, pp. 81-84. Washington, Govt .
..print, off.

Bodenberg, E. T.

1931 An unusual form of travertine deposit [near Jupiter Terrace].
Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:70 (Sept.), illus.

1935 The geysers of Norris Basin. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:55-
57 (Nov. -Dec.), illus.

Bonney, T. G.

1912 [The Geysers of Yellowstone Park.] In his: Volcanoes, pp. 83-
85, 271-72, 329-30. London, John Murray.

Bradley,. Frank H.

1873 [Firehole and Shoshone Geyser Basins.] U. S. Geol. Surv. of
the Terrs. ,6th Ann. rept. (1872) : 234-42, 244-47.

Bradley, Theodore

1873 Remarks on the Yellowstone region. Calif. Acad. Sci., Proc. ,

4:292-33 (Nov. 18).

Professor Bradley was with the Hayden expedition of 1872.

Brady, Richard R.

1927 Water analyses of Apollinaris Spring, Dedolph Spring, and

Iron Spring (Gibbon Canyon) In: Yellowstone ranger nat.

man. , pp. 71-72. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Brandegee, T. S.

1898 Teton Forest Reserve. U. S. Geol. Surv., 19th Ann. rept.,

(1897-98), pt. 11:191-212, illus.

Descriptive geology touching Yellowstone and Grand Teton parks

99

YELL01BTOHE NATIONAL PARK

Brocket t , L. P.

[1881] ...Volcanic remains of the Yellowstone.... In his: Our west
ern empire, pp. 81-94. Philadelphia, Bradley, Garretson.

*Brooks, L. H.

1921 New World mining district (CooK'e City). Min. and sci.
press , (May 14) .

Bryan, Kirk

1927 Contributions to the geography of the United States, 1926.

U. 3. Geol. Surv., Bui. 790:1-15, illus.

Pedestal, rocks in Yellowstone, and the process of differential
erosion involved in their formation.

But man, Carl H.

1915 The geology of the Yellowstone National Park; a couplet e
geological problem. Sci. Am. , 79, supp.:7-9, illus.

Cade 11, Henry M.

1892 The Yellowstone region and its geysers. Scottish geog. mag.,
8:[253]-48 (May), illus., map.

Chaix, Eroile

1915 Quelques observations sur deux pet its geysers du Yellowstone

National Park. In; Memorial volume of the transcontinental

excursion of 1912 of the American Geographical Society of

New York, pp. 251-58, illus. New York.

Observations made in the Upper Geyser Basin.

Chamberlain, Thomas C. , and Salisbury, R.D.

1914 [Geological features of Yellowstone Park.] In Geology,

1:100, 135-38, 225, 233-42, illus., raps. New York, Holt.

Chamberlain, Thomas C», and others

1929 Geysers of Yellowstone Park. In: College geology, 1:68-72,
illus. New York, Holt.

Chaney, Ralph W.

1926 Notes on the fossil plants in the region of Camp Roosevelt.

Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:1-2 (July 30).

Also included in Yellowstone ranger nat. man., 1927:164-65.

Chapman, Wendell, and Chapman, Lucy

1935 The Petrified Forest. Nat. hist., 35:382-[93] (May), illus.
The Ga.llatin Petrified Forrest in the perk.

*Chittenden, Hiram M.
1895 The Yellowstone National Park. Cincinnati, 409 pp., illus.

100

GEOLOGY

Chittenden, Hiram M. (Cont.)

1900 The geysers all right. Current lit., 28:264 (June).

Denies assertion made in a French scientific paper that
the geysers of Yellowstone are rapidly approaching extinction.

1933 [Geology.] In his: Yellowstone National Park (rev. by Eleanor
Chittenden Cress and Isabelle F. Story), pp. 170-202. "New
ed. , Stanford Univ. (Calif.) press.

Clarke, Frank W. , and Hillebrand, F. W.

1897 [Analyses of rocks from Yellowstone National Park.]
Geol. Surv., Bui. 148:117-36.

U. S,

Clarke, Frank W.

1910 Analysis of rocks and minerals from the laboratory of the
United States Geological Survey, 1880-1908. U. S. Geol.
Surv., Bui. 419, 323 pp.

Rocks of Yellowstone are included.

Claudy, C.H.

1911 The how and why of geysers. Travel, 16:235-36, 195 (Mar.).
With particular reference to those of Yellowstone.

Cleland, Herdman F.

1905 The formation of natural bridges.

20:119-24 (Aug.), bibliog.

The explanation includes the bridge in the park.

AH. jour, sci., 4th ser. ,

Comstock, Theodore B.

1873 On the geology of western Wyoming. Am. jour. sci. and arts,

3d ser., 6:426-32 (Dec.).

An expedition explored headwaters of rivers arising in north
western Wyoming Territory, among them the Yellowstone.

1875 Geological report. In: Report upon the reconnaissance of
northwestern Wyoming, including Yellowstone National Park,
made in the summer of 1873 (By VJ.A. Jones), pp. 85-291, illus.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

1876 Formation of geyserite pebbles in pools adjacent to the gey
sers of the Yellowstone Park. Am. Assn. Adv. Sci., Proc. ,
24, pt. 11:97.

1876a Remarks on the hot springs and geysers, and other topics il
lustrating the scientific value of Yellowstone Park. Am. Assn.
Adv. Sci., Proc., 25:235-39 (Aug.).

1877 On some unexplained phenomena in Yellowstone National Park. Am.

101

YELLOYJSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Coinstock, Theodore B. (Cont.)

Assn. Adv. Soi., Proc. , 25:235-39 (Aug.).

Recommends further geological study to explain geysers.

Conrad, Henry S.

1930 A pityoxylon [petrified tree] from Yellowstone National
Park. Am. jour, bot . , 17:547-63 (June).

Condi t , D. Dale

1917 Evidence in the Helena -Yellowstone Park region, Montana, of

the great Jurassic erosion surface. Geol. Soc. An., Bui.,

28:161 (Mar.) .

joint author. See: Lupton, Charles T. , 1917.

1919 Relations of late Paleozoic and earlt Mesozoic formations
of southwestern Montana and adjacent parts of Wyoming. U.
S. Geol. Surv. , Prof. pap. 120:111-21, illus., map.

Condit, D. Dale, Finch, E. H. , and Pardee, J. F.

1927 Phosphate rock, in the Three Forks — Yellowstone Pajk region,
Montana. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 795:147-209, maps.

Condon, David

1935 Geyser and pool depth soundings in Upper Geyser Basin, Black

Sand Basin, and Biscuit Basin. Yellowstone nat . notei: , 12:

58 (Nov. -Dec.) .

Crook, A. R.

1897 Soino geological causes of the scenery of the Yellovjstone
National Park. Aai. geol. , 20:159-67 (Sept.).

Crook, Coiiipton

1930 Ncrris Geyser Basin. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:68-69 (Oct.).
Curious prehistoric appearance of Hundred-Spring Plain.

*Crook, James K.

1899 The mineral waters of the United States and their therapeutic
uses; with an account of the various mineral spring localities,
their advantages as health resorts, means of access, etc.; to
which has been added an appendix on potable waters. New York
and Philadelphia, Lea Bros., 588 pp.

Crowe , George C .

1933 Changes of Mammoth. Hot Springs. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:
28-29 (July-Aug.) .

GEOLOGY

Crowe, George C. (Cont.)

1934 Fossils in the travertine at Mammoth. Yellowstone nat.

notes, 11:6-7 (Jan. -Feb. ), illus.

Jawbone and teetli of elk, possibly; treetop and feather.

Cutter, Ray

1930 Grow+.h rin^s counted on petrified trees. Yell ows tone. nat .
notes, 7:80 (Nov.) .

Daly, Reginald A.

1926 Volcanic action. In his: Our mobile earth, pp. 129-69, il
lus., map. New York, Scribners.
Special reference to geysers in Yellowstone.

*Dana, Edward S.

1876 On the association of crystals of quartz and calcite. Am.
jour. sci. and arts, 3d ser. , 12:448-51.

Dana, Edward S., and Grinnell, George B.

1876 Report of a reconnaissance fron Carroll, Montana Territory,

on the Upper Missouri, to the Yellowstone National Par!:.

U. S. Sncr. dept., 155 pp., illus., maps.

1895 Manual of geology. . 4th ed. , New York, Am. Book co., 1088
pp. , illus. , maps .
Many references to park. Previous editions : 1863, 1875, 1880,

*Darton, Nelson H.

1912 Silica and. line deposition. Geologische Charakterbilder ,
Heft 12, illus.

1920 Geysers of Yellowstone National Park. Geologische Charak
terbilder, Heft 23, 14 pp., illus., nap.
Six fine photo^aphs. English te::t.

Day, Arthur L. , joint author. See: Allen, Eugene T. , 1927, 1935;
also, Fenner, Clarence N. , 1931.

*Day, Arthur L. , and Allen, Eugene T.
1924 Temperatures of hot springs and s ources of their heat and

water supply. Jour, of geol. , 32:3-6.
*

1926 The scientific examination of Yellowstone Park's hot waters.
Yellowstone nat. notes, v.3, no. 7.

1926a Surface temperatures, hot springs. Yellowstone nat. notes,
2:3-4 (June 30) .
Centigrade and Fahrenheit readings of Yellowstone springs.

103

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Day, Arthur L. , and Allen, Eugene T. , (Cent.).

1927 Obsidian Cliff. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:8-10 (Aug. 31).

Carnegie Institution geophysical expert rejects tradition
that this cliff is a rapidly cooled lava flow. Article also printed
in Yellowstone Ranger nat. man. , 1927:152-33.

1927 Table of surface tenperatures of hot springs and fumaroles.
In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 68-9. Yellowstone
Natl. Park.

1936 The hot springs of Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 13:15-21 (Mar.-Ap.).

De Lacy, ^felter W.

1869 Notes on topography of the Yellowstone region. In: The mines
of the West ; report to Secretary of the Treasury (By Rossiter
W. Raymond), pp. 141-43. New York, J. B. Ford.

*De la Vallee-Poussin, Charles

1873 Les explorations geologiques a 1'ouest des Etats-Unis. Ex-
trait de la Revue Catholique, Louvain, Cxi. Peteteis.

Delo, D. M. , joint author. See: Wentworth, C. K. , 1931.

Demmink, Gerrit

1927 Geological history of Yellowstone National Park. In: Yellow
stone ranger nat. man. , pp. 52-5. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Diller, J. S.

1898 Silicif ied wood; from Gallatin Basin, Galiatin County, Montana,

U. S. Geol. Surv. , Bui. 150:113-14, illus .

Petrifaction exemplified by two standing tree trunks.

Button, C. E.

1883 [Petrographic notes on the volcanic rocks of Yellowstone. ]

U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs., 12th Ann. rept.,

(1878) , pt. 11:57-62.

Eccles, James

1881 On the mode of occurrence, volcanic rocks of Montana.
Geol. Soc. of London, Quart, jour., 37:399-401, map.

joint author. See: Rut ley, Frank, 1881.

Eldridge, George H.

1894 A geologic reconnaissance in northwestern Wyoming, with

special reference to its economic resources. U. S. Geol.

Surv., Bui. 119, 72 pp., illus., map.

104

GEOLOGY

*Emmons , S . F .
1893 Geological guide book of the Rocky Mountain excursion. In:

Internatl. Geol. Cong., 5th sess., Compte rendu, pp. 253-487.

*Felix, J.

1896 Fossil woods at Yancey's, Yellowstone National Park. Zeit-
schrifte Deutsches Geologische Gesellschaft , 1896, pp. 249-60.

*Fenneman, N. M.
1913 The Yellowstone National Park. Jour, of geol. , 11:314-420.

Fenner, Clarence N. , and Allen, Eugene T.

1929 Questions and answers fon geology.] In: Yellowstone ranger
nat. man., pp. 1-13, illus. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Fenner, Clarence N. , and Day, Arthur L.

1931 Borehole investigations in the geysor basin of Yellowstone
Park, etc. Wash. Acad. Sci., Jour., 21:488-89 (Dec. 4).

*Ferguson, J. B.

1919 The oxidation of lava by steam. Wash. Acad. Sci., Jour.,
v. 9, No. 18.

Field, Richard M. , and Jones, 0. T.

1929 The resurrection of tho Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone.

Am. jour, sci., 5th ser. , 17:260-78 (Mar.), illus., map.

Exposures studied at Yellowstone Falls and Red Road suggest
park stratigraphy has been incorrectly described.

Field, Richard M. , and Lamraers , Edward

1932 Physiographic history of the Yellowstone Park, (An abstract).
Geol. Soc. Am. , Bui., 43:133 (Mar,).

1932a Yellowstone-Beartooth-3ig Horn region. Internatl. Geol.

Cong., 16th sess., Guidebook 24, 64 pp., illus., maps, bibliog,
A guidebook for geologists on the Yellowstone area.

1933 The Yellowstone Park and Big Horn Basin region; a geological
excursion. In his: Principles of historical geology from
the regional point of view, pp. 236-74, illus., maps.

Pri net on Univ. press.

Finch, E. H. , joint author. See: Condit , D. Dale, 1927.

*Fisher, Cassius A.

1906 Geology and water resources of the Big. Horn Basin, Wyoming.
U. S. Geol. Surv. , Prof, pap., No. 53, 72 pp.

105

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Fix, Philip

1937 Valentine geyser. Yellowstone nat. notes, 14:52-37 (July-

Aug. )

A study of geyser action, with a table of eruptions.

Fletcher, Edgar H.

1927 Climatic features of Yellowstone National Park. Sci. mo.,
25:329-40 (Oct.)., illus., maps.

Climatic data for various locations. (Also in Yellowstone

ranger nat. man. 1928:149-58).
*

1928 Annual meteorological summary, Yellowstone. Salt Lake City.

Flottman, Edward A.

1928 Questions and answers [on Yellowstone geology.] In: Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 8-24. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Forrest, Earle R.

1919 Petrified forests of the Gallatin Range. Outdoor life, 44:
144-46 (Sept.) , illus.

fForsyth, James W. , and Grant, F. D.]

1875 Report of an expedition up the Yellowstone River, made in

1875, "by James W. Forsyth and F. D. Grant... under orders of
Lieut en ant -General P. H. Sheridan, coraraanding military divi
sion of the Missouri. Washington, Govt. print, off., 17 pp.,
illus. , maps.

Foshag, William F.

1926 The minerals of Obsidian Cliff, Yellowstone National Park,

and their origin. U. S. Natl. Mus. , Proc., v. 68, 18 pp.

(June 14), illus. (ser. no. 2618).

Fourt, E. H.

1934 . In the glaciers of Wyoming. In: Picturesque America (J.F.

Kane, ed.), pp. [l42]-45, illus. New York, Union Lib. Assn.

Glaciers on the flanks of Fremont and Gannett peaks, near Park

Francis, Francis

1882 Yellowstone geysers. Nineteenth cent., 11:369-72 (Mar.);
Eclectic mag., n.s., 35:598-604; Living age, 38:31-36,

*Franklin, W. S.
1913 The Yellowstone. Sci. n.s., 37:446-47.

The mechanics of the operation of Handkerchief Pool.

106

GEOLOGY

Fryxell, Fritiof M.

1930 Glacial features of Jackson Hole, Wyoming. Rock Island,
111., Augustana Book Concern, 129 pp., illus .

1931 Glacial geology of Jackson Hole. Univ. Chicago, Sci. ser.
(theses abstracts) 8:219-27 (Sept., 1928-June, 1929).

1933 Earthquake shocks in Jackson Hole, Wyoming. Seismol. Soc. ,
Am. Bui., 23:167-68 (Oct.).

Gannett , Henry

1873 Report on astronomy and hypsometry. U. S. Geol. Surv. of

the Terrs., 6th Ann. rept. 1872:795-807.

Elevations of geyser basins and of the Yellowstone river.

1383 Geographical field work of the Yellowstone Park division.
U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs., 12th Ann. rept.
(1878), pt. 11:455-90, illus., map.
Topography, meteorology, routes, history of explorations.

1888 Surveys in Yellowstone National Park. U. S. Geol. Surv.,
9th Ann. rept. (1888) -.60-67, maps.

Geikie, Archibald

1879 Professor Geikie on the geology of the far west. Nature

(London), 21:67-69 (Nov. 20).

Largely devoted to the geology of Yellowstone.

1881 The geysers of the Yellowstone. Hacmillan* s mag. , 44:421-
35 (Oct.); also in Eclectic mag., n.s., 35:124-36 (Jan.).

1881a The great glaciers of the Yellowstone. Pop. sci. mo., 18:
568-69 (Feb.) .

1882 Geological sketches at home and abroad. New York, Hacrnill-
an, 322 pp. , illus.

Geysers and rock formations of Yellowstone described.

1923 [Yellowstone geology.] In his: Textbook of geology, 1:306-
07, 315-19, 350, 434, 610. 4th ed. , London, Macmillan.

*Gilbert , Grove K.
1875 Localities of the thermal springs in the United States.

U. S. Army, Sngr. dept., Geog. and geol. exploration and Surv,
west of the 100th Meridan (Wheeler Survey), Rept., v.3,pp.
145-55.

107

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Girty, George H.

1899 Devonian and Carboniferous fossils [Yellowstone National

Park]. U. S. Geol. Surv. , monog. 32, pt. 11:479-599, illus,
Explains faunal relations and describes fossils collected.

joint author. See: Hague, Arnold, 1899b.

Goocii, F. A. , and Whitfield, J. Edward

1888 Analyses of waters of the Yellowstone National Park....
U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 47, 84 pp., illus.

G-oode , John P .

1899 The piracy of the Yellowstone. Jour, c f geol. , 7:261-71

(Ap.-May), illus., maps.

The postglacial history of Yellowstone Lake and Canyon.

Gordon-Gumming, Constance F.

1885 The world's wonderlands in Wyoming and New Zealand. Over
land mo. , 2d ser. , 5:(_1]-13 (Jan.).
Contains descriptions of Yellowstone geysers and hot springs,

Grant, F. D. , joint author. See: Forsyth, Jaiaes W. , 187Sv

*Grant, Roland D.
1908 Changes in the Yellowstone Park. Ati. Geog. Soc. , Bui. ,

Grinnell, George B. , joint author. See: Dana, E. S. , 1876: also
Ludlow, William, 1876 (General section) .

Hague , Arnold

1884 Yellowstone National Park. Sci . , n.s., 3:135-36 (Feb.).
Investigations for the U.S. Geological Survey in 1883.

1884 ReDort of Mr. Arnold Hague. U. S. Geol. Surv., 5th Ann.
rept., 1884:15-19.
On the activity of the Yellowstone geysers and hot springs.

1887 Notes on the deposition of scorodite from arsenical waters
in the Yellowstone National Park. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser.,
34:171-75 (Sept.) .

1888 Geological history Yellowstone National Park. Am. Inst.

Min. Engr. , Trans., 16:785-803 (May 1887 to Feb. 1888), map.
*

1889 Soaping geysers. Am. Inst. Min. Engrs . , Trans. (Feb.).

189S Geologic history of the Yellowstone National Park. Smithsn.
Instn. , Ann. rept., 1891-92:133-51.

108

GEOLOGY

Hague , Arnold ( Cont . )

1892a Soaping geysers. Smithsn. Instil. , Ann. rept., 1891-92:

153-61.

Observations on the now prohibited practice of soaping
geysers to make them spout. Reprinted from item 1889, above.

1893 The Yellowstone Park. Internatl. Geol. Cong., Compte rendu,
5th sess., pp. 336-59, illus., map. Washington, Govt. print
off.
The geological features; work of the Geological survey.

1896 The age of igneous rocks of Yellowstone National Park. Am.
jour, sci., 4th ser. , 1:445-57 (June).

1898 Hague party, Yellowstone National Park. U S. Geol. Surv. »
19th Ann. rept., 1898:43-46.

A survey of the physical features of the Absaroka Range.

1899 Descriptive geology of Huckleberry Mountain and Big Game
Ridge. U. S. Geol. Surv., Monog. 32, pt. II; 165-202.

1899a Early Tertiary volcanoes of the Absaroka Range. Sci,, n.s.,
9:425-42.

Hague, Arnold [and others,]

1899b Geology of the Yellowstone National Park. U. S. Geol. Surv.,

Monog. 32, pt. II, 882 pp, , illus., maps.

Studies of fossil flora and fauna. Co-authors; J. P. Iddings,

W. H. Weed, C. D. Walcott , G. H. Girty, T.W. Stanton, and

F.H. Knowlton. Part I, unpublished.

1911 Origin of the thermal waters in the Yellowstone National Park.

Geol. Soc. Am., Bui., 22:103-22 (Marf31).

Asserts the waters are of meteoric origin. Article also ap
peared in Sci., n.s., 33:533-68 (Ap.14).

1913 Yellowstone National Park. Am. forestry, 19:[300]-17 (May).
Geological description from unidentified report by Hague.

1928 Geological history of the Yellowstone National Park. U. S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 23 pp., illus, map.

Issued. in .1912, 1920, and 1921; appears also in Smithsn.
Instn.'s Ann. Rept., 1882:133-51, and in Amer. Inst. of Min. Engr*»a
Transact i ons , 16 : 783-803 .

Hall, Ansel F.

1927 Volcanic activity in Yellowstone region. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 55-*56. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

109

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Hall, George M. , and Howard, C. S.

1929 Ground water in Yellowstone and Treasure counties, Montana.

U. S. Geol. Surv. , Water supply, pap. 599, 118 pp., illus.,map.

Tabulation of analyses of water samples from 57 sources, show
ing domestic, agricultural, and cornier cial possibilities.

Hayden, Ferdinand V.

1861 Sketch of the geology of the country about the headwaters of

the Missouri and Yellowstone rivers. Am. jour. sci. and arts,

£d ser., 31:229-45 (Mar.).

Hayden .
1869

1872

187 2a

Ferdinand V. , and Newberry, J. S.

Geological report of the exploration of the Yellowstone and
Missouri rivers under Captain (now Lieut. Col. and Brevet
Brig. Gen.) W. F. Raynolds , Corps of Engineers, 1859-60,
174 pp., map, with a "Report on the Cretaceous and Tertiary
Plants." Washington, Govt. print, off.

The hot springs and geysers of the Yellowstone and Firehole
rivers. Am. jour. sci. and arts, 3d ser., 3:105-15 (Jan.);
[!6l]-76 (Mar.), illus., maps.

Report of F. V. Hayden. U. S. Geol. Surv. of Montana and
portions of adjacent territories, 5th ann. rept., 1871:
[131-165, illus. » maps.

Detailed topographic and geological description of the park;
excellent drawings and maps; text of act establishing park.

1873 [Yellowstone explorations.] U. S. Geol. Surv. of the Terrs.,
6th Ann. rept., 1872:11-85, illus., maps.

1876 Notes descriptive of some geological sections of the country
about the headwaters of the Missouri and Yellowstone rivers.
U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv., of the Terrs., Bui., 2:197-209.
A description of the junction of the Gallatin, Madison, and

Jefferson rivers, noting the formation, fossils, and erosion.

1878 [Sketch of geology at the headwaters of the Yellowstone and
Missouri river.] U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs.,
Prelim, rept., 1878:21-29.

Haynes , J . E .

1927 Ancient geyser basin in cross section. In: Yellowstone

ranger nat . man., p. 56. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Discovery of a prehistoric basin in Firehole Canyon.

1927a Thermal deposition in Yellowstone National Park. In: Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 57-58. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

110

GEOLOGY

Temperature conditions and chemical composition of the
hot spring and geyser waters which result in siliceous sinter de
positions. Extracts from an unpublished study by Arnold Hague.

Heitzman, C. L.

1875 Report of mineral and thermal waters. In: Reconnaissance
of northwestern Wyoming, including Yellowstone National
Park, made in the summer of 1873, pp. {^293j-307. U. S.

[Army], Engr. Dept.
*

1876 The therapeutical value of the springs in the national park,
Phila. med. times, 6:409-14 (No.22£, May 27).

Hewett, D. F.

1913 Sulphur deposits of Sunlight Basin, Wyoming. U. S. Geol.
Surv., Bui. 530:350-62, maps.

Geological studies of deposits located 14 miles east of the
park, and a review of the geological work of Hague.

1914 Sulphur deposits in Park County, Wyoming. U. S. Geol.
Surv. , Bui. 540, pt. 1:477-81. (Contrs. to econ. geol. ,
pt. I, 1912).

Description of a group of deposits and geologic formations
in the vicinity of Cody, near Yellowstone.

*Hewett, D. F., and Lupton, C. T.

1917 Anticlines in the southern part of the Big Horn Basin, Wyo
ming. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 656.

1920 The Heart Mountain overthrust , Wyoming. Jour, of geol.,
28:536-57 (Sept .-Oct. ), illus., bibliog.
A study of the overthrust fault in the region of Cody.

Hillebrand, F. W. , joint author. See: Clark, Frank W. , 1897.

•Hoffman, Arnold D.

1932 The Douglas Canyon flora of east central Washington.

Jour, of Geol., 40:735-38 (Nov. -Dec.), llTis.

Discovery of fossil flora species identical to those of
the Yellowstone Miocene beds.

Hole, Allan D.

1929 The history of the "hoodoos* near Mammoth Hot Springs.

Indiana Acad. Sci., Proc., 38:207-16 (Dec.).

The "hoodoos" are huge, angular blocks of travertine. .

Holm, D. A,

1929 Notes on the rocks of Yellowstone National Park. In; Yel
lowstone ranger nat . man., pp. 87-95, illus.

Ill

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Holmes, William H.

1879 Nttes on extensive deposits of obsidian, Yellowstone Nat
ional Park. An. Nat., 13:247-50 (Ap.).

1880 Fossil forests of the volcanic Tertiary formations of the
Yellowstone National Park. U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. of
the Terrs., Bui. 5:125-32, illus.

1881 Glacial phenomena in the Yellowstone Park. Am. Nat., 15:
203-08 (Mar.) , illus.

1883 Report of the geology of the Yellowstone National Park.

U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs., 12th Ann. rept.,
1878, pt. 11:1-62, illus., map.

Howard, Arthur D.

1935 History of the Grand Canyon on the Ye Hows tone, [An Abstract],
Geol. Soc. Am., Proc. , 1934, 2:83.

1936 The deposits of Hayden Valley in Yellowstone National Park.
Sci., n.s., 83:80 (Jan. 24).

joint author. See: Hall, George M. , 1929.

Iddings , Joseph P.

1885 On the occurrence of fayalite in the lithophyses of obsidian
and rhyolite in Yellowstone National Park. Am. jour, sci.,
3d ser., 30:58-60 (July), illus.

Report of examination and chemical analysis of the obsidian
which forms the columnar cliff north of Beaver Lake.

1886 Obsidian Cliff, Yellowstone National Park. U. S. Geol.
Surv., 7th Ann. rept., 1885-86:249-94, illus., bibliog.

1887 The nature and origin of lithophysae and the lamination of
acid lavas. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser. , 33:36-45 (Jan.).
Contains description of Obsidian Cliff.

Iddings, Joseph P., and Penfield, S. L.

1891 The minerals in hollow spherulites of rhyolite from Glade

Creek, I^youing. Am» jour, sci., 3d ser., 42:39-46 (July-

Aug.) , illus.

This Creek, tributary of the Snake, is south of the park.

1891 The eruptive rocks of Electric Peak and Sepulchre Mountain,
Yellowstone National Park. U. S. Geol. Surv. , 12th Ann.
rept., 1890-91, pt. 1:569-664, illus., map.

112

GEOLOGY

1892a The mineral composition and. geological occurrence of cer
tain igneous rocks in the Yellowstone National Park.
Phil.Soc. of Wash., Bui., 11:191-220, illus.

1892b On crystallization of igneous rods. Phil. Soc. of
Wash. , Bui. , 11:65-113.
Occasional references to igneous rocks of park.

1892c Spherulitic crystallization. Phil. Soc. of Wash., Bui.,
11:445-63, illus.
Occasional mention of the spherulites of Obsidian Cliff.

1993 The dissected volcano of Crandall Basin, Wyoming. Jour.

of geol., 1:606-11 ( Sept . -Oct . ) .

The structure of this volcano in northeastern part of the
park has been exposed by erosion. Fuller dissertation on the sub
ject in the U. S. Geol. Surv. monog. 32, pt. 11:215-68 (1899).

1395 Absarokite- shoshonite-banakite series. Jour, of geol.

3:935-59 (Nov. -Dec.), illus.

Descriptions and analyses of some minerals of the park. Also
in U. S. Geol. Surv." mono g. 32, pt .11:326-55.

1895a The origin of igneous rocks. Phil. Soc. of Wash., Bui.,
12:89-214, illus.
Much information on those of park; many tables and graphs.

1898 Bysmaliths. Jour, of geol; , 6:704-10 (Oct. -Nov.), illus.
Mount Holmes in Yellowstone is described as an example.

1898a Diorite from Electric Peak, Yellowstone National Park. U.

S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 150:243-44.

Considers occurrence, mass, texture, fluid inclusions, and
chemical composition.

1898b Lithoidite, from Obsidian Cliff, Yellowstone National Park.
U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 150:153-59, illus.

1898c Rhyolitic perlite; from Yellowstone National Park. U. S.
Geol. Surv., Bui. 150:151-53.
Occurrence; description; chemical analysis of this rock.

1898d Volcanic dust (rhyolitic?) ; from Gallatin Valley, Gall at in

County, Montana. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. .150:146-48, illus.
Comparison with similiar dust from park, 50 miles southeast.

113

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Iddings, Joseph P., and Weed, Walter H.

1899 Descriptive geology of the Gallatin Mountains. U. S. G-eol.

Surv. , Monog. 32, pt. 11:1-59, illus. , maps.

Southern end of these mountains lies in the park.

1899a Descriptive geology of northern end of the Teton Range.
U. S. Geol. Surv. , Monog. 32, pt. 11:149-64, map.
The tip of this range lies within the park.

1899b The dissected volcano of Crandall Basin, Wyoming. U. S.
Geol. Surv., Monog. 32, pt .11:215-68- illus., map.

1899c The igneous rocks of Electric Peak and Sepulchre Mountain.
U. S. Geol. Surv., Monog. 32, pt. 11:89-148, illus., map.

1899d The igneous rocks of the Absaroka Range and Two-Ocean Plat
eau, and of outlying portions of the Yellowstone National
Park. U. S. Geol. Surv., Monog. 32, pt. 11:269-325, illus.
Study of the accumulations of tuff -breccia erupted from the

chain of ancient volcanoes along the eastern border of the park.

1899e The intrusive rocks of the Gallatin Mountains, Bunsen Peak,
and Mount Everts. ,U. S. Geol. Surv., Monog. 32, pt. 11:60-
88, illus.

1899f Recent basalts. U. S. Geol. Surv., Monog. 32, pt.II:433-

39, illus.

Describes basaltic rocks of Yellowstone; compares specimens
from various localities; sample analysis; nicrophotographs.

1899g The rhyolites. U. S. Geol. Surv., Monog. 32, pt. 11:356-

432, illus.

Profusely illustrated study of the rhyolites of Yellowstone,
which occur as extrusive lava flows.

Iddings, Joseph P., joint author. See: Hague, Arnold, 1899b.

1904 A fracture valley system. Jour, of geol. , 12:94-105 (Feb.-

Mar . ) , maps .

The relationship between drainage system in the region north
of park and system of fractures that traverses the rocks.

*Iddings, Joseph P., and Cross, W.
1906 Texture of igneous rocks. Jour, of geol., 14:692-707.

Iddings, Joseph P.

1913 '[Yellowstone Geology.] In his : Igneous rocks.... 2:349-51,

415-23, 467-71. New York, John Wiley and Sons.

Crandall volcano; the Absaroka Range; and cheiiiical analyses.

114

GEOLOGY

Iddings, Joseph P.

1914 [Voicanism in park.] In his: The problem of volcanisin, pp.
15,16, 21-32, 80, 116, illus. New Haven, Yale Univ. press.

, joint, author. See: Hague, Arnold, 1899b.

Jaggar, T. A. , jr.

1898 Some conditions affecting geyser eruption. Am. jour, sci.,
4th ser., 5:[323]-33 (I/lay), illus.

Several Yellowstone geysers are considered.

1899 Death Gulch, a natural bear-trap. Pop. sr-i. mo., 54:475-
81 (Feb.) , illus.

A nocturnal vapor in Yellowstone fatal to animals.

Jensen, Christian

1931 Studies of the .early basic breccia of northeastern Yellow
stone. Typescript in Univ. Calif. Lib., Berkeley, Thesis
(M.A. ) , 50 pp. , map.

Jone.s, E. N.

1930 Static electricity, in the Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:85 (Dec.).

Jones , Owen T.

1929 History of the Grand Canyon, Yellowstone National Park.
Royal Inst. Gt. Brit., Proc. , 26:Pt. 1:90-98, illus.

, joint author. See: Field, Richard M. , 1929.

1929a In the Yellowstone with Princeton. Nature (London) , 123:

852-55 (June 1), illus.

Observations made on a visit to the park with the Princeton
Summer School of Geology and natural Resources.

1930 The secret of the Yellowstone Canyon. Discovery, 11:42-
46 (Feb.) , illus.
Geologic history in the light of Field's recent findings.

Joyner, Newell F.

1930 Sylvan Springs. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:47 (July).

Jordan, David Starr

1892 The story of a strange land. Pop. sci. mo., 40:447-58

(Feb.) , illus.

Outline of geological and human history of the Yellowstone
region since the Tertiary; development of plant and animal life.

115

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Kean, A. L.

1889 A deadly gas -spring [Death Gulch] in Yellowstone Park.
Sci., 15:130-32 (Feb. 15).

Kearns, William E.

1936 Death Gulch in 1888, 1897, and in 1936. Yellowstone nat.

notes, 13:52-54 (Sept .-Oct. ), illus.

Barren valley filled with gases fatal to aninals.

Kimball, James P.

1899 The granites of Carbon County, Montana; e division and

glacier field of the Snowy Range. Am. Geog. Soc., Bui.,

31:199-215, illus., map.

Knappen, R. S. and Moult on, G. F.

1930 Geology and mineral resources of parts of Carbon, Big Horn,

Yellowstone, and Stillwater counties, Montana. U. S« Geol,

Surv., Bui. 822: 1-70, illus.

Knowlton, Frank H.

1894 A new fossil hepatic from the Lower Yellowstone in Montana.
Torrey Bot. Club, Bui., 21:458-60, illus.

1895 Fossil forests of the Yellowstone. Epoch, 1:18 (Ap,).

1896 The Tertiary floras of the Yellowstone National park. Am.
jour. sci. , 4th ser. , 2:51-58 (July).

Study of 147 fossil plants; three stages described.

1898 Standing fossil forests pf Yellowstone National Park.
Plant world, 1:53-55 (Jan.), illus.

1899 Fossil flora. U. S. Geol. Surv., Mono^. 32, pt. 11:651-
882, illus.

Complete description's of Yellowstone specimens ; plates,

Knowlton, Frank H. , joint author. See: Hague, Arnold, 1899b.

1914 A forest of stone. Am. forestry, 20:709-18 (Oct . ) . , illus.

Geological processes that made stratified fossil forests in
the park.

i
1914a Forests of s^pne. Lit. dig., 49:952-53 (Nov. 14), illus.

Lists and describes the fossil forests of Yellowstone.

1921 Fossil forests of the Yellowstone National Park. U. S.

Dept. Int., Natl. Park Serv. , 30 pp., illus.

Historical account, with 15 illustrations. Apparently a
revision of the 1914 edition.

116

GEOLOGY

Larnmers, Edward, joint author. See: Field, Ri chare M. , 1932.

Lands downe, James D.

1927 [Morning, afternoon, and evening lectures at Old Faithful.]

In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 147-56. Yellowstone

Hatl. Park.

Transcript of lectures, chiefly on geological phenomena;

*Langford, Nathaniel P.
1873 The ascent of Mt. Hayden. Scribnerfs mo., June.

1873a Report of N.P. Langford on the resources of Snake River

Valley. U. S. Geol. Surv. of the Terrs., 6th Ann. rept.,

1872:86-91.

Geological and typographical description of the region

from Fort Hall, Idaho, to Firehole Geyser Basin, and down the Yel

lowstone River to the Missouri.

Lathrop, W. T.

1933 Hitting the low spots. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:[9]-10

(Mar . -Ap . ) .

Temperature records at Riverside Ranger Station.

Lawson, Andrew C.

1927 Folded mountains and isostasy. Geol. Soc. Am., Bui., 38:
253-73 (May) .

Leclercq, Jules

1885 Les geysers de la terre des merveilles. Societe royals

Beige de Geographie, Bui., 9:393-422 (July-Aug.).

Description of the geysers of Yellowstone.

'LeConte, Joseph

1878 Geysers, and how they are explained. Pop. sci. mo. , 12:
407-17 (Feb.) , ill us .
Yellowstone geysers and theories of eruption; nontechnical.

1891 Yellowstone geysers. In: Elements of geology, pp. 103-11,
illus. 3d ed., New York, Appleton.

Leffmann, Henry

1881 Analyses of some [Yellowstone] geyser deposits. Chemical
news ( London ) , 43 : 124 ( Mar . 18 ) .

1883 Contributions to the geological chemistry of Yellowstone

National Park. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser. , 25:104-06 (Feb.);

351-52 (May) .

Tabulated results of chemical analyses of geyser waters.

117

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

*Leidy, Joseph

1872 Fossil vertebrates, early Tertiary, Wyoming. U. S. Geol.
Surv. of Montana and portions of adjacent territories, 5th
Ann. rept., 1871 (Hayden) . Washington, Govt. print, off.

Lesquereau, Leo

1872 Enumeration and description of the fossil plants from the
specimens obtained in the explorations of Dr. F. V. Hayden,
1870 and 1871. U. S. Geol. Surv. of Montana and portions
of adjacent territories, 5th Ann. rept., 1871:283-303.

Li ndgr en , r/aldemar

1928 [Mineral deposits of the park.! In his: Mineral deposits,
pp. 57,60,62,77,79,96,97,99. New York, McGraw-Hill.

Lindsley, Marguerite. See: Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley) .

[Linton, Edwin]

1928 The Excelsior Geyser, Yellowstone National Park. Sci., n.s.,
68:644-45 (Dec. 28).

This geyser not extinct since 1888, as stated in Science
supplement, Aug. 17, 1928.

Lover ing, T. S.

1929 The new world, or Cooke City raining district. U. S. Geol.
Surv., Bui. 811, 87 pp., illus., maps. Washington , Govt.
print, off.

Geological-topographical view of Park County, Montana.

Ludlow, William

1876 Report of a reconnaissance from Carroll, Montana territory

on the upper Missouri, to the Yellowstone National Park, and

return, r.iade in the sumrier of 1875. Washington, Govt. print.

off., 155 pp., illus., naps.

Topographical survey by the Army Engineer Department .

Lupton, Charles T. , and Condit , D. Dale

1917 Gypsum in the southern part of the Big Horn Mountains , V/yoining-

U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 640, pt . 1:139-57, illus., map.

A study of deposits southeast of Yellowstone.

Lystrup, Herbert

1930 A new-old curio. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:44 (July).
Volcanic bombs, or geodes , found along Tirehole River.

1933 Winds — their effect on geyser activity. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 10:26 (July-Aug.).

118

GEOLOGY

M. , J. H.

1936 Geysers and hot springs of Yellowstone Park. Yellowstone

nat. notes, 13: [35] -38 (July-Aug.).

Notes on the volume and variation of activity.

McDougall, W. B.

1931 A hot spring that cannot make up its mind. Yellowstone

nat. notes, 8:68 (Sept.).

Unpredictable eruptions of a spring at Cleopatra Terrace.

MacGinitic, Harry, joint author. See: Read, Charles B. , 1933.

Mansfield, George R.

1929 Geography, geology, and mineral resources of the Partneuf

Quadrangle, Idaho. U. S. Geol. Surv. , Bui. 803, 110 pp.,

Report on a region near Yellowstone.

Martindale, Phillip

1926 Animal tracks in rock. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:6-7(Sept . ) .
Fossil deer tracks were found in sandstone near Old Faithful.

*Martonne, de E.
1913 Le park national du Yellowstone; etude morphologique trans-

continental-e aux Etats-Unis. Annales de geographic, 22: 134-71,

Means, Thomas H. , joint author. See: Whitney, Milton, 1898.

Mearns , Edgar A.

1903 Feathers beside the Styx. Condor, 5:36-38 (May).
Gas in caves near the hot springs fatal to birds.

*Meek, F. B.

1872 Preliminary list of fossils collected by Dr. Hayden's party
in Utah and Wyoming. U. S. Geol. Surv. of Montana and por
tions of adjacent territories, 5th Ann. rept. ,1871:373.

Meinzer, Oscar E.

1918 Bibliography and index of the publications of the United

States Geological Survey relating to ground water. U. S.

Geol. Surv., Water supply pap. 427, 169 pp. map.

Contains U. S. G. S. publications on waters of Yellowstone.

*Merrill, George P.

1924 The first 100 years of American Geology. New Haven, Conn.,
Yale Univ. press, 773 pp.
Contains account of Hayden's U. S. G. S. work in Park.

119

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Meyer, M. Wilhelm

1909 Geyser und heisse Quellen. Uber Land -and Meer, 101:311-13.

*Mills, Enos A.

1921 Waiting in the wilderness. Garden City, N. Y. , Doubleday,
Page, 241 pp., illus.

Contains descriptive and geological matter on Yellowstone
petrified forests, Grand Canyon of Yellowstone, and Yellowstone Lake.

Mitchell, Guy E.

1914 The petrified forests of Yellowstone Park. Travel, 23:19-
21 (May) , illus.

"Giant fossil trees of untold age, some embedded in volcanic
deposits, others towering from the cliffs; fifteen entombed
forests standing upright in well-defined strata." (sub-title).

1926 El bosque petrificado de Yellowstone. La Hacienda, 21:83-
85 (Mar.) , illus.

1926a Forests of chalcedony. Nature Mag., 7: 29-30 (Jan.), illus.
Petrified forests of Yellowstone Park and Arizona compared.

1926b The standing stone forests of Wyoming. Sci. Am., 134:98-
99 (Feb.) , illus.

Moore, Richard B. , joint author. See: Schlundt , Herman, 1909.

Morrell, Fred

1929 Stone forests of the Gallatin. Nature nag. , 13:105-06

(Feb. ) , illus.

The Gallatin Mountains, extending northward from the park.

Moulton, G. F. , joint author. See: Knappen, R. S. , 1920.

Nash, Arthur

1932 Emerald Spring. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:33 (Juno-July).
Its past volcanic activity. (In Norris Geyser Basin).

Newberry, J. S. , joint author. See: Hayden, Ferdinand Y. , 1869.

1884 Notes on the geology and botany of the country bordering
the Northern Pacific Railroad. New York Acacl. Sci. , Ann.
3:242-70 (Feb. 4) .

References to the Yellowstone Park region.

/

Newell, Frederick H.

1891 Discharge of Yellowstone River. U. S. Gool. Surv. , 12th
Ann. rept., 1891, pt.II:237, 238, 347.

120

GEOLOGY

Nowell, Frederick H. (Cont.).

1898 Progress of stream measurements: Yellowstone Basin, Yellow
stone River. U. S. Geol. Surv. , 19th Ann. rept., 1898, pt.
4:287-89, Ifc.

1900 Hydrography of Yellowstone River. U. S. Geol. Surv., -21st
Ann. rept., 1900, pt. 4:190.

1900a Yellowstone drainage basin. U. S. Geol. Surv. , 21st Ann.
rept. , pt. 4:190-92.

Norris , Philetus W.

1880 Prehistoric remains in Montana, between Fort Ellis and Yel
lowstone River. Smithsn.Lustn. ,Ann. rept., 1879, 327-28.

Oberhansley, Frank

1931 The Giant Geyser. Yellowstone nat . notes, 8:(.l]-2 (Sept.).
Description and chronological chart of eruptions.

Pardee, J. F. , joint author. See: Condit , D. Dale, 1927.

Parkinson, John

1901 Hollow spherulites of Yellowstone and Great Britain. Geol.
Soc. London, Quart, jour., 57:211-25, illus .

Peale, Albert

1872 Report of A.C. Peale , M.D. , on minerals , recks, and thermal
springs. U. S. Geol. Surv. of Montana and portions of
adjacent territories, 5th Ann. rept., 1871 : 165-204, ill us .
Observations on collections made on Hayden survey, chiefly

in park area; 627 specimens catalogued.

1873 [Geology of Yellowstone Park.] U. S. Geol. Surv. of the
Terrs., 6th Ann. rept., 1872:120-67, 176-78.

Contains much material on the thermal springs and geysers.
*

1877 Thermal springs and geysers. Perm, monthly, 8:507-28.

1879 The Laramie group of western Wyoming and adjacent regions.
U. S. Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs., Bui. ,5:195-200.

1879a Report on the geology of the Green River district. U. S.

Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs., llth Ann. rept., 1877:

509-646, illus.

Based on a survey of the district, including Grand Teton
and Yellowstone areas. Detailed information on drainage.

1883 Report on the thermal springs of the Yellowstone National

121

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Peale , Albert ( Cont . ) ,

Park. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser., 26:241-43 (Sept.).

1883a The thermal springs of Yellowstone National Park. U. S.

Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the Terrs., 12th Ann. rept., 1878;
pt. 11:65-454, illus., maps.

1886 List and analyses of the mineral springs of the United
States. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 32:183-84.

Penfield, S. L. , joint author. See: Iddings , Joseph P., 1891.

*Peterson, J. Roy
1936 Wyoming's newly discovered petrified forest. Travel, (Aug. ).

Phillips , Charles

1925 Beehive Geyser. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2:2 (Oct. 24).
An infrequently erupting geyser of the Upper Basin.

1925a Mammoth Hot Springs and formations. Yellowstone nat. notes
2:{.l]-2 (July 20).
Activity of the springs; description of the terraces.

1926 Conditions at Norris Geyser Basin. Yellowstone nat. notes
3:3 (May 31).

1926a Thermal activity in and about Gibbon Meadows. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 3:4-5 (Oct. 30).

1927 History of the Yellowstone Lake. In: Yellowstone ranger
nat. man., pp. 157-59. Yellowstone Nat].. Park.

Pirsson, Louis V.

1890 On mordenite. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser., 40:232-7 (Sept.).
Analysis of a zeolite species found near Hoodoo Mountain.

Platen, Paul

1909 Die fossilen Walder am Amethyst -Mount in Yellowstone Nation
al Park, und die mikroskopische Untersuchung ihrer Holzer.
Prometheus, 20:241-46 (Jan.), illus.
Discussion of the fossil woods of the park.

Powers , Sidney

1931 Drilling for geophysical data in Yellowstone Park. Am.
Assn. of Petrol. Geologists, Bui., 15:469 (Ap.).

122

GEOLOGY

*Raisz, E. G.

1931 A summary of geological events in. Yellowstone Park. Yel
lowstone Natl. Park, Fishing Bridge Museum, Ms., illus.

Raymond, Rossiter W. , joint author. See: De Lacy, W. W. , 1869.

Raymond, Rossiter W.

1889 Soaping geysers. Am. Inst. of Min. Engrs., Trans., 17:
449-54 (May 1888-Feb.l889) .

Read, Charles B. , and MacGinitic , Harry

1933 ... Fossil Floras of Yellowstone National Park and south
eastern Oregon. Carnegie Inst. of Wash.., Pub. 416 (Contrs.
to paleontol.). 68 pp., illus., map.

Resser, Charles E.

1925 Geological field-work in the Rocky Mountains. Smithsn.

Instn. , Miscel. colls., 77:19-23 ( Pub. 2794) , illus.

Includes information on Cambrian format ions in the park.

1930 Further studies of Cambrian geology in the Rocky Mountains.
Smithsn. Instn., Explorations and field-work in 1929, Pub.
3060:23-30, illus.
Cambrian rocks and their fossils in northwestern Wyoming.

Rogers , Austin F.

1921 Cristobalite in the spherulitic obsidian from Yellowstone
National Park. Am. mineralogist, 6:4-6 (Jan.).

Ruhle , George C .

1928 Electric Peak and the Gallatin Range. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 5:7-8 (Dec.l) , illus.

Explains the formation of these mountains.

1929 Boiling point phenomena. In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man.,
pp. 83-86, illus. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

The physics of thermal action in geysers and hot springs.

*Russell, Carl P.

1930 The hot spots of Yellowstone Park. Yellowstone Natl. Park.
Norris Museum, Ms.

Summarizes knowledge on hydrothermal activity, upon which
the petrology and geochemistry exhibits in Norris Museum are based.

Russell, Israel

1834 Existing glaciers. U. S. Geol. Surv. , 5th. Ann. rept., 1884

303-55, illus.

Contains information on the glaciers of Yellowstone.

123

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Russell, Israel (Cont.)

1905 Hanging valleys. Geol. Soc. Am., Bui., 16:75-90 (Feb. 87).
The glacier -formed hanging valleys of Yellowstone are noted.

Rutley, Frank, and Secies, Janes

1881 Microscopic characters of vitreous rocks of Montana. G-eol.

Soc. London, Quart, jour., 37:391-99, illus.

Various specimens, some collected in the park.

St. John, Orestes

1879 [Geology of Jackson Hole , Wyoming.] U. S. Geol. and Geog.
Surv. of the Terrs., llth Ann. rept . , 1877:443-48.

Salisbury, R. D. , joint author. See: Chamberlain, Thomas C., 1914.

[Sawyer , Edmund J . ]

1924 Break occurs in the formations at Mammoth Hot Springs.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:5 (Sept. 20).

1924a Further hot springs changes. Yellowstone nat.notes,!:! (June)

Scherer, Norman W.

1931 Emerald Spring at Norris Geyser Basin. Yellowstone nat.

notes, 9:16 (Mar.) .

Once quiet, it now erupts violently and frequently.

Schlundt , Herman, and Moore, Richard B.

1909 Radioactivity of the thermal waters of Yellowstone National
Park. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 395, 35 pp., illus.

Study of waters, gases, rocks, and residues from the springs
to determine causes of their radioactivity.

Schultz, Alfred R.

1910 Deposits of sodium salts in Wyoming. U. S. Geol. Surv.,
Bui. 430:570-89, illus., maps , bibliog.

Considers especially the mineral springs of Yellowstone.

Scott, Harold W.

1935 Some carboniferous stratigraphy in Montana and northwestern
Wyoming. Jour, of Geol. , 43 :1011-32( Nov. -Dec. ), illus. ,maps.

Sheridan, Philip H. , and Sherman, William T.

1878 Reports of inspection made in the summer of 1877. U.S. War
Dept., Rept., 1877, 110 pp., maps.
Contains geological observations on Yellowstone valley.

, and others

1883 Report of an exploration of parts of Wyoming, Idaho, and Mon
tana... 1882. Am. jour., sci., 3d ser. ,26: 241-43 (Sept.).
Contains observations on geysers in Yellowstone.

124

GEOLOGY

Sherman, William T. , joint author. See: Sheridan, Philip H. , 1878

Shimer, Hervey W.

1935 Yellowstone fossil forests. In his: An introduction to
earth history, pp. 246-47. Boston, Ginn and co.

Skinner, Curtis K.

1932 Thermal phenomena in the Upper Geyser Basin. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 9:32 (June-July), illus.

Skinner, Milton P.

1924 The Yellowstone nature book. Chicago, McClure, 229 pp.
Contains considerable material on geology of the park.

Smith, James P.

1904 The comparative stratigraphy of the marine Trias of west
ern America. Calif. Acad. Sci., Proc. , 3d ser. , 1:326-
408, illus., map, bibliog.
Includes notes on Triassic fossils from the Grand Canyon

of the Yellowstone.

Sosman, Robert B.

1924 Notes on the discussion of the papers presented in the sym
posium on hot springs and a general summary .... Jour, of
geol. , 32:468-71 (Aug. -Sept .).
The thermal waters of Yellowstone are among those considered.

Stanton, T. W.

1899 Mesozoic fossils. U.S. Geol. Surv. ,Monog. 32, pt. II: 600-50, illus

Names and describes 78 Mesozoic invertebrate fossils found
in or near Yellowstone National Park.

Stanton, T.W. , joint author. See: Hague, Arnold, 1899b.

Stork, Harvey E.

1928 The naturalist 'history of Yellowstone National Park. In:
Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 99-106, illus. Yellow
stone Natl. Park.

1931 Report: Excavation in the fossil forest, Yellowstone National
Park, by the Third Scout Naturalist Expedition. Natl. Park
Serv. , 14 pp., illus. Berkeley, Calif.

Tarr, Ralph S.

1898 Geology of the Yellowstone National Park. Independent,
50:1406-08 (Nov. 17) ; 1572-76 (Dec.l) .

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Thorn, W. T. , jr.

1922 Relation of deep-seated faults to surface structure in the

region northeast of the Yellowstone Pan: plateau. Geol.

Soc. An., Bui. ,33:99 (Mar.), (Abstract).

Thone , Frank

1927 The genesis of Yellowstone National Park. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp»48-50. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Tilden, Josephine E.

1897 Soine new species of Minnesota algae which live in a calcar
eous or siliceous matrix. Bot. gaz. , 25:95-104 (Jan.), illus
Reference to incrustation by calcium carbonate of articles

submerged in waters of certain springs at Maiomoth Hot Springs.

Tilliaan, Samuel S.

1893 Fossil forests of the Yellowstone. Pop. sci. mo., 43:301-

07 (July) , illus.

Their origin; area of 9 stratified forests described.

From Tilliaan and Mer cur's report to War Department.

Tomlinson, C. W.

1917 The middle Paleozoic stratigraphy of the central Rocky

Mountain region. Jour, of Geol. ,25:112-34 (Feb. -Mar. ) ;

244-57 (Ap.-May); 373-94 ( May- June ), illus., maps.

Contains information on the Ordovician, Silurian, and Devo
nian history of Yellowstone; describes Cell at in formation.

*Toula, Franz

1887 Der Yellows tone -National Park, der vulkanische Ausbruch
auf Neu Seeland, und das Geiser-Phanomen: Ein Vortag ge-
halten in Vereine Zur Verbreitung Naturwissenschaft-licher
Kenntnisse. (Vienna, Jan. 10, 1887).

Traphagen, F. W.

1904 Death Gulch. Sci., n.s. , 19:632-34 (Ap.).
Origin and action of its poisonous gas.

*Ule, 0.
1872 Die Geyser und das Geyserland am Yellowstone Fluss in

Nordamerika. Nature, (London) , 21:340-2; 345-7; 363-6;372-5.

United States. Coast and Geodetic Survey

1926 Precise elevations [in park]. Yellowstone nat. notes,
3:3 (June). Data also in ranger nat. man., 1927:72-74.

126

GEOLOGY

*United States. Geographic Board

1930 Decisions, place names, Yellowstone National Park. Wash
ington, Govt. print, off., (May 7).

Van Orstrand, C. E.

1924 Temperatures in some springs and geysers in Yellowstone....
Jour, of geol., 32:194-225 (Ap.-May) , illus. , map.

Walcott, Charles D.

1899 Cambrian fossils. U.S. Geol. Surv. ,Monog.3L, pt. II, 440-78.
Genera, species of park Cambrian fauna; several plates.

, joint author. See: Hague, Arnold, 1899b.

1917 Geological explorations in the Rocky Mountains. Smithsn.

Instn. , Ann. rept., 1916:5-6.

Investigations in Yelloivstone to determine effect of algae
ard bacteria upon deposits of geysers and hot springs.

Walton, George, E.

1873 American geysers. In his: Mineral springs, United States

and Canada, pp. 326-30. New York, Appleton.

Notes on discovery of the Yellowstone geysers by the Gener
al Washburn party; analyses of sediments fron the geysers.

*Ward, Lester F.

1885 Synopsis of the flora of the LarardLe group. U. S. Geol.
Surv. , 6th Ann. rept., 1884-5, pt. 1:389-557 , illus.
Contains notes on fossil plant beds of Yellowstone Lake.

r — ]

1887 National Yellowstone Park. U. S. Geol. Surv., 8th Ann.
rept., 1886-87, pt . 11:909-11.

Describes discoveries of fossil plants in the park by Geol
ogists Hague, Kuntze, Holmes, Hayden, and Knowlton.

*Weed, Walter H.

1888 Formation of travertine and siliceous sinter by the vegeta
tion of hot springs. U.S. Geol. Surv. ,9th Ami. rept., p. 619

1889 A deadly gas spring. . .[Death Gulch]. Sci. ,13:130-2(Feb.l5) ,

1889a Diatom, marshes and diatom beds , Yellowstone National Park.
Bot. gaz., 14:117-20 (May).

1888b Formation of travertine and siliceous sinter by the vege
tation of hot springs. U. S. Geol. Surv., 9th Ann. rept.,
1888:613-76, illus.

127

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Weed, Walter H. (Cont.)

Processes which create the terraces and other formations of
the park; 15 photo-engravings.

1889c On the formation of siliceous sinter by the vegetation of
thermal springs. Arn. jour, sci., 3d ser., 37:551-9 (May).
The importance of algae to the formation of sinter.

1891 A gold-bearing hot spring deposit. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser.,
42:166-9 (Aug.) .

Compares gold-bearing ore from a hot spring deposit in
Australia with siliceous sinter from Yellowst one hot spring terraces.
No metalliferous deposits have been found in Yellowstone.

1891a The mineral waters of the ...Park. Sci., 17:36-7 (Jan. 16).
Analyses of hot springs waters; medicinal value noted.

Weed, Walter H. , and Pirsson, Louis V.

1891b Occurrence of sulphur , orpiment , and realgar in Yellowstone
National Park. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser., 42:401-5 (Nov.).

1892 Fossil forests of Yellowstone. Columbia Univ. School of
Mines, Quart., 13:230-36 (Ap.)., illufi.

1893 The formation of Yellowstone hot-spring deposits. Internatl,
Cong. Geol., Conpte rendu, 5th sess., pp. 360-63.

1893a The glaciation of the Yellowstone Valley north of the park.

U. S. Geol. Surv. , Bui. 104:11-41, illus . , map.
„

1893b The Laramie and the overlying Livingston formation in Mon
tana. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 105:1-41.

1893c The Yellowstone "Geyserland. " Smithsn. Instn. , Ann. rept. ,

1891:163-78, illus.

Description, physics, and water analyses of geysers; special
reference to those of Yellowstone.

1898 Travertine. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 150: 99-101, illus.
Includes photos of the terraces at Mammoth Hot Springs.

1898a Unaltered sedimentary rocks of chemical origin; siliceous
sinter. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 150: 91-93, illus.
Notes on formation of the Yellowstone mounds , cones, and

terraces by interaction of algae and silica from the hot waters.

1898b Weed party, Montana. U. S. Geol. Surv., 19th Ann. rept.,
pt. II: 42-43.
Notes changes occurring in park geysers and hot springs,

128

GEOLOGY

Weed, Walter H. , and Pirsson, Louis V. (Cont.).

1899 Geology of the southern end of the Snowy Range. U.S.
Geol. Surv. , Monog. 32, pt .11:203-14, illus.

This range extends into the northeast part of Yellowstone.

Weed, Walter H. , joint author. See; Hague, Arnold, 1899b.

1900 Mineral vein deposits forming in ... Park. U.S. Geol.
Surv,, 21st Ann. rept., 1900, pt .11:233-55, illus., map.

1912 Geysers. U. S. Dept . Int., 29 pp., illus.

Geyser regions of the world, particularly Yellowstone.

1928 Geysers of the Yellowstone National Park. Washington,
Natl. Park Serv. , 27 pp.

1936 Geysers of Yellowstone National Park. Washington, Govt.
print, off., 28 pp., illus., map. (A reprint).

Wentworth, C. K. , and Delo, D. M.

1931 Dinwoody Glaciers, Wind River Mountains, Wyoming; with a

brief survey of existing glaciers in the United States.

Geol. soc. Am., Bui. ,42:605-20, illus., map.

Contains description of glaciers in the mountain range
southeast of Yellowstone and Grand Teton national parks.

*Wherry, Edgar T.

1916 Calcite rosettes [from Yellowstone National Park.]
Smithsn. Misc. colls., 66:19-23, illus.

1916a A remarkable occurrence of calcite in silicified wood.
U. S. Natl. Mus., Proc., 53:227-30, illus.
Description and discussion of specimens from the park.

1917 Calcite in silicified wood. Washington, Acad. of Sci. ,
jour., 7:433-4. (Abstract of above).

White, Charles A.

1883 On the commingling of ancient faunal and modern floral

types in the Laramie group. Am. jour, sci., 3d ser., 26:

120-3 (Aug.).

Contains a partial list of fossil plants from the Laramie
strata of Yellowstone Valley.

Whitfield, J. Edward, joint author. See: Gooch, F. A., 1888.

1889 Scorodite from Yell ows tone Park. U.S. Geol. Surv. , Bui. 55: 65-6.

129

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Whitfield, R.P.

1876 Report of reconnaissance frora Carroll, Montana Territory,

on'the upper Missouri, to the Yellowstone National Park.

U. S. Engr. Dept.-, 155pp. ,illus. , maps .

Contains report on fossil discoveries, by Whitfield.

Whitney, Milton, and Means , Thomas H.

1898 Alkali soils of the Yellowstone Valley. TJ. s. Dept. Agr. ,
Bui. 14, 39 pp. , illus. , maps.

Wilcoi, Early V.

1901 A visit to the hoodoos of Wyoming. Land of sunshine, 15:

209-23 (Oct.) , illus.

Unusual granite formations, mostly in Yellowstone.

Willey, Day A.

1903 The geysers of Yellowstone Park. Sci. Am., supp. , 55:
22575-76 ( Jan. 3) ., illus.

Woodring, S. T.

1926 Official census, animals. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:2-4,

(June 30) .

Contains also elevations determined by Coast and Geodetic
Survey; surface temperatures of hot springs by Carnegie Institute.

Yeager, Dorr G.

1929 The new geyser. Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 96-99.
Yellowstone National Park.

*Zondervan, H.

1891 Geysers. Tigdschr. Kon. Nederl. Aardr. , Genootschap,
pp. 444-84.

130

FLORA

FLOWERS, FLAM'S, TREES, AND SHRUBS

Anonymous

1924 Flowers on Mount Washburn. Yellowstone nat. notes, l:[l]
(July 5).

1924a Some curious choices. Yellowstone nat. notes, l:l-2( July5) .

1926 Distribution of animal life in, Yellowstone National Park.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:4-6 (Ap.30).

Typical plant and animal indicators of each life zone.

1927 Poisonous plants. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:3 (May),illus.

1928 Hard woods in the Yellowstone. -Am. forests and forest
life, 34:316 (May).

1928a Pines j(Pinus). Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:4-5 (May),illus.
Albertson, Herma G-. See: Baggley, Henna G« ( Albert son ).

Anderson, A. A.

1927 The Yellowstone Forest Reserve. Annals of Wyo. , 4:378-

88 (Ap.).

This is our oldest national forest reserve.

Armstrong, Katherine

1898 The flowers of Yellowstone Park. Independ. , 50:562 (Ap.28).

Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley)

1926 Thermal algae. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:4 (June 30).
Effect of algae and water temperatures on the coloring of

the Mammoth Hot Springs terraces.

1927 Yellowstone Park algae. In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man.,
pp. 96-98. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

, joint author. See: Yeager, Dorr G. , 1929.

1930 Mentzelia — the evening star of the western sage. Yellow
stone nat. notes, 7:17 (Mar.), illus.
Notes on a night -flowering desert plant of the park.

Baggley, Herma G. (Albertson)

1927 Trees of Yellowstone Park. In: Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 105-12. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

131

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Baggley, Henna G. (Albertson) , continued

1928 Flower notes from Old Faithful. Yellowstone nat. notes,
5:8 (Aug.l).

1928a Flowers of Yellowstone National Park. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 107-10, illus. Yellowstone Natl.
Park.

1929 Boats that sail in hot water. Yellowstone nat. notes,
6:4 (Nov.l) , illus.

Description of the diatoms found in hot springs.

1929a Flowers of Yellowstone National Park (Old Faithful area).
In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 34-58. Yellowstone
Natl. Park.

1929b Mid-summer attractions. Yellowstone nat. notes, 6:3-4
(Aug. ) , illus.
Description of the lupine and the cow parsnip.

1929c Questions and answers [°n park botany.]. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 14-16. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

1929d ' Some preliminary studies of the algae of Mammoth Hot Springs
Ms. in the Yellowstone Mus.

1930 Bear grass in Yellowston*. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:38
(July) , illus.

Description of a lily reported the first time in the park.

1930a Poisonous plants, exclusive of fungi, of the Yellowstone
National Park. Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.

1931 Yellowstone's "big trees." Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:65-
66 (Sept.) , illus.

Describing a moss-like, pigmy forest of the world's tiniest
trees, Dodge willows (Salix dodgeana) .

1932 Yellowstone conifers. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:52-54
(Dec.) , illus.

1933 Yellowstone plant communities. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:
18-19 (May- June).

• joint author. Seo: McDougall, W.B., 1936.

132

FLORA

Blankinship , J.W.

1904 A century of botanical exploration in Montana. Mont.

Agric. Coll., Sci. studies, 1:3-31 (Nov.), bibliog.

Lists botanical collections made, with names of collectors
and specific areas covered by each one.

Bodenberg, E.T.

1936 Calypso, Venus* slipper. Yellowstone nat. notes, 13:47-48

(Sept. -Oct.) , illus.

Description of this orchid and its habitats.

Brandegee , Townshend S.

1899 Yellowstone Park Forest Reserve (southern part). U.S.
Geol. Surv. , 19th Ann. rept., 1898, pt. 7:213-16.

[Burke, H.E.]

1932 Two destructive defoliators of lodgepole pine in the Yellow
stone National Park. U.S. Dept. of Agric., Circ.224, 20 pp.,
illus. , bibliog.

The lodgepole needle-tier and the lodgepole sawfly.

Campbell, Douglas H.

1926 Yellowstone Park. In His: An outline of plant geography,
p. 116. New York, Macmillan.

Gary, Merritt

1917 Life zone investigations in Wyoming. U.S. Biol. Surv. ,

No. Am. Fauna, no. 42, 95 pp. , illus., map.

The author fully describes both flora and fauna.

Chittenden, Hiram M.

1933 Flora of the Yellowstone. In his: Yellowstone National
Park, pp. 220-23, 231-39, illus. New ed. , Stanford Univ.
(Calif.) press.

Clark, L. , and Fry, T.C.

1931 Liverworts new to Wyoming and Washington, etc. Bryologist ,

34:82-83 (Nov.).

Refers to the liverworts of the Yellowstone region.

Coffraan, J.D. , and McCartor, Kenneth C.

1931 Report on landscape features and forestry values for the

area between Grand Teton and Yellowstone National Parks.

Washington, D.C. , Ms. in office of director of Natl. Park

Serv., 10 pp., illus., maps.

Conard, Henry S.

1925 Flowers. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2:4 (July 20).

133

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Conard, Henry S. , continued

Brief notes on flowers of various localities in the park.

1928 Flora of Yellowstone National Park (tabulation): Flowering
plants. In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 49-57, illus.

Yellowstone Natl. Park.
*

1930 Biotic communities of Yellowstone National Park. Ms. in
Yellowstone Mus.

Condon, David.

1931 Mount Washburn. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:59 (Aug. ), illus.
Mentions both flora and fauna.

*Coulter, J.M.

1873 Botany. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs. , 6th Ann. rept.,
1872 (Hayden). Washington, Govt. print, off.

Davis , Bradley M.

1897 The vegetation of the hot springs of Yellowstone Park.
Sci., n.s., 6:(_145]-57 (July 30), illus.

Norwood, W.H.

1882 Report on botanical observations and collections. In: Ex
pedition through the Big Horn Mountains, Yellov/stone Park,
etc., [under] Gen. P.H. Sheridan (1881). Washington, Govt.
print, off.

1882a Report on natural history. In: Report of an exploration of
parts of Wyoming, Idaho and Montana in 1882 [under] Gen. P.
H. Sheridan. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Frye, T.C.

1910 The polytrichaceae of western North America. Wash. Acad.
of Sci., Proc. , 12:271-328 (Aug. 15) , illus.

, joint author. See: Clark, Lois, 1931.

Goode, Richard U.

1898 Bitter Root Forest Reserve. Natl. geog. mag., 9:387-400

( Sept . ) , illus . , map .

Principally reporting on a geological survey of the reserve.

Hagge, Harold P.

1926 Trees of Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone riat. notes,
3:3-4 (Oct. 30).

[Hague, Arnold]

134

FLORA

1888 The Yellowstone Park as a forest reservation. Nation,
46:9-10 (Jan. 5).
Importance of the forests as agents of water conservation.

Harvey, R.B.

1924 Enzymes of thermal algae. Sci., n.s., 60:481-82 (Nov. 21).

Notes on distribution of enzymes in thermal algae, from a
study of the Yellowstone thermal waters.

Hawkins , Pliny H.

1924 The trees and shrubs of Yellowstone National Park. Men-

asha, Wis., George Banta pub. co., 125 pp., illus.

"A scientific and popular description of all the trees and
shrubs, with special reference to their economic use and their re
lations to wild life."

Hurdle, Frank M.

1932 Flowers on Mount Washburn. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:36-
37 (Aug. -Sept.).

Jacobson, Arthur.

1936 Weather damage to coniferous trees in Yellowstone. Yel
lowstone nat. notes, 13:55-56 (Sept .-Oct . ) , illus.

Kirkwood, Joseph E.

1930 Northern Rocky Mountain trees and shrubs. Stanford Univ.
(Calif.) press, 340 pp., illus.

Knowlton, Frank E.

1898 Standing fossil forests of Yellowstone National Park.
Plant world, 1:53-55 (Jan.), illus.

1900 Flora of the Montana formation. U. S. Geol. Surv. , Bui. 163,

118 pp. , illus.

Contains material on Yellowstone, Grand Teton, and Rocky
Mountain national parks.

Leiberg, John B.

1904 Forost conditions in the Absaroka division of the Yellowstone

Foi-sst Reserve and the Livingston and Big Timber quadrangles.

U.S. Geol. Surv., Prof. pap. 29, 149 pp., illus., maps.

Lindsley, Marguerite. See: Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley) .
McCarter, Kenneth C., joint author. See: Coffman, J.D. , 1931.

McDougall, W.B.

1929 The coral root— a mystery plant. Yellowstone nat. notes,

135

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

McDougall, W.B. , continued
6:4 (Sept.l) , illus.

1930 Mushrooms and fairy rings. Yellowstone nat. notes ,7:55(Aug. )

1930a The smallest seed plant that grows. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 7:40 (July), illus.
Refers to duckweed at Old Faithful.

1931 The battle of the sagebrush. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:

50 (Aug.).

Explanation of the slow disappearance of sagebrush from

Yellowstone Park.

1931a Key to Yellowstone National Park wild flowers. Yellow
stone Natl. Park, 32 pp.

1931b Plants from Stevenson Island, Lake Yellowstone. Yellow
stone nat. dotes, 8:[7l]-73 (Oct.).

1932 Poisonous Mishrooms . Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:38-39
( Aug . -Sept . ) , i llus .

Describes the deadly poisonous Amanita.

1933 Forget-me-not. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10 : 19 -20 (May- June ).

1933a Spruce-fir forest at Canyon. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:
20-21 (May- June) .

, and Baggley, Henna G-. (Albertson)

1936 Plants of Yellowstone National Park. Washington, Natl.

Park Serv. , 160 pp., illus. Govt. print, off.

Profusely illustrated with photographs. Contains a key to
identification, and indexes to common and scientific names.

Newberry, J.S.

1884 Notes on the geology and botany of the country bordering

on the Northern Pacific Railroad. N.Y. Acad. of Sci. ,

Annals , 3 : 242-70 ( Feb . 4) .

Contains references to the Yellowstone Park region.

Niel, Van C.B., and Thayer, L.A.

1930 Report on preliminary observations on the roicroflora in

and near the hot springs in Yellowstone National Park and
their importance for the geological forme ':,ions . Ms. in
Yellowstone Mus .

Parry, C.C.

136

FLORA

1874 Botanical observations in western Wyoming ,. Am. natural
ist, 8:9-14(Jan.) ;102-08(Feb. ) ;175-80(Mar. ); 211-15 (Ap.).
All observations were made in or near Yellowstone. The

third installment is an appendix describing new species.

1875 Botanical report. In: Report upon the reconnaissance of
northwestern Wyoming, including Yellowstone National Park,
made in the summer of 1873, pp. 308-14. Washington, Govt.
print, off., 331 pp., illus . , maps, app.

*Peale, A.C.

1883 Life in hot springs. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs., 12th
Ann. rept., pt .11:358-60. (Hayden survey of 1878).
Washington, Govt. print, off.

Phillips , Charles

1927 Life zones of Yellowstone Park. In: Yellowstone ranger

nat. man., pp. 59-67, illus. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

The factors involved in the differentiation of life zones.
Description of the zones in the Yellowstone area, and their respect
ive indicators.

*Porter, T.C.

1872 Catalogue of plants. U.S. Geol. Surv. of Mont, and por
tions of adjacent terrs. » 5th Ann. rept. (Hayden). Wash
ington, Govt. print, off.

Povah, Alfred H.
1931 Poison ivy.

Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:75 (Oct.), illus.

1931a Witches' brooms and burls. Yellowstone nat. notes t 8:69

(Sept.) , illus.

Describing irregularities in tree growth caused by mistle
toe and fungus rust.

Roell
1890

I.

Vorlaufige Mittheilungen uber die von mi r [iin] Jahre 1888
in Nord Amerika gesammelten neuen Arten und Varietaten der
Laubrose. (Scouleria aquatica catilliforiois C. Mull.; Or-
thotrichum praemorsum Vent. ; Amblystegium Scholtthaneri) .
Botanische Centralblatt , no. 51, 13 pp.

"Current information concerning new species and varieties
of leaf rose collected by myself in North America in 1888."

Rydberg, Per Axel

1900 Catalogue of the flora of Montana and the Yellowstone Na- .
tional Park. N.Y. Bot. Garden, Mems., vol.1, 492 pp., maps

137

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Published also by the New Era, Lancaster, Pa. , 492 pp. ,
with folded map and added title-page.

Sawyer , Edmund J .

1926 Distribution of animal life in Yellowstone National Park.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:4-6 (Ap.30).

The life zones of the park and their flora and fauna.

1926a The Firehole River in winter. Yellowstone nat. notes,
3:6-7 (Mar.).
Remarks on the plants and animals of the region.

1927 Death of Ranger Charles Phillips. Yellowstone nat. notes,
4:1-2 (Ap.).

Poisonous wild parsnip was the cause of death.

Schaffnar, J.H.

1928 Collecting horsetails along the way. Am. fern jour., 18:
14-21 (Jan. -Mar.).

Account of a trip from Columbus, Ohio, to Yellowstone, and
the varieties of equisetum collected on route and in the park.

*Setchell, W.
1903 The uppor temperature limits of life. Sci. n.s., 17:934-37,

A paper based on investigations of plant life in the hot
waters of Yellowstone.

Sheridan, Phillip H. , and Sherman, William T.

1878 Reports of inspection made in the summer of 1877. U.S.

War Dept . , Rept., 1877, 110 pp., maps.

Contains botanical notes made during the reconnaissance of
the Yellowstone and Big Horn valleys.

Sherman, William T. , joint author. See: Sheridan, Philip H. , above.

Skinner, Milton P.

1924 The Yellowstone nature book. Chicago, McClurg, 229 pp.,
illus. , map.

Smiley,[Dwight] C.

1933 A key to the mosses of Yellowstone National Park. Grin-
nell College, Iowa, the author, 13 pp., illus.

Stewart, T. Thomas

1930 Shaving brushes. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:59 (Sept.)

Filamentous algae with a central core of gelatinous silica,
found in a pool near Grand and Spasmodic geysers.

138

FLORA

Stork, Harvey E.

1927 Introduced plants in the Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 4:6-7 (July), illus.'

The task of preserving the primeval nature of the park is
complicated by the introduction of exotic plants.

1928 Yellowstone botany questions answered. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 25-31. Yellowstone Natl. Park,

1931 Report on a biological survey of Stevenson Island in Yel
lowstone Lake, by the Third Scout Naturalist Expedition.
Natl. Park Serv. , Field Div. of Educ., Berkeley, Calif.,
11 pp. , illus.

Thayer, L.A. , joint author. See: Niel, Van C.B., 1930.

Thone, Frank E.A.

1923 Trees and flowers of Yellowstone National Park, St. Paul,

J.E. Haynes , 70 pp., illus.

Sketches by Margaret Thone and photographs by J.E. Haynes.

1927 The genesis of the Yellowstone National Park. In: Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 48-50. Yellowstone Natl. Park.
Development of flora and fauna since the glacial epoch.

*Tilden, Josephine E.

1897 On some algal stalactites of the Yellowstor.e National Park.
Bot . gaz . , vol . 22 .

1897a Some new species of Minnesota algae which live in a cal
careous or siliceous matrix. Bot. gas., 23:95-104 (Jan.),
illus .

Contains reference to the incrustation by calcium carbon
ate of articles submerged in hot springs of Yellowstone Park.

Tweedy, Frank

1886 Flora of the Yellowstone National Park. Washington, B.C.,
the author, 78 pp.

1888 The forests of the Yellowstone National Park. Garden and
forest, 1:129-30 (May 9).

United States. National Museum

1916 Geological explorations in the Rocky Mountains. Explora
tions and field work of the Smithsonian Institution, 1915.
Smithsn. Instn. , Misc. colls., 66:1-27 (no. 3) , illus.

139

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

United States National Museum, continued

Report of an expedition under C.D. Walcott, to study plant
and animal life in the thermal waters, and to collect geological
specimens from Yellowstone Perk.

*Weed, Walter H.

1889 Diatom marshes and diatom beds, Yellowstone National Park.
Bot. gaz. , 14:117-20.

1888a Formation of travertine and siliceous sinter by the vege
tation of hot springs. In: U.S. G-eol. Surv. , 9th Ann.
rept., 1837-88:613-76, illus.
Detailed account of the processes which create the terraces

and other formations of Yellowstone, with 15 photo-engravings.

1889b Vegetation of hot springs. Am. naturalist, 23:394-40G(May)
Compares springs of yellowstone with those of other lands.

Yeager, Dorr G.

1988 The evergreens of the Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes,
5:3-5 (May 1); 3-4 (June l) ; 7-8 (July 1); 4-5 ( Aug. l) , illus,

, and Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley)

1929 Latin and common names of some Yellowstone plants. In:

Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 59-63. Yellowstone

Natl. Park.

*Zeile, Elsie M.

1927 Wild flowers on the Yellowstone outing. Sierra Club,
Bui., 12:346-48 (no. 4).

140

FAUNA
BIRDS . AMPHIBIANS . AND REPTILES

Anonymous

1924 Birds. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:2-3 (June 20).

1924a The phalarope. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:4 (July 21).

1926 Sage hens and sandhill cranes seen. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 3:6 (Oct .30) .

1927 Counting wild fowl. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:3-5
(Sept. 30), illus.

Notes on the U.S. Biological Survey wild fowl census,
with some figures on birds observed in Yellowstone.

1928 A bird lunch counter. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:5-7
(Jan.l) , illus.

Remarks on peculiar feeding habits of the Clark nutcracker.

1928a Fool hens. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:6-7 (Feb.l).

How this species of Richardson grouse acquired its nickname.

1928b Rosy finches find shelter at Mammoth. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 5:7-8 (Jan.l), illus.
Describes three species of rosy finches that winter here.

1931 Saving the trumpeter swan. Sci. Am., 145:412 (Dec.).

At this date Yellowstone harbored the only known specimens.

1932 Notes on the trumpeter swan. Bird lore, 34:241-42 (May-June)
Extinction threatened; proposals for preservation.

1934 Trumpeter gains. Nature mag., 23:257 (May).

Adams, G-. Clarence „ i

1919 The wild animals of Yellowstone Park. Overland mo., 74:
91-102 (Aug.) , illus.

Agerter, Kenneth S.

1932 A record snake found. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:33-34

(June -July) .

Rubber snake (Charina bottae utahensis).

Albertson, Herna B. See: Baggley, Herma G. (Albertson) .
Albright, Horace M.

141

YEILOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

1924 Birds. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:2 (June 20).
Names the most interesting species in tho park.

Anderson, Frank H.

1932 Our feathered friends of winter. Yellowstone nat. notes,
9:9 (Jan. -Feb.), illus.

Report on birds seen on a ski trip to Thoroughfare Creek.

1933 A stranger [oldsquaw duck], visits Yellowstone. Yellow
stone nat. notes, 10:12-13 (Mar.-Ap.).

, and Coleinen, Lee

1936 Winter bird residents at Lake Yellowstone. Yellowstone

nat. notes, 13:25-28 (May-June).

Notes on near extinction of trumpeter swan, wood duck,
and whooping crane.

Arnold, E.R.

1932 "Big-eye Chick." Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:57 (Dec.).
The rare snowy owl was seen fishing in the park.

Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley) , and Arnold, E.R.

1930 The rare pygmy [owl]. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:Ll] (Feb.

1930a Stork [wood ibis] visits Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 7: [30] (June) .

Baggley, George

1928 Yellowstone waterfowl as entertainers. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 5:6-7 (July).

Baggley, Henna G. (Albertson)

1928 A new genus for Yellowstone [the rubber snake], Yellow
stone nat. notes, 5:6-7 (Sept.l).

Bailey, Alfred M.

1935 White pelican. Bird lore, 37:329-36 (Sept .-Oct. ).

Bailey, Vernon

1930 Animal life of Yellowstone National Park. Springfield,
111., Thomas, 241 pp., illus., map.

Barrows, Maynard, and others

1933 Waterfowl on the Madison and Firehole Rivers. Yellow
stone nat. notes, 10:43-47 (Nov. -Dec.), illus.

Bergtold, W.H.

142

FAUNA: BIRDS, AMPHIBIANS, REPTILES

. 1924 The saw-whet pwl in Yellowstone Park. Auk, 41:602 (Oct.).

Black, Edna M.

1930 Animals and birds of Yellowstone National Park. Flower
grower, 17:7-8 (Jan.), illus.

Bole, B.P. , joint author. See: Fuller, Arthur B. , 1930.

* Chapman, Frank M.
1908 Camps and cruises of an ornithologist, 438 pp., New York.

Colenan, Lee, joint author. See: Anderson, Frank, 1936.

Conard, Henry S.

1927 Some Yellowstone Park birds. In: Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 90-96. 'Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Cope, E.D.

1872 Recent reptiles and fishes of the survey. U.S.Geol.Surv.

of Mont, and portions of adjacent terrs., 5th Ann. rept.,

1871:467-76.

*Coues, Elliott

1874 Birds of the Northwest. U. S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs.,
7th Ann. rept. , [1873?]. Washington, Govt. print, off.

*Crook, Compton, Jr.

1930 The birds of Molly Island. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:50-
51 (Aug.).

1932 Golden eagles at Fishing Bridge. Yellowstone nat. notes,
9:42 (Aug. -Sept. ) .

, joint author. See: Stewart, J.T. , Jr., 1931.

Crowe , George

1933 Swan observations: October, 1933. Yellowstone nat. notes,
10:41-42 (Nov. -Dec.), illus.

Dart , Sheldon

1932 Waterfowl and weather. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:39-40

( Aug . -Sept . ) , illus .

Bufflehead and ring -neck- ducks (new species), and swans.

Dixon, Joseph S.

1930 The wood ibis in Yellowstone National Park. Condor, 32:
288-89 (Nov. -Dec.).

143

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Dixon, Josephs., continued

1931 Nevada savannah sparrow breeds in Yellowstone. Condor,
33:38 (Jan.).

1931a Save the trumpeter swan. Am. forests, Aug. ,451-54,478,492,
*

1931b Present status of the trumpeter swan. Ms. in the office
of the Director, Natl. Park Serv. , Washington.
Read at the American Game Conference, Dec. 1, 1931.

*Edge, Mrs. C.N.

1931 The last of the white pelican. New York, Emerg. Conserv.
Com. (a pamphlet).

Fuller, Arthur B. , and Bole, B.P., Jr.

1930 Observations on some Wyoming birds. Cleveland Mus. of Nat,

Hist., Sci. pubs., vol.1, no. 2, 80 pp., illus. (Sept. 27).

Lists, describes, and indicates distribution of species.

Gignoux, Claude

1920 Note on the nesting habits of the osprey in Yellowstone
Park. Condor, 22:205 (Nov.).

Grave, Benjamin H.

1913 The birds of Wyoming. Laramie , Univ. of Wyo., 137 pp.,

illus. , bibliog.

A distributional list, with habitats indicated. This paper
appears to have been reprinted (and revised?) in collaboration with
E.P. Walker in 1916. (Univ. of Wyo. Bui., vol.12, no. 6, Feb.).

*Grinnell, George B.

1875 List of mammals and birds. Reconnaissance from Carroll,
Montana, to Yellowstone National Park [undor] William
Ludlow. Washington, Govt. print, off.

*Hall, M.C.

1930 Report on parasites of pelican, and trout investigations at
Yellowstone Lake, 1930. Ms. in the Yellowstone Mus.

Hanks , Allyn F .

1931 Waterfowl at Yellowstone Lake. Yellowstone nat. notes,

8:82 (Nov. -Dec.).
*

1932 Waterfowl in the Yellowstone. Parks and rec., Jan.: 300.

Kearns, William E.

1936 Observations of some Yellowstone Park birds. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 13:28-30 ( May - June ), illus.

144

FAUNA: BIRDS, AMPHIBIANS, REPTILES

1936a Western harlequin duck. Yellowstone nat. notes, 13:24-
25 (May- June ) .

Kelly, Harry M.

1929 The birds of the Lake Yellowstone region. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 113-17. Yellowstone Katl.Park.

Kemsies, Emerson

1930 Birds of the Yellowstone National Park, with some recent
additions. Wilson Bui. , 42:198-210 (Sept.).

Knight, Wilbur C.

1902 The birds of Wyoming. Univ. of Wyo. Exper. Sta. , Bui.

55, 174 pp. (Sept.). illus.

A distributional list, without descriptions.

Lewis, Harrison F.

1931 Additional information concerning the double-crested cor
morant (Phalacrocorax auritus auritus: Lesson). Ajuk,
48:207-14 (Ap.).

Refers briefly to discovery of this bird in Yellowstone.

Lincoln, Frederick C.

1924 Returns from banded birds, 1920 to 1923. U.S. Dept. of

Agric., Bui. 1268, p. 7.

Reference is made to white pelicans banded in Yellowstone.

Lindsley, Marguerite. See: Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley) .

Lystrup, Herbert

1931 The public sees the show. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:67-

68 (Sept.).

Nesting habits and behavior of the killdeer.

McCarty, Guy E.

1930 Ducks and mysterious noises. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:

77-78 (Nov.).

Strange noises near the lakes are explained as being the
distorted sound of ducks flying.

McLaughlin, J.S.

1929 Waterfowl on Yellowstone Lake and River. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 6:4-5 (Dec.), illus.

McNutt , Jack

1936 Birds at Cooke Rangor Station. Yellowstone nat. notes,
13:23-24 ( May- June ).

145

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Mearns , Edgar A.

1903 Feathers beside the Styx. Condor, 5:36-38 (May).
Notes on fatal effect of gas from caves upon birds.

Merriam, C. Hart

1873 Report on the mammals and birds of the expedition. U.S.

Geol. Surv. of the terrs., 6th Ann. rept., 1872, pt.II:

[661]-715. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Miller, Frederic W.

1925 The nest and eggs of the black rosy finch. Condor, 27:3-7

( Jan*-Feb. ) , illus.

Black rosy finches may be found near Yellowstone: The
author collected eggs in the Absaroka Mountains.

Norris, Philetus W.

1880 Birds of the park. U.S. Dept. Int., Ann. rept., 1880-81,

2:614-55.

Indicates distribution of species in Yellowstone.

*0berholser , Harry C.
1921 The migration of North American birds. Bird lore, 23:

295-99 (Nov. -Dec.).
*

1927 The migration of North American birds: The flickers.

Bird lore, 29:110-14 (Mar.-Ap.) .
*

1927a The migration of North American birds: Lewis Ts woodpecker.

Bird lore, 29:411-13 (Nov. -Dec.).
*

1928 The migration of North American birds: Rod-naped sapsucker.

Bird lore, 30:253-57 (July-Aug.).
*

1928a The migration of North American birds: Rocky Mountain sap-
sucker. Bird lore, 30:388 (Nov. -Dec.).
*

1930 The migration of North American birds: Belted kingfisher.
Bird lore, 32:414-17 (Nov. -Dec.).

Ogston, E.E.

1932 A congenial host [Rocky Mountain jay]. Yellowstone nat.
not es , 9 : 20-21 ( Ap . -May) , illus .

0* Mai ley, Henry

1923 Miscellaneous investigations in interior waters. U.S.

Com. of Fisheries, Rept., 1922-23:22-23.

Coincidence of pelican and trout breeding seasons in Yellow
stone results in a maximum loss of trout as food for pelicans.

146

FAUNA: BIRDS, AMPHIBIANS, REPTILES.

Palmer, T. S.

1907 Notes on the summer birds of the Yellowstone National Park.
U.S. Dept. Int., Ann. rept., 1906-07, 1:543-55, map.

1912 The Calaveras warbler in the Yellowstone National Park.
Condor , 14: 224-25 (Nov . ) .

1913 The harlequin duck in Wyoming. Auk, 30:106-07 (Jan.).
Description of the duck found in Jackson Hole, immediately

south of Yellowstone Park.
*

1918 Birds of the1 national parks. Auk, 35:492-93 (Oct.).
* __

1920 Birds of the national parks. Auk, 37:614 (Oct.).

*Pearson, T. Gilbert
1929 Cooperation with the National Park Service. Bird lore,

31:462-64 (Nov. -Dec.).
*

1929a Riding the Yellowstone boundary. Bird lore, 31:373-76
(Sept* -Oct.) .

Phillips, Charles

1925 Winter bird life in the geyser basins. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 2:5 (Dec. 7) , illus.

1926 Bird life at Norris. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:3-4 (Aug.).

1926a The sandhill crane. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:5 (May).

Specimens of this diminishing species may be seen in park.

Pope, Phillip H.

1931 A new record for the rubber snake, Charina bottae. Yel
lowstone nat. notes, 8:70 (Sept.).

*Rich, W.H.

1924 Yellowstone pelican colony: Progress in biological inquir
ies, 1923. U.S. Bur. of Fisheries, Doc. 956:8-9.

*Ridgway, Robert
1901- Birds of North and Middle America. U.S. Natl. Mus., Bui.

1919 50. Washington, Govt. print, off . ,8 vols.

Refers to work of Merriam (1873) ,Coues( 1874) ,Grinne 11 (1876) .

Riley, Joseph. H.

1912 Birds collected or observed. Canadian alpine jour., spec,
no., pp. 47-75, illus.

147

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Expedition of the Alpine Club of Canada to Jasper Park,
Yellowstone Park, and the Mount Robson region.

*Robinson, Wirt

n.d. Unpublished manuscript on birds noted in Yellowstone Na
tional Park during 1907. Syracuse, N.Y. , Roosevelt Wild
Life Forest Exper. Sta. lib.

Rogers , Charles H.

193£ Prothonotary warbler in Wyoming. Auk, 49:91-92 (Jan.).
Describing a specimen observed at Mammoth Hot Springs.

Roosevelt, Theodore

1904 Wilderness reserves. In: American big game in its haunts
(George B. GrinnoH and Theodore Roosevelt, eds.), pp.23-
51, illus. New York, Forest and Stream pub. co.
Describes the birds seen by the author while on a trip

through the Yellowstone with John Burroughs. "The Book of the Boone

and Crockett Club."

Ruhle , George C .

1929 Questions and answers [about Yellowstone birds]. In: Yel
lowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 17-33. Yellov/stone Natl.
Park.

*Russell, Carl P.
1931 Birds in the Yellowstone museums. Yellowstone Natl. Park,

Ms . in the Mus .

The Fishing Bridge Museum exhibits , "Birds and related
stories," are based on this paper.

Sawyer, Edmund J.

1924 Birds [at Camp Roosevelt]. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:2
(July 21).

1924a Golden and bald eagles and the osprey. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 1:3 (June 28).

1924b A trip around Lake Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes,
l:[l]-4' (Sept. 20) , illus., map.
Animal and bird life, with map showing stops on shore.

1924c Water birds of Yellowstone Lake. Yellowstone nat. notes,
1:3 (June 28).

1924d Waterfowl on Yellowstone River. Yellowstone nat. notes,
1:5 (Nov. 20).

148

FAUNA: BIRDS, AMPHIBIANS, REPTILES

Sawyer, Edmund J. , continued

1925 The birds in Stygian Cave. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2:6
(Sept. 18) .

1925a Cranes and swans seen. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2: 2( July20) .
1925b Harlequin ducks. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2: 3(July20) , ill us.

1925c Nesting of the Townsend solitaire. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 2:4 '{July 20). :.• -' .. "

1925d A pair of shovelers. Yellowstone nat. notes,2:4(July 20).
1925e A winter robin. Yellowstone, nat. notes, ,2:6 (Dec. 7).

1925f Wood ibis added to the list of Yellowstone birds. Yellow
stone nat. notes, 2:6 (Sept. 18), cover illus.
See also: Parks and rec., 9:8G (no.l).

1926 Arrive..", of shimmer birds [at Mammoth]. . Yellowstone nat.
notes, 3:2 (liar. 30). . •. ;

1926a' Bird life at Norris. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3: 3-4( Aug. 30) .

1926.b Bird life [of Yellowstone Park]. Yellowstone nat. notes,
3:5 (June 30).

1926c Bird visitors at the flying cage. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 3:3 (Mar. 30).

1926d The Bohemian waxwing. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:1-2
(Nov. 30), illus.

1926e Canada geese. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:[l] (Aug. 30) .

1926f Ducks in Ice Lake. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:2 (Mar. 30),

illus .

1926g Miscellaneous bird notes. Yellowstone nat .notes, 3:2(Ap. 30) .
1926h The music of birds. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:7(Nov.30) .

1926i A peculiar habit of the Clark nutcracker. Yellowstone
nat. notes, 3:1-2 (Mar. 30).

1S26J A theory to explain the extra-limited occurrence of birds.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:2 (Nov. 30). . .
Why birds depart from their usual haunts.

149

YELLOWSTONE NAiUONAL PARK

Sawyer, Edmund J., continued

1926k Trumpeter swans survive. Nat. mag., 8:374 (Dec.).

1926L The wood ibis in Yellowstone Park. Auk, 43:134-35( Jan. ) .
1927 Bird life about Mammoth. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:3( Ap. ).
1927a Birds and poison caves. Yellowstone nat .notes ,4: 2-3( Oct. 31)

19E7b Cliff swallows are abundant at Mammoth. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 4:8-3 (June), illus.

1927c Golden eagle received for liberation. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 4:3-4 (Ap.) , illus.

1927d Nest of lazuli bunting found,. Yellowstone nat. notes,
4:1-2 (July), illus.

1927e Review of the bird life of Yellowstone National Park. In:
Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 85-90. Yellowstone Natl.
Park.

1928 Winter bird life at Mammoth. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:8
(Mar.l) , illus.

1928a A winter robin. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2:6 (Dec. 7).

Set on, Ernest T.

1920 Campaign against the pelican in Yellowstone Park. Wash.

Acad. Sci., Jour., 10:306 (May).

Pelicans were wrongly charged with destroying healthy fish.

Skinner, Curtis K.

1933 Swans at Shoshone Lake — 1932. Yellowstone nat. notes,
10:42-43 (Nov. -Dec.).

Skinner, Milton P.

1916 The nutcrackers of Yellowstone National Park. Condor, 18:
62-64 (Mar.).

1917 Birds. In: General information regarding Yellowstone Na
tional Park season of 1917, pp. 54-59. U.S. Dept.

Int., Natl. Park Serv.

See also this same booklet for 1918 (pp. 61-66) and other years,

__ w<__

1917a The birds of Molly Island, Yellowstone National Park. Con
dor, 19:[l77]-82 (Nov. -Dec.), illus.
Characteristics and breeding habits of ring-billed gulls,

150

FAUNA: BIRDS, AMPHIBIANS , REPTILES

California gull's, and white pelicans.

1917b The ospreys of the Yellowstone. Condor, 19:117-21 (July-
Aug.) , illus.

1917 c

1917d

1920b

1921

1921a

1922

1923

1924

1925

1926

1927

Some birds of the Yellowstone.
(Feb.) , illus.

Nat. hist., 17:129-34

Some birds of the Yellowstone: Unusual specimens seldom
observed by travelers. Sci. Am., supp., 84:79-80(Aug.4) .

*1919- Birds. In; Hept. of the director, Natl. Park Serv.
1922 Washington, D.C., Govt. print, off.

1920 The balance of nature. Sat. eve. post, 192:59 (Jan. 3).
Considers the pelican- trout controversy.

1920a The pink-sided junco. Condor, 22:fl65]-68 (Sept. -Oct. ).

Trumpeter swan breeding in Yellowstone Park.
72 (Mar.).

Condor, 22:
Bird

Christmas bird, census, Yellowstone Park, Wyoming.
lore, 23:29 (Jan. -Feb. ) .

Notes on the Rocky Mountain jay in the Yellowstone Nation
al Park. Condor, 23:147-51 (Sept .-Oct.) .

Notes on the dipper in Yellowstone National Park,
dor, 24:13-21 (Jan. -Feb.).

Con-

Additions to the list of birds from Yellowstone Park.
Condor , 25 : 28 ( Jan . ) .

The Yellowstone nature book,
illus. , map.

Chicago, McClurg, 229 pp.,

The birds of Yellowstone National Park. Roosevelt wild
life bul., 3:7-189 (Feb.), illus., map, bibliog. (Syr
acuse Univ. bul., vol.24, no. 24).
Ten species are illustrated in a colored frontispiece.

Wood ibis in the Yellowstone National Park.
99(Mar.-Ap.) .

Condor , 28 :

New additions to the Yellowstone Park list of birds,
dor, 29:203-04 (July-Aug.).

Con-

151

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Skinner, Milton P., continued

1927a Richardson's grouse in the Yellowstone Park. Wilson bul. ,

39:208-14 (Dec.).
*

1928 The Canada goose in Yellowstone. National Park. Wilson

bul., n.s., 35:139-47 (no. 144).
*

1928a Kingfisher and sharp-shinned hawk. Auk, 45: 100-01 ( Jan. ) .
1928b Yellowstone's winter birds. Condor, 30:237-42{July-Aug. ) .

1929 Double-crested cormorant in Yellowstone National Park.
Condor, 31:128 (May- June ).

1931 Belted kingfishers wintering in the Yellowstone Park.
Auk, 48:601 (Oct.).

*Smith, K.M.

1920 Some biological problems in the Yellowstone Park. Wash.
Acad. Sci., 10:583-85 (Dec. 4).
Abstract of an address concerning the reduction of pelicans.

Squires, W.A.

1929 Yellowstone National Park and the conservation of our na
tive birds. Bird lore, 31:188 (May-June).

Stewart, J. Thomas, Jr.

1931 Molly Island. Yellowstone nat . notes, 8:50 (July).

Names the birds nesting on this island in Yellowstone Lake.

, joint author. See: Crook, Compton, 1931.

Tanner, Vasco M.

1931 A synoptical study of Utah amphibia. Utah Acad. Sci.,

Proc., 8:Cl59]-98 (July l).

Some of these species are also found in Yellowstone.

*Thompson, Benjamin H.

1931 A pond at dusk. Am. forests, Sept: 519.

Describes the wood ibis in Yellowstone.
*

1932 Breeding colonies in the United States: Molly Island, Yel
lowstone National Park. In his: History and present status
of the colonies of white pelican (Pelecanus erythrorhynchos )
in the United States, pp. 56-57. Berkeley, Calif., Univ.

of Calif. Lib., M.A. thesis. (Typescript.)
*

1933 History and present status of the breeding colonies of the

152

FAUNA: BIRDS, AMPHIBIANS, REPTILES

white pelican in the United States. Washington, D.C.,
Natl. Park Serv. , 82 pp. (Wild life div. , Occas.pap.no.l) .
Appears to be substantially the same as the foregoing item.

1934 A wilderness-use technique. Condor, 36:153-57 (July-

Aug. ) , illus.

Telling how roads were routed so as to preserve a small
lake as a bird sanctuary.

*Ward, Henry B.

1922 Food habits of the pelican. Yellowstone Natl. Park, Ms.
in the office of the supt .

1924 Banding white pelicans. Condor, 26:126-40 ( July-Aug . ) •

*Wright , George M.

1931 Report on the trumpeter swan in Yellowstone. Washington,
D.C., Natl. Park Serv., Ms. in the director's office.

1934 The primitive persists in bird life of Yellowstone Park.
Condor, 36:145-53 (July-Aug.), illus.

Yeager, Dorr G.

1928 A spring bird trip. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:6 (Ap.l).

1928a Water birds on Fountain freight road. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 5:[l] (Sept.l), illus.

1929 Reptiles of Yellowstone Park, with notes on the amphibians.
In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 118-28, illus.
Yellowstone Natl. Park.

1929a A trip to pelican land. Yellqwstone nat. notes, 6:3-4
(July 1), illus.

1930 Again those "mysterious sounds." Yellowstone nat. notes,
7:54-55 (Aug.).

Yeager, W.W.

1929 May and our birds. Yellowstone nat. notes, 6:4 (June 1).
Lists visitants of winter, spring, and summer.

*Young, S.B.M.

1908 Birds. In: Ann. rept. of the supt. of the Yellowstone
Natl. Park. U.S. Dept. Int. [Govt. print, off.?]

153

FAUNA
FISH AND FISHING

Anonymous

1924 Yellowstone, our great fishing preserve. ADI. forestry,

28:123-24 (Feb.).

Data on restocking of Yellowstone lakes and streams.

1927 Fish of the waters of Yellowstone Park. Sci., n.s., 66,

supp. :x (July 29) .

Explanation of how fish cross the Continental Divide;
verified by Dr. David Starr Jordan.

Back , Howard

1938 The waters of Yellowstone; with rod and fly. New York,

Dodd, Mead, 149 pp.

Fishing conditions. Equipment and methods recommended.

Barnes , 0 ,P . (Klahowya )

1910 Fly fishing in Wonderland. Chicago, Barnes, 56 pp.,illus.

Clark, Ralph E.

1908 Wyoming summer fishing and the Yellowstone Park. Outing
mag., 52:508-11 (July).

Cope, E.D.

1872 Recent reptiles and fishes of the survey. U.S. Geol.

Surv. of Mont, and portions of adjacent terrs. , 5th Ann.

rept., 1871:467-76.

Culler, C.F.

1924 Fish culture in Yellowstone National Park. Outdoor life,

65:36 (July).

Curtis, J.E.

1884 Fish in the Yellowstone National Park and tributaries of

Snake River. Propagation of whitefish. U.S. Fish Com. ,

Bui. , 4:335-36.

Evermann, Barton W.

1893 A reconnaissance of the streams and lakes of western Mon
tana and northwestern Wyoming. U.S. Fish Com., Bui., 11:
3-60, illus., maps.
Report of survey preliminary to establishment of hatcheries,

Annotated list of fish collected; results of the stocking of Yellow-

155

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

stone waters in 1889 and 1890; also, notes on mammals observed.
Evermann, Barton W. , joint author. See: Jordan, David Starr, 1890.

Faust, L.H.

1916 Bring your fishing tackle. Northwestern motorist , 1:14-
15 ( June ) .

Forbes, S.A.

1893 A preliminary report on the aquatic invertebrate fauna of
the Yellowstone National Park, "Wyoming, and of the Flat-
head region of Montana. U.S. Fish Com., Bui., 11:207-58
(1891) , illus.

Investigations made to determine causes and possible rem
edies for the lack of fish in some Yellowstone waters.

Foster, Everett

1903 A novel fishing feat. St. Nicholas, 30 : 998-99(Sept. ), illus

In Yellowstone, a fisherman, without moving, can cook the
trout he has just caught by lowering it into a hot spring.

Grinnell, George B. , and Rainsford, W.S.

1897 [Lakes and fishing of Yellowstone Park.] In their: Hunt
ing, pp. 77-80. New York, Scribners.
Fishing conditions in lakes Lewis, Heart, and Shoshone.

*Hall, M.C.

1930 Report on parasites of pelican, and trout investigations
at Yellowstone Lake, 1930. Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.

Henshall, James A.

1906 A list of the fishes of Montana. Univ. of Mont., Bui.,

Biol. ser. , 11:[3]-10.

Common and scientific names, and distribution of the fishes
of the state, including some found in Yellowstone.

Jordan, David Starr

1890 The fishes of Yellowstone ParTc. Zoe, 1:38-40 (Ap.).
Causes of original lack of fish in the park's waters. Notes

on the stocking of the waters, and a list of species present.

1891 A reconnaissance of the streams and lake.", of Yellowstone
National Park, in the interest of the United States Fish

Commission. U.S. Fish Com.,Bul. ,9:41-63(1889) , illus. , map.
*

1892 The story of a strange land. Pop. Sci. mo., 40:447,58.

, and Evermann, Barton W.

156

FAUNA: FISH AND FISHING

1902 American food and game fishes. New York, Doubleday ,Page .

Kelly, Harry M.

1988 Fish hatching in the park. In: Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 85-86, illus. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Kendall, William C.

1915 The fishes of the Yellowstone Park. U.S. Coin, of Fish
eries, Ann. rept., 1914, App.VIII, 28 pp., illus.
Published also as Bureau of Fisheries Document 818.

, joint author. See: Smith, Hugh M. , 1922.

[King, Frank B.. ]

1897 In Nature's laboratory; driving and fishing in Yellowstone
National Park. Over land mo., 29:594-603, illus.

Leach, Glen G.

1923 Artificial propagation of brook trout and rainbow trout,

with notes on three other species. U.S. Bur. of Fish.,

Doc. 955:55-60 (App.Vl).

Information on stocking the waters; tapeworm infestation.

1925 Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming, substation. In: U.S.
Bur. of Fish., Ann. rept., 1923-24:412-13 (Propagation and
distribution of food fishes).

1934 Rocky Mountain territory. U.S. Bur. of Fish., Ann. rept.,

1932-33:472-74.

Indicates amount and species of trout eggs incubated in
the station in Yelloivstone.

Lint on, Edwin

1891 A contribution to the life history of Dibothrium cordiceps

Leidy, a parasite infesting the trout of Yellowstone Lake.

U.S. Fish Com., Bui., 9:337-58 (1839), illus.

1891a On two species of larval Dibothria from the Yellowstone

Nat ic/ial Park. U.S. Fish Com., Bui., 9 :65-79( 1889) , illus.

1893 On fish entozoa from Yellowstone National Park. In: Report
upon inquiry respecting food-fishes and the fishing grounds,
U.S. Coin, of Fish and Fisheries , Rept . ,1889-91: 545-64, illus.

*Locke, S.B.

1929 Whitefish, grayling, trout, and salmon of the intermountain

region. U.S. Com. of Fish., Rept., 1929:173-90 (App.V) .
(Bur. of Fish., Doc. 1062).

157

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

McCarty, Guy

1933 Grayling in the park. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:10
(Mar.-Ap.) , illus.

Monmouth

1874 The Yellowstone Valley. Forest and stream, 2:[209]-10

(May 14) .

An early description of fauna and of fishing in the park.

Muttowski, Richard A.

1925 The food of trout in Yellowstone National Park. Roose
velt wild life bul., 2:471-97 (Feb.), illus. (Syracuse
Univ. bul., vol.24, no. 23.)

1929 The ecology of trout streams in Yellowstone National Park.
Roosevelt wild life annals, 2:155-240 (Oct.), illus., bib-
liog. (Syracuse Univ. bul., vol.2, no. 2.).

, and Smith, Gilbert M.

1929a The food of trout stream insects in Yellowstone National

Park. Roosevelt wild life annals, 2:241-63 (Oct.).

(Syracuse Univ. bul., vol.2, no. 2).

Of Mai ley, Henry

1923 Miscellaneous investigations in interior waters. U.S.
Com. of Fish., Rept. , 1922/23:22-23.

Coincidence of pelican and trout breeding seasons resulted
in a maximum loss of trout through the food habits of the birds.

Phillips, Charles

1926 Fishes of Yellowstone National Park. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 3:2-4 (Ap.30) , illus.

Rainsford, W.S., joint author. See: Grinnell, George B. , 1897.

Rich, Willis H.

1924 Destruction of trout by pelicans in Yellowstone National
Park. In: Progress in biological inquiries, 1923. Bur.
of Fish., Doc. 956:8-9.

Sawyer, Edmund J.

1924 Bureau of Fisheries very active in park. Yellowstone

nat. notes, 1:7 (Nov. 20).

The total number of fish and eggs planted during 1922,
1923, and 1924, in tabular form.

Simon, James R.

158

FAUNA: FISH AND FISHING

1936 A table for the identification of Yellowstone salmonoid
fishes. Yellowstone nat. notes, 13:50-51 (Sept. -Oct. ).

1937 Blobs as trout food. Yellowstone nat. notes, 14:40
(Sept. -Oct.} .

1937a Newer names of Yellowstone Park fishes. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 14:19-20 (Mar.-Ap.).

Skinner, Milton P.

1920 The balance of nature. Sat. eve. post, 192:59 (Jan. 3).

Contains notes on fishing conditions in Yellowstone.

1922 The native or black-spotted trout. Yellowstone nat.

notes, Aug. , p. 2.

Smith, Hugh M.

1917 Fish and fishing in the national parks. Natl. Parks

Conf . , Proc. , 1917:169-72. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1920 Some biological problems of Yellowstone Park. Wash. Acad,
Sci., Jour., 10:583-85 (Dec. 4).
Abstract of an address on five problems of fish culture.

, and Kendall, Williar:. C.

1922 Fishes of the Yellowstone National Park. U.S. Com. of

Fish., Ann. rept., 1921, App. Ill, 30 pp. (Bur. of Fish.,

Doc. 904.)

Taylor, Frank J.

1937 Get 'em there alive! Colliers, 99:78-81 (May 22), illus.
Fish planting in Yellowstone and Yosernite national parks.

Towns end, Mary T.

1897 A woman's trout fishing in Yellowstone Park. Outing, 30:

163-64 (May).

A fishing trip along the Firehole River; species caught.

*Woodbury, Lowell A.

1931 Report on a biological study of certain streams and lakes
of Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming, made during July,
August, and September, 1930. Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.,71pp.

Woodward, Harry

1937 Flesh colors in fishes. Yellowstone nat. notes, 14:39-
40 (Sept. -Oct.) .

159

FAUNA : INSECTS

AMD OTHER INVERTEBRATES

Anonymous

1924 Timber-destroying insects in Yellowstone Park. Sci.,
n.s., 60, supp.:x (Aug.l) .

1927 Life in hot water. Lit. dig., 94:76 (Sept. 10).

Alden, William C.

1930 Grasshoppers on ice: Yellowstone glacier preserves a well-
known pest. Nature mag., 15:579-82 (June), illus .

Aldricli, J.M.

1928 The flies of the western mountains. Sniithsn. Instn., Ex
plorations and field work, 1927:67-72, illus. (Pub. 2954).
Contains a brief note on collecting in Yellowstone.

Brues , Charles T.

1924 Observations on animal life in the thermal waters of Yel
lows tc .is Park, with a consideration of the thermal en
vironment. Am, Acad. of Arts and Sci., Proc., 59:[37l]-
437 (Nov.), illus., bibliog.

1927 Animal life in hot springs. Quart, rev. of biol. , 2:181-
203 (June), illus., bibliog.

A brief article under this title appeared also in Science,
n.s., vol. 65, supp. , p.x (June 10, 1927).

1928 Studied on the fauna of hot springs in the western United
States and the biology of thermophilous animals. Am.
Acad. of Arts and Sci., Proc., 63:[139]-228 ( July) , illus.
Refers particularly to Yellowstone. Includes bibliography.

Burke, H[arry] E.

1928 Destructive insects of Yellowstone National Park. In:
Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 73-82, illus. Yellow
stone Natl. Park.

Descriptions of: spruce budworni; spruce gall aphid; lodge-
pole sawfly; lodge/pole nesdle-tier; and fir, Douglas fir, mountain
pine, Engelmann spruce, and Oregon engraver beetles.

L ]

1929 Insect control in national parks is many-sided problem.
U.S. Dept. Agric., Yr. bk. , 1928:382-85, illus.
Embraces f ollovan^ Yellowstone insects: Mountain pine and

engraver beetles, spruce budworra, lodgepole sawfly, lodgepole
needle-tier.

c — ]

1932 Two destructive defoliators of lodgepole pine in the

161

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Burke, H[arry;] E. , continued.

Yellowstone National Park. U.S. Dept . Agric., Giro. 224,

20 pp., illus., bibliog.

The lodgepole needle-tier and the lodgepole sawfly.

*Dyar, E.G.

1923 The mosquitoes of Yellowstone National Park. Insecutor
inscitiae menstruus, 2:36-46.

Edwards, W.H.

1872 List of species of butterflies collected by Campbell Car-
rington and William B. Logan, of the expedition, in 1871.
U.S. Geol. Surv. of Mont, and portions of adjacent terrs.,
5th Ann. rept., 1871:466-67.

*3forbes, S.A.

1893 A preliminary report on aquatic invertebrate fauna of Yel
lowstone National Park, Wyoming, and Flathead region of
Montana. U.S. Fish Com., Bui., 11:207-58 (1891).

Hagen, H.

1873 Odonata from the Yellowstone. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the
terrs., 6th Ann. rept., 1872:t727]-29.

*Hall, M.C.

1930 Report on parasites of pelican, and trout investigations
at Yellowstone Lake, 1930. Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.

Hebard, Morgan, joint author. See: Rehrn, J.A.G. , 1906.

1929 The orthoptera of Montana. Acad. Nat. Set. of Phi la. ,
Proc., 80:211-306, illus.
Many references to orthoptera of the Yellowstone region.

Henderson, J.

1933 Mollusca of the Yellowstone Park, Teton Park, and Jackson
Hole regions. Nautilus, 47:[l]-3 (July).

Hoeppli, R.J.C.

1926 Studies of free-living nematodes from the thermal waters

of Yellowstone Park. Am. Microscop. Soc., Trans., 45:

234-55 (July).

Horn, George H.

1873 [Coleopt era found near Yellowstone Lake.] U.S. Geol.
Surv. of the terrs., 6th Ann. rept., 1872:717.

162

FAUNA : INSECTS

Hubbard, E.G.

1891 Insect life in the hot springs of the Yellowstone Nation
al Park. Canad. entomol. , 23:226-30 (Oct.).

* Jordan, David Starr

1889 A reconnaissance of the streams and lakes of the Yellow
stone National Park. U.S. Fish Com.,' Bui., 9:41-63.

Leidy, Joseph

1872 Notice of some worms collected during Professor Haydenfs

expedition to the Yellowstone River in the summer of 1871.

U.S. Geol. Surv. of Mont, and portions of adjacent terrs.,

5th Ann. rept., 1871:381-82.

Linton, Edwin

1891 A contribution to the life history of Dibothrium cordiceps

Leidy, a parasite infesting the trout of Yellowstone Lake.

U.S. Fish Com., Bui., 9:337-58.

1891a On two species of larval Dibothria. . .Yellowstone National
Park. U.S. Fish Com., Bui.., 9:65-79 (1889) , illus.

1893 On fish entozoa from Yellowstone National Park. In: Re
port upon inquiry respecting food-fishes a: id the fishing
grounds. U.S. Com. of Fish and Fisheries, Rept., 1889-
91:545-64, illus.

Lutz, Frank E.

1931 Notes on the animal life of thermal waters in the Yellow
stone National Park. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Novitates , no.
498 (Oct. 5), 10 pp., illus.

Account of experiments to determine the effect of tempera
ture on aquatic insects and other fauna.

Lystrup, Herbert T.

1930 Insect traps. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7 : 56 -57 ( Aug. ), illus
List of about 100 insects collected from hot water pools.

Mills, H.3.

1935 A rare insect [scorpion fly]. Yellowstone nat. notes,
12:30 ( May- June ), illus.

Muttowski , Richard A.

1925 The food of trout in Yellowstone National Park. Roosevelt

wild life bul., 2:471-97 (Feb.), illus. (Syracuse Univ.

bul. , vol.24, no. 23).

1929 The ecology of trout streams in Yellowstone National Park.

163

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Muttowski, Richard A., continued.

Roosevelt wild life annals, 2:155-240 (Oct.), illus.,
bibliog. (Syracuse Univ. bul., vol.2, no. 2).

1929a The food of trout stream insects in Yellowstone National
Park. Roosevelt wild life annals, 2:241-63 (Oct.).
(Syracuse Univ. bul., vol.2, no. 2).

Packard, Alpheus S., Jr.

1873 Description of new insects: Dipterous larva found in the
gizzard of Picoides arcturus. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the
terrs., 6th Ann. rept., 1872: [739 ]-41, illus.
At least one species was found in Lower Geyser Basin.

1873a Descriptions of new species of mallophaga collected by C.H.
Merriam while in the Government geological survey of the
Rocky Mountains [under] Professor F.V. Hayden,... U.S. Geol.
Surv. of the terrs., 6th Ann. rept., 1872:731-34, illus.

Washington, Govt. print, off.
_____

1873b New parasitic worms. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs., 6th
Ann. rept. ,

*Peale, Albert C.

1878 Life in hot springs. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs., 12th
Ann. rept., pt .11:358-60.

Pope, T.E.B.

1931 Collecting [insects] along the Yellowstone trail. Mil
waukee Pub. Mus., Yr. bk. , 9:36-68 (1929), illus.

Putnam, J.D.

1875 Entomological report. In: Report upon the reconnaissance
of Northwestern Wyoming, including Yellowstone National
Park, made in the summer of 1873 [under] William A, Jones,
pp . 315-18 . U.S. Army , Engr . dept . VJash^ngt on , Govt .
print, off.
A list of coleoptera collected in June, July, and August,

along the route from Fort Bridger to the park.

Rehrn, J.A.G. , and Hebard, Morgan

1906 A contribution to the knowledge of the orthoptera of Mon-
. tana, Yellowstone Park, Utah, and Colorado. Acad. Nat.

Sci. of Phila., Proc., 58:358-418 (Sept.), illus.

Distribution, habits, and physical characteristics.

Reiithard, Edward G.

1930 Ant lions. Yellowstone nat . notes, 7:45 (July).

164

FAUNA : INSECTS

*Rush, William M.

1931 Diphyllobothrium latum in bear. Ms., 5 pp., U.S. Forest
Serv. office, Missoula, Mont.

[Setchell, William A.]

1905 The upper temperature limits of life. Sci., n.s., 17:

934-37 (June 12).

Account of experiments to determine the highest tempera
ture tolerable to certain animals in hot springs.

Snyder, T.E.

1925 Insects and forest trees. Nature mag. ,5:311-14(May) ,illus

Ravages of bark beetles in the Yellowstone fir and spruce
forests. Photographs illustrate life histories of some insects.

*Thomas , Cyrus

1872 Saltatorial orthoptera. U.S. Geol. Surv. of Mont, and
portions of adjacent terrs., 5th Ann. rept., 1871.
Washington, Govt. print, off.

1873 Notes on orthoptera. U.S. Geol. Surv. of the terrs., 6th
Ann. rept., 1872: [719 ]-25. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Mention is made (p. 719) of specimens from Yellowstone.

*Uhler, P.R.

1872 Hemiptera. U.S. Geol. Surv. of Mont, and portions of ad
jacent terrs, (Hayden, 1871). Washington, Govt. print .off .

*Woodbury, Lowell A.

1931 Report on a biological study of certain streams and lakes
of Yell ows tone National Park, Wyoming, made during July,
August, and September, 1930. Ms,, 71 pp. .Yellowstone Mus.

Yeager, Dorr G.

1928 Ant lions. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:5-6 (June), illus.

The predatory methods of the larva of an insect similar to
the dragon fly.

165

FAUNA; MAMMAI3

Including General Observations on Animals and Studies
Concerning Management of Wildlife

Anonymous

1876 Large game in the territories. Forest and stream, 7:152

(Oct. 12).

Remedial laws proposed to prol ect animals from "skin-
hunters" in Yellowstone and elsewhere.

1882 Big game destruction. Forest and stream, 18:289 (May 11).

*1884 Tourists and the game of Yellowstone Park. Am. field,
22:38-39 (July 5).
A brief appeal, signed "Justice."

*1885- [Conservation and protection of elk in Yellowstone Park.]
1914 Forest and stream, 24:228 (Ap.16, 1885); 24:62 (Feb. 18,

1886); 28:46 (Feb. 10, 1887); 29:441 (Dec. 29, 1887); 38:102
(Feb. 4, 1892); 38:539 (June 9, 1892); 70:487,494 (Mar. 28,
1908); 74:492 (Mar. 26, 1910); 81:178 (Feb. 7, 1914).

1886 A final buffalo hunt. Sci., 8:520-21 (June 11).

Relates efforts by a Government taxidermist to secure spec
imens near Yellowstone before the buffalo should become extinct.

1890 Effects of protection on elk of the national park. Forest
and stream, 34:84 (Feb. 20).

1893 Dollars and cents. Forest and stream, 41:[93] (Aug. 5).
Montana, Wyoming, and Idaho must preserve Yellowstone as
the center of big game and wildlife in America.

1893a National park game. Forest and stream, 40:137 (Feb. 16).
Mentions animals seen on a snowshoe trip in Yellowstone.

1897 Elk in Yellowstone National Park [an editorial]. Forest
and stream, 5:1 (Jan. 2).

1900 Number of elk in Yellowstone Park. Am. field, 53:5 (Jan. 6).

1905 Wyoming big-game refuge. Forest and stream, 64: [189] (Mar. 11)

Reports the establishment of an 1100-square-mile preserve
adjacent to Yellowstone Park.

*1908 Chamois for Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 70:492
(Mar. 28).

The Swiss government ordered live chamois to be sent to
Yellowstone in exchange for young trout.

167

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Anonymous, continued

1910 Domesticate the elk. Forest and streari, 74:[447] (Mar. 19).
Proposal to permit stockmen to commercialize surplus elk.

1911 The Wyoming elk. Forest and stream, 76:[687] (May 6).
Editorial on winter feeding of herds in J'ackson Hole.

1911a The Yellowstone Park moose. Recreation, 34:280 (Dec.).

1912 Protecting elk in Wyoming. Am. forestry, 18:580 (Sept.).
Fencing of ranges necessitated shipping away of some elk.

1912a Save the elk. Outing, 60:578-80 (June).

1913 21k in Yellowstone Park. Outdoor life, 31:89 (Jan.).

*1914 Statistics of number of elk for 1913-1914. Outdoor life,
34:64-66.

1916 Feeding wild animals. Outlook, 113:513-56 (May 10) .

1916a A grizzly attack in Yellowstone National Park. Outdoor
life, 38:373-74 (Oct.).

1916b The late grizzly bear attacks in Yellowstone National Park.
Outdoor life, 38:583-84 (Dec.).

1917 Elk in Yellowstone Park. Sportsmen's rev., 51:384(Ap.21) .
*1917a Elk starvation. Forest and stream, 87:610 (July).

1917b Once more: Must our elk herds be exterminated? Recreation,
56:276-77, 300 (June).

1917 c Wildlife in the Yellowstone. Travel, 28:17-23 (Mar.).

1919 Animals of Yellowstone. Outing, 73: [301-0$] (Mar.), illus.
Photographs of antelope, bighorn sheep, elk, and deer, with

brief explanatory captions.

1920 Wyoming elk in danger of extinction. Lit. dig., 64:108
(Jan. 24).

Pending legislation to save the 4,000 elk in Yellowstone.

1921 Wildlife research in Yellowstone Park. Roosevelt wild
life bul., 1:96-100 (Dec.). (Syracuse Univ. bill., vol.21,
no. 7) .

168

FAUNA: MAMMAIS

1923 Slaughter of elk for their teeth. Am. Scenic and Hist.
Preserv. Soc. , 23rd Ann. rept., p. 180.

1924 Buffalo shipped. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:5-6 (Nov. 20).

1924a Estimate made of big game animals in national forests. "
Calif, fish and game, 10:36-38 (Jan.).
Contains notes on the increase of elk around Yellowstone.

1925 In behalf of the Yellowstone elk. Am. forests and forest
life, 31:178 (Mar.).

1925a Wildlife research in Yellowstone National Park. Roose
velt wild life bul., 1:96-100 (Dec.). Syracuse Univ. bul.,
vol.21, no. 7) .
Outline of the work of the Roosevelt Wild Life Experiment

Station in Yellowstone.

1926 Distribution of animal life in Yellowstone National Park.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:4-6 (Ap.30).

1926a The mantled ground squirrel. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:5
(July 30).

1926b Who wants a buffalo? Am. forests and forest life,32:242(Ap.) .

1927 Animal life in hot springs. Sci. ,n.s. ,65,supp. :x (June 10).
1927a An elk count. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:3-4 (Feb. 28).

1927b The great elk herd. Sci., n.s. , 65, supp.:x-xii (Mar. 11).
Proposes commission for management and conservation of herd.

1927c Otter on the Firehole River. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:
5-6 (Jan. ) .

1927d The pack rat. Yellowstone nat. notes, 4:4-6 (Oct. 31) , illus.

1927e Starvation of the elk to be stopped. Am. forests and forest
life, 33:240-41 (Ap.) .

1928 The American bison in Yellowstone Park. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 5:3-5 (Mar.l), illus.

Growth and management of the herd since 1902.

1928a Shipments of elk. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:3-4 (Feb. l) , illus,
1928b Surplus elk shipped. Nature mag. , 11:334 (May).

169

YELL01VSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Anonymous, continued

*1929 Proposed wildlife survey, National Park Service: Elk sur
vey in the Yellowstone country* Jour, of mam., 10:371-72
(Nov.).

1932 Complete Jackson Hole elk count. Am. forests, 38:239(Ap.).

1933 Disaster to the Yellowstone Park elk herds. New York, The
Emerg. Gonserv. Com., [8]pp., map.

Advocates enlargement of the park to include winter range.

1936 The Yellowstone elk. Sci.,n.s., 84, supp.:7-8 (July 24).
Diminishing fodder threatens elks' existence. A brief note.

*Adams, Charles C.

1921 Suggestions for research on North American big game and fur-
bearing animals. Roosevelt wild life bul., 1:35-41 (Syra
cuse Univ. bul., vol.21, no.7).

*„ _

1925 Conservation of predatory mammals. Jour, of mam. ,6:83-96.
*.-...

1925a Ecological conditions in national forests and national parks.

Sci. mo. , 20:561, 593.
*

1925b The relation of wildlife to the public in national and state

parks. Roosevelt wild life bul., 2:371-401.
*

1929 The importance of preserving wilderness conditions. N.Y.
State Mus., Bul. 279:37-46.

1930 Rational predatory animal control. Jour, of mam., 11:
353-62 (Aug.).

Pages 356-57 refer to mountain lions in Yellowstone.
* .

1931 The importance of establishing natural history reservations
for research and education. N.Y. State Mus. , Bul. 288: 71-83.

Adams, 0. Clarence

1919 The wild animals of Yellowstone Park. Overland mo. , 2d
ser., 74:91-102 (Aug.), illus.

Ait on, John F.

1933 Bear observations. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:35-36

(Sept. -Oct. ) .

Behavior of bears during hibernation in Yellowstone.

Albright, Horace M.

1925 An exciting hour with mountain sheep, Yellowstone nat.

170

FAUNA: MAMMALS

notes, 2:1-3 (Dec. 7), illus.

Notes on attempts to photograph animals at Camp Roosevelt.
-.---

1925a Gane conservation in national parks. Yosemite nat. notes,
4:113-20.

19.25b The thundering herd of the Yellowstone. Outdoor An., 3:
5-8 (Jan.) .

1928
*

1929

Keepers of the wild. Collier's, 82:16-17, 30 ( Aug. 25 ), illus,

Our national parks as wildlife sanctuaries. Am. forests,
35:505-07, 536.

-, and Taylor, Frank J.

1929a Why bears behave like human beings. Collier's, 83:26,28,

36 (June) , illus.

Bears of the national parks, particularly of Yellowstone.

1930

and Joslin, Theodore G.

The drift of the elk. Sat. eve. post, 202:41-42, 44-46,
138 (June 28) , illus.
Shifting of the elk ranges to Montana, Wyoming, and Idaho.

1930a National park planning. Am. civic aim. , 2:50-54.
*

1931 The National Park Service's policy on predatory animals.
Jour, of mam., 12:185-86 (no. 2).

Allen, Albert C.

1925 "Spud," the hold-up bear of the Yellowstone. Am. forests
and forest life, 31:540-42 (Sept.).

Allen, Glover M. , joint author. See: Miller, Gerrit S.,Jr., 1928.

Allen, J.A.

1877 History of the American bison, Bison americanus. U.S.

Geol. and Geog. Surv. of the terrs., 9th Ann. rept., 1875,

pt. Ill: 443-587.

Exhaustive study of the habits, history, present and former
distribution, and diminution of the species. Has considerable bear
ing on the herds of Wyoming, Idaho, and Montana.

Allen, Robert P.

1934 The wildlife sanctuary movement in the United States: hist
orical aspects. Bird lore, 36:80-84 (Jan. -Feb.), illus.
Notes on Yellowstone as the birthplace of this movement.

171

•YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

[Allen, W.A,]

1880 The buffalo range. Forest and stream, 15:411 (Dec. 23).
Wasteful hunting reported near Yellowstone.

*American Bison Society

1920 Resolution by the American Bison Society regarding the
starving elk. In: Kept, of the Soc., 1920:10-11.

American Forestry Assn. and National Parks Assn. Joint Committee
1928 [Notes on condition of game in Yellowstone Park.] In: the
Committee's report, Recreational resources of Federal lands,
pp. 124-25. Washington, Natl. Munic. Conf. on Outdoor Rec.

Anderson, Clifford L.

1932 Game preservation ranch. Yellowstone nat . notes, 9:£l]
(Jan. -Feb.).

Brief note on the winter range maintained by the Government.

1933 Animal activities at the game ranch. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 10:4-5 (Jan. -Feb.).

Anderson, George S.

1895 Protection of the Yellowstone National Park. In: Hunting

in many lands; the book of the Boone and Crockett Club, pp.

377-402. New York, Forest and Stream pub. co.

Anderson, Henry

1914 Census of elk in Yellowstone. ... Outdoor 1 if e, 34-66 ( July) .

Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley)

1926 A partial list of animals. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:6
(June 30).

1926a Predatory animals of the Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 3:6-7 (June 30).
Published also in Yellowstone ranger nat. man. ,1927:82-84.

1927 Animals of Yellowstone National Park. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 75-78. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

1927a Antlered or otherwise horned animals of Yellowstone National
Park: elk, deer, moose, mountain sheep, buffalo, antelope.
In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 78-79. Yellowstone
Natl. Park.

1927b Singular and plural forms of names of the animals of Yel
lowstone National Park, In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man.,
pp. 7 7 -78. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

172

FAUNA: MAMMALS

1928 The American bison in Yellowstone Park. In: Yellowstone
ranger nat. man., pp. 71-72. Yellowstone Nat 1. Park.

1928a Yellowstone bats. Yellowstone nat. notes ,5: 6-7 (May 1) ,il.
Describing the five species found in the park. '

Baggley, George F.

1929 Moose in the upper Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes
6:2-4 (Dec.l).

*

1930 Game study in the upper Yellowstone. Ms. in the Yellow
stone Mus.

1930a The protection departiiBnt. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:87-
88 (Dec.).

1932 Yellowstone game census. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:2
(Jan. -Feb.); 14 (Mar.); 21-22 (Ap.-May), illus.

Methods, difficulties, and results of the census.

1933 The survival of the fittest. Yellowstone nat. notes,
10:39 (Sept. -Oct.).

Refers to the killing of old, woak bulls by young ones.

Baggley, Herma G. (Albert son)

1931 Beaver activities. Yellowstone nat. notes ,8:84-5(Nov.-Dec. )

Bailey, Vernon

1918 A new subspecies of chipmunk from the Yellowstone National
Park. Biol. Soc. of Wash.fD.C.], Pro c. ,31:31-32 (May 16).

1920 Old and new horns of the prong-horned antelope. Jour', of
mam., 1:128-29 (May), illus.

1927 Animal life of Yellowstone Park. Sierra Club, Bui., 12:
L333]-45 (pub. 63), illus.

1930 Animal life of Yellowstone National Park. Springfield,
111., Thomas, 241 pp., illus., map.

1931 Bighorns of the plains and peak. Nature mag., 18:279-82,
326-27 (Nov.), illus., map.

1933 White-tailed deer, the Virginia deer and its sub-species , and
the little fan-tail, or Mexican, deer. Nature mag., 21:123-
26 (Mar.) , map.
Yellowstone, New Mexico and Arizona are habitats considered.

173

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

*Baillie~Grohman, William A.
1882 Camps in the Rockies. London, 438 pp., map.

Contains statistics on hides shipped from the Yellowstone
country in 188C-1881.

*3annon, Henry T.
1917 To Wyoming to hunt elk. Recreation, 56:215-16,229-30 (May).

1928 The Yellowstone elk herd. Outdoor life, 61:31, 104-05(Nov. 6) .

*Barrett , S.A.
1921 Collecting among the Blackfoot Indians. Milwaukee. Pub.

Mus. , Yr. bk., 1:22-28.

Aboriginal buffalo drives similar to those conducted just
north of Yellowstone Park.

Barrows, Maynard

1931 Courtship of Rocky Mountain sheep. Yellowstone nat. notes,
8:15 (Feb.).

Bauer, C. Max

1934 Is there more than one species of bison in the United States?
Yellowstone nat. notes, 11:44-45 (Nov. -Dec.).

1934a Overgrazing of the winter range. Yellowstone nat. notes,
ll:[42]-43 (Nov. -Dec.).

*Beard, Daja

1901 In a wild animal republic. Recreation, 15:417-?3 (Dec.).
*

1907 Dan Beard's animal book. New York, Moffat, Yard, and co.

Becker, F.E.

1920 Famine in the wild; the tragedy of the Yellowstone elk herds

and how to prevent a repetition. Sunset mag., 44:31-32,

118-21 (Mar.), illus.

Black, Edna M.

1930 Animals and birds of Yellowstone National Park. Flower
grower , 17 : 7 -8 ( Jan . ) , illus .

Borland, Hal

1938 Wapiti Pete; the story of an elk. New York, Farrar and

Rineliart , 176 pp., illus.

Careful, first-hand inforiaation, approved by experts.

Bracket t, U.S.

1900 Predatory beaots in Yellowstone Park. Recreation, 12:449-

174

FAUNA: MAMMALS

50 ( June ) .

Branch, E.D.

1929 [Protection of buffalo in Yellowstone Park.] In: The hunt
ing of the buffalo, p. 331. New York, Appleton.

Brett, Lloyd M.

1916 Wild animals [in Yellowstone National Park]. U.S. Dept.
Int., Ann. rept. , 1914/15, 1:883-86.

*Brown, Barnum

1932 The buffalo drive [near Yellowstone Park]. Nat. hist.,
32:75-82, illus.

*Buker, H.E.
1922 You mustn't molest the bears. Outing, 80(?) :171-76.

*Bryce, James

1912 National Parks, the need of the future. Outlook, 102:811-
15 (Dec. 14).

Carter, Forest L.

1927 Predatory and wild game life versus civilization. Yellow
stone nat. notes, 4:4-7 (Ap.), illus.

*Carey, J.M.

1892 Punishment of offenses in Yellowstone Park. [U.S. Cong.,
Sen. repts.?!, 52-1, vol.2, no. 322, 2 pp.

Gary, Merritt

1917 Life zone investigation in Wyoming. U.S. Biol. Surv., No.
Am. fauna, no. 42, 95 pp., illus., map.

Description of the flora and fauna of each zone.

Chanler, Winthrop

1893 A day with the elk. In: American big-game hunting, pp. 61-
72. New York, Forest and Stream pub. co.

Chapman, Lucie, and Chapman, Wendell

1935 With wild animals in the Rockies. Nat. geog. mag., 68:
231-49 (Aug.) , illus.

Two years of "camera hunting11 in Yellowstone and Glacier
national parks. Excellent photographs of large and small animals.

Chapman, Wendell, and Chapraan, Lueie

1936 Never a dull moment. Scribner's mag. ,100:45-48 (Oct. ) , illus,
More photographing of aniiial subjects, some near Yellowstone,

175

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL

Chittenden, Hiram M.

1933 Fauna of the Yellowstone. In his:YellO7/stone National Park,
pp. 208-19, illus. New ed. , Stanford Uuiv.( Calif .) press.

*Cohenour, H.H.

n.d. Report on investigation of animal diseases in Yellowstone
National Park in 1917. Mimeographed, in Yellowstone Mus.

*Comstock, T.B.
1874 The Yellowstone National Park. Am. nat., 8:75-76 (no. 2).

Condon, David

1931 Mount Washburn. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8: 59 (Aug. ) ,illus.
Tlie rich flora and fauna of this area are described.

Cottrell, Lee

1928 Elk and coyotes. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:4 (Feb.l).

Crocker, F.C.

1893 After wapiti in Wyoming. In: American big-game hunting,
pp. 140-54. New York, Forest and Stream pub. co.

Crosby, John S.

1884 Report of the Governor of Montana. In: Ann. rept . of the

Sec. of the Int. for the fiscal year 1883/84, 2:557-65.

Waste of fish and game deplored: army to replace civilians.

Crowe, George C.

1934 The buffalo round-up. Yellowstone nat. notes, 11:43-44
(Nov. -Dec.) , illus.

Size, migrations, range, management of Yellowstone herds.

Demaray, A.E.

1923 Parked bears and park bears. Nature mag. ,1:43-44, 60, illus.

*Dixon, Joseph S.

1929 Report on the bear situation in Yellowstone National Park.
I,Is. in Yellowstone Mus.

* , Wright, George M. , and Thompson, Ben H.

1931 The wildlife problem of the National Park system. Sci.,
74:540 (no. 1926).

, joint author. See: Wright, George M. , 1933.

*Dunraven, Windham T.W.-Q. , 4th Earl of
1917 Hunting in the Yellowstone; on the trail of the wapiti

with Texas Jack in the land of the geysers. (Horace Kephart ,

176

FAUNA:

ed.) New York.

See alco the 1925 edition (New York, Macmillan) , pp. 130-
60, 314-33. The volume was originally published in 1876 as The
Great Divide; travels in the upper Yellowstone in summer of 1874.

Durbin, Mildred G.

1927 The [bear] bandits of Yellowstone Park. Am. forests, 33:
530-31 (Sept.) , illus.

[Eaton, Howard]

1913 Antelope in Wyoming. Forest and stream, 80 : 140-41 ( Feb. 1) .

Edwards, J.H.

1934 Observation of otter on Nez Perce Creek, Yellowstone.
Yellowstone nat . notes , 11: 40 (Sept . -Oct . ) .

Elliott, Albert E.

1935 The elk reduction program. Yellowstone nat. notes, 12:
2-5 (Mar . -Ap . ) , illus .

To counteract direct and indirect effects of overgrazing.

*Emerson, Frank C.
1927 The conservation of the elk of Jackson Hole, Wyoming.

Natl. Conf. on Outdoor Re c. (Washington, B.C. ) , [Proc.?],
pp.5, 7-11, 19, 32 (July).

*Evarts, Hal G.

1924 The final rally. Outdoor Am., 3:8-12 (Dec.).

1925 A Chinaman's chance for elk. Sat. eve. post, 198:38(Sept.5) .

Evermann, Barton W.

1893 A reconnaissance of the streams and lakes of western Montana

and northwestern Wyoming. U.S. Fish Com., Bui., 11:3-60,

illus. , maps.

Contains list of mammals observed in the two areas.
*

1922 The conservation and proper utilization of out natural re
sources. Sci. mo.', 15 [?]: 289-312.

Figgins, J.D.

1933 The bison of the western area of the Mississippi Basin.

Colo. Mus. Nat. Hist., Proc., vol.12, no. 4 (Dec.), 33 pp.

Pages 28-33 refer to the Yellowstone region.

Finley, William L. , and Finley, Irene

1925 The return of the wapiti. Nature mag. ,5:69-73(Fob. ) , illus .
Transfer of an elk herd from Yellowstone back to Oregon.

177

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

1925a Stalking moose. Nature mag. , 6:345-58 (Dec.), illus.
Experiences while hunting with a camera in Yellowstone.

Fountain, Paul

1906 Fauna of Yellowstone Park. In his: The eleven eaglets of
the West, p. 190. New York, Button.

Franklin, W.S.

1913 Yellowstone bears a nuisance. Sci., n.s., 38: 127 -29 (July 25)

Frazer, Elizabeth

1920 The last wilderness. Sat. eve. post, 192:14-15 (Jan. 24) .
Urges protection of the elk in Yellowstone Park.

Freeman, L.R.

1901 Protect the game in Yellowstone Park. Recreation, 15:425-
29 (Dec.).

Froth inghani, Robert

1932 Yellowstone Park, our great wild animal sanctuary. In his:

Trails through the Golden West, pp. 217-33, illus. Now

York, McBride.

Fryxell, Friticf M.

1926 A new high altitude limit for the American bison. Jour,
of mam. , 7:102-09 (May).

Contains notes on the bison of Yellowstone Park.

1928 The for-ner range of the bison in the Rocky Mount e. ins .

Jour, of mam. , 9:129-39 (May).

Regions now included in Yellowstone, Rocky Mountain, and
Grand Teton national parks.

Fuertes, Louis Agassiz, illus. See: Nelson, E.W. , 1916.

*Goldman, E.A.

1920 Conserving our wild animals and birds. U.S. Dept. Agric.,
Yr. bk., [1920]:159-74.

1927 What to do with the Yellowstone elk? Am. forests, 33:

279-82 (May), illus.
*

1930 The coyote — arch predator. Jour, of mam., vol.2, no. 3.

Graves, Henry S. , and Nelson, E.W.

1919 Our national elk herd; a program for conserving the elk in
national forests about the Yellowstone National Park. •

178

FAUNA: MAMMALS

U.S. Dept. Agric., Dept. circ.51, 34 pp., illus.
Joint contribution of Forest Service and Biol. Survey.

*Graves , E.S.

1926 The duty of scientific men in conservation. In: Natural
ists' guide to the Americas, pp. 52-53. Baltimore.

Gregg, William C.

1923 Fading game trails. Outlook, 135 : 361 -64 ( Oct. ), illus. , map.
The struggle to preserve big game in and near Yellowstone.

Grinnell, George B.

1876 List of mammals and birds. In: Report of a reconnaissance
from Carroll, Montana Territory, on the upper Missouri, to
the Yellowstone National Park..., pp.[63]-92. U.S. Army,
Engr. dept. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Exploration made under the direction of William Ludlow in
the summer of 1875.

, and Rainsford, W.S.

1897 The last of the buffalo. In: Hunting [by various authors],
pp. 201-61, illus. fNew York], Charles Scribner's Sons.
Distribution, history, habits of the plains buffalo. Waste
ful hunting methods of the Indians. Mentions Yellowstone.

1900 The present distribution of big game in America. Outing,
37:251-59 (Dec.), illus.
Discusses unregulated destruction; Yellowstone as a refuge.

1904 Big-game refuges. In: American big game in its haunts, pp.
442-54, illus. New York, Forest and stream pub. co.

1904a The mountain sheep and its range. In: American big game in
its haunts, pp. 270-348. New York, Forest and stream.
Concerns chiefly the Rocky Mountain region and Yellowstone.

1918 What about the Yellowstone elk? Forest and stream, 88:
336 ( June ) .

, joint ed.

1925 The American bison in 1924. In: Hunting and conservation;

the book of the Boone and Crockett Club (George B. Grinnell

and Charles Sheldon, eds.), pp. 356-411, illus. New Haven,

Conn., Yale Univ. press.

References to buffalo in the Yellowstone region and park.

Mountain sheep. Jour, of mam., 9:1 (no.l).
Pronghorn antelope. Jour, of mam., 10:135-41 (May).

*

1928
*

1929

179

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

*Grinnell, Joseph, and Storer, Tracy I.

1916 Animal life as an asset of national parks. Sci., 44:375-
80 (Sept. 15).

1926 A wildlife creed. Yoseinite nat. notes, 5:2 (Jan. 30).
*

1928 What is a natural balance for wildlife in national parks,
and how can it be maintained? Natl. Park Serv. Supt.fs
Conf . ,Rept. , 95-99.

*Hague, Arnold

1886 Elk in Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 26:89(Feb.25) .

1893 The Yellowstone Park as a game reservation. In: American
big-game hunting; the book of the Boone and Crockett Club,
pp. 240-70. Neiv York, Forest and stream pub. co.

*Hahn, W. L.

1913 The future of the North American fauna. Pop. sci. mo.,
83:169-77.

Harris , Moses

1887 The large game in the Yellowstone National Park. Am.
field, 27:32 (Jan. 8).

Hawley, Sherwin

1914 New national bison herd. Country life in Am., 25:136
(Mar.) , illus.

Notes on herds in Yellowstone and Wind Cave national parks.

Heller, Edmund

1925 The big game animals of Yellowstone National Park. Roose
velt wild life bul., 2:405-67 (Feb.), illus. (Syracuse
Univ. bul., vol.24, no. 23).

, and Heller, Hilda M.

1923 The vanishing race of pronghorns. Travel, 41:5-10, 48( June) ,
How these antelope are being preserved in Yellowstone.

*Henderson, W.C.
1930 The control of the coyote. Jour, of mam., vol.2, no. 3.

Henshaw, Henry W.

1915 Game preservation. U.S. Dept. Agric. , Ann. rept., 1915:
243-44 (Rept. of Chief of the Biol. Surv.). Washington,
Govt. print, off.

Reports winter ranges established in Jackson Hole, and the
condition of the oik during the previous winter.

180

FAUNA: MAMMALS

1916 [Studies of elk in Yellowstone National Park,] U.S. Dept.
Agric., Ann. rept. , 1916:237-52 (Kept, of Chief of the
Biol. Surv.) Washington, Govt. print, off.
Studies made jointly with the Forest Service. Information

on storing of forage; shipment of surplus elk; a 520-acre refuge.

[Hitchcock, E.A., and others]

1902 The American bison in the United States and Canada. 57th

U.S. Cong., 1st sess., Sen. doc. 445, 43 pp. (ser. no. 4249).

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Letter from Secretary of Interior to the Senate, with re
ports from various others, on status of the then existing herds.

Hitchings, J.M.

1928 Beaver of Yellowstone National Park. In Yellowstone ranger
nat. man., pp. 111-14, illus. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

, and Marsh, Gerald E.

1928a Questions and answers [about the animals of Yellowstone],

In; Yellowstone ranger nat. man., pp. 42-48. Yellowstone

Natl. Park.

*Hofer, Elwood

1887 Catching wild animals. Forest and stream, 38:173 (no.l);
38:195 (no. 2); 38:224 (no. 3) ; 38:247 (no. 4); 38:271 (no. 5).

1887a Number of elk estimated to be in Yellowstone. Forest and
stream, 28:319 (May 5).

Holte, Peter

1910 Catching buffalo calves. Forest and stream, 75:[448]-50
(Sept. 17); [488]-90 (Sept. 24), illus.

Kornaday, William T.

1889 The extermination of the American bison. Smithsn. Instn. ,

Ann. rept., 1887:367-548, illus., map.

Contains a section of the "wood" or "mountain" buffalo, a

species found in Yellowstone.
*

1906 The American natural history. New York, Scribner's Sons.
Pages 37, 39, 100, 102, 103, 122, and 127 are pertinent.

1913 [Big game animals in Yellowstone.] In his: Our vanishing
wild life, pp. 159-61, 165-67, 169, 175, 180. New York,
New York Zool. Soc.
On the condition of ell:, bison, pronghorn antelope, bighorn

181

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Hornaday, William T.

sheep, and moose in the region.

Horsfall, Carra E.

1927 The twenty thousand of Jackson Hole. Nature mag., 10:350-
54 (Dec. ) , illus.

*Hough, Donald

1925 As I found the elk in Jackson Hole. Outdoor Am., 3:24-28
(Feb.).

*Hough, Emerson

1894 Forest and Stream's Yellowstone Park game exploration.
Forest and stream, May 5 to Aug. 25, 1894. (13 pts.).

1894a The winter home of the elk. Forest and stream, 40:232

(Mar. 16).
*_

1918 Sheep or elk in our forest reserves? Forest and stream,
88:137-41, 176-78 (Mar. — ).

Hough, Walter

1934 The domestication of aniraals. Sci . mo., 39 : 144- 50 ( Aug. )
Has a bearing on elk and other animals of Yellowstone.

*Howell, A. Brazier
1921 The black bear as a destroyer of game. Jour, of mam. , 2:

36 (Feb.).
*

1926 Voles of the genus Phenacomys. U.S. Dept. Agric. , Bur. of
Biol. Surv., No. Am. fauna, no. 48, 20 pp. Washington,
Govt. print, off.

Howell, Arthur Ii.

1924 [Pikas of Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Revision of
American pikas, pp.5, 18. U.S. Dept. Agric., Bur. of Biol,
Surv., No. Am. fauna, no. 47. Washington, Govt. print, off,

1929 [Chipmunks of Yellowstone National Park.] In his: Revision
of the American chipmunks ^ pp.7, 48, 69, 139. U.S. Dept.
Agric., Bur. of Biol. Surv., No. Am. fauna, no. 52. Wash
ington , Govt. print, off.

Jagger, T.A.

1889 Death Gulch, a natural bear. trap. Pop. sci. mo., 54:475-

81 (Feb.) , illus.

How animals are poisoned by nocturnal emanations of gas in
a small valley in Yellowstone Park.

182

FAUNA: MAMMALS

Jof f e , Joseph

1930 Disposal of surplus elk and buffalo. Yellowstone nat.

notes, 7:10 (Feb.), illus.

* _____

1931 Hollywood diet hits Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes,
8:19 (Mar.),

Notes on attempts, under the direction of William Rush,' to
administer medical aid to sick game animals in the park.

* Johns on, J.M.

1913 Four-footed citizens of the Yellowstone. Outing mag.,
Jan. , pp. 449-55.

Jones, J.R. , joint author. See: Smith, Riley, 1918.

* _____

1926 The elk of Jackson Hole. Outdoor Am., 4:18,115-17 (May).
Joslin, Theodore G. , joint author. See; Albright, Horace M. ,1930.

Joyner, Newell F.

1928 Beavers in the Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:
4-6 (Oct.l), illus.

1928a The yellow-haired porcupine. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:
2-3 (Sept.)

1930 Concerning beaver dams. Yellowstone nat. notes ,7:4-5( Jan. )

Kearns, William E.

1937 The speed of grizzly bears. Yellowstone nat. notes, 14:
U3-3 (Jan. -Feb.).

Keatch, F.E.

1917 The elk situation in Wyoming. Field and stream, 22:276
(July).

Kell, Elmer A. ,Jr.

1927 Yellowstone Park bears. In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man.,
pp. 82-84. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

Habits of the black and grizzly bears of the park.

Koch, Felix J.

1915 Protecting national parks against poachers. Overland mo.,
n.s., 65:117-22 (Feb.), illus.

*Leek, Stephen N.

1914 The elk; their home and habits. Elizabeth, N.J., Campbell
Art Co. , illus.

183

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Leek, Stephen N. , continued

1918 The life of an elk. Outdoor life, 42:557-60 (Dec.).

1925 Last minute news of game conditions in Jackson Hole, Wyoming.
New York Zool. Soc. , Bui. , 28:11 ( Jan. ) .

*Leopold, Aldo

1931 The forester's role in game management. Jour, of forestry,
29:25-31 (Jan.).

Lindsley, Marguerite. See; Arnold, Marguerite (Lindsley).

Lystrup, Herbert

1930 Bats. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7:84 (Dec.)

*McCrackin, Josephine C.
1914 Condition of the Yellowstone elk. Outdoor life, 34: 65 (July)

, J.A.

1916 Some sidelights on bruin's winter sleep. Outdoor life,
38:578-80 (Dec.).

McNutt, Jack

1935 Drift of big game animals in Cooke City region. Yellow

stone nat. notes, 12:10-11 (Mar.-Ap.).

The feeding range of elk, deer, moose east of Yellowstone.

Marsh, Gerald E., joint author. See; Hitchings, J.M. , 1928a.

*Martindale, P.

1926 Animal tracks in rock. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:6-7
(Sept. 30).

*Mather, Stephen T.
1915 National parks on a business basis. Aia. rev. of revs.,

51:429-31.
*.. ____

1921 Report of director of National Park Service-, 1921. Wash

ington, Govt. print, off.
* _____

"t

1927 A glimpse backward at National Park development. Nature
mag. , 10:112-15.

Merriam, C. Hart

1873 Report on the mammals and birds of the expedition. U.S.

Geol. Surv. of the terrs., 6th Ann. rept., 1872, pt.II:

[661]-715.

Includes a descriptive list of birds and mammals observed

184

FAUNA: MAMMALS

in Yellowstone Park.

Merrill, Samuel

1920 ("The increase of moose in the Yellowstone National Park.]
In: The moose book, pp.38, 51, 362-63. New York, Dutton.

*Miller, Ernest

19E5 Yellowstone elk problems. Forest and stream, 95:106-08
(Feb.).

Miller, George W.

1932- Buffalo disposal. Yellowstone nat . note;, 9:5 (Jan.-

1933 Feb.); 10:5-6 (Jan. -Feb.), illus.

Notes on necessary reduction, with statistics for 1929-32.

Miller, Gerrit S.,Jr., and Allen, Glover M.

1928 Myotis lucifugus carissima. U.S. Natl. Mus. , Bui., 144:

50-51, 58.

Description and notes on distribution of a Yellowstone bat.

Mills , Enos A.

1919 [Grizzly boars of Yellowstone.] In his: The grizzly, our

' greatest wild animal, pp.,58, 206, 232-39, 280. New York,
Hough ton Mifflin.

1919a Pronghorn of the plains. Sat. eve. post, 191:62-65 (May
10), illus.
Yellowstone is one of the last refuges of this antelope.

1920 The happy-go-lucky black bear. Country life, 39:61-62
(Dec.) , illus.

Protection for this bear is urged.

*Montana Sport smen's Association

1928 A program for the perpetuation of the northern Yellowstone
Park elk herds. Missoul'a, Mont., 4 pp.

*Moore, Barrington
1925 Importance of natural conditions in national parks. In:

Hunting and conservation; the book of the Boone and Crockett
Club, pp. 340-55. New Haven, Conn., Yale Univ. press.

*Morrell, Fred

1924 The biography of Little Bill Elk. Am. forests and forest
life, 30:393-97 (July).

Murie , Olaus J.

1929 Summering with the elk. Am. forests- and forest life, 35:

185

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Murie, Olaus J. , continued

694-97 (Nov.) , illus.

1930 An epizootic disease of elk. Jour, of mam. , 11:214-72
(May) , illus.

Studies inado by the Bureau of Biological Survey near
Yellowstone.

1931 Game conditions of the upper Yellowstone-Thorofare region;
report exhibit II. In: The final report of the Yellowstone
Boundary Commission on an inspection of areas involved in
the proposed adjustment of the southeast, south, and south
west boundaries of Yellowstone National Park, made pursuant
to Public Resolutions no. 94, 70th Congress. Approved Feb
ruary 28, 1929. 71st U.S. Cong., 3d sess., House doc. 710
(ser. no. 9360). Washington, Govt. print, off.

1935 The elk of Jackson Hole. Nat. hist., 35:[237]-47, illus.

Attempts to solve the surplus elk problem by opening the
Teton game preserve to hunters.

*National Conference on Outdoor Recreation

1927- The conservation of the elk of Jackson Hole, Wyoming. Re-
1928 ports, 1927:1-36; 1928:91-95. Washington, Govt. print, off,

Nelson, E.W.

1914 Description of a new subspecies of moose from Wyoming.

Biol. Soc. of Wash. [D.C.], Proc. , 27:71-74 (Ap.25).

Brief account of Alces-Americanus Shirasi, found abundantly
along the Yellowstone River and south of Yellowstone Lake.

1916 The larger North American mammals. Natl. geog. mag., 30:
[369]-472, illus.

Detailed descriptions, handsomely illustrated by Louis
Agassiz Fuertes. Pertinent to Yellowstone big-game animals.

1917 The Yellowstone and the game supply. Natl. Parks Conf . ,
Proc. , 1917:200-04.

Past and present wildlife conditions in the Yellowstone.
*

1917- Reports of the Chief of the Bureau of Biological Survey.
1926 1917:9-11; 1918:10-12; 1919:15-17; 1920:23-26; 1921:19,22-

23; 1922:22,30; 1923:35-36; 1924:23,30; 1925:17,22; 1926:

15-16. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1925 Status of the prong-horned antelope. U.S. Dept. Agric.,
Dept. bul. no. 1346, 64 pp., illus., maps.
A general consideration, with references to Yellowstone herd.

186

FAUNA: MAMMALS

*Norris , Philetus W.
1880 Animals of the park. Ann. rept. of supt., Yellowstone.

Nye, Gerald

1928 Improving winter feed facilities of game animals of Yell-
stone National Park. 70th U.S. Cong., 1st sess., Sen.
rept. 1025, 5 pp. (ser. no. 8831). Washington, Govt. print,
off.

Oberhansley, Frank

1937 Buffalo in Yellowstone Park. Yellowstone nat. notes, 14:
4-9 (Jan. -Feb.), illus., bibliog.

*01dys, Henry

1908 Poaching in the Yellowstone Park. Forest and stream, 70:
255 (Feb. 15) , illus.

*0sborn, H.F.

1912 Preservation of the world's animal life. Am. Mus . , Jour.,
12:123-24.

*Palmer, T.S.

1911 The great game parks. Am. conservn. , 1:179-85 (June).
*

1912 National reservations for the protection of wildlife.-

U.S. Dept. Agric., Bur. of Biol. Surv. , Circ. no. 87, 32 pp.,

maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.
*

1913 Transferring and feeding elk. Outdoor world and rec., n.s.,
48:276 (Ap.).

1935 Conservation in Washington. Bird lore, 37:128 (Mar.-Ap.).
Reports 600 Yellowstone elk transferred, 1700 killed during
an open season in a tract adjacent to the park.

*Payson, L.E.
1890 Recommended extension and further provision for care of

Yellowstone Park. U.S. Cong., H.R. 51-1, vol.5:l-5(no,1454) .

Phillips, Charles

1927 Life zones of Yellowstone Park. In: Yellowstone ranger nat.
man., pp. 59-67, illus. Yellowstone Nat 1. Park.

*Pickett, William D.

n.d. Memories of a bear hunter. In: Hunting at high altitudes;
the book of the Boone and Crockett Club.
Gives number of elk killed for hides near Mammoth, 1874-75.

187

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Pitcher, John

1905 National park game. Forest and stream, 64:69 (Jan.)*

Protective measures in Yellowstone. Author was Acting Supt.

*Pope, Saxton T.

1920 Hunting grizzly [in Yellowstone] with the bow. Forest
and stream, 90:533-36, 565-68.

Preble, Edward A.

1911 Report on the condition of elk in Jackson Hole, Wyoming, in

1911. U.S. Dept. Agric., Bui-, of Biol. Surv. , Bui. 40, 23

pp . , illus . , maps .

"The first important study dealing with this problem...."

Rainsford, W.S., joint author. See: Grinnell, George B. , 1897.

[Randall, Dick]

1934 Dick Randall tells the tragic truth about the elk; a vivid

description by an eye-witness. Now York, Emergency Con-

servn. Com., 10 pp., illus., map.

Redington, Paul G.

1928 Some American game problems. Rod and gun in Can., 30:
216 (Aug.).

Reinhard, Edward G.

1930 The winter lodge of the niuskrat. Yellowstone nat. notes,
7:77 (Nov.) .

Riley, Smith

1916 Game farming in national parks and forests. Univ. of

Calif., Jour, of agric, , 4:84-85 (Oct.), illus.
*

1928 Food of elk. Outdoor life, vol.65, no.l.
*_.„

1929 The Yellowstone elk problem. Outdoor life, 65(7), no.o.

*Robinson, Wirt
1907 Mammals; A partial list of the fauna of the Yellowstone

National Park. Ms. in the Roosevelt Wild Life Forest Ex-
per. Sta.

*Roosevelt, Theodore
1892 An elk hunt at Two -Ocean Pass. Century, 44:713-19 (Sept.).

, joint ed. See: Rogers, Archibald, 1893.

1904 Wilderness reserves. In: American big game in its haunts;

188

FAUNA: MAMMAIS

the book of the Boone and Crockett Club (Theodore Roosevelt
and George Bird Grinnell, eds.), pp. 23-51, illus. New
York, Forest and stream pub. co.
An account of a camping trip in Yell ows tone Park.

*Rumsey, B.C.
1916 Western moose in Wyoming. Field and stream, 21:17-18(0ct.)

Rush, William M.

Note: Not all the following items pertain directly to Yel
lowstone, but because of the author's close association with
the park and its faunal problems they are included.

*1925 How the game is counted in the national forest. Forest

and stream, Oct .
*

1926 Diseases of mountain sheep. Outdoor life, 62:36 (no. 4).

*

1927 Beaver anatomy. Jour, of mam. , vol. 8, no. 3.

1927a Harvesting the annual elk crop. Forest and stream, Dec.
*

Ivory hunting. The big horn, vol.4, no. 4.

1927b

1927 c

*

1930

*

1930a

Notes on diseases in wild game aninals. Jour, of mam.,
8:163 (no. 2).

Beaver behavior. Jour, of mam. , 9:252 (Aug.).

1928
*

1928a The lone wolf poachers. Am. forests and forest life, 34:
90-92 (Feb.).

1929 A record [buffalo] head. Yellowstone nat. notes, 6:3
(June 1) , illus .

1929a What is to become of our northern elk herd? Am. forests
and forest life, 35:93-95, 125-26 (Feb.),. illus.

Effects of foxtail grass on gaiae animals. Ms. in Yellow
stone Mus .

Elk expert for more hunting. Mont, wild life, vol. 3, no. 2.
*

1930b Elk survey in Yellowstone National Park. Mont, wild life,

vol.3, no.l.
*

1930c Exceptionally large elk antlers. Yellowstone nat. notes,
7:73 (Oct.).

189

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Rush, William. M. , continued
*1930d Flies killing deer in national parks. nont. wild life,

vol.3, no.l.
*

1930e Montana a center of elk study. Mont .wild life , vol. 2, no. 81.
*

1930f More notes on the beaver. Yellowstone nat . notes, 7: [12]-

13 (Mar.), illus.
*

1930g Recommendations for improving the present method of taking

elk fron the northern elk herd. Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.
*

1930h Relation of heavy use of range to spread of parasites.
Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.

1930i Ursus horribilis Bairdi. Mont, wild life, vol.3, no. 4.
*

1930 j Who owns the Furand mystery elk herd? Mont, wild life,

vol.3, no.l.
*

1931 Cow elk is cunning mother. Mont, wild life, 4:ll-14(Nov.)
*

1931a Crowded ranges. Mont, wild life, vol.3, no. 9.
*

1931b Diphyllobothrium latura in bear. Ms., 5 pp., U.S. Forest
Serv. , Missoula, Mont.

See also: Jour, of mam. , 13:371-72 (Nov., 1938).

*-_--_

1931c Jerked venison. Mont, wild life, vol.4, no. 2.
*_

1931d Method of study of diseases in wild animals. Ms., U.S.
Forest Serv., Missoula, Mont.
MSynopsis of talk given to Wild Life Conference, Ecological

Society of America, Sphraim, Utah, August 18, 1931."
*_

1931e The northern Yellowstone ell: study. Outdoor Am. , 10:12-13,

Apparently the same as a paper read before the American
Game Conference, December, 1931, and filed in U.S. Forest Service,
Missoula, Mont.

1931f Notes fron wildlife research laboratory. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 8:84 (Nov. -Dec.).

Analyses of stomach contents indicate diet of coyotes. Fur
ther studies to be reported in ensuing numbers of Nature Notes.
*_--

i

1931g Palatability and utilization of forage plants by wild ani
mals. Ms., U.S. Forest Serv., Missoula, Mont.

190

FAUNA: MAMMALS

Read before the Ecological Society of America, Ephraim,
Utah, August 18, 1931.
*

1931h Parasitosis in game animals. Ms., 7 pp. (read before the
Bozeman Rod and Gun Club, April, 1931), U.S. Forest Serv. ,

Mi s s oul a , Mont .
*

1931 i Preliminary report on elk study, northern Yellowstone herd.

Ms., 78 pp., illus., in Yellowstone Mus.
*

1931 j Russian broad tapeworm in Yellowstone bears. Ms., 4 pp. ,

in Yellowstone Mus.
*

1932 Artificial feeding of elk and other wild anirnals. Mont,
wild life, 3:11 (Ap.).

1932a Bang's disease in the Yellowstone National Park buffalo
and elk herds. Jour, of .mam., 13:371-72 (Nov.).
Published from a 10-page manuscript filed in the U.S. For
est Service office, Missoula, Mont.
*

1932b Conflict between domestic stock and game animals resulting
from food habits. Ms., 5 pp., U.S. Forest Serv., Missoula,
Mont .
"Read before Northern Rocky Mountain section, Society of

American Foresters, Missoula, Mont., January 5, 1932."
*

1932c Detention of mule deer, Odocoileus hemionus. Ms., 6 pp.,
illus., Yellowstone Mus.

1932d Diphyllobothrium latum in bear. Jour, of mam., 13:274-75
(Aug.) .

1932e The elk situation in Montana. Mont. State Fish and Game
dept., Bien. rept., 1931-32:7.

1932f Final report on elk study, Northern Yellowstone herd. Ms.,

50 Dp . , illus . , Yellowstone Mus .
*

1932g Life history of elk; northern Yellowstone elk herd. Ms.,

19 pp., U.S. Forest Serv., Missoula, Mont.
*

1932h The northern Yellowstone elk study. Ms., 9 pp., U.S. For
est Serv., Missoula, Mont.
*

1932i Results of coyote stomach analysis in Yellowstone Park.
Ms., 4 pp., U.S. Forest Serv., Missoula, Mont.

191

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

*Rush, William M«, continued
1932j Teniasis in mule deer. Ms., 3 pp., U.S. Forest Serv. ,

Missoula, Mont.
*

1932k Wild animal photo cage. Nature mag., vol.2, no. 5.
*

1933 Game studies in national forests and national parks. West.
Assn. Fish and Game Cora., 12th arm. conf., Prcc.

1933a More about elk calls. Jour, of mam., 14:78 (Feb.).

1933b Northern Yellowstone elk study. Missoula, Mont., Mont.
Fish and Game Com., 131 pp., illus., maps.

Environmental and management problems; suggested solutions.
*

1933c Parasitic and other diseases of wild animals in Montana: a

tabulation. Ms.? U.S. Forest Serv., Missoula, Mont.
*

1933d Principal species of native wild animals in Montana: a
tabulation. Ms.?, U.S. Forest Serv., Missoula, Mont.

*Russell, Carl P.

1939 Scientific research, a park naturalist's responsibility.
In: Yosemite ranger nat. nan., pp. 130-31.

1932 Seasonal migration of nuledeer. Ecolog. Soc. Am. , Monogs.,
2:1-46 (Jan.).
Factors influencing migration in Yosemite and Yellowstone.

*Russell, Osborne
1921 Journal of a trapper, 1834-43. Boise, Ida., 149 pp.

Mentions abundance of elk in the park arsa in those years.

St. Glair, Mabella H.

1932 More about Max. New York, Har court, 149 pp., illus.

Based on several months of bear study in Yellowstone Park.

Sanborn, Edwin H.

1916 Above the frontier in Montana. Outing, 69:5-19(Oct .) , illus
Describes game around Glacier and Yellowstone paries.

Sawyer, Edmund J.

1924 Buffalo shipped. Yellowstone nat. notes, 1:5-6 (Aug.).

1924a Mammals [Camp Roosevelt , Yellowstone], Yellowstone nat.
notes , 1:4 (Aug. 4) .

[ — ]

1924b A trip around Lake Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes,

192

FAUNA: MAMMALS

l:[l]-4 (Sept. 20), illus . , map.

Animals and birds observed on a shore-line cruise.

1925 Beaver. Yellowstone nat. notes, 2:3-4 (Ap.29) , illus.

Brief notes on habits and works of the Yellowstone beaver.
*

1926 The control of predatory animals. Yellowstone nat. notes,
vol.3, no. 2.

1926a Distribution of animal life in Yellowstone National Park.
Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:4-6 (Ap.30).

1926b Elk at play. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:4-5 (Mar. 30).

1926c The Firehole River in winter. Yellowstone nat. notes,
3:6-7 (Mar.).

1926d The Kennicott ground squirrel,
2 (Ap.30).

1928

Yellowstone nat. notes,

The bread line at Mammoth . Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:4-
5 ( Jan.l) , illus.

Senn, Nicholas

1904 [Yellowstone.] In his: Our national recreation parks, pp.

17-92. Chicago, ?7.B. Conkey.

Contains notes on fauna in addition to general description.

*Seton, Ernest T.

1898 Mammals of the Yellowstone National Park. Recreation, 8:
365-71 (Mar.), illus., maps.

Biography of a grizzly. New York, Century, 117 pp., illus.

1903
1906

1909

1913
1916

The wapiti and his antlers. Scribner's mag., 39:15-33

(Jan.), illus., map.

With particular reference to the elk of Yellowstone.

Life histories of northern animals. New York, Scribner's,

2 v., illus.

Abundant material on the animals of Yellowstone Park.

i'/ild animals at home. New York, Double day, 226 pp., illus.
Over 150 sketches and photographs of Yellowstone animals.

Johnny Bear. In his: Lives of the hunted, pp. 141-91,

illus . New York , Scribner f s .

Episodes in the life of a Yellowstone bear. See also: pp.

193

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL P4RK

Seton, Srnest T., continued

214-28. An earlier (the first?) edition was published in 1901.
*

1926 A note on prairie dogs seen near Gardiner, Montana. Jour.

of mam. , 7:229 (Aug.) .
*

1929 Lives of game animals. New York, 4 v., illus . , maps.

Sac h volume is in two parts. Fifty raps, 1500 illustrations.

Sheldon, Charles, joint ed. See: Grinnell, George B. , 1925.
*

1927 The conservation of the elk in Jackson Hole, Wyoming .
Natl. Conf. on Outdoor Rec., fProc.?]. Washington, D.C.

Sherman, William T. , joint author. See: Sheridan, Philip H. , 1878.

Sheridan, Philip H. , and Sherman, Will lain T.

1878 Reports of inspection made in the sunnier of 1877. U.S.

Dept. I7ar, Rept., 1877, 110 pp., maps.

Contains notes on zoological observations made during the
reconnaissance of the Yellowstone and Big Horn valleys.

Shields, G.O.

1888 Elk-hunting in the Rocky Mountains. Harper's, 77:856-63

(Nov.), illus.

*Shiras, George, III

1909 Silver-tip surprises during a hunting trip for big game
with the camera on the upper Yellowstone River. Forest
and stream, 75:48-50 (July 10); 88-91 (July 17), illus.

1910 Moose of the upper Yellowstone Valley. Forest and stream,
75:130-31 (July 23); [17l]-72 (July 30), illus.

Account of a trip up the Yellowstone River to Bridger Lake.

1913 Wild animals that took their own pictures by day and by

night. Natl. geog. mag., 24:[763]-C34 (July), illus., map.
Camera hunting in Yellowstone; 14 photographs.

*Shore, W.B.

1912 Elk in Yellowstone Park. Outdoor life, 30:179 (Aug.).

*— .-

191£a An incident of the annual elk migration. Outdoor life,

Feb.: 125-30.
* .

1913 Shipping elk from the Yellowstone Park. Outdoor life, 31:
341 (Ap*), Seo also: 32:57 (July) for pertinent reference.

194

FAUNA: MAMMAIS

Shufeldt, R.W.

1921 American bears. Am forestry, 27:22-31 (Jan.)*

With special reference to Yellowstone and Sequoia.

Skinner, Curtis K.

1931 Oh, for the life of a ranger'. Yellowstone nat. notes,
8:5 (Jan.).

Describes the winter roundup of the park's buffaloes.

1932 Bedrooms. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:4 (Jan. -Feb.)
Describes a favorite bedding ground of the elk.

1932a Notes on winter observations of bears at Old Faithful

Station. Yellowstone nat. notes, 9:15-16 (Mar.), illus.

1933 Bedroom life of bears. Yellowstone nat. notes, 10:[33]-
35 (Sept. -Oct.) .

1935 Few wanderlusts among Yellowstone elk. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 12:9 (Mar.-Ap.).
Brief report on rioveinents of elk over ten-year period.

Skinner, Milton P.

1916 The hoofed animals of Yellowstone. Nat. hist., 16:87-95

(Feb.) , illus.

Deer, elk, buffalo, antelope, moose, and mountain sheep.

1920 Measurements of an unusual elk head. Jour, of mam., 1:
186 (Nov.).

1920a Story of the Whitebar elk. Nat. hist., 20:577-83 (Nov.-
Dec . ) , illus .
Biography of a bullet -scarred elk in Yellowstone Park.

1921 Dates of shedding of horns in Yellowstone National Park.
Jour, of mam. , 2:116. See also: 2:172; 4:185 (Nov.).

1922 The pronghorn. Jour, of mam. ,3:82-105 (May) , illus. .bibliog,
History, habits, reasons for accellerated diminution.

1924 The American antelope in Yellowstone National Park. Syra
cuse, N.Y. , Roosevelt Wild Life Forest Exper. Sta. , 32 pp.

1924a A beaver colony of Yellowstone Park. Nat. hist., 24:347-
49 ( May- June ), illus.

1925 Bears in the Yellowstone. Chicago, McClurg, 158 pp., illus.

195

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Skinner, Milton P., continued

1925a Migration routes of elk in Yellowstone National Park.
Jour, of mam. , 6:184-92 (Aug.).

[- — ]

1926 Mountain goat (Orearnus nontanos mlssoulae) not found in
Wyoming. Jour, of mam. , 7:334-35 (Nov.).

Reports lack of evidence that mountain goats have ever in
habited the Yellowstone region.

1927 Moose becoming a coiamon sight in Yellowstone National Park.
Jour, of mam., 8:1613 (May).

1927a The predatory and fur-bearing animals of the Yellowstone

National Park. Roosevelt wild life bul., 4:163-274 (June),

illus., map, bibliog. (Syracuse Univ. bul. , vol. 24, no. 27).
*_

1927b The white-tailed jack rabbit eats dandelion stalks. Jour.
of mam. , 8:249 (no. 3) .

1928 The elk situation. Jour, of mam. , 9:309-17 (Nov.).
Reports decrease of elk, makes suggestions for checking it.

1929 White-tailed deer formerly in Yellowstone Park. Jour, of

mam. , 10:101 (May) .
*_

n.d. Diseases of the pronghorn. Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.

Smith, F. Dumont

1909 Book of a hundred bears. Chicago, Rand, Mcllally, 233 pp.,

illus. (1st ed.).

Has references to the bears of Yellowstone.

*Smith, J.L.
1913 Yellowstone Park and bears. Sci., 37:941 (June 20).

Smith, Katherine L.

1906 The animals of Yellowstone Park. Am. homes and gardens,
2:392-95 (June), illus.

Smith, Riley, and Jones, J.R.

1918 The Wyoming elk situation. Outdoor life, 42: 173-76( illus. )

Smith, W.

1934 Picket pins hibernate early. Yellowstone rat. notes, 11:
[34-35] ( Sept. -Oct. ), illus.

*Squier, Emma-Lindsey
1924 Hater of ladies; Bill, a Yellowstone elk. Am. mag., Aug.:

196

FAUNA: MAMMALS

54-56.

Stewart, J. Thomas

1931 Shrews at Lake Yellowstone. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:
[62] (Aug.).

Stork, Harvey E.

1931 Report on a biological survey of Stevenson Island, in Yel
lowstone Lake, by the Third Scout Natural st Expedition.
Berkeley, Calif., Natl. Park Serv. , Field Div. of Educ.,
11 pp. , ill us .

*Strong, W.E.

1876 A trip to the Yellowstone National Park. Washington, [B.C.],
143 pp. , illus.
Mentions great slaughter of big game by hunters.

Taylor, Walter P.

1920 Saving ths Yellowstone elk herds. Conservationist, 3:
3-6 (Jan.) , illus.

"Texas Jack"

1879 Hunting the big-horn. Forest and stream, 13:852 (Nov. 27) ,

illus.'

Dialect account of hunting sheep on the Yellowstone River.

*Thomas, Oldfield

1904 Myotis lucifugus carissima. Annals and nag. of nat. hist.
May, 1904.

Thompson, Ben H. , joint author. See: Wright, George M. , 1933.

Thompson, T.M.

1930 Tree- cutting bears. Yellowstone nat, no':es, 7:83 (Dec.).

Thone , Frank

1927 The genesis of the Yellowstone National Park. In; Yellow
stone ranger nat. man., pp. 48-50. Yellc rstone Natl. Park.
Outlines development of flora and fauna since the Ice Age.

Toll, Roger W.

1936 Wilderness and wildlife administration in Yellowstone.
Am plan, and civic ann. , 1936:65-72.

*Traphagen, F.W.
1904 Death Gulch. Sci., n.s. , vol.19 (Ap.15).

*Trexler, Harrison A.

197

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

1921 The buffalo range of the northwest. Miss. Valley hist,
rev., 7:348-62 (Mar.).

*United States Congress.

1928 Improving winter feed facilities of game animals of Yellow
stone National Park. 70th U.S. Cong., 1st sess . , Sen.

rept., no. 1025, May 3, 1928, 5 pp.
*

1928a Elk refuge, Yellowstone National Park: .Isaring on H.R.15.

31 pp. Washington, G-ovt. print* off. (House Con. Pub. Lands)

*Van Nor den, Ottoman H.

1917 The bull elk of the Three Buttes* Recreation, 56:14-15
(Jan.) .

*Vaughn, Robert

1900 Then and now; or thirty-six years in the Rockies, 1864-

1900. Minneapolis, 461 pp.
Mentions early abundance of game in the Yellowstone region.

*Wade, Otis

1929 A preliminary report on the small mammals of the Tower Falls
region, Yellowstone National Park. Ms. in Yellowstone Mus.

Wallace, Dillon

1911 Saddle and camp in the Rockies. New York, Outing, 302 pp.,
illus.

A trip made to study big-game conditions. Yellowstone , Grand
Canyon, and the Rocky Mountain national park regions are covered.

1912 Save the elk. Outing, 60:378-80 (June).

Sheep are blamed for denudation of the ranges and consequent
starvation of elk around the Yellowstone region.

Warren, Edward R.

1922 The life of the Yellowstone beaver. Roosevelt wild life
bul., 1:187-221 (Aug.), illus., bibliog. (Syracuse Univ.

bul. , vol.22, no. 7) .
*

1924 Ground squirrels and weasels. Jour, of mam. , 5:265(Nov.).

1926 A study of the beaver in the Yancy region of Yellowstone
National Park. Roosevelt wild life annals, I:{j5]-191(0ct. ) ,
illus., maps, bibliog. (Syracuse Univ. bul., vol.24, no. 26).
Detailed study by an authority, and profusely illustrated

with photographs. Good folding maps of the park and beaver habitats.
* .

1927 The beaver. Baltimore, Williams and Wilkins , 177 pp.

198

FAUNA: MAMMALS

1928 The most interesting wild animal in America. Sci. mo.,
27:34-51 (July), illus .
Observations made on beavers in Yellowstone Park.

Wheeler, Olin D.

1896 Game in the Yellowstone National Park. Recreation, 4:'
221-25 (May).

*Wilcox, F.M.

1885 Colonel Norris and the grizzly of the Yellowstone. Am.
field, 24:259 (Sept. 19).

Windham. See: Dunraven, Windham T.Q.-'J. , 4th Earl of

Woo. dr ing, Sam T.

1926 Official census, animals. Yellowstone nat. notes, 3:2-4
(June 30) .

Mentions also: elevations determined by Coast and Geodetic
Survey, and temperatures of hot springs (Carnegie Institute) .

1927 Census of the wild animals of Yellowstone National Park.
In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., p. 79. Yellowstone
Natl. Park.

1929 Predatory animals. In: Yellowstone ranger nat. man., 129-
31. Yellowstone Natl. Park.

*Wright, Georgo M.

1930 Report of survey of wildlife conditions fin national parks].

Ann. rept., director, Natl. Park Serv., 1930:202-04.
*

1931 Report of preliminary wildlife survey. Ann. rept.,

director, Natl. Park Serv., 1931:148-50.
*

1932 Report of wildlife survey. Ann. rept., director, Natl.
Park Serv., 1932:68-74. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1933 Fauna of the national parks of the United States; a pre
liminary survey of faunal relations in national parks.
Washington, Govt. print, off., 157 pp., illus.

1935 Big game of our national parks. Sci. mo. ,41: 141-7 (Aug. ) ,il.

Wright, William H.

1909 A photographic expedition; flash -light ing grizzlies. In

his: The grizzly bear, pp. 142-02, ilius . New York, Charles

Scribner's Sons.

199

YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

The writer fs experiences in Yellowstone in 1906 and 1908.

Yeager , Dorr 0.

1928 Another white-tail fawn. Yellowstone nat. notes, 5:3-4

Up.l).

A species fairly prevalent in the park prior to 1923.

1928a Notes from the Yellowstone Zoo. Yellowstone nat. notes,
5: £-3 (Aug.1), illus.

1929 The Yellowstone biological laboratory. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 6:2-5 (Feb.), illus.

1930 Elk bid "good-bye" to native home. Yellowstone nat.
notes, 7:1 (Jan. ) .

Selection, crating, and shipment of surplus elk.

1930a The split -nail of a beaver. Yellowstone nat. notes, 7;7
(Feb.).

1931 Disposal of buffalo. Yellowstone nat. notes, 8:1 (Jan.),

1931a Our wilderness neighbors; a sympathetic description of the
most interesting animals in Yellowstone National Park.
Chicago, McClurg, 160 pp., illus., maps, bibliog.

1936 Scarface: the story of a grizzly. Philadelphia, Penn Pub.
co. , 254 pp.

*Yount , Harry

1881 Report of gamekeeper. In: Ann. rept. , Supt. of Yellowstone
Natl. Park, 1880:50. Washington, Govt. print, off.

*****

***

*

200

A BIBLIOGRAPHY
of

YOSELIITE NATIONAL PARK

FOREWORD

The following references to the literature of Yosemite Na
tional Park represent a selection gathered by workers on a re
search project sponsored by National Park Service in collabora
tion with the Work Projects Administration. These pages form
part of a larger volume which includes other national parks and
monuments in the West .

The references, in general, include material published
through 1936, though there are some items of more recent date.
Fiction, poetry, and maps have been excluded. Reprints, abstracts,
and book reviews usually have been cited only when the original
was not available. The scope and flexibility of the bibliography
have been increased by the free use of analytic references, or
relevant portions of books cited as such. In these cases, the
authorship of both the principal work and the portion analyzed are
the same, unless otherwise noted. If the "Yoseriite Nature Notes"
seern to outweigh all other citations, it is because of the unique
value of these as source material.

Among those to whom the National Park Service is indebted
for cooperation in preparing this bibliography are the Berkeley
Public Library and the University of California libraries. Mr.
Jerome K. Wilcox, Assistant Librarian at the University, and Miss
Edith M. Coulter, Professor of Bibliography in the graduate School
of Librarianship, both examined the preliminary typescript and
made valuable suggestions. Mr. Francis P. Farquhar of Berkeley
graciously made available his large private library of books on
the Sierra Nevada and allied topics, and for several hundred
titles included herein, we are indebted to him.

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL

I Administration and Policy (Including Roads,

Trails, and Buildings) ------------- 3

II Geography, Travel, and Description- - - ------10

III Educational and Museum Programs ----------43

FAUNA

I General (Ecological Conditions, Et Cetera)- - - - - 49

II Amphibians and Reptiles --------------52

III Birds 54

IV Fish and Fishing 60

V Insects and Other Invertebrates ----------62

VI Mammals ----------------------64

FLORA

I Ecological Conditions ---------------73

II Flowers and Plants- ----------------75

III Trees and Shrubs 80

GEOLOGY 93

HISTORY 109

INDIANS 128

LIST 0? HtelOMCALS AND S3RIALS CITED

Aldine, The

All the year round

Alpina Americana

Alpine journal

American Association for the Ad
vancement of Science, Proceed
ings

American civic annual

American forestry ( Jan.l910-Dec.
1923)

American forests (Jan. 1931 — )

American forests and forest life
( Jan. 1924-Dec. 1930)

American Geographical Society,
Bulletin

American geologist

American Institute of Mining
Engineers, Transactions

American journal of science and
arts

American mineralogist

American Museum of Natural
History, G-uide leaflets

American re view of reviews

American Scenic and Historic
Preservation Society, Annual
reports

Appalachia

Atlantic monthly

Auk

Bird lore

Boston Society of Natural Histo
ry, Proceedings

Botanical gazette

California

California Academy of (Natural)
Science, Proceedings

California fish and game

California forestry (University
of California, Forestry Club)

California Historical Society,
Quarterly

California School Library Associ
ation

California State Board of Trade,
Circulars

Calif ornian illustrated magazine

California's magazine

Carnegie Institution of washing-
ton, Publications

Century (The Century illustrated
monthly magazine, Nov.l881-0ct .
1925; The Century monthly
magazine, Nov. 1925-Ap. 1929;
The Century magazine, May 1929-
Dec.1930. Succeeded Scribner's
monthly)

Chautauquan

Collier's

Condor

Cornhill magazine

Cosmopolitan magazine

Country life (in America)

Craftsman

Ecological Society of America,
Monographs

Forester, The

Forestry and irrigation (Jan.
1902-Aug.l908. Succeeded The
Forester)

Galaxy, The

Garden and forest

Geographical review

Geographical Society of Phila
delphia, Bulletin

Geological Society of America,
Bulletin; Proceedings

Harper's new monthly magazine

Harper's weekly

Hutchings' illustrated California
magazine

Illustrated American

Independent

Journal of American folklore

Journal of geology

Journal of mammalogy

Land of sunshine

Leisure hour

Literary digest

Mentor

Mid-Pacific magazine

IvH.1v/e.ukee Public Museum, Bul-
lletin; Yearbook

Mining in California

Nation, The

National geographic magazine

National municipal review

National Parks Conference, Pro
ceedings

National parks bulletin (The Na-

vii

LIST OF PERIODICALS AND SERIALS CITED

tional Parks Assn., 1915 — .

Not a Government publication)
National review
Natural history
Nature almanac
Nature magazine
New republic
(New York) Zoological Society

bulletin
Osprey
Out west
Outing
Outlook
Overland monthly (Second series

began 1883)

Pacific Railroad, Reports
Pacific rural press
Pacific sportsman
Pan-American Union, Bulletin
Park Service bulletin (mimeo.)
Photo-era magazine
Playground

Popular science monthly
Putnam's magazine
Royal Society of New South

Wales , Journal and proceedings
Science; also, Science, new

series

Scientific American
Scientific monthly
Scribner's magazine (Jan. 1887--)
Scribner's monthly (Nov. 1870-

Oct.1881. Succeeded by The

Century)

Sierra Club bulletin
Sierra educational news
Smithsonian Institution, Annual

reports

Southern California Academy of
Science, Bulletin

Strand magazine

Sunset

Survey, The

Touring topics (Dec. 1926 — ,
called Westways)

U.S. Congress, Executive docu
ments; Senate documents

U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Division of Forestry, Bulletins,

U.S. Department of Interior,
Reports

U.S. Geological Survey, Annual
reports; Bulletins; Pro
fessional papers

U.S. National Museum, Reports

University of California, De
partment of geological science,
Bulletins

University of California maga
zine

University of California, Publi
cations in American archeology
and ethnology; Zoology

Washington Academy of Science,
Journal

Western journal and civilian

World's work

Yo Semite National Park, Adminis
trative reports

Yo Semite Natural History Associ
ation, Bulletins

Yosemite nature notes

Yosemite ranger-naturalists'
manual

Zoe

Vlll

GENERAL

I ADMINISTRATION AND POLICY (INCLUDING ROADS,
TRAILS, AND BUILDINGS)

II GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION
III EDUCATIONAL AND MUSEUM PROGRAMS

ADMINISTRATION AND POLICY
(Including Roads, Trails, and Buildings)

1885 Rules, regulations, and by-laws of the Board of Com
missioners to Manage the Yosemite Valley and Mariposa -
Big Tree Grove. Sacramento, State print, off., 22 pp.

1889 The Yosemite Valley. Garden and forest, 2:1-2 (Jan.).
Criticism of the commissioners for permitting commercial

interests to prevail in the park.

1890 Amateur management of the Yocemite scenery. Century
illus, mo. mag., 40:797-98 (Sept.).

Political and commercial influences in the management of
Yosemite.

1890 Preservation of the Yosemite Valley, Nation (N.Y. ) , 50:

106-07 (Feb. 6).

Praises Yosemite Valley commissioners for promoting legis
lation to protect the park from private lumber interests; criti
cises their laxity in permitting unsanitary conditions and com
mercial exploitation.

1920 The Half Dome Trail and stairway. Sierra Club, Bui.,

11:101-02 (Jan.) , illus.

Account of the installation of a cable stairway, the gift
of Mr. Hall McAllister and the Sierra Club.

1925 Measuring up Yosemite' s trails. Am. forests and forest
life, 31:88 (Feb.), illus.

1929 Privately owned lands in Yosemite National Park: Histori
cal review. Sierra Club, Bui., 14:[79]-82 (Feb.).

1953 The Wawona Road tunnel in the Yosemite National Park.
Sci., n.s., 77:599 (June 23).
An account of the opening.

Albright , Horace M.

1929 Yosemite on the way to protection. Am. civic ann., 1:
23-25.

Allen, T. Warren

1915 [Road planning in national parks.] Natl. Parks Conf . ,

Proc., 1915, pp. 24-33. Washington, U.S. Dept. Int.,

Natl. Park Serv.

YOSSOTE NATIONAL PAJBC

Report on surveys in Yosemite, Sequoia, and Glacier na
tional parks, presented by an official of the Bureau of Public
Roads.

Bedford, W.W.

1926 The Yosemite fruit and vegetable agreement. Pac. rural
press, 112:380,88 (Oct.9).

Belden, Charles J.

1919 The Tioga Road across the Sierra Nevada. Geog. rev.,

7:377-86 (June), illus.

History of the road, and description of the country it
traverses.

Borell, Adrey E.

1935 Wildlife policies in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:
5-9 (Jan.), illus.

Bradley, Harold C.

1911 The passing of our mountain meadows. Sierra Club, Bui.,

8:39-42 (Jan.), illus.

Methods of preserving meadow lands, valuable as agents
of conservation, with particular reference to Yosemite meadows.

Branson, I.R.

1909 Yosemite against corporation greed. Aurora, Neb., the
author, 30 pp.

California. State Board of Trade

[1904?] Yosemite Valley: History, description, and statement of
conditions relative to the proposed recession to the Na
tional Government. Sacramento? the Board, 33 pp.., map.
(Circ.13).

Chapman, H.H.

1925 Recreation as a federal land use. Am. forests and

forest life, 31:349-51, 378-80 (June), illus.

Conflicts between national parks and national forests,
caused by restrictions on timber cutting and stock raising, with
special reference to Yellowstone and Yosemite national parks.

Colby, William E.

1916 The John Muir Trail. Sierra Club, Bui., 10:[86]-92
(Jan.), illus.

Details of construction.

John Muir Trail. Sierra Club, Bui., 10:213-14, 221

1917 (Jan.) , illus.

Sierra Club sponsors a state bill to appropriate $30,000
for completion of the trail.

4

ADMINISTRATION AND POLICY

Colby, William E. , and Jardine, W.M.

1928 Yosemite National Park timber situation. Sierra Club,
Bui., 13:113-21 (June).

Cramton, Louis C.

1929 The menace of private lands in our national parks. Am.
forests and forest life, 35:138-40 (Mar.), illus.

[Elwes, H.F.]

1889 The Yosemite Valley. Garden and forest, 2:81-82 (Feb.13).

An English traveler criticizes concession monopolies in
Yosemite and Yellowstone, and urges free competition to improve
the service.

Gleason, Herbert W.

1920 The John Muir Trail. Appalachia, 15:36 (Nov.).
Description of country traversed.

Hamilton, E.H.

1907 The new Yosemite railroad. Cosmopolitan, 43:569-75
(Sept.), illue., map.

[Lane, Franklin K. ]

1913 [Letter (May 17, 1913) by the secretary of the Interior

regarding temporary opening of the Yosemite National Park
to stock grazing.] Sierra Club, 3ul., 9:114-15 (June).
Denies stockmen's application for temporary grazing permit
in Yosemite to relieve conditions caused by drouth. Refers to ex
isting law restraining the Secretary of the Interior.

LeConte, Joseph N.

1906 In the highest Sierra. Sunset, 17:215-26 (Sept.), illus.,

map.

Geographical notes and description of routes and scenery
through the Sierra Nevada in the Yosemite Valley region.

Lewis, Washington B,

1921 Administration of Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook
of Yosemite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 87-96;
New York, Putnam.

The author was superintendent of the park, 1911-30.

1922 Yosemite National Park. Am. forestry, 28:404-05 (July),
illus.

1930 Yosemite timber lands saved. Am. civic ann. , 2:7-9.

Twelve thousand acres of timber land were added to the
park with Jojin D. Rockfeller's aid.

5

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PAHK

Lloyd, James V.

1926 The removal of the old Yosemite Village. Yo Semite nat.

notes, 5:26-31 (Ap. ) , illus.

Talus of early Yosemite buildings, and an account of the
removal of the Cld Village by the Park Service.

1920 Albright's efforts save Yosemite timber. Yosemite nat.

notes, 9:55-66 (July), map.

Tuo.lumne and Merced Big Tree groves were purchased from
private owners with contributed funds. Map shows area saved.

Logan, Olive

1870 Does it pay to visit Yo Semite? Galaxy, 10:498-509 (Oct.).
Discomforts and hardships endured by travelers to Yosemite

during the early days.

[Low, F.F. , and others]

1866 By-laws of the Board of Commissioners in charge of Yo
semite Valley and Mariposa Big Tree Grove. San Francisco,
Edward Basqui , 16 pp»

f.MacKenzie , George G. ]

1891 California's interest in Yosemite reform. Century illus.

mo. nag., 43:154-55 (Nov.).

Protest against mismanagement by Yosemite commissioners.

[Marshall, H.B.]

1917 Yo somite hydroelectric power plant. U.S. Dept. Int.,

Am. rept., 1915/16, 1:762-63. Wash., Govt. print, off.

Details of construction.

Muir, John

1889 Management of Yosemite Valley. San Francisco bul. , June
27. Reprinted in Univ. Calif, mag., 3:322 (Dec. 1897).

1896 Proceedings of the meeting of the Sierra Club held No
vember 23, 1895. Sierra Club, Bul., 1:268-86 (Jan.).
Address on preservation of public reserves in the Sierra,

and account of work effectively done under Federal supervision of

Yosemite National Park.

[Mulford, Prentice]

1871 The east at Yosemite. Overland mo., 7:191-94 (Aug.).
Poor accommodations and rough trails make the visits of

easterners short.

National Park Service. See: U.S. National Park Service.

ADMINISTRATION AND POLICY

Ostrander, H.J.

1891 Sheepmen and mountain parks. Pacific rural press, 41:
286-87 (Mar. 28).

A sheepman's denial of the charge of vandalism.

Paine, Swift

1932 The snow- surveyor of the Sierras. Am. forests, 38:222-

24, illus.

Hardships of the snow surveyor, and importance of his work.

Rhoda, Jean

1913 Uncle Sam in the Yosernite. Overland mo., n.s., 61:f590]-

94 (June) , illus.

Duties of United States cavalry troops, stationed in the
park for a period after 1905.

Roosevelt, .Nicholas

1928 "Save the Yosemitel" is call to nation. Sierra Club,

Bui., 13:113-14 (Ap.).

Protests plan to cut 13,000 acres of timber in the park.

Russell, Carl P.

1927 Why are snow surveys made? Yosemite nat. notes, 6:19
(Mar.) , illus.

Shinn, Charles H.

1892 The Yosemite National Park. Garden and forest, 5:74
(Feb. 17).

The ban on lumbering operations reduced fire hazard and
resulted in general improvement.

Solomons, Theodore S.

1895 A search for a high mountain route from the Yosemite to

the King's River Canon. Sierra Club, Bui., 1:221-37

(May).

Part of the trip lay in the region later proposed as an
extension to Sequoia National Park.

Sovulewski , Gabriel

1915 [Trail building.] Natl. Parks Conf., Proc., 1915, pp.51-55.
The supervisor of Yosemite National Park recommends speci
fications for drainage, building, and maintenance of trails.

1928 The story of trail building in Yosemite National Park.
Yosemite nat* notes, 7:25-28 (Ap.).

Thomson, Charles G.

1932 Hiding Yosemite Ts visitors. Am. civic ann. , 4:26-30,

illus.

Careful planning and landscaping prevent a crowded effect.

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

U.S. Department of Interior

1907 Regulations governing the several national parks, Hot

Springs reservation, and the preservation of American an
tiquities. 59th U.S. Cong., 2d sess., Sen. doc. 396, pt.
1:297-322. (ser. no. 5085, vol.18). Washington, Govt.
print . of f .
Prohibitory regulations relating to hunting, fishing,

fire -building, grazing, injury to trees and natural formations,

in Yosemite National Park.

1913 [Letter by the Secretary of the Interior regarding tem
porary opening of the Yosemite National Park to stock
grazing.] Sierra Club, Bui., 9:114-15 (June).
The Secretary had no authority to grant grazing leases

or permits in the park.

U.S. Department of War

1900 Report of the Commission on Roads in Yosemite National

Park, California. 56th U.S. Cong., 1st sess., Sen.

doc. 155 (ser. no. 3852, vol.10), 44 pp., illus., map.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

By S. M. Mansfield and others,

U.S. Forest Service

1917 Tahoe-Yosemite Trail. Sierra Glut), Bui., 10:256-57 pan.).
Extract from a memorandum by District Forester Coert Du

Bois.

Report of work done on Muir Trail, 1917. Sierra Club,

1918 Bui., 10:343-47 (Jan.).
Detailed report by M. A. Benedict.

U.S. National Park Service

1913 Proceedings of the National Parks Conference held at the

Yosemite National Park, October 14, 15 and 16, 1912.

Washington, Govt. print off., 145 pp.

All important private and public interests connected with
the parks were represented at this conference to consider possi
ble changes in rules and regulations.

1918 Center of the John Muir Trail. In* U.S, Dept, Int., , Kept.,
fiscal yr. ending June 30, 1917, 1:847-49. Washington,
Govt. print, off.
Yosemite National Park to be the center of the trail when

extended from Sequoia National Park to Lake Tahoe.

1926 Rates authorized to be charged by the public utilities

operating in Yosemite National Park, 1926; also, new rules

8

ADMINISTRATION AND POLICY

and regulations governing the park.
Washington, Govt. print, off., 33 pp.

1929 Yo Semite ranger-naturalist manual. 2d ed. , Yosemite
National Park, 3 vols. in 1, illus., bibliog. (Mimeo
graphed. )

Vol. 1: Manual of instruction; Vol. 2: Manual of informa
tion; Vol. 3: Plan of administration.

Waterman, R.W.

1889 The Yosemite Valley and Mariposa Big Tree Grove. In: Bien
nial message of G-ov. R.W, Waterman to the Legislature of
the State of California, 28th sess., pp. 21-22. Sacramento,
State print, off.
Approves administration of the valley by the commissioners

and recommends appropriation of funds- which they deem necessary.

Yard, Robert Sterling

1928 The problems of Yosemite forests. Natl. parks bul., 9:

55-58 (May), illus., map.

Discussion of private ownership in the western part of
the park.

Yosemite National Park

1866 — [Administrative reports]

Issued for the periods: 1866-67 (Included in pamphlet by
J. D. Whitney, State Geologist, 1867); 1868-69 (1869); 1870-71
(1871); 1872-73 (1873); 1874-75 (1875); 1876-77 (1877); 1878-79
(1879); 1880-82 (1882); 1883-84 (1884); 1884-85 (1885); 1886-87
(1887); 1888-89 (1889); 1889-90 (1890); 1891-92 (1892); 1893-94
(1894); 1895-96 (1896); 1897-98; 1901-02 (1902); 1903-04 (1904)
as Biennial Reports of the Commissioners to Manage the Yosemite
Valley and the Mariposa Big Tree Grove. The Catalogue of Public
Documents, U. S. Congress, lists the reports after 1890 in the
Department of Interior Annual Reports, viz.: 1890-1930 inclusive.
After 1930, however, these are only brief digests. No report
seems to have been published for 1899-1900.

II

GEOGRAPHY, TRAV fl, A N D

DESCRIPTION

1866 The Yosemite Valley. Harper's ,33:697-708 (May) ,illus., map.
A horseback journey from Coulterville, Fourteen engravings.

1879 Far western scenery. Aldine, 9:329-34 (Oct.?), illus.

Descriptions of Yosemite and Yellowstone; illustrated with
woodcuts,

1898 Yosemite. Sunset, 1:3-8 (May), illus.

General description illustrated with photographs from the
collection of Professor J. N. LeConte.

1904 The LeConte Memorial Lodge. Pop. sci. mo., 65:379-80

(Aug.) , illus.

Description of the lodge, with photographic views of the
exterior and interior.

1917 Yosemite. Pan-Am. Union, Bui., 44:80-89 (Jan.), illus.
Description of scenic beauties of Yosemite, translated

from the Spanish edition of the Bullotin.

1923 A trip to the Yosemite falls. Calif. Hist. Soc., Q,uart . ,
1:274-85 (Jan.).
Also an account of the naming of Bridalveil fall.

1938 We have four national parks; d.o we need a fifth? Califor
nia, 28:7-9; 24-26, illus.
Contains descriptive material on Yosemite National Park.

Challenges need for the proposed. King* s Hivar Canyon park.

[Adams, Ansel E.]

1922 Lyell Fork of the Merced. Sierra Club, Bui,, 11:315-16,

illus.

A pack trip via the McClure Fork Trail and the Isberg Trail
to Lake Washburn and Mount Florence. Photograph of this region
opposite page 258.

Albright, Horace, and Taylor, Frank J.

1928 Oh, Ranger! A book about the national parks. Palo Alto,
Calif., Stanford Univ. press, 178 pp., illus.

Allen, Edward F.

1918 [Yosemite National Park.] In: A guide to the national
parks of America, pp. 111-45, illus., map. New York, Mc-
Bride.

10

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AMD DESCRIPTION

Archibald, J.F.

1896 A cavalry march to the Yosemite. Illus. Am., Nov., 1896.

Avery, B.F.

1868 Mountain, lake, and valley. Overland mo., 1:540-52 (Dec.).

Description of lakes and valleys of the Yosemite region,
including Tuolumne Valley.

Avery, Russ

1905 Mt. Lyell and Lit. Ritter ascents by Sierra Club outing of

1904. Sierra Club, Bui., 5:181-95 (Jan.), illus.

Description of scenery; notes on moraines, glaciers and
glacier paths.

Ayscough, John, pseud. See: Bickerstaff e-Drew, Francis B.D.

Bade, Williem ?.

19C8 Hetch-Hetchy Valley and the Tuolumne Canyon. Independent,
64:1079-84 (May), illus.

Bade, William F. , and others

1926 Natural areas. Middle eastern California. In: Naturalist's

guide to the Americas, pp. 197-98. Baltimore, Williams and

Wilkins.

Notes on Yosemite, Sequoia, General Grant, and Lassen Vol
canic national parks, and Devil Postpile National Monument.

Bagg, Henry, illus. See: Murphy, Thomas D. [c!925].

Bailey, Charles A.

1886 Unfrequented paths of Yosemite. Overland mo., 2d ser. ,

8:88-92 (July).

Glacier Point, Clouds Rest, and Eagle Peak are equestrian
trails. Other trails also are mentioned.

1898 A Yosemite discovery. Sierra Club, Bui., 2:216-21 (June).
Sierra Point, on Grizzly Peak, commands a simultaneous

view of the valley's five waterfalls.

1899 The vantage points of Yosemite. Sunset, 2:121-23 (Ap. ) ,
illus.

Compares El Capitan with other lofty natural features of
the world.

Bailey, Raymond H.

1921 Camping and mountaineering in Yosemite National Park. In:
Handbook of Yosemite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.),
pp. 269-304, illus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.

11

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Ballou, Maturin M.

1901 The Yosemite Valley. In: Footprints of travel, pp. 6-9.
Boston, Glnn.

Bancroft, A.L.

1871 Bancroft's tourist's guide: Yosemite, San Francisco and
around the bay (south). San Francisco, Bancroft, 256 pp.

1872 Bancroft's guide for travelers by railway, stage, and steam
navigation in the Pacific states. Comprising routes and
modes of travel; distances; fares; concise descriptions of
the principal towns; scenery; etc. Tourist's guide to Yo
semite, Tahoe, the geysers, and other noted resorts; through
route by the great 'Pacific railroad to Chicago, St. Louis,
etc.; ocean routes, via Panama and Nicaragua to New York;
all inland and ocean routes on the coast, etc. San Fran
cisco, A.L. Bancroft, 224 pp., maps.

Beatty, M.E. , and Harwell, C.A.

1937 Auto tours of Yosemito Valley. Yosemite nat. notes,
Special no. (May), 12 pp, , illus., maps.

Bedell, Mary C.

[c!924] The Yosemite. In: Modern gypsies, pp. 133-60, illus. New
Yo rk , Brent ano .

Belden, Charles J.

1915 Motoring in the high Sierras. Scribner's mag., 62:201-13

(Feb.) , illus.

Comparison of Sierran and European features.

1919 The Tioga Road across the Sierra Nevada. Geog. rev., 7:
377-86 (May) , illus.

Bent, Allen H.

1922 Desert colors and mountain heights. Geog. Soc. of Phila.,

Bui., 20:142-46 (June), illus.

Descriptions, ranging from Mount Dana in the Yosemite high
country to Mount San Jacinto in the desert region of southern
California.

Best , Harry C. '

1904 Impressions of Yosemite. Sunset, 13:1C5-10 (June), illus.

By an observer who, as a resident artist, knew the valley
intimately.

Bickerstaffe-Drew, Francis B.D.

1921 [Yo Semite.] In: First impressions of America, pp. 155-59.
London , Lang .

12

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Bierstadt, Albert, illus. See: Vivian, A. Pendarves.

Blake, W.P.

1900 Glacial erosion and the origin of Yosemite Valley. Am.

Inst. Min. Engrs., Trans., 29:825-55.

Supports the disputed "glacier-carved" theory of the origin.

Blanc hard , Charles C .

1929 Photographing picturesque Yosemite. Photo-era mag. , 65:

502-06 (Dec.) , illus.

Difficulties of photography in Yosemite, and suggestions
for overcoming them.

Bo re 11, Adrey E.

1954 A winter trip to Tuolumne Meadows. Yosemite nat. notes,

15:1-5 (Jan.).

A fifty-mile snowshoe journey from Yosemite Valley via
Snow Creek Trail; remarks on traveling and canping in snow.

Brewer, William H.

1950 [The Big trees, Yosemite, Tuolumna Meadows, and the high

Sierra.] In: Up and down California in 1860-1864, pp. [3 95]-

427, illus. New Haven, Yale Univ. press.

Bromley, Isaac H.

1872 The wonders of the west. Number 1: The Big trees and the

Yosemite. Scribner's mo., 5:261-77 (Jan.), illus.

An overland journey in 1871. Scenery and Indians.

Brown, Bolton C.

1896 Three days with Mount King. Sierra Club, Bui., l:[24l]-
55 (Jan.), illus.

1897 Wanderings in the high Sierras between Mount King and Mount
Williamson. Sierra Club, Bui., 2:17-28 (Jan.), illus., maps,

Bryant , Harold C.

1928 Parks of the golden state: California's contribution to the

national playgrounds. Nature mag., 12:256-59, 275-74

(Oct.), illus.

Yosemite, Sequoia, General Grant, and Lassen national parks;
Pinnacles, Muir Woods, Devil Postpile, Lava Beds, and Cabrillo
national monuments.

Buckley, James M.

1885 Two weeks in the Yosemite and vicinity. New York, Phil
lips and Hunt, 56 pp., illus.
General description, including the Bi^: trees. Another

edition, 1879.

15

YOSFJVIITS NATIONAL PARK

Buel, James W.

1894 [Yosemite Valley.] In: America's wonderlands, pp. 166-80,

illus. Vancouver, B.C., McGregor.

Good description of scenery, with historical notes and
factual material on waterfalls, domes, Big trees, and other fea
tures. Fourteen excellent, large photographs.

Bunnell, Sterling

1924 Airplane trip to Yosemite Valley. Sierra Club, Circ. 11,
[8 pp.] (Nov. -Dec.) .

Burroughs , John

1910 The spell of the Yosemite. Century, n.s., 81:f47]-53

(Nov. ) , illus.

Impressions of John Muir and Ralph Waldo Emerson in Yo
semite. Article by same title in Time and change, pp. 71-83.
(N.Y. , Houghton Mifflin, 1912.)

1912 John Muir's "Yosemite." Lit. dig., 44:1165,1168 (June 1).

Review of Muir's book, "an exhaustive survey of all the
principal features of the. . .valley. . .with. . .account of its history
and, . .pioneers . . . . "

Burton, G.W.

1909 The Yosemite. In: Burton's book on California and its sun
lit skies of glory, pp. 7-11, illus. Los Angeles, Times
Mirror Pub. Co.

California. Geological Survey

1870 ...The Yosemite guide-book: A description of the Yosemite
Valley and the adjacent region of the Sierra Nevada, and
the 3ig trees of California.... Cambridge, Mass, i Har
vard?] Univ. press., 155 pp., illus., maps.
J. D. Whitney, state geologist. Published by authority of

the legislature. Edition of 1869 has same imprint and number of

pages, includes notes on botany as well as geology and topography.

Carlson, Reynold E.

1935 Ribbon Falls. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:52 (June).

Description and geological aspects of one of Yosemite 's
minor waterfalls.

Carlson, Reynold E., and Carlson, Ruth

1935 Which is the world's highest waterfall? Yosemite nat.

notes, 14:37-41 (May).

Comparing seventeen of the world's high waterfalls.

14

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Chase, Joseph S.

1911 Yo Semite trails: Camp and packtrain in the Yosemite region

of the Sierra Nevada. New York, Koughton Mifflin, 354 pp.,

illns. , map.

Woods, trails, meadows, mountains, streams, and snow fields
of Yosemite, Tuolumne, cmd the high Sierra regions.

Chick, William D. , joint author. See: Kelley, Donald G.

Churchill, Caroline M.

1884 Over the purple hills; or Sketches of travel in California,
embracing all the important points usually visited by
tourists. 2d ed., Denver, the author, illus., 336 pp.
Contains separate chapters on travel in and out of Yosemite

Valley; the valley's population; the waterfalls; excursions in the
valley. Other editions in 1876, 1876, 1881, 1884.

Clark, Galen

1910 The Yosemite Valley; its history, characteristic features,

and theories regarding its origin. Yosemite Valley, Nelson

L. Slater, 108 pp., illus.

Illustrated with photographs by George jfiske.

Clark, Susie C.

1890 To the Yosemite. In: The round trip from the Hub to the
Golden Qate, pp. 119-43. Boston, Lee and Shepard.

f Clark, Xenos]

1885 The Ketch-Hetchy Valley: a new Yosemite. Outing, 6:150-52
(May).

Description and comparison with Yosemite.

Clarke, W.A.

1902 Automobiling in the Yosemite Valley. Overland mo., 2d ser.,

40:104-10 (Aug.), illus.

Experiences with a steam-driven motor car.

Cone, Mary

1876 A trip to the Yosemite. In: Two years in California, pp.

196-238, illus., map. Chicago, Griggs.

A description of the Yosemite Valley and the country be
tween San Francisco and Yosemite.

Crane, Agnes.

1883 Staging to the Yosemite. Leisure hour (Aug.).

Crocker, H.J. , ed.

1890 Yosemite illustrated in colors.... San Francisco, H.S.
Crocker, 30 pp., illus.

15

YOSHvUTS NATIONAL PARK

Contains 13 colored sketches by H. W. Hansen and Carl
Dahlgren; text by Warren Cheney; and poems by Harry Dix.

Cross, Roselle T.

1921 [Yo Semite National Park.] In: % mountains , pp. 192-97.
Boston, Stratford, illus.

Curtis, Wallace B.

1921 Motoring in Yo Semite National Park. In: Handbook of Yo-

seiaite National Park (Ansel F, Kail, ed.J, pp. 305-10,

illus. New York, Putnam.

Daniels , Mark

1915 The national parks of California. California's mag., 1:
|97]-[106] (July), illus.

An N.P.S. landscape engineer comments on scenic values in
Sequoia, General Grant, and Yosemite.

1916 The Yosemite National Park. Am. forestry, 22:345-52
(June) , illus.

Scenery and trail routes described by a. National Park
Service landscape engineer.

Davidson, George

1892 The occupation of Mount Conness. Overland mo., 2d ser. ,
19:115-29 (Feb.) , illus.

De Q,uille, Dan

1887 The perils of the high Sierras. Overland mo., 2d ser.,

9:311-22 (Ivlar. ).

A prospecting trip in 1859 across the Sierra Nevada to
placer diggings on the north side of Mono Lake.

Drew, Francis. See: Bickerstaffe-Drew, Francis 3. D.

Drury, Aubrey

1935 [Yosemite region. 1 In: California; an intimate guide, pp.

409-18, 445-78. New York, Harper.

Descriptions of the high Sierra, the central Sierra, Yo-
semite, and Tioga Pass.

Dyer, Hubert P.

1895 A tramp in the high Sierras. Outing, 26:f30l]-05 (July),

illus.

Recounts first complete ascent of Mount Lyell since 1885,
and an ascent of Mount Dana.

Eardley-Wilmot , S.

1873 I A trip to Yosemite Valley and Mariposa Grove. 1 In: Our

16

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

journal in the Pacific, pp. 170-88, illus. London, Longmans,

Green.

English traveler's account of a journey to the valley from
Oakland in 1870. Description of tourist accommodations and scenic
features.

Edgernond, John W. , joint author. See: Kelley, Donald G,

Edwards , Ira

1932 A visit to Yosemite Valley and the high Sierras. Mil
waukee Pub. Mus., Yr. bk. (1930), 10:106-33, illus.
Scenery and Indian history. Good illustrations.

Elder, Paul, comp.

1911 California, the beautiful. Camera studies by California
artists, with selections in prose and verse from western
writers. San Francisco, Paul Elder and Co., 72 pp., illus.
Song birds in Yosemite, by Olive Harper; Yosemite (poem),

by Hermann Scheffsuer; Yosemite Valley, by John Muir; the Sequoias

(poem), by L. A. Robertson; the Giant Forest, by Stewart Edward

White.

Elmendorf, Dwight L.

1916 The Yosemite Valley. Mentor, 4:f l]-ll (Oct. 2), illus.

Describes topographic and scenic features in order of their
appearance to traveler coming from Merced.

Fairbanks, Harold W.

1916 The Sierra Nevada mountains. In: The geography of Cali
fornia, pp. 62-76. Rev. ed. , San Francisco, Harr-Wagner.

Fai re lough, H. Rushton

1901 At home in the high Sierras. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 38:

i.433]-44 (Dec.) , illus.

Account of Sierra Club's outing in the Yosemite region in
the summer of 1901. John Muir was in the party.

Faris, John T.

1920 In the heart of the Sierras. In: Seeing the far west, pp.

218-(~26], illus. Philadelphia, Lippincott.

Describes country from Fresno to Yosemite, including Se
quoia and General Grant national parks.

Sierra Club, Bui.,

Farquhar, Francis P.

1921 Northward over the John Muir Trail.

40 : 34-48 ( Jan . ) , i llus .

Reports progress of work on the trail from Yosemite to
Mount Whitney.

17

YOSEMITS NATIONAL PARK

1922 First ascent of the Middle Palisade. Sierra Club, Bui.,
11:C264]*70 (No. 3), illus.
The author was accompanied by Ansel F. Hall.

1923- Place names of the high Sierra. Sierra Club, 3ul., 11:

1925 [380 ]-407; 12:1 47]-64; 12:("l26]-47, illus., maps.
Preliminary alphabetical list of place names, including

Yo Semite. See following item.

1926 Place names of the high Sierra. San Francisco, Sierra
Club (pub. no. 62), 128 pp.

Alphabetical list of place names with notes on their
origins. Enlarged and reprinted from serial form noted above.

1928 A revival of interest in Mt. Starr King. Sierra Club,

Bui., 17: [113] -85 (Feb.).

A portion of J. M. Hutchingsf Journal—August 23 and 24,
1877 — is quoted. On those days, Hutchings led a party up the
mountain.

1934 The Sierra Nevada of California. London, Spottiswoode,
Ballantyne [15] pp., illus.
Reprint of pages 87-102, Alpine jour., May, 1934.

Ferguson, Melville F.

1925 Through Tioga Pass to Yosemite. In: Motor camping on
western trails, pp. 146-61. New York, Century.

Foley, D.J.

1892 Yosemite souvenir and guide. Yosemite, Calif., Tourists'

Studio Office (iToley's Studio), 105 pp., illus., maps.

At least eleven editions were issued between 1892 and 1915.

Foote, Robert 0.

1936 The wilderness way. Am. for., 42:395-99 (Sept.), illus.,

map.

The Pacific Crest Trail extends from Canada to Mexico,
passing through Mount Rainier, Crater Lake, Lassen Volcanic, Yo
semite, and Sequoia National Parks.

Foster, S.L.

1909 An August outing in the upper Merced Caffon. Sierra Club,
Bui., 7:39-48 (Jan.), illus.

Along the north shore of Lake Merced to its outlet; into
Lost Valley; and to the gorge of Little Yosemite.

1910 Down Tenaya Canon. Sierra Club, Bui., 7:153-69, (Jan.),
illus.

From Yosemite Valley to the summit of Mount Hoffman, and
back via Tenaya Canyon.

18

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

1911 Ascent of Red Peak. Sierra Club, Bui., 8:25-33 (Jan.).
Scenery and wildlife.

Fountain, Paul

19C1 [Yosemlte Valley.] In: The great deserts and forests of

North America, pp. 258-75. London and New York, Longmans,

Green.

Author visited Yo Semite in 1875. The volume has a three-
page preface by William E. Hudson.

1906 [Yo remits Valley.] In: The eleven eaglets of the west,
pp. 19-29. New York, Dutton.
General description.

Gannett , Henry

1898 Yosemite Valley. In: North America, 2:9C-94, illus., map.
London, Edward Stanford, 2 vols.

Gates, Tracy B.

1929 Seven girls in the Yosemite in stage coach days. Sari
Francisco, Marvell, 21 pp.

Given, We Ike r

c!928 The light of tho Sierra. Boston, Christopher Pub. House,

135 pp.

Material on the sequoias, Yosemite Valley, and John Muir,
mixed with metaphysics, belles-lettres, and historical allusions.

Gladding, Sffie P.

1915 Yosemite. In: Across the continent by the Lincoln High
way , pp . 9 2-110 , i llus . New Yo rk , Brent ano .

Glassford, W.A.

1891 Climate of California and Nevada, with particular refer
ence to the rainfall and temperature and their influence
upon the irrigation problems of the two states. Inj 51st
U.S. Cong., 2d sess., Ex. doc. 287, pp. 333-56 (Appendix 67),
maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Contains description of the topography of the Sierra Nevada,
in which Yosemite, Sequoia, General Grant, and Lassen Volcanic na
tional parks are located; also exhaustive description of the in
fluences of the range upon meteorological conditions in California
and Nevada.

Gleason, Herbert W.

1910 The Grand Canon of the Tuolunne. Sierra Club, Bui., 7:221

(June) , illus.

The canyon is compared briefly with the Grand Canyon of
Arizona, and with those of Colorado and Yellowstone.

19

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

1920 The John Muir Trail. Appalachia, 15:36 (Nov.).

Glisan, R.L.

1911 The Kings River outing of 1910. Sierra Club, Bui., 8:10-

17 (Jan.), illus.

Description of sequoias, meadows, and mountain peaks of a
region adjacent to Yo Semite.

Gomportz, Helen M.

1394 ' A tramp to Mt. Lyell. Sierra Club, 3ul. , 1:136-43 (May),

illus.

Lake Tenaya, Mount Hoffman, Soda Springs, Cathedral Pass,
Cloud's Rest, and scenery along the route.

Gordon-Gumming, Constance F.

1911 The Yo -Semite valley. In: Wonders of nature, pp.[323]-41.
New York, Collier.

G-reeley, Horace

1868 The Sierra Nevada; the Yosemite; the Big trees. In: Re
collections of a busy life, pp. 379-83. New York, Ford.

Greenv:ood, Grace (pseud.)

1873 [The Yosenite Valley.] In: New life in new lands; notes
of travel, pp. 303'*- 65* New York, Ford,

Griswold, N.W.

1883 Beauties of California; including Big trees, Yosemite

Val?Ley, geysers, Lake Tahoe , Donne r Lake. San Francisco,

H.S. Crocker [,.78] PP», illus.

Hall, Ansel F.

1920 Guide to Yosemite; a handbook of the trails and roads of
Yosemite Valley and the adjacent region. San Francisco,
Sunset pub. house, 98 pp., maps.

Contains also notes on history, geology, and natural
features .

Hall, Ansel F. , ed.

1921 Handbook of Yosemite National Park: A compendium of arti
cles on the Yosemite region by the leading scientific
authorities. New York, Putnam, 347 pp., illus., map,
bibliog.

Separate articles on: history; Indians; administration;
geology; life zones; birds; mammals; reptiles and amphibians;
fishes; insects; trees; flowers; the giant sequoia; camping and
mountaineering; motoring; photography; and weather conditions.
These articles are included in the various sections of this bib
liography under the authors' names.

20

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Hall, Ansel F.

1923 A trip to the Yosemite Falls. Calif. Hist. Soc., Quart.,

1 : 274-82 .

A two weeks trip from Mariposa to the falls.

1924 High Sierra camps. Sierra Club, Bui., 12:[37]-42, 11-

lus . , map .

1929 Yosemite Valley; an intimate guide. Berkeley, Calif.

"Natl. Parks pub. house," 80 pp., illus., maps, bibliog.

Hamilton, Edward II.

1907 The new Yosemite Railroad. Cosmopolitan mag., 43:569-

75 (Sept.), illus., map.

Discussion of increased accessibility to the park. I/lap
of railroad route is included.

Harwell, C.A.

1928 A nature guide party conquers Mount Lye 11. Yosemite nat.
notes, 7:75-77, 83 (Sept.), illus.

Describes the climb and the views obtained en route; sug
gestions for hikers.

1929 The ascent of Red Peak. Yosemite nat. notes, 8:101-04
(Nov.).

Hays, Robert, comp.

1929 List of elevations of prominent points and places. Ji: Yo
semite ranger-nat. man., 2d ed. , 2:81-85. (Mimeographed.)

Hittell, John S.

1868 Yosemite; its wonders and its beauties. San Francisco,

Bancroft, 59 pp., illus., map.

Geological and topographical description.

1874 [Yosemite Valley, Hetch Hetchy Valley, the Big t'ree

groves, and the Sierra Nevada.] In: Resources of Cali
fornia, pp. 140-61. 6th ed., San Francisco, A. Roman.

1882 The Sierra Nevada. In: Bancroft's Pacific coast guide
book, pp. 149-87, illus. San Francisco , Bancroft.
General description of the Yosemite and Lassen Peak

regions; notes on the Big tree groves.

Hoffmann, C.F.

1868 Notes on Hetch Hetchy Valley. Calif. Acad. Nat. Sci.,
Proc., 3:368-70.

21

YOSEMIT3 NATIONAL PARK

Hudson, T.S.

1882 (. Yosemite Valley.] In: A scamper through America, pp.

158-75. 2Tew York, Button.

Scenic features and early travel in the valley.

Hutchings, James M. , ed.

1856- Hutchings' California Magazine. San x^ranciGco.
1860 This short-lived publication contains much of general in
terest on the Yosemite region.

Hutchings, James M.

c!860 Scenes of wonder and curiosity in California ; a tourist

guide to the Yosemite Valley. San Francisco, Hutchings

and Rosenfield, 236 pp., illus.

Has 92 well executed engravings. Among other editions
are those of 1862, 1863, 1870, 1871, and 1875.

1867 The Yo -Semite almanac adapted to California, Nevada,

Oregon, Washington, Idaho, Montane, and 'Utah. San Fran
cisco, John 0. Hodge, 60 pp., illus.
Contains woodcut of Lutchings' Hotel aud the bridge,

from photograph by C. E. Vat kins.

1877 Hutchings' tourist guide to the Yo -Semite Valley and the
Big tree groves for the spring and summer of 1877. San
Francisco, A. Roman and co., 102 pp., map.

1886 In the heart of the Sierras; the Yo Semite Valley, both
• historical and descriptive; and scenes by the way. Big

tree groves,.. and other objects of interest; v/ith tables

of distances and altitudes, maps, etc. Oakland, Pacific

press, 496 pp., illus., maps.

Another edition in 1888; possibly others. Contains a
prejudiced (?) view of the early legislative acts pertaining to
Yosemite.

c!894 Souvenir of California. Yo Semite Valley and the Big

trees. What to see and how to see it. San Francisco,
the author, 101 pp., illus., map.
Has 55 photo-engravings arid maps.

Hutchinson, J.S.

1923 A new link in the John Muir Trail. Palisade Creek-Mather

Pass. Sierra Club, Bui., ll:|[357']-67 (no. 4) , illus., map.

Description of this link and account of author's journey
over it .

22

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Jackson, Helen Hunt

1893 [Yosemlte Valley.] In: Bits of travel at home, pp. 98-139.
Boston, Roberts.

General description and notes on Indian legends.

Jackson, W.H. , and Wood, Stanley

1894 The Rocky Mountains. Denver, H.H. Tammen [38] pp., illus,.
Series of excellent, large-size scenic photographs by Mr.

Jackson, each with a descriptive note by Mr. Wood. Yellowstone,
Yosemite, Grand Teton, Holy Cross, and Blt^ck Canyon of the Gun-
nisor National Pork Service areas are represented.

James, George Wharton

191-1 Where visitors stop in Yosemite Valley. Out west, n.s.,
7:152-54 (Mar.), illus., map.

c!914 The Y9semit8 Valley. In: California, romantic and beauti
ful, pp. 218- 34. Boston, Page.

1915 The Yosemite Valley. In: Our American wonderlands, pp.
234-40, illus. Chicago, McClurg.

Jef f ers , Le Roy

1919 Memories of the mountains cf California. Scribner's mag.,

65:573-93 (May), illus.

Description of waterfalls and other features of Yosemite.
Contains 15 full-page scenic views.

1922 Yosemite the incomparable. In: The call of the mountains,
pp. 134-47 (eh. 11), illus. New York, Dodd, Mead.
Description, and accounts of excursions to points of in
terest, including Mariposa Big Tree Grove.

Johnson, Clifton

1908 Highways and byways of the Pacific coast. New York and

London, Macmillan, 323 pp.

Contains section on Yosemite. First (?) edition, 1907.

1915 April in the Yosemite. In: Highways and byways of Cali
fornia, pp. 143-65, illus. New York, Llacinillan.
One of several editions.

1919 Yosemite National Park, California. In: What to see in
America, pp. 479-83, illus. New York, Macmillan.

Jordan, David Starr

1900 Kings River Canyon and Alps of Yocemite Valley.
Sunset, 4:221-26 (Ap.), illus.

23

NATIONAL PAHK

Jorgensen, Chris, illus. See: Williams, John H. , 1914.

Jump, Herbert A.

cl916 The Yosemite; a spiritual interpretation. Boston, Pil

grim press, 35 pp., illus.

Impressions of Yosemite scenery; domes and waterfalls.

Kehrlein, Oliver

1937 Climbing the American alps. Natl. parks bul. , 13:6-9

(Dec. ) , illus.

Notes on mountain climbing with particular reference to
Yosemite ana Sequoia national parks.

Kelley, Donald G. , ISdgeraond , John W. , and Chick, William D.
1931 Three scout naturalists in the national parks. New

York, Harcourt, Brace, 237 pp., illuc.

Three accounts cf a 12,000-mile trip, made with Ansel F.
Hall of the National Park Service, into Yosemite, Crater Lake,
Mount Rainier, Grand Canyon, and Zion national parks. The
authors were California "eagle" scouts chosen for the trip,
which Mr. Hall organized.

King, Clarence

1886 Around Yocemite walls. In: Mountaineering in the Sierra
Nevada, pp. 133-53, maps. Boston, Ticknor.

1935 Mountaineering in the Sierra Nevada. New York, Norton,

320 pp., illus., bibliog.

Reprint of account of travel in the Sierra Nevada and Yo
semite Valley in pioneer days. Preface by Francis P. Farquhar.
Edition of 1902 (Scribner's) , has 378 pages.

Kneeland, Samuel

1872 The wonders of the Yosemite Valley, and of California.

3d ed., rev., Boston, A. Moore; New York, Lee, Shepard

and Dillingham, 98 pp., illus., maps.

Enlarged edition, with 20 photographic illustrations by
John P. Soule.

[Knowlton, Ebonezer]

1870 Yosemite on foot. Overland mo., 5:84-89 (July).

Kyle, C.W.

c!915 Yosemite: the worldfs wonderland. San Francisco, Chase
and Rae, 31 pp., illus.

Laidlaw, Walter

1897 A camping tour to the Yosemite. Outlook, 56:319-24

(June 5) , illus.

Recollections of a journey by buckboard in 1888.

•24

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Lane, Franklin K.

1920 A mind's-eye map of America. Natl. geog. mag., 37:[479]-

[8181 (June) , illus.

Contains notes on the scenery of Yosemite and a full page,
colored photographic view of the rock portals to the valley.

[Lawrence , James H. "]

1884 Discovery of the Nevada Pall. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 4:
360-71 (Oct.).

Account of an excursion to Yosemite Valley in 1855. Gen
eral description of scenery.

[LeGonte, Joseph K.]

1885 Rough notes of a Yosemite camping trip. Overland mo. ,
2d ser., 6:414-23 (Oct.); 493-505 (Nov.); 624-38 (Dec.).
Contains discussions of glacial end geological phenomena

seen by author and party of university students.

1899 Kings Rive.r Gallon. Sunset, 3:[2], 17-20 (May), illus.
Description of peaks and ridges of the high Sierra from
Yoseciite Valley to Sequoia National Park.

1899 Yosemite. Sunset, 2:118-20 (Ap. ) , illus.

Proposed itinerary through Yosemite for group of visiting
educators. Remarks on glacial theory of valley's origin.

1900 My trip to Kings River Canyon. Sunset, 5:275-85, illus.
Description and comparison with Yosemite National Park.

LeConte, Joseph [Nisbet]

1893 An ascent of Mt. Ritter. Appalachia, 7:1-8 (Feb.),

illus* , map.

Trip from Yosemite via Merced Canyon and Tuolurnne River.

1906 In the highest Sierra. Sunset, 17:215-26 (Sept.), illus.,
map.

Routes and scenery.

1907 The high Sierra of California. Alpina Americana, No.l,
16 pp. , illus.

Publication of the American Alpine Club.

1909 The high mountain route between Yosemite and the Kings
River Canyon. Sierra Club, Bui., 7:[l]-22 (Jan.),
illus. , map.
Account of 26-day exploration, describing the 228 miles

of mountain country traversed.

25

YOS2MITE NATIONAL PARK

LeConte, Joseph [Nisbet], continued

1913 The Soda Springs property in the Tuolumne Meadows. Sierra
Club, Bui., 9:36-39 (Jan.), illus., maps.

Description and history of property held by the Sierra Club
on the east side of Yo serai te National Park.

1914 Scrambles about Yosemite. Sierra Club, Bui., 9:126-35
(Jan.), illus., map.

Unfrequented scenic localities within short distance of
the crowded valley.

1915 Mountaineering on the Pacific coast. In: Nature and
science on the Pacific coast. A guide-book for scientific
travelers in tbe we:-,t , pp. 246-51, bibliog. San Francisco,
Paul Elder.

Contains description of Yoseroite and the Sierra Nevada
region to the south,

192S Identification of the great peaks of the southern Sierra.

Sierra Club, Bui., ll:[244]-54, no. 3, illus.

Gives locations and heights of peaks in the Yosemite and
Mount Whitney regions. Ascents of the various peaks and dates.

Lester, John E.

1873 The Yosemite; its history, its scenery, its development.

Providence, R.I., the author, 40 pp.

Read before the Rhode Island Historical Society.

1873 [The Yosemite Valley and the Mariposa, Grove. ] In: The
Atlantic to the Pacific, pp. 161-213. Boston, Shepard,
Gill.

Lippincott, Sara Jane. See: Greenwood, Grace (pseud.)

[Logan, Olive]

1871 Does it pay to visit Yo Semite? Galaxy, 10:498-509 (Oct.).
Perils and discomforts of the journey by stage.

[Ludlow, 7itz-Hugh]

1864 Seven weeks in the great Yo-Semite. Atlantic mo., 13:

739-54 (June).

Early travel to the valley and description of the natural
features.

McAllister, Elliott

1894 Itinerary of a route from Gentry's to top of El Capitan

and Yosemite jfells. Sierra Club, Bui., 1:133-35 (May),

illus.

26

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

McGlure, N.F.

1895 Explorations among the canons north of the Tuoluimie River.

Sierra Club, Bal. , 1:163-86 (Jan.), maps.

Account of a survey made for the purpose of preparing a
map for this nart of Yo Semite Netional Park.

Ma comb, M.M.

1879 [Hetch Hetchy Valley.] U.S. Geog. Surv west of the

iOOt h meridian, U.S.G.S. , Ann. rept., 1879, pp. 259-60.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Marshall, R.B.

1915 [Making the topographic map cf Yo Semite National Park in
1893.] National Parks Conf . , Proc., 1915, pp. 148-51.

Marshall, Walter G.

1881 The Yo Semite Valley. In: Through America; or nine months

in the United States, pp. 345-63, illus. 2d ed., London.

Low, Marston, Searle , and Rivin^ton.

Mather, Stephen T.

1917 Sieur de Monts and Yosemite; the problem of our national

parks. Cutlooxc, 115:750-51 (Ap.25).

iJescri.bes and compares Sieur de Monts (now Acadia) and
Yo Semite national parks; discusses duty of Government to provide
tourist accommodations in national parks.

1920 Yosenite, land of enchantment. Mid-Pacific mag., 20:
[2501-54 (Sept.), illus.
Description ai;d geological notes.

Matt lies, Francois E.

1917 The new map of Yosemite V.I ley. Sci., n.s., 26:146-48
(Aug. 2).

1926 Kings River Canyon and the Yosenite Valley. Sierra Club,
Bui. , 12:224-36 (no. 3) .

1930 Geographic sketch of the Yosemite region and the Sierra
Nevada. In: Geologic history of the Yoseriite Valley.
U.S.G.S., Prof, pap., 160:7-21, illus., map.

Michael, Enid

19S9 The Glacier Point hike. Yosemite rt-nger-nat. man., 2d
ed., 1:45-47. Yoseraite Uatl. Park (Mimeographed).

Mills, Enos A.

1917 The Yosenite National Park. In: Your national r-arks , pp.
65-98; 444-54, illus. New York, Houghton Mifflin.

27

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Monroe, Harriet

1909 Camping above the Yosemite. Putnam's, 7:216-27 (May), illus.
Reprinted in Sierra Club, Bui., 7:85-98 (June 1909), illus.

Moran, Thomas, illus. See: Murphy, Thomas D. , 1912, 1925.

Morgan, Willard D,

1930 Climbing through ash-land with a camera. Photo -era mag.,

65:212-15 (Oct.), illus.

Ancient volcanoes, giant fumaroles, and other features of
region around Mono Lake, just east of Yosemite.

Morris, Gouverneur

1906 Into the serene valley. Outing, 47:597-602 (Feb. ), illus.

General description of the Yosemite Valley and the roads
leading into it.

[Muir, John]

1872 Yosemite Valley in flood. Overland mo., 8:347-50 (Ap.).
Describes the valley after heavy December rains.

1873 Explorations in the great Tuolumne Canon [1869-71],
Overland, 11:139-47 (Aug.).

Reprinted in part in the Sierra Club bul., 12:[65]-74
(Mar. 1924).

1873 Hetch-Eetchy Valley, the lower Tuolumne Yosemite. Over
land mo. , 11:42-50 (July).
Scenery, topography, and geology.

1873 [Winter phenomena in the Yosemite Valley.] Boston Soc.
Nat. Hist., Proc., 15:148-51 (Mar. 6, 1872).
Wint er scenery; weather charts for January and February.

1879 The mountain lakes of California. Scribner's mo., 17:
411-20 (Jan.), illus.

Includes descriptions of the lakes of the Yosemite region;
also, description of the valley.

1880 In the heart of the California alps. Scribner's mo.,
20:345-52 (July).

Describes search of author and two artists for suitable
point in the Yosemite region from which to paint a panorama.

1890 Features of the proposed Yosemite National Park. Century
illus. mo. mag., 40:656-67 (Sept.)., illus., map.

1890 The treasures of the Yosemite. Century illus. mo. mag.,
40:483-500 (Aug.), illus., maps.

28

C1894

1898

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Comprehensive descriptions of scenery.

...Picturesque California: the Rocky Mountains and the
Pacific slope. Illustrated with photo-etchings, photo
gravures, wood engravings, etc., from paintings by emi
nent American artists. New York, Dewing, 508 pp.,
illus.
An earlier edition was published in 1888.

The wild parks and forest reservations of the west.

Atlantic uo., 81:15-28 (Jan.).

Includes reference to Yosemite National Park.

The Yosemite National Park. Atlantic mo., 84:145-52

(Aug.).

General information, and notes on the geology of the park.

1901

The fountains and streams of the Yosemite National Park.
Atlantic mo., 87:556-65 (Ap,).

Included in Muir's Our national parks, pp. 241-67, illus.
(Boston, Bought on Mifflin, 1901,)

1901 The Yosemite National Park. In: Our national parks, pp.
l?6]-97, illus. Boston, Bought on Mifflin.
Notes on scenery, trees, and glaciers.

1905 A letter from the Yosemite Valley. Craftsman, 7:654-65

(Mar.) , illus.

Describes a walking trip from Oakland to Yosemite. Pub
lished also as No. 5 of the series, California literary pamphlets,
by the Book Club of California (12 pp., 1936), and as a brochure
by the Eucalyptus Press, Mills College, Oakland (1936), both of
which printings have a foreword by Dr. Aurelia H. Reinhardt.

1905 Yosemite storms and floods. Outlook, 80:297-302 (June 3),
illus.

1909 The endangered valley: the Hetch-Hetchy Valley in the Yo
semite National Park. Century illus. mo. mag., 77:464-69
(Jan. ) , illus.
Description of the valley that wt:s later acquired for a

reservoir site by San Francisco. Ee printed in Scribners mag.,

Nov., 1909, and Sierra Club bul., Jan. 1916.

1911 Cathedral Peak and the Tuolumne Meadows.
Bul., 8:1-2 (Jan.), illus,

Sierra Club,

1911 My first summer in the Sierra. Atlantic mo., 107:Ll]-ll
(Jan.); 170-81 (Feb.); 339-49 (Mar.); 521-28 (Ap. ) .

29

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PAEK

Sheep-herding trip to headwaters of Merced and Tuolunne
rivers and the sequoias over the divide. Based on author's diary
of 1869. Later appeared in book form (Houghton Mifflin, 353 ppt,
1911).

1912 Three adventures in the Yosemite. Century illus. mo.

mac., n.s., 61:[656]-61 (Mar.), illus.

An avalanche ride, an earthquake storm, and exploration
of Yosemite Falls.

1912 The Yosemite; I a guidebook]. New York, Century, 284 pp.,
illus., maps, append.

1916 The incomparable Yosemite. Mentor, 4:1-2 (Oct. 2}.

1917 The Sierra Nevada. In: The mountains of California, pp.
3-19, illus. Kew York, Century.

Contains description of Yosemite Valley and the surround
ing mountain region. Previous editions published in 1894, 1907,
and 1912.

Murphy, Thomas D.

1912 Three wonderlands of the American west; being the notes
of a traveler, concerning the Yellowstone Park, the Yo
semite National Park, and the Grand Canyon of the Colo
rado River, with a chapter on other wonders of the great
American West. Boston, Page, 130 pp., illus., maps.
Several chapters are devoted to fauna, flora, geology,

and topography. Sixteen reproductions in color from original

paintings by Thomas Mo ran.

c!925 The Yosemite. In: Seven wonderlands of the American west,

pp. 81-146, illus., map. Boston, Page.

General description, notes on motoring and on the Mariposa
Grove. Illustrated by reproductions of paintings by Thomas Mo ran
and Henry Bagg.

North, Arthur, and Rice, Archie, eds.

1924 The glow of the cainpfire; revealing through the mellow

light of radiant impressions, a symposium of the Yosemite
lovers and their intercollegiate friends at "Northwold , "
in the Cat skills of New York, on June 21, 1924. Walton,
N.Y, , 64 pp. , illus.
A pamphlet in paper covers.

Parkinson, Jessie H.
[Traveling t<
yesterday, t<
lus. San Franc i«Jor Harr w'agner,

Parkinson, Jessie H.

1921 [Traveling to Yosemite,] In: Adventuring in California

yesterday, today and day before yesterday, pp.[l]-58, 11-

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION.

Comparing two trips to Yosemite: by horseback in 1893, and
by automobile in 1913.

Parsons, Mrs. Marion R.

1905 Miniature lakes of Sierra Nevada. Overland mo., 2d ser.,

46:[65]-68 (July), illus.

Contains notes on flora around Lake Tenaya and Lake May,
and on other lakes of the Yuba watershed.

1908 The grand canons of the Tuolumne and the Merced. Sierra

Club, Bui., 6:235-43 (Jan.), illus.

"...This paper is designed to describe the course of a
possible canon highway from the Yosemite to Hetch-Hetchy. "

Pattee, IT. A.

1900 Our national playground. Land of sunshine, 13:201-09

(Aug. ) , illus.

Description of Yosemite.

Peck, J.K.

1885 The seven wonders of the new world. New York, Phillips,

Hunt, 320 pp. , illus.

Contains a section on Yosemite Valley and the Big trees.

Perry, Harold E.

1929 The Lost Arrow Trail. Yosemite ntt . notes, 8:22-23 (Feb.).

Birds, trees, scenic and historical features seen along
the trail.

Phillips, M.E.

1931 Side saddle days in Yosemite. Touring topics, 23:18-20,

39 (July) , illus.

Diary of a journey made in the ?0fs, when reaching Yo
semite was an accomplishment .

Pillsbury, Arthur C.

1921 Photography in Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook of

Yosemite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 311-16,

illus. New York, Putnam.

By a resident photographer.

Poole, Douglas G-.

1910 A summer tramp through the Sierra Nevada. Overland mo.,

2d ser., 55:507-18 (May), illus.

Narrative of a three v/eeks trip from Placerville to Cala-
veras Grove, through Yosemite and Hetch Hetchy valleys.

Pope, Bertha G.

1915 With the Sierra Club in 1914. Sierra Club, Bui., 9:247-57,

illus.

31

YOSEMITE NATIONAL -PARK

Tuoluinne Meadows, Mounts Dana and Lyell, Conness Creek,
and other areas in the Yosemite region.

Pophaiii, William L.

c!911 Yosemite Valley romance. Louisville, Ky. , World Supply
Co. , 119 pp. , illus.
Tourist's guide book.

Porter, T.C.

1899 Impressions of America. London, C.A. Pearson, Ltd., 241

pp., illus.

Includes description of both Yosemite and. Yellowstone na
tional parks.

Powell, E. Alexander

1914 [Yosemite, General Grant, and Sequoia national parks.] In:
End of the trail, pp. 246-58, illus. New York, Scribner's.

Presnall, Clifford C.

1931 Ascents of Mount Starr King. Yosemite nat . notes, 10:67
(Aug.).

Reprinted: Nature mag., 18:194 (£.3pt.l93l).

1932 Bridal Veil Gorge;' a miniature wilderness. Yosemite nat.
notes, 11:2-3 (Oct.) .

Fishing attractions, pre-glacial features, flora and fauna.

Price, Jennie S.

1898 A woman's trip through the Tuolumne Canyon. Sierra Club,

3ul. , 2:174-84 (Jan.) .

The first [white] woman, according to John Muir, to ac
complish the climb through Muir Gorge.

Price, R.M.

1893 The Grand Canyon of the Tuolumne. Sierra Club, Bui., 1:

9-16 (Jan.) .

Trip from Soda Springs through the canyon to Hotch Hetchy.

1895 Through the Tuolumne Canon. Sierra Club, Bui., 1:199-208
(May) , map.

1912 With the Sierra Club [in Yosemite] in 1911. Sierra Club,
Bui., 8:[l5l]-57 (Jan.), illus.

Putnam, George Palmer

1915 A summer in the Sierras. In: In the Oregon country, pp.
153-69, illus. New York, the author.

Travel to Yosemite; notes on scenery and sequoias.

32

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL; AND DESCRIPTION

Randall, Marion. See: Parsons, Mrs. Marion R.

Reik, H.O.

c!920 Yosemite National Park. In: A tour of America's national
parks, pp. 79-101, illus. New York, Button.

Richardson, Albert D.

cl867 [Yosemite and the Big trees.] In: Beyond the Mississippi;

from the great river to the great ocean...., pp. 420-35,

illus* , map.

General description, drawings of Yosemite scenes, and a map.

Rider, A.F.

1925 Yosemite Valley and the Yosemite National Park. In: Rider's

California, pp. 353-85, map. New York , Macmillan.

Condensed miscellaneous information, with map of the park.

Rixford, Emmet

1932 My first trip in the high Sierra. Sierra Club, Bui., 17:

[2o]-32 (Feb.), illus.

Indians, wildlife, and adventures in Yosemite Valley, 1866.

Roberts, Milnor

1902 On the crest of the Sierra Nevada. Out West , 17:429-41

(Oct.) , illus.

A trip from Tuolumne Meadows across Mount Lyell to the
south fork of the San Joaquin.

Robinson, C.D.

1893 Painting a Yosemite panorama. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 22:

243-56 (Sept.) , illus.

Preparations for and execution of the project. Photo
graphs illustrate the artist's technique. Present location of
this large painting is obscure.

Ro dman , Wi lloughby

1905 An outing with the Sierra Club. Out West, 22:259-89

(May) , illus.

Accounts of a hazardous ascent of Mount Lyell and other
excursions to scenic localities in the Yosemite region.

Rolfe, Mary A.

1928 Our national parks. New York, Sanborn, 329 pp., illus.,

map.

Yosemite: pages 1-32. Sequoia, General Grant, and Lassen
national parks are the others. "For fifth and sixth grades.
Should be in every school library."

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Roosevelt, Theodore

1904 Wilderness reserves. Forestry and irrig. , 10:250-59

(June); 300-09 (July), illus.

Description of visits to Yellowstone, Yosemite, and the
Grand Canyon. Comments on the purpose of national reserves.

Russell, Carl P.

n.d. Hikers' camps of Yosemite National Park. [Yosemite]

Nat. Hist. Assn., Bul.l, 12 pp., illus., maps.

Information concerning trails and camping facilities.

1925 Opening new Yosemite wonders. Yosemite nat . notes, 4:
25-26, 32 (Ap.)«
The wild back country of Yosemite.

1928 Sierra Nevada winter journeys. Sunset, 60:36-38 (Jan.),
illus.

Winter ski trips, especially in Yosemite.

Saunders, Charles F.

1913 Camping in the Yosemite. In: Under the sky in Califor
nia, pp. 63-71, illus. New York, McBride, Nast .
Includes a chapter on camp cookery, with recipes.

1930 Some big things of the mountains. In: Finding the worth
while in California, pp. 154-75 (chap. 9). New York, Mc
Bride .
Contains descriptions of El Portal, El Capitan, Half Dome,

Cathedral Spires, Yosemite and Bridalveil falls, Mirror Lake, and

Glacier Point.

Sawyer, Mrs. W.C.

1893 A camping trip to the Yosemite Valley. Chautauquan, 17:
[612] -17 (Aug.) , illus.

Schmidt, Alex R.

1929 Afoot in Yosemite: June 1896. Am. forests and forest
life, 35:473-75 (Aug.), illus.

Via Stockton, Tuttlestown, and Sonora to the old Stoneman
House in Yosemite.

Sexton, Ella M.

1902 Camp Muir in the Tuolumne Meadows.... Sierra Club, Bui.,

4:12-18 (Jan.).

Under the leadership of John Muir, the Sierra Club made
its initial expedition.

Seyd, Ernest

1858 [Yosemite Valley.] In: California and its resources, pp.
120-21, illus. London, Trubner.

34

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

[Smillie, James D.]

c!872 The Yosemite. In: Picturesque America, vol.1, pp.[ 464]-

95, illus. New York, Appleton, 2 vols.

Description and early history.

Smith, Horace J.

1881 A summer camping trip in California. Pacific rural press,

21:327 (May 7) , illus.

Contains notes on Yosemite scenery and the sequoias.

Solomons, Theodore S.

1894 Among the sources of the San Joaquin.- Sierra Club, Bui.,

l:[Gl]-84 (Jan.), illus.

Remarks on Mount Lyell and its glaciers; the upper basin
of Rush Creek; glaciation in the high regions; lake chains; the
Minarets, etc.

1896 Gorges and canons of the head streams. (Unexplored

regions of the high Sierra, pt.4). Overland mo., 2d ser.,
28:509-17 (Nov.).

1896 The grand canon of the Tuolumne. Appalachia, 8:164-79

(Nov. ) , illus.

Account of early explorations of the canyon, and report
of a trip thence from Yosemite Valley. Article by same title in
The Traveler, Dec., 1894.

1896 Lakes, falls, and meadows (Unexplored regions of the high
Sierra, pt.3). Overland mo., 2d ser., 28:135-46 (Aug.),
illus.

Describes Tenaya Lake, Mono Lake, and Tuolumne Meadows.

1897 An early summer excursion to the Tuolumne Canon and to
Mt. Lyell. Sierra Club, Bui., 2:50-52 (Jan.), illus.
Trip was made from Yosemite Valley via the Virginia Creek

Trail and Tioga Road.

1897 Explorations in the Sierra Nevada during the season of
1896. Appalachia, 8:240-43 (no. 3), illus.
Report of explorations made by the Sierra Club into the

region later proposed as extension to Sequoia National Park.

1897 Some new Yosemites (Unexplored regions of the high Sierra,
pt.5). Overland mo., 2d ser., 29:68-76 (Jan.), illus.
Tehipite Valley, Middle Fork of the Kings River, the

Upper Tuolumne, et cetera.

1901 An ascent of Cathedral Peak. Sierra Club, Bui., 3:236-41
(Feb.) , illus.

35

Y03MITE NATIONAL PARK

Story of the climbing of the highest spire of Cathedral
Peak by the writer and Charles A. Bailey; the peak is to the north
east cf Yo Semite, in tho Tuolunme Meadows.

Solomons, Theodore S., continued

1901 In the upper Merced Canon. Sunset, 7:[57]-63 (June-July),

illus.

Topography and scenery.

1933 After forty years. Sierra Club, Bui., 18:20-23 (Feb.).
Account of a trip to Yosemite after an absence of forty

years.

Starr, Walter H. , Jr.

1934 Guide to the John Muir Trail and the high Sierra. San
Francisco, The Sierra Club, 145 pp., illus., port., map.
"Here we have the father completing. . .the work conceived

by his son." (Foreword. Walter H. Starr, Jr., died 1933). De
scriptive data on elevations and points of interest; the Yo somite
region, pp. 15-40.

Starr, Walter H.

1897 Report of a trip from Yosemite to King's River, via the

basin of the Merced. Sierra Club, Bui., 2:104-06 (May).

Account of trip taken by the author, Theodore S. Solomons,
and Allan L. Chi eke ring through the region later proposed as an
addition to Sequoia National Park.

Stoddard, Charles A.

1894 Beyond the Rockies* A spring journey in California. New

York, Scribner's, 214 pp., illus.

Contains descriptions of the California Big trees, Yo
semite Valley, and Hetch Hetchy Valley.

1901 Yosemite Valley. In: Descriptive geography from original
sources; North America (A.J. and F.L. Herbertson, eds.),
pp. 194-96. London, Black.
Reprinted from "Beyond the Itockies."

[Stoddard, Charles v/.]

1869 In Yosemite shadows. Overland mo., 3:[l05]-12 (Aug.).
Inspirational effects of autumnal Yosemite.

Stokes, Anson P.

1930 By Mono Pass into the Yosemite; the most enjoyable and in
teresting route — some of its features of scenery and ex
pense. Sierra Club, Bui., 15:113-15 (Feb.).
Reprinted from the New York Tribune, Aug. 2, 1897.

36

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Stornoway, Lewis

1388 Yosemite: Where to go and what to do. San Francisco,

A.C. Murdock and co., 93 pp., illus*

A guide to the Yosemite Valley, the high Sierra, and the

Big trees.

Story, Isabelle F.

1936 The Yosemite National Park. In: Glimpses of our national

parks, ppc20-24, illus. "Washington, U.S. Dept . Int.,

Natl. Park Serv.

Descriptive notes on scenery and origin of Yosemite Valley;
elevations of remarkable heights, and measurements of some of the
giant sequoias.

Talman, Charles F.

1927 The romance of waterfalls. Nature mag., 10:84-87 (Aug.),

illus.

Yosemite Falls are compared with Sutherland Falls in New
Zealand .

Taylor, Benjamin F.

1883 Bound for the Yosemite. In: Between the gates, pp. 192-

239. 10th ed. (c!878), Chicago, Griggs.

General description.

Taylor, Frank J.

1929 Something besides scenery in Yosemite. Sunset, 62:11-13,

70-71 (June) , illus.

Carl Purdy wild flower garden; life zones; climate; and
"ladybug" industry.

Taylor, Frank J. , joint author. See: Albright, Horace, 1933.

Taylor, Katherine A.

c!926 Lights and shadows of Yosemite; being a collection of

favorite Yosemite views, together with a brief account of
its history and legends.... San Francisco, H.S. Crocker,
87 pp. , illus.

1934 Yosemite tales and trails. San Francisco, Crocker, 78
pp. , illus.

Thompson, George C.

1918 The climb of Dunderberg via Virginia Canyon. Sierra

Club, Bui., 10: [287] -91 (Jan.), illus.

Account of various expeditions, made by Sierra Club mem
bers, from a central camp in Tuolumne Meadows.

37

YOSMET1 NATIONAL PARK

Tileston, John B.

1922 Letters of John Boies Tileston. Boston, privately printed

(for Mrs. Mary Wilder Tileston), 139 pp., illus.

Contains letter giving account of first ascent of Mount
Lyell, August 29, 1871.

Todd, John

1870 The Big trees and Yosemite Valley. In: The sunset land,
pp. 47-120. Boston, Lee and Sliepard.

1892 The Yosemite Valley. In: California and its wonders, pp.

61-124. New ed. , London, T. Nelson.

Also contains notes on the Big trees and the natural
bridges of Cals.veras.

Tomlinson, Everett T.

1911 Four boys in the Yosemite. Boston, Lothrop, Lee and

Sheperd, 4C5 pp., illus.

The wonders of Ycsemite for juvenile readers.

Torrey, Bradford

1910 On foot in the Tosernite. Atlantic ino., 106:228-37 (Aug.).

General description, with observations on flora. He-
printed in: .field days in Calif ornia , pp. 170-203, New York, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1913.

Tourist Association of Centi-ol California

[1915?] Yosomite National Park. In: Central California...., illus,
San Francisco, the Assn.

Townsend, Charles E.

1399 A trip to Mount Lyell. Overland LIO . , 2d ser. , 34:[3]-13

(July) , illus.

Description of Mount Lyell and the surrounding country.

Truman, Ben C.

1883 Tourist's illustrated guide to the celebrated summer and

winter resorts of California adjacent to and upon... the

Central and Pacific railroads. San Francisco, Crocker,

232 pp. , illus.

The Yosemite Valley, pp. 10-34; Hetch Hetchy, pp. 34-40;
Mammoth trees of California, pp.[5l]-73 — each section with wood
cuts. Original in paper covers.

1921 Falls of the Yosemite. Sunset, 21:[lll]-18 (June), illus.
Yosemite, Bridalveil, Nevada, and Vernal falls.

U.S. National Park Service

1938 Yosemite National Park. Washington, U.S. Dept. Int.,

38

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

35 pp., illus., maps, bibliog.

Compendium of information on : scenery, origin, history,
transportation, wildlife, sports, accommodations, rules and regu
lations, educational service. One of the annually published
circulars or information on the various national parks.

Vernon, P.S.

1950 Yosemite and Hetch-Hetchy valleys. In: Coast to coast
by motor, pp. 51-57. New York, W.E.Rudge.

Vivian, A. Pendarves

1879 [Yosemite and the Mariposa Big trees.] In: Wanderings in
the western land, pp.[348]-78, illus. London, Low, Mars-
ton, Searle and Hivington.

Describes a journey from San Francisco to Yosemite. Origi
nal sketches by Albert Bierstadt and the author.

von Landau, Wilhelm

1888 [A trip through Yosemite.] In: Travels in Asia, Australia

and America, comprising the period between 1879 and 1887,

pp. 9 1-94. New York, George Landau.

Brief descriptions of features, v;ith statistics on eleva
tions and magnitudes.

Warren, Herbert 0.

1935 Snow sports in California [and the northwest] . Country

life, 69:25-26, 66-67, illus.

Foreign experts find excellent skating, sledding, and
skiing in Yosemite, Sequoia, Lassen, Grand Teton, end Yellowstone
parks .

Washburn, Lucy

1910 The grand circuit of tiie Yosemite National Park. Sierra

Club, Bui., 7:149-52 (Jan.), illus.

Describing the grandeur and beauty of the park.

Webb, William S.

1891 The Yosemite Valley. In: California and Alaska, pp.8-1-
102, illus. 2d ed. , New York, Putnam.

Wheeler, George M.

1900 Table of altitudes at Yosemite Valley. Sunset, 5:189

(Aug.).

Gives also information on Indian and American place names.

Whi taker, Herman

1915 The wonderland of California. Natl. geog. mag., 28:57-99

(July) , illus.

Contains description of Yosemite features, with views of
El Capitan and Half Dome, and Bridalveil, Vernal, and Nevada falls*

39

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PAPJC

Whitney, Josiah D. (State Geologist)

1868 The Yoser,iite [guide] book; a description of the Sierra

Nevada, and of the Big trees of California. New York,

Julius Bien, pub. by authority of the legislature, 116

pp. , illus. , maps.

Contains photographic section of tvTenty-eight full-page
views of Yosemite features. Among other editions were those of
1869, 1870, 1871, and 1874, with varying title and imprint.

[Wildman, Rounsevelle]

1896 Yosemite and the Big trees. Overland mo., 2d ssr. , 23:

199-211 (Aug.) , illus.

Comparison of Yosemite 's physiographic features with those
of Europe and Asia; also names and measurements of some Mariposa
Big Trees.

Wiley, William H. , and Wiley, Sarah K.

[1893] The Yosemite, Alaska, and the Yellowstone. London and

New York, John Wiley and sons, 230 pp., illus., maps.

A record of the authors' trip of 10,000 miles in the com
pany of thirty or forty fellow travelers.

WilliEms, John H.

1914 Yosemite and its high Sierra. Tacoma, the author, 147

pp. , illus.

Very general information on the valley. Over 200 illus
trations, including eight color plates from paintings by Chris
Jorgensen. Second edition, revised (published by the author, San
Fr&ncisco, 1921), has 194 pp.

Wilson, Herbert 3.

1922 The lore and lure of Yosemite. San Francisco, Robertson,

152 pp. , illus.

Description, origin, and history; also, information about
Yosemite Indians.

Wilson, Ksthryne

1917 Over the top: What it means to qualify as a "mountain

goat." Sunset, 39:38-40, 73-74 (Sept.), illus.

Hiking opportunities in Yosemite, Crater Lake, Pocky
Mountain, and Mount Rainier national parks.

Wineman, Mode

1927 Camera studies of California national porks. Mus. graphic,

1:142-45 (Mar.) , illus.

Account of the author's photographic work of 1902 in Yo
semite. Two illustrations of trees. Reprinted: Yosemite nat.
notes, 6:10-11 (Feb. 1927).

40

GEOGRAPHY, TRAVEL, AND DESCRIPTION

Wisley, J.L.

1866 The Yosemite Valley. Harper's new mo. mag., 32:697-08

(May), illus., map.

Illustrated with 14 beautiful engravings from photographs
taken by C. L. Weed.

Wood, Ruth K.

1914 The Yosemite. In: The tourist's California, pp. 192-218.
New York, Dodd, Mead.

Wood, Stanley

1889 To the Yosemite. In: Over the range to the Golden Gate;

a complete tourist's guide, pp. [214- 18], illus. Chicago,

R. R. Donnelley and Sons.

Wood, Stanley, joint author. See: Jackson, W.H.

Woon, Basil

1935 The high Sierra; Yosemite National Park. In: San Fran
cisco and the golden empire, pp. 307-14. New York, Smith
and Haas.

Yard, Robert S.

1916 The Yosemite National Park. In: Glimses of our national
parks, pp. 16-20, illus. Washington, Govt. print, off .

1917 The Tehipite and Kings River Canyon. Natl. Parks Conf . ,
Proc., 1917, pp. 357-61.

Description of region between Yosemite and Sequoia nation
al parks, and comparison with Yosemite.

1919 Yosemite, the incomparable. In: The book of the national
parks, pp. 36-68, illus. New York, Scribner's Sons.
General description, with notes on fauna, flora, geology,

history, accommodations, and transportation.

1922 Yosemite for the nature lover. A park that offers much
more than the average visitor sees. Outing, 80:147-51
(July) , illus.
Description of Tuolumne Meadows region, its flowers and

trees. Photographs by National Park Service.

1928 The problems of Yosemite forests. Natl. parks bul. , 9:
[3 pp.] (May), illus., map.
Considers private land in the western part of the park,

1931 Yosemite. In: The national parks portfolio, pp. 29-52,
illus. Washington, U.S. Dept . Int., Natl. Park Serv.
Thirty photographic views of scenic features, accompa
nied by factual and explanatory notes.

41

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Yard, Robert S.

1934 Yo Semite National Park. In: Picturesque America, pp.
[44] -55. Rev. ed. , New York, Union Lib. Assn.

Yeager, Dorr G.

1929 The high country hike. Yosemite ranr-er-nat. man., 2d
ed., 1:58-70. Yosemite Nat 1. Park. (Mimeographed.)

Yelverton, Therese (Viscountess Avonmore)

1874 Fifty thousand niles of travel. London, Bent ley.
Tour included Yosemite. Volume not available for exami
nation because of rarity.

1875 Teresina in America. London, Bentley, 2 vols.
See note on preceding item.

42

Ill

EDUCATIONAL AND MUSEUM

PROGRAMS

1919 The LeConte Memorial Lectures in the Yosemite Valley.
Sci. mo., 9:283-84 (Sept.), illus.

1923 Educational work [in Yosemite]. Calif, fish and game,
9:60-61 (May).

1924 The A. J. Brown collection donated to Yosemite Museum.
Yo Semite nat. notes, 3:3-4 (May 31).

Notes on a collection of 622 Indian artifacts.

1926 Yosemite National Park: Museuri completed. Am. forests
and forest life, 32:757-58 (Dec.).

1931 Areas in national parks set aside Tor scientific study.

Am. forests, 37:496 (Aug.).

Special research areas established in Yosemite and Mount
Rainier national r^arks.

1935 Membership fee reduced. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:12 (Jan.),
Policy of "Nature Notes;" proposed conservation series.

Atwood, Wallace W. , Jr. See: Bryant, Harold C., 1932.

Black, F.

1929 Nature's text book: Yosemite National Park. Sierra ed.
news , 25 : 2-4 ( May ) , i llus .

Bryant, Harold C.

1925 Educating the vacationing public. Calif, fish and e;ame,
11:161-62 (Oct.).

1925 A school for nature guides. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:9-10,
16 (Feb.) .

Announcing the organization of the Yosemite School of
Field Natural History.

1926 Let your mountain vacation be a journey of discovery.
Yosemite nat. notes, 5:33-36 (May), illus., bibliog.
Nature study in Yosemite: Notes on small animals, birds,

and reptiles, and a list of helpful books.

1927 A nature preserve for Yosemite, Yosemite nat. notes, 6:
46-48 (June) , illus.

43

YOSSMITS NATIONAL PARK

Proposal to set aside an area of seven square miles to aid
nature study.

Bryant, Harold C., continued

1927 The Yo Semite School of Field Natural History: a National

Park Service educational activity. Yosemite nat. notes,

6:1-8 (Jan.) , illus.

1930 Yosemite School of Field Natural History. In: Nature
almanac, pp. 139-40. Washington, Am. Nat. Assn.

1932 Recollections. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:6 (July).

Stephen T. Mather began the educational vrork in Yosemite
bjr bringing the author to the park to deliver lectures.

Bryant, Harold C., and Atwood, Wallace V. , Jr.

1932 Research and education in the national parks. Washington,
U.S. Dept. Int., 66 pp., illus., bibliog.

Carlson, Reynold E.

1934 Our nature program for children. Yosemite nat. notes,

13:9-11 (Feb.) , illus.

Activities of the Yosemite Junior Nature School.

Casaday, Ruth

1932 Yosemite Museum Nature Library. Yosemite nat. notes,
11:5-6 (May).

[Coleman, Laurence V.]

1925 A year of progress for organized museums. Sci., 62:148-

50 (Aug. 14).

Contains note on construction of Yosemite Museum with
funds from Laura Spelman Rockefeller Memorial.

Demaray, A.E.

1923 Nature guiding in our national parks. Natl. municipal
rev. , 12:56-58 (Feb.).

Fryxell, Fritiof M.

1936 The Thomes Mb ran art collection of the national parks.
Yosemite nat. notes, 15:57-60 (Aug.), illus.

Gilbert, James C.

1927 Sanctuary! Sanctuary! Outlook, 146:110-11 (May 25) , illus.
Seven square miles made a sanctuary for flora and fauna.

Goethe, C.M.

1920 Nature guides. Survey, 44:145 (Ap.24).

Co-operation of State and Federal governments in nature
guide service at Yosemite.

44

EDUCATIONAL AND MUSEUM PROGRAMS

1921 Yo Semite nature guides. Sierra Club, Bui., Il:[l6?]-?0
(no. 2) , illus.

California Nature Study League sponsors directed recrea
tion for orphan children in Yoseinite.

Graves, C.Edward

1931 Yo Semite School of Natural History. Sierra ed. news, 27:
58-59 (May) , illus.

Hail, Ansel F.

1922 The educational development of Yosemite National Park.
Sierra Club, Bui., 11:411-16 ' (no'. 4) , illus.

Kamlin, Chauncey J.

1924 The educational value of museums in national parks. Play
ground , 18 : 243-44 ( July ) .
Mentions museums in Yosemite, Yellowstone, and Mesa Verde

national parks.

1926 Yosemite Museum formally presented to Park Service. Yo
semite nat. notes, 5:95 (Dec.).

Harwell, C.A.

1932 Beginning of nature guiding. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:
2-3 (May) .

How C. M. Goethe initiated the movement at Lake Tahoe,
whence it spread to Yosemite through the aid of Stephen T. Mather.

1932 Ycsemite Museum receives valuable exhibit material. Yo
semite nat., notes, 11:7-8 (Aug.).
Among recent accessions, a bequest of $4,200 was received

from Miss Marjorie Montgomery V/ard.

Hibbard, Mabel E.

1927 The Yosemite Museum flower show. Yosemite nat. notes,
6:65-67 (Sept.).

Howe, J.W.

1930 Yosemite Junior Nature School. Yosemite nat. notes, 9:
76-77 (Aug.).

Hudson, Paul

1934 The tree and flower rooms in the museum. Yosemite nat.
notes, 13:80 (Oct.) .

Morris, J.N.

1930 An old nature trail is found near Wawona. Yosemite nat.
notes, 9:17-18 (Mar.).

45

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

In 1904 Major John Bigelow, park superintendent, began an
arboretum in Yosemite.

Nesbit, Paul W.

1935 Nature games. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:91-92 (Nov. ) , illus.

Perry, Harold E.

1936 The all-day hike as a socializing agent. Yosemite nat.
notes, 15:23-24 (Mar.).

Pre snail, Clifford C.

1929 The Lost Arrow Nature Trail. Yosemite nat. notes, 8:109-

12 (Dec.) .

Describes experiments with guide signs.

Russell, Carl P., and Harwood, R.D.

1925 The Glacier Point lookout. Yosemite nat. notes, 4:54-55

(July) , illus.

A description of the binocular telescope on Glacier Point,
and other matters at this branch of the Yosemite Museum.

Russell, Carl P.

1925 The trail school of Yosemite. Am. forests and forest
life, 31:327-29 (June), illus.

1928 K.C. Bumpus inspects the Yosemite educational project.
Yosemite nat. notes, 7:21-23, illus.
Installation of a new system of exhibiting the collections,

1928 Nature guide service established at Hetch Hetchy. Yo
semite nat. notes, 7:72 (Aug.).

1928 "A soldier passes." Yosemite nat. notes, 7:64-65 (Aug.).
Tribute to G. E. Reynolds of the Stockton Record, a pio
neer in the educational development of Yosemite.

1929 The Yosemite Museum and the conservation of wildlife.
Yosbinite nat. notes, 8:63-67 (June).

Outline of the scientifically prepared program of educa
tion, conservation, and recreation offered visitors to Yosemite
and other national parks.

Van Wyck, 0. , Jr.

1923 Landscapes with a jigsaw: Making a replica of Yosemite

National Park by stacking up contour boards. Sci. Am.,

128:394 (June), illus.

Wilbur, Ray Lyman

1929 Our national parks. What the national parks mean to the

people of the United States. Am. civic ann. , 1:5-3.

Contains .reference to the Yosemite School of JTield Natural
History. 46

FAUNA

I GMERAL (ECOLOGICAL CONDITIONS,
ET CZTERA)

II AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES

III BIRDS

IV FISHES

V INSECTS AND OTHER INVERTEBRATES

VI MAJVM/iLS

GENERAL (E C Q L 0 0 I C A L CONDITIONS,

ETCETERA)

1927 [A wildlife reservation in Yosemite National Park.] Sci.,

n.s. , 65:13 (Jan.?) .

A seven- square -mile area in th.3 high Sierra region pro
posed to be known as the Hudson-Arctic-Alpine life zone.

1931 The wildlife problem of the national park system. Sci.,
n.s., 74:540 (Nov. 27).

Contains notes on the deer of Yo Semite National Park.

Bailey, Vmion

1932 Animal friends of the high Sierra. Sierra Club, Bui.,
17 :L 12] -24 (Feb.), illus.

Field notes made on a trip along tLe eastern rim of Yo
semite National Park, into Sierra and Mono national forests, over
Parker Pass, and through Tuolumne Meadows.

Cole, James, E.

1934 Animal life on Half Dome. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:75
(Oct.).

Dixon, Joseph S., joint author. See: Wright, George M. , 1933.

Gilbert, J.C.

1927 Sanctuaryl Sanctuary t Outlook, 146:110-11.

An area of seven square miles is se^ aside in Yosemite
as a natural sanctuary for fauna and flora.

Gri nne 1 1 , Jo s e ph

1915 The vertebrate fauna of the Pacific coast. In: Nature

and science on the Pacific coast. A guidebook for scien
tific travelers in the west, pp. 104-14, illus., bibliog,
San Francisco, Paul Elder.
Contains notes on the fauna of the various life zones of

the Yosemite region.

Grinnell, Joseph, and Storer, Tracy T.

1921 Life zones of the Yosemite region. In: Handbook of Yo
semite National Park (.ansel F. Hall, ed) , pp. 123-32,
illus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.

49

YOSMITE NATIONAL PARK

1933 Review of the recent mammal fauna of California. Univ.

Calif., Ribs, in zool. , 40:71-234.

Catalogue indicating distribution and characteristic
habits of 400 species and subspecies, many indigenous to the Yo-
semite region. Index to volume included.

G-rinnell, Joseph

1935 A revised life-zone map of California. Univ. Calif.,
Pubs, in zool., 40:327-30, map.

Map shows extent of Lower Sonoran, Upper Sonoran, Transi
tion, and Boreal zones.

Harwell , C.A.

1933 Altitude records. Yosemite nat . notes, 12:25-27 (Ap.)i

illus.

Coyote, chipmunk, western bluebird, and water ouzel, ob
served at unusual altitudes.

Keck, David D-

1925 Cloud's Rest with a nature guide. Yosemite nat. notes,
4:69 (Aug. 11) , illus.

Birds and animals seen on a week-end hike.

Michael, Enid R.

1926 Wild animal friends of Yosemite. Nat. mag., 8:9-12
(July) , illus.

Muir, John

1917 The glacier meadows. In: The mountains of California,
pp. 125-38. New York, Century.

Nesbit, Paul W.

1936 Distribution of wildlife over our western mountains. Yo-
senite nat. notes, 15:73-76 (Oct.).

Comparisons of the fauna and flora of Yosemite and Rocky
Mountain national parks; similarity of life zones and many plant
and animal species.

Presnall, Clifford C.

1932 Skyland. Yosemite nafc. notes, 11:7-8 (Oct.).

Animal and plant species living in the unfavorable en
vironment on the summit of Half Dome, which is surrounded by an
abyss nearly a mile deep.

1933 Another argument for careful game management. Yosemite
nat. notes, 12:2-3 (Jan.), illus.

Russell, Carl P.

1932 Seasonal migration of mule deer. Ecolog. Soc. Am.,
. , 2 : 1-46 ( Jan . ) .

50

GMERAL (ECOLOGICAL CONDITIONS, ET CETERA)

Factors influencing migration of these deer in Yosemite
and Yellowstone national parks.

Smith, James S.

1929 Pohono Trail acquaintances. Yosemite nat . notes, 8:7-9

( Jan . ) .

Gradual change in life zones along the trail; notes on
trees, flowers, birds, and small mammals of each zone.

Summer, Florence A.

1929 Fresh water Yosemite mollusks. Yosemite nat. notes, 8:
24 (Feb.).

Thompson, Ben H. , joint author. See: vnright, George M. , 1933

Weigel, Virginia

1930 Some of the invertebrates of Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 9:10-12 (Feb.).

Study of specimens from the swamps of Sentinel Meadows
on the valley floor.

Wright , George M.

1929 Life zones in Yosemite. Yosemite ranger-nat. man., 2d

ed., 2:86-98, bibliog. Yosemite Natl. Park (Mimeographed).

Wright, George M. , Dixon, Joseph S., and Thompson, Ben W.

1933 Fauna of the national parks of the United States: A pre
liminary survey of faunal relations in national parks.
Washington, Govt . print, off., 157 pp., illus.

51

YOSIMETE NATIONAL PARK
II

AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES

Borell, Adrey E.

1934 A new reptile for Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:96

(Dec.) .

The Pacific mud turtle was found in Swamp Lake.

Camp, Charles L.

1916 Description of Bufo canorus, a new toad from the Yosemite
National Park. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in zool., 17:59-62,
illus. (Contrib. from Mus. of Vert. Zool.).

1916 Spelerpes platycephalus, a nev; Alpine salamander from the
Yosemite National Park. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in zool.,
17:11-14, illus., bibliog.
A technical description.

1916 The subspecies of Sceloporus occidentalis, with descrip
tion of a new form from the Sierra Nevada, and systematic
notes on other California lizards. Univ. Calif., Pubs,
in zool. , 17:63-74.

Two distinct new subspecies collected from the headwaters
of the Merced River.

1917 Notes on the systematic status of the toads and frogs of
California. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in zool., 17:115-26.

Grinnell, Joseph, and Storer, Tracy I.

1921 Reptiles amphibians of Yosemite National Park. Int Hand
book of Yosemite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp.
175-82, illus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.

1924 Animal life in the Yosemite. An account of the mammals,
birds, reptiles, and amphibians in a cross-section of the
Sierra Nevada. Berkeley, Univ. of Calif, press, 742 pp.,
illus., maps, bibliog.

Grinnell, Joseph

1925 The burrowing rodents of California [Yosemite national
park], as agents in soil formation. In: Smithsn. instn.,
Ann. rept. (1923), pp. 339<-50. Washington, Govt. .print .
off.

King, F. Willis

1931 Key to the amphibians and reptiles of Yosemite National

Park, California. Yosemite nat. notes, 10:91-94 (Nov.),

bibliog.

52

AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES

McLean, Donald D.

1927 Sharp-tailed snake in the vicinity of Yosemite. Yooemite
nat. notes, 6:33 (May).

1929 The Amphibia of Yosemite National Park. Yosemite ranger-
nat. man., 2d ed. , 2:138-41, bibliog. Yosemite NatQ, Park
(Miraeo graphed) .

Michener, H. David

1955 Reptiles and amphibians of the Yosemite Creek Research

Reserve. Yosemite nat. notos, 14:49-52 (June).

Specimens collected in the wild unless area established in
1933 by tho Yosemite School of Field Natural History.

Russell, Carl P.

1925 Yellow-spotted salamander in Yosemite. Yosemite nat.

notes, 4:96 (Sept . ) .

The supposed new species was Ensatina croceator, described
by Cope in 1867.

Storer, Tracy I.

1925 A synopsis of the amphibia of California. Berkeley, Univ.

Calif, press, 342 pp., illus. (Univ. Calif, pubs, in £00 1. ,

vol.27).

Pages 44, 104, 114, 169, 182, 215, and 2G3 refer to am
phibia of tie Yosemite region.

Storer, Tracy I., joint author. See: Grinnell, Joseph, 1921, 1924

Wright , George M.

1929 Reptiles of the Yosemite. Yo somite ranger-nat . man., 2d

ed. , 2:125-37, bibliog. Yosemite Nat 1. Park (Mimeographed).

53

YOSEMITS NATIONAL PARK
III

BIRDS

1924 A new nesting record for Clouds Rest. Yosemite nat . notes,
3:3-4 (July 19) .
Sierra rosy finches are usually found only near the glaciers,

1924 A new nesting record for Yosemite Valley. Yosemite nat.

notes, 3:2 (June 21).

The second observed appearance of rough-winged swallows,
in the valley.

1931 New bird in Yosemite. Nature mag., 17:272 (Ap.).
Green-winged teal reported seen in Yosemite.

1933 Yosemite National Park. Bird Lore's thirty-third Christ
mas census. Bird lore, 35:58 (Jan. -Feb.).

Bade, William F.

1912 The mountain bluebird and the wood pewee. Sierra Club,

Bui., 8:260-65 (June), illus.

Description, characteristics, and songs of these birds in
the Hetch Hetchy and Yoseinite regions.

1912 Some birds of the high Sierra. Sierra Club, Bui., 8:158-

62 (Jan.) , illus.

Bird-hunting with a camera in the high Sierra and the
Little Yosemite.

Beatty, M.E.

1932 Wood ducks in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:6 (Dec.).
A new bird added to Yosemite fs list.

Beatty, M.E. , Presnall, C.C., and Harwell, C.A.

1933 The birds of Yosemite National Park. Yosemite nat. notes,
12:33-58 (May), bibliog.

Special number: Check list of 185 rare and common species,
with descriptions and habits.

Beatty, M.E.

1934- Annual Yosemite bird census. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:19

1935 (Mar.), illus.; 14:35-36 (Ap.), illus.

1935 Bird banding notes. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:25-26 (Mar.),

A resume of banding activities from May 5, 1933, to No
vember 5, 19:54.

Beatty, M.S., and Harwell, C.A.

1938 Birds of Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 17:[l-36] (Jan.),
illus. , bibliog.

54

BIHDS

Special bird, number, 3d ed. Observations on 202 species,
divided into permanent residents and visitants, with, comments on
distinctive behavior. Poem, "Birds," by C.A. Harwell, on last page,

Bo re 11, Adrey E.

1952 The yellow-billed magpie, a new bird for the Yosemite
region. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:7-8 (May).

1933 New method of bird study in Yosemite [banding]. Yosemite
nat. notes, 12:79-80 (Aug.).

1934 Rare bird observations. Yocemite nat. notes, 13:12-13
(Feb. ) .

Wilson snipe, horned lark, and poorwill.

1934 A rare [duck] hawk in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
13:63 (Aug.).

Bryant, Harold C.

1929 Yosemite birds. Yosemite range r- nat. man., 2d ed. , 2:
118-25, bibliog. Yos smite Natl. Park (Mimeographed),.

Emerson, W. Otto

1893 Random bird notes from. Merced Big Trees and Yosemite

Valley. Zoe, 4:176-82 (July).

"The five volumes [of Loe] , containing contributions to
the botany and zoology of the Pacific Coast, were published be
tween 1890 and 1905." (Univ. Calif. Press, Cat., 1937.)

Fit zpat rick, Walter, end Fit zpat rick, Kathleen

1937 Canvasback, new duck for Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
16:22-23 (Mar.).

Garland, Virginia

1905 Birds of the high Sierras. Overland mo., 2d. ser. , 46:
379-81 (Oct.).

G-rinnell, Joseph

1911 Early summer birds in the Yosemite Valley. Sierra Club,
Bui., 8:118-24 (June).

1918 The subspecies of the mountain chickadee. Univ. Calif.,
•Pubs, in zool. , 17:505-75, illus., map.
Chief habitats: Yosemite, Mount Mis on, and the Panamint
Mountains in Inyo County, California.

Grinnell, Joseph, and Storer, Tracy I.

1921 Some birds of Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook of

Yosemite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 133-52,

illus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.

YOSEMITE NATIONAL FARE

Grinnell, Joseph, and Storer, Tracy I.

1924 Animal life in the Yosemite. An account of the mammals,
birds, reptiles, and amphibians in a cross-section of the
Sierra Nevada. Berkeley, Uriiv. Calif, press, 742 pp.,
illus., maps, bibliog.

Hack, Dorothy

1928 Misplaced birds. Yosemite nat. notes, 7:89-90 (Oct.).

Uncommon birds encountered in the park at altitudes
ranging from 6200 to 11,500 feet.

Harwell, C.A.

1936 How fast does a loon swini under water? Yosemite nat.
notes, 15:79-80 (Oct.).

Reprinted: Nature mag. , 29:57 (Jan. 1937).

1937 Cooper hawk nesting in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
16:23 (Mar.).

Harwell, C.A., joint author. See: Beatty, M.E. , 1933, 1938

Holman, F.C.

1926 Nesting of the California pigmy owl in Yosemite. Condor,
28:92-93.

Jensen, C.C.

1932 A Farallon cormorant in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
11:2-3 (Aug.).

Keeler, C.A.

1908 Bird life of Yosemite Park. Sierra Club, Bui., 6:245-54

( Jan . ) .

Descriptions, distribution, and nesting habits.

McAllister, M. Hall

1923 The band-tailed pigeon in Yosemite. Calif, fish and
game, 9:99-100 (July).

McGee, Clare

1934 Canada goose, a new bird for Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 13:62 (Aug. ) .

McLean, D.D.

1926 Red-naped sapsucker found in park in summer. Yosemite
nat. notes, 5:56 (July).

1927 The owls of the central Sierra Nevada. Yosemite nat.
notes, 6:52 (July).

56

BIRDS

Mailliard, Joseph

1918 Early autumn birds in Yosemite Valley. Condor, 20:11-19
(Jan. -Feb. ) .

Michael, Charles V.

19E7 Black svclfts nesting in Yosemite National Park,
29:89-97, illus.

Condor,

1923 Sage thrather is new bird for Yo samite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 12:66 (June).

1934 Cov/birds in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:92-93 (Dec.),

1934 Mew birds for Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:76-77
(Oct.).
The Anthony green heron and the marsh wren.

1934 Sage sparrow, new bird, for Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
13:94-95 (Dec.).

1937 Woodpeckers. Yosemite nat. notes, 16:9-14 (Feb.), illus.

Comparison of the nesting, breeding, and feeding habits
of the 12 woodpecker species inhabiting Yosemite Valley.

Michael, Enid

1923 A c^-ow visits the Yosemite twice each year. Yosemite
nat. notes, 2:4-[5] (Nov.).

1924 Notes on the nesting of band-tailed pigeons in Yosemite.
Yc Semite nat. notes, 3:2 (Sept.).

1926 The habits of the swifts in Yosemite Valley. Condor,
28:109-14 (no. 3), illus.

1927 Distributional list of Yoseinlte birds. Yosemite Nat.
Hist. Assn., Bui. no. 2, pp. 1-15.

1929 The Pohono Trail hike. Yosemite ranger-nat. man., 2ded.,
1:53-57. Yosemite Nat 1. Park (Mimeographed).

1929 Special bird walks. Yosemite ranger-nat. man., 2d ed. ,
1:71-74. Yosemite Nat 1. Park (Mimeographed).

1929 A stranger [red phalarope] calls at Yosemite.... Nat.
mag., 14:97-98 (Aug.), illus.

1930 The common nesting birds of Yosemite Valley. Yosemite
nat. notes, 9:41-64 (June), illus.

57

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARIv

Michael, Enid (continued)

1931 Another new bird [green-winged teal] for Yo Semite Valley.
Yosemite nat . notes, 10:117-18 (Jan.),

1931- Feeding habits of the woodpeckers in the Yosemite Valley.

1932 Yosemite nat. notes, 10:81-83 (Oct.); 10:89-90 (Nov.); 10:
99-100 (Dec.); 11:3-5 (Jan.); 11:6-7 (Feb.); 11:3-4 [sic]
(Mar. ) , illus.

1931 A new record for Yosemite [yellow-billed magpie]. Yo
semite nat. notes, 10:85 (Oct.).

1936 A new nesting record for Yosemite Valley. Yosemite nat.
notes, 15:77-78 (Oct.), illus.
Mountain bluebirds nesting on the floor of Yosemite Valley.

Muir, John

1878 The hummirg-bird of the California water falls. Scribner's

mo., Ic : 545-54 (Feb.), illus.

Description of the water ouzel, common in Yosemite and the
Sierra Nevada. This article later incorporated in Muir's The
mountains of California, pp. 276-99 (New York, Century, 1917).

1898 Among the birds of the Yosemite. Atlantic mo., 82:751-

60 (Dec.).

Later incorporated in Muir's Our national parks, pp.
213-40, illus. (Bought on Mifflin, 1901), and in In American fields
and forests, pp.[l9l]-214 (Bought on Mifflin, 1909).

O'Neal, C.H.

1933 White pelican, a new bird for Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 12:96 (Oct.).

Payne, Ernest A.

1936 The nest of the arctic three-toed woodpecker. Yosemite
nat. notes, 15:19-21 (Mar.), illus.

Perry, H.E.

1929 Yosemite's "Bird Man." Yosemite nat. notes, 8:81 (Aug.).
Herbert Sonn, artist, and tamer of wild birds.

Presnall, Clifford C.

1930 The yellow-headed blackbird visits Yosemite. Yosemite
nat. notes, 9:70 (July).

1932 A rare owl collection. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:8 (Jan.).
The southern California screech owl is exceptionally rare

in Yosemite.

58

BIRDS

1933 Ducks are rare in Yosemite. Yosemite nat . notes, 12:17-
18 (Mar.).

Presnall, Clifford C., joint author. See: Beatty, M.E. , 1933

Ray, M.S.

1898 A summer trip to Yosemite. Osprey, 355 (Dec.).
Account of several bird species.

Russell, Carl P.

1926 High Sierra wildlife conditions in winter. Yosemite nat.
notes, 5:18-21 (Mar.), illus.

Bird and animal life encountered on a February trip to
Tuclumne Meadows and Tenaya Lake.

1927 Ki.^h Sierra winter residents. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:17

(Mar.).

Storer, Tracy I., joint author. See: Grinnell, Joseph, 1921, 1924

Twining, Hovrard

1937 Nesting of the western goshawk in Yosemite National Park.
Yosemite nat. notes, 16:93 (Dec.).

Widmann, 0.

1904 Yosemite Valley birds. Auk, 21:66-73 (Jan.).

Includes lists from Yosemite, Wawona, and Mariposa Grove.

Zentmyer, George

1927 New bird record [western gull]. Yosemite nat. notes, 16:
23 (Mar.).

59

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

IV
FISH AND FISHING

1926 The new Yosemite hatchery. Calif, fish and game, 12:81
(Ap.).

National Park Service and California Fish and Game Com
mission agree on details of projected hatchery.

1926 Yosemite fish hatchery dedicated. Calif, fish and game,
12:181-82 (Oct.).

Stephen T. Mather, then director of National Park Service,
was among those who spoke at the ceremonies.

Borell, Adrey E.

1932 Fish and fishing in Yosemite. Yosemite nut. notes, 11:

1-2 (Aug.).

Notes on the native fish and on fish planting in Yosemite
streams since pioneer days.

1934 History of fishing in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notec, 13:
57-60 (Aug.) , illus.

Bryant, Earold C.

1925 A half million trout planted in Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 4:86 (Sept.).

1927 Fishing in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:57 (Aug.).

1927 Yosemite fs new hatchery. Yosemite nat. notes, 3:49-51
(July), illus.

1929 Fish and fishing in Yosemite National Park. Yosemite
ranger- nat. man., 2d ed., 2:142-49. Yosemite NatO. Park
(Mimeographed) .

1930 Early trout plantings in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
9:16 (Feb.).

Evemann, Barton W.

1921 Fishes of Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook of Yosemite

National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 183-201. New York,

Putnam.

Grover, Con L.

1916 Soaring across Tioga Pass. A motor flight after trout

through Yosemite uplands. Sunset, 37:74, 76, 78, 80-82

(July) , illus.

60

FISH AND FISHING

Hays , Robert P.

1928 Educational possibilities of the Yo Semite fish hatchery.
Yosemite nat. notes, 7:70 (Aug.)*

Jensen, C.C.

1952 Largest trout caught in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
11:5 (Sept.).

Moore, J.H.

1823 Trout ing over the old Hockett Trail. Outing, 33:[33]-40

(Oct.) , illus.

Kem I£Lver, Whitney Creek, and other streams between Yo
semite and Mount Whitney.

Perry, Harold E.

1935 Fish planting in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:86-

90 (Nov.) , illus.

Various phases of culture from spawning to planting fry.

Presnall, Clifford C.

1932 Montana grayling prove successful in Yosemite. Yosemite
nat. notes, 11:4 (Sept.).

1933 Yosemite trout hatchery becomes self-supporting. Yo
semite nat. notes, 12:71-72 (July).

Russell, Carl P.

1927 European trout in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:5

(Jan.) , illus.

German brown and Loch Leven varieties.

Street, W.J.

1900 Fishing in Yosemite National Park. Sunset, 4:231-35 (Ap.),
illus.

Taylor, Frank J.

1937 Get ' em there alive. Collier's, 99:78-81 (May 22), illus.
Fish planting in Yosemite and Yellowstone national parks.

Vn'ilson, L.K.

1926 Yosemite fishing. Yosemite nat. notes, 5:52-53 (July),

illus.

Outlines opportunities for good fishing.

61

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK
V

INSECTS AND OTHER INVERTEBRATES

1914 Hetch-IIetchy timber affected [by bark-boring insects].
AID., forestry, 20:150-51 (Feb.).

Aldous, Shaler E.

1929 A few facts about insects in Yosemite. Yosemite ranger-

nat, m,?,n., 2d ed.f 2:154-61, bibliog. Yosemite Natl. Park

( Mine o gr aphe d ) „

19£9 Invertebrates of Yosemite. Yosemite ranger-nat. man.,
2d ed. , 2:150-55, bibliog. Yosemite Natl. Park (Mimeo*-
graphed) •

Aldrich, J.

1928 The flies of the western mountains. SLiitiioi. Instn. ,

Explorations and fieldwork, 1927-29, pp. 67-72, illus.

(Rib, 2957).

Includes Tioga Pass region, Lake Tahoe, and Yellowstone.
Several thousand specimens were collected for the National Museum,
but very little specific information is given in this article.

3ehr, H.K.

1890 "Xosemite lepidoptera. Zoe , 1:177-79.

Moths and butterflies collected in Yosemite indicate a
remarkable similarity to those of the Coast range above Monterey.
(One of the earliest scientific papers on lepidoptera of Yosemite.)

Chamberlin, W.J.

1927 The army of silent tree-killers. Insect legions that take

yearly tribute of our forest wealth. Am. forests and

forest life, 33:75-77 (Feb.); 141-44 (Nov.); 219-22, 254

(Ap, ) , illus.

Yosemite fs "ghost" forests are among the devasted areas
mentioned.

Corns tock, Jonn A.

1921- Studies in Pacific coast lepidoptera. So. Calif. Acad.
1934 Sci., Bui., 20:46-47 (Aug. 1921) [the Yosemite region];
24:3-4 ( Jan. -Ap. 1925) [Tioga Pass, Blythe, Round Valley
in I?ayo Co.]; 32:113-20 (Sept .-Dec. 1933) ("Mono and Vir
ginia lakes, Mono Co.]; 33:34-38 (Jan.-Ap., 1934) [Yo
semite region?].

Only the portions of this 20-part series relevant to Yo
semite are here cited. Author is a distinguished lepidopterist .

62

INSECTS AND OTHER INVERTEBRATES

[DeLeon, Donald]

1935 Forest insects of the California national parks. Pt.l:
Insects affecting sugar and ponderosa pine* Natl. Park
Serv. (Field Div. of Forestry), [9l] pp., illus.
Semitechnical manual for rangers and foremen. Contains a

key to identification of insects; information on habits, stages of
life development, and artificial and biological control; data on
time and place of collection of specimens.

Ernst, Emil F.

1934 Insect control in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:49-
52 (July) , illus.

1936 The cause of ghost forests in Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 15:25-27 (Ap. ) , illus.

Epidemics of the lodgepole pine needle-miner and the
mountain pine beetle.

Garth, John S.

1934 Butterflies of the Boundary Hill Research Reserve, Yo
semite.... So. Calif. Acad. Sci., Bui., 33, pt. 3:131-
36 (Sept. -Dec. ).

1935 Butterflies of Yosemite National Park. So. Calif. Acad.
Sci., Bui., 34:37-75 (Jan.-Ap.), map.

Hewes, Laurence I.

1933 Butterflies— try and get them! Sierra Club, Bill., 18:

[47] -55 (Feb.).

Among 670 varieties of butterflies in America, tne rare
indra is found in Yosemite and Mt. Rainier national partfs. Arthe-
mis is found in Glacier, and Grt:.nd Canyon yields many varieties.

Jepson, Willis L.

1915 (.Sierra beetles. National park wild flowers.] Natl.

Parks Conf., Proc., 1915, pp. 126-28.

Title supplied from substance of speaker's remarks.

Miller, J.M.

1924 "Bug-killed" forests. Yosemite nat. notes, 3:2-3 (July 26).

Destruction of Yosemite forests by bark beetles, needle-
borers, and pine beetles.

Van Dyke, Edwin C.

1892 Notes on some of the butterflies of the Yosemite Valley

and adjacent region. Zoe, 3:237-41.

Forty-odd species of butterflies listed and distribution
indicated.

1921 Insects of Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook of Yo
semite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 203-18, il
lus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.

63

NATIONAL PARK
VI

MAMMALS

1924 Rare [mastiff] bat taken in Yo Semite. Yo Semite nat. notes,
3:2 (Nov. 30) .
Reprinted: Nature mag ., 5:189 (Mar. 19 25 ).

1924 Yosemite's vanished mountain sheep. Yosemite nat. notes,

3:3-4 (Aug.).

Sheepmen, sportsmen, and miners exterminated mountain sheep
in Yosemite. John Muir recorded the last of these animals in 1874.

Bailey, Vernon

1932 Animal friends of the high Sierra. Sierra Club, Bui., 17:

[12] -24 (Feb.), illus.

Field notes made on a trip along the eastern rim of Yo
semite National Park, in the Sierra and Mono national forests, over
Parker Pass, and through Tuolumne Meadows.

1932 Can we bring back the Sierra bighorn? Yosemite nat. notes,

11:1-3 (June).

The chief field naturalist of the U. S. Biological Survey
suggests a plan, for the restoration of mountain sheep to their
original range in the Sierras.

Beatty, M.E.

1932 California gray squirrels. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:5-6
(Nov. ) .

These squirrels are slowly regaining numbers since near-
extermination by scabies in 1921.

1933 Mountain sheep found in Lyell Glacier. Yosemite nat.
notes, 12:110-12 (Dec.), illus.

Specimen of an extinct Yosemite species.

1934 Mountain sheep found mummified in Yosemite glacier. Calif,
fish and game, 20:92-93 (Jan.), illus.

'The most important discovery of the year" in the whole
park system.

Borell, Adrey E.

1933 Rare fur-bearing mammals in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
12:62-63 (June).

1933 Yosemite elk herd moved to Owens Valley. Yosemite nat.
notes, 12:107-09 (Dec.).

1934 Several species of deer found in Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 13:53 (July), illus.

64

MAMMALS

Rocky mountain mule deer, California mule "deer, and Co
lumbian black-tailed deer.

Borell, Adrey E. , continued

1935 New bats found in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:58-

59 (July).

Species discovered since 1924: long-eared, spotted, -mas
tiff , Pacific pallid, and myotis yumaensis sociabilis.

1935 A new rodent for Yosemite Valley: [bushy-tailed wood r,at],
Yosemite nat. notes, 14:20 (Feb.), illus.

Bryant, Harold C.

1929 Marmots are disappearing. Yosemite nat. notes, 8:95-96
(Oct.) .

Camp, Charles L.

1918 Excavations of burrows of the rodent Aplodontia, with ob
servations on the habits of the animal. Univ. Calif,,
Pubs, in zool., 17:517-36, illus.
Describes habitat of the mountain beaver in Yosemite.

Dixon, Joseph S.

1934 A study of the life history and food habits of mule deer

in California. Calif, fish and game, 20:[l8l]-282 (July);

20:315-54 (Oct.), illus.

A scientific study of mule deer in Yosemite, Sequoia, and
Lassen national parks, and other places.

Godfrey, William C.

1928 The Yosemite cony. Yosemite nat. notes, 7:102-04 (Dec.),
illus.

Goldman, Ralph

1937 New rodent recorded in Yosemite: [long-tailed harvest
mouse], Yosemite nat. notes, 16:19 (Mar.).

Grinnell, Hilda W.

1916 A new bat of the genus Myotis from the high Sierra Nevada

of California. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in zool., 17:9-10.

Eight bat species were collected by a party working across
the Sierra Nevada through Yosemite.

Grinnell, Joseph

1912 The bighorn of the Sierra Nevada. Univ. Calif*, Pubs.

in zool., 10:143-53, illus., bibliog.

Description and measurements of bones of reputedly extinct
Yosaraite specie.

65

NATIONAL PARK

Grinnell, Joseph, and Storer, Tracy I.

1916 Diagnoses of seven new mammals from east-central California.
Univ. Calif., Pubs, in zool., 17:1-8 (Aug.), bibliog.
(Contrib. from Mus. Vert. Zool.).

The San Joaquin mole; Sierra pine marten; Mono, Kern Basin,
and Mariposa chipmunks; Yo Semite cony, and Mariposa brush rabbit.

1917 The Yosemite cony — a chapter in the natural history of the
Yo Semite National Park. Sierra Club, Bui., 10:[l59]-64
(Jan.), illus.

1921 Some mammals of Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook of
Yosemite National Park (Ansel ?. Hall, ed.), pp. 153-73,
illus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.

1924 Animal life in the Yosemite: An account of the mammals,
birds, reptiles, and amphibians in a cross-section of the
Sierra Nevada. Berkeley, Univ. Calif. Pr^ss, 742 pp.,
illus., maps, bibliog. (Contrib. from Mus. of Vert. Zool.).
Reviewed by David Starr Jordan in Science, n.s., 60:318

(Oct. 3,1924) : "...All that is known of the 331 species... in the
Yosemite. "

Grinnell, Joseph

1925 The burrowing rodents of California as agents in soil for
mation. Smithsn. Instn., Ann. rept. (1923), pp. 339-50.
Includes Yosemite region.

1927 Geography and evolution in the pocket gophers of California.

Smithsn. Instn., Ann. rept. (1926), pp. 343-55, illus., map.

Contains notes on varieties of pocket gophers found in the
Yosemite region; cross section diagram of Sierra Nevada in this
region shows zone distribution.

1928 Recommendations concerning the treatment of large mammals
in Yosemite National Park. Jour, mam., 9:7S.

1931 Two races of black bear in California. Univ. Calif.,
Pubs, in zool., 32:395-408, illus.
Black bears of Yosemite are included.

Harwell, C.A.

1937 Our changing bears. Yosemite nat. notes, 16:28-30 (Ap. ) ,

illus.

The effect of feeding on behavior; photographing a bear
in its den.

1931 Our Yosemite bears. Yosemite nat. notes, 10:25-27 (Mar.),
illus.
Typical year's activity in life of a black bear.

66

MAMMALS

Hays, Robert P.

1929 Why not bring back the bighorn? Yo Semite nat. notes, 6; 9

( Jan . ) .

Urges the proper protection of the Sierra Nevada bighorn
in Yo Semite.

Hosbrook, Larry F.

1932 A cony on Half Dome. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:6 (Sept.),

illus.

Ho we 11, A. Brazier

1921 The black bear as a destroyer of game. Jour, mam,, 2:36
(Fob.).

1924 Mammals of Mamiiioth, Mono Co., Calif. Jour, mam., 5:25-36
(Feb.).

King, Sam

1933 An altitude record [for California wildcats] . Yosemite
nat. notes, 12:13 (Feb.).

Loofbourow, Elizabeth

1931 Shrewd for shrews. Yosemite nat. notes, 10:98 (Dec.).
First navigator shrew ever seen in Yosemite Valley.

McAllister, M.H.

1923 California's large game animals. Calif, fish and game,

9:11-15 (Jan.), illus.

Contains statistics on "tule" elk in Yosemite.

McGaffey, Ernest

1934 Future of elk in the United States. Pac. sportsman, 14:
5, 27 (Jan.).

The transfer of "tule" elk from Yosemite National Park to
other parks and locations.

McLean, Donald D.

1926 Porcupines on Yosemite fs floor. Yosemite nat. notes, 5:
22 (Mar.) , illus.

Michael, Enid

1926 The Yosemite bear at home. Mentor, 14:52-53 (Aug.), illus.

Michaelis, Richard

1933 Mountain sheep in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 12:13

(Feb.).

Three mountain sheep, possibly remnants of the almost
extinct species of bighorn, were seen through binoculars.

67

YOSEMITS NATIONAL PARK

Moffitt, James

1934 History of the Yosemite elk herd. Calif, fish and game,
20:37-51 (Jan.), illus.

Muir, John

1874 The wild sheep of California. Overland mo., 12:358-63 (A.p.)

1898 Among the animals of the Yosemite. Atlantic mo., 82:617-

31 (Nov.).

Reprinted in: Muir's Our national parks, pp. [ 172] -212.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1901.

1917 The Douglas squirrel. In: The mountains of California,
pp. 226-42, illus. New York, Century.

1917 The wild sheep. In: The mountains of California, pp. 300-
24, illus. New York, Century.

Presnall, Clifford C.

1931 The fluctuating population of Yosemite animals. Yosemite
nat. notes, 10:97-98 (Dec.).

Russell, Carl P.

1925 Deer migrations. Yosemite nat. notes, 4:21-23 (Mar.),
illus. , map.

1926 High Sierra wildlife conditions in winter. Yosemite nat.
notes, 5:18-21 (Mar.), illus.

Bird and animal life encountered on a February trip to
Tuolumne Meadows and Tenaya Lake.

1926 Pine marten near valley floor. Yosemite nat. notes, 5:
94 (Dec.).

1927 White-tailed jack rabbit taken. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:
34, 39 (May) , illus.

The first of this species to be brought to the Yosemite
Museum.

1928 A new mammal [otter], for Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
7:78 (Sept.) .

1929 Yosemite mammals. Yosemite range r-nat . man., 2d ed. , 2:
99-17, bibliog, Yosemite Natl. Park (Mimeographed).

1932 Seasonal migration of mule deer. Ecological Soc. Am.,
Ecolog. monogs., 2:1-46 (Jan.), illus.

Factors influencing migration of the deer in Yosemite and
Yellowstone national parks.

68

MAMMALS

Storer, Tracy I., joint author. See: Grinnell, Joseph. 1916,
191?, 1921, 1924

Stupka, Arthur

1932 Little haymakers of the Sierras [conies], Yosemite nat .
notes, 11:1-2 (May).

Swarth, Harry 3.

1919 Somo Sierran chipmunks. Sierra Club, Bui., 10:[4Gl]-13

(Jan. ) , illus.

Habits and habitat in Sequoia, General Grant, and Yosemite
national parks.

Wright , George M.

1928 Baby elk arrive. Yosemite nat. notes, 7:50 (July).

The herd was established in Yosemite, to save the "tule"
elk from almost certain extinction.

1935 Big game of our national parks. Sci. mo., 41:141-47
(AUG.) , illus.
Yosemite as one of the more important big game refuges.

White, Paul J.

1930 Sierra marmot again increasing in numbers. Yosemite nat.
notes, 9:85 (Sept.).

69

FLORA

I ECOLOGICAL CONDITIONS
II FLOWERS AND PLANTS
III TREES AND SHRUBS

ECOLOGICAL CONDITIONS

1924 What becomes of our mountain meadows? Yosemite nat: notes,
3:4-5 (Ap.30).

1927 [A v/ildlife reservation in Yosemite National Park.] Sci.,

n.s. , 65:13 (Jan. 7).

A seven-square-mile area" in the high Sierra region known
as the Hudson-Arctic-Alpine life zone.

Bradley, Harold C.

1911 The passing of our mountain meadows. Sierra Club, 3ul.,

8: 39-42 (Jan.) , illus.

Methods of preserving meadow lands, valuable as agents of
conservation, with particular reference to Yosemite meadows.

1914 Our mountain meadows. Am. forestry, 80:406-13 (June),

illus.

Among othors, the meadows of Yosemite are endangered by
encroaching pines, which, through transpiration, dissipate large
quantities of moisture.

Carlson, Reynold E.

1934 Plant life on Rocky Point. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:11

(Feb.).

Notes on species reestablished on two acres 11 years after
a rock slide.

Graves, C. Edward

1930 Pentstemon, hawkweed, stonecrop, gilia thrive on high

perch [.Half Dome]. Yosemite nat. notes, 9:83 (Sept.).

Muir, John

1879 The glacier meadows of the Sierra. Scribner's mo., 17:
478-83 (Feb.) , illus.

1917 The glacier meadows. In: The mountains of California,

pp. 125-38. New York, Century.

Substantially the same as the item by similar title pub
lished in 1879.

1900 The wild gardens of the Yosemite Park. Atlantic mo., 86:

167-79 (Aug.).

Describes varied flora of Yosemite. Later incorporated
in Muir's Our national parks, pp.[l37]-71, illus. (Houghton
Mifflin, 1901.)

73

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Nesbit, Paul W.

1936 Distribution of wildlife over our western mountains. Yo-
semite nat . notes, 15:73-76 (Oct.).

Compares fauna and flora of Yo Semite and Rocky Mountain
national parks; notes similarity of life zones and many plant and
animal species.

Pre snail, Clifford C.

1932 Skyland. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:7-8 (Oct.).

Plant and animal species living in the unfavorable en
vironment on the summit of Half Dome, which is surrounded by a
sheer abyss nearly a mile deep.

Russell, Carl P.

1927 What becomes of our mountain meadows? Yosemite nat. notes,
6:37 (May) , illus.

Sharsmith, Carl W.

1933 Seasonal progression on Mount Dana. Yo Semite nat. notes,
12:99-100 (Nov.).

Description of flowers and plants observed in early July;
difference in seasonal advancement above and below timberline.

Sharsmith, Carl W. , and Sharsmith, Helen K.

1935 Plant life and glaciers. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:21-24

(Mar.) , illus.

"...That part of the history of plant development in Yo
semite which [corresponds to] the glacial and post-glacial history."

Smith, James S.

1929 Pohono Trail acquaintances. Yosemite nat. notes, 8;7- 9 (Jan.).

Notes on the gradual change in life zones along the trail;
and on the trees, flowers, birds, and small mammals of each zone.

Thomson, Charles G-.

1937 Ecology of the Uawona Road. Yosemite nat. notes, 16:38-
39 (May).

Wright, George M.

1929 Life zones in Yosemite. Yosemite ranger-nat. man., 2d ed. ,
2:86-98, biblio^. Yosemite Natl. Park (Mimeographed).

74

II

FLOT/f-EHS & PLANTS

1938 One hundred and one wildf lowers of Yosemite. Yosemite

nat. notes, 17:[75]-112 (June), illus.

A special number giving non-technical description of
species, with a drawing of each by Mrs. Mary V. Hood.

Anderson, Herbert A.

1932 Orchids of Mariposa Grove. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:6-7
. (Nov.).
Seven species of orchids, and other flowers of the grove.

Beal, Robert P.

1934 A new plant [Berberis], for Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,
13:69 (Sept.).

Brandegee , Katherine

1891 The flora of Yosemite. Zoe, 2:[l55]-67 (July).

Brubaker, Florence

1926 Plants used by Yosemite Indians. Yosemite nat. notes, 5:
73-79 (Oct.), illus., bibliog.

Burr, Agnes R.

1916 Tho wild flowers of the Yosemite Valley. Craftsman, 29:

594-601 (Mar.) , illus.

Non-technical descriptions.

Congdon, J.W.

1891- Mariposa County as a botanical district. Zoe, 2:234-36

1692 (Oct.); 3:25-43 (Ap.1892) ; 3:125-31 (July); 3:314-25 (Oct.).

Evans, Sumner L.

1929 Moist rock garden at Yosemite Museum. Yosemite nat. notes,

8:112-13 (Nov.).

Describes construction of an experimental garden for ecolo
gical study.

Foster, S.L.

1910 Down Tenaya Canon. Sierra Club, Bui., 7:153-69 (Jan.),

illus.

Descriptions of Yosemite 's mountain gardens.

Gilbert, James C.

1927 Sanctuary! Sanctuary! Outlook, 146:110-11 (May 25), illus.
Area of seven square miles set aside in Yosemite National

Park as a natural sanctuary for flora and fauna.

75

YOSELttTE NATIONAL PARK

G-raves, C. Edward

1950 Dry or "moraine" rock garden at Yoseinite museum. Yosemite
nat. notes, 9:89-91 (Oct.).

Hall, Harvey M. , and Hall, Carlotta C.

1912 A Yosemite flora. A descriptive account of the ferns and
flowering plants, including the trees, of the Yosemite Na
tional Park; with sample keys for their identification:
designed to be useful throughout the Sierra Nevada Moun
tains. San Francisco, Paul Elder, 282 pp., illus.

Hasse, E.E.

1903 Additions to the lichen-flora of southern California.

So. Calif. Acad. Sci., Bui., 2:52-54 (Ap.); 58-60 (May);

71-73 (June).

A list of new species, some discovered in the Yosemite
region, with notes on habitats.

Hibbard, Mabel E.

1925 The flora of the Ledge Trail. Yosemite nat. notes, 4:92
(Sept.).

Jepson, Willis L.

1909- A flora of California. San Francisco, Cunningham, Curtis

1922 and Welch, and E.S. Crocker; Berkeley [U.C.] Associated

Students' Store, 578 pp., illus.

Technical description by families and species. Distribu
tion specified. Line drawings and photographs. Published in seven
parts: nos. 1, 2, and 4 by Cunningham, Curtis and Welch; nos. 3 and
7 by the Associated Students' Store, University of California; nos.
5 and 6 by H. S. Crocker.

1912 The steer's head flower of the Sierra Nevada. Sierra

Club, Bui., 8:266-69 (June), illus.

In the Sierra Nevada, Dicentra uniflora, a close relative
of the bleeding heart, is known only in a few high locations from
Yosemite to Lake Tahoe and Las sen Peak.

1915 [...National park wild flowers.] Natl. Parks Conf., Proc.,
1915, pp. 126-28. Wasnington, Govt. print, off.
Title supplied from substance of speaker's remarks.

1921 Flowers of Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook of Yo
semite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 247-67,
illus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.

Meehan, Thomas

1884 Sarcodes sanguinea. Bot . gaz. , 9:28 (Feb.).

Observations on the snow plant, me.de at Glacier Point, Yo
semite Valley.

76

FLOWERS AND PLA13TS

Michael, Cllarles W.

1935 The Hudsonian zone moves dovm. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:

64-65 (Aug.).

Near Eagle Peak Trail, on Ribbon Greek Meadow, an island
of Hudsonian flora exists, separated from ether Hudsonian territory
by a distance of many miles and a thousand feet of altitude.

1935 A new species of Allium discovered in Yosemite. Yosemite
nat. notes, 14:97-98 (Dec.).

Michael, Enid

1923 Lessingia and buckwheat. Yosemite nat. notes, 2:2 (Nov.).

1925 Flowers on the Eagle Peak Trail. Yosemite nat. notes,
4:65 (Aug.) .

1925 With a nature guide to Sentinel Lome. Yosemite nat. notes,

8:53 (July).

Description of flowers noted in an ascent of Sentinel Dome
via Glacier Point and descent via Four-wile Trail.

1927 Botanic report for Yosemite. Yosemite net. notes, 6:56
(July).

1929 Brief survey of the plants of Yosemite. Yosemite ranger-
nat. man., 2d ed. , 2:162-71, bibliog. Natl. Park Serv.
(Mimeographed) .

1932 Nature garden a new feature of Yosemite Museum. Yosemite
nat. notes, 12:4-5 (Oct.).

Description of wild flower garden, constructed with funds
given by Marjorie Montgomery Ward.

1933 Roadside planting of the nev/ Wawona Highway. Yosemite
riat. notes, 12:113-14 (Dec.).

1935 A good flower year. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:96-97 (Dec.).

1935 Lewisia kelloggii. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:80 (Oct.).
This flower, found at summit of El Capitan in 1909, was
nearly extinct in 1935.

1935 A new flowering plant [G-alium boreale] , in Yosemite. Yo
semite nat. notes, 14:65 (Aug.).

— — — —._ *

1937 The Lewisias of Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 16:94-95
(Dec.) .

1937 The white heart. Yosemite nat. notes, 16:63-64 (Aug.).

77

YOSEMITE NATIONAL. PARK

Observations on Di contra pauciflora, a plant of the Yo-
semite cliff gardens.

Miller, Fern E.

1927 Medicinal properties of some Yoseinite plants. Yosemite

nat. notes, 6:79 (Oct.).

Over 120 plants growing in Yosemite have medicinal properties.

[Muir, John]

1900 The wild gardens of the Yosemite Park. Atlantic mo., 86:

167-79 (Aug.).

Reprinted in: Our national parks, pp. [137] -71, illus.
New York and Boston, Koughton Mifflin, 1901.

Ramsey, C.T.

1930 A naturalist in the Yoseinite. Country life, 58:62-64

(May) , illus.

Description of the flora of Yosemite, with particular
reference to the Lake Eleanor region.

Ruhle, George C.

1929 Some plant interrelations that may be introduced in Yo
semite field trips. Yosemite range r-nat. man., 2d ed.,
2:172-83. Yoseinite Natl. Park (Mimeographed).

Russell, Carl P.

1924 Tho flora of Yoseinite and Cape Cod. Yosemite nat. notes,

3:3-4 (Aug. 16), 3:3-4 (Aug. 23) (sic).

Comparative notes on flora of these localities, and brief
observations on geological features.

1927 Indians grazed on herbage. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:42

(June) , bibliog.

A list of the green plants eaten; bibliographical refer
ences.

1927 A plant of many uses. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:35 (May),
. illus.

Description of the soap plant, soap root, or "pa-la-we , "
of Yosemite region.

Schreiber, Beryl

1936 Horsetails in Yosemite Valloy. Yosemite nat. notes, 15:
89-90 (Dec.).

Sharsmith, Carl W.

1935 Red snow at Tioga Pass. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:63 (Aug.).

Sharsmith, Helen K.

1934 The Sierra primrose. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:68-69 (Sept.).

J 78

FLOWERS AND PLANTS

Shinn, Charles H.

1896 The wild gardens of the Sierra. Garden and forest, 9:343

(Aug. 26).

Names of over 150 plants and flowers of the high lake meadows,

Shirley, James C.

1932 Snow plant flower display at Mariposa Grove. Yo Semite nat.
notes, 11:3 (June).

Smiley, Frank J.

1921 A report upon the boreal flora Of the Sierra Nevada of Cali
fornia. Univ. Calif., 424 pp., illus., ind. (Pubs, in
Bobany , vol.9) .

Stork, Harvey E,

1929 Wildflower gardens. Yosemite ranger-nat. man., 2d ed. ,
1:125-26. Yosemite Nat 1. Park (Mimeographed).

Torrey, Bradford

1910 On foot in the Yosemite. Atlantic mo., 106:228-37 (Aug.).
Description of scenic beauties, with notes on the flora.

1913 On foot in the Yosemite. In: field days in California,

pp. 170-203. Boston, Houghton Mifflin.

Chapter on Yosemite Valley contains numerous observations
on plants and trees; also, description of scenery.

Woodham, 3.M.

1927 The grass carpet on Yosemite 's floor. Yosemite nat.
notes, 6:76-77 (Oct.), bibliog.

79

YOSEMIT£ NATIONAL PARK
III

TREES AND SHRUBS

1860 The maraifisth trees of Mariposa and Fresno. Eutchings*

Calif, mag., 4:481-86 (May), illus.

Account of discovery of Mariposa Grove and description of
it in 1855.

1924 Saving the redwoods, n.p., Save-the-Redwoods League, 37

pp. , illus. , maps.

Report for 1924, including location of redwood groves in
California.

1932 Save the Yosemite sugar pines. New York, Emergency Con-

servn. Com., 16 pp., illus., map.

Pamphlet advocating passage of Senate Bill 4472, providing
for restoration to Yoseraite National Park of Tuolumne Grove-Carl
Inn sugar pinos.

Albright, Horace M.

1930 Yosemite trees saved. Nat. mag., 15:367, 408 (June).
Sugar pine and yellow pine forests of Yosemite are now
protected f rom exploitation.

Anderson, Herbert A.

1932 Mariposa Grove reproduction. Yosemite nat . notes, 11:8
(Nov.).

Ashcraf t , Granville

1935 The "Stable" tree falls. Yosemite nat. notes, 14:31-32

Up.),

1936 Additional notes on the "Stable" tree. Yosemite nat.
notes, 15:55-56 (July).

BadS, William F.

1905 Forests of the Tuolumne. Sunset, 14:597-603 (Ap.), illus.
Relation to water supply and flood control; trees, animals,
and topography of the region.

Bell, J. Franklin

1897 Some of California's Big trees and their guardians. Har
per's wkly. , 41:495 (May 15) , illus.
Refers to the sequoias of Yosemite, Sequoia, and General

Grant national parks, and to a troop of United States cavalry.

Berry, Edward W.

1920 The ancestors of the Sequoias. Nat. hist., 7:377-86 (Mar.-
Ap. ) , illus. , map.

80

TRESS AND SHRUBS

Borell, Adrey E.

1931 The acorn crop: a vital necessity to animal life of Yo
semite. Yosemite nat. notes, 10:95-96 (Nov.).

1931 Is the giant Sequoia a dying race? Yosemite nat. notes,
10:103 (Dec.) .

Braceliri, Mrs. H.P.

1933 Willow hunting in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 12:69-

71 (July).

The rare nivalus variety of v/illow is found near Dana
Glacier in Yosemite.

Brant , Irving

1936 California sugar pines. Axe and saw soon to raze trees

bordering Yosemite Park, Nat. mag., £7:363-64; 380-81

(June) , illus.

An appeal to save the Carl Inn-Tuolumne Grove.

[Bromley, Isaac N.]

1872 The Big trees and the YOG emit e. Scribner's mo., 3:261-77

(Jan. ) , illus.

General description of the sequoias and the scenery of Yo
semite Valley.

Clark, Galen

1907 The Big trees of California; their history and characteris
tics. Yosemite Valley, Calif., the author, 104 pp., illus,

Cole, James E.

1936 The famous tree on El Capitan. Yosemite nat. notes, 15:
41-43 (June) , illus.

Detwiler, Samuel B.

1916 The redwoods; identification and charact eristics. Am.

forestry, 22:323-28 (June), illus.

Contains list of Big tree groves with descriptive data.

Dickens, Charles

1883 The lords of the forest. All the year round, 32:341-47

(Sept.). .

Description of the Sequoia gigantea groves of California,
with reference to those of the Yosemite and Sequoia regions.

Dollar, George

1897 Timber titans. Strand mag. , 14j(8S]-90 (July), illus.
Descriptions of Mariposa and Calaveras Big tree groves;
notes on the individual trees; logging methods of the 50 fs.

81

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Dudley, Ernest G.

1917 The Big trees as the forester sees them. Calif, forestry,

1:26-27 (Aug.) (Pub. by students of the Forestry Club, Univ.

Calif.)

Reference to the sequoias of Yosemite, Sequoia, and General
Grant national parks.

Dudley, ¥.R. , joint author. See: U.S. Department of Agriculture,
1900.

Ellsworth, Rodney S.

n.d. The giant Sequoia. A photographic exposition of the Sequoia

gigantea of the Sierra Nevada, with special reference to

the Mariposa Grove. .. .Photographs by Arthur C. Pillsbury.

Yosemite National Park, Pillsburyf3 Pictures, Inc., 10 pp.,

illus.

1924 The giant Sequoia; an account of the history and charac
teristics of the Big trees of California. Oakland, Calif.,
Berger, 167 pp., illus., bibliog.

Ernst, Emil F.

1936 Another park occurrence of single-leaf pine. Yosemite

nat. notes, 15:15-16 (Feb.).

Reporting three conifers new to the park: single-leaf and
knobcone pines, and dwarf juniper.

1936 The cause of ghost forests in Yosemite. Yosemite nat.

notes, 15:25-27 (Ap.), illus.

Epidemics of the lodgepole pine needle-miner and the moun
tain pine beetle.

Farquhar, Francis P.

1927 Vagaries of the Big trees. Am., forests and forest life,

33~: 259-63; 296-97, illus.

Historical and statistical material on the Mariposa and
other groves, illustrated with reproductions of rare lithographs
from Vischer's "Views of the Mammoth Grove."

[Fisher, Richard T.]

1900 The Bigtrees of California. The forester, 6:79-^2 (Ap.).
Remarks on both Sequoia sempervirens and Sequoia gigantea,
and the attempt to set aside the Calaveras , Mariposa, General
Grant, and Sequoia groves as special areas.

1902 The Big trees of California. World's work, 3:[l714]-2?,

illus.

Historical, botanical, and descriptive notes on the ser-
qucias of the Yosemite, Sequoia, and General Grant national parks.
Several excellent full-page photographs of sequoias.

82

TRESS AND SHRUBS

Flint , Howard R.

1926 Wasted wilderness. Jan.. forests and forest life, 32:407-

10 (July).

insects may destroy forests where lumbering is prohibited.

Flint ham, S.J.

1905 Transplanting of Big tree seedlings. Forestry and -ir
rigation, 11:428-30 (Sept.).

Frothingham, "Robert

1932 Yo semite and the Big trees. In: Trails through the golden
west, pp. 174-90, illus. New York, McBride.

Fry, Walter, and White, John R.

[c!93C] Big trees... Palo Alto, Calif., Stanford Univ. press.;

London, Oxford Univ. press, 114 pp., illus. (map), port.,

bibliog.

General information about the groves in Yosemite, Sequoia,
and General Grant national parks, and elsewhere.

Godfrey, Willi&m C.

1928 Big trees of Mariposa Grove have healthy young reproduc
tion. Yosemite nat. notes, 7:52-53 (July), illus.

1928 The oldest Big tree ["Grizzly Giant"] in the Mariposa Grove,
Yosemite nat. notes, 7:61-64 (Aug.), illus.

1929 Among the Big trees in the Mariposa Grove. Yosemite nat.
notes, 8:37-44 (Ap.), illus.

Godfrey, Willian C. , joint author. See: Harwell, C.A., 1931

Gordon- Gumming, Constance F.

1911 The Big trees of California. In: Vvonoers of nature as

seen and described by famous writers, pp. 239-47. New

York, Collier.

Grant, Madison

1919 The Big tree of the Sierras. In: Saving the redwoods

(special no.) [N.Y.] Zool. Soc. bul., 22:92-94 (May),

illus.

General description with notes on distribution.

Gray, AS a

1872 [address to the Association.] Am. Assn. Adv. Sci., Proc.,

21:1-31 (Aug.) .

Contains observations upon the characteristics, distribu
tion and genealogy of the Sequoia gigcntea, with mention of the
Mariposa and Calaveras groves.

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Hall, Ansel F.

1921 Trees of Yo Semite National Park. In: Handbook of Yo Semite

National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed. ) , pp. £19-34, illus. ,

bibliog. New York, Putnam.

Harwell, C.A., and Godfrey, William C.

1931 Mariposa Grove of Big trees. Yo Semite nat . notes, 10:

49-56 (June), illus.

This is tne "Mariposa Grove number" of the magazine, and
contains general information, with complete histories of several
tunneled trees.

[Harwell, C.A.]

1935 The fall of a giant sequoia [the "Stable" tree], Sci.mo.,
40:482-84 (May), illus.

1937 Single-lesf pine in Yo Semite. Yo Semite nat. notes, 16:
1-3 (Jan. ) , illus.

[Hill, Carey L.]

1916 Forests of Yosemite, Sequoia, and General Grant national

parks. Washington, Govt. print, off., 39 pp., illus.

Descriptions, with comments on ecological conditions; 2£
illustrations.

Hoss, Delia T., illus. See: Tresidder, Mary Curry: The Trees of
Yosemite.

Huntington, Ellsworth

1913 The secret of the Big trees: Yosemite, Sequoia, and General
Grant national parks. Washington Govt. print, off., 24
pp. , illus.

Hatchings, Emily A.

1903 A plea for the Big trees of Calaveras. Pac . rural press,
65:164 (Mar. 14).

Hutchings, James M.

1888 The Big trees. In: In the heart of the Sierras, pp. 216-
32; 241-47. Oakland, Pacific press.

[James, George Wharton]

1914 Wawona and the Mariposa Grove of Big trees. Out west,
7:155-57 (Mar.) , illus.

Jepson, Willis L.

[c!909] Trees of California. San Francisco, Cunningham, Curtis

and Welch, 228 pp., illus.

Distributed through the Associated Students' store, Uni
versity of California.

84

TREES AND SHRUBS

1910 The silva of California. Univ. Calif, press, 480 pp.,

illus., maps, bibliog.

Distribution of trees in California; forest provinces;
dendro logical characteristics; descriptions of families and species.
Drawings and a section of photographic plates, pp. 286-454; Sequoia
gigantea, 139-46.

1921 The giant Sequoia. In: Handbook of Yosemite National
Park (Ansel IP. Hall, ed.), pp. 235-46, illus., bibliog..
New York, Putnam.

.Lermen, J.J.
1928 Solving a grizzly problem. Yosemite nat . notes, 7:9-10

(Feb.).

The "Grizzly Giant" tree was saved by supplying it with
root soil and water.

McLean, Donald D.

1926 The fir trees of Yosemite National Park. Yosemite nat.
notes, 5:81-82 (Nov.).

1926 The oaks of Yosemite National Park. Yosemite nat. notes,
5:86-87 (Nov. ) , illus.

1926 The pine trees of Yosemite National Park. Yosemite nat.
notes, 5:83-85 (Nov.), illus.

[Magee , Thomas]

1892 The preservation of our forests. Overland mo., 2d ser. ,

19:658-61 (June) .

In Yosemite, sheep herders were denied the park for one
year — the first year in 25 without a forest fire.

Marshall, Walter G-.

1881 The giant trees of Calaveras and the Yosemite Valley. In:
Through America, pp. 322-86, illus. London, Sampson Lowe.

Michael, Enid

1924 Mountain dogwood (Cornus nuttallii). Yosemite nat. notes,
3:3 (May 31).

Miller, John M.

1924 "Bug-killed" forests. Yosemite nat. notes, 3:[2-3] (July 26).
The upper watersheds of the Tuolumne River and Tenaya

Creek constitute one of the largest of such areas in California.

1925 Lodgepole pine defoliation disappearing in Yosemite. Yo
semite nat. notes, 4:101-02 (Oct.), illus.

Successful efforts to exterminate the needle-miner.

85

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Muir, John

1877 On the post-glacial history of Sequoia gigantea. Am. Assoc.
Adv. of Sci., Proc., 25:242-53.

1878 The new Sequoia forests of California. Harper's mo., 57:
813-27 (Nov.), illus., map.

Description of the 200-mile belt of sequoias [Big trees]
which extends from Calaveras groves south to Deer Creek.

1881 The coniferous forests of the Sierra Nevada. Scribner's
mo., 22:[710]-23 (Sept.); 921-31 (Oct.), illus.

1894 The Big tree. In: The mountains of California, pp. 179- 200.
New York, Century.

1900 The forests of the Yo Semite Park. Atlantic mo., 85:493

507 (Ap.)«

Indicates life zones of various species. Later incorporated
in Muir's Cur national parks, pp. [98] -136, illus. New York,
Houghton Mifflin, 1901.

1909 The Sequoia. In: American fields and forests, pp. 213-67.

New York, Houghton Mifflin.

Describes the sequoias and compares them with other trees
of the Pacific co^st.

1911 [Shrubs found in and near Yo Semite Valley.] In: My first
summer in the Sierra, pp. 20-23. New York, Houghton Mifflin.

1912 The Big trees. In: The Yosemite, pp. 127-47. New York,
Century.

1917 The forests. In: The mountains of California, pp. 139-225,

illus. New York, Century.

Contains special reference to Yosemite, Sequoia, and Las-
sen Volcanic national parks.

O'Neal, Charles H.

1929 Famous tree dying. Yosemite nat . notes, 8:99-100 (Oct.).
Appeal to save the old Jeffrey pine on Sentinel Dome.

1930 "Monroe's bouquet." Yosemite nat. notes, 9:93 (Oct.).
Fifty-year-old pine growing from a stump near Wawona is

named for a stage driver of early days.

Palache, Charles

1893 The forest trees of the Sierra Nevada. Overland mo., 2d

ser. , 21:[337]-47 (Ap. ) , illus.

Includes trees of Yosemite and Sequoia.

86

THESS ML SCRUBS

PincLot , Gifford. See: U.S. Department of Agriculture, 1900.

Presnall, Clifford C.

1933 Fi^e studies in the Mariposa Grovu. Yoseniite nat. notes,
12:;b3-24 (Mar.).

1933 Translating the autobiography of a Big tree. Yo Semite

nat . notes, 12:5-7 (Jan.).

Explains iL.eth.od used to determine age of trees, date of
their fire scraps, when and why tliey fell. Includes table on fires
in Meriposa Grove.

Russoll, Curl P.

1925 The Yi/awona free Tunnel. Ycseraite nat. notes, 4:83 (Sept.).

Saunciers, Charles if1.

1919 The Sequoia and its adventures in search of a name. In:

With the flowers and trees in California, pp. 153-67, illus.

New York, McBride.

Sharsmith, Carl W.

1935 Knob-cone pine found in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,

14:72-73 (Sept.).

Tho first of this species to be reported in any of our

national paries.

Sherwood, George H.

1915 The Big tree and its story. Am. Llus. Nat. Hist., Guide
leaflet 4£, 23 pp., illus.

Shinn, Charles H.

1889 The great sequoia. Garden and forest, 2:614-15 (Dec. 85).

Shirley, James C.

1937 The redwoods o? coast and Sierra. Berkeley, Univ. Calif.

press [84] pp., illus.

Contains excellent material on Yosemite redwoods by a
ranger-naturalist .

[Shoup, Paul]

1899 The sequoias of California forests. Sunset, 3:183-88

(Oct.) , illus.

Descriptive and statistical materiel on the Mariposa Grove.

Smith, Elinor S.

1929 Yosemite trees, and how to know them. n.p. , the author,

40 pp. , illus.

Index and descriptions for general use by visitors.

67

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Starke, Julius

1889 California woods. San .Francisco, Murdock, 14 pp.

Contains information on the Mariposa G-rove and Yosemite
Valley.

S t ewart , Ge o rge W .

1930 Big trees of the Giant Forest, Sequoia National Park, in

the Sierra Nevada of California; their life story from the

blossom onward. San Francisco, A.M. Robertson, 103 pp.,

illus.

Information and descriptions applicable also to Big trees
of Yo Semite National Park.

Sudworth, George B.

1908 Forest trees of the Pacific slope. U.S. Dept . Agric.,

441 pp., illus., maps. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Contains descriptions and classifications of redwoods, oaks,
pines, and other trees of Yosemite National Park. The Big tree:
pp. 139-45.

Tresidder, Mary C.

1932 The trees of Yosemite. Palo Alto, Calif., Stanford Univ.

press, 133 pp., illus., bibliog.

Describes by family and species the trees of Yosemite and
the higher Sierra. Accuracy of text and of linoleum block illus
trations by Delia T. Hoss attested by National Park Service au
thorities.

U.S. Department of Agriculture

1900 Report on the Big trees of California.... U.S. Dept.
Agric., Div. of Forestry, Bui. 28, 30 pp., illus., maps.
Pub. also as Sen. doc. 393, 56th U.S. Cong., 1st sess. (ssr.
no. 3877), Wash., Govt. print, off.

Written by V;. H. Dudley and others and submitted by Gifford
Pinchot , Chief Forester. Includes descriptions of the Big tree
groves of Yosemite. There are 15 plates and two maps: (1) general
location of Big tree groves; (2) those in Fresno and Tulare counties.

Warner, Charles D.

1902 Big trees of Yosemite and Mariposa. In: Our Italy, pp. 148-
62. New York, Harper and Bros.

Warren, Henry W.

1901 How the sequoias grow. Chautauquan, 33:[362]-66 (July),
illus.

Description and notes on the growth of the giant sequoias
in the 240-miIe-belt of groves which passes through Yosemite, Se
quoia, and General Grant national parks.

88

TREES AND SHRUBS

Wells, A.T.

1905 Helping the Sierra Sequoia. Sunset, 16:280-83 (Jan.).

Suggestions for reforestation, based on study of sequoia
gigar.tea seed; factors which inhibit natural reproduction.

White, John R.

1934 Among the Big trees of California. Natl. geog., 66:219-

32 (Aug.) , illus.

History and distribution of the go mis Sequoia, by the
Superintendent of Sequoia National lark; applicable also to Big
trees of Ycseriite National Park.

White, John R. , joint author. See: Fry, Walter, 1930.

[Wilcman, Rounsevelle]

1896 Yoseinite and the Big trees. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 28:

199-211 (Aug.) , illus.

Description of the valley and facts about many of the more
famous Big trees.

Williams, J. Otis

1871 Mammoth treos of California. Boston, Alfred Mudge and

Son, 54 pp., illus., map.

Compares Big trees of Yoseinite with other noted trees,
ancient and modem; contains handbook for trip to Yosemite Valley.

Wright, George M.

1928 A struggle without rest. Yosemite riat. notes, 7:86-87

(Oct.) , illus.

Vandalism, of hikers menaces the Jeffrey pine tree on
Sentinel Dome.

Yard, Robert S.

1928 The problems of Yosemite forests. Natl. Parks Assn., Bui.,

9:55-[58?] (May), illus., map.

Privately owned land in the western part of the park.

Zentmyer, George

1936 Willows of the high Sierra. Yosemite nat. notes, 15:81-83
(Nov.).

89

GEOLOGY

INCLUDING OTHER EAIiTH SCIENCES, SUCH AS
METEOROLOGY
MINERALOGY
PALEONTOLOGY
PETROLOGY

GEOLOGY
And Other Earth Sciences

1875 Living glaciers of California. Harper's new mo. mag., 53U
769-75 (Nov.), Illus.
Glaciers of the Yo Semite and high. Siorra regions.

1924 Yosemite domes. Yo Semite nat. notes, 3:4 (Feb. 29).

Andrews, E.G.

1909 Corrasion by gravity streams with applications of the ice
flood hypothesis. .Royal Soc. New South Wales, Jour, and
proc., 43:204-330, illus., maps, bibliog.

In pages 292-305 the hypothesis is applied to the Yosemite
Valley and the Sierra Nevada.

1910 An excursion to the Yosemite (California); or, Studies in
the formation of alpine cirques, steps, and valley treads.
Royal Soc. New South Wales, Jour, and proc., 44:262-315,
illus.

Atwood, Wallace W.

1937 Crater Lake and Yosemite through the ages. Natl. geog. ,

71:^27-43 (I,lar.), illus.

E. Kingman's conception of scenery in past geological
periods is depicted in colored illustrations.

Avery, B.P.

1868 Mountain, lake, and valley. Overland mo., 1:540-52 (Dec.).
Californiafs topography outlined, and the geologic history
of Yosemite briefly reviewed.

Bailey, G.E.

1906 Sierra sky-line guardians. Sunset, 17:[227]-29 (Sept.).

Remarks on origin of the Sierra, and some of its topographic
features.

Balk, Robert, joint author. See: Cloos, Hans.

Beatty, M.S.

1954 Glaciers of Yosemite. Yosemite nat . notes, 13:44-46

(June) , illus.

Since 1931, annual measurements have been made of Lyell,
Maclure, Dana, and Conness glaciers.

Blackwelder, Eliot

1929 Sandblast action in relation to the glaciers of the Sierra
Nevada. Jour, geol, 37:256-60 (Ap.-May) , illus., map.

93

YOSMITE NATIONAL PARK

Blackwelder, Eliot

1931 Pleistocene glaciation in the Sierra Nevada and Basin Ranges,
Geol. Soc. Am., Bui., 42:865-922.

Bradley, Walter W.

1933 Itinerary: Yosemite to Mother Lode. In: Internet 1. Geol.

Cong., Guidebook 16 (middle Calif, and w. Nev.), pp. 62-66,

map . , Washingt on , Govt . ' print . off .

A point by point description of geological features, with
distances from Yosemite Village indicated. The course lay from
Yosemite to Sonora, thence to Sacramento.

Branner, J.C.

1903 A topographic feature of the hanging valleys of Yosemite.

Jour, geol., 11:547-53 (Sept.-Oct . ) , illus.

An explanation of the formation of hanging valleys as
illustrated by the action of Illilouette Creek near the close of
the glacial epoch.

[Brewer, W.H.]

1866 Whitney's geology of California. Am. jour. sci. and arts,

2d ser. , 41:351-69.

Description of an area in the Sierra Nevada extending 440
miles northwest from Tehachapi Pass to Mt. Lassen, and including
Yosemite and Mt. Whitney.

1875 A phenomenon at Yosemite. Pac. rural press, 9:290 (May 1).
Description of the ice cone at the base of Upper Yosemite

Fall, and the theory of -^e Conte regarding this famous cone.

1876 On the formation of ice-pellets or hail in the spray of
Yosemite Fall. Calif. Ac ad. Sci., Proc., 1875, 6:80-81.

California. Dept. of Natural Hesources, Divi of Mines.

1888 Mono County, by | K.A. Whiting]. In: Eighfcann. rept. of

the State Mineralogist, William 'Irelan, Jr., pp. 352-401.

Sacramento, State print, off., 948 pp., illus., maps.

Mineral resources of the county and amount of gold pro
duced by each mine therein.

California. Geological Survey. See: Whitney, Josiah D. , 1865,1870.

California. State Geologist

[1853] Professor John B. Trask's report on the geology of the

Sierra Nevada, or California range. [Sacramento?], G.

Kerr, 31 pp.

The first official report of the State Geologist. Compare
Trask's article by similar title, p. 105.

94

GEOLOGY

Calkins , frank C.

1930 The granitic rocks of the Yosemite rogion. In: U.S. Geol.

Surv., Prof. pap. 160:120-29, illus., map. Washington,

Govt. print, off.

Appendix to: Geologic History of the Yosemite Valley, by
Francois E. Matt lies.

Carlin, Foster M.

1893 Among the California glaciers. Calif o mi an illus. mag.,

3:520-26 (Mar.), illus.

Ccritains descriptive and historical notes on the glaciers
of the Yosemite region.

Clark, B*L.

1930 Tectonics of the Coast ranges of middle California. Geol.
Soc. Am., Bui., 41:747-828, illus.

[Clark, Galen]

1873 [Explorations in the region of the Yosemite Valley.]

Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Proc., 15:259-61 (Jan. 15).

A trip with John Muir to determine glacial activity.

1910 The Yosemite Valley; its history, characteristic features,
and the theories regarding its origin. Yosemite Valley,
Nelson L. Slater, 108 pp., illus.

Cloos, Ernst

1932 Structure of the Sierra Nevada batholith. In: Internatl.

Geol. Cong., Guidebook 16 (middle Calif, and w. Nev.), pp.

40-45, map, bibliog. Washington, Govt . print, off.

Study of the compound batholith of the Jurassic or Cre
taceous which makes up the central Sierra Nevada. Characteristic
formations described by reference to Yosemite Valley features.

Cloos, Hans, and Balk, Robert

1928 Primary structure of the Sierra Nevada intrusive in a

cross section from Yosemite Valley to Mono Lake, Calif -

fornia. Geol. Soc. Am., Bui. 39:185 (Mar.).

An abstract of a paper probably read at a meeting.

[Davidson, George]

1892 The occupation of Mount Conness. Overland mo,, 19:115-29

(Feb. ) , illus.

Three months surveying expedition on Mount Conness, twenty
miles north of Yosemite Valley.

Davis, W.M.

1930 Physiographic contrasts, east and west. Sci. mo., 30:
395-415 {May); 501-19 (June).

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

The Yosemite, Death Valley, and Rocky Mountain areas are
included in this comparison of eastern and western America.

Fairbanks, Harold W.

1898 The great Sierra Nevada fault scarp. Pop. sci. mo., 52:

609-21 (Mar.) , illus.

Geological history and phenomena of the eastern slope of
the Sierra Nevada.

Fairchild, H.L.

1905 Ice erosion theory a fallacy. G-eol. Soc. Am., Bui., 16?

13-74 (Feb.), illus., maps.

The author believes that glaciers have the power to move
blocks of rock loosened by frost, faulting, earthquakes, and
weathering, but that ice has little effect on masses of solid
granite. Ke considers the theories of Whitney, LeConte, and Muir.

Farquhar, Francis P.

1934 The Sierra Nevada of California. Alpine jour., 46:[87]-

102 (May), illus., bibliog.

General description of the geology 'of the Yosemite and
Sequoia national parks regions. Reprinted, with same pagination,
by Spottiswoode, Ballantyne and Company, London, 1934.

Fitch, Albert A.

1931 Barite and witherite from near El Portal, Mariposa County,

California. Am. mineralogist, 16:461-68 (Oct.), illus.,

map.

Description and analysis of two minerals found in veins on
both sides of the Merced River.

Fitch, C.H.

1900 Yosemite quadrangle, California. U.S. Geol. Surv. , 21st
Ann. rept. (1899/1900), 5:571-74, illus.

Complete description of topography and forestation, with
statistical analysis of timber growths.

French, Harold

1914 Genesis and revelations of the Yosemite Valley. Pop.

sci. mo., 85:68-82 (July), illus., map.

Exposition of four conflicting theories about the origin
of the valley.

[Gannett, Henry]

1901 The origin of Yosemite Valley. Natl. geog. , 12:86-87
(Feb.).

Yosemite Valley may have been formed by other agencies
than ice; possibly by erosion, aided by fractures.

96

GEOLOGY

Gilbert, Grove K.

1904 Domes end dome structure of tho high Sierra. Geol. Soc.

Am., Bui., 15:29-36 (Feb.), illus* (Reprinted, Sierra

Club bul., 5:211-20 (Jan. 1905) , illus.

Two theories of the origin of domes, with special mention
of Half Dome in Yosemite.

1904 Systematic asymmetry of crest lines in the high Sierra of
California. Jour, of geol, 12:579-85 (Oct. -Nov.), illus.
L'otes on geology, past and present, of Yo Semite and the

high Sierra region. Also in Sierra Club bul., 5:279-86 (June 1905).

1904 Variations of Sierra glaciers. Sierra Club, Bul., 5:20-
25 (Jan.) , illus.

1906 Gravitational assemblages in granite. Geol. Soc. Am.,
Bul., 17:521-26 (July 27).
Describes granites in neighborhood of Tuolumne Meadows.

Godwin, E.D.

1936 The quartz block at Yosemite Point. Yosemite nat. notes,

15:8 (Jan.).

The rock's origin remains unexplained.

1936 The Tenaya Canyon "Ice Box." Yosemite nat. notes, 15:3
(Jan.).
An example of the process of glacier formation.

Hall, Ansel F.

1925 The lost lake of Little Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes,

4:78-79 (Aug.) , illus.

Explains disappearance of a lake back of Half Dome.

Harwell, C.A.

1932 Measuring Yosemite glaciers. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:

5-6 (Dec.).

Data on movements of Lye 11, Maclure, and Dana glaciers.

1935 The ice cone of Yosemite Falls. Yosemite riat. notes,

14:41-44 (May), illus.

Findings of an expedition equipped to measure and record
this phenomenon.

Holder, Charles F.

1901 Famous basaltic columns. Sci. Am., 84:68 (Feb. 2) , illus.
Note on basalt columns, including those of Devil Postpile
National Monument, which was formerly within the boundary of Yo
semite National Park.

97

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Huntington, Ellsworth

1925 Tree growth and climatic interpretations. Carnegie Inst.

of Wash. , Pub. 352: 157-203.

"...Evidence of the annual rings of the sequoia as in
dicating fluctuation of rainfall during the present era...."

Hyatt, Alpheus

1893 Age of Mariposa beds. Geol. See. Am., Bui., 5:254 (Dec.).

Irelan, William, Jr. See: California Department of Natural Re
sources,...

Johnson, Douglas W.

1910 The origin of the Yo Semite Valley. Appalachia, 12:138-
46 (July).

Description of the valley and account of its creation by
glacial sculpturing and stream erosion.

1911 Hanging valleys of the Yosemite. Am. Geog. Soc., Bui.,
43:826-37, 890-903 (Nov. -Dec.), illus., maps., bibliog.

Johnston, Robert

1937 Crystals. Yosemite nat. notes, 16:27 (Ap.j.

Description and account of the formation of the large
orthoclase crystals found above Nevada Fall.

Jones, Wellington D.

1929 Glacial land forms in the Sierra Nevada south of Lake

Tahoe. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in geol., 3:135-57, illus.,

map.

[King, Clarence]

1878 [Analysis of granite from Yosemite Valley.] In: U.S.

Geol. Explor. of the 40th parallel, Final rept., 1:110.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

U.S.G.S. catalogue lists this series of reports of the
King explorations as Final Reports or Monographs, consisting of
seven volumes and an atlas, published 1870-80.

1880 First annual report of the U.S. Geological Survey [by

Clarence King], Washington, Govt. print, off., 79 pp.,
map.

Having completed his report on the first Government
geological survey of California (Exploration of the 40th parallel,
1878), King was instrumental in organizing the official U.S.
Geological Survey, 1879. Printed also in Report of the Secretary
of the Interior... fiscal year ending June 30, 1880, vol. 2:333-92.

98

GEOLOGY

Kheeland, Samuel

1873 On the glaciers of the Yosemite Valley. Boston Soc. Nat.

Hist., Proc., 15:36-47 (Feb. 1872).

The writer believed that the land at the head of the Mer
ced River was not high enough for the formation of a glacier
leading into the valley.

Lavjson, Andrew C.

1921 Geology of Yosemite National Park. In: Handbook of Yo
semite National Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 97-122,
illus., bibliog. New York, Putnam.
A detailed geological description of the formation of the

Sierra Nevada and its valleys, with especial reference to Yosemite

Valley.

1921 The Sierra Nevada. Univ. Calif., Chronicle, 23:130-49
(no. 2) .

LeConte, Joseph

1873 On some of the ancient glaciers of the Sierra. Calif.

Acad. Sci., Proc., 4:259-62 (1368-72). Also in - Am.

jour. sci. and arts, 3d ser. , 5:326-42 (May 1873), illus., map.

The Merced and the Tuolumne ere among glaciers mentioned.

1879 On the extinct volcanoes about Lake Mono and their rela
tion to the glacial drift. Am. jour. sci. and arts., 18:
35-44 (July) , illus.
General description of physical features and geology.

1899 Yosemite. Sunset, 2:[ll9]-20 (Ap.), illus.

Brief defense of the author's belief that science enhances
rather than detracts from esthetic enjoyment of scenery.

LeConte, Joseph [Nisbet]

1907 The high Sierra of California. Alpina Americana, no.l,

16 pp. , illus.

Contains geological description, elevations of the peaks,
and origin of their names. Particular reference to the Yosemite
and Sequoia national park regions. (Evidently one of a short
lived monograph series.)

Lee, Willis T.

1905 Note on the glacier of Mount Lyell, California. Jour.

geol., 13:358-62 ( May- June ), illue.

Observations made in August 1904.

1926 Quaternary landscapes. In: Stories in stone, pp. 140-42.

New York, Van Nostrand.

Contains notes on geologic development of Yosemite, Glacier,
and Rocky Mountain national park regions.

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Lindgren, Waldemar

1898 Descriptions of specimens: rhyolitic pumice, rhyolitic

obsidian, from Mono Lake..., California. In: U.S. G-eol.

Surv., Bui. 150:148-51. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Volcanic specimens of late Tertiary or Pleistocene origin,
collected south of the lake.

1911 [Jackson, Big Tree, Sonora, and Yosemite quadrangles.]

In: The Tertiary gravels of the Sierra Nevada, U.S. G-eol.
Surv., Prof. pap. 73:195*219. Washington, Govt. print, off.
Geology, Tertiary topography, gold deposits and production.

1911 Tertiary gravels of the Sierra Nevada of California.

U.S. Geol. Surv., Prof. pap. 73, 226 pp., illus., map.

Washington, Govt. print, off.

Describes the later geologic history of the northern part
of the Sierra Nevada, including the Yosemite country.

[Loew, Oscar]

1876 [Analysis of water from a soda spring in the Little Yo
semite.] U.S. Geog. Surv.... west of the 100th meridian,
Ann. rept., 1876, p. 195.

Lukens, T.P.

1901 Giant's Causeway of Yosemite. Sunset, 6:[l45]-46 (Mar.),

illus.

The basaltic columns in the area which in 1911 became Devil
Postpile National Monument.

Mather, Stephen T.

1920 Yosemite, land of enchantment. Mid-Pacific mag., 20:

[250]-54 (Sept.), illus.

Geological notes and description.

Matthes, Francois E.

1907 Map of Yosemite Valley (Reverse side). U.S. Geol. Surv.

Washington, D.C., Govt. print, off.

On the reverse is an exposition of the geological history
of the valley, by Dr. Matthes. One of the most important popular
contributions on this subject, and has been reprinted many times
in its original form. The map has been revised to keep pace with
man-made changes.

1907 The new map of the Yosemite Valley. Sci., n.s., 26:146-

48 (Aug. 2).

Praising the topographic sheet of the U. S. Geological
Survey, an example of modern detail mapping.

1909 Debris tracks on the domes of the Yosemite Valley. (Ab
stract.) Sci., n.s., 30:61-62 (July '9).

100

GEOLOGY

1910 The cliff sculpture of the Yosemite Valley (Abstract).

Geol. Soc. Am., Bui., 21:759-60 (Dec. 31).

Abstract of paper presented at the 22d annual meeting of
the society, Dec., 1909. Account of meeting, with abstract,
printed in 3d., n.s., 32:186 (Aug. 5, 1910).

1910 The Half Dome of the Yosemite Valley. Sci . , n.s., 31:519
UP.).
Three hypotheses to explain the origin of the dome.

1910 Little studies in the Yosemite Valley, I: The extinct Eagle
Peak Falls. Sierra Club, Bui., 7:222-24 (June), map.
Evidence of the existence of this waterfall in glacial times.

1911 Little studies in the Yosemite Valley, II: The striped rock
floors of the Little Yosemite Valley. Sierra Club, Bui.,
8:3-9 (Jan.), illus.

About an acre of bare 1'ock where Clouds Rest Trail leaves
the Little Yosemite Valley is the subject of this description.

1911 Little studies in the Yosemite Valley, III: The winds of
the Yosemite Valley. Sierra Club, Bui., 8:[_89j-95 (June).

1912 Sketch of Yosemite National Park, and an account of the
origin of the Yosemite and Hetch Hetcliy valleys. U.S.
Dept. Int., 47 pp., illus. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1913 Little studies in the Yosemite Valley, IV: El Capitan and
ancient Lake Yosemite. Sierra Club, Bui., 9:7-15 (Jan.).
.Svidence supporting the theory of glaciation in the valley--

a theory which had been attacked by J. D. Whitney.

1914 Moraine Dome and the moraines of the Little Yosemite
Valley. Wash. Acad. Sci., Jour., 4:295-96.

1914 Studying the Yosemite problem. Sierra Club, Bui., 9:136-47
(Jan. ) , illus.
Diversity of opinion about the origin of the valley.

1921 Cockscomb Crest. Sierra Club, Bui., ll:[2l]-28 (Jan.),

illus.

One of the points that escaped the effects of the ice sheet
in Yosemite.

1924 Hanging valleys of the Yosemite [.Valley] and the San Joaquin
Canyon. Wash. Acad. Sci., Jour., 14:379-80 (Sept. 19).

1924 The story of Yosemite Valley. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Guide
leaflet no. 60, 21 pp., illus.

101

YOSEMTTE NATIONAL PARK

Matthes, Francois E.

1924 Telling Yosemite »s story. Yosemite rat. notes, 3:4-5
(May 31); p. 4 (.Tune 7); p. 4 {June 14); pp. 3-4 (June 21);
pp. 3-4 (June £8); p. 4 (July 5); pp. 5-6 (July 12); pp. 4-5
(July 19); p.4 (July 26); p. 4 (Aug. 2).

Series of ten articles on the geology of Yosemite. (Fag-
ing erratic . )

1925 Evidences of recurrent glc.ciation in the Sierra Nevada of
California. Sci., n.s., 61:550-51 (May 22).
Evident];/ an abstract of a papsr read before the Academy

of Sciences, reprinted in Yosemite nature notes, 4:41-42 (June
1925). Summarizes results of the glacial surveys made since 1913
on the west flank of the range in the Stanislaus, Tuolumne, Merced,
and San Joaquin basins. A portion of the paper appeared elsewhere.
(See entry under 1929, below.)

1926 King's River Canyon and the Yosemite Valley. Sierra Club,
Bui., 12:224-36, illus.

1929 Evidences of multiple glaciation in the Yosemite region.

Geol. Soc. Am., Bui., 40:135-36 (Mar.).

Apparently a portion abstracted from the 1925 paper by a
similar title. Refers particularly to multiple glaciers of Little
Yosemite.

1929 Multiple glaciation in the Sierra Nevada. Sci., n.s.,
70:75-76 (July 19).

1930 Geologic history of the Yosemite Valley. U.S. Geol. Surv.,
Prof. pap. 160,137 pp., illus., maps, bibliog. Washington,
Govt. print, off.

Exhaustive study of Yosemite geology, containing appendix
(pp. 120-29) on "The granitic rocks...," by frtnk C. Calkins'.

1933 Geography and geology of the Sierra Nevada. In: Internatl.
Geol. Cong., Guidebook 16 (middle Calif, and w. I-Tev.), pp.
26-40, illus., bibliog. Washington, Govt. print, off.

1933 Up tho western slope of the Sierra ilevadc by way of the

Yosemite Valley. In: Internatl. Geol. Cong., Guidebook 16
(middle Calif, and w. Nev.), pp. 67-81, illus., map. Washing
ton, Govt. print, off.
Cross section of the geology of the central Sierra Nevada.

1937 Exfoliation of massive granite in the Sierra Nevada of
California. Geol. Soc. Am., Froc. for 1936:342-43.
An abstract of a paper not yet published in full.

102

GEOLOGY

Miller, H.O.

1330 Memo's slumbering craters. Touring topics, 22:46-47, 56
(Feb. ) , illus. , map.

Mills, Erios

1926 Running down glaciers. In: Romance of geology, pp. 161-77,

illus. Garden City, N.Y. , Doubleday.

Coiitains notes on the glaciers which sculptured Yosemite
and Hetch Hetchy valleys.

Mitchell, Guy E.

1916 Hu^e dome of granite. Am. forestry, 22:285 (May).
Non-technical description of Half Dome.

Morgan, V/ilHard D.

1930 Climbing through ash-land with a camera. Photo-era mag.,

65:212-15 (Oct.) , illus.

Describes gigantic fuma roles and other geological features
around Mono Lake, near the eastern boundary of Yosemite.

[Muir, John]

1872 Living glaciers in California. Overland mo., 9;547-49 (Dec.).
An account of the discovery of two glaciers, on Mounts Lyell

and Mac lure.

1873 I. The earthquake storm in the Yosemite.] Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., Proc. (1872), 15:185-86.

The severe effects of an earthquake, March 26, 1872.

1873 A geologist's winter walk. Overland mo., 10:355-58 (Ap.).

Account of trip through Tenaya Canyon and back via South
Dome, to obtain barometric data.

1874- Studies in the Sierra. Ovorland mo., 12:[393J-403 (May),
1875 illus.; 12:[489]-6JO (June), illus.; 13:67-79 (July) , illus.,

13:174-84 (Aug.); 13:[393]-402 (Nov.), illus.; 13:530-40

(Dec.); ill'is.; 14:64-73 (Jan.), illus.

Nunber 1: Mountain sculpture; Number 2: Mountain sculpture:
Origin of Yosemite valleys; Number 3« Ancient glaciers and their
pathways; Number 4: Glacial denudation; Number 5: Post-glacial
denudation; Number 6' formation of soils; Number 7: Mountain build
ing. Reprinted in Sierra Club bul., 9:225-33 (Jan. 1915); 10:[S2]-
72 (Jan. 1916); 10 :[ 184']-201 (Jan. 1917) ; 10:[304]-13 (Jan. 1918); 10:
414-28 (Jan. 1919); 11:59-85 (Jan. 1920); ll:[i8l]-93 (Jan. 1921) ; illus.

1912 The ancient Yosemite glaciers. In: The Yosemite, pp. 173-
95, illus. New York, Century.

103

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Pabst, Adolf

1928 Observations on inclusions in the granitic rocks of the
Sierra Nevada. Univ. Calif., Dept. Geol. Sci., Bui., 17:
325-86, illus. , map.

Includes both Yosemite and Sequoia national parks.

1929 Mineralogy and. petrology of the Yosemite region. Yosemite
ranger-nat. man., 2d ed. , 2:53-63, bibliog. Yosemite
Natl. Park. (Mimeographed.)

Ransome, F.L.

1898 Some lava flows of the western Sierra Nevada, California.
U.S. Geol. Surv., Bui. 89. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Rogers, Austin F.

1932 Sanbornite, a new barium disilicate mineral from Mariposa

Bounty, California. Mining in Calif., 28:84 (Jan.).

Sanbornite, the first simple barium disilicate mineral ever
found in California, was located near the Mariposa Grove.

Russell, Carl P.

1925 Glacial polish. Yosemite nat. notes, 4:97 (Oct.).

1926 Hetch Hetchy, the Tuolumne's Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 5:65-66 (Sept.).

These valleys have similar geologic histories.

1926 How lakes build ramparts. Yosemite nat. notes, 5:17 (Mar.).

1926 Some Yosemite questions answered. Yosemite nat. notes,
5:30-31 (Ap.)«

1927 Reading history in glacial debris. Yosemite nat. notes,
6:28-29 (AP.), illus., map.

1929 Geology of Yosemite National Park. Yosemite ranger-nat.
man., 2d ed. , 2:64-80, bibliog. Yosemite Natl. Park.
(Mimeographed. )

1929 The story of the origin of Yosemite Valley. Yosemite

ranger-nat. man., 2d ed., 1:105-10. Yosemite Natl. Park.
(Mimeographed. )

Russell, Israel C.

1885 Existing glaciers of the United States. U.S. Geol. Surv.,

5th ann. rept . (1883/84), pp. 309-55, illus., map.

The glaciers of Mounts Dana, Lyell, Shasta, Rainier, and
Moran are illustrated and described. Bibliographical references.

104

GEOLOGY

1887 Report on glaciers of Mono Basin and high Sierras. U.S.
Dept. Int., Rept. for 1887, 8:

V

1889 Quaternary history of Mono Valley, California. U.S. Geol.

Surv. , 8th ann. rapt. (1886/87), pt .1:259-394, illus., maps.

The lacustrine and volcanic history of Mono 3asin; glacial
history of the high Sierra, Mounts Dana and Lye 11, and Parker Creek.

1897 Glaciers of the Sierra Nevada. In: Glaciers of North

America, pp. 37-54-, illus. Boston, Ginn.

Description of the glaciers on Mounts Lyell, Hitter, and
Dana, and elsewhere in the high Sierra.

Shar snii t h , Carl

1932 Glaciers of the Sierra Nevada. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:1-
2 ( Jan . ) .

The largest of the Sierra glaciers is the Palisade, al
though the Conness is the most active and most accessible one in
Yoseiuite.

1933 Glacial pavements near Yosemite Valley. Yosemite nat.
notes, 12:78-79 (Aug.).

Stearns, Robert E.G.

1873 Remarks on the Upper Tuolmme CaSon. .Calif. Acad. Sci.,

Proc . , 5:155-58.

The author quotes Muir, "UMtney , and others on the geo
logical and topographical features of the upper Tuolumne and Hetch
Hetchy valleys.

Stellman, Louis J.

1920 The official upeetter. Sunset, 45:50, 52, 54 (Oct .), illus.
An account of the vrork of Dr. Francois 1C. Matthes, who "skips
over the mountains, capsizing our cherished [geological] traditions,"
and of his theories concerning the origin of Yosemite.

Teall, Ralph

1927 [Measuring] the Half Dome crack. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:
73 (Oct.).

Trask, John B.

1853 Geology of the Sierra Nevada. Western jour, and civilian,

10:248-55 (July).

A pioneer attempt to explain the formations between the
Tuolumne and Merced rivers.

[Turner, Henry W.J

1895 The age and succession of the igneous rocks of the Sierra

105

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Nevada. Jour, of geol., 3:385-414 (May-June), map.

Geological description of the mountain region extending
from Tejon Pass to Lassen Peak, and in which Yosemi'te and other
national parks are located.

Turner, Henry W. , continued.

1898 Origin of Yo Semite Valley. Sci., n.a., 7:358-59.

Abstract, summarizing a paper read before the Geological
Society of Washington.

1899 Geology of the Yosemite National Park. Am. geol., 23:100
(Feb.) (Abstract).

1899 The granitic rocks of the Sierra Nevada. Jour, of geol.,
7:141-62 (Feb. -Mar.), illus.

A study of the acid granolites, seven types of which have
been recognized in Yosemite National Park.

1900 The Pleistocene geology of the south-central Sierra Nevada,
with especial reference to the origin of the Yosemite
Valley. Calif. Acad. Sci., Proc., 3d ser. , 1:261-321,
illus.

1903 Post-Tertiary elevation of the Sierra Nevada. Geol. Soc.,

Am., Bui., 13:540-42 (Feb. 27), illus.

Neocene streams of the Yosemite quadrangle and the lavas
and gravels of the Tuolumne Basin.

Hi/heeler, George M.

1900 Table of altitudes at Yosemite Valley. Sunset, 5:189 (Aug.).

Whiting, H.A. (State Mineralogist). See: California, Department
of Natural Resources....

Whitney, Josiah D.

1865 The geology of the Sierra Nevada. In: Geological survey

of California, vol.1. (Rept. of progress and synopses of the
field-work from 1860 to 1864), pt.2, pp. [ 198] -483, illus.,
maps, append. Philadelphia, Sherman. Pubd. by authority
of the Legislature of California.
Describes geological features of each county in the region,

including the Yosemite Valleys. "Volume II (Cambridge Mass., Wilson)

was published in 1882.

1870 The Yosemite guide-book; a description of the Yosemite

Valley and the adjacent region of the Sierra Nevada, and
of the Big trees of California. (Calif. Geol. Surv.).
Cambridge, Mass. [Harvard?] Univ. press, 155 pp. , illus., maps.
There were numerous editions of this popular handbook, which

is how sought by collectors.

106

HISTORY

INCLUDING THE KETCH HETCKY CONTROVERSY

PI I S T 0 R Y

Including the Hetch Hetchy Controversy

See also: General: Geography, Travel, and

. Description

1874 Laws and judicial decisions relating to the Yosemite Valley
and Maripcsa Big Tree Grove. San Francisco, Correy, 35 pp.

1883 Ea-.?ly spring in California. Ocrnhiil meg., 47:410-23 (Ap.).

Description of Yosemite Valley features in spring, and ac
count of George >irdersor..f s ascent of ifelf Lone in 1875.

1886 The State hotel in the Yoseniite. Pac. rural press, 31:153

(Feb. 13) , illus.

Info mat ion on the $40,000 hotel about to be erected under
supervision of the Yosomite Valley Commissioners.

1890 [Official relation of the public to the Yosemite Valley.]

Nation, 50:204 (Mar. 6).

Conditions under which the Yosemite Valley was given to
California in 1864.

1890 Reservation of the Yosemite Valley. Nation, 50:106-07

(Feb. 6).

Editorial asserting that Yosemite should be enlarged about
50 square miles.

1899 The hidden cabin of the Yosemite Valley. Sunset, 2:125-26
(Ap. ) , illus.
The secret retreat where John Muir wrote many of his works.

1901 Joseph LeConte [1823-1901]. Natl. geog. mag., 12:309-11

(Aug. ) , illus.

Biographical notes on an authority on Yosemite Valley who
died there in 1901.

1905 John Muir: geologist, explorer, naturalist. Craftsman,

7:637-67 (Mar.) , illus.

Biographical sketch of Muir; a letter of his from Yosemite;
an account of one of his trips to the valley; and many scenic views.

1905 The Yosemite recession. Nation, 80:325-26 (Ap.27).

Recession of Yosemite and Mariposa Big Trees to the Federal
Government — the only effective means of preservation.

1909 - Hetch Hetchy Valley case. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preserv.
Soc., 14th ann. rept. (1909), pp. 124-29.
Arguments pro and con.

109

YOSMITE NATIONAL PARK

1909 San Francisco's water supply and the Yosemite National Park.
Am. rev. of revs., 40:486-88 (Oct.), illus.
Arguments for and against the building of Hetch Hetchy Dam.

1909 Saving the Yosemite Park. Outlook, 91:234-36 (Jan. 30), map.
Editorial comment on article by R. U. Johnson and S. S. White

on saving Hetch Hetchy Valley from exploitation.

1910 Hetch Hetchy Valley: Secretary Garfield's decision reversed.
Am. Scenic and Hist. Preserv. Soc., 15th aim. rept. (1910),
pp. 113-16, illus.

1912 Hetch Hetchy Valley. Am. Scenic and Hist. Preserv. 3oc.,

17th aim. rept. (1912), pp. 261-63.

General remarks on the application of the mayor and super
visors of San Francisco for water rights.

1914 Yosemite National Park; passage of the Hetch Hetchy bill.
Am. Scenic and Hist. Preserv. Soc., 19th ann. rept. (1914),
pp. 241-54.

1915 A comrade of the giant trees. Lit. dig., 50:114-19 (Jan .16).
Biographical sketch of John Muir; notes on his efforts to

preserve Yosemite Valley and the Big trees.

1916 The Hetch Hetchy Valley controversy. Am. Scenic and Hist.
Preserv. Soc., 21st ann. rept. (1916), pp. 395-97.

San Francisco fs motives in securing the Hetch Hetchy water
rights are questioned end upheld in quotations from San Francisco
and New York newspapers.

1916 The Yosemite Valley. Mentor, 4:1-6 (Sept. 15), illus.
History and scenery.

1917 The Sierra Club. Sierra Club, Bui., 10:135-45 ( Jan. ), illus.
History of the club with respect to Yosemite, and its de
velopment .

1923 The early days in Yosemite. Calif. Hist. Soc., Quart., 1:

271-85 (Jan.) .

Reprinted from the Msriposa Democrat of August 5, 1856, with
foreword by Ansel F. Hall. Includes notes on geology und place
names. Original account by Warren Baer, member(?) of expedition of
1855.

1930 A public benefactor. Nature mag., 15:51 (Jan.).

George A. Ball purchased the 640-acre Fassett holding on
the Glacier Point read and deeded it to the Government.

110

HISTORY

1937 Superintendent Thomson succumbs. Park Service bul., 7:1-3

(Ap.-May) , illus.

In the same issue (p. 46) is reprinted an editorial from the
New York Herald Tribune for Mar. 25, 1937, entitled "A fine civil
servant," a tribute to Lieut. Col. Charles Goff Thomson, who was
superintendent of Yosemite, 1930-37.

Albright , Horace M.

1929 Yosemite on the way to protection. Am. oivic ann. , 1:22-25.

Problem of acquiring the private land holdings in Yosemite
National Park for public safeguarding, and progress made in that
direction.

1931 A tribute to W.3. Lewis. Sierra Club, Bul., 16:[60]-62
(Feb.)*

Mr. Lewis was superintendent of Yosemite National Park for
the eleven years preceding his death.

Armes , William D. , ed. See: LeConte, Joseph, 1903.

Bade*, William F.

1909 Despoiling the Hetch Hetchy. Suburban life, Mar., pp.117-18.

1920 John Muir in Yosemite. Nat. hist., 20:124-41 (Mar.-Ap.),

illus.

Muir's activities and experiences. Pull-page reproduction
of bust in American Museum of Natural History.

Bade, William F. , ed.

1923 The life and letters of John Muir. Boston, Houghton, 2

vols., illus., ports.

Biography of the explorer and naturalist (1838-1914) com
piled largely from his letters and papers which record his studies
and experiences in Yosemite, Alaska, and elsewhere; his work to
wards a national park system and his efforts to formulate a na
tional conservation policy.

Barrus, Clara

1910 With John of Birds and John ©'Mountains in the Southwest.
Century mag., 80:521-28 (Aug.), illus.

Notes on trips in Yosemite and Muir Woods ivith Burroughs
and Muir.

1912 In the Yosemite with John Muir. Craftsman, 23:324-35 (Dec.),

illus.

Notes on the association of John Muir and John Burroughs
in Yosemite, with comments on Muir's philosophy and character.

Ill

YOSSMITE NATIONAL PARK

Beatty, M.E.

1934 History of the firefall. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:41-43
( June ) .

1936 C.E. Watkins, one of the early photographers of Yosemite.

Yosemite nat. notes, 15:17-18 (Mar.).

Watkins made the first photographs of the Mariposa Big
Trees about 1859, and began photographing Yosemite scenes in 1861.

Bolles, Ida S.

1929 Sidelights on Major James Savage, Yosemite nat. notes,

8:15-16 (Feb.).

Notes on the personal and family history of the discoverer
of Yosemite Valley.

Bryant, Harold C.

1925 Why Yosemite needs eastern addition. Yosemite nat. notes,
4:108-10 (Nov.) , illus.

Buckham, John W.

1927 John Muir. Nature mag., 10:315-16 (Nov.), illus.
Reminiscences of Muir.

[Bunnell, Lafayette H.]

1859 How the Yosemite Valley was discovered and named. Hutch-
ings' illus. Calif, mag., 3:498-505 (May) .
Bunnell, surgeon of the Mariposa Battalion, was one of the

discoverers.

1890 The date of the discovery of the Yosemite. Century, 40:
.795-97 (Sept.).
The exact date was a controversial subject.

1911 Discovery of the Yosemite and the Indian War of 1851 which

led to the event. 4th ed. , Los Angeles, Gsrlacher, 355pp.,
illus. , map.

Burgess , Joseph

1932 A living memorial. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:7 (July).

A young sequoia in Mariposa G-rove is dedicated to the
memory of Stepnen T. Mather, first National Park Service director.

[Butler, W.F.]

1878 The Yosemite Valley. Good words for 1878, pp. 609-15, illus.
Early hiscory, Indian depredations, and scenery..

California

1907 California blue book or state roster. Sacramento, State
print, off., 836 pp., illus., maps.

112

HISTORY

Includes brief history of Yosemite Valley and Mariposa
Grove; results of surveys; laws relating to the park.

California. Geological Survey. See: Whitney, Josiah D., 1865,
1870.

California. Senate Committee

1889 In the matter of the investigation of the Yosemite Valley

commissioners. 'Sacramento, State print, off., 40 pp.

Transcript of testimony heard in connection with charges
of improper procedure on obtaining bids and other irregularities.

California. State Board of Trade

[1904?] Yosemite Valley: History, description, and statement of
conditions relative to the proposed recession to the Na
tional Government. Sacramento? the Board, 33 pp., map
(Giro. 13).

Chamberlain, Newell D.

[c!936] The call of gold; true tales of the gold road to Yosemite.
Mariposa [Calif.] Gazette press, 183 pp., illus., maps.

[Clark, Galen]

1873 [An account of some explorations in the region of the Yo
semite Valley.] Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Proc., 15:259-
61 (Jan. 15).

1909 Yosemite — past and present. Sunset, 22:394-96 (Ap. ) ,
illus.

Early history, Indians, and conservation, commented on by
the former official guardian of Yosemite Valley.

1910 The Yosemite Valley; its history, characteristic features,
and theories regarding its origin. Yosemite Valley,
Nelson L. Slater, 108 pp., illus.

Contains illustrations from photographs by George Fiske.

1927 A Yosemite plea of 1907. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:13-15

(Feb.) , illus.

Posthumous article advocating control of the dust nuisance,
landscaping of the woods, and erosion-prevention measures on the
Merced River.

Colby, William E.

1904 The completed LeConte Memorial Lodge. Sierra Club, Bui.,

5:66-69 (Jan.) , illus.

• A memorial to Professor Joseph N. LeConte built by the
Sierra Club in Yosemite.

113

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Colby, William E., continued

1905 The Sierra Club. forestry and irrigation, 11:391-93 (Aug.),

illus.

Activities of the club in Yosemite; erection of LeConte
Memorial Lodge.

191£ The Soda Springs purchase. Sierra Club, Bui., 8:272-74

( June ) .

Recreational retreat purchased by subscriptions of Sierra
Club members.

1915 [Associations of John Muir with the Yosemite Valley.]

Natl. Parks Conf., Proc., 1915, pp. 154-57.

Muir's life in the valley, and the proposed Muir Memorial
Trail from Yosemite to Mount Yftiitney.

Colby, William E. , and others.

1919 CJohn Muir: In Memo ri am.] Sierra Club, Bui., 10:[l]-77

(Jan.), illus., bibliog.

Tributes in prose and verse to Muir by David Starr Jordan,
W. F. Bade", Harriet Monroe, and other prominent Sierra Club members.
Bibliography (exclusive of newspaper items) of works by and about
Muir.

[Colby, William E., and Jardine, W.M.]

1928 Yosemite National Park timber situation. Sierra Club, Bui.,

13:118-21 (June).

Correspondence between U. S. Secretary of Agriculture and
secretary of Sierra Club concerning private timber holdings.

Cole, James E.

1936 Origin of the name "Yosemite." Yosemite nat . notes, 15:
49-54 (July), illus., bibliog.

Currey , John

1874 Laws and judicial decisions relating to the Yosemite Valley

and Mariposa Big Tree Grove. San Francisco, Cubery and

Co. , 35 pp.

Degnan, Peggy

1935 Joe Mulligan, an old stage-coach driver. Yosernite nat.
notes, 14:79 (Oct.).

Dickensen, Luella

1904 Reminiscences of a trip across the plains in 1846, and early

days in California. San Francisco, Whitaker, 117 pp.

Contains account of a visit to Yosemite Valley in 1854.

114

HISTORY

Dornberger, Suzette

1934 The struggle for Hetch Hetchy, 1900-1915. Berkeley, Univ.

Calif., 55 pp., bibliog.

M. A. thesis (typescript). Reviews the legislation and
tactics employed in winning the fight, with strong prejudice in
favor of the Haker Act.

Emmons, Samuel F.

1907 Biographical memoir of Clarence King. Wash., Judd Det-

wiler, 55 pp., illus., bibliog.

High tribute to the charming and brilliant progenitor of
the U. S. Geological Survey. Contains reference to Mr. King's
geological work in Yo Semite and the Sierra Nevada, and a list of
his writings.

Farquhar, Francis P.

1925 Explorations of the Sierra Nevada. Calif. Hist. Soc.,

Quart., 4:3-58 (Mar.), illus.

Account of explorations, 1826-1900. Contains notes on
Walker Party (1833) and Mariposa Battalion (1351). Pages 12-14
refer to discovery and early history of "Yosemite and the great
canyons . "

1928 Spanish discovery of the Sierra Nevada. Sierra Club, Bui.,
13:54-61 (Feb.), illus., map.

Fee, Harry T.

1912 The discoverer of the Big trees. Overland mo., 2d ser. ,
60 :[ 295-98] (Sept.), illus.

Foy, Cora C.

1910 Save the Ketch Hetchy. Out west, 33:1-7 (Dec.), illus.
Condemns proposed use of Hetch Ilytc.hy Valley as a reser
voir site.

Freeman, John R.

1912 On the proposed use of a portion of the Hetch Hetchy,

Eleanor and Cherry valleys within and near to the boundaries
of the Stanislaus U.S. National Forest reserve, and the
Yosemite National Park, as reservoirs.... San Francisco,
Rincon, 401 pp., illus., map.
Freeman was a civil engineer. Report published by authority

of San Francisco Board of Supervisors.

French, Harold

1914 Psalmist of the Sierra. Sunset, 33:355-57 (Aug.), illus.

Notes on John Muir, with particular reference to his ac
tivity in the Yosemite Valley.

115

YOSEMTTE NATIONAL PARK

Fultz, Francis II.

1909 The Hetch Hetchy. Sierra Club, Bui., 7:133 (June).
Description of Hetch Hetchy Valley, and argument against

its use as a reservoir.

[Garfield, J.R.]

1910 [Text of decision of Secretary of Interior Garfield, May 11,
1903, approving the application of San francisco for the
Hetch Hetchy Valley reservoir site.] In: Proceedings be
fore the Secretary of the Interior in re use of Hetch Hetchy
reservoir site in the Yosemite National Park, by the city
of San Francisco, pp. 1-6. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Graydon, McCullough

1915 California mountains and the Yosemite Club colony. Out

west, 41: [95] -100, illus.

Describes improved roads and rail service to Yosemite.
Notes on the cabin colony to be called the Yosemite Outing Club,
which a southern California organization proposed to build on the
valley's rim.

Griswold, Mary E.

1904 In memory of LeConte. Sunset, 13:315 (Aug.), illus.
Three -room memorial lodge erected under Glacier Point.

Hall, Ansel F.

1923 The early days in Yosemite. Calif. Hist. Soc., Quart.,

1:271-85 (Jan.).

Describes several early expeditions, including those of
Walker and Bunnell.

Hamilton, Edward H.

1907 The new Yosemite Railroad. Cosmopolitan mag. , 43:569-75
(Sept.), illus., map.

Hanna, Phil T.

1926 Yosemite re-born. Touring topics, 18:16-19 (July).

History of the valley, development of transportation, and
notes on completion of new Merced-Mariposa-El Portal road.

Harwell, C.A.

1932 The Stephen Tyng Mather appreciation memorial plaque dedi
cation. Yosemite nat . notes, 11:1 (July).
Bronze tablet dedicated at Happy Isles in Yosemite National

Park to first director of National Park Service.

Hastings, Cristel

1931 Galen Clark, discoverer of the Mariposa Grove. Am. for
ests, 37:656-59 (Nov.), illus.

116

HISTORY

Hittell, Theodore, II.

1911 [Yosemite.] In: The adventures of Jsmes Capen Adams, pp.

188-98. New York, Scribner's.

First (?) edition, 1861.

Hood, Juliette M.

1930 Forest people. A trailer of the righ Sierras. Am. forests

and forest life, 36:220-21 (Ap.), illus.

Louis Jensen, Danish photographer, in Yosemite.

Hussey, John A.

1937 Discovery of the Tuolumne Grove of Big trees. Yosemite

nat. notes, 16:60-63 (Aug.).

Pieces together the story of the discovery, May 10, 1858,
from, reports of one of the discoverers, Dr. J. L. Cogswell.

Hutchings, James M.

1886 In the heart of the Sierras; the Yo Semite Valley, both
historical and descriptive, and scenes by the way. Big
tree groves... and other objects of interest; nith tables
of distances and altitudes, maps, etc. Oakland, Pacific
press, 496 pp., illus., maps.

James, George Wharton

1914 Harry Cassie Best , painter of the Yosemite Valley and the

California mountains. Out west, 39:[3]-16 (Jan.), illus.

Illustrated with two paintings of Yosemite scenes and one
of Mount Shasta, by Mr. Best.

Jepson, Willis L.

1914 First across the Sierra Nevada. Sierra Club, Bui., 9:

165-69.

Captain Joseph Walker and party, enroute from Salt Lake,
camped in the Yosemite Valley November 13, 1833. They blazed the
way for the Fremont and other explorers.

Johnson, Robert U.

1905 Personal impressions of John Muir. Outlook, 80:303-06

(June 3) , port.

Author camped with Muir and worked with him for establish
ment of Yosemite National Park.

1909 A high price to pay for water: Apropos of the grant of the
Hetch Hetchy Valley to San Francisco for a reservoir.
Sierra Club, Bui., 7:69-71 (Jan.), illus.
Originally printed in Century, August, 1908.

1909 The Yosemite National Park. Outlook, 91:506-07 (Feb. 27).

Cites expert opinions favoring denial of San Francisco's
application for the Retch Hetchy reservoir site.

117

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Johnson, Robert U. , continued

1923 Remembered yesterdays. Boston, Little, Brown, 624 pp.,

illus.

Contains account of cooperation of the author and John
Muir in the campaign to establish Yosemite National Park.

Kettlewell, Edith G.

1930 Yosemite: The discovery of Yosemite Valley and the creation

and realignment of Yosemite National Park. Berkeley, Univ.

Calif., 99 pp. (Typescript.)

A thesis presented as partial requirement for the degree
of Master of Arts.

King, Clarence

1935 Mountaineering in the Sierra Nevada. New York, Norton,

320 pp., illus., bibliog.

Reprint of account of travel in the Sierra Nevada and Yo
semite Valley in pioneer days. Preface by Francis P. Farquhar.

Kittredge, Frank A.

1937 His contribution to the national parks. Yosemite nat.

notes, 16:37-38 (May).

Appreciation of the late Lieut* Ool. Charles G. Thomson,
superintendent at Yosemite and previously at Crater Lake.

Kuykendall, Ralph S.

1919 Early history of Yosemite Valley, California. Washington,

Govt . print, off., 12 pp.

Reprinted from: Grizzly bear (Native Sons and Daughters of
the Golden West), July, 1919.

1921 History of the Yosemite region. In: Handbook of Yosemite
National Park (Ansel P. Hall, ed.), pp. 3-47, illus. New
York, Putnam.

Lang, Herbert 0.

1882 History of Tuolumne County, California; compiled from the
most authentic records. San Francisco, Alley.

Laut , Agnes C.

1909 The fight for water in the west. Colliers, 44:15-16, 36,

38 (Nov. 20) , illus.

Third article in a series on conservation of our natural
resources, including the Hetch Hetchy water supply.

Lawrence, James H.

1884 Discovery of the Nevada Fall. Overland, 2d ser. , 4:13
(Oct.).

118

HISTORY

LeConte, Joseph [1823-1901]

1903 The autobiography of Joseph LeConte, edited by William
Dallam Armes. [Berkeley ed«], New York, Appleton, 337
pp., illus.

LeConte, Joseph [Nisbet]

1918 Record of early exploration of Tenaya Canon. Sierra Club,
Bui., 10:[276]-81 (Jan.), illus.

[LeConte Memorial Lodge Committee]

1909 Report of the LeConte Memorial Lodge Committee. Sierra

Club, Bui., 7:59-61 (Jan.).

Record of completed and planned improvements; tourist
registration; library additions and donations.

Leonard, Zenas

1904 |..Yosemite Valley.] In: Adventures of Zenas Leonard, fur
trader and trapper, 1831-1836, pp. 174-76. Cleveland,
Burrows .

Contains note on Leonard's passage through the Yoseinite
region with the James Walker Party, discoverers of the valley.
(First (?) edition was published in Cleardale, Pa., 1839.)

Lester, John S.

1873 The Yosemite; its history, its scenery, its development.
Providence, {R.I.] the author, 40 pp.

Lewis, Washington 8.

1930 Yosemite timber lands saved. Am. civic arm. (1930), 2:

7-9.

History of Federal control in Yosemite, and outline of the
struggle to save the timber from private lumbering interests.

Lockwood, John A.

1899 Uncle Sam's troopers in the national parks of California.

Overland mo . , 2d ser. , 33:356-68, illus., map.

Activities and duties of cavalrymen in Yosemite, Sequoia,
and General Grant national parks. Map of proposed extension of
Sequoia Park.

[MacKerizie, George G.]

1891 California's interest in Yosemite reform. Century mag.,

43:154-55 (Nov.).

Protest against mismanagement by the commissioners.

[Manson, Marsden, comp.]

1907 Efforts to obtain a water supply for San Francisco from

Tuolumne Kiver. San Francisco, Britton and Key [134 pp.],

map.

119

YOSEMITS NATIONAL PARK

Collection of documents concerning the Hetch Hetchy con
troversy, containing information on the territory involved; details
of the reservoir projects; and legal, political, and economic
aspects of the case. Mr. Manson represented the San Francisco
Board of Supervisors in the Hetch Hetchy matter.

Mather, Stephen T.

1917 The new Yosemite. Calif, forestry, 1:38-39 (no.5) , illus.
Yo Semite National Park has been chosen as a testing ground
for theories of national park development.

Merriam, C. Hart

1917 To the memory of John Muir. Sierra Club, Bui., 10:[l46]-

51 ( Jan . ) .

Personal memories of John Muir, with special reference to
his wanderings in Yosemite.

1923 Earliest crossing of the deserts of Utah and Nevada to
southern California. .. .Route of Jedediah S. Smith in 1826.
Calif. Hist. Soc. , Q,uart., 2:228-36 (Oct.), map.

"Smith was... the first white man known to have crossed the
Sierra Nevada. His exploits did not take him into the limits of
the present Yosemite Park, but... his expedition provides the open
ing story in any account of Yosemite affairs."

Miller, Guy C.

1910 A pioneer of the Yosemite. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 55:

[390]-94 (Ap.).

Sketch of life of James C. Lamon, early settler in Yosemite.

Mo ran, Ruth B.

1924 Thomas Moran, N.A. Mentor, 12:30-52 (Aug.), illus.
Events in the life of the artist who pioneered in making

America national-park-conscious.

Moran, Thomas, illus. See: Murphy, Thomas D. , 1912, 1925 in Gener
al Geography, etc.

Mui r , John

1907 The Tuolumne Yosemite in danger. Outlook, 87:486-89 (Nov.2).

History of Tuolumne Valley and plea to prevent its com
mercialization by San Francisco.

1909 The endangered valley: the Hetch Hetchy Valley in the Yo
semite National Park. Century, 77:464-69 (Jan.), illus.
Reprinted in Scribner's mag,, Nov., 1909, and Sierra Club

bul., Jan., 1916.

1910 The Hetch-Hetchy Valley. A national question. Am.
forestry, 16:263-69 (May), illus.

120

HISTORY

1910 Galen Clark. Sierra Club, Bui., 7: [215] -20 (June), illus.
Notes on the mountaineer, geologist, and botanist, who was
also official Guardian of Yosemite.

1915 Letters to a friend. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 194 pp.

Letters written to Mrs. Ezra S. Carr, mostly from Yosemite
Valley; abundant material on author's first visit and early resi
dence there.

Neuman, Maurice

1893 Parks and reservations. Californian illus. mag., 4:802-08

(Nov.), illus., map.

Questions the Government's right to 4,573,000 acres of re
served land in and around Yosemite Valley.

Nichols, Grace

1934 Pioneer shrines in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 13:22-

24 (Mar.); 29-32 (Ap.); 37-40 (May), illus.

Notes on John Muir, Galen Clark, Joseph LeConte, J. M.
Hutchings, and other pioneers of the Yosemite region.

Olmsted, Frederick L.

1914 The San Francisco water supply controversy as the foremost

landscape authority sees it. Sierra Club, Bui., 9:192-99

( Jan . ) .

Arguments pro and con.

O'Meara, James

1882 A white medicine man. Californian illus. mag., 5:150-57

(Feb.).

Notes on Major James D. Savage, discoverer of Yosemite,
whose feats with a galvanic battery amazed the Mariposa Indians.

O'Shanghnessy, Michael M.

1934 Hetch Hetchy; its origin and history. San Francisco,
Recorder print co., 133 pp., illus.

Perry, H.E.

1930 Museum guests recall history of Yosemite. Yosemite nat.

notes, 9:3-5 (Jan.).

Notes on Galen Clark and early visitors to Yosemite.

[Pratt, Julius H.]

1890 The date of the discovery of the Yosemite. Century mag.,

41:193 (Dec.) .

Questions generally accepted date (March 5, 1851).

121

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Rensch, H.E. , and Rensch, Ethel G.

1932 Mono County. In: Historic spots in California [vol. I]: The
southern counties, pp. 93-106, bibliog. Palo Alto, Calif.,
Stanford Univ. press.

Mono Trail, across Yosemite National Park, was blazed in
1852, during a gold rush in the Mono region.

1933 Mariposa County. In: Historic spots in California [vol.il]:
Valley and sierra counties, pp. 168-82, bibliog. Palo Alto,
Calif., Stanford Univ. press.

Yosemite Valley lies principally in this county.
Note: Both of the above volumes were sponsored by the Cali
fornia State Conference of the D.A.R. Paged separately.

Rhoda, Jean

1913 Uncle Sam in the Yosemite. Overland mo., 2d ser. , 61:

[59Q]-94, illus.

Duties of U.S. Cavalry troops formerly stationed in Yosemite
from May to November.

Russell, Carl P.

1925 When Chinese Camp was booming. Yosemite nat. notes, 4:28-

30 (Ap.) , illus.

Comparison between primitive and modern mining methods, and
description of equipment used in the fifties.

1925 Yosemite fs discoverers immortalized. Yosemite nat. notes,
4:43-45 (June), illus.

Notes on the exploits, the Yosemite discovery party, the
conflicts with the Indians, and the treaties made with the various
tribes. Portraits of Capt. John Boiling, Dr. James H. Parkinson,
and Supt. W. B. Lev/is.

1926 Early years in Yosemite. Calif. Hist. Soc. , Quart., 5:328-
41 (Dec.), illus., map.

From the Walker Expedition, in 1833, to about 1875 (the
Mariposa Indian war), and subsequent activities leading to the settle
ment of Yosemite.

1926 Historic drawings. Yosemite nat. notes, 5:68-69 (Sept.),

illus.

The original sketches Thomas Ayres made while exploring Yo
semite Valley with J. M. Hutcnings are in the Yosemite Museum.

1926 Seventy-five years in the famous valley. Yosemite nat.
not es , 5 : 41-47 ( June ) , map .
Historical notes on the park region, 1806-1926.

1928 Early mining excitements east of Yosemite. Sierra Club,

122

HISTORY

Bui., 13:40-53 (Feb.?), illus. , map.

Rise and decline of Bodie, Tioga, Mammoth City, and Lundy,
in the Mono Lake region.

1928 Gifts to the Yosemite Museum. Yosemite nat. notes, 7:23

(Mar. ) , illus.

"Yosemite Indian Life," painted in 1878 by Lady Constance
F. Gordon-Gumming, was recently presented to the Yosemite Museum.

1928 Marking historic spots. Yosemite nature notes, 7:30 (Ap.).

1928 Reminiscences of the Bodie strike. Yosemite nat. notes,
7:33-38 (May).

"An unvarnished account 'of the events which led up to the
Bodie gold boom" in Mono County, 1875-77.

1929 The Bodie stage; an old manuscript. Yosemite nat. notes,
8:1-3 (Jan.) , illus.

A manuscript outlining stage coach system once serving
California, was found at Bodie, ghost town near Yosemite.

1929 History of human events in Yosemite. Yosemite ranger-
nat. man., 2d ed. , 2:1-34, bibliog. Yosemite Natl.
Park. (Mimeographed. )

1929 History of the Mariposa Grove. Yosemite nat. notes, 8:
50-52 (Ap.) , illus.

1931 One hundred years in Yosemite; the romantic story of early
human affairs in the central Sierra Nevada. Falo Alto,
Calif., Stanford Univ. press, 242 pp., illus., bibliog.
Compiled largely from documents in the Yosemite Museum.

1933 About national parks in California. Calif. School Lib.

Assn. (No. sec.), Bui,, 5:1-4 (nc.2), bibliog.

An historical account of Sequoia, General Grant, Lassen,
and Yosemite national parks.

San Francisco. Board of Supervisors

1913 The Hetch Hetchy grant; a brief of the City and County of
San Francisco and other Bay counties before the Senate
Public Lands Committee, 63d U.S. Congress, 1st session.
San Francisco, Barry, 32 pp.

Shinn, Charles H.

c!884 Mining camps; a study in American frontier government.

New York, Scribner's, 316 pp., bibliog.

Includes among Calif ornian camps some near Yosemite, So-
nora, and Tuolumne County. This edition issued in 1885.

123

YOSMITS NATIONAL PARK

Sierra Club

1896 Proceedings of the meeting of the Sierra Club held November

23, 1895. Sierra Club, Bui., 1:268-86 (Jan.).

Address by John Muir; outline of history of Yosemite National
Park; and note on efficiency of Federal custodianship.

1916 Reports of committees. Sierra Club, Bui., 10:[82]-85 (Jan.),

illus.

The Sierra Club's 1915 outing in Yosemite; official opening
of LeConte Memorial Lodge; construction of Parson's Memorial Lodge.

[Sierra Club. Board of Directors]

1905 Action' of the Sierra Club on the proposed change of bounda
ries of the Yosemite National Park. Sierra Club, Bui., 5:
250-53 (Jan.).

1905 Statement concerning the proposed recession of Yosemite
Valley and Mariposa Big Tree Grove to the United States.
Sierra Club, Bui., 5:232-50 (Jan.).

[Smith, Grant H.]

1925 Bodie, the last of the old-time mining camps. Calif. Hist.

Soc . , r4uart . , 4:64-00 (Mar . ) , i llus .

History of mining camp near Yosemite from settlement (1859)
to desertion (1907).

1929 More notes on Tioga mining history. A visit to Tioga Mine.
Yosemite nat . notes, 8:25-27 (Mar.).

Solomons, Theodore E.

1936 The Muir of the nineties. Yosemite nat. notes, 15:33-36

(May) , illus.

By one who associated with Muir in the Sierra Club.

Soule, Frank

1902 Joseph LeConte in the Sierra. Sierra Club, Bui., 4:1-11

(Jan.), illus. (port.)

Recollections by one who accompanied LeConte on his first
and last visits to Yosemite, where he died.

Stellman, Louis J.

1918 Interesting westerners. Sunset, 41:46 (Oct.), illus.
Herbert E. Wilson, "the firefall man" of Yosemite.

Strother, French

1909 San Francisco against the nation for the Yosemite. World's

work, 17:11441-46 (Ap. ) , illus., map.

Discussion of the Hetch Hetchy water rights problem, with
descriptive notes on the region.

124

HISTORY

Taylor, Mrs. H.J.

1927 Some John Muir reminiscences. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:69-

70 (Sept.) .

Some amusing and revealing anecdotes of the youthful Muir,
by one who knew and admired him.

1930 Construction of Court ervi lie Road recalled by V. Bruschi.
Yo Semite nat. notes, 9:73-74 (Aug.).

1930 The life of Albert Bierstadt. Yosemite nat. notes, 9:81-
82 (Sept.) , illus.

One of the first painters to portray the Sierra Nevada and
the Rockies. His canvas, "Locking up Yosemite Valley," is now in
the Yosemite Museum.

1932 The cemetery in Yosemite Valley. Yosemite nat. notes, 11
1-4 (Dec.) , illus.
Notes on early settlers buried in Yosemite.

1931 Ketch Hetchy water flows into San Francisco. Yosemite
nat. notes, 13:89-91 (Dec.).

Resume of 30 years of controversjr over Hetch Hetchy.

Taylor, Ray W.

1926 Hetch Hetchy.... San Francisco, Orozco, 199 pp., illus.,

maps.

Relates story of the Hetch Hetchy project and the part
played by San Francisco's Spring Valley Water Company.

[Thayer, James B.]

1884 [Ralph Waldo Emerson in Yosemite Valley.] In: A western

journey with Mr. iinerson, pp. 68-110. Boston, Little,

Brown.

Thomson, Charles G.

1932 He loved Yocemite. Yosemite nat. notes, 11:4-5 (July).
Notes on Stephen T. Mather.

Tinkham, George H.

1915 (.Discovery of Yosemite Valley.] In: California men and

events, pp. 108-110. Stockton (Calif.) Record, pub. co.

Account of discovery of Yosemite Valley by the Mariposa
Battalion while it was pursuing Yosemite Indians.

Tolson, HilloryA., comp.

1933 Laws relating to the National Park Service, the national
parks and monuments. U.S. Dept . Int., Natl. Park Serv. ,
318 pp. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Includes both Federal and State legislation relative to

12J

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PASK

Yosemite National Park. A niulti graphed (?) supplement (pp.319-4Q2)
covers legislation up to July 1, 1936.

U.S. Department of the Interior

1908 Decision of the secretary of the Interior [on Lake Eleanor

and Hetch Hetchy Valley reservoir sites]. Sierra Club,

Bui., 6:321-29 (Jan.).

1914 Hetch Hetchy Valley, Yosemite National Park. In: U.S. Dept.
Int., Ann. rept. (1913), 1:90-93. Washington, Govt. print. off.
Discussion of the permit granted to San Francisco in 1908

relative to Yosemite National Park lands.

1920 California cedes jurisdiction. In: U.S. Dept. Int., Ann.

rept. (1920), 1:75-76. Washington, Govt. print, off.

Yosemite, Sequoia, and General Grant national parks were
affected by this legislation.

Van Name, Willard G.

1924 The Yosemite National Park; how its boundaries have been

trimmed and its forests logged off.... New Haven, Conn.,

the author, 7 pp. , map.

[Bound with: Sequoia National Park, by the same author.]

Vilas, Martin S.

1915 Water and power for Hetch Hetchy Valley in Yosemite National
Park. Burlington [Vt.?] Free Press print, assn. , 27 pp.,
ports. , maps.

Wade, J.S.

1930 Vignettes of Henry Edwards and John Muir. Sci. mo., 30:

240-50 (Mar.).

Muir's interest in Yosemite revealed in notes on his friend
ship with Edwards.

Wegner, J.H. «,

1930 Evidence of an old Indian trail located. Yosemite nat.
notes, 9:67 (July).

Woods, Daniel B.

1851 Southern mines [Mariposa and Tuolumne counties]. In: Sixteen

months at the gold diggings, pp. 77-166. New York, Harper.

Describes the author's mining activities near Yosemite.

Wyatt, Edith

1915 John Muir. New repub., 2:69-71 (Feb. 20).

Refers to Muir's sheep-herding experience of 1869, described
in his book, My first summer in the Sierra. (New York, Houghton
Mifflin, 1911.)

126

HISTORY

Yard, Robert Sterling

1916 Director of the nation's playgrounds. Sunset, 37:27 (Sept.)»

illus.

Biographical note on Stephen T. Mather, who first enlisted
private capital in Yosemite's hotel and transportation services.

1934 The unforgotten story of Hetch Hetchy. AOL. forests, 40:
567-69 (Dec.) , illus.

Young, John P.

1909 The Hetch-Hetchy problem. Sunset, 22:599-606 (June) , illus.

127

YOS2MITE NATIONAL PARK

INDIANS

1873 Yosemite. Overland mo ., 10:330-32 (Ap.).

Discusses names of localities in the valley, Indian vil
lages and their population.

19£4 The A. J. Brown collection donated to Yosemite Museum.
Yosemite nat. notes, 3:3-4 (May 31).
Notes on a collection of 622 Indian artifacts.

1924 A unique food from Mono. Yosemite nat. notes, 3:2-4

(Nov. 30).

Ka-cha-vee, or Mono Lake worms, opened the trade between
the Yosemite and the Mono Indians.

1931 Manzanita cinder. Nature mag., 18:324 (Nov.).

Bancroft, Hubert H.

1875 Physical myths. In: The native races of the Pacific states,

vol.3, pp.[l08]-l£6. New York, Appleton.

Legends concerning the rock, Totokonula, at the entrance to
Yosemite Valley; Tisayac Dome, and Pohono Fall are included.

Barrett , Samuel A.

1908 The geography and dialects of the Miwok Indians. Univ.

Calif., Pubs, in Am. archeol. and ethnol., 6:[333]-68, map.

Bound with Alfred Kroeber's ...Evidences of occupation of
certain regions by the Miwok. . . , which comprises pages 369-80 of
the same volume.

1908 Totemism among the Miwok Indians. Jour. Am. folklore,
21:237 (Jan. -Mar.).

1919 Myths of the southern Sierra Miwok. Uriiv. Calif., Pubs,
in Am. archeol. and ethnol., 16:[l]-28.
Contains some myths of the Yosemite Mi woks.

Barrett, Samuel A., and Gifford, Edward W.

1933 Miwok material culture. Milwaukee Pub. Mus., Bui., 2:117-

376 (Mar. 17), illus., bibliog. , maps.

Description of these Sierra Nevada and Yosemite Indians,
and history of their numerical and cultural decline.

Beatty, M.E.

1933 Last Indian cremation in Yosemite [1873]. Yosemite nat.
notes, 12:89-90 (Sept.), illus.

1933 More Indian caves discovered [1932]. Yosemite nat. notes,
12:7-8 (Jan.).

128

INDIANS

Bromley, Isaac H.

1872 The Bonders of the west. No.l: The Big trees end the Yo-
Somite. Scribner's mo., 3:261-77 (Jan,), illus.

Brubaker, Florence

1926 P?.a;itc used by Yosemite Indians. Yosemite nat . notes,
5:'73--79 (Oct.), illus., bibliog.

Bunnell, Lafayette H.

1911 Discovery of the Yosemite and the Indian war of 1850

which led to that event. 4th ed. , Los Angeles, G-er-

lacher, 355 pp., illus., map.

Clark, Galen

1904 Indians of the Yosemite Valley and vicinity; their history,

customs, and traditions. Yosemite Valley, Calif., the

author, 110 pp., illus.

Illustrated with reproductions of paintings by Chris Jor-
gensen and photographs. Introduction and sketch of the author by
W. W. Foote.

Crowe, George C.

1931 The last member of Chief Tenayars band passes away. To-
semite nat. notes, 10:57-60 (July), illus.

Account of the death of Maria Leorado; with excerpts from
Mrs. H. J. Taylor's book, The return of the last survivor. (See pJ34*)

Douglass, Irwin B.

1936 Ancient campsites. Yosemite nat. notes, 15:22-23 (Mar.).

Edwards , Ira

1932 A visit to Yosemite Valley and the high Sierras. Mil
waukee Pub. Mus., Yr. bk. (1930), 10:106-33, illus.
Brief history of Yosemite Indians with general descrip
tion of scenery in the valley. Good illustrations.

G-allison, Dorothy

1937 Common foods of the early Yosemite Indians. Yosemite
nat. notes, 16:42-43 (June), illus.

Gay ton, Anna H.

1929 Yokuts and Western Mono pottery -making. Univ. Calif.,

Pubs, in Am. archeol. and ethnol., 24:239-52, illus., map.

Pottery of the Indians in the general region of Yosemite.

Gifford, Edward W.

1916 J/tlwok moieties. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in Am. archeol. and

ethnol., 12:139-94 (June).

History, social customs, ceremonies, and nomenclature of
some Indians in the Yosemite region.

129

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Gifford, Edward W. , continued

1917 Mi wok myths. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in Am. archeol. and
ethnol. , 12:283-338, illus.

1922 Miwok cults. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in Am. archeol. and
ethnol., 18:391-408.

1923 Western Mono myths. Jour. Am. folklore, 36:301-67.
Study of myths and tales of tribes in the Yosemite and

Sequoia national park regions.

Gifford, Edward W. , joint author. See: Barrett, Samuel A., and
Gifford, Edward W. , 1933.

[Gordon -Gumming, Constance F.]

1883 Wild tribes of the Sierras. Natl. rev., 2:412-21 (Nov.).
Notes on Indians, scenery, and Big trees of the high Sierra,

Harwell, C.A.

1933 Building an Indian (Jhuck-a. Yosemite nat. notes, 12:14-

16 (Feb.).

Describes construction of a granary for acorn storage
which is proof against weather and marauding animals.

Holmes, William H.

1902 Anthropological studies in California. U.S. Natl. Mas.,

Rept., 1900, pp. 155-87, illus.

Report of studies made under auspices of the Bureau of
American Ethnology, 1898. Contains material on artifacts and
basketry of region in Tuolumne County west of Yosemite Park.

Johnston, Robert L.

1937 An Indian village site near the Mariposa Grove. Yosemite
nat. notes, 16:6 (Jan.).

Jorgensen, Chris, illus. See: Clark, Galen

Judson, Katharine B. , ed.

1933 Myths and legends of California and the old Southwest.

Chicago, McClurg, 193 pp., illus.

Includes Yosemite Indian names and legends.

Kroeber, Alfred L.

1907 Indian myths of south-central California. Univ. Calif. ,

Pubs, in Am. archeol. and ethnol,, 4:169-250.

Mythology of the Costanoan, Miwok, Yokuts, and Shoshonean
tribes formerly occupying areas in or near Yosemite and Sequoia
national parks, and Lluir Woods and Joshua Tree national monuments.

130

INDIANS

1907 The religion of the Indians of California. Univ. Calif.,
Pubs, in Am. archeol. and ethnol. , 4: [319] -56.

Includes material on the Miwoks , Monos , and Yokuts , all
of the Yo Semite region.

1908 On the evidences of the occupation of certain regions by
the Mi wok Indians. Univ. Calif,, Pubs, in Am. archeol.
and ethnol., 6:369-80.

Bound with E. W. Barrett's The geography and dialects of
the Miwok Indians, which comprises pages 333-80 of the same volume,
Kroeber refers to the Miwoks around Stockton and in southern Mar in
County, California;

1911 The languages of the coast of California north of San
Francisco. Univ. Calif., Pubs, in Am. archeol. and
ethnol., 9:273-436, map.
Analysis of Indian dialects, including Miwok, once spoken

in the Yosemite region.

1916 California place names of Indian origin. Univ. Calif. ,
Pubs, in Am. archeol. and ethnol., 12:31-70 (June 15).

1921 Indians of Yosemite. In: Handbook of Yosemite National
Park (Ansel F. Hall, ed.), pp. 49-73, illus., bibliog.
New York, Putnam.

Lea, Frank T.

1914 Indian [acorn] bread-makers in Yosemite. Overland mo.,
2d ser., 64:[24-26] (July), illus.

Manning, Samuel

1877? American pictures drawn with pen and pencil. London,

Religious Tract Soc., 224 pp., illus.

Contains list of Indian names of mountains and waterfalls
in Yosemite and Yellowstone regions, with English translations.

Merriam, C. Hart

1910 The dr.wn of the world; myths and weird tales told by the

Mewan Indians of California. Cleveland, Clark, 273 pp.

map, illus., bibliog.

The Mewan Indians once occupied the Yosemite region.

1917 Indian village and camp sites in Yosemite Valley. Si
erra Club, Bui., 10:[202]-09 (Jan.).

Michael, Enid

1935 Indian rings? Yosemite nat . notes, 14:68 (Aug.).
Circular granite slabs on Turtle Back Dome.

131

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Miller, J.M.

1987 "Peagie" trenches in which the Monos trapped their suppers.
Yosemite rat. notes, 6:6-7 (Jan.), illus.

Larvae of the pandora moth were used as food.

Miller, John, and Hut chins on, Wallace

1988 Where pe-ag'-gie manna falls; how the Pir.te Indians lessen
danger of pandora epidemics. Nature mag.. 18:158-60 (SeTrj.
illus .

Noble, W.B.

1904 A day with the Mono Indians. Out West, 20:413-81 (May),

illus.

Customs and condition of the Indians east of Yosemita Valley
who traded with the Yosemite Indians.

[Powers, Stephen]

1878 The northern California Indians. Overland mo., 8:325-33

(Ap.); 8:425-35 (May); 8:530-39 (June).

Includes information on the Yuroks.

1873 The California Indians. Overland mo. , 10:322-33.

Prior to 1849 the dominion of the "Meewocs" extended 150
miles between the Sierra Nevada and the San Joaquin, Awanee , in Yo
semite, being an important village.

1877 Tribes of California. U.S. geog. and geol. surv. of Rocky
Mountain region, Contribs. to No. Am. ethnol. , vol. 3, 635
pp. , illus. , map.
Contains material on Yosemite Indians; Miwoks and Yokuts,

pp. 346-392.

Presnall, Clifford C.

1930 Indian picture writing in Yosemite. Yosemite nat. nctes,
9:94 (Oct.).

1930 Indian rancher ias found. Yoseiuitr nat. notes, 9:33-35
(May) , illus. , map.

1930 Unusual reck basins in Yosemite. Yose.uite nat. notes, 9:
107-08 (Dec.) .

Indian mortar holes.

1931 Yosemite Indians revive old custoros . Yosemite nat. notes,
10:84-85 (Oct.).

Robinson, K.E.

1896 The lost arrow; a legend of Yosemite. Overland mo., 2d
ser., 28:187-98 (Aug.), illus.

132

INDIANS

Russell, Carl P.

1925 Interesting Indian artifacts come to light. Yosemite
nat. notes, 4:62 (July).

1926 Primitive Yo Semite dwellings. Yosemite nat. notes, 5:6
(Jan. ) , illus.

1927 Indian mortar rocks. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:38 (May).

1927 Indians grazed on herbage. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:42
(June) , bibliog.
A list of the green plants eaten.

1927 A plant of many uses. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:35 (May),

illus.

Description of the soap root (pa-la-we) , and the uses the
Indians made of it.

1927 Unique food of Monos. Yosemite nat. notes, 6:23-24 (Mar.),
illus.

1928 A last link with the past. Yosemite nat. notes, 7:41-46
(June) , illus.

Describes the events that took place during the final
roundup of the Yosemite Indians, and an interview with Maria
Lebrado, the last member of the tribe, who witnessed the roundup
Portrait of Maria.

1929 Indians of Yosemite national Park. Yosemite ranger-nat.
man., 2d ed. , 2:35-52, bibliog. Yosemite Natl. Park.
(Mimeographed. )

1929 Last of Yosemite Indians [Maria Lebrado] , visits valley
after a 75-year absence. Yosemite nat. notes, 8:69-70
(July).
\

Shinn, Charles H.

1918 Indian life in Sierra forests. Overland mo., 2d Ser. ,
72:[387]-90 (Nov.), illus.

Shoup, Paul

1900 The legend of the valley beautiful. Sunset, 5:181-89 (Aug.),

illus.

How "Totockanula, M great chief of the valleys, created Yo
semite. ,

Smith, Bertha H.

c!904 Yosemite legends. San Francisco, Paul Elder, 64 pp., illus.
Illustrated with 13 drawings in black and green by Florence
Lundborg.

133

YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

Stewart, George W,

1906 A Yokuts creation myth. Jour. Am. folklore, 19:322 (Oct,~Dec.),

Taber, Cornelia

1911 California and her Indian children. San Jose, No. Calif.

Indian Assn., 74 pp., map, illus.

Contains material on history, art, religion, and ceremonies
of the Yosemite Indians.

Taylor, Mrs. H.J.

1932 The last survivor. San Francisco, Johnck and Seeger, 20pp.,

illus.

Return to Yosemite and death of Maria Lebrado, last of the
Yosemite Indians. Published also in Univ. of Calif. Chronicle, vol.
33, no.l, and vol. 34, no.l.

1936 Yosemite Indians, and other sketches. San Francisco,
Johnck and Seeger, 103 pp. , illus. , ports.

Townsend, George E.

1903 Indian mythology of the Yosemite. Overland mo., 2d ser. ,

41:454-59 (June), illus.

Contains legends concerning Bridalveil Fall, Pond Lily
Lakes, Half Dome, and Mirror Lake.

Tripp, Stephen

1934 Rare picture writing found in Yosemite. Yosemite nat.
notes, 13:26-27 (Ap.).

Vivian, C.A.

1901 Yosemite legends. Overland mo., 2d serv. , 37:1068-75 (June),
illus.

Wilson, Herbert E.

1923? The lore and lure of Yosemite. San Francisco, Sunset, 132

pp., illus.

Myths, legends, and customs of the Yosemite Indians; de
scription of the valley and the Big trees. Published also (d922)
by Robertson, San Francisco.

134

Prepared At the Western Museum Labor
the Rational Park Service with assistance pi
the Work. Projects Administration — Offici
>J >. r65'?'o8-2SM. and Civilian Conservatic